JEPPESEN AIRWAY MANUAL — GENERAL Issue Date 10 FEB 12 Content covered in the E-AWM General coverage is: BULLETINS INTRODUCTION NAVDATA ENROUTE RADIO AIDS METEOROLOGY TABLES AND CODES AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL EMERGENCY AIRPORT DIRECTORY IMPORTANT NOTICE REGARDING JEPPESEN'S WARRANTY AND COPYRIGHT This flight information has been developed to meet the need for a publication providing current information in the condensed form required for modern air navigation under instrument and visual flight conditions. Information contained in the copyrighted charts is independently available from publications of the appropriate governing authority. It is designated for use by experienced, instrument rated pilots who must be thoroughly familiar and competent with the instrument navigation of aircraft. Instrument procedures are designed, flight tested, approved, authorized and prescribed by applicable governing authorities. In the United States, these flight procedures are incorporated into FAR Part 97 as regulations. Jeppesen does not design or flightcheck any of these procedures, and Jeppesen has no authority to alter, modify, add to, or subtract from any flight procedure prescribed by a governing authority. Further, Jeppesen does not review or approve the adequacy, reliability, accuracy, safety or conformance with government standards of any government flight procedure, and it specifically has undertaken no such duty. Jeppesens flight procedure charts simply depict in a graphic form convenient for the use of knowledgeable, instrument rated pilots, the flight procedures exactly as designed, flight tested and prescribed by government authorities. In addition, this Flight Information, including all subsequent revisions, contains a wide variety of information useful to pilots which Jeppesen has obtained from outside sources. Jeppesen has edited this source material, and has arranged and published it in a convenient, easy-to-use format. Jeppesen believes that this Flight Information, and all subsequent revisions, accurately communicates the information obtained from this source material. EXPRESS WARRANTY Jeppesen expressly warrants that it has accurately graphically depicted the flight procedures prescribed by applicable government authorities, and that it has accurately communicated the information obtained from other sources which is depicted on its maps and charts or otherwise contained in this publication. This express warranty is the only warranty express or implied, made by Jeppesen concerning this Flight Information and the contents thereof. Jeppesens total liability for any claim for breach of this express warranty shall be limited to general money damages, not to exceed the total amount paid to Jeppesen by the Air Carrier in the three months immediately preceding the date that the claim arose, for flight information services. ITEMS NOT COVERED BY WARRANTY HOWEVER, JEPPESEN MAKES NO EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY, AND DISCLAIMS ANY LIABILITY WITH RESPECT TO THE DESIGN, ADEQUACY, ACCURACY, RELIABILITY, SAFETY, OR CONFORMANCE WITH GOVERNMENT STANDARDS OR REGULATIONS, OF ANY FLIGHT PROCEDURE PRESCRIBED BY A GOVERNMENT AUTHORITY, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. FURTHER, JEPPESEN MAKES NO WARRANTY, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WITH RESPECT TO THE ADEQUACY, ACCURACY, RELIABILITY, SAFETY, OR CONFORMANCE WITH GOVERNMENT STANDARDS OR REGULATIONS, OF ANY INFORMATION DEPICTED ON ITS CHARTS OR MAPS, OR OTHERWISE CONTAINED IN THIS PUBLICATION, WHICH JEPPESEN OBTAINED FROM SOURCE MATERIAL CREATED, DESIGNED OR PUBLISHED BY OTHERS. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES WILL JEPPESEN BE LIABLE FOR DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR OTHER DAMAGES FROM ALLEGED NEGLIGENCE, BREACH OF WARRANTY, STRICT LIABILITY OR ANY OTHER THEORY, ARISING OUT OF ANY CLAIM THAT ANY FLIGHT PROCEDURE OR OTHER OUTSIDE SOURCE MATERIAL IS DEFECTIVE, INADEQUATE, INACCURATE, UNRELIABLE, UNSAFE OR FAILS TO CONFORM WITH ANY GOVERNMENT STANDARD OR REGULATION. COPYRIGHT The copyright notices appearing in this publication protect the charts, compilations of charts and data, and other copyrightable works embodied herein. Such protected works may not be copied, reproduced, extracted, input, encoded, stored in a retrieval system, retransmitted in whole or in part, in any form or by any means, whether electrical, mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise, without the prior written permission of Jeppesen. The copyright notice appearing on the back of the Record of Revisions sheet protects this publication as a whole. This publication, and subsequent revisions thereof, is purchased and/or used with these understandings. Jeppesen Sanderson, Inc. Address: 55 Inverness Drive East Englewood, CO 80112–5498 (303) 799–9090 United States TLD FRA 2011, 2012 TABLE OF CONTENTS 3 PREFACE BRIEFING BULLETINS Are Aeronautical Charts Required When Using Navigational Databases? .............................................. 8 ARE AERONAUTICAL CHARTS REQUIRED WHEN USING NAVIGATIONAL DATABASES? ............. 10 NEW NON-PRECISION INSTRUMENT APPROACH PROCEDURE CONSTANT ANGLE DESCENT PROFILE DEPICTION (AUSTRALIA) ........................................................................................... 12 REQUIRED NAVIGATION PERFORMANCE (RNP): FAA INTRODUCES THE FIRST “PUBLIC” RNAV (RNP) APPROACH PROCEDURE AT RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT (DCA) ............................................................................................................................................ 14 NICOSIA FIR/UIR IATA COMMUNICATIONS / CONTROL PROCEDURES ......................................... 17 JAPAN MAJOR AERODROME OPERATING MINIMUMS (AOM) CHANGES AND NON-PRECISION INSTRUMENT APPROACH PROCEDURE CONSTANT ANGLE DESCENT PROFILE DEPICTION 19 RNAV 1 EQUIPMENT NOTES ON U.S. RNAV STAR AND SID PROCEDURES AND RNAV OPERATIONS ON RNAV Q AND T ROUTES ....................................................................................................... 21 CHANGE OF ALTITUDE DEPICTION ON SID/STAR CHARTS FOR AIRPORTS IN THE UNITED KINGDOM ..................................................................................................................................... 23 Multiple Approach Procedure Indicators ................................................................................................ 25 United States Lower than Standard Take-Off Minimums – Changes to Jeppesen Charts ..................... 27 AERODROME OPERATING MINIMUMS ACCORDING TO EU-OPS 1 ................................................ 29 Application of State NOTAMs to Jeppesen Aeronautical Charts and Database .................................... 31 INTRODUCTION OF PROCEDURE AMENDMENT REFERENCE DATE (U.S. FAA APPROACH CHARTS) ....................................................................................................................................... 32 SOUTH CHINA SEA RVSM FLIGHT LEVEL ALLOCATIONS ............................................................... 34 AIRLINE CHART ENHANCEMENT ....................................................................................................... 36 Enroute/Area Charts – Navaid Symbology ............................................................................................ 38 Far East High/Low Altitude Enroute Series Improvement ...................................................................... 40 CHAPTER INTRODUCTION DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS Airport Qualification/Familiarization ....................................................................................................... Jeppesen Airway Manual versus EU-OPS 1 Requirements ................................................................... Glossary ................................................................................................................................................. Abbreviations Used in Airway Manual .................................................................................................... 46 47 49 75 ENROUTE CHART LEGEND INFORMATION Enroute Chart Legend - General ............................................................................................................ 89 Enroute Chart Legend – Chart and Terrain .......................................................................................... 108 AIRSPACE CHART LEGEND INFORMATION Class B Airspace Chart Legend ........................................................................................................... 111 APPROACH AND DEPARTURE CHART LEGEND INFORMATION SID/DP and STAR Legend ................................................................................................................... Approach Chart Legend - Lighting Systems ........................................................................................ Approach Chart Legend Take-Off and Alternate Minimums (continued) .............................................. Approach Chart Legend - VOR DME RNAV ........................................................................................ Charted Visual Flight Procedures (CVFP) ........................................................................................... Approach Chart Legend - GPS ............................................................................................................ Approach Chart Legend – Briefing Strip Concept ................................................................................ SID / DP & STAR Chart Legend - New Format 2002 ........................................................................... Approach Chart Legend — EU-OPS 1 Aerodrome Operating Minimums (AOM) ................................ 114 121 130 131 133 134 136 145 148 CHART FORMAT DESCRIPTION INFORMATION Approach Chart Legend ....................................................................................................................... 156 Approach Chart Legend Airline Format ............................................................................................... 185 SIGNS AND MARKINGS INFORMATION ICAO Recommended Airport Signs, Runway and Taxiway Markings .................................................. 190 CHART CHANGE NOTICES NAVDATA CHANGE DATA Aeronautical Information Compatibility ................................................................................................. 201 NavData Identifiers on Jeppesen Charts ............................................................................................. 203 NavData Name Conventions ................................................................................................................ 204 4 TABLE OF CONTENTS NavData Change Notices Service ........................................................................................................ 210 NAVDATA CHANGE NOTICES ............................................................................................................ 211 ENROUTE ENROUTE DATA - GENERAL ARINC Services and Communications ................................................................................................ ARINC Services ................................................................................................................................... Stockholm Radio .................................................................................................................................. Oceanic Long-Range Navigation Information ...................................................................................... Designators of ATS Routes and Its Use in Voice Communications ...................................................... Company Operational Control .............................................................................................................. 216 217 225 227 229 230 RADIO AIDS RADIO DATA - GENERAL General Information ............................................................................................................................. SECTION 1. NAVIGATION AIDS ......................................................................................................... Section 2. Area Navigation (RNAV)/Required Navigation Performance (RNP) .................................... Section 5. Surveillance Systems .......................................................................................................... Direction Finding Procedures ............................................................................................................... Navigation Aids Legend ....................................................................................................................... 234 237 275 281 299 301 METEOROLOGY METEOROLOGY SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION Meteorological Service for International Air Navigation - Annex 3 ....................................................... Meteorological Service for International Air Navigation / Model Charts and Forms - Annex 3 ............ Meteorological Service for International Air Navigation / Model Charts - Annex 3 ............................... Meteorological Service for International Air Navigation / SIGMET Notations - Annex 3 ...................... Meteorological Service for International Air Navigation / World Area Forecast - Annex 3 ................... Meteorological Service for International Air Navigation / METAR and SPECI - Annex 3 ..................... Meteorological Service for International Air Navigation / Aircraft Observations - Annex 3 ................... Meteorological Service for International Air Traffic / Forecast - Annex 3 .............................................. Meteorological Service for International Air Traffic / SIGMET, AIRMET, WSW - Annex 3 .................... Aerodrome Weather Report ................................................................................................................. Aerodrome Weather Forecast .............................................................................................................. 305 324 326 337 341 348 360 364 379 394 398 METEOROLOGICAL OPERATIONAL TELECOMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - EUROPE (MOTNE) BROADCAST INFORMATION Decode of Eight Figure Group appended to MOTNE/OPMET Broadcasts .......................................... 403 Aerodrome Pavement Condition Reports (through SNOWTAM/MOTNE) ............................................ 405 TABLES AND CODES TABLES AND CODES - REFERENCE INFORMATION Reference Tables ................................................................................................................................. 411 NOTAM REFERENCE INFORMATION Notams ................................................................................................................................................. 435 SNOWTAM REFERENCE INFORMATION Snowtam .............................................................................................................................................. 445 RADIO FREQUENCY AND TIME INFORMATION Standard Time Signals ......................................................................................................................... 450 Worldwide Local Times ........................................................................................................................ 452 SUNRISE AND SUNSET TABLES Sunrise and Sunset Tables .................................................................................................................. 459 DIALING CODES International Dialling Procedures ......................................................................................................... 488 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL INTRODUCTION TABLE OF CONTENTS 5 Introduction .......................................................................................................................................... 495 INTERNATIONAL CIVIL AVIATION ORGANIZATION - DEFINITIONS International Civil Aviation Organization -- Definitions ......................................................................... 498 INTERNATIONAL CIVIL AVIATION ORGANIZATION - FLIGHT PROCEDURES Flight Procedures (Doc 8168) - Air Traffic Control ............................................................................... 511 Flight Procedures (Doc 8168) - General Principles .............................................................................. 512 Flight Procedures (Doc 8168) - Departure Procedures ....................................................................... 518 FLIGHT PROCEDURES (DOC 8168) - ARRIVAL AND APPROACH PROCEDURES ........................ 525 FLIGHT PROCEDURES (DOC 8168) - EN-ROUTE CRITERIA .......................................................... 550 FLIGHT PROCEDURES (DOC 8168) - HOLDING PROCEDURES .................................................... 551 FLIGHT PROCEDURES (DOC 8168) - NOISE ABATEMENT PROCEDURES .................................. 557 FLIGHT PROCEDURES (Doc 8168) - RNAV AND SATELLITE-BASED ............................................. 564 FLIGHT PROCEDURES (Doc 8168) - DEPARTURE PROCEDURES (RNAV) ................................... 572 FLIGHT PROCEDURES (Doc 8168) - ARRIVAL AND NON-PRECISION APPROACH PROCEDURES .... 574 FLIGHT PROCEDURES (Doc 8168) - APPROACH PROCEDURES WITH VERTICAL GUIDANCE . 579 FLIGHT PROCEDURES (DOC 8168) - PRECISION APPROACH PROCEDURES ........................... 582 FLIGHT PROCEDURES (DOC 8168) - RNAV HOLDING ................................................................... 583 FLIGHT PROCEDURES (DOC 8168) - ENROUTE ............................................................................. 584 AIRCRAFT OPERATING PROCEDURES - ALTIMETER SETTING PROCEDURES ......................... 585 AIRCRAFT OPERATING PROCEDURES - SIMULTANEOUS OPERATIONS ON PARALLEL OR NEARPARALLEL INSTRUMENT RUNWAYS ....................................................................................... 590 AIRCRAFT OPERATING PROCEDURES - SECONDARY SURVEILLANCE RADAR (SSR) TRANSPONDER OPERATING PROCEDURES ........................................................................ 593 AIRCRAFT OPERATING PROCEDURES - OPERATIONAL FLIGHT INFORMATION ...................... 595 AIRCRAFT OPERATING PROCEDURES - STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES (SOPs) AND CHECKLISTS ............................................................................................................................. 596 INTERNATIONAL CIVIL AVIATION ORGANIZATION - RULES OF THE AIR ICAO Rules of the Air – Annex 2 .......................................................................................................... 599 INTERNATIONAL CIVIL AVIATION ORGANIZATION - ATS AIRSPACE CLASSIFICATIONS - ANNEX 11 ICAO ATS Airspace Classifications -- Annex 11 .................................................................................. 627 Traffic Information Broadcasts by Aircraft (TIBA) ................................................................................. 629 INTERNATIONAL CIVIL AVIATION ORGANIZATION - AIR TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT Air Traffic Management (Doc 4444) ..................................................................................................... Appendix 1 – Instructions for Air-Reporting by Voice Communications ............................................... Appendix 2 -- Flight Plan ...................................................................................................................... Appendix 4 -- Air Traffic Incident Report .............................................................................................. 633 679 684 697 INTERNATIONAL CIVIL AVIATION AUTHORITY ORGANIZATION AERONAUTICAL TELECOMMUNICATIONS - ANNEX 10 Aeronautical Telecommunications ........................................................................................................ 702 AIR TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT - GENERAL DATA Mach Number Technique ..................................................................................................................... 705 Required Navigational Performance (RNP) Area Navigation (RNAV) .................................................. 707 EU-OPS 1 Aerodrome Operating Minimums (AOM) ............................................................................ 711 EMERGENCY EMERGENCY DATA - INTERNATIONAL CIVIL AVIATION AUTHORITY International Civil Aviation Organization (ICAO) .................................................................................. 728 AIRPORT DIRECTORY AIRPORT DATA - GENERAL Legend and Explanation ...................................................................................................................... 743 ACN TABLES ....................................................................................................................................... 750 TERMINAL TERMINAL PROCEDURES - GENERAL INFORMATION Vertical Descent Angle Reference Table .............................................................................................. 776 Gradient To Rate Table ......................................................................................................................... 779 Hectopascal/Millibar Equivalent For Airport Elevation .......................................................................... 784 FLIGHT SUPPLEMENT BOOKLET Preface Briefing Bulletins 8 BRIEFING BULLETINS ARE AERONAUTICAL CHARTS REQUIRED WHEN USING NAVIGATIONAL DATABASES? Are Aeronautical Char ts Required When Using Navigational Databases? As GPS navigation, flight management systems, computer flight maps, and computer flight planning system have gained acceptance, avionics companies and software developers have added more and more features. Many of the systems available today make it all too easy to forget that paper enroute, departure, arrival and approach charts are still required and necessary for flight. Avionics systems, flight planning computer mapping systems, and associated databases do not provide all of the navigation information needed to conduct a legal and safe flight. They are not a substitute for current aeronautical charts. When flying with GPS, flight management systems (FMS), or planning a flight with a computer, it is important to understand the limitations of the system you are using. Outlined below are a few of the most common situations where navigation databases do not contain all of the information needed: • Not all instrument flight procedures can be coded into a navigation database. While the vast majority of the world’s SID (DP), STAR and approach procedures can be coded, other procedures cannot be adequately translated to computer code within the industry recommended standards. These “uncodeable” procedures are not included in the Jeppesen Master Database and are unavailable to systems using a navigation database. Procedures containing radar vectors and complicated contingent instructions are the most common ones that fall into this category. Furthermore, when using some systems, not all IFR navigation systems are certified to fly IFR approaches. If your avionics system is certified for IFR enroute and terminal navigation only, it will not include approaches. If it is certified to fly IFR approaches, it will only include those approaches that are authorized when using your particular avionics system. The storage size of many avionics systems prevent many procedures from being loaded into airborne databases. Additionally, an airline might decided to delete holding patterns or other types of information from their databases in favor of including other procedures such as approaches. Be sure you are knowledgeable about what types of information may or may not be in the airborne database you are using. • Stepdown fixes between the Final Approach Fix (FAF) and Missed Approach Point (MAP) are not included in navigation databases. Stepdown fixes between the FAF and the MAP are not coded in the database because not all systems are capable of handling stepdown fixes. In some avionics systems, inclusion of a fix in the database between the FAF and MAP will cause, for example, a GPS Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) sensitivity to change prematurely from approach mode (0.3 nm) to terminal area mode (1 nm) at the stepdown fix, instead of the MAP. In the more complex flight management systems (FMS) with automated vertical navigation capabilities, the vertical path in the database is defined by an angle that provides a constant descent path clearing all stepdown fixes. Many systems, do not have an automated vertical guidance capability that follows the database vertical angle. When vertical guidance is not provided, pilots must use methods depicted on the chart to identify the location of stepdown fixes on final approach, such as charted Along Track Distance (ATD) counted down on the GPS navigation system, or other conventional navaids such as VOR, DME, or NDB. • The amount of information included in any particular avionics system varies from model to model depending on its capabilities and available database memory. For example, many avionics systems have point-topoint navigation only. Civil aviation authorities define flight procedure legs in terms that cause ground track changes with changing wind, temperature, weight and other factors. Jeppesen codes these legs into its master databases as defined by these civil aviation authorities, and provided for in ARINC 424, the industry standard for navigation databases. However, point-to-point navigation systems are generally not able to use route legs that are not defined by geographic points on the ground. In general, those legs are dropped in the process that converts ARINC 424 data to the unique configuration required for each specific navigation unit. Examples of commonly deleted leg types are: climb on runway heading to an altitude, then turn; fly a heading to intercept an airway or radial; fly a DME arc, fly a heading and expect radar vectors, etc. In such cases, direct flight from waypoint to waypoint will violate the charted procedure and potentially put your flight in danger. It is critical that all legs of the procedure on the paper chart be flown as charted, with assistance from your avionics systems for those legs that go direct to a waypoint, and using “pilot nav” for other segments. Always remember that the charted procedure represents the flight procedure as defined by the government regulatory authority, and the pilot is responsible for flying the procedure as charted. • You may not be authorized to fly all procedures in your database. Databases include a small number of private airports, private approaches, and helicopter approaches. Although the Jeppesen master database contains codes identifying them as private or helicopter data, GPS and FMS navigation systems do not make that distinction. The procedures appear in the approach selection menus just like any standard, public use procedure. If you don’t have a paper chart for it, you are not authorized to fly it. • Some categories of controlled airspace are not in your database. If your system provides airspace mapping or warnings, only the most restrictive airspace is included in the database. Generally, that is Class B and Class C airspace. Class D, E and F airspace is not included. Class A airspace, although very restrictive, is also not included because it generally occupies such huge parcels of airspace that mapping it or providing warnings is of little practical value. Additionally, there may be other types of controlled and restrictive airspace that are not included in various databases. The appropriate paper aeronautical charts should be used for these types of airspace. BRIEFING BULLETINS 9 ARE AERONAUTICAL CHARTS REQUIRED WHEN USING NAVIGATIONAL DATABASES? • Not all altitudes are in your database: Approach minimum descent altitudes, approach decision altitudes, minimum obstruction clearance altitudes, minimum reception altitudes, minimum safe altitudes, minimum sector altitudes and minimum crossing altitudes are not in your database. Most avionics systems do not include any airway altitudes. GPS, FMSs, computer mapping and computer flight planning systems are key elements in the future of navigation. It is important to understand that they are still “works in progress.” GPS navigation systems generally do not have all of the capabilities of the more sophisticated FMSs on larger aircraft, and even those systems have limitations. It is reasonable to assume that many of the limitations of both systems will be overcome in the years ahead. Until then, we must understand and operate within the capabilities and limitations of today’s systems. In summary, please remember: • Always fly IFR flight procedures as charted. DO NOT follow the database point-to-point without reference to the chart. • Be aware that your database may not contain every SID (DP), STAR and approach procedure. • Be aware that your database may not contain every leg or segment of the procedure you are flying. • Not everything you need is in your database. • Always confirm that the waypoint or navaid you retrieve from the database is at the location you intended. • GPS, FMS, and electronic map displays with associated databases are not a substitute for current aeronautical charts. Every navigation system operates differently. Please refer to the Pilot’s Operating Handbook and your avionics manufacturer for specific information on the features, capabilities and limitations of your avionics system. 10 BRIEFING BULLETINS ARE AERONAUTICAL CHARTS REQUIRED WHEN USING NAVIGATIONAL DATABASES? FRA 01 A ARE AERONAUTICAL CHARTS REQUIRED WHEN USING NAVIGATIONAL DATABASES? As GPS navigation, flight management systems, computer flight maps, and computer flight planning systems have gained acceptance, avionics companies and software developers have added more and more features. Many of the systems available today make it all too easy to forget that paper enroute, departure, arrival and approach charts are still required and necessary for flight. Avionics systems, flight planning, computer mapping systems, and associated databases do not provide all of the navigation information needed to conduct a legal and safe flight. They are not a substitute for current aeronautical charts. When flying with GPS, flight management systems (FMS), or planning a flight with a computer, it is important to understand the limitations of the system you are using. Outlined below are a few of the most common situations where navigation databases do not contain all of the information needed: • Not all instrument flight procedures can be coded into a navigation database. While the vast majority of the world's SID (DP), STAR and approach procedures can be coded, other procedures cannot be adequately translated to computer code within the industry recommended standards. These "uncodeable" procedures are not included in the Jeppesen Master Database and are unavailable to systems using a navigation database. Procedures containing radar vectors and complicated contingent instructions are the most common ones that fall into this category. Furthermore, when using some systems, not all IFR navigation systems are certified to fly IFR approaches. If your avionics system is certified for IFR enroute and terminal navigation only, it will not include approaches. If it is certified to fly IFR approaches, it will only include those approaches that are authorized when using your particular avionics system. The storage size of many avionics systems prevent many procedures from being loaded into airborne databases. Additionally, an airline might decide to delete holding patterns or other types of information from their databases in favor of including other procedures such as approaches. Be sure you are knowledgeable about what types of information may or may not be in the airborne database you are using. • Stepdown fixes between the Final Approach Fix (FAF) and Missed Approach Point (MAP) are not included in navigation databases. Stepdown fixes between the FAF and the MAP are not coded in the database because not all systems are capable of handling stepdown fixes. In some avionics systems, inclusion of a fix in the database between the FAF and the MAP will cause, for example, a GPS Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) sensitivity to change prematurely from approach mode (0.3 nm) to terminal area mode (1 nm) at the stepdown fix instead of the MAP. In the more complex flight management systems (FMS) with automated vertical navigation capabilities, the vertical path in the database is defined by an angle that provides a constant descent path clearing all stepdown fixes. Many systems, do not have an automated vertical guidance capability that follows the database vertical angle . When vertical guidance is not provided, pilots must use methods depicted on the chart to identify the location of stepdown fixes on final approach, such as charted Along Track Distances (ATD) counted down on the GPS navigation system, or other conventional navaids such as VOR, DME, or NDB. • The amount of information included in any particular avionics system varies from model to model depending on its capabilities and available database memory. For example, many avionics systems have point to point navigation only. Civil aviation authorities define flight procedure legs in terms that cause ground track changes with changing wind, temperature, weight and other factors. Jeppesen codes these legs into its master database as defined by these civil aviation authorities, and provided for in ARINC 424, the industry standard for navigation databases. However, point to point navigation systems are generally not able to use route legs that are not defined by geographic points on the ground. In general, those legs are dropped in the process that converts ARINC 424 data to the unique configuration required for each specific navigation unit. Examples of commonly deleted leg types are: climb on runway heading to an altitude, then turn; fly a heading to intercept an airway or radial; fly a DME arc, fly a heading and expect radar vectors, etc. In such cases, direct flight from waypoint to waypoint will violate the charted procedure and potentially put your flight in danger. It is critical that all legs of the procedure on the paper chart be flown as charted, with assistance from your avionics system for those legs that go direct to a waypoint, and using "pilot nav" for other segments. Always remember that the charted procedure represents the flight procedure as defined by the government regulatory authority, and the pilot is responsible for flying the procedure as charted. • You may not be authorized to fly all procedures in your database. Databases include a small number of private airports, private approaches, and helicopter approaches. Although the Jeppesen master database contains codes identifying them as private or helicopter data, GPS and FMS navigation systems do not make that distinction. The procedures will appear in many avionics systems with the approach selection menus just like any standard, public use procedure. If you don't have a paper chart for it, you are not authorized to fly it. • Some categories of controlled airspace are not in your database. If your system provides airspace mapping or warnings, only the most restrictive airspace is included in the database. Generally, that is Class B and Class C airspace. Class D, E and F airspace is not included. Class A airspace, although very restrictive, is also not included because it generally occupies such huge parcels of airspace that mapping it or providing warnings is of little practical value. Additionally, there may be other types of controlled and restrictive airspace that are not included in various databases. The appropriate paper aeronautical charts should be used for these types of airspace. BRIEFING BULLETINS 11 ARE AERONAUTICAL CHARTS REQUIRED WHEN USING NAVIGATIONAL DATABASES? FRA 01 A • Not all altitudes are in your database: Approach minimum descent altitudes, approach decision altitudes, minimum obstruction clearance altitudes, minimum reception altitudes, minimum safe altitudes, minimum sector altitudes, minimum crossing altitudes, and maximum authorized altitudes are not in your database. Even though the minimum enroute altitudes for airways are in master databases, most avionics systems do not include the airway minimum altitudes in the airborne databases. GPS, FMSs, computer mapping, and computer flight planning systems are key elements in the future of navigation. It is important to understand that they are still "works in progress." GPS navigation systems generally do not have all of the capabilities of the more sophisticated FMSs on larger aircraft, and even those systems have limitations. It is reasonable to assume that many of the limitations of both systems will be overcome in the years ahead. Until then, we must understand and operate within the capabilities and limitations of today's systems. In summary, please remember: Always fly IFR flight procedures as charted. DO NOT follow the database point-to-point without reference to the chart. Be aware that your database may not contain every SID (DP), STAR and approach procedure. Be aware that holding patterns might not be included in your database. Be aware that your database may not contain every leg or segment of the procedure you are flying. Not everything you need is in your database. Always confirm that the waypoint or navaid you retrieve from the database is at the location you intended. GPS, FMS, and electronic map displays with associated databases are not a substitute for current aeronautical charts. Every navigation system operates differently. Please refer to the Pilot's Operating Handbook and your avionics manufacturer for specific information on the features, capabilities and limitations of your avionics system. 12 BRIEFING BULLETINS NEW NON-PRECISION INSTRUMENT APPROACH PROCEDURE CONSTANT ANGLE DESCENT PROFILE DEPICTION (AUSTRALIA) NEW NON-PRECISION INSTRUMENT APPROACH PROCEDURE CONSTANT ANGLE DESCENT PROFILE DEPICTION (AUSTRALIA) BACKGROUND Controlled Flight Into Terrain (CFIT) initiatives proposed by the international aviation industry and supported by ICAO are intended to address some of the critical aspects of non-precision instrument approach procedures. A study of worldwide CFIT accidents reveals that a large percentage of CFIT accidents occurred in the final approach phase of flight, with the majority of this percentage occurring on non-precision approach procedures. It is widely accepted that, in addition to other operational benefits, the performance of a constant rate of descent during an approach to landing is helpful in reducing the potential for a CFIT accident. Some time ago, Australia began publishing a new profile descent presentation for non-precision approaches. This was done to assist pilots in flying a constant rate of descent. Approach path angles and recommended “procedure altitudes” are provided by Australia, as well as altitude/distance reference tables that can be used by both VNAV and non-VNAV equipped operators. “Segment minimum safe altitudes” are also given, representing the minimum obstacle clearance altitudes for each segment of the approach. ACTION On Australian non-precision approach charts, beginning with the 12 APR 02 revision, Jeppesen will show the vertical approach path in the profile view as a constant rate of descent flight path. The profile view will include the state-provided altitude/distance reference table, approach path angle (VNAV angle), the associated recommended “procedure altitudes” and the “segment minimum safe altitudes” (see example). As these approach procedures are revised, the so-called “dive and drive” stair-step portrayal shown as a series of descents to minimum altitudes will be replaced by the constant rate of descent flight path portrayal according to the recommended altitudes given. This change in depiction will be made to Jeppesen charts as Australia provides the revised descent profile presentation and information. At the time being, this new combination of information and associated profile depiction applies to Australia charts only. If and when the concept expands to other countries, Jeppesen will expand the application accordingly. TERMS Procedure Altitude (Recommended Altitude): Procedure altitudes are recommended altitudes and have been developed in coordination with Air Traffic Control requirements. The Procedure Altitudes have been established to accommodate a stabilized descent profile on a prescribed descent angle on the final approach course. They may also be applied in the intermediate approach segment. Procedure altitudes will never be less than the segment minimum safe altitude. Segment Minimum Safe Altitude (Minimum IFR Altitude): Segment minimum safe altitudes provide required obstacle clearance for a given segment of the approach. It is a minimum altitude established by the procedure designer and meant to be a “do not descend below” altitude. Segment minimum safe altitudes shall not be violated. Segment minimum safe altitudes or minimum IFR altitudes, if explicitly specified as such by a country, will be published for the final approach segment(s) as screened blocks. Procedure altitudes are developed to provide guidance to the pilot for the appropriate altitudes to fly. The intent of the minimum IFR altitudes is to ensure the pilot has the option to be able to utilize these altitudes should the need occur such as in icing conditions. Altitude/Distance Reference Table: Based on the given approach path (VNAV) angle, the table provides altitude information for the specified DME distances or GPS “To-To” distances. The table allows for a constant angle descent to be flown, with or without VNAV equipment. When provided by the government authority, Australia in this case, Jeppesen will include an altitude/distance reference table at the top of the profile view. The distance/altitude table is aligned to the direction of the approach in the profile view. BRIEFING BULLETINS NEW NON-PRECISION INSTRUMENT APPROACH PROCEDURE CONSTANT ANGLE DESCENT PROFILE DEPICTION (AUSTRALIA) 13 1 178563584000 14 BRIEFING BULLETINS REQUIRED NAVIGATION PERFORMANCE (RNP): FAA INTRODUCES THE FIRST “PUBLIC” RNAV (RNP) APPROACH PROCEDURE AT RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT (DCA) REQUIRED NAVIGATION PERFORMANCE (RNP): FAA INTRODUCES THE FIRST “PUBLIC” RNAV (RNP) APPROACH PROCEDURE AT RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT (DCA) BACKGROUND Required Navigation Performance (RNP) is a major component of the FAA’s goal for facilitating more efficient airspace and procedure design as well as improving safety, access, capacity and operational efficiencies in the National Airspace System. RNP, a refinement of RNAV, is part of a collaborative effort by FAA and the aviation industry to develop performance-based procedures, i.e., procedures not dependent on any specific piece of equipment. RNP is a statement of navigation position accuracy necessary for operation within a defined airspace. It establishes highly refined parameters for aircraft airspace containment including navigation performance accuracy within which the aircraft's navigation system is expected to remain 95% of the time. And the integrity of the system assures pilots they will remain within the containment area. This is accomplished by an aircraft's RNP-capable flight management system (FMS) which utilize enhanced software to monitor sensor inputs and compare real time navigation accuracy, also referred to as Actual Navigation Performance (ANP). Navigation performance for a particular RNP type is expressed numerically. Depending on the capability of each aircraft's system, RNP values can be as low as 0.1 nautical miles. A performance value of RNP 0.3, for instance, assures that the aircraft has the capability of remaining within 0.3 nautical miles to the right or left of the centerline 95% of the time and within a linear containment area of 0.6 nautical miles (twice the RNP value) 99.999% of the time. OPERATIONAL ADVANTAGES OF RNP The accuracy and integrity monitoring of RNP can provide more precision than conventional RNAV procedures. Aircraft with the more capable authorized systems will be able to operate into airports where current instrument approach procedures, because of specific constraints, must be designed with high landing minimums. RNP Decision Altitudes (DAs) can be as low as 250 feet with visibilities as low as three quarters of a mile. Besides lower minimums, the benefits of RNP include improved obstacle clearance limits as well as reduced pilot workload. And by having RNP-capable aircraft fly an accurate, repeatable path, ATC can be confident that these aircraft will be at a specific position, thus maximizing safety and the efficient flow of aircraft through the airspace. RADIUS-TO-FIX LEGS (RF LEGS) To attain these benefits, a key component of RNP approach procedures are curved flight tracks. Constant radius turns around a fix are referred to as RF legs (or Radius-to-Fix legs). These turns, encoded into the navigation database, allow the aircraft to avoid critical areas of terrain or conflicting airspace while maintaining positional accuracy by maintaining precise, positive course guidance along the curved track. The introduction of RF legs into the design of terminal RNAV procedures will result in improved use of airspace and allow procedures to be developed to/from runways that are otherwise limited to traditional linear flight paths – or in some cases – not served by an IFR procedure at all. Navigation systems with RF capability are a pre-requisite to flying a procedure which includes an RF leg. Refer to charted notes. SPECIAL RNP REQUIREMENTS In the United States, all RNP procedures fall into the SAAAR category (Special Aircrew and Aircraft Authorization Required). Operators who seek to take advantage of RNP approach procedures must meet the requirements outlined in FAA Order 8260.52 “United States Standard for Required Navigation Performance (RNP) Approach Procedures With Special Aircraft and Aircrew Authorization Required (SAAAR).” Currently all new air transport category aircraft being produced are equipped with RNP-capable FMSs. However, differences may exist in the level of precision that each system is qualified to meet. JEPPESEN AIRWAY MANUAL CHARTS & NAVIGATION DATABASES To date only “Tailored” or “Special” RNP approach procedures have been published and incorporated into individual customer's tailored (customized) Airway Manuals and NavData for selective distribution and use. The introduction of the first public-use RNAV RNP SAAAR approach procedures will result in these procedures becoming part of the Standard Airway Manual and Standard NavData delivery. It is incumbent upon each individual operator to obtain the necessary approval and authorization to utilize these procedures. Jeppesen Airway Manual Charts: Explanation of RNAV (RNP) Features (Refer to sample chart) Procedure title “RNAV” includes parenthetical “(RNP)” terminology. 1178563672000 1178563672000 1178563672000 RNP procedures will be sequenced in the Airway Manual in the same manner as RNAV (GPS) procedures. Where there are both RNAV (RNP) and RNAV (GPS) procedures to the same runway, the RNP version will be sequenced first due to its lower landing minimums. RNP SAAAR requirements, required sensors and FMS capabilities, and relevant procedure notes are included in the procedure notes section of the Briefing Strip™. BRIEFING BULLETINS REQUIRED NAVIGATION PERFORMANCE (RNP): FAA INTRODUCES THE FIRST “PUBLIC” RNAV (RNP) APPROACH PROCEDURE AT RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT (DCA) 15 Jeppesen Airway Manual Charts: Explanation of RNAV (RNP) Features (Refer to sample chart) (continued) 1178563672000 1178563672000 1178563672000 1178563672000 RF legs may be used in any segment of the procedure (transition, intermediate, final or missed approach). RF leg turn directions (left or right) are not noted in the planview as the graphic depiction of the flight tracks is intuitive. Likewise, the arc center points, arc radius, and associated RF leg performance limits such as bank angles and speeds will not be depicted because these aircraft performance characteristics are encoded in the navigation database. RF legs in the profile view will include turn direction labels (i.e., LT Arc or RT Arc). This is done to provide relative information about the turn direction or course change for arc segments correlated to the planview (overhead) depiction. On this particular procedure, lateral and vertical course guidance – from the Decision Altitude (DA) to the Runway Waypoint (Landing Threshold Point or LTP) – is provided by the aircraft's flight management system and onboard navigation database; however, any continued flight beyond and below the DA to the landing threshold is to be conducted under visual conditions (VMC). RNP values for each individual leg of the procedure – defined by the procedure design criteria for containment purposes – are encoded into the aircraft's navigation database. Applicable landing minimums are shown in a normal manner with the associated RNP value in the heading of the minimums box. When more than one set of RNP landing minimums is available, and where an aircrew is able achieve lower RNP through approved means, the available (multiple) sets of RNP minimums will be listed with the lowest set shown on the left side of the box and remaining sets shown to the right, in ascending order, based on the RNP value. 16 BRIEFING BULLETINS REQUIRED NAVIGATION PERFORMANCE (RNP): FAA INTRODUCES THE FIRST “PUBLIC” RNAV (RNP) APPROACH PROCEDURE AT RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT (DCA) 1178563672000 BRIEFING BULLETINS NICOSIA FIR/UIR IATA COMMUNICATIONS / CONTROL PROCEDURES JEP 06 01 17 NICOSIA FIR/UIR IATA COMMUNICATIONS / CONTROL PROCEDURES (extract from IATA Information Bulletin) This Bulletin is compiled from information contained in various official documents and from observations of practical operations. Contents MUST be regarded as provisional pending improvement of the airspace organization and of the ATS and COM services by the authorities concerned. a. General Authority for Air Traffic Control within Nicosia FIR/UIR, rests solely with Nicosia ACC. Boundary between Ankara - Nicosia FIRs/UIRs, runs from N3605 E03000 to N3558 E03230 to N3555 E03333 to N3555 E03540. ATC instructions must ONLY be accepted from Nicosia ACC, including allocation of SSR codes. Most of the northern part of Nicosia FIR/UIR, inclusive of a wide area of the high seas, has been identified by Ercan Control, a station based in northern Cyprus, falling under Turkish Cypriot administration, as a zone under its control. The authority of Ercan Control over this zone for Air Traffic Control purposes is NOT recognized by ICAO. Contrary to ICAO requirements, no contact is effected between Ankara and Nicosia ACCs. Nicosia ACC requires that aircraft approaching Nicosia FIR/UIR from Ankara FIR make pre-entry contact at least 10 minutes before the FIR boundary. It is essential that crews comply with this requirement: only then will Nicosia ACC be in a position to assume control and provide appropriate traffic separation. b. Southbound Procedures While in Ankara FIR comply with control instructions issued by Ankara ACC (either directly or by relay through any other station designated by Ankara, e.g. Ercan Control on 126.70 MHZ) up to point VESAR (B/UB545, L/UL620) or point TOMBI (A/UA16, M/UM855) or point DOREN (A/UA28). Establish contact with Nicosia ACC at least 10 minutes before FIR BDY. Once contact established and flight details including Flight Level (FL) information passed, avoid making requests to Ankara ACC for FL changes for the rest of the flight through Ankara FIR, unless climbing from or descending to aerodromes in the immediate vicinity of the FIR boundary. If for any reason, it becomes absolutely necessary to make such level changes after initial contact with Nicosia while still in Ankara FIR, it is important for safety reasons that Nicosia ACC be advised at once of the change. At VESAR or TOMBI, flights will come under the sole control of Nicosia, change automatically to Nicosia ACC. Although no formal transfer of control procedures is affected between Ankara and Nicosia ACCs and no changeover instructions are issued on crossing the FIR boundary, flights should thereafter ONLY accept control instructions issued by Nicosia ACC until hand over to the next ATC Unit or FIR/UIR. Any invitation to change to another station (e.g. Ercan control) should be politely acknowledged but disregarded. In case of insistence a check should be made with Nicosia ACC. For aircraft planning to continue the flight into Damascus FIR, additional communications requirements exist. Refer to para. d.) below, under “Eastbound / Westbound Procedures”. On completion of ATC formalities with Nicosia ACC after entry into the FIR and of position reporting requirements for Damascus FIR, establish communications with Ercan Control and pass on relevant flight details. This should be regarded as a purely courtesy call - under NO circumstances should any ATC instruction be accepted from Ercan. c. Northbound Procedures Due to lack of contact between the two centers, advance flight information can ONLY be provided to Ankara by relay. Provide flight information at least 10 minutes prior to entering Ankara FIR, along L/UL619, W/UW10, B/UB15, A/UA16, L/UL620, M/UM855 or A/UA28 to Ercan Control on 126.70 for relay to Ankara. Control authority of Nicosia ACC remains absolute up to the point of entry into Ankara FIR. d. Eastbound / Westbound Procedures Eastbound aircraft entering Damascus FIR via routes L/UL619, W/UW10, R/UR78 or M/UM978 are required to establish contact with Damascus ACC 5 minutes before ETA position NIKAS. If for any reason this is not possible, aircraft must provide, a position report to Latakia Radio, a relay station for Damascus ACC, at position VESAR, ALSUS or BALMA for relay to Damascus, and maintain continuous listening watch. Even if a position report and flight details have been communicated to Latakia Radio two-way Radio Communications with Damascus ACC must be completed as early as possible before passing Banias NDB. Nicosia ACC remains primary station for listening watch until NIKAS, where change to Damascus shall be effected. Westbound aircraft from Damascus FIR establish communications with Nicosia ACC at the FIR BDRY (NIKAS), unless requested by Damascus ACC to call Nicosia earlier. A courtesy call may be made to Ercan Control. If flight continues into Ankara FIR, provide advance flight information to Ankara ACC via Ercan Control at least 10 minutes before passing the Nicosia/Ankara FIR boundary. Control authority rests firmly with Nicosia ACC until the FIR BDY (VESAR); thereafter it changes to Ankara. Further calls to Ercan may be made as requested to the extent other commitments permit. 18 BRIEFING BULLETINS NICOSIA FIR/UIR IATA COMMUNICATIONS / CONTROL PROCEDURES JEP 06 01 SPECIAL COMMUNICATIONS AND CONTROL PROCEDURES APPLYING TO AIRCRAFT ENROUTE MUT - VESAR - NIKAS - BANIAS OR VICE VERSA a. SOUTHBOUND, continuing eastward into Damascus FIR 1. 10 minutes before ETA VESAR: (a) Primary station is Ankara ACC. (b) Call Nicosia ACC and communicate essential flight details [FL, ETA FIR (VESAR), ROUTE, etc.]. NOTE: Avoid Flight Level changes from this point until FIR boundary and control transferred to Nicosia ACC. If change absolutely necessary, obtain clearance from Ankara ACC and keep Nicosia ACC informed. 2. VESAR: (a) Transfer control to Nicosia ACC. Do NOT accept ATC clearances from any other station. From now on until next FIR BDRY, primary listening watch must remain with Nicosia ACC, which is also the authority for SSR codes. (b) Establish contact with Damascus ACC. If no contact, call Latakia Radio, transmit essential flight details for relay to Damascus ACC. (c) Ercan, pass essential flight details (ATO VESAR, FL, ETA NIKAS). 3. Before Banias: Continue to contact Damascus ACC if communications have not been established yet, because it is a requirement to establish contact well before passing Banias. 4. At NIKAS: Transfer control to Damascus ACC. b. WESTBOUND, continuing northwards into Ankara FIR 1. In Damascus FIR, before passing NIKAS: Primary station is Damascus ACC. No need for advance call to Nicosia FIR unless request to that effect received from Damascus ACC. 2. At NIKAS: (a) Transfer control to Nicosia ACC. Control authority remains with Nicosia ACC until point VESAR. (b) Call Ercan on 126.70, pass essential flight details for relay to Ankara ACC. NOTE: Any Flight Level changes made thereafter under instructions from Nicosia ACC must be communicated at once to Ercan Control for relay to Ankara ACC. 3. At VESAR: Transfer to Ankara ACC. BRIEFING BULLETINS JAPAN MAJOR AERODROME OPERATING MINIMUMS (AOM) CHANGES AND NON-PRECISION INSTRUMENT APPROACH PROCEDURE CONSTANT ANGLE DESCENT PROFILE DEPICTION 19 JAPAN MAJ OR AERODROME OPERATING MINIMUMS (AOM) CHANGES AND NON-PRECISION INSTRUMENT APPROACH PROCEDURE C ONSTANT ANGLE DESCENT PROFILE DEPICTION BACKGROUND Several major changes to Japan's AOM are being implemented effective 26 October 2006. Jeppesen's general policy is to always publish the higher of minimums specified by the State's Civil Aviation Authority or those specified by Jeppesen's Explanation of Common Airport Operating Minimum Specifications (ECOMS), which are primarily based on the U.S. Standard for Terminal Instrument Procedures (TERPS) and Federal Aviation Regulations (FAR) Part 121 and 135 Operations Specifications. For those operators who apply JAR OPS-1 AOM Specifications, the higher of State minimums and JAR OPS will be shown. PORTRAYAL OF AOM AOM for take-off and landing are shown on the Jeppesen instrument approach charts whereas minimums for JAR OPS operators are shown in a separate minimums listing (i.e., 10–9X, 20–9X, etc.), which is filed in front of the first instrument approach chart. TAKE-OFF MINIMUMS Take-off minimums are expressed in either RVR or VIS. Where ceiling is an additional requirement, it will be shown. LANDING MINIMUMS Precision Approach CAT I & Non-Precision Approaches Landing minimums are subdivided into Full, Intermediate, Basic and Nil facilities, depending on the approach light system and runway lights available. Landing minimums are expressed as DA(H)/MDA(H) and RVR/CMV (Converted Met Visibility). The RVR/CMV value is related to DH/MDH and the approach and runway lighting. The lowest permissible minimum for a CAT I precision approach is DH 200ft — RVR/CMV 550m for all aircraft categories. The lowest permissible minimum for a non-precision approach for category A, B & C aircraft is MDH 250ft — RVR/CMV 800m, and for category D aircraft MDH 250ft — RVR/CMV 1200m. RVR will be reported only up to and including 1600m. Therefore, all values up to and including 1600m will be prefixed RVR. Visibility values exceeding 1600m will be prefixed CMV. Precision Approach CAT II CAT II RVR values are dependent on DH. The lowest permissible minimum for a CAT II precision approach is DH 100ft — RVR 350m. Precision Approach CAT III CAT III minimums will be shown only if published by the State authority. Their application, however, depends on aircraft type, equipment on board and the approved minimum. For detailed information, refer to your Aircraft Flight Manual. CONVERSION OF MET VISIBILITY INTO RVR/CMV Where RVR is available, visibilities up to and including 1600m are expressed in RVR. All visibilities above 1600m are shown as CMV. A reported meteorological visibility must be converted into RVR/CMV by applying different conversion factors for the lighting elements in operation under day/night conditions. CIRCLING Circling minimums are unchanged. MINIMUMS FOR FILING AS ALTERNATE Alternate minimums for each individual approach procedure must be determined by the operator for the filed alternate airport. JAPAN NON-PRECISION INSTRUMENT APPROACH PROCEDURE CONSTANT ANGLE DESCENT PROFILE DEPICTION To assist pilots in flying a constant angle descent, Japan has begun providing new profile descent information for non-precision approaches. Approach path angles and procedure altitudes are provided by the governing authority, as well as recommended altitude/distance reference tables. Shaded segment minimum safe altitudes are also provided, which represent the minimum obstacle clearance altitudes for each segment of the approach. At this time, the new combination of information and associated profile depiction applies only to a few procedures; however, Japan will gradually introduce this concept to additional non-precision profiles. SEGMENT MINIMUM SAFE ALTITUDE (MINIMUM IFR ALTITUDE) Segment minimum safe altitudes provide required obstacle clearance for a given segment of the final approach. It is a minimum IFR altitude established by the procedure designer and meant to be a do not descend below altitude. In addition to procedure or recommended altitudes, segment minimum safe altitudes will be depicted in the final approach segment of the profile view when explicitly defined as such by a country. The vertical limits of the segment minimum safe altitudes will be represented by shaded blocks. 20 BRIEFING BULLETINS JAPAN MAJOR AERODROME OPERATING MINIMUMS (AOM) CHANGES AND NON-PRECISION INSTRUMENT APPROACH PROCEDURE CONSTANT ANGLE DESCENT PROFILE DEPICTION NOTE: The table between the plan and profile views contains altitudes that provide a stabilized constant angle descent. These minimum IFR altitudes are recommended only; minimum altitudes in the profile view still apply. 1178563643000 BRIEFING BULLETINS RNAV 1 EQUIPMENT NOTES ON U.S. RNAV STAR AND SID PROCEDURES AND RNAV OPERATIONS ON RNAV Q AND T ROUTES 21 RNAV 1 EQUIPMENT NOTES ON U.S. RNAV STAR AND SID PROCEDURES AND RNAV OPERATIONS ON RNAV Q AN D T ROUTES EFFECTIVE 15 MARCH 2007 FAA Advisory Circular (AC) 90-100A - U.S. TERMINAL AND EN ROUTE AREA NAVIGATION (RNAV) OPERATIONS - designates U.S. RNAV STAR and SID procedures as RNAV 1, and RNAV Q routes and T routes as RNAV 2, based on aircraft navigation equipment requirements. This AC reflects new performance-based navigation criteria that has been harmonized with ICAO and addresses RNAV systems using positioning inputs from GPS/GNSS and DME, and IRU. Based on current DME availability evaluations, coverage is not sufficient to support DME/DME RNAV operations without additional IRU augmentation or using GPS. Effective March 15, 2007, equipment notes on all affected U.S. RNAV SID and STAR procedures will be modified to reflect these new requirements. All notes referencing Type A & B will be replaced, and AC 90-100 dated January 7, 2005 will be cancelled along with Jeppesen Briefing Bulletin JEP 05-02 dated 12 AUG 05. RNAV 1 Aircraft operating on RNAV 1 STARs and SIDs must maintain a total system error of not more than 1 nautical mile for 95% of the total flight time. All pilots are expected to maintain route centerlines, as depicted by onboard lateral deviation indicators and/or flight guidance during all RNAV operations unless authorized to deviate by ATC or under emergency conditions. Cross-track error/deviation should be limited to 0.5 nautical mile. Brief deviations from this standard during and immediately after procedure/route turns, up to a maximum of 1 nautical mile are allowable. Pilots must use a lateral deviation indicator (or equivalent navigation map display), flight director and/or autopilot in lateral navigation mode. RNAV 1 will appear on all U.S. RNAV STAR and SID charts. The latter includes both Standard Instrument Departures and graphic Obstacle Departure Procedures. Additional notes specifying the navigation infrastructure to support the procedure will be included (e.g., “DME/DME/IRU or GPS required”). RNAV 2 Aircraft operating on RNAV routes must maintain a total system error bounded by the RNAV value for 95% of the total flight time. All pilots are expected to maintain route centerlines, as depicted by onboard lateral deviation indicators and/or flight guidance during all RNAV operations unless authorized to deviate by ATC or under emergency conditions. Cross-track error/deviation should be limited to 1.0 nautical mile. Brief deviations from this standard during and immediately after procedure/route turns, up to a maximum of 2.0 nautical miles are allowable. RNAV 2 will be used for enroute operations unless otherwise specified. Pilots are encouraged to use a lateral deviation indicator (or equivalent navigation map display), flight director and/or autopilot in lateral navigation mode. RNAV 2 applies to Q-routes and T-routes in the U.S. It does not apply to over-water RNAV routes (including Q-routes in the Gulf of Mexico and the Atlantic routes) or VOR DME RNAV routes in Alaska as well as off-route RNAV operations, Alaska GPS routes, or Caribbean routes. ELIGIBILITY The following systems meet many of the requirements defined in this AC. Such equipment still requires evaluation by the manufacturer against all the functional and performance requirements in this Advisory Circular. Relevant documentation acceptable to the FAA must be available to establish that the aircraft is equipped with RNAV systems meeting RNAV 1 or RNAV 2 requirements. A current list of compliant equipment is available at the AFS-410 Website: http://www.faa.gov/about/office_org/headquarters_offices/avs/offices/afs/afs400/afs410/policy_guidance/ – Aircraft with TSO-C1 29/C129a sensor (Class B or C) and the requirements in a TSO-C115b FMS, installed for IFR use in accordance with AC 20-130A. – Aircraft with TSO-C145a sensor, and the requirements in a TSO-C115b FMS, installed for IFR use in accordance with AC 20-130A or AC 20-138A. – Aircraft with TSO-C129/C129a sensor Class A1 (without deviating from the required functionality for Navigation Displays and Functions included in Appendix 3 of AC 90-100A) installed for IFR use in accordance with AC 20-138 or AC 20-138A. – Aircraft with TSO-C146a sensor (without deviating from the required functionality for Navigation Displays and Functions included in Appendix 3 of AC 90-100A) installed for IFR use in accordance with AC 20-138A. – The RAIM prediction program should comply with the criteria in AC 20-138A, paragraph 12. Aircraft with P-RNAV approval based on GNSS capability meet the functional requirements of AC 90-100A. Unless the RNAV route or STAR or SID procedure specifically requires GPS or GNSS equipage, aircraft must be within ATC radar surveillance and communication while on the route or procedure. For procedures requiring GPS and/or aircraft approvals requiring GPS, if the navigation system does not automatically alert the flight crew of a loss of GPS, the operator must develop procedures to verify correct GPS operation. 22 BRIEFING BULLETINS RNAV 1 EQUIPMENT NOTES ON U.S. RNAV STAR AND SID PROCEDURES AND RNAV OPERATIONS ON RNAV Q AND T ROUTES Examples STAR Old (Type B) New (RNAV1) 1178563 1178563 619000 619000 SID Old (Type B) New (RNAV1) 1 1 178563619000 178563619000 BRIEFING BULLETINS CHANGE OF ALTITUDE DEPICTION ON SID/STAR CHARTS FOR AIRPORTS IN THE UNITED KINGDOM 23 CHANGE OF ALTITUDE DEPICTION ON SID/STAR CHARTS FOR AIRPORTS IN THE UNITED KINGDOM Beginning in September 2007, Jeppesen will change the altitude depiction for SID and STAR procedures for airports in the United Kingdom on a routine basis. Background The national characteristics of UK airspace (e.g., number of airports with their related airspace within a small area) lead to complicated arrival and departure routes in order to stay clear of other airspace or traffic. Departures often include a STOP altitude which must not be violated. It is essential that these limitations are easily identified by pilots. Action The following changes are intended to assist you as the pilot: 1. Procedures with crossing or converging tracks and different altitudes which could lead to misinterpretation will be divided into separate charts. 2. State AIP-provided WARNING box is always shown below the procedure title information. (see ballflag 1 on graphic) 3. Altitudes will be placed on the same side of arrival or departure track whenever possible. 4. Use of the well known and worldwide accepted ICAO symbology for altitudes, which is self explanatory, easy to read and easy to understand. 5. Introduction of the "Altitude Window" on SID charts. The next known STOP altitude will be shown on top of "above" and "at or above" altitudes to identify clearly the upper limit for the climb. The FMS might not show the upper altitude at this fix because it is coded at a later position. For the chart this value is "borrowed" from a later fix to improve situational awareness during climb. (see ballflag 2 on graphic) 6. For improvement of the pre-flight procedure briefing the altitudes will be included in the routing table if the State source has provided a textual description of the procedure. STOP altitudes will be shown as MAX altitudes in brackets. (see ballflag 3 on graphic) 7. Introduction of Altitude Window on STAR charts. The next known STOP altitude will be shown underneath the "below" and "at or below" altitudes to identify clearly the lower limit for the descent. The FMS might not show the lower altitude at this fix because it is coded at a later position. For the chart this value is "borrowed" from a later fix to improve situational awareness during descent. Legend 1205330005000 24 BRIEFING BULLETINS CHANGE OF ALTITUDE DEPICTION ON SID/STAR CHARTS FOR AIRPORTS IN THE UNITED KINGDOM 1205330005000 BRIEFING BULLETINS MULTIPLE APPROACH PROCEDURE INDICATORS 25 Multiple Approach Proc edure Indicators Which procedure is included in your database when multiple approach procedures using the same sensor are published to a single runway end? GENERAL Civil aviation authorities occasionally create more than one approach procedure of the same type to a single runway. This is done to accommodate many operations, including different missed approach procedures and missed approach climb gradients, different approach transitions, and other considerations such as WAAS and RNP. Previously, when more than one procedure of the same type to the same runway existed, only one of the procedures could be captured in the database. Where there were multiple RNAV (GPS) procedures to the same runway in the U.S., the note “Procedure Not in Database” would be shown on the charts for procedures that were not coded in the database. Since a database is required to fly RNAV (GPS) or RNAV (GNSS) procedures, regulators such as the FAA have mandated that all published RNAV (GPS/GNSS) procedures must be retrievable from a database. Additionally, more instances of multiple approaches were being encountered worldwide, including ILS, LOC (only), VOR, VORDME or VORTAC, NDB, and TACAN. This necessitated a change to ARINC 424 in order to establish a suffix in the procedure identifier record for multiple approach procedures. However, even though Jeppesen now has the capability to output multiple versions of an approach type to a given runway, many avionics units cannot accept the suffix in the procedure identifier record that was designed to differentiate between multiple versions of these procedures. The units allow for only a four character approach procedure identifier. OPTIONS In order for all FMS and GPS avionics to contain at least one of the approaches when multiple procedures have been published, it is necessary to determine which version of the procedure should be included in all FMS and GPS avionics. Jeppesen uses the term “predominant procedure” for the one that is always included. Multiple approach procedures without a suffix Where the source does not include a suffix to provide uniqueness Jeppesen will include the approach that is believed to be predominant procedure that is issued in ATC clearances. Where multiple approach procedures are issued yet only one of them includes a suffix, Jeppesen will code the procedure that was supplied without the suffix in order to provide at least one procedure that can be included in all FMS and GPS avionics. Guidelines for Designating the Selected Procedure While many of the FMS and GPS systems that our customers use have the ability to handle multiple versions of approaches with the same procedure identifier, it was determined that the equipment that cannot handle this information should not be penalized by losing any existing procedures based on this limitation. As a result, Jeppesen developed various delivery options for Multiple Approach Procedures to minimize the impact for all equipment. Avionics manufacturers were directed to select which of four options they would implement for their end-user customers. To understand how Jeppesen designates the Selected Procedure, it is important to understand how the various source providers publish Multiple Approach Procedures. Source providers may deliver these procedures using a variety of suffixes after the procedure title or, in a few cases, without suffixes. The following list explains these different source cases: a. Letters of the alphabet, starting with Z and moving backwards (Z, Y, X, W, etc.) b. Numbers (1, 2, 3, etc.) c. Words beginning with letters of the phonetic alphabet, such as Papa, Sierra, Tango, etc. (as found in Italy) d. The phonetic alphabet (Alpha, Bravo, Charlie, etc.) starting at the beginning of the alphabet and moving forward e. Letters or numbers with one procedure missing a multiple approach suffix; for example, VOR Rwy 36, VOR Rwy 36-1, VOR Rwy 36-2) f. No suffix to distinguish between multiple procedures of the same type to the same runway (as found on ILS procedures in Tunis, Tunisia (DTTA)) When either the letters or numbers are used as shown in items a. or b. above, Jeppesen will use the sourcesupplied letters or numbers as a suffix in compliance with the ARINC 424 specifications. When words are used as depicted in items c. and d., Jeppesen will code the first letter of the word. 26 BRIEFING BULLETINS MULTIPLE APPROACH PROCEDURE INDICATORS Given the possible source situations, Jeppesen will designate the Selected Procedure according to the following rules: For Source Case: Z, Y, X, designations 1, 2, 3 designations Selected Procedure Will Be: Z1 (or the letter closest to the end of the alphabet) 1 (or lowest number) Papa (or word that starts with the letter closest to the start of the Papa, Sierra, Tango alphabet. Papa = primary, Sierra = secondary, Tango = tertiary) Alpha (or word that starts with the letter closest to the start of Alpha, Bravo, Charlie the alphabet) Blank for one procedure (e.g., VOR Rwy 36, Blank (procedure without a suffix) VOR Rwy 36-1, VOR Rwy 36-2) No designation First procedure in chart sequence 1 see RNAV (RNP) and “LPV Only” minimums exceptions RNAV (RNP) and “LPV Only” minimum exceptions RNAV (RNP) approaches are defined as Special Aircraft and Aircrew Authorization Required (SAAAR) procedures which restrict their use to a small group of customers (see RNAV (RNP) Y Rwy 31 at KSUN for an example). Also, RNAV (GPS) procedures with “LPV Only” minimums are currently used by a limited group of customers (see RNAV (GPS) Z Rwy 21 at KAOO). In order to deliver a procedure that most customers are able to fly, in these cases Jeppesen will select the alternate procedure which is closest to the end of the alphabet to be included in your NavData file. In other words, the –W procedure at KSUN and the –Y procedure at KAOO. There are some avionics manufacturers that take all multiple approach indicator procedures offered by Jeppesen and they have their own rules for determining which single procedure will be included in their legacy equipment. For those boxes, Jeppesen rules do not apply. Procedures that qualify as the exception as stated above will be posted on Jeppesen’s website www.jeppesen. com under Aviation Resources, Online Publications, NavData Alerts/Notices. BRIEFING BULLETINS UNITED STATES LOWER THAN STANDARD TAKE-OFF MINIMUMS – CHANGES TO JEPPESEN CHARTS 27 United States Lower than Standard Take-Off Minimums – Changes to Jeppesen Charts BACKGROUND As a result of efforts to harmonize the criteria for lower than standard take-off minimums with ICAO, the FAA published Notice N 8900.38: Revised Guidance and Authorizations for IFR Lower Than Standard Takeoff Minima Airplane Operations – All Airports (C078 and C079). The Notice provides guidance to 14 CFR Part 121, 125, 135, and 91 subpart K operators regarding the authorization of lower than standard take-off minimums at airports in the U.S. This Briefing Bulletin outlines the changes to the depiction of lower than standard take-off minimums as they will appear on Jeppesen charts beginning in the 30 MAY 08 revision. Due to the volume of changes, all affected charts will be updated to reflect the new criteria over the course of several charting cycles. The FAA maintains a website containing a list of all runways that are authorized for lower than standard take-off minimums of 300, 500 or 1000 RVR (RVR 3, RVR 5, RVR 10) at: http://www.faa.gov/about/office_org/headquarters_offices/avs/offices/afs/afs400/afs410/status_lists/ For the complete Notice N 8900.38, refer to the FAA's website at: http://fsims.faa.gov/home.aspx CHANGES TO CRITERIA Major changes in FAA Notice N 8900.38 include the following: • Only two RVR reports are required for lower than standard take-off operations. • RVR 5 is now the lowest authorized take-off minimum based upon outside visual references. • High intensity runway lighting (HIRL) is required for take-off operations less than RVR 10. The following requirements and restrictions apply to the use of RVR values below RVR 16: a. Where only two RVR sensors are installed, the TDZ and Rollout RVR sensor reports are both required and controlling. b. Where three RVR sensors are installed on the runway to be used: 1. The TDZ, Mid and Rollout RVR reports are controlling for all operations. 2. The failure of any one RVR will not affect operations provided the remaining two RVR sensors are reporting values at or above the appropriate minimums. NOTE: Extremely long runways (e.g., DEN 16R-34L) utilize four RVR sensors (i.e., TDZ, Mid, Rollout, and Far-End). When a fourth Far-End RVR value is reported, it is not controlling and is not to be used as one of the two required operative RVR systems. CHANGES TO CHART FORMAT Jeppesen’s depiction of lower than standard take-off minimums at U.S. airports has been modified to include all pertinent equipment requirements. These include • notations for the number of RVR reports below RVR 16, • specific runway lighting and runway centerline markings required for each level of RVR, and • the term HUD (approved Head-Up Display take-off guidance system) in place of the phrase “Approved Guidance System” for RVR 3 authorization. The configuration of RVR sensors on each runway – TDZ, Mid (where installed) and Rollout – remains the same, and the take-off minimums will still reflect the number of available RVR reports on each runway. The lowest available take-off RVR values for each runway or group of runways are shown to the left. Moving to the right, the RVR values increase depending on the availability of centerline (CL) and high intensity runway lights (HIRL) as well as runway centerline markings (RCLM). Where lower than standard take-off minimums are shown, the aircraft engine requirements for Standard take-off minimums are now depicted as column headings (i.e., 3 & 4 Eng, 1 & 2 Eng). NOTE: Jeppesen charts depict the lowest authorized take-off minimums as defined by the criteria. However, principal operations inspectors may issue OpSpecs authorizations with higher take-off minimums to individual operators. CHART SAMPLE Depending on the authorized lower than standard take-off minimums, the number of RVR sensors, and any additional climb requirements for each runway, it may be necessary to depict the take-off minimums in more than one band. In this example, most runways have three RVR sensor reports. Two of the runways depict the requirement for HUD (as well as CL & HIRL) for RVR 3. And two of the runways have only two RVR reports, with RVR 10 being the lowest authorized take-off minimum. Even though these runways share the same basic take-off minimums, they are shown separately due to one runway having a minimum climb requirement. 28 BRIEFING BULLETINS UNITED STATES LOWER THAN STANDARD TAKE-OFF MINIMUMS – CHANGES TO JEPPESEN CHARTS Example of an airport's take-off minimums with multiple authorizations and equipment requirements for lower than standard take-off operations 1 212004067000 BRIEFING BULLETINS AERODROME OPERATING MINIMUMS ACCORDING TO EU-OPS 1 29 AERODROME OPERATING MINIMUMS ACCORDING TO EU-OPS 1 General Information The European Union published the 2nd Amendment of EU-OPS 1 (Annex III to Regulation 3922/91). http://eur-lex.europa.eu/JOIndex.do?ihmlang=en This EU-OPS 1 is the replacement of JAR-OPS 1 and contains a new method to determine Aerodrome Operating Minimums (AOM). The new method will become the European Standard on 16 July 2011 at the latest. According to ICAO Doc 9365-AN910 (Manual of All Weather Operations) and Annex 6 to the Convention on International Civil Aviation it is the operator’s responsibility to establish Aerodrome Operating Minimums which need to be approved by the responsible authority. The Appendix 1 (new) to OPS 1.430 describes the method which has to be used by all European Operators and within the European Union (EU). Jeppesen will support your operations by replacing the current JAR-OPS AOM with the new Standard. Due to the huge number of airports (1000+) and procedures (5000+) the conversion could only be done on a step by step basis. It is our intent to have all procedures revised to the new Standard AOM by 16 July 2011 for all airports within – European Union member states, – European Aviation Safety Agency (EASA) member states, – Joint Aviation Authorities (JAA) member states and – for other states where the currently used JAR-OPS AOM will be replaced. In May 2008 we asked commercial operators about their plans for this EU-OPS implementation. The following items are directly related to the results of that survey: a. All non-precision approaches will be reviewed to show CDFA (Continuous Descent Final Approach) profile and minimums. b. In case of CDFA only, a DA(H) is shown instead of the previously published MDA(H). The missed approach point is still shown according to state source but the missed approach initiation arrow is moved to the point where the DA(H) is reached. c. Jeppesen charted AOM do not include an add-on when current MDA(H) is replaced by DA(H). Pilots are reminded to check their operator’s Flight Operations Manual or similar documents whether they have to apply an add-on or not. d. For CDFA profiles, Jeppesen will show DME vs altitude bands, distance vs altitude bands or timing vs altitude tables. If not provided by the State source those altitudes will be calculated by Jeppesen. e. Non-CDFA profiles and minimums will be shown in exceptional cases only and may be combined with CDFA profiles and minimums. f. For CAT I operations with full approach light system (FALS) Jeppesen will include RVR values below 750m together with the higher values. Pilots are reminded to check their operator’s Flight Operations Manual or similar documents to fulfill the requirements for using the lower RVR values. g. Lower than standard CAT I minimums are charted on request on customer tailored charts. h. Other than standard CAT II minimums will be charted if the procedure is approved for such operations by the state of the airport. i. Circling minimums must not be lower than the minimums of preceding instrument approach procedure. If circling MDA(H) and/or visibility must be raised due to higher straight-in values, only one set of circling minimums is shown which relates to the highest straight-in minimums. Legend and ATC Pages Jeppesen is currently reviewing the final version of this EU-OPS to replace the current ATC-601 (JAA AOM) pages with a summarization of the new EU-OPS Aerodrome Operating Minimums. In addition we will update the current Introduction 171 – 173 (JAR-OPS 1 AOM) pages to explain how the new minimums and the CDFA profiles are depicted on Jeppesen charts. Conversion Plan The publication of the new Standard of AOM will be done along with normal chart revision activity. It is planned to convert all procedures of an affected airport at the same time. We will create special minimums pages, numbered 10-9S (similar to current 10-9X JAR-OPS pages), as an interim solution. Jeppesen will maintain or create JAR-OPS 1 minimums pages on customer request only. Please contact your Jeppesen customer service representative for any special requirements, such as airline tailored minimums, airborne equipment considerations or your conversion priorities. 30 BRIEFING BULLETINS AERODROME OPERATING MINIMUMS ACCORDING TO EU-OPS 1 Charts with JAR-OPS label The JAR-OPS label on Jeppesen approach and airport charts indicates that the minimums correspond to the rules described in Appendix 1 (old) to OPS 1.430 of the EU-OPS 1. Future Outlook The FAA will also publish new minimums which will be harmonized with the EU ones. Jeppesen’s intention is to replace the current ECOMS and JAR-OPS Aerodrome Operating Minimums with the future harmonized version on a world-wide basis. BRIEFING BULLETINS APPLICATION OF STATE NOTAMS TO JEPPESEN AERONAUTICAL CHARTS AND DATABASE 31 Application of State NOTAMs to Jeppes en Aeronautical Charts and Database GENERAL The purpose of this bulletin is to convey to our valued customers our current policy regarding the applications of chart and database changes based on state issued NOTAMs. The following is a summary of that policy and is specific to the processing of state issued NOTAMs only. BACKGROUND The “Notice to Airmen” (NOTAM) has been an integral part of the system for disseminating critical aeronautical information world wide for a very long time. Typically, NOTAMs publicize aeronautical information that is timecritical as well as temporary in nature. NOTAMs are also used when the information is not known sufficiently in advance to allow for chart publication and/or database extraction. NOTAMs communicate aeronautical information that has a direct impact on a pilot's flight preparation. It is for this reason that all pilots are required by regulation to review all available NOTAMs applicable to their particular flight. The following policy regarding the application of NOTAM information to Jeppesen products is based on that fundamental principal. NOTAM POLICY All Permanent or “P” NOTAMs are analyzed when received and applied to the Jeppesen charts and/or database as appropriate, based on normal Jeppesen workflow and process criteria. Temporary NOTAMs published without an active duration, or those published with an active duration of 90 days or less, are not analyzed for possible application due to their short life span and volatility. It would be part of a pilot's normal flight preparation to familiarize themselves with this type of NOTAM. Temporary NOTAMs published with an active duration of more than 90 days will be analyzed and may be applied to the charts and/or database after considering its overall applicability. Not all temporary NOTAMs with an active duration of more than 90 days are applied to the charts and/or database. The decision regarding when to apply a temporary NOTAM to the charts and/or database is based on a wide range of factors, and is done on a case by case basis. Again, based on a normal pre flight process, pilots would access these NOTAMs prior to flight. NOTE: Jeppesen scans all Temporary NOTAMs upon receipt to assess a basic level of impact. Special consideration is given to Temporary NOTAMs that have a direct effect on permanent source documents. We continue striving to supply you, our valued customers, with highly accurate, on time flight information. The above policy helps us meet that lofty goal. We look forward to fulfilling your aeronautical charting and database needs now and in the future. 32 BRIEFING BULLETINS INTRODUCTION OF PROCEDURE AMENDMENT REFERENCE DATE (U.S. FAA APPROACH CHARTS) INTRODUCTION OF PROCEDURE AMENDMENT REFERENCE DATE (U.S. FAA APPROACH CHARTS) Background Flight operations involving the use of an electronic navigation database require that the database be current. Situations sometimes arise which involve the need to operate with an expired or out-of-date database. To cover these contingencies, regulatory documents (FAA and international) address the requirement to validate the navigation database to ensure the accuracy of the navigational data by referencing aeronautical charts, as well as the prohibition on the use of any instrument procedure if it has been amended. According to the guidance, when confronted with a need to operate with an expired database, an acceptable means of compliance is to compare aeronautical charts ― new to old ― to the corresponding procedure in the database in order to verify the accuracy of navigation fixes and related navigation information prior to departure. If an amended chart has been published for the procedure and it includes changes to procedural information, the out-of-date database cannot be used to conduct the operation. Since pilots do not typically carry expired charts, and because it is very time consuming, this method of verification is impractical. Additionally, because navigation fixes can be moved without an associated name change, comparing charts to the database would not assure that a fix had not been relocated. In the United States, the FAA assigns a procedure Amendment Number to each standard instrument approach procedure (SIAP) and subsequent modification. This number is shown in the lower left corner of Jeppesen Airway Manual approach charts. A pilot can determine if procedural information has changed by checking the chart Amendment Number against the expired chart Amendment Number. However, approach charts are often updated for reasons other than procedural changes, such as for communication changes. Subsequent chart updates might involve a new effective date. The result is that there is no easy way to determine when a procedural change was last applied to the chart. This is an important factor when attempting to compare the date of the procedural information on the chart to the corresponding information in a navigation database and its AIRAC Cycle date. Purpose To simplify and improve the chart–to–database validation process, a Procedure Amendment Reference Date will be added to U.S. FAA approach charts beginning with the 22 October 2009 effective date (AIRAC Cycle 0911). The inclusion of the Procedure Amendment Reference Date on U.S. approach charts is intended to assist pilots in determining the currency of individual procedures contained in their navigation database. Unlike the chart effective date which informs pilots of the effectivity of any change to any information on the chart, the Procedure Amendment Reference Date, in conjunction with the Amendment Number, identifies when procedural information was last amended on the chart. This includes flight paths, courses, and altitudes which correspond to the coded procedure in the navigation database. The Procedure Amendment Reference Date helps a pilot determine if a procedure amendment has been applied – and WHEN. It also reduces the need to perform a detailed comparison of new charts to old. The Procedure Amendment Reference Date applies to U.S. SIAPs only, and is changed only when the procedure Amendment Number is up-numbered by official FAA sources. The Procedure Amendment Reference Date will not change unless the Amendment Number changes. This may result in a chart revision or effective date that differs from the Procedure Amendment Reference Date. In summary, if the Procedure Amendment Reference Date falls on or after the expiry date of the navigation database, the procedure should not be flown using the out-of-date database. IMPORTANT NOTE: This change is NOT intended to promote the use of expired databases. It is the responsibility of the pilot to comply with all applicable regulations. Application to Airway Manual Approach Charts (U.S. Only) Beginning with the 22 October 2009 effective date (AIRAC cycle 0911), the Procedure Amendment Reference Date will be added to U.S. FAA approach charts on an as-revised basis. The date will be positioned outside the lower left margin on approach charts along with the TERPS procedure design criteria label and the procedure Amendment Number. The application of this date will be forward-looking and not retro-active. It will therefore take time before all approach charts in the U.S. include a Procedure Amendment Reference Date. BRIEFING BULLETINS INTRODUCTION OF PROCEDURE AMENDMENT REFERENCE DATE (U.S. FAA APPROACH CHARTS) 33 1253280735000 Chart – Navigation Database Decision Process The following diagram illustrates the decision process for determining if a specific approach procedure can be used from an out-of-date database. The assumption below is that an out-of-date database is being compared to current paper or electronic charts. 1 253280735000 34 BRIEFING BULLETINS SOUTH CHINA SEA RVSM FLIGHT LEVEL ALLOCATIONS SOUTH CHINA SEA RVSM FLIGHT LEVEL ALLOCATIONS This Briefing Bulletin is primarily intended to inform customers of the RVSM Flight Levels used for the 6 UniDirectional RNAV airways within the South China Sea region. The table below lists the use of both odd and even RVSM flight levels in the same direction of flight which do not comply with the Single Alternate Flight Level Orientation Scheme (FLOS) listed in ICAO Annex 2 Appendix 3. The direction of flight is indicated by the listed order of the FIR’s. Airway ID L625 L642 M767 M771 N884 N892 FIR Singapore (WSJC) Hochiminh (VVTS) Manila (RPHI) Hong Kong (VHHK) Sanya (ZJSA) Hochiminh (VVTS) Singapore (WSJC) Manila (RPHI) Singapore (WSJC) Singapore (WSJC) Hochiminh (VVTS) Sanya (ZJSA) Hong Kong (VHHK) Singapore (WSJC) Manila (RPHI) Taipei (RCAA) Manila (RPHI) Sanya (ZJSA) Hochiminh (VVTS) Singapore (WSJC) Begin Point TOMAN AKMON ARESI Cheng Chau VOR EPKAL EXOTO ESPOB Jomalig VOR TEGID Mersing VOR DUDIS 34BC Mileage Break DOSUT Mersing VOR LAXOR Hengchun VOR KABAM MIGUG MONBO MELAS End Point AKMON ARESI (RPHI) MEVIN EPKAL EXOTO ESPOB Mersing VOR TEGID TOMAN DUDIS 34BC Mileage Break DOSUT Cheng Chau VOR LAXOR LEBIX KABAM MIGUG MONBO MELAS Mersing VOR RVSM Flight Levels FL310, FL320, FL350, FL360, FL390, FL400 FL310, FL320, FL350, FL360, FL390, FL400 FL310, FL320, FL350, FL360, FL390, FL400 FL310, FL320, FL350, FL360, FL390, FL400 FL310, FL320, FL350, FL360, FL390, FL400 FL310, FL320, FL350, FL360, FL390, FL400 In addition to the RVSM Flight Levels listed above, the following RVSM level exceptions apply to areas within the South China Sea region: Hochiminh (VVTS) FIR: W1 Noibai VOR – Tansonnhat VOR: Southbound levels = FL280, FL300, FL320, FL340, FL360, FL380, FL400 Northbound levels = FL290, FL310, FL330, FL350, FL370, FL390, FL410 W2 Namha VOR – Anloc NDB: Southbound levels = FL280, FL300, FL320, FL340, FL360, FL380, FL400 Northbound levels = FL290, FL310, FL330, FL350, FL370, FL390, FL410 Manila (RPHI) FIR: All routes which cross the 6 Uni-Directional RNAV routes listed above: Eastbound levels = FL 290, FL330, FL370, FL410 Westbound levels = FL300, FL340, FL380 Singapore (WSJC) FIR: L644 DUDIS CRP – KIKOR CRP: Southbound levels = FL290, FL330, FL370, FL410 N875 ENREP CRP – ARUPA CRP: Southbound levels = FL290, FL330, FL370, FL410 W36 Tanjung Pinang VOR – GOBIK CRP: Southbound levels = FL290, FL330, FL370, FL410 Taipei (RCAA) FIR: B348 Hengchun VOR – POTIB CRP: Southbound levels = FL300, FL340, FL380 Northbound levels = FL290, FL310, FL330, FL350, FL370, FL390, FL410 G86 Hengchun VOR – KAPLI CRP: BRIEFING BULLETINS SOUTH CHINA SEA RVSM FLIGHT LEVEL ALLOCATIONS 35 Eastbound levels = FL290, FL330, FL370, FL390, FL410 Westbound levels = FL300, FL340, FL380, FL400 The RVSM Flight Levels listed in this Briefing Bulletin will be depicted on all affected Enroute Charts as the charts are revised. 36 BRIEFING BULLETINS AIRLINE CHART ENHANCEMENT AIRLINE CHART ENHANCEMENT MSA Depiction on Approach Chart Plan View Dear valued customer, Over the past year, Jeppesen has been actively performing market research capturing the Voice of the Customer specifically in relation to the CAO Airline Approach Charts. As a result of the customer comments, suggestions and direct feedback, Jeppesen is pleased to announce an enhancement to the Airline Approach Chart. Beginning with 26 November 2010 Revision Jeppesen Airline Approach Charts will depict the Minimum Sector Altitude (MSA) in the Plan View. This enhancement will deliver the following benefits: – MSA depicted to-scale in the Plan View for better situational awareness – Keeping the MSA in the Briefing Strip for familiarity and to accommodate complex MSA’s – MSA’s in the Briefing Strip and Plan View are depicted in the same color Airline Approach Charts will be updated with this enhancement on a routinely basis. 1 288084443000 BRIEFING BULLETINS AIRLINE CHART ENHANCEMENT 37 Unlike the Briefing Strip MSA view, which shows the complete MSA coverage, the Plan View will only contain the MSA information affecting the charted area: 1 288084443000 38 BRIEFING BULLETINS ENROUTE/AREA CHARTS – NAVAID SYMBOLOGY Enroute/Area Char ts – Navaid Sy mbology Jeppesen actively participates in industry working groups and carefully evaluates feedback from the customers we serve whose operations represent all segments of aviation around the world. We also realize the majority of our customers use traditional forms of navigation charts in addition to other electronic navigation displays, or that many plan to transition from (replace) the use of traditional navigation charts in favor of electronic displays of the same aeronautical information. We plan to implement new symbols into our dynamic electronic Enroute applications, including new symbols representing VHF and LF navigation aids (navaids). The new navaid symbols we’ll be converting to conform to widely accepted practice and are supported by human factors studies involving pilot recognition. They are simpler, take up less space and offer improved recognition. In consideration of several factors, we are pleased to announce we will also be modifying our Airway Manual Enroute and Area charts to reflect those same VHF and LF navaid symbols. A matrix showing the change in symbology is provided below. Converting our existing library of Enroute and Area charts to those same symbols will help our customers in general, especially those who eventually transition from traditional pre-composed Enroute charts to our new dynamic electronic displays. Pilots familiar with government produced charts and/or have military flying experience will quickly recognize these symbols. Advantages of the new navaid symbols are: – Simplification (less detail) – Improved Distinction between VHF navaid types (civil and military) – Ease of Recognition (established and widespread use) – Reduced Size of Compass Rose (less congestion) – Removal of North Arrow (no longer needed for manual plotting purposes) – Compulsory Reporting Status incorporated into symbol designs (filled symbol) These new symbols will begin to appear on Airway Manual Enroute and Area charts in early 2011 on an as-revised basis. NOTE: Airway Manual Terminal charts are not affected at this time. BRIEFING BULLETINS ENROUTE/AREA CHARTS – NAVAID SYMBOLOGY 39 1 293655951000 40 BRIEFING BULLETINS FAR EAST HIGH/LOW ALTITUDE ENROUTE SERIES IMPROVEMENT Far Eas t High/Low Altitude Enroute Series Improvement Jeppesen is pleased to announce changes to the Far East High/Low Enroute Chart series. The partial series redesign provides improved use of existing charts as well as the addition of a new chart, FE (H/L) 7/8. Improvements include: – FE (H/L) 7/8: This is a new chart in the series which is designed to cover areas of overlapping charts in an improved scale of 1”=30NM. In addition, the route structure between Northern Japan and western portions of Russia are included. – FE (H/L) 11/12: This chart was previously Limited Distribution and is now a part of the Far East Series Jeppesen Airway Manual. – FE (H/L) 7/8: This chart has been renamed FE (H/L) 13/BLK. The old FE (H/L) 7 is now FE (H/L) 13 and the existing FE (H/L) 8 will be removed from the Far East Series. There are no changes to the scale or content of FE (H/L) 13. The image below represents the new layout for the Far East High/Low Series. 1325107924982 chapter 42 CHAPTER Jeppesen Notices, Alerts and Bulletins Dissemination of Product-Related Information Jeppesen is committed to delivering the highest quality and most advanced products and services in the industry. Our ongoing commitment to quality includes using various communication channels to disseminate the latest information that may affect the Jeppesen products and services you rely upon. Updates are posted online at jeppesen.com under “Notices & Alerts.” Here you will also find RSS feeds, which are an efficient way to monitor the latest information from Jeppesen. Issues related to our products or services are communicated using one or more standard notification methods. The method we use depends on the product or service, as well as the criticality of the communication. Our Alerts contain the most critical changes and issues. The following is a brief description of our notification methods. NavData Alert NavData Alerts are used to inform NavData subscribers, including airlines, avionics equipment companies, and aviation service providers, of changes and issues related to databases distributed by Jeppesen. Alerts are intended to supplement the NavData Change Notices by disseminating time-critical information that could have a significant affect on flight operations. Alerts contain safety-of-flight or operationally significant information including—but not limited to—incorrect turn directions, altitudes, bearing changes, etc. This information typically affects Jeppesen's master database; however, each change or issue can be isolated to specific avionics equipment. To determine whether the change or issue affects your database, you should check with your individual avionics equipment manufacturer. Chart Alert Chart Alerts are used to quickly disseminate flight-critical information that affects Jeppesen's Standard paper or electronic (JeppView) Airway Manual products. Occasionally, changes cannot be issued to customers through our normal paper or electronic production schedules prior to effectivity. Chart Alerts allow Jeppesen to immediately address these changes through either e-mail or our website as soon as they come to our attention. Airport Moving Map (AMM) Alert Airport Moving Map Alerts are published to advise users of significant issues in Jeppesen Airport Moving Map data that may affect aircraft ground operations. These Alerts are distributed to affected Airport Moving Map customers. NavData Change Notice NavData Change Notices are directed at customers who receive Jeppesen NavData for use in avionics equipment and flight planning systems, airline operations, and other systems that provide aviation information. They are published weekly and include updates and corrections to data and procedures that are not yet reflected in Jeppesen's navigation databases. NavData Change Notices contain narrative explanations of the changes that affect the data coded in Jeppesen's current NavData cycle. Customers who receive an Internet update service from Jeppesen may also receive NavData Change Notices as part of their service. Chart Change Notice Chart Change Notices are directed at customers who receive Jeppesen Terminal and Enroute charts. They are included in the revision updates that are mailed to you and are also posted on jeppesen.com under “Notices & Alerts.” Each notice contains a narrative explanation of changes affecting the current Jeppesen chart. Most of these changes are either temporary in nature with a known duration, or are not considered operationally critical. A Graphic Chart Change Notice may be issued to depict a more significant change to a Jeppesen Enroute or Area chart. A Chart Change Notice will remain in effect until a significant change causes the chart to be reissued. NavData Notice NavData Notices are issued to airframe and avionics equipment manufacturers to announce additional database capabilities or new datasets that will affect the output of navigational data. NavData Notices are intended for Jeppesen's Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) partners only. Jeppesen's Product Management department may also issue notices highlighting any changes made to Jeppesen Internet update services, such as data content, modifications to data card sizing or system-specific information issued by an avionics equipment manufacturer. End users of the data may contact their avionics equipment providers with questions regarding availability of data in their specific units. Briefing Bulletin Briefing Bulletins provide you with explanations of modifications to Jeppesen services that are being implemented in response to changes suggested by customers or required by governing authorities. In particular, Briefing Bulletins explain how changes will affect Jeppesen's services. Customer Service Bulletin Customer Service Bulletins contain information that educates you on the content of our products and services. Additionally, Customer Service Bulletins may be issued to inform customers about major events where significant short-term changes or restrictions to flight operations will be in effect. CHAPTER 43 Please note that the Notices, Alerts and Bulletins defined above only refer to Jeppesen products and do not replace State published NOTAMs. All communication channels listed above are posted on jeppesen.com under the “Notices & Alerts” section. We hope this bulletin clarifies the various product and service updates you may receive from Jeppesen. If you have any questions please contact your account representative or customer service at: The Americas 800.621.5377 E-mail: captain@jeppesen.com United Kingdom, Middle East & Africa +44 1293 842404 0800 085 5377 (UK & Ireland) E-mail: uk-services@jeppesen.com Sincerely, Jeppesen Standards and Product Management Europe & Asia +49 6102 5070 E-mail: fra-services@jeppesen.com Australia +61 2 6120 2999 E-mail: customerservice@jeppesen.com.au FLIGHT SUPPLEMENT BOOKLET Introduction Definitions and Abbreviations 46 DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS AQ Airport Qualification/Familiarization AIRPORT QUALIFICATION PAGES U.S. Federal Aviation Regulations (FAR) Part 121.445 specifies pilot in command special airport qualifications. The (FAA) Administrator may determine that certain airports (due to items such as surrounding terrain, obstructions, or complex approach or departure procedures) are special airports requiring special airport qualifications. These requirements do not apply when an entry to that airport (including a takeoff or a landing) is being made if the ceiling at that airport is at least 1,000 feet above the lowest MEA or MOCA, or initial approach altitude prescribed for the instrument approach procedure for that airport, and the visibility at that airport is at least 3 miles. At other times, no certificate holder may use any person, nor may any person serve, as pilot in command to or from an airport determined to require special airport qualifications unless, within the preceding 12 calendar months: a. The pilot in command or second in command has made an entry to that airport (including a takeoff and landing) while serving as a pilot flight crewmember; or b. The pilot in command has qualified by using pictorial means acceptable to the Administrator for that airport. Airport qualification pages, when approved by the certificate holder’s Principal Operations Inspector (POI), provide an acceptable means of complying with the above requirement. The list of special airports is found in the Handbook Bulletin for Air Transportation (HBAT) 03-07. The list is also accessible through the following web site: http://www.opspecs.com/ops/SpecialPICAirports/ AIRPORT FAMILIARIZATION PAGES Airport familiarization pages are similar to qualification pages, except the familiarization airports are not currently considered a special airport under FAR 121.445. However as with qualification pages, familiarization pages depict airports that are also unique due to items such as surrounding terrain, obstructions, or complex approach or departure procedures. ICAO DOC 7300, Annex 6 specifies that a pilot in command must be currently qualified to be used on a route or route segment. Each such pilot shall demonstrate to the operator an adequate knowledge of aerodromes which are to be used including such things as knowledge of terrain, minimum safe altitudes, and seasonal meteorological conditions. In another provision, an operator may qualify a pilot in command to land at an aerodrome by means of an adequate pictorial presentation. According to the state authority's recommendation or on the operator's individual decision, both airport qualification and airport familiarization pages can be used for professional familiarization of specific airports. DESCRIPTION OF SERVICE The front side of the overview page provides an aerial image of the airport. The overview image will include key areas of interest surrounding the airport, such as obstructions that could affect flight operations. Below the image is a graphic presentation of the airport and surrounding area. The graphic portion includes airways, navigation aids, general terrain contours, water, roads and city patterns. The graphic also includes an overview arrow that indicates the direction from which the image is viewed. The reverse side of the overview page provides a textual description of the airport and its surrounding area. The textual description points out key items of interest about the airport, as well as the surrounding area. An annual weather table is also provided on the second half of the page. This table is based on seasonal data and represents average monthly values. Runway pages portray the airport’s primary runways. The top portion of the page provides a view of the approach end of the runway, as seen during the landing phase of flight. Below is a narrative that provides specific information and unique features relating to the runway. The reverse side of the page provides the same type of information for the opposite end of the runway. All airport pages are updated as significant changes dictate. In addition, Airport Qualification locations are reissued every 24 months. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS EU-OPS 47 J eppesen Airway Manual vers us EU-OPS 1 Requirements JEPPESEN AIRWAY MANUAL VERSUS EU-OPS 1 REQUIREMENTS The following table helps to identify the sections of the Jeppesen Airway Manual which comply with EU-OPS 1. For further details, please refer to EU-OPS, Subpart P, Appendix 1 to OPS 1.1045 Part C, Route and Aerodrome Instructions and Information. EU-OPS (Appendix 1 to OPS 1.1045 Part C) a) Minimum flight level/Minimum flight altitude Jeppesen Airway Manual a. Enroute-, Area-, SID/STAR charts. b. INTRODUCTION section, Enroute Chart Legend. b) Operating minima for departure-, destinationand alternate aerodromes a. Approach-, Airport charts b. 10-9S pages (EU-OPS Minimums) c. ATC section "EU-OPS Aerodrome Operating Minimums (AOM)" c) Communication facilities and navigation aids a. b. c. d. d) Runway data and aerodrome facilities a. AIRPORT DIRECTORY section b. Airport charts e) Approach, missed approach and departure procedures including noise abatement procedures a. b. c. d. f) COM-failure procedures a. EMERGENCY section b. ATC section, Emergency and Communications Failure Procedures g) Search and rescue facilities in the area over which the aeroplane is to be flown a. EMERGENCY section, Search and Rescue b. ATC section c. AIRPORT DIRECTORY h) A description of the aeronautical charts that must be carried on board in relation to the type of flight and the route to be flown, including the method to check their validity. i) Availability of aeronautical info and MET services a. INTRODUCTION section, Chart Legend j) Enroute COM/NAV procedures k) Aerodrome categorization for flight crew competence qualification l) Special aerodrome limitations (performance limitations and operating procedures) RADIO AIDS section Approach-, Airport charts SID/STAR charts Enroute charts Approach charts SIDs & STARs Noise pages ATC section 1. Noise Abatement Procedures 2. State pages a. METEOROLOGY section b. Enroute charts c. AIRPORT DIRECTORY a. ATC section, State pages b. ENROUTE section c. Enroute charts This is not part of the Standard Airway Manual as it is airline specific. However it can be part of a Tailored Manual. Special Jeppesen service is the Airport Familiarization/Qualification program Cannot be part of the Standard Airway Manual, as it is aircraft/performance specific. However, Jeppesen is providing its OpsData Service for these purposes Jeppesen CHART CHANGE NOTICES provide flight crews with temporary and permanent changes between revision of charts. They are issued for each Airway Manual coverage with every revision. Jeppesen NAVDATA CHANGE NOTICES are issued for each Navigation Data Base geographic area. They provide flight crews with temporary changes affecting their FMCS or Navigation Computer Systems. They also provide permanent changes effective between the 28 day AIRAC cycle. Both services do not replace AIS NOTAM Services in any manner. 48 DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS EU-OPS REVISION SERVICE Aeronautical Chart Services are available either as the Standard Airway Manual Service or the customer defined Tailored Route Manual Service. Depending on geographical coverage, customer defined requirements or other reasons both types of Aeronautical Chart Services may be set up for weekly, bi-weekly or four-weekly revisions to be kept current. Bi-weekly and four-weekly revisions may be supplemented by weekly revisions if it is required to get important changes as soon as possible to our customers. Each revision is accompanied by a revision letter which indicates the necessary actions to keep the Chart Service current. The Record of Revisions page in front of the Manual needs to be signed after the completion of each revision. A consecutive revision numbering assures that the customer can see that all published revisions for this particular Chart Service are received. The first revision letter in a calendar year also indicates which was the last revision for this Chart Service of the past year. An ICAO developed AIRAC (Aeronautical Information Regulation and Control) system (Annex 15, Chapter 6-1 and Doc 8126, Chapter 2-6) assures that all significant changes are made available prior the effective date. Governing authorities are required to make defined significant changes effective only on certain Thursdays in intervals of 28 days, the so-called AIRAC dates. Furthermore are the governing authorities required to publish any changes under the AIRAC system with defined lead times allowing the commercial aeronautical chart providers to update and distribute their products in advance of the effective date. Not all Aeronautical Chart Services must get regular updates as this also depends if there are charts to be revised per the Jeppesen revision criteria which have been developed over decades in cooperation with our customers. Whenever charts cannot be revised, e.g. information not received early enough or clarifications to the governing authorities must be resolved prior publication, respective information is distributed by the means of Chart Change Notices which are also available on-line to all customers via our website. CHECKLISTS Checklists are issued at regular intervals to enable all Manual Service holders to check the up-to-date status and the completeness on the material subscribed to. Anytime, an updated copy of the checklist can be requested. Furthermore are on-line and off-line electronic Chart Services available which can be used to check the paper based Chart Service currency against. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS GLOSSARY 49 Glos sary This glossary provides definitions that are unique and abbreviations commonly used in Jeppesen publications. No attempt has been made to list all the terms of basic aeronautical nomenclature. Because of the international nature of flying, terms used by the FAA (USA) are included when they differ from International Civil Aviation Organization (ICAO) definitions. A vertical bar, that is omitted on all new pages, tables of contents, tabular listings and graphics, indicates changes. DEFINITIONS ACCELERATE STOP DISTANCE AVAILABLE (ASDA) — The length of the take-off run available plus the length of the stopway, if provided. ACROBATIC FLIGHT — Manoeuvres intentionally performed by an aircraft involving an abrupt change in its attitude, an abnormal attitude, or an abnormal variation in speed. ADEQUATE VIS REF (Adequate Visual Reference) — Runway markings or runway lighting that provides the pilot with adequate visual reference to continuously identify the take-off surface and maintain directional control throughout the take-off run. ADS AGREEMENT — An ADS reporting plan which establishes the conditions of ADS data reporting (i.e., data required by the air traffic services unit and frequency of ADS reports which have to be agreed to prior to the provision of the ADS services). NOTE: The terms of the agreement will be exchanged between the ground system and the aircraft by means of a contract, or a series of contracts. ADS-C AGREEMENT — A reporting plan which establishes the conditions of ADS-C data reporting (i.e. data required by the air traffic services unit and frequency of ADS-C reports which have to be agreed to prior to using ADS-C in the provision of air traffic services). NOTE: The terms of the agreement will be exchanged between the ground system and the aircraft by means of a contract, or a series of contracts. ADS CONTRACT — A means by which the terms of an ADS agreement will be exchanged between the ground system and the aircraft, specifying under what conditions ADS reports would be initiated, and what data would be contained in the reports. NOTE: The term “ADS contract” is a generic term meaning variously, ADS event contract, ADS demand contract, ADS periodic contract or an emergency mode. Ground forwarding of ADS reports may be implemented between ground systems. ADVISORY AIRSPACE — An airspace of defined dimensions, or designated route, within which air traffic advisory service is available. ADVISORY ROUTE (ADR) — A designated route along which air traffic advisory service is available. NOTE: Air traffic control service provides a much more complete service than air traffic advisory service; advisory areas and routes are therefore not established within controlled airspace, but air traffic advisory service may be provided below and above control areas. ADVISORY SERVICE — Advice and information provided by a facility to assist pilots in the safe conduct of flight and aircraft movement. AERODROME — A defined area on land or water (including any buildings, installations and equipment) intended to be used either wholly or in part for the arrival, departure and surface movement of aircraft. NOTE: The term “aerodrome” where used in the provisions relating to flight plans and ATS messages is intended to cover also sites other than aerodromes which may be used by certain types of aircraft; e.g., helicopters or balloons. AERODROME CLIMATOLOGICAL SUMMARY — Concise summary of specified meteorological elements at an aerodrome, based on statistical data. AERODROME CLIMATOLOGICAL TABLE — Table providing statistical data on the observed occurrence of one or more meteorological elements at an aerodrome. AERODROME CONTROL SERVICE — Air traffic control service for aerodrome traffic. AERODROME CONTROL TOWER — A unit established to provide air traffic control service to aerodrome traffic. AERODROME ELEVATION — The elevation of the highest point of the landing area. AERODROME FLIGHT INFORMATION SERVICE (AFIS) — A directed traffic information and operational information service provided within an aerodrome flight information zone, to all radio equipped aircraft, to assist in the safe and efficient conduct of flight. AERODROME METEOROLOGICAL OFFICE — An office, located at an aerodrome, designated to provide meteorological service for international air navigation. AERODROME REFERENCE CODE — A simple method for interrelating the numerous specifications concerning the characteristics of aerodromes so as to provide a series of aerodromes facilities that are suitable for the aeroplanes that are intended to operate at the aerodrome. The aerodrome reference code — code number and letter, which are selected for aerodrome planning purposes, have the meanings assigned to them as indicated in the table below: 50 Code Element 1 Aeroplane Code Reference Field Number Length (1) (2) 1 Less than 800m 2 800m up to but not including 1200m 3 1200m up to but not including 1800m 4 1800m and over a) DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS GLOSSARY Code Element 2 Code Letter Wing Span Outer Main Gear Wheel Span a) (3) (4) (5) A Up to but not including 15m Up to but not including 4.5m B 15m up to but not including 24m 4.5m up to but not including 6m C D E F Distance between the outside edges of 24m up to but not including 36m 6m up to but not including 9m 36m up to but not including 52m 9m up to but not including 14m 52m up to but not including 65m 9m up to but not including 14m 65m up to but not including 80m 14m up to but not including 16m the main gear wheels. NOTE: Guidance on planning for aeroplanes with wing spans greater than 80m is given in the ICAO Doc. 9157 “Aerodrome Design Manual,” Parts 1 and 2. AERODROME TRAFFIC — All traffic on the manoeuvring area of an aerodrome and all aircraft flying in the vicinity of an aerodrome. NOTE: An aircraft is in the vicinity of an aerodrome when it is in, entering or leaving an aerodrome traffic circuit. AERODROME TRAFFIC CIRCUIT — The specified path to be flown by aircraft operating in the vicinity of an aerodrome. AERODROME TRAFFIC FREQUENCY (ATF) — A frequency designated at an uncontrolled airport. An ATF is used to ensure all radio equipped aircraft operating within the area, normally within a 5NM radius of the airport, are listening on a common frequency. The ATF is normally the ground station frequency. Where a ground station does not exist, a common frequency is designated. Radio call sign is that of the ground station, or where no ground station exists, a broadcast is made with the call sign “Traffic Advisory.” Jeppesen charts list the frequency and the area of use when other than the standard 5NM. AERODROME TRAFFIC ZONE (ATZ) — An airspace of detailed dimensions established around an aerodrome for the protection of aerodrome traffic. AERONAUTICAL FIXED SERVICE (AFS) — A telecommunication service between specified fixed points provided primarily for the safety of air navigation and for the regular, efficient and economical operation of air services. AERONAUTICAL FIXED STATION — A station in the aeronautical fixed service. AERONAUTICAL FIXED TELECOMMUNICATION NETWORK (AFTN) — A world-wide system of aeronautical fixed circuits provided, as part of the aeronautical fixed service, for the exchange of messages and/or digital data between aeronautical fixed stations having the same or compatible communications characteristics. AERONAUTICAL GROUND LIGHT — Any light specially provided as an aid to air navigation, other than a light displayed on an aircraft. AERONAUTICAL INFORMATION PUBLICATION (AIP) — A publication issued by or with the authority of a State and containing aeronautical information of a lasting character essential to air navigation. AERONAUTICAL METEOROLOGICAL STATION — A station designated to make observations and meteorological reports for use in international air navigation. AERONAUTICAL MOBILE SERVICE — A mobile service between aeronautical stations and aircraft stations, or between aircraft stations, in which survival craft stations may participate; emergency position-indicating radio beacon stations may also participate in this service on designated distress and emergency frequencies. AERONAUTICAL RADIO, INCORPORATED (ARINC) — An international radio network providing air-to-ground communications available on a subscription (fee) basis. AERONAUTICAL STATION — A land station in the aeronautical mobile service. In certain instances, an aeronautical station may be located, for example, on board ship or on a platform at sea. AERONAUTICAL TELECOMMUNICATION SERVICE — A telecommunication service provided for any aeronautical purpose. AERONAUTICAL TELECOMMUNICATION STATION — A station in the aeronautical telecommunication service. AIRBORNE COLLISION AVOIDANCE SYSTEM (ACAS) — An aircraft system based on secondary surveillance radar (SSR) transponder signals which operates independently of ground-based equipment to provide advice to the pilot on potential conflicting aircraft that are equipped with SSR transponders. AIRCRAFT — Any machine that can derive support in the atmosphere from the reactions of the air other than the reactions of the air against the earth’s surface. AIRCRAFT ADDRESS — A unique combination of 24 bits available for assignment to an aircraft for the purpose of air-ground communications, navigation and surveillance. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS GLOSSARY 51 AIRCRAFT APPROACH CATEGORY (USA TERPS) — A grouping of aircraft based on a speed of Vref, if specified, or if Vref is not specified, 1.3 VS0 at the maximum certificated landing weight. Vref, VS0, and the maximum certificated landing weight are those values as established for the aircraft by the certification authority of the country of registry. An aircraft shall fit in only one category. If it is necessary to maneuver at speeds in excess of the upper limit of a speed range for a category, the minimums for the next higher category must be used. For example, an aircraft which falls in Category A, but is circling to land at a speed in excess of 91 knots, should use the approach Category B minimums when circling to land. The categories are as follows: Category Category Category Category Category A B C D E Speed Speed Speed Speed Speed less than 91KT. 91KT or more but less than 121KT. 121KT or more but less than 141KT. 141KT or more but less than 166KT. 166KT or more. AIRCRAFT APPROACH CATEGORY (ICAO) — The ICAO table, depicted in the ATC section-200 series, indicates the specified range of handling speeds (IAS in Knots) for each category of aircraft to perform the maneuvers specified. These speed ranges have been assumed for use in calculating airspace and obstacle clearance for each procedure. AIRCRAFT IDENTIFICATION — A group of letters, figures or combination thereof which is either identical to, or the coded equivalent of, the aircraft call sign to be used in air-ground communications, and which is used to identify the aircraft in ground-ground air traffic services communications. AIRCRAFT – LARGE AIRCRAFT (LACFT) — Term used when referring to ICAO aircraft category DL standard dimensions: – wing span – more than 65m/213ft (max 80m/262ft); and/or – vertical distance between the flight parts of the wheels and the glide path antenna – more than 7m/23ft (max 8m/26ft). For precision approach procedures, the dimensions of the aircraft are also a factor for the calculation of the OCH. For category DL aircraft, additional OCA/H is provided, when necessary. AIRCRAFT OBSERVATION — The evaluation of one or more meteorological elements made from an aircraft in flight. AIRCRAFT PROXIMITY — A situation in which, in the opinion of a pilot or air traffic services personnel, the distance between aircraft as well as their relative positions and speed have been such that the safety of the aircraft involved may have been compromised. An aircraft proximity is classified as follows: Risk of Collision — The risk classification of an aircraft proximity in which serious risk of collision has existed. Safety not Assured — The risk classification of an aircraft proximity in which the safety of the aircraft may have been compromised. No Risk of Collision — The risk classification of an aircraft proximity in which no risk of collision has existed. Risk not Determined — The risk classification of an aircraft proximity in which insufficient information was available to determine the risk involved, or inconclusive or conflicting evidence precluded such determination. AIRCRAFT STATION — A mobile station in the aeronautical mobile service, other than a survival craft station, located on board an aircraft. AIR DEFENSE IDENTIFICATION ZONE (ADIZ) — The area of airspace over land or water, extending upward from the surface, within which the ready identification, the location, and the control of aircraft are required in the interest of national security. AIR-GROUND COMMUNICATION — Two-way communication between aircraft and stations or locations on the surface of the earth. AIR-GROUND CONTROL RADIO STATION — An aeronautical telecommunication station having primary responsibility for handling communications pertaining to the operation and control of aircraft in a given area. AIRMET INFORMATION — Information issued by a meteorological watch office concerning the occurrence or expected occurrence of specified en route weather phenomena which may affect the safety of low-level aircraft operations and which was not already included in the forecast issued for low-level flights in the flight information region concerned or sub-area thereof. AIRPORT — An area on land or water that is used or intended to be used for the landing and take-off of aircraft and includes its buildings and facilities, if any. AIRPORT ELEVATION/FIELD ELEVATION — The highest point of an airports usable runways measured in feet from mean sea level. In a few countries, the airport elevation is determined at the airport reference point. AIRPORT REFERENCE POINT (ARP) — A point on the airport designated as the official airport location. AIRPORT SURVEILLANCE RADAR (ASR) — Approach control radar used to detect and display an aircraft’s position in the terminal area. ASR provides range and azimuth information but does not provide elevation data. Coverage of the ASR can extend up to 60 miles. AIRPROX — The code word used in an air traffic incident report to designate aircraft proximity. 52 DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS GLOSSARY AIR-REPORT — A report from an aircraft in flight prepared in conformity with requirements for position and operational and/or meteorological reporting. NOTE: Details of the AIREP form are given in PANSATM (Doc 4444) and ATC section. AIR-TAXIING — Movement of a helicopter/VTOL above the surface of an aerodrome, normally in ground effect and at a ground speed normally less than 20KT (37kmh). NOTE: The actual height may vary, and some helicopters may require air-taxiing above 25ft (8m) AGL to reduce ground effect turbulence or provide clearance for cargo slingloads. AIR-TO-GROUND COMMUNICATION — One-way communication from aircraft to stations or locations on the surface of the earth. AIR TRAFFIC — All aircraft in flight or operating on the manoeuvring area of an aerodrome. AIR TRAFFIC ADVISORY SERVICE — A service provided within advisory airspace to ensure separation, in so far as practical, between aircraft which are operating on IFR flight plans. AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL ASSIGNED AIRSPACE (ATCAA) — Airspace of defined vertical/lateral limits, assigned by ATC, for the purpose of providing air traffic segregation between the specified activities being conducted within the assigned airspace and other IFR air traffic. AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL CLEARANCE — Authorization for an aircraft to proceed under conditions specified by an air traffic control unit. NOTE 1: For convenience, the term “air traffic control clearance” is frequently abbreviated to “clearance” when used in appropriate contexts. NOTE 2: The abbreviated term “clearance” may be prefixed by the words “taxi,” “take-off,” “departure,” “en route,” “approach” or “landing” to indicate the particular portion of flight to which the air traffic control clearance relates. AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL INSTRUCTION — Directives issued by air traffic control for the purpose of requiring a pilot to take a specific action. AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL SERVICE — A service provided for the purpose of: a. preventing collisions: 1. between aircraft; and 2. on the manoeuvring area between aircraft and obstructions; and b. expediting and maintaining an orderly flow of air traffic. AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL UNIT — A generic term meaning variously, area control centre, approach control office or aerodrome control tower. AIR TRAFFIC SERVICE (ATS) — A generic term meaning variously, flight information service, alerting service, air traffic advisory service, air traffic control service (area control service, approach control service or aerodrome control service). AIR TRAFFIC SERVICES AIRSPACES — Airspaces of defined dimensions, alphabetically designated, within which specific types of flights may operate and for which air traffic services and rules of operation are specified. NOTE: ATS airspaces are classified as Class “A” to “G.” AIR TRAFFIC SERVICES REPORTING OFFICE — A unit established for the purpose of receiving reports concerning air traffic services and flight plans submitted before departure. NOTE: An air traffic services reporting office may be established as a separate unit or combined with an existing unit, such as another air traffic services unit, or a unit of the aeronautical information service. AIR TRAFFIC SERVICES (ATS) ROUTE — A specified route designated for channeling the flow of traffic as necessary for provision of air traffic services. NOTE: The term “ATS Route” is used to mean variously, airway, advisory route, controlled or uncontrolled route, arrival or departure route, etc. AIR TRAFFIC SERVICES (ATS) ROUTE (USA) — A generic term that includes ‘VOR Federal airways’, ‘colored Federal airways’, ‘jet routes’, ‘Military Training Routes’, ‘named routes’, and ‘RNAV routes.’ AIR TRAFFIC SERVICES UNIT — A generic term meaning variously, air traffic control unit, flight information centre or air traffic services reporting office. AIRWAY (ICAO) — A control area or portion thereof established in the form of a corridor equipped with radio navigation aids. AIRWAY (USA) — A Class “E” airspace area established in the form of a corridor, the centerline of which is defined by radio navigational aids. ALERFA — The code word used to designate an alert phase. ALERT AREA (USA) — [see SPECIAL USE AIRSPACE (SUA)]. ALERTING SERVICE — A service provided to notify appropriate organizations regarding aircraft in need of search and rescue aid, and assist such organizations as required. ALERT PHASE — A situation wherein apprehension exists as to the safety of an aircraft and its occupants. ALLOCATION, ALLOCATE — Distribution of frequencies, SSR Codes, etc. to a State, unit or service, Distribution of 24-bit aircraft addresses to a State or common mark registering authority. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS GLOSSARY 53 ALONG TRACK DISTANCE — The distance measured from a point-in-space by systems using area navigation reference capabilities that are not subject to slant range errors. ALPHANUMERIC CHARACTERS (Alphanumerics) — A collective term for letters and figures (digits). ALTERNATE AERODROME (ICAO) — An aerodrome to which an aircraft may proceed when it becomes either impossible or inadvisable to proceed to or to land at the aerodrome of intended landing. Alternate aerodromes include the following: Take-Off Alternate — An alternate aerodrome at which an aircraft can land should this become necessary shortly after take-off and it is not possible to use the aerodrome of departure. En Route Alternate — An aerodrome at which an aircraft would be able to land after experiencing an abnormal or emergency condition while en route. Destination Alternate — An alternate aerodrome to which an aircraft may proceed should it become impossible or inadvisable to land at the aerodrome of intended landing. NOTE: The aerodrome from which a flight departs may also be an en route or a destination alternate aerodrome for that flight. ETOPS En Route Alternate — A suitable and appropriate alternate aerodrome at which an aeroplane would be able to land after experiencing an engine shutdown or other abnormal or emergency condition while en route in an ETOPS operation. ALTERNATE AIRPORT (USA) — An airport at which an aircraft may land if a landing at the intended airport becomes inadvisable. ALTIMETER SETTING — The barometric pressure reading used to adjust a pressure altimeter for variations in existing atmospheric pressure or to the standard altimeter setting (29.92 inches of mercury, 1013.2 hectopascals or 1013.2 millibars). QFE — The atmospheric pressure setting which, when set in the aircraft's altimeter, will cause the altimeter to read zero when at the reference datum of the airfield. QNE — The constant atmospheric pressure related to a reference datum of 29.92 inches of mercury or 1013.25 hectopascals or 1013.25 millibars, used for expressing flight levels. QHN — The atmospheric pressure setting which, when set in the aircraft's altimeter, will cause the altimeter to read altitudes referenced to mean sea level. ALTITUDE (ICAO) — The vertical distance of a level, a point, or an object considered as a point, measured from Mean Sea Level (MSL). ALTITUDE (USA) — The height of a level, point or object measured in feet Above Ground Level (AGL) or from Mean Sea Level (MSL). a. AGL Altitude — Altitude expressed in feet measured above ground level (QFE). b. MSL Altitude — Altitude expressed in feet measured from mean sea level (QNH). c. Indicated Altitude — The Altitude as shown by an altimeter. On a pressure barometric altimeter it is altitude as shown uncorrected for instrument error and uncompensated for variation from standard atmospheric conditions. APPROACH BAN — An approach procedure, for which continuation is prohibited beyond a specific point, and or specified height, if the reported visibility or RVR is below the minimum specified for that approach. APPROACH CONTROL OFFICE — A unit established to provide air traffic control service to controlled flights arriving at, or departing from, one or more aerodromes. APPROACH CONTROL SERVICE — Air traffic control service for arriving or departing controlled flights. APPROACH CONTROL UNIT — A unit established to provide air traffic control service to controlled flights arriving at, or departing from, one or more aerodromes. APPROACH FUNNEL — A specified airspace around a nominal approach path within which an aircraft approaching to land is considered to be making a normal approach. APPROACH PROCEDURE WITH VERTICAL GUIDANCE (APV) — [see INSTRUMENT APPROACH PROCEDURE (IAP)]. APPROACH SEQUENCE — The order in which two or more aircraft are cleared to approach to land at the aerodrome. APPROPRIATE ATS AUTHORITY — The relevant authority designated by the State responsible for providing air traffic services in the airspace concerned. APPROPRIATE AUTHORITY — a. Regarding flight over the high seas: The relevant authority of the State of Registry. b. Regarding flight other than over the high seas: The relevant authority of the State having sovereignty over the territory being overflown. APRON — A defined area, on a land aerodrome, intended to accommodate aircraft for purposes of loading or unloading passengers, mail or cargo, fueling, parking or maintenance. AREA CONTROL CENTRE — A unit established to provide air traffic control service to controlled flights in control areas under its jurisdiction. 54 DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS GLOSSARY AREA CONTROL SERVICE — Air traffic control service for controlled flights in control areas. AREA MINIMUM ALTITUDE (AMA) — The minimum altitude to be used under instrument meteorological conditions (IMC), that provides a minimum obstacle clearance within a specified area, normally formed by parallels and meridians. AREA NAVIGATION/RNAV — A method of navigation which permits aircraft operation on any desired flight path within the coverage of the station-referenced navigation aids or within the limits of the capability of self-contained aids, or a combination of these. AREA NAVIGATION ROUTE — An ATS route established for the use of aircraft capable of employing area navigation. ARRIVAL ROUTES — Routes on an instrument approach procedure by which aircraft may proceed from the enroute phase of flight to the initial approach fix. ASSIGNMENT, ASSIGN — Distribution of frequencies to stations. Distribution of SSR Codes or 24-bit addresses to aircraft. ATIS — ASOS INTERFACE — A switch that allows ASOS weather observations to be appended to the ATIS broadcast, making weather information available on the same (ATIS) frequency H24. When the tower is open, ATIS information and the hourly weather will be broadcast. When the tower is closed, one-minute weather information updates are broadcast, and the controller can add overnight ATIS information to the ASOS automated voice weather message. ATS ROUTE — A specified route designed for channeling the flow of traffic as necessary for the provision of air traffic services. NOTE 1: The term “ATS route” is used to mean variously, airway, advisory route, controlled or uncontrolled route, arrival or departure route, etc. NOTE 2: An ATS route is defined by route specifications which include an ATS route designator, the track to or from significant points (way-points), distance between significant points, reporting requirements and, as determined by the appropriate ATS authority, the lowest safe altitude. ATS SURVEILLANCE SERVICE — A term used to indicate a service provided directly by means of an ATS surveillance system. ATS SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM — A generic term meaning variously, ADS-B, PSR, SSR or any comparable ground-based system that enables the identification of aircraft. NOTE: A comparable ground-based system is one that has been demonstrated, by comparative assessment or other methodology, to have a level of safety and performance equal to or better than monopulse SSR. AUTOMATIC DEPENDENT SURVEILLANCE (ADS) — A surveillance technique, in which aircraft automatically provide, via a data link, data derived from on-board navigation and position fixing systems, including aircraft identification, four-dimensional position and additional data as appropriate. AUTOMATIC DEPENDENT SURVEILLANCE — BROADCAST (ADS-B) — A means by which aircraft, aerodrome vehicles and other objects can automatically transmit and/or receive data such as identification, position and additional data, as appropriate, in a broadcast mode via a data link. AUTOMATIC DEPENDENT SURVEILLANCE — CONTRACT (ADS-C) — A means by which the terms of an ADS-C agreement will be exchanged between the ground system and the aircraft, via a data link, specifying under what conditions ADS-C reports would be initiated, and what data would be contained in the reports. NOTE: The abbreviated term “ADS” contract is commonly used to refer to ADS event contract, ADS demand contract or an emergency mode. AUTOMATIC TERMINAL INFORMATION SERVICE (ATIS) — The automatic provision of current, routine information to arriving and departing aircraft throughout 24 hours or a specified portion thereof: – Data link-automatic terminal information service (D-ATIS). The provision of ATIS via data link. – Voice-automatic terminal information service (Voice-ATIS). The provision of ATIS by means of continuous and repetitive voice broadcasts. AUTOMATED SURFACE OBSERVATION SYSTEM (ASOS) — The Automated Surface Observation System, in the United States, is a surface weather observing system implemented by the National Weather Service, the Federal Aviation Administration and the Department of Defense. It is designed to support aviation operations and weather forecast activities. The ASOS provides continuous minute-by-minute observations and performs the basic observing functions necessary to generate an aviation routine weather report (METAR) and other aviation weather information. ASOS information may be transmitted over a discrete VHF radio frequency or the voice portion of a local navaid. AUTOMATED WEATHER OBSERVING SYSTEM (AWOS) — An automated weather reporting system which transmits local real-time weather data directly to the pilot. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS GLOSSARY AWOS-A AWOS-A/V AWOS-1 AWOS-2 AWOS-3 55 Only reports altimeter setting. Reports altimeter setting plus visibility. Usually reports altimeter setting, wind data, temperature, dewpoint and density altitude. Reports same as AWOS-1 plus visibility. Reports the same as AWOS-2 plus cloud/ceiling data. AUTOMATED WEATHER SENSOR SYSTEM (AWSS) — A surface weather observing system similar to AWOS and ASOS, providing all the weather information furnished by ASOS systems. The AWSS sensor suite automatically collects, measures, processes, and broadcasts surface weather data including altimeter setting, temperature and dew point, cloud height and coverage, visibility, present weather (rain, drizzle, snow), rain accumulation, freezing rain, thunderstorms, fog, mist, haze, freezing fog, as well as wind speed, direction, and gusts. BALKED LANDING — A landing manoeuvre that is unexpectedly discontinued below DA(H)/MDA(H) or beyond MAP. BASE TURN — A turn executed by the aircraft during the initial approach between the end of the outbound track and the beginning of the intermediate or final approach track. The tracks are not reciprocal. NOTE: Base turns may be designated as being made either in level flight or while descending, according to the circumstances of each individual procedure. BLIND TRANSMISSION — A transmission from one station to another station in circumstances where two-way communication cannot be established but where it is believed that the called station is able to receive the transmission. BRAKING ACTION (GOOD, FAIR, POOR, NIL) — A report of conditions on the airport movement area providing a pilot with a degree/quality of braking that might be expected. Braking action is reported in terms of good, fair, poor, or nil. BRIEFING — Oral commentary on existing and/or expected conditions. BROADCAST — A transmission of information relating to air navigation that is not addressed to a specific station or stations. CARDINAL ALTITUDES OR FLIGHT LEVELS — “Odd” or “Even” thousand-foot altitudes or flight levels; e.g., 5000, 6000, 7000, FL60, FL250, FL260, FL270. CATCH POINT — A fix/waypoint that serves as a transition point from the high altitude waypoint navigation structure to the low altitude structure or an arrival procedure (STAR). CEILING (ICAO) — The height above the ground or water of the base of the lowest layer of cloud below 6000m (20,000ft) covering more than half the sky. CEILING (USA) — The height above the earth's surface of the lowest layer of clouds or obscuring phenomena that is reported as “broken”, “overcast”, or “obscuration”, and not classified as “thin”, or “partial”. CHANGE-OVER POINT — The point at which an aircraft navigating on an ATS route segment defined by reference to very high frequency omnidirectional radio ranges is expected to transfer its primary navigational reference from the facility behind the aircraft to the next facility ahead of the aircraft. NOTE: Change-over points are established to provide the optimum balance in respect of signal strength and quality between facilities at all levels to be used and to ensure a common source of azimuth guidance for all aircraft operating along the same portion of a route segment. CHART CHANGE NOTICES — Jeppesen Chart Change Notices include significant information changes affecting Enroute, Area, and Terminal charts. Entries are published until the temporary condition no longer exists, or until the permanent change appears on revised charts. Enroute chart numbers/panel numbers/letters and area chart identifiers are included for each entry in the enroute portion of the Chart Change Notices. To avoid duplication of information in combined Enroute and Terminal Chart Change Notices, navaid conditions, except for ILS components, are listed only in the Enroute portion of the Chart Change Notices. All times are local unless otherwise indicated. Vertical bars indicate new or revised information. Chart Change Notices are only an abbreviated service. Always ask for pertinent NOTAMs prior to flight. CIRCLING APPROACH / CIRCLE-TO-LAND MANEUVER — An extension of an instrument approach procedure which provides for visual circling of the aerodrome prior to landing. CLEARANCE LIMIT — The point to which an aircraft is granted an air traffic control clearance. CLEARWAY — An area beyond the take-off runway under the control of airport authorities within which terrain or fixed obstacles may not extend above specified limits. These areas may be required for certain turbine-powered operations and the size and upward slope of the clearway will differ depending on when the aircraft was certified. CLOUD OF OPERATIONAL SIGNIFICANCE — A cloud with the height of cloud base below 5000ft (1500m) or below the highest minimum sector altitude, whichever is greater, or a cumulonimbus cloud or a towering cumulus cloud at any height. CODE (SSR CODE) — The number assigned to a particular multiple pulse reply signal transmitted by a transponder in Mode A or Mode C. 56 DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS GLOSSARY COMMON TRAFFIC ADVISORY FREQUENCY (CTAF) (USA) — A frequency designed for the purpose of carrying out airport advisory practices while operating to or from an uncontrolled airport. The CTAF may be a UNICOM, Multicom, FSS, or tower frequency. COMMUNITY AERODROME RADIO STATION (CARS) — An aerodrome radio that provides weather, field conditions, accepts flight plans and position reports. COMPULSORY REPORTING POINTS — Reporting points which must be reported to ATC. They are designated on aeronautical charts by solid triangles or filed in a flight plan as fixes selected to define direct routes. These points are geographical locations which are defined by navigation aids/fixes. Pilots should discontinue position reporting over compulsory reporting points when informed by ATC that their aircraft is in “radar contact.” COMPUTER — A device which performs sequences of arithmetical and logical steps upon data without human intervention. NOTE: When the word “computer” is used in this document it may denote a computer complex, which includes one or more computers and peripheral equipment. CONDITIONAL ROUTES (CDR) (Europe) — Category 1,2,3. Category 1: Category 2: Category 3: Permanently plannable CDR during designated times. Plannable only during times designated in the Conditional Route Availability Message (CRAM) published at 1500 for the 24 hour period starting at 0600 the next day. Not plannable. Usable only when directed by ATC. CONTROL AREA (ICAO) — A controlled airspace extending upwards from a specified limit above the earth. CONTROLLED AERODROME — An aerodrome at which air traffic control service is provided to aerodrome traffic. NOTE: The term “controlled aerodrome” indicates that air traffic control service is provided to aerodrome traffic but does not necessarily imply that a control zone exists. CONTROLLED AIRSPACE — An airspace of defined dimensions within which air traffic control service is provided to IFR flights and to VFR flights in accordance with the airspace classification. NOTE: Controlled airspace is a generic term which covers ATS airspace Classes “A”, “B”, “C”, “D”, and “E”. CONTROLLED FIRING AREA (USA) — [see SPECIAL USE AIRSPACE (SUA)]. CONTROLLED FLIGHT — Any flight which is subject to an air traffic control clearance. CONTROLLER-PILOT DATA LINK COMMUNICATIONS (CPDLC) — A means of communication between controller and pilot, using data link for ATC communications. CONTROL ZONE (CTR) (ICAO) — A controlled airspace extending upwards from the surface of the earth to a specified upper limit. COURSE — a. The intended direction of flight in the horizontal plane measured in degrees from north. b. The ILS localizer signal pattern usually specified as front course or back course. c. The intended track along a straight, curved, or segmented MLS path. CRITICAL HEIGHT — Lowest height in relation to an aerodrome specified level below which an approach procedure cannot be continued in a safe manner solely by the aid of instruments. CRUISE CLIMB — An aeroplane cruising technique resulting in a net increase in altitude as the aeroplane mass decreases. CRUISING LEVEL — A level maintained during a significant portion of a flight. CURRENT FLIGHT PLAN (CPL) — The flight plan, including changes, if any, brought about by subsequent clearances. DANGER AREA (ICAO) — [see SPECIAL USE AIRSPACE (SUA)]. DATA CONVENTION — An agreed set of rules governing the manner or sequence in which a set of data may be combined into a meaningful communication. DATA LINK COMMUNICATIONS — A form of communication intended for the exchange of messages via a data link. DATA LINK INITIATION CAPABILITY (DLIC) — A data link application that provides the ability to exchange addresses, names and version numbers necessary to initiate data link applications. DEAD RECKONING (DR) NAVIGATION — The estimating or determining of position by advancing an earlier known position by the application of direction, time and speed data. DECISION ALTITUDE (DA) or DECISION HEIGHT (DH) (ICAO) — A specified altitude or height in the precision approach or approach with vertical guidance at which a missed approach must be initiated if the required visual reference to continue the approach has not been established. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS GLOSSARY 57 NOTE: a. Decision altitude (DA) is referenced to mean sea level (MSL) and decision height (DH) is referenced to the threshold elevation. b. The required visual reference means that section of the visual aids or of the approach area which should have been in view for sufficient time for the pilot to have made an assessment of the aircraft position and rate of change of position, in relation to the desired flight path. In Category III operations with a decision height the required visual reference is that specified for the particular procedure and operation. c. For convenience where both expressions are used they may be written in the form “decision altitude/height” and abbreviated “DA/H.” DECISION ALTITUDE/HEIGHT (DA/H) (FAA) — Is a specified altitude/height in an instrument approach procedure at which the pilot must decide whether to initiate an immediate missed approach if the pilot does not see the required visual reference, or to continue the approach. Decision altitude/height is expressed in feet above mean sea level/ground level. NOTE: Jeppesen approach charts use the abbreviation DA(H). The decision altitude “DA” is referenced to mean sea level (MSL) and the parenthetical decision height (DH) is referenced to the TDZE or threshold elevation. A DA(H) of 1440ft (200ft is a Decision Altitude of 1440ft and a Decision Height of 200ft. DEPARTURE CLEARANCE VIA DATA LINK (DCL) — Provides assistance for requesting and delivering information and clearance, with the objective of reducing aircrew and controller workload. The DCL service shall be initiated by the aircrew at a suitable time between Ti and Tt where: Ti – Tt – the earliest time at which a DCL service can be initiated; the latest time after which an aircrew, having not completed the DCL service, is still able to receive by voice procedures and in due time, the vocal departure clearance. The third time parameter of the DCL acknowledge procedure is T1 where: T1 – timer implemented in the ATS ground system between the sending by ATS ground system of the DCL clearance message and the reception by it of the read-back of DCL clearance message. DEPENDENT PARALLEL APPROACHES — Simultaneous approaches to parallel or near-parallel instrument runways where radar separation minima between aircraft on adjacent extended runway centre lines are prescribed. DETRESFA — The code word used to designate a distress phase. DIRECT ROUTE - D — A requested route published on a Jeppesen Enroute or Area chart to assist pilots who have previous knowledge of acceptance of these routes by ATC. Use of a Direct route may require prior ATC approval and may not provide ATC or Advisory services, or be acceptable in flight plans. DISCRETE CODE — A four-digit SSR Code with the last two digits not being “00.” DISPLACED THRESHOLD — A threshold that is located at a point on the runway other than the designated beginning of the runway. DISTRESS — A condition of being threatened by serious and/or imminent danger and of requiring immediate assistance. DISTRESS PHASE — A situation wherein there is a reasonable certainty that an aircraft and its occupants are threatened by grave and imminent danger or require immediate assistance. DME DISTANCE — The line of sight distance (slant range) from the source of a DME signal to the receiving antenna. EFFECTIVE DATE/TIME — FAA and Canada: Aeronautical information in the U.S. and its territories is generally effective on the designated effective date at 09:01 Coordinated Universal Time (UTC). The effective time applies to airspace, airways and flight procedures. It allows for implementation between 01:00 and 06:00 local standard time in the U.S. Local authorities may change the date or time of implementation due to local operational considerations. Check NOTAMs and contact local ATC for information. International: The International Civil Aviation Organization (ICAO) guidance specifies that aeronautical information should be effective on the designated effective date at 00:00 Coordinated Universal Time (UTC). However national and local authorities often change the effective time to allow for implementation during the local night or at other times due to local operational considerations. When an effective time other than 00:00 UTC is used, ICAO requires that it be published in the official Aeronautical Information Publication (AIP) of the country. Check NOTAMs and contact local ATC for information. ELEVATION — The vertical distance of a point or a level, on or affixed to the surface of the earth, measured from mean sea level. EMERGENCY PHASE — A generic term meaning, as the case may be, uncertainty phase, alert phase or distress phase. 1228763652000 58 DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS GLOSSARY ENGINEERED MATERIALS ARRESTING SYSTEM (EMAS) — High-energy-absorbing material located in the runway overrun that is designed to crush under the weight of an aircraft as the material exerts deceleration forces on the aircraft landing gear. ENROUTE FLIGHT ADVISORY SERVICE (FLIGHT WATCH) — A service specifically designed to provide, upon pilot request, timely weather information pertinent to the type of flight, intended route of flight, and altitude. The FSSs providing this service are indicated on Jeppesen Enroute and Area charts. ESTIMATED ELAPSED TIME — The estimated time required to proceed from one significant point to another. ESTIMATED OFF-BLOCK TIME — The estimated time at which the aircraft will commence movement associated with departure. ESTIMATED TIME OF ARRIVAL — For IFR flights, the time at which it is estimated that the aircraft will arrive over that designated point, defined by reference to navigation aids, from which it is intended that an instrument approach procedure will be commenced, or if no navigation aid is associated with the aerodrome, the time at which the aircraft will arrive over the aerodrome. For VFR flights, the time at which it is estimated that the aircraft will arrive over the aerodrome. EXPECTED APPROACH TIME — The time at which ATC expects that an arriving aircraft, following a delay, will leave the holding point to complete its approach for a landing. NOTE: The actual time of leaving the holding point will depend upon the approach clearance. EXTENDED OPERATION (ETOPS) — Any flight by an aeroplane with two turbine power-units where the flight time at the one power-unit inoperative cruise speed (in ISA and still air conditions), from a point on the route to an adequate alternate aerodrome, is greater than the threshold time approved by the State of the Operator. FAA AIR CARRIER OPERATIONS SPECIFICATIONS — Document issued to users operating under Federal Aviation Administration Regulations (FAR) Parts 121, 125, 127, 129, and 135. Operations Specifications are established and formalized by FARs. The primary purpose of FAA Air Carrier Operations Specifications is to provide a legally enforceable means of prescribing an authorization, limitation and/or procedures for a specific operator. Operations Specifications are subject to expeditious changes. These changes are usually too time critical to adopt through the regulatory process. FEEDER FIX — The fix depicted on instrument approach procedure charts which establishes the starting point of the feeder route. FEEDER ROUTE — Routes depicted on instrument approach procedure charts to designate routes for aircraft to proceed from the enroute structure to the initial approach fix (IAF). FILED FLIGHT PLAN (FPL) — The flight plan as filed with an ATS unit by the pilot or a designated representative, without any subsequent changes. FINAL APPROACH COURSE — A bearing/radial/track of an instrument approach leading to a runway or an extended runway centerline all without regard to distance. FINAL APPROACH (ICAO) — That part of an instrument approach procedure which commences at the specified final approach fix or point, or where such a fix or point is not specified, a. at the end of the last procedure turn, base turn or inbound turn of a racetrack procedure, if specified; or b. at the point of interception of the last track specified in the approach procedure; and ends at a point in the vicinity of an aerodrome from which: 1. a landing can be made; or 2. a missed approach procedure is initiated. FINAL APPROACH AND TAKE-OFF AREA (FATO) — A defined area over which the final phase of the approach manoeuvre to hover or landing is completed and from which the take-off manoeuvre is commenced. Where the FATO is to be used by performance Class 1 helicopters, the defined area includes the rejected take-off area available. FINAL APPROACH FIX (FAF) — The fix from which the final approach (IFR) to an airport is executed and which identifies the beginning of the final approach segment. It is designated in the profile view of Jeppesen Terminal charts by the Maltese Cross symbol for non-precision approaches and by the glide slope/path intercept point on precision approaches. The glide slope/path symbol starts at the FAF. When ATC directs a lower-than-published Glide Slope/Path Intercept Altitude, it is the resultant actual point of the glide slope/path intercept. FINAL APPROACH FIX (FAF) (AUSTRALIA) — A specified point on a non-precision approach which identifies the commencement of the final segment. The FAF is designated in the profile view of Jeppesen Terminal charts by the Maltese Cross symbol. FINAL APPROACH FIX (FAF) OR POINT (FAP) (ICAO) — That fix or point of an instrument approach procedure where the final approach segment commences. FINAL APPROACH — IFR (USA) — The flight path of an aircraft which is inbound to an airport on a final instrument approach course, beginning at the final approach fix or point and extending to the airport or the point where a circling approach/circle-to-land maneuver or a missed approach is executed. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS GLOSSARY 59 FINAL APPROACH POINT (FAP) (USA) — The point, applicable only to a non-precision approach with no depicted FAF (such as an on-airport VOR), where the aircraft is established inbound on the final approach course from the procedure turn and where the final approach descent may be commenced. The FAP serves as the FAF and identifies the beginning of the final approach segment. FINAL APPROACH POINT (FAP) (AUSTRALIA) — A specified point on the glide path of a precision instrument approach which identifies the commencement of the final segment. NOTE: The FAP is co-incident with the FAF of a localizer-based non-precision approach. FINAL APPROACH SEGMENT (FAS) — That segment of an instrument approach procedure in which alignment and descent for landing are accomplished. FLIGHT CREW MEMBER — A licensed crew member charged with duties essential to the operation of an aircraft during flight time. FLIGHT DOCUMENTATION — Written or printed documents, including charts or forms, containing meteorological information for a flight. FLIGHT INFORMATION CENTRE — A unit established to provide flight information service and alerting service. FLIGHT INFORMATION REGION (FIR, UIR) — An airspace of defined dimensions within which Flight Information Service and Alerting Service are provided. FLIGHT INFORMATION SERVICE (FIS) — A service provided for the purpose of giving advice and information useful for the safe and efficient conduct of flights. FLIGHT LEVEL (FL) — A surface of constant atmospheric pressure which is related to a specific pressure datum, 1013.2 hectopascals (hPa), and is separated from other such surfaces by specific pressure intervals. NOTE 1: A pressure type altimeter calibrated in accordance with the Standard Atmosphere: a. when set to a QNH altimeter setting, will indicate altitude; b. when set to a QFE altimeter setting, will indicate height above the QFE reference datum; c. when set to a pressure of 1013.2 hectopascals (hPa), may be used to indicate flight levels. NOTE 2: The terms “height” and “altitude,” used in NOTE 1 above, indicate altimetric rather than geometric heights and altitudes. FLIGHT PATH MONITORING — The use of ATS surveillance systems for the purpose of providing aircraft with information and advice relative to significant deviations from nominal flight path, including deviations from the terms of their air traffic control clearances. NOTE: Some applications may require a specific technology, e.g. radar, to support the function of flight path monitoring. FLIGHT PLAN — Specified information provided to air traffic services units, relative to an intended flight or portion of a flight of an aircraft. NOTE: Specifications for flight plans are contained in ICAO Rules of the Air, Annex 2. A Model Flight Form is contained in ICAO Rules of the Air and Air Traffic Services, PANS-RAC (Doc 4444), Appendix 2 and ATC section. FLIGHT VISIBILITY — The visibility forward from the cockpit of an aircraft in flight. FLIGHT WATCH (USA) — A shortened term for use in air-ground contacts to identify the flight service station providing Enroute Flight Advisory Service; e.g., “Oakland Flight Watch.” FLOW CONTROL — Measures designed to adjust the flow of traffic into a given airspace, along a given route, or bound for a given aerodrome, so as to ensure the most effective utilization of the airspace. FORECAST — A statement of expected meteorological conditions for a specified time or period, and for a specified area or portion of airspace. GAMET AREA FORECAST — An area forecast in abbreviated plain language for low-level flights for a flight information region or sub-area thereof, prepared by the meteorological office designated by the meteorological authority concerned and exchanged with meteorological offices in adjacent flight information regions, as agreed between the meteorological authorities concerned. GBAS-LANDING SYSTEM (GLS) — A system for Approach and Landing operations utilizing GNSS, augmented by a Ground-Based Augmentation System (GBAS), as the primary navigational reference. GLIDE PATH (GP) (ICAO) — A descent profile determined for vertical guidance during a final approach. GLIDE SLOPE (GS) (USA) — Provides vertical guidance for aircraft during approach and landing. The glide slope/glidepath is based on the following: a. Electronic components emitting signals which provide vertical guidance by reference to airborne instruments during instrument approaches such as ILS/MLS; or b. Visual ground aids, such as VASI, which provide vertical guidance for a VFR approach or for the visual portion of an instrument approach and landing. c. PAR, used by ATC to inform an aircraft making a PAR approach of its vertical position (elevation) relative to the descent profile. 60 DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS GLOSSARY GLIDE SLOPE/GLIDE PATH INTERCEPT ALTITUDE — The minimum altitude to intercept the glide slope/path on a precision approach. The intersection of the published intercept altitude with the glide slope/path, designated on Jeppesen Terminal charts by the start of the glide slope/path symbol, is the precision FAF; however, when ATC directs a lower altitude, the resultant lower intercept position is then the FAF. GLOBAL NAVIGATION SATELLITE SYSTEMS (GNSS) — An “umbrella” term adopted by the International Civil Aviation Organization (ICAO) to encompass any independent satellite navigation system used by a pilot to perform onboard position determinations from the satellite data. GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM (GPS) — A space-based radio positioning, navigation, and time-transfer system. The system provides highly accurate position and velocity information, and precise time, on a continuous global basis, to an unlimited number of properly equipped users. The system is unaffected by weather, and provides a worldwide common grid reference system. The GPS concept is predicated upon accurate and continuous knowledge of the spatial position of each satellite in the system with respect to time and distance from a transmitting satellite to the user. The GPS receiver automatically selects appropriate signals from the satellites in view and translates these into a three-dimensional position, velocity, and time. System accuracy for civil users is normally 100 meters horizontally. GRID MINIMUM OFF-ROUTE ALTITUDE (Grid MORA) — An altitude derived by Jeppesen or provided by State Authorities. The Grid MORA altitude provides terrain and man-made structure clearance within the section outlined by latitude and longitude lines. MORA does not provide for navaid signal coverage or communication coverage. a. Grid MORA values derived by Jeppesen clear all terrain and man-made structures by 1000ft in areas where the highest elevations are 5000ft MSL or lower. MORA values clear all terrain and man-made structures by 2000ft in areas where the highest elevations are 5001ft MSL or higher. When a Grid MORA is shown as “Unsurveyed” it is due to incomplete or insufficient information. Grid MORA values followed by a +/- denote doubtful accuracy, but are believed to provide sufficient reference point clearance. b. Grid MORA (State) altitude supplied by the State Authority provides 2000ft clearance in mountainous areas and 1000ft in non-mountainous areas. GRID POINT DATA IN DIGITAL FORM — Computer processed meteorological data for a set of regularly spaced points on a chart, for transmission from a meteorological computer to another computer in a code form suitable for automated use. NOTE: In most cases such data are transmitted on medium or high speed telecommunications channels. GRIP-FLEX MICRO-SURFACING — A thermoplastic compound that uses highly refined, environmentally safe coal tar derivative for anti-oxidation and fuel-resistance qualities to create a stable wearing surface for pavements. GROUND COMMUNICATIONS OUTLET (GCO) (USA) — An unstaffed, remotely controlled ground / ground communications facility. Pilots at uncontrolled airports may contact ATC and FSS via VHF to a telephone connection to obtain an instrument clearance or close a VFR or IFR flight plan. They may also get an updated weather briefing prior to take-off. Pilots will use four “key clicks” on the VHF radio to contact the appropriate ATC facility, or six “key clicks” to contact FSS. The GCO system is intended to be used only on the ground. GROUND EFFECT — A condition of improved performance (lift) due to the interference of the surface with the airflow pattern of the rotor system when a helicopter or other VTOL aircraft is operating near the ground. NOTE: Rotor efficiency is increased by ground effect to a height of about one rotor diameter for most helicopters. GROUND VISIBILITY — The visibility at an aerodrome, as reported by an accredited observer. HEADING — The direction in which the longitudinal axis of an aircraft is pointed, usually expressed in degrees from North (true, magnetic, compass or grid). HEIGHT — The vertical distance of a level, a point or an object considered as a point, measured from a specified datum. HEIGHT ABOVE AIRPORT (HAA) — The height of the Minimum Descent Altitude (MDA) above the published airport elevation. This is published in conjunction with circling minimums. HEIGHT ABOVE TOUCHDOWN (HAT) — The height of the Decision Height or Minimum Descent Altitude above the highest runway elevation in the touchdown zone of the runway. HAT is published on instrument approach charts in conjunction with all straight-in minimums. HIGH FREQUENCY COMMUNICATIONS — High radio frequencies (HF) between 3 and 30MHz used for air-toground voice communication in overseas operations. HIGH SPEED TAXIWAY / TURNOFF (HST) — A long radius taxiway designed and provided with lighting or marking to define the path of an aircraft, traveling at high speed (up to 60KT), from the runway center to a point on the center of a taxiway. Also referred to as long radius exit or turnoff taxiway. The high speed taxiway is designed to expedite aircraft turning off the runway after landing, thus reducing runway occupancy time. HOLDING FIX, HOLDING POINT — A specified location, identified by visual or other means, in the vicinity of which the position of an aircraft in flight is maintained in accordance with air traffic control clearances. HOLD / HOLDING PROCEDURE — A predetermined maneuver which keeps aircraft within a specified airspace while awaiting further clearance from air traffic control. Also used during ground operations to keep aircraft within a specified area or at a specified point while awaiting further clearance from air traffic control. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS GLOSSARY 61 HOT SPOT — A location on an aerodrome movement area with a history or potential risk of collision or runway incursion, and where heightened attention by pilots/drivers is necessary. HUMAN FACTORS PRINCIPLES — Principles which apply to aeronautical design, certification, training, operations and maintenance and which seek safe interface between the human and other system components by proper consideration to human performance. HUMAN PERFORMANCE — Human capabilities and limitations which have an impact on the safety and efficiency of aeronautical operations. IFR FLIGHT — A flight conducted in accordance with the instrument flight rules. ILS CATEGORIES (ICAO) — a. ILS Category I — An ILS approach procedure which provides for an approach to a decision height not lower than 60m (200ft) and a visibility not less than 800m (2400ft) or a runway visual range not less than 550m (1800ft). b. ILS Category II (Special authorization required) — An ILS approach procedure which provides for an approach to a decision height lower than 60m (200ft) but not lower than 30m (100ft) and a runway visual range not less than 300m (1000ft) for aircraft categories A, B, C (D with auto landing), and not less than 350m (1200ft) for aircraft category D without auto landing. c. ILS Category III (Special authorization required) — 1. IIIA — An ILS approach procedure which provides for approach with either a decision height lower than 30m (100ft) or with no decision height and with a runway visual range of not less than 175m (574ft). 2. IIIB — An ILS approach procedure which provides for approach with either a decision height lower than 15m (50ft) or with no decision height and with a runway visual range of less than 175m (574ft) but not less than 50m (150ft). 3. IIIC — An ILS approach procedure which provides for approach with no decision height and no runway visual range limitations. d. Some areas require special authorization for ILS Category I approaches. In these areas, an additional category of approach called ILS is available without special authorization. These ILS approaches have minimums higher than a decision height of 200ft and a runway visual range value of 2600ft. Jeppesen approach charts, at these locations, will have a notation in the chart heading or in the minimum box titles. ILS CATEGORIES (USA) — a. ILS Category I — An ILS approach procedure which provides for approach to a height above touchdown of not less than 200ft and with runway visual range of not less than 1800ft. b. ILS Category II — An ILS approach procedure which provides for approach to a height above touchdown of not less than 100ft and with runway visual range of not less than 1200ft. c. ILS Category III — 1. IIIA — An ILS approach procedure which provides for approach without a decision height minimum and with runway visual range of not less than 700ft. 2. IIIB — An ILS approach procedure which provides for approach without a decision height minimum and with runway visual range of not less than 150ft. 3. IIIC — An ILS approach procedure which provides for approach without a decision height minimum and without runway visual range minimum. INCERFA — The code word used to designate an uncertainty phase. INDEPENDENT PARALLEL APPROACHES — Simultaneous approaches to parallel or near-parallel instrument runways where radar separation minima between aircraft on adjacent extended runway centre lines are not prescribed. INDEPENDENT PARALLEL DEPARTURES — Simultaneous departures from parallel or near-parallel instrument runways. INITIAL APPROACH FIX (IAF) — A fix that marks the beginning of the initial segment and the end of the arrival segment, if applicable. In RNAV applications this fix is normally defined by a fly-by waypoint. INITIAL APPROACH SEGMENT — That segment of an instrument approach procedure between the initial approach fix and the intermediate approach fix or, where applicable, the final approach fix or point. INSTRUMENT APPROACH PROCEDURE (IAP) — A series of predetermined manoeuvres by reference to flight instruments with specified protection from obstacles from the initial approach fix, or where applicable, from the beginning of a defined arrival route to a point from which a landing can be completed and thereafter, if a landing is not completed, to a position at which holding or en-route obstacle clearance criteria apply. Instrument approach procedures are classified as follows: – Non-precision approach (NPA) procedure. An instrument approach procedure which utilizes lateral guidance but does not utilize vertical guidance. 62 DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS GLOSSARY – Approach procedure with vertical guidance (APV). An instrument approach based on a navigation system that is not required to meet the precision approach standards of ICAO Annex 10 but provides course and glide path deviation information (sometimes referred to as “semi-precision”). Baro-VNAV, LDA with glide path, LNAV/VNAV and LPV are examples of APV approaches. – Precision approach (PA) procedure. An instrument approach procedure using precision lateral and vertical guidance with minima as determined by the category of operation. NOTE: Lateral and vertical guidance refers to the guidance provided either by: a. a ground-based navigation aid; or b. computer-generated navigation data. INSTRUMENT DEPARTURE PROCEDURE (DP) (USA) — A preplanned instrument flight rule (IFR) air traffic control departure procedure printed for pilot use in graphic and/or textual form. DPs provide transition from the terminal to the appropriate enroute structure. INSTRUMENT METEOROLOGICAL CONDITIONS (IMC) — Meteorological conditions expressed in terms of visibility, distance from cloud, and ceiling, less than the minima specified for visual meteorological conditions. NOTE 1: The specified minima for visual meteorological conditions are contained in ICAO Rules of the Air, Annex 2, Chapter 4. NOTE 2: In a control zone, a VFR flight may proceed under instrument meteorological conditions if and as authorized by air traffic control. INTERMEDIATE APPROACH SEGMENT — That segment of an instrument approach procedure between either the intermediate approach fix and the final approach fix or point, or between the end of a reversal, racetrack or dead reckoning track procedure and the final approach fix or point, as appropriate. INTERMEDIATE FIX (IF) — A fix that marks the end of an initial segment and the beginning of the intermediate segment. In RNAV applications this fix is normally defined by a fly-by waypoint. INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT (ICAO) — Any airport designated by the Contracting State in whose territory it is situated as an airport of entry and departure for international air traffic, where the formalities incident to customs, immigration, public health, animal and plant quarantine and similar procedures are carried out. INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT (USA) — Relating to international flight, it means: a. An airport of entry which has been designated by the Secretary of Treasury or Commissioner of Customs as an international airport for customs service. b. A landing rights airport at which specific permission to land must be obtained from customs authorities in advance of contemplated use. c. Airports designated under the Convention on International Civil Aviation as an airport for use by international air transport and/or international general aviation. INTERNATIONAL AIRWAYS VOLCANO WATCH (IAVW) — International arrangements for monitoring and providing warnings to aircraft of volcanic ash in the atmosphere. NOTE: The IAVW is based on the co-operation of aviation and non-aviation operational units using information derived from observing sources and networks that are provided by States. The watch is coordinated by ICAO with the co-operation of other concerned international organizations. INTERNATIONAL CIVIL AVIATION ORGANIZATION (ICAO) — A specialized agency of the United Nations whose objective is to develop the principles and techniques of international air navigation and to foster planning and development of international civil air transport. LAND AND HOLD SHORT OPERATIONS (LAHSO) — Operations which include simultaneous take-offs and landings and/or simultaneous landings when a landing aircraft is able and is instructed by the controller to hold short of the intersecting runway / taxiway or designated hold short point. Pilots are expected to promptly inform the controller if the hold short clearance cannot be accepted. LANDING AREA — That part of a movement area intended for the landing or take-off of aircraft. LANDING DISTANCE AVAILABLE (LDA) (ICAO) — The length of runway which is declared available and suitable for the ground run of an airplane landing. LATERAL NAVIGATION (LNAV) — Provides the same level of service as the present GPS stand-alone approaches. LNAV minimums support the following navigation systems: WAAS, when the navigation solution will not support vertical navigation; and, GPS navigation systems which are presently authorized to conduct GPS/GNSS approaches. LATERAL NAVIGATION / VERTICAL NAVIGATION (LNAV/VNAV) — Identifies APV minimums developed to accommodate an RNAV IAP with vertical guidance, usually provided by approach certified Baro-VNAV, but with lateral and vertical integrity limits larger than a precision approach or LPV. LNAV stands for Lateral Navigation; VNAV stands for Vertical Navigation. These minimums can be flown by aircraft with a statement in the Aircraft Flight Manual (AFM) that the installed equipment supports GPS approaches and has an approach-approved barometric VNAV, or if the aircraft has been demonstrated to support LNAV/VNAV approaches. This includes Class 2, 3 and 4 TSO-C146 WAAS equipment. Aircraft using LNAV/VNAV minimums will descend to landing via an internally generated descent path based on satellite or other approach approved VNAV systems. WAAS equipment may revert to this mode of operation when the signal does not support “precision” or LPV integrity. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS GLOSSARY 63 LEVEL — A generic term relating to the vertical position of an aircraft in flight and meaning variously, height, altitude or flight level. LOCAL AIRPORT ADVISORY (LAA) — A service provided by flight service stations or the military at airports not serviced by an operating control tower. This service consists of providing information to arriving and departing aircraft concerning wind direction and speed, favored runway, altimeter setting, pertinent known traffic, pertinent known field conditions, airport taxi routes and traffic patterns, and authorized instrument approach procedures. This information is advisory in nature and does not constitute an ATC clearance. LOCALIZER PERFORMANCE WITH VERTICAL GUIDANCE (LPV) — Identifies the APV minimums that incorporate electronic lateral and vertical guidance. The lateral guidance is equivalent to localizer, and the protected area is considerably smaller than the protected area for the present LNAV and LNAV/VNAV lateral protection. Aircraft can fly these minimums with a statement in the Aircraft Flight Manual (AFM) that the installed equipment supports LPV approaches. This includes Class 3 and 4 TSO-C146 WAAS equipment, and future LAAS equipment. The label LPV denotes minima lines associated with APV-I or APV-II performance on approach charts. LOCATION INDICATOR — A four-letter code group formulated in accordance with rules prescribed by ICAO and assigned to the location of an aeronautical fixed station. LOW ALTITUDE AIRWAY STRUCTURE / FEDERAL AIRWAYS (USA) — The network of airways serving aircraft operations up to but not including 18,000ft MSL. LOW FREQUENCY (LF) — The frequency band between 30 and 300kHz. MAGNETIC VARIATION (VAR) — The orientation of a horizontal magnetic compass with respect to true north. Because there is a continuous small change of direction of lines of magnetic force over the surface of the earth, magnetic variation at most locations is not constant over long periods of time. MANDATORY ALTITUDE — An altitude depicted on an instrument approach procedure chart requiring the aircraft to maintain altitude at the depicted value. MANDATORY FREQUENCY (MF) — A frequency designated at selected airports that are uncontrolled during certain hours only. Aircraft operating within the designated MF Area, normally 5NM radius of the airport, must be equipped with a functioning radio capable of maintaining two-way communications. Jeppesen charts list the MF frequency and the area when other than the standard 5NM. MANOEUVRING AREA — That part of an aerodrome to be used for the take-off, landing and taxiing of aircraft, excluding aprons. MAXIMUM AUTHORIZED ALTITUDE (MAA) — A published altitude representing the maximum usable altitude or flight level for an airspace structure or route segment. MEDIUM FREQUENCY (MF) — The frequencies between 300kHz and 3MHz. METEOROLOGICAL AUTHORITY — The authority providing or arranging for the provision of meteorological service for international air navigation on behalf of a Contracting State. METEOROLOGICAL BULLETIN — A text comprising meteorological information preceded by an appropriate heading. METEOROLOGICAL INFORMATION — Meteorological report, analysis, forecast, and any other statement relating to existing or expected meteorological conditions. METEOROLOGICAL OFFICE — An office designated to provide meteorological service for international air navigation. METEOROLOGICAL REPORT — A statement of observed meteorological conditions related to a specified time and location. METEOROLOGICAL SATELLITE — An artificial earth satellite making meteorological observations and transmitting these observations to earth. MILITARY OPERATIONS AREA (MOA) (USA) — [see SPECIAL USE AIRSPACE (SUA)]. MINIMUM CROSSING ALTITUDE (MCA) — The lowest altitude at certain fixes at which an aircraft must cross when proceeding in the direction of a higher minimum enroute IFR altitude (MEA). MINIMUM DESCENT ALTITUDE (MDA) (FAA) — Is the lowest altitude specified in an instrument approach procedure, expressed in feet above mean sea level, to which descent is authorized on final approach or during circle-to-land maneuvering until the pilot sees the required visual references for the heliport or runway of intended landing. MINIMUM DESCENT ALTITUDE (MDA) OR MINIMUM DESCENT HEIGHT (MDH) (ICAO) — A specified altitude or height in a non-precision approach or circling approach below which descent must not be made without the required visual reference. NOTE 1: Minimum descent altitude (MDA) is referenced to mean sea level and minimum descent height (MDH) is referenced to the aerodrome elevation or to the threshold elevation if that is more than 2m (7ft) below the aerodrome elevation. A minimum descent height for a circling approach is referenced to the aerodrome elevation. NOTE 2: The required visual reference means that section of the visual aids or of the approach area which should have been in view for sufficient time for the pilot to have made an assessment of the aircraft position and rate of change of position, in relation to the desired flight path. In the case of a circling approach the required visual reference is the runway environment. 64 DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS GLOSSARY NOTE 3: For convenience when both expressions are used they may be written in the form “minimum descent altitude/height” abbreviated “MDA/H.” MINIMUM ENROUTE IFR ALTITUDE (MEA) — The lowest published altitude between radio fixes that meets obstacle clearance requirements between those fixes and in many countries assures acceptable navigational signal coverage. The MEA applies to the entire width of the airway, segment, or route between the radio fixes defining the airway, segment, or route. MINIMUM FUEL — The term used to describe a situation in which an aircraft’s fuel supply has reached a state where little or no delay can be accepted. NOTE: This is not an emergency situation but merely indicates that an emergency situation is possible, should any undue delay occur. MINIMUM IFR ALTITUDES (USA) — Minimum altitudes for IFR operations are published on aeronautical charts for airways, routes, and for standard instrument approach procedures. Within the USA, if no applicable minimum altitude is prescribed the following minimum IFR altitudes apply. a. In designated mountainous areas, 2000ft above the highest obstacle within a horizontal distance of 4NM from the course to be flown; or b. Other than mountainous areas, 1000ft above the highest obstacle within a horizontal distance of 4NM from the course to be flown; or c. As otherwise authorized by the Administrator or assigned by ATC. MINIMUM OBSTRUCTION CLEARANCE ALTITUDE (MOCA) — The lowest published altitude in effect between radio fixes on VOR airways, off airway routes, or route segments which meets obstacle clearance requirements for the entire route segment and in the USA assures acceptable navigational signal coverage only within 22NM of a VOR. MINIMUM OFF-ROUTE ALTITUDE (MORA) — This is an altitude derived by Jeppesen. The MORA provides known obstruction clearance 10NM either side of the route centerline including a 10NM radius beyond the radio fix reporting or mileage break defining the route segment. For terrain and man-made structure clearance refer to Grid MORA. MINIMUM RECEPTION ALTITUDE (MRA) — The lowest altitude at which an intersection can be determined. MINIMUM SAFE/SECTOR ALTITUDE (MSA) (FAA) — Altitude depicted on an instrument chart and identified as the minimum safe altitude which provides 1000ft of obstacle clearance within a 25NM radius from the navigational facility upon which the MSA is predicated. If the radius limit is other than 25NM, it is stated. This altitude is for EMERGENCY USE ONLY and does not necessarily guarantee navaid reception. When the MSA is divided into sectors, with each sector a different altitude, the altitudes in these sectors are referred to as “minimum sector altitudes”. MINIMUM SECTOR ALTITUDE (MSA) (ICAO) — The lowest altitude which may be used which will provide a minimum clearance of 300m (1000ft) above all objects located in an area contained within a sector of a circle of 46km (25NM) radius centered on a radio aid to navigation. MINIMUM STABILIZATION DISTANCE (MSD) — The minimum distance to complete a turn manoeuvre and after which a new manoeuvre can be initiated. The minimum stabilization distance is used to compute the minimum distance between waypoints. MINIMUM VECTORING ALTITUDE (MVA) — The lowest MSL altitude at which an IFR aircraft will be vectored by a radar controller, except as otherwise authorized for radar approaches, departures and missed approaches. The altitude meets IFR obstacle clearance criteria. It may be lower than the published MEA along an airway of J-route segment. It may be utilized for radar vectoring only upon the controller’s determination that an adequate radar return is being received from the aircraft being controlled. MISSED APPROACH — a. A maneuver conducted by a pilot when an instrument approach cannot be completed to a landing. The route of flight and altitude are shown on instrument approach procedure charts. A pilot executing a missed approach prior to the Missed Approach Point (MAP) must continue along the final approach to the MAP. The pilot may climb immediately to the altitude specified in the missed approach procedure. b. A term used by the pilot to inform ATC that he/she is executing the missed approach. c. At locations where ATC radar service is provided the pilot should conform to radar vectors, when provided by ATC, in lieu of the published missed approach procedure. MISSED APPROACH HOLDING FIX (MAHF) — A fix used in RNAV applications that marks the end of the missed approach segment and the centre point for the missed approach holding. MISSED APPROACH POINT (MAP) (ICAO) — That point in an instrument approach procedure at or before which the prescribed missed approach procedure must be initiated in order to ensure that the minimum obstacle clearance is not infringed. MISSED APPROACH POINT (MAP) (USA) — A point prescribed in each instrument approach procedure at which a missed approach procedure shall be executed if the required visual reference does not exist. MISSED APPROACH PROCEDURE — The procedure to be followed if the approach cannot be continued. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS GLOSSARY 65 MODE (SSR) — The conventional identifier related to specific functions of the interrogation signals transmitted by an SSR interrogator. There are four modes specified in ICAO Annex 10 (not published herein): A, C, S and intermode. MOUNTAINOUS AREA (ICAO) — An area of changing terrain profile where the changes of terrain elevation exceed 900m (3000ft) within a distance of 10NM. MOVEMENT AREA — That part of an aerodrome to be used for the take-off, landing and taxiing of aircraft, consisting of the manoeuvring area and the apron(s). NEAR-PARALLEL RUNWAYS — Non-intersecting runways whose extended centre lines have an angle of convergence/divergence of 15 degrees or less. NON PRECISION APPROACH (NPA) PROCEDURE — [see INSTRUMENT APPROACH PROCEDURE (IAP)] NO PROCEDURE TURN (NoPT) — No procedure turn is required nor authorized. NORMAL OPERATING ZONE (NOZ) — Airspace of defined dimensions extending to either side of an ILS localizer course and/or MLS final approach track. Only the inner half of the normal operating zone is taken into account in independent parallel approaches. NOTAM (ICAO) — A notice distributed by means of telecommunication containing information concerning the establishment, condition or change in any aeronautical facility, service, procedure or hazard, the timely knowledge of which is essential to personnel concerned with flight operations. NO-TRANSGRESSION ZONE (NTZ) — In the context of independent parallel approaches, a corridor of airspace of defined dimensions located centrally between the two extended runway centre lines, where a penetration by an aircraft requires a controller intervention to manoeuvre any threatened aircraft on the adjacent approach. OBSERVATION (METEOROLOGICAL) — The evaluation of one or more meteorological elements. OBSTACLE ASSESSMENT SURFACE (OAS) — A defined surface intended for the purpose of determining those obstacles to be considered in the calculation of obstacle clearance altitude/height for a specific APV or precision approach procedure. OBSTACLE CLEARANCE ALTITUDE (OCA) OR OBSTACLE CLEARANCE HEIGHT (OCH) — The lowest altitude or the lowest height above the elevation of the relevant runway threshold or the aerodrome elevation as applicable, used in establishing compliance with appropriate obstacle clearance criteria. NOTE 1: Obstacle clearance altitude is referenced to mean sea level and obstacle clearance height is referenced to the threshold elevation or in the case of non-precision approaches to the aerodrome elevation or the threshold elevation if that is more than 7ft (2m) below the aerodrome elevation. An obstacle clearance height for a circling approach is referenced to the aerodrome elevation. NOTE 2: For convenience when both expressions are used they may be written in the form “obstacle clearance altitude/height” and abbreviated “OCA/H.” OBSTACLE FREE ZONE (OFZ) (ICAO) — The airspace above the inner approach surface, inner transitional surfaces, and balked landing surface and that portion of the strip bounded by these surfaces, which is not penetrated by any fixed obstacle other than a low-mass and frangibly mounted one required for air navigation purposes. OBSTRUCTION CLEARANCE LIMIT (OCL) — The height above aerodrome elevation below which the minimum prescribed vertical clearance cannot be maintained either on approach or in the event of a missed approach. OPERATIONAL CONTROL — The exercise of authority over the initiation, continuation, diversion or termination of a flight in the interest of the safety of the aircraft and the regularity and efficiency of the flight. OPERATOR — A person, organization or enterprise engaged in or offering to engage in an aircraft operation. PILOT CONTROLLED LIGHTING (PCL) (USA) — (For other states see Air Traffic Control Rules and Procedures.) Radio control of lighting is available at selected airports to provide airborne control of lights by keying the aircraft’s microphone. The control system consists of a 3-step control responsive to 7, 5, and/or 3 microphone clicks. The 3-step and 2-step lighting facilities can be altered in intensity. All lighting is illuminated for a period of 15min (except for 1-step and 2-step REILs which may be turned off by keying the mike 5 or 3 times, respectively). Suggested use is to always initially key the mike 7 times; this assures that all controlled lights are turned on to the maximum available intensity. If desired, adjustment can then be made, where the capability is provided, to a lower intensity (or the REIL turned off) by keying the mike 5 and/or three times. Approved lighting systems may be activated by keying the mike as indicated below: KEY MIKE 7 times within 5 seconds 5 times within 5 seconds 3 times within 5 seconds FUNCTION Highest intensity available Medium or lower intensity (Lower REIL or REIL Off) Lowest intensity available (Lower REIL or REIL Off) 66 DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS GLOSSARY Due to the close proximity of airports using the same frequency, radio controlled lighting receivers may be set at a low sensitivity requiring the aircraft to be relatively close to activate the system. Consequently, even when lights are on, always key mike as directed when overflying an airport of intended landing or just prior to entering the final segment of an approach. This will assure the aircraft is close enough to activate the system and a full 15min lighting duration is available. PILOT-IN-COMMAND (PIC) — The pilot responsible for the operation and safety of the aircraft during flight time. PITCH POINT — A fix/waypoint that serves as a transition point from a departure procedure or the low altitude ground-based navigation structure into the high altitude waypoint system. POINT-IN-SPACE APPROACH (PinS) — The point-in-space approach is based on a basic GNSS non-precision approach procedure designed for helicopters only. It is aligned with a reference point located to permit subsequent flight manoeuvring or approach and landing using visual manoeuvring in adequate visual conditions to see and avoid obstacles. POINT-IN-SPACE REFERENCE POINT (PRP) — Reference point for the point-in-space approach as identified by the latitude and longitude of the MAPt. PRECISION APPROACH (PA) PROCEDURE — [see INSTRUMENT APPROACH PROCEDURE (IAP)]. PRECISION APPROACH RADAR (PAR) — Primary radar equipment used to determine the position of an aircraft during final approach, in terms of lateral and vertical deviations relative to a nominal approach path, and in range relative to touchdown. NOTE: Precision approach radars are designated to enable pilots of aircraft to be given guidance by radio communication during the final stages of the approach to land. PRECISION OBJECT FREE ZONE (POFZ) (FAA) — A volume of airspace above an area beginning at the runway threshold, at the threshold elevation, and entered on the extended runway centerline. The standard POFZ is 200ft (60m) long and 800ft (240m) wide. The POFZ must be kept clear when an aircraft on a vertically guided final approach is within two nautical miles (NM) of the runway threshold and the reported ceiling is below 250ft and/or visibility less than ¾ statute miles (SM) (or runway visual range below 4000ft). The POFZ is considered clear even if the wing of the aircraft holding on a taxiway waiting for runway clearance penetrates the POFZ; however, neither the fuselage nor the tail may infringe on the POFZ. For approaching aircraft, in the event that a taxiing/parked aircraft or vehicle is not clear of the POFZ, air traffic control will provide advisories to the approaching aircraft regarding the position of the offending aircraft/vehicle. In this case the pilot of the approaching aircraft must decide to continue or abort the approach. When the reported ceiling is below 800ft or visibility less than 2SM, departing aircraft must do the following. When there is an air traffic control tower (ATCT) in operation, plan to hold at the ILS hold line and hold as directed by air traffic control. When there is no operating ATCT, honor the ILS hold line and do not taxi into position and take-off if there is an approaching aircraft within 2NM of the runway threshold. PRE-DEPARTURE CLEARANCE (PDC) — An automated Clearance Delivery system relaying ATC departure clearances from the FAA to the user network computer for subsequent delivery to the cockpit via ACARS (Airline/ Aviation VHF data link) where aircraft are appropriately equipped, or to gate printers for pilot pickup. PRESSURE ALTITUDE — An atmospheric pressure expressed in terms of altitude which corresponds to that pressure in the Standard Atmosphere. PREVAILING VISIBILITY — The greatest visibility value, observed in accordance with the definition “visibility”, which is reached within at least half the horizon circle or within at least half of the surface of the aerodrome. These areas could comprise contiguous or non-contiguous sectors. NOTE: This value may be assessed by human observation and/or instrumented systems. When instruments are installed, they are used to obtain the best estimate of the prevailing visibility. PRIMARY AREA — A defined area symmetrically disposed about the nominal flight track in which full obstacle clearance is provided. (See also SECONDARY AREA.) PRIMARY RADAR — A radar system which uses reflected radio signals. PRIMARY SURVEILLANCE RADAR (PSR) — A surveillance radar system which uses reflected radio signals. PROCEDURE ALTITUDE/HEIGHT — Are recommended altitudes/heights developed in coordination with Air Traffic Control requirements flown operationally at or above the minimum altitude/height and established to accommodate a stabilized descent at a prescribed descent gradient/angle in the intermediate/final approach segment. Procedure altitudes/heights are never below the Segment Minimum Altitude (SMA) or Segment Minimum Safe Altitude (SMSA). PROCEDURE TURN (PT) (ICAO) — A maneuver in which a turn is made away from a designated track followed by a turn in the opposite direction to permit the aircraft to intercept and proceed along the reciprocal of the designated track. NOTE 1: Procedure turns are designated “left” or “right” according to the direction of the initial turn. NOTE 2: Procedure turns may be designated as being made either in level flight or while descending, according to the circumstances of each individual procedure. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS GLOSSARY 67 PROCEDURE TURN (PT) (USA) — The maneuver prescribed when it is necessary to reverse direction to establish an aircraft on the intermediate approach segment or final approach course. The outbound course, direction of turn, distance within which the turn must be completed, and minimum altitude are specified in the procedure. However, unless otherwise restricted, the point at which the turn may be commenced and the type and rate of turn are at the discretion of the pilot. PROCEDURE TURN INBOUND — That point of a procedure turn maneuver where course reversal has been completed and an aircraft is established inbound on the intermediate approach segment or final approach course. A report of “procedure turn inbound” is normally used by ATC as a position report for separation purposes. PROFILE — The orthogonal projection of a flight path or portion thereof on the vertical surface containing the nominal track. PROGNOSTIC CHART — A forecast of a specified meteorological element(s) for a specified time or period and a specified surface or portion of airspace, depicted graphically on a chart. PROHIBITED AREA (ICAO) (USA) — [see SPECIAL USE AIRSPACE (SUA)]. QFE — [see ALTIMETER SETTING] QNE — [see ALTIMETER SETTING] QNH — [see ALTIMETER SETTING] RACETRACK PROCEDURE (ICAO) — A procedure designed to enable the aircraft to reduce altitude during the initial approach segment and/or establish the aircraft inbound when the entry into a reversal procedure is not practical. RADAR — A radio detection device which provides information on range, azimuth and/or elevation of objects. RADAR APPROACH — An approach, executed by an aircraft, under the direction of a radar controller. RADAR CONTACT — The situation which exists when the radar position of a particular aircraft is seen and identified on a radar display. RADAR SEPARATION — The separation used when aircraft position information is derived from radar sources. RADAR WEATHER ECHO INTENSITY LEVELS — Existing radar systems cannot detect turbulence. However, there is a direct correlation between the degree of turbulence and other weather features associated with thunderstorms and the radar weather echo intensity. The National Weather Service has categorized radar weather echo intensity for precipitation into six levels. These levels are sometimes expressed during communications as “VIP LEVEL” 1 through 6 (derived from the component of the radar that produces the information — Video Integrator and Processor). The following list gives the “VIP LEVELS” in relation to the precipitation intensity within a thunderstorm: Level Level Level Level Level Level 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. WEAK MODERATE STRONG VERY STRONG INTENSE EXTREME RADIO ALTIMETER / RADAR ALTIMETER — Aircraft equipment which makes use of the reflection of radio waves from the ground to determine the height of the aircraft above the surface. RADIOTELEPHONY — A form of radio communication primarily intended for the exchange of information in the form of speech. RADIOTELEPHONY NETWORK — A group of radiotelephony aeronautical stations which operate on and guard frequencies from the same family and which support each other in a defined manner to ensure maximum dependability of air-ground communications and dissemination of air-ground traffic. REDUCED VERTICAL SEPARATION MINIMUMS (RVSM) — A reduction in the vertical separation between FL290 – FL410 from 2000ft to 1000ft. REGIONAL AIR NAVIGATION AGREEMENT — Agreement approved by the Council of ICAO normally on the advice of a regional air navigation meeting. REPETITIVE FLIGHT PLAN (RPL) — A flight plan related to a series of frequently recurring, regularly operated individual flights with identical basic features, submitted by an operator for retention and repetitive use by ATS units. REPORTING POINT — A specified geographical location in relation to which the position of an aircraft can be reported. REQUIRED NAVIGATION PERFORMANCE (RNP) — A statement of navigation position accuracy necessary for operation within a defined airspace. RNP is performance-based and not dependent on a specific piece of equipment. RNP includes a descriptive number, the value being an indicator of the size of the containment area (e.g., RNP-0.3, RNP-1, RNP-3, etc.). The different values are assigned to terminal, departure, and enroute operations. Some aircraft have RNP approval in their AFM without a GPS sensor. The lowest level of sensors that the FAA will support for RNP service is DME/DME. However, necessary DME signal may not be available at the 68 DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS GLOSSARY airport of intended operations. For those locations having an RNAV chart published with LNAV/VNAV minimums, a procedure note may be provided such as "DME/DME RNP-0.3 NA." This means that RNP aircraft dependent on DME/DME to achieve RNP-0.3 are not authorized to conduct this approach. Where DME facility availability is a factor, the note may read "DME/DME RNP-0.3 authorized; ABC and XYZ required." This means that ABC and XYZ facilities have been determined by flight inspection to be required in the navigation solution to assure RNP-0.3. VOR/DME updating must not be used for approach procedures. RESCUE COORDINATION CENTER — A unit responsible for promoting efficient organization of search and rescue service and for coordinating the conduct of search and rescue operations within a search and rescue region. RESCUE UNIT — A unit composed of trained personnel and provided with equipment suitable for the expeditious conduct of search and rescue. RESTRICTED AREA (ICAO) (USA) — [see SPECIAL USE AIRSPACE (SUA)]. REVERSAL PROCEDURE — A procedure designed to enable aircraft to reverse direction during the initial approach segment of an instrument approach procedure. The sequence may include procedure turns or base turns. RNAV APPROACH — An instrument approach procedure which relies on aircraft area navigation equipment for navigation guidance. RNP TYPE — A containment value expressed as a distance in nautical miles from the intended position within which flights would be for at least 95 percent of the total flying time. EXAMPLE: RNP 4 represents a navigation accuracy of plus or minus 7.4km (4NM) on a 95 percent containment basis. ROUTE MINIMUM OFF-ROUTE ALTITUDE (Route MORA) — This is an altitude derived by Jeppesen. The Route MORA altitude provides reference point clearance within 10NM of the route centerline (regardless of the route width) and end fixes. Route MORA values clear all reference points by 1000ft in areas where the highest reference points are 5000ft MSL or lower. Route MORA values clear all reference points by 2000ft in areas where the highest reference points are 5001ft MSL or higher. When a Route MORA is shown along a route as “unknown” it is due to incomplete or insufficient information. RUNWAY — A defined rectangular area on a land aerodrome prepared for the landing and take-off of aircraft. RUNWAY EDGE LIGHTS (ICAO) — Are provided for a runway intended for use at night or for a precision approach runway intended for use by day or night. Runway edge lights shall be fixed lights showing variable white, except that: a. in the case of a displaced threshold, the lights between the beginning of the runway and the displaced threshold shall show red in the approach direction; and b. a section of the lights 600m or one-third of the runway length, whichever is the less, at the remote end of the runway from the end at which the take-off run is started, may show yellow. RUNWAY EDGE LIGHTS (USA) — Lights used to outline the edges of runways during periods of darkness or restricted visibility conditions. The light systems are classified according to the intensity or brightness they are capable of producing: they are the High Intensity Runway Lights (HIRL), Medium Intensity Runway Lights (MIRL), and the Low Intensity Runway Lights (RL). The HIRL and MIRL systems have variable intensity controls, where the RLs normally have one intensity setting. a. The runway edge lights are white, except on instrument runways amber replaces white on the last 2000ft or half of the runway length, whichever is less, to form a caution zone for landings. b. The lights marking the ends of the runway emit red light toward the runway to indicate the end of runway to a departing aircraft and emit green outward from the runway end to indicate the threshold to landing aircraft. RUNWAY HOLDING POSITION — A designated position intended to protect a runway, an obstacle limitation surface, or an ILS/MLS critical/sensitive area at which taxiing aircraft and vehicles shall stop and hold, unless otherwise authorized by the aerodrome control tower. NOTE: In radiotelephony phraseologies, the expression “holding point” is used to designate the runwayholding position. RUNWAY INCURSION — Any occurrence at an aerodrome involving the incorrect presence of an aircraft, vehicle or person on the protected area of a surface designated for the landing and take-off of aircraft. RUNWAY MARKINGS — a. Basic marking — Markings on runways used for operations under visual flight rules consisting of centerline markings and runway direction numbers and, if required, letters. b. Instrument marking — Markings on runways served by nonvisual navigation aids and intended for landings under instrument weather conditions, consisting of basic marking plus threshold markings. c. All-weather (precision instrument) marking — Marking on runways served by nonvisual precision approach aids and on runways having special operational requirements, consisting of instrument markings plus landing zone markings and side strips. RUNWAY STRIP — A defined area including the runway and stopway, if provided, intended: DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS GLOSSARY 69 a. to reduce the risk of damage to aircraft running off a runway; and b. to protect aircraft flying over it during take-off or landing operations. RUNWAY VISUAL RANGE (RVR) — The range over which the pilot of an aircraft on the centre line of a runway can see the runway surface markings or the lights delineating the runway or identifying its centre line. SAFETY-SENSITIVE PERSONNEL — Persons who might endanger aviation safety if they perform their duties and functions improperly including, but not limited to, crew members, aircraft maintenance personnel and air traffic controllers. SEARCH AND RESCUE SERVICES UNIT — A generic term meaning, as the case may be, rescue coordination center, rescue subcenter or alerting post. SECONDARY AREA — A defined area on each side of the primary area located along the nominal flight track in which decreasing obstacle clearance is provided. (See also PRIMARY AREA). SECONDARY RADAR — A radar system wherein a radio signal transmitted from a radar station initiates the transmission of a radio signal from another station. SECONDARY SURVEILLANCE RADAR (SSR) — A surveillance radar system which uses transmitters/receivers (interrogators) and transponders. SEGMENT MINIMUM ALTITUDE (SMA), or SEGMENT MINIMUM SAFE ALTITUDE (SMSA) — An altitude that provides minimum obstacle clearance in each segment of a non-precision approach. Segment minimum (safe) altitudes can be considered “do not descend below” altitudes and can be lower than procedure altitudes which are specifically developed to facilitate a constant rate or stabilized descent. SEGMENTS OF AN INSTRUMENT APPROACH PROCEDURE — An instrument approach procedure may have as many as four separate segments depending on how the approach procedure is structured. ICAO — a. Initial Approach — That segment of an instrument approach procedure between the initial approach fix and the intermediate approach fix or, where applicable, the final approach fix or point. b. Intermediate Approach — That segment of an instrument approach procedure between either the intermediate approach fix and the final approach fix or point, or between the end of a reversal, race track or dead reckoning track procedure and the final approach fix or point, as appropriate. c. Final Approach — That segment of an instrument approach procedure in which alignment and descent for landing are accomplished. d. Missed Approach Procedure — The procedure to be followed if the approach cannot be continued. USA — a. Initial Approach — The segment between the initial approach fix and the intermediate fix or the point where the aircraft is established on the intermediate course or final course. b. Intermediate Approach — The segment between the intermediate fix or point and the final approach fix. c. Final Approach — The segment between the final approach fix or point and the runway, airport or missed approach point. d. Missed Approach — The segment between the missed approach point, or point of arrival at decision height, and the missed approach fix at the prescribed altitude. SEGREGATED PARALLEL OPERATIONS — Simultaneous operations on parallel or near-parallel instrument runways in which one runway is used exclusively for approaches and the other runway is used exclusively for departures. SELECTIVE CALL SYSTEM (SELCAL) — A system which permits the selective calling of individual aircraft over radiotelephone channels linking a ground station with the aircraft. SHORELINE — A line following the general contour of the shore, except that in cases of inlets or bays less than 30NM in width, the line shall pass directly across the inlet or bay to intersect the general contour on the opposite side. SIDESTEP MANEUVER — A visual maneuver accomplished by a pilot at the completion of an instrument approach to permit a straight-in landing on a parallel runway not more than 1200ft to either side of the runway to which the instrument approach was conducted. SIGMET INFORMATION — Information issued by a meteorological watch office concerning the occurrence or expected occurrence of specified en route weather phenomena which may affect the safety of aircraft operations. SIGNAL AREA — An area on an aerodrome used for the display of ground signals. SIGNIFICANT POINT — A specified geographical location used in defining an ATS route or the flight path of an aircraft and for other navigation and ATS purposes. NOTE: There are three categories of significant points: ground-based navigation aid, intersection and waypoint. In the context of this definition, intersection is a significant point expressed as radials, bearings and/or distances from ground-based navigation aids. SLUSH — Water-saturated snow which with a heel-and-toe slap-down motion against the ground will be displaced with a splatter; specific gravity: 0.5 up to 0.8. 70 DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS GLOSSARY NOTE: Combinations of ice, snow and/or standing water may, especially when rain, rain and snow, or snow is falling, produce substances with specific gravities in excess of 0.8. These substances, due to their high water/ice content, will have a transparent rather than a cloudy appearance and, at the higher specific gravities, will be readily distinguishable from slush. SNOW (on the ground) — a. Dry snow. Snow which can be blown if loose or, if compacted by hand, will fall apart upon release; specific gravity: up to but not including 0.35. b. Wet snow. Snow which, if compacted by hand, will stick together and tend to or form a snowball; specific gravity: 0.35 up to but not including 0.5. c. Compacted snow. Snow which has been compressed into a solid mass that resists further compression and will hold together or break up into lumps if picked up; specific gravity: 0.5 and over. SPECIAL USE AIRSPACE — Airspace of defined dimensions identified by an area on the surface of the earth wherein activities must be confined because of their nature and/or wherein limitations may be imposed upon aircraft operations that are not a part of those activities. Types of special use airspace are: a. Alert Area (USA) — Airspace which may contain a high volume of pilot training activities or an unusual type of aerial activity, neither of which is hazardous to aircraft. Alert Areas are depicted on aeronautical charts for the information of nonparticipating pilots. All activities within an Alert Area are conducted in accordance with Federal Aviation Regulations, and pilots of participating aircraft as well as pilots transiting the area are equally responsible for collision avoidance. b. Controlled Firing Area (USA) — Airspace wherein activities are conducted under conditions so controlled as to eliminate hazards to non participating aircraft and to ensure the safety of persons and property on the ground. c. Danger Area (ICAO) — An airspace of defined dimensions within which activities dangerous to the flight of aircraft may exist at specified times. d. Military Operations Area (MOA) (USA) — A MOA is airspace established outside of a Class “A” airspace area to separate or segregate certain nonhazardous military activities from IFR traffic and to identify for VFR traffic where these activities are conducted. e. Prohibited Area (ICAO) — An airspace of defined dimensions, above the land areas or territorial waters of a State, within which the flight of aircraft is prohibited. Prohibited Area (USA) — Airspace designated under FAR Part 73 within which no person may operate an aircraft without the permission of the using agency. f. Restricted Area (ICAO) — An airspace of defined dimensions, above the land areas or territorial waters of a State, within which the flight of aircraft is restricted in accordance with certain specified conditions. Restricted Area (USA) — Airspace designated under Part 73, within which the flight of aircraft, while not wholly prohibited, is subject to restriction. Most restricted areas are designated joint use and IFR/VFR operations in the area may be authorized by the controlling ATC facility when it is not being utilized by the using agency. Restricted areas are depicted on enroute charts. Where joint use is authorized, the name of the ATC controlling facility is also shown. g. Warning Area (USA) — A warning area is airspace of defined dimensions from 3NM outward from the coast of the United States, that contains activity that may be hazardous to nonparticipating aircraft. The purpose of such warning areas is to warn nonparticipating pilots of the potential danger. A warning area may be located over domestic or international waters or both. SPECIAL VFR FLIGHT — A VFR flight cleared by air traffic control to operate within a control zone in meteorological conditions below VMC. STANDARD INSTRUMENT ARRIVAL (STAR) (ICAO) — A designated instrument flight rule (IFR) arrival route linking a significant point, normally on an ATS route, with a point from which a published instrument approach procedure can be commenced. STANDARD INSTRUMENT DEPARTURE (SID) (ICAO) — A designated instrument flight rule (IFR) departure route linking the aerodrome or a specified runway of the aerodrome with a specified point, normally on a designated ATS route, at which the enroute phase of a flight commences. STANDARD INSTRUMENT DEPARTURE (SID) (USA) — A preplanned instrument flight rule (IFR) air traffic control departure procedure printed for pilot use in graphic and/or textual form. SIDs provide transition from the terminal to the appropriate enroute structure. STANDARD ISOBARIC SURFACE — An isobaric surface used on a world-wide basis for representing and analyzing the conditions in the atmosphere. STANDARD TERMINAL ARRIVAL ROUTE (STAR) (USA) — A preplanned instrument flight rule (IFR) air traffic control arrival procedure published for pilot use in graphic and/or textual form. STARs provide transition from the enroute structure to an outer fix or an instrument approach fix/arrival waypoint in the terminal area. STATION DECLINATION — The orientation with respect to true north of VHF transmitted signals. The orientation is originally made to agree with the magnetic variation (an uncontrollable global phenomenon) at the site. Hence station declination (fixed by man) may differ from changed magnetic variation until the station is reoriented. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS GLOSSARY 71 STOPWAY — A defined rectangular area on the ground at the end of take-off run available prepared as a suitable area in which an aircraft can be stopped in the case of an abandoned take-off. SUBSTITUTE ROUTE — A route assigned to pilots when any part of an airway or route is unusable because of navaid status. SUNSET AND SUNRISE — The mean solar times of sunset and sunrise as published in the Nautical Almanac, converted to local standard time for the locality concerned. Within Alaska, the end of evening civil twilight and the beginning of morning civil twilight, as defined for each locality. SURFACE MOVEMENT GUIDANCE AND CONTROL SYSTEM (SMGCS) (USA) — Provisions for guidance and control or regulation for facilities, information, and advice necessary for pilots of aircraft and drivers of ground vehicles to find their way on the airport during low visibility operations and to keep the aircraft or vehicles on the surfaces or within the areas intended for their use. Low visibility operations for this system means reported conditions of RVR 1200 or less. SURVEILLANCE APPROACH (ASR) — An instrument approach wherein the air traffic controller issues instructions, for pilot compliance, based on aircraft position in relation to the final approach course (azimuth), and the distance (range) from the end of the runway as displayed on the controller’s radar scope. The controller will provide recommended altitudes on final approach if requested by the pilot. SURVEILLANCE RADAR — Radar equipment used to determine the position of an aircraft in range and azimuth. TAKE-OFF DISTANCE AVAILABLE (TODA) (ICAO) — The length of the take-off run available plus the length of the clearway, if provided. TAKE-OFF RUN AVAILABLE (TORA) (ICAO) — The length of runway declared available and suitable for the ground run of an airplane taking off. TAXIING — Movement of an aircraft on the surface of an aerodrome under its own power, excluding take-off and landing. TAXIWAY — A defined path on a land aerodrome established for the taxiing of aircraft and intended to provide a link between one part of the aerodrome and another, including: Aircraft Stand Taxilane — A portion of an apron designated as a taxiway and intended to provide access to aircraft stands only. Apron Taxiway — A portion of a taxiway system located on an apron and intended to provide a through taxi route across the apron. Rapid Exit Taxiway — A taxiway connected to a runway at an acute angle and designed to allow landing aeroplanes to turn off at higher speeds than are achieved on other exit taxi-ways and thereby minimizing runway occupancy times. TERMINAL CONTROL AREA (ICAO) — A control area normally established at the confluence of ATS routes in the vicinity of one or more major aerodromes. TERMINAL ARRIVAL AREA (FAA) / TERMINAL AREA ALTITUDE (TAA) (ICAO) — Provides a seamless and efficient transition from the enroute structure to the terminal environment to an underlying RNAV instrument approach procedure for FMS and/or GPS equipped aircraft. Minimum altitudes depict standard obstacle clearances compatible with the associated instrument approach procedure. TAAs will not be found on all RNAV procedures, particularly in areas with a heavy concentration of air traffic. When the TAA is published, it replaces the MSA for that approach procedure. A standard racetrack holding pattern may be provided at the center IAF, and if present may be necessary for course reversal and for altitude adjustment for entry into the procedure. In the latter case, the pattern provides an extended distance for the descent as required by the procedure. The published procedure will be annotated to indicate when the course reversal is not necessary when flying within a particular TAA (e.g., "NoPT"). Otherwise, the pilot is expected to execute the course reversal under the provisions of 14 CFR Section 91.175 (USA). The pilot may elect to use the course reversal pattern when it is not required by the procedure, but must inform air traffic control and receive clearance to do so. TERMINAL VFR RADAR SERVICE (USA) — A national program instituted to extend the terminal radar services provided instrument flight rules (IFR) aircraft to visual flight rules (VFR) aircraft. The program is divided into four types of service referred to as basic radar service, terminal radar service area (TRSA) service, Class “B” service and Class “C” service. a. Basic Radar Service — These services are provided for VFR aircraft by all commissioned terminal radar facilities. Basic radar service includes safety alerts, traffic advisories, limited radar vectoring when requested by the pilot, and sequencing at locations where procedures have been established for this purpose and/or when covered by a letter of agreement. The purpose of this service is to adjust the flow of arriving IFR and VFR aircraft into the traffic pattern in a safe and orderly manner and to provide traffic advisories to departing VFR aircraft. b. TRSA Service — This service provides, in addition to basic radar service, sequencing of all IFR and participating VFR aircraft to the primary airport and separation between all participating VFR aircraft. The purpose of this service is to provide separation between all participating VFR aircraft and all IFR aircraft operating within the area defined as a TRSA. c. Class “B” Service — This service provides, in addition to basic radar service, approved separation of aircraft based on IFR, VFR, and/or weight, and sequencing of VFR arrivals to the primary airport(s). 72 DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS GLOSSARY d. Class “C” Service — This service provides, in addition to basic radar service, approved separation between IFR and VFR aircraft, and sequencing of VFR aircraft, and sequencing of VFR arrivals to the primary airport. TERMINAL RADAR SERVICE AREA (TRSA) (USA) — Airspace surrounding designated airports wherein ATC provides radar vectoring, sequencing and separation on a full-time basis for all IFR and participating VFR aircraft. Service provided in a TRSA is called Stage III Service. Pilots’ participation is urged but is not mandatory. THRESHOLD (THR) — The beginning of that portion of the runway usable for landing. THRESHOLD CROSSING HEIGHT (TCH) — The theoretical height above the runway threshold at which the aircraft's glide slope antenna (or equivalent position) would be if the aircraft maintains the trajectory of the ILS glide slope, MLS glide path or charted descent angle. TOTAL ESTIMATED ELAPSED TIME — For IFR flights, the estimated time required from take-off to arrive over that designated point, defined by reference to navigation aids, from which it is intended that an instrument approach procedure will be commenced, or, if no navigation aid is associated with the destination aerodrome, to arrive over the destination aerodrome. For VFR flights, the estimated time required from take-off to arrive over the destination aerodrome. TOUCHDOWN — The point where the nominal glide path intercepts the runway. NOTE: “Touchdown” as defined above is only a datum and is not necessarily the actual point at which the aircraft will touch the runway. TOUCHDOWN ZONE ELEVATION (TDZE) — The highest elevation in the first 3000ft of the landing surface. TRACK — The projection on the earth’s surface of the path of an aircraft, the direction of which path at any point is usually expressed in degrees from North (true, magnetic or grid). TRAFFIC ALERT AND COLLISION AVOIDANCE SYSTEM (TCAS) — An airborne collision avoidance system based on radar beacon signals which operates independent of ground-based equipment. TCAS-I generates traffic advisory only; TCAS-II generates traffic advisories, and resolution (collision avoidance) advisories in the vertical plane. TRAFFIC AVOIDANCE ADVICE — Advice provided by an air traffic services unit specifying manoeuvres to assist a pilot to avoid a collision. TRAFFIC INFORMATION — Information issued by an air traffic services unit to alert a pilot to other known or observed air traffic which may be in proximity to the position or intended route of flight and to help the pilot avoid a collision. TRANSITION ALTITUDE (TA) — The altitude in the vicinity of an airport at or below which the vertical position of an aircraft is controlled by reference to altitudes (MSL). TRANSITION HEIGHT — The height in the vicinity of an airport at or below which the vertical position of an aircraft is expressed in height above the airport reference datum. TRANSITION LAYER — The airspace between the transition altitude and the transition level. Aircraft descending through the transition layer will use altimeters set to local station pressure, while departing aircraft climbing through the layer will be using standard altimeter setting (QNE) of 29.92 inches of Mercury, 1013.2 millibars, or 1013.2 hectopascals. TRANSITION LEVEL (TL) — The lowest flight level available for use above the transition altitude. TROPICAL CYCLONE — Generic term for a non-frontal synoptic-scale cyclone originating over tropical or sub-tropical waters with organized convection and definite cyclonic surface wind circulation. TROPICAL CYCLONE ADVISORY CENTRE (TCAC) — A meteorological centre designated by regional air navigation agreement to provide advisory information to meteorological watch offices, world area forecast centres and international OPMET databanks regarding the position, forecast direction and speed of movement, central pressure and maximum surface wind of tropical cyclones. TURN ANTICIPATION — Turning maneuver initiated prior to reaching the actual airspace fix or turn point that is intended to keep the aircraft within established airway or route boundaries. UNCERTAINTY PHASE — A situation wherein uncertainty exists as to the safety of an aircraft and its occupants. UNMANNED FREE BALLOON — A non-powerdriven, unmanned, lighter-than-air aircraft in free flight. NOTE: Unmanned free balloons are classified as heavy, medium or light in accordance with specifications contained in ICAO Rules of the Air, Annex 2, Appendix 4. UPPER-AIR CHART — A meteorological chart relating to a specified upper-air surface or layer of the atmosphere. URGENCY — A condition concerning the safety of an aircraft or other vehicle, or of some person on board or within sight, but which does not require immediate assistance. VECTORING — Provision of navigational guidance to aircraft in the form of specific headings, based on the use of an ATS surveillance system. VERTICAL NAVIGATION (VNAV) — That function of RNAV equipment which provides guidance in the vertical plane. VERTICAL PATH ANGLE (VPA) (ICAO) — Angle of the published final approach descent in Baro-VNAV procedures. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS GLOSSARY 73 VERTICAL PATH ANGLE (VPA) (USA) — The descent angle shown on some non-precision approaches describing the geometric descent path from the Final approach fix (FAF), or on occasion from an intervening stepdown fix, to the Threshold Crossing Height (TCH). This angle may or may not coincide with the angle projected by a Visual Glide Slope Indicator (VASI, PAPI, PLASI, etc.) VERY HIGH FREQUENCY (VHF) — The frequencies between 30MHz and 300MHz (200MHz – 3GHz is considered as UHF in the Aviation). VFR FLIGHT — A flight conducted in accordance with the visual flight rules. VIBAL — (Visibilité Balise) Is the method whereby a human observer (or pilot in take-off position) determines the RVR by counting specific markers adjacent to the runway or by counting runway edge lights. VISIBILITY (ICAO) — The ability, as determined by atmospheric conditions and expressed in units of distance, to see and identify prominent unlighted objects by day and prominent lighted objects by night. a. Flight Visibility — The visibility forward from the cockpit of an aircraft in flight. b. Ground Visibility — The visibility at an aerodrome as reported by an accredited observer. c. Runway Visual Range (RVR) — The range over which the pilot of an aircraft on the centerline of a runway can see the runway surface markings or the lights delineating the runway or identifying its centerline. VISIBILITY (USA) — The ability, as determined by atmospheric conditions and expressed in units of distance, to see and identify prominent unlighted objects by day and prominent lighted objects by night. Visibility is reported as statute or nautical miles, hundreds of feet or meters. a. Flight Visibility — The average forward horizontal distance, from the cockpit of an aircraft in flight, at which prominent unlighted objects may be seen and identified by day and prominent lighted objects may be seen and identified by night. b. Ground Visibility — Prevailing horizontal visibility near the earth’s surface as reported by the United States National Weather Service or an accredited observer. c. Prevailing Visibility — The greatest horizontal visibility equaled or exceeded throughout at least half the horizon circle which need not necessarily be continuous. d. Runway Visibility Value (RVV) — The visibility determined for a particular runway by a transmissometer. A meter provides a continuous indication of the visibility (reported in miles or fractions of miles) for the runway. RVV is used in lieu of prevailing visibility in determining minimums for a particular runway. e. Runway Visual Range (RVR) — An instrumentally derived value, based on standard calibrations, that represents the horizontal distance a pilot will see down the runway from the approach end; it is based on the sighting of either high intensity runway lights or on the visual contrast of other targets whichever yields the greater visual range. RVR, in contrast to prevailing or runway visibility, is based on what a pilot in a moving aircraft should see looking down the runway. RVR is horizontal visual range, not slant visual range. It is based on the measurement of a transmissometer made near the touchdown point of the instrument runway and is reported in hundreds of feet. RVR is used in lieu of RVV and/or prevailing visibility in determining minimums for a particular runway. 1. Touchdown RVR — The RVR visibility readout values obtained from RVR equipment serving the runway touchdown zone. 2. Mid-RVR — The RVR readout values obtained from RVR equipment located midfield of the runway. 3. Rollout RVR — The RVR readout values obtained from RVR equipment located nearest the rollout end of the runway. VISUAL APPROACH (ICAO) — An approach by an IFR flight when either part or all of an instrument approach procedure is not completed and the approach is executed in visual reference to terrain. VISUAL APPROACH (USA) — An approach conducted on an instrument flight rules (IFR) flight plan which authorizes the pilot to proceed visually and clear of clouds to the airport. The pilot must, at all times, have either the airport or the preceding aircraft in sight. This approach must be authorized and under the control of the appropriate air traffic control facility. Reported weather at the airport must be ceiling at or above 1000ft and visibility of 3 miles or greater. VISUAL DESCENT POINT (VDP) — A defined point on the final approach course of a non-precision straight-in approach procedure from which normal descent from the MDA to the runway touchdown point may be commenced, provided the approach threshold of that runway, or approach lights, or other markings identifiable with the approach end of that runway are clearly visible to the pilot. VISUAL MANOEUVRING (CIRCLING) AREA — The area in which obstacle clearance should be taken into consideration for aircraft carrying out a circling approach. VISUAL METEOROLOGICAL CONDITIONS (VMC) — Meteorological conditions expressed in terms of visibility, distance from cloud, and ceiling equal to or better than specified minima. NOTE: The specified minima are contained in ICAO Rules of the Air, Annex 2, Chapter 4. VOLMET BROADCAST — Routine broadcast of meteorological information for aircraft in flight. 74 DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS GLOSSARY VOLCANIC ASH ADVISORY CENTRE (VAAC) — A meteorological centre designated by regional air navigation agreement to provide advisory information to meteorological watch offices, area control centres, flight information centres, world area forecast centres, relevant regional area forecast centres and international OPMET data banks regarding the lateral and vertical extent and forecast movement of volcanic ash in the atmosphere following volcanic eruptions. VOLMET BROADCAST — Provision of current aerodrome meteorological reports (METAR) and special meteorological reports (SPECI), aerodrome forecasts (TAF), SIGMET by means of continuous and repetitive voice broadcasts for aircraft in flight. VOLMET DATA LINK SERVICE (D-VOLMET) — Provision of current METAR, SPECI, TAF, SIGMET, special air-reports not covered by SIGMET and, where available, AIRMET via data link. WARNING AREA (USA) — [see SPECIAL USE AIRSPACE (SUA)]. WAYPOINT — A specified geographical location used to define an area navigation route or the flight path of an aircraft employing area navigation. Waypoints are identified as either: Fly-by waypoint — A fly-by waypoint requires the use of turn anticipation to avoid overshoot of the next flight segment; or Fly-over waypoint — A fly-over waypoint precludes any turn until the waypoint is overflown and is followed by an intercept maneuver of the next flight segment. WEATHER SYSTEMS PROCESSOR (WSP) — An add-on weather processor to selected Airport Surveillance Radar (ASR)-9 facilities that adds Doppler weather radar capability and provides wind shear and microburst warnings. The system gives controllers timely and accurate warnings for relaying to pilots via radio communications. The WSP also provides controllers with thunderstorm cell locations and movement as well as the predicted future position and intensity of wind shifts that may affect airport operations. The system can also process precipitation data to reduce false severe weather reports caused by anomalous propagation. WIDE AREA AUGMENTATION SYSTEM (WAAS) — WAAS is a navigation system developed for civil aviation that provides extremely accurate horizontal and vertical navigation for all classes of aircraft in all phases of flight - including enroute navigation, airport departures, and airport arrivals. This includes vertically-guided landing approaches in instrument meteorological conditions at all qualified locations. WORLD AREA FORECAST CENTRE (WAFC) — A meteorological centre designated to prepare and issue significant weather forecasts and upper-air forecasts in digital and/or pictorial form on a global basis direct States by appropriate means as part of the aeronautical fixed service. WORLD AREA FORECAST SYSTEM (WAFS) — A world-wide system by which world area forecast centres provide aeronautical meteorological en-route forecasts in uniform standardized formats. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS ABBREVIATIONS USED IN AIRWAY MANUAL Abbreviations Us ed in Airway Manual DEFINITIONS A/A AAF AAIM AAIS AAL AAS AAU AB ABM ABN AC ACA ACA ACAS ACARS ACC ACFT ACN AD ADA ADF ADIZ ADNL ADR ADS ADV AEIS AER AERADIO AERO AF Aux AFB AFIS AFLD AFN AFRS AFRU AFS AFSS A/G AGL AGNIS AH AHP AIRAC AIREP AIS ALA ALF ALS Air to Air Army Air Field Aircraft Autonomous Integrity Monitoring Automated Aerodrome Information Service Above Aerodrome Level Airport Advisory Service Authorized Approach UNICOM Air Base Abeam Aerodrome Beacon Air Carrier Arctic Control Area Approach Control Area Airborne Collision Avoidance System Airborne Communications Addressing and Reporting System Area Control Center Aircraft Aircraft Classification Number Aerodrome Advisory Area Automatic Direction Finding Air Defense Identification Zone Additional Advisory Route Automatic Dependent Surveillance Advisory Area Aeronautical Enroute Information Service Approach End of Runway Air Radio Aerodrome Air Force Auxiliary Field Air Force Base Aerodrome Flight Information Service Airfield American Forces Network Armed Forces Radio Stations Aerodrome Frequency Response Unit Air Force Station Automated Flight Service Station Air-to-Ground Above Ground Level Azimuth Guidance Nose-in-Stand Alert Height Army Heliport Aeronautical Information Regulation and Control Air-Report Aeronautical Information Services Aircraft Landing Area Auxiliary Landing Field Approach Light System 75 76 ALS ALT ALTN AMA AMSL ANGB AOE AOM AOR APAPI APC APCH APP APT APV AR ARB ARINC ARO ARP ARR ARTCC ASDA ASOS ASR ATA ATCAA ATCC ATCT ATD ATF ATFM ATIS ATND SKD ATS ATZ AU AUP AUTH AUW AUX AVBL AWIB AWIS AWOS AWSS AWY AZM Baro VNAV BC BCM BCN BCOB DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS ABBREVIATIONS USED IN AIRWAY MANUAL Low Intensity Approach Lights Altitude Alternate Area Minimum Altitude Above Mean Sea Level Air National Guard Base Airport/Aerodrome of Entry Airport Operating Minimums Area of Responsibility Abbreviated Precision Approach Path Indicator Area Positive Control Approach Approach Control Airport Approach Procedure with Vertical Guidance Authorization Required Air Reserve Base Aeronautical Radio, Inc. Aerodrome Reporting Officer Airport Reference Point Arrival Air Route Traffic Control Center Accelerate Stop Distance Available Automated Surface Observing System Airport Surveillance Radar Actual Time of Arrival Air Traffic Control Assigned Airspace Air Traffic Control Center Air Traffic Control Tower Actual Time of Departure Aerodrome Traffic Frequency Air Traffic Flow Management Automatic Terminal Information Service Attended Scheduled Hours Air Traffic Service Aerodrome Traffic Zone Approach UNICOM Airspace Utilization Plane Authorized All-up Weight Auxiliary Available Aerodrome Weather Information Broadcast Aerodrome Weather Information Service Automated Weather Observing System Aviation Weather Sensor System Airway Azimuth Barometric Vertical Navigation Back Course Back Course Marker Beacon Broken Clouds or Better DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS ABBREVIATIONS USED IN AIRWAY MANUAL BCST BDRY BLDG BM BRG B-RNAV BS C CADIZ CAE CA/GRS CANPA CARS CAT CBA CDFA CDI CDR CDT CEIL CERAP CFIT CGAS CGL CH CH CHGD CL CMNPS CMV CNF CO COMLO COMMS CONT CONTD COORDS COP CORR CP CPDLC Cpt CRC CRP CRS CST CTA CTAF CTL CTOT CTR CVFP CVFR Broadcast Boundary Building Back Marker Bearing Basic RNAV Broadcast Station (Commercial) ATC IFR Flight Plan Clearance Delivery Frequency Canadian Air Defense Identification Zone Control Area Extension Certified Air/Ground Radio Service Constant Angle Non-Precision Approach Community Aerodrome Radio Station Category Cross Border Area Continuous Descent Final Approach Course Deviation Indicator Conditional Route Central Daylight Time Ceiling Combined Center/Radar Approach Control Controlled Flight Into Terrain Coast Guard Air Station Circling Guidance Lights Channel Critical Height Changed Centerline Lights Canadian Minimum Navigation Performance Specification Converted Met Visibility Computer Navigation Fix County Compass Locator Communications Continuous Continued Coordinates Change Over Point Corridor Command Post Controller Pilot Data Link Communications Clearance (Pre-Taxi Procedure) Cyclical Redundancy Check Compulsory Reporting Point Course Central Standard Time Control Area Common Traffic Advisory Frequency Control Calculated Take-off Time Control Zone Charted Visual Flight Procedure Controlled VFR 77 78 D DA DA (H) D-ATIS DCL DCT DECMSND DEG DEP DER DEWIZ DF DISPL THRESH DIST DME DOD DOM DP DRCO E EAT ECOMS EDT EET EFAS EFF EFVS EH ELEV EMAS EMERG ENG EOBT EST EST ETA ETD ETE ETOPS EVS FAA FACF FAF FAIL FANS FAP FAR FAS DB FAT FATO FCP FIA FIC DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS ABBREVIATIONS USED IN AIRWAY MANUAL Day Decision Altitude Decision Altitude (Height) Digital ATIS Data Link Departure Clearance Service Direct Decommissioned Degree Departure Control/Departure Procedures Departure End of Runway Distance Early Warning Identification Zone Direction Finder Displaced Threshold Distance Distance-Measuring Equipment Department of Defense Domestic Obstacle Departure Procedure Dial-up Remote Communications Outlet East or Eastern Expected Approach Time Jeppesen Explanation of Common Minimum Specifications Eastern Daylight Time Estimated Elapsed Time Enroute Flight Advisory Service Effective Enhanced Flight Vision System Eastern Hemisphere Elevation Engineered Materials Arresting System Emergency Engine Estimated Off Block Time Eastern Standard Time Estimated Estimated Time of Arrival Estimated Time of Departure Estimated Time Enroute Extended Range Operation with two-engine airplanes Enhanced Vision System Federal Aviation Administration Final Approach Course Fix Final Approach Fix Failure Future Air Navigation System Final Approach Point Federal Aviation Regulation Final Approach Segment Datablock Final Approach Track Final Approach and Take-off Area Final Control Point Flight Information Area Flight Information Center DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS ABBREVIATIONS USED IN AIRWAY MANUAL FIR FIS FL FLARES FLD FLG FLT FM FMC FMS FPM FPR FRA FREQ FSS FT FTS G GA GBAS GCA GCO GEN GLONASS GLS GMT GND GND GNSS GP GPA GPS GPWS GS G/S GWT H H24 HAA HALS HAS HAT HC HDG HF HGS HI HI HIALS HIRL HIRO HIWAS HJ Flight Information Region Flight Information Service Flight Level (Altitude) Flare Pots or Goosenecks Field Flashing Flight Fan Marker Flight Management Computer Flight Management System Feet Per Minute Flight Planning Requirements Free Route Airspace Frequency Flight Service Station Feet Flexible Track System Guards only (radio frequencies) General Aviation Ground-Based Augmentation System Ground Controlled Approach (radar) Ground Communication Outlet General Global Orbiting Navigation Satellite System Global Navigation Satellite System [GNSS] Landing System Greenwich Mean Time Ground Control Surface of the Earth (either land or water) Global Navigation Satellite System Glidepath Glidepath Angle Global Positioning System Ground Proximity Warning System Glide Slope Ground Speed Gross Weight Non-Directional Radio Beacon or High Altitude 24 Hour Service Height Above Airport High Approach Landing System Height Above Site Height Above Touchdown Critical Height Heading High Frequency (3-30 MHz) Head-up Guidance System High (altitude) High Intensity (lights) High Intensity Approach Light System High Intensity Runway Edge Lights High Intensity Runway Operations Hazardous Inflight Weather Advisory Service Sunrise to Sunset 79 80 HN HO hPa HR HS HST HUD HUDLS HX Hz I IAC IAF IAML IAP IAS IATA IAWP IBN ICAO IDENT IF IFBP IFR IGS ILS IM IMAL IMC IMTA INDEFLY IN or INS INFO INOP INS INT INTL IORRA IR IS ITWS I/V JAA JAR-OPS KGS kHz KIAS KM KMH KT KTAS L LAA DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS ABBREVIATIONS USED IN AIRWAY MANUAL Sunset to Sunrise By Operational Requirements Hectopascal (one hectopascal = one millibar) Hours (period of time) During Hours of Scheduled Operations High Speed Taxiway Turn-off Head-up Display Head-Up Display Landing System No Specific Working Hours Hertz (cycles per second) Island Instrument Approach Chart Initial Approach Fix Integrity Monitor Alarm Instrument Approach Procedure Indicated Airspeed International Air Transport Association Initial Approach Waypoint Identification Beacon International Civil Aviation Organization Identification Intermediate Fix Inflight Broadcast Procedure Instrument Flight Rules Instrument Guidance System Instrument Landing System Inner Marker Integrity Monitor Alarm Instrument Meteorological Conditions Intensive Military Training Area Indefinitely Inches Information Inoperative Inertial Navigation System Intersection International Indian Ocean Random RNAV Area Instrument Restricted Controlled Airspace Islands Integrated Terminal Weather System Instrument/Visual Controlled Airspace Joint Aviation Authorities Joint Aviation Requirements–Operations Kilograms Kilohertz Knots Indicated Airspeed Kilometers Kilometer(s) per Hour Knots Knots True Airspeed Locator (Compass) Local Airport Advisory DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS ABBREVIATIONS USED IN AIRWAY MANUAL LAAS LACFT LAHSO LAT LBCM LBM LBS LCG LCN Lctr LDA LDA LDI LDIN LGTH LIM LIRL LLWAS LMM LNAV LNDG LO LOC LOM LONG LPV LSALT LT LTP LTS LVP LWIS M MAA MAG MAHF MALS MALSF MALSR MAP MAX MB MCA MCAF MCAS MCTA MDA MDA(H) MDT MEA MEHT MEML 81 Local Area Augmentation System Large Aircraft Land and Hold Short Operations Latitude Locator Back Course Marker Locator Back Marker Pounds (Weight) Load Classification Group Load Classification Number Locator (Compass) Landing Distance Available Localizer-type Directional Aid Landing Direction Indicator Lead-in Light System Length Locator Inner Marker Low Intensity Runway Lights Low Level Wind Shear Alert System Locator Middle Marker Lateral Navigation Landing Locator at Outer Marker Site Localizer Locator Outer Marker Longitude Localizer Performance with Vertical Guidance Lowest Safe Altitude Local Time Landing Threshold Point Lights Low Visibility Procedures Limited Weather Information System Meters Maximum Authorized Altitude Magnetic Missed Approach Holding Fix Medium Intensity Approach Light System Medium Intensity Approach Light System with Sequenced Flashing Lights Medium Intensity Approach Light System with Runway Alignment Indicator Lights Missed Approach Point Maximum Millibars Minimum Crossing Altitude Marine Corps Air Facility Marine Corps Air Station Military Controlled Airspace Minimum Descent Altitude Minimum Descent Altitude (Height) Mountain Daylight Time Minimum Enroute Altitude Minimum Eye Height Over Threshold Memorial 82 MET MF MFA MHA MHz MI MIALS MIL MIM MIN MIRL MKR MLS MM MNM MNPS MOA MOCA MORA MRA MROT MSA MSL MST MTA MTAF MTCA MTMA MTOW MUN MVA N NA NAAS NADC NAEC NAF NALF NAP NAR NAS NAT NAT/OTS NATL NAVAID NCA NCRP NDB NE NM No NoPT NOTAM DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS ABBREVIATIONS USED IN AIRWAY MANUAL Meteorological Mandatory Frequency Minimum Flight Altitude Minimum Holding Altitude Megahertz Medium Intensity (lights) Medium Intensity Approach Light System Military Minimum Minute Medium Intensity Runway Edge Lights Marker Radio Beacon Microwave Landing System Middle Marker Minimum Minimum Navigation Performance Specifications Military Operation Area Minimum Obstruction Clearance Altitude Minimum Off-Route Altitude (Grid or Route) Minimum Reception Altitude Minimum Runway Occupancy Time Minimum Safe/Sector Altitude Mean Sea Level Mountain Standard Time Military Training Area Mandatory Traffic Advisory Frequency Minimum Terrain Clearance Altitude Military Terminal Control Area Maximum Take-off Weight Municipal Minimum Vectoring Altitude Night, North or Northern Not Authorized Naval Auxiliary Air Station Naval Air Development Center Naval Air Engineering Center Naval Air Facility Naval Auxiliary Landing Field Noise Abatement Procedure North American Routes Naval Air Station North Atlantic Traffic North Atlantic Traffic/Organized Track System National Navigational Aid Northern Control Area Non-Compulsory Reporting Point Non-Directional Beacon/Radio Beacon Northeast Nautical Mile(s) Number No Procedure Turn Notices to Airmen DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS ABBREVIATIONS USED IN AIRWAY MANUAL NPA NW NWC OAC OAS OCA OCA (H) OCL OCNL OCTA ODALS ODP OFZ OM OPS O/R O/T OTR OTS PA PAL PANS-OPS PAPI PAR PARK PCL PCN PCZ PDC PDG PDT PERF PERM PinS PISTON PJE PLASI PNR POFZ PPO PPR PRA PRM P-RNAV PROC PROP PSP PST PTO PVT QDM QDR Non-Precision Approach Northwest Naval Weapons Center Oceanic Area Control Obstacle Assessment Surface Oceanic Control Area Obstacle Clearance Altitude (Height) Obstacle Clearance Limit Occasional Oceanic Control Area Omni-Directional Approach Light System Obstacle Departure Procedure Obstacle Free Zone Outer Marker Operations or Operates On Request Other Times Oceanic Transition Route Out-of-Service Precision Approach Pilot Activated Lighting Procedures for Air Navigation Services - Aircraft Operations Precision Approach Path Indicator Precision Approach Radar Parking Pilot Controlled Lighting Pavement Classification Number Positive Control Zone Pre-Departure Clearance Procedure Design Gradient Pacific Daylight Time Performance Permanent Point In Space Piston Aircraft Parachute Jumping Exercise Pulsating Visual Approach Slope Indicator Prior Notice Required Precision Obstacle Free Zone Prior Permission Only Prior Permission Required Precision Radar Approach Precision Radar Monitor Precision RNAV Procedure Propeller Aircraft Pierced Steel Planking Pacific Standard Time Part Time Operation Private Operator Magnetic bearing to facility Magnetic bearing from facility 83 84 QFE QNE QNH R RA RAI RAIL RAIM RAPCON RASS RCAG RCC RCL RCLM RCO REF REIL REP RESA REV REP RF RL RNAV RNP RNP AR RNPC ROC RON RPT RSA RTE RTF RTS RVR RVSM RVV RW RWSL RWY S SAAAR SALS SALSF SAP SAR SATCOM SAWRS SBAS SCA SCOB DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS ABBREVIATIONS USED IN AIRWAY MANUAL Height above airport elevation (or runway threshold elevation) based on local station pressure Altimeter setting 29.92" Hg or 1013.2 Mb. Altitude above sea level based on local station pressure R-063 or 063R Magnetic Course (radial) measured as 063 from a VOR station. Flight can be inbound or outbound on this line. Radio Altimeter Runway Alignment Indicator Runway Alignment Indicator Lights Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring Radar Approach Control Remote Altimeter Source Remote Communications Air Ground Rescue Coordination Center Runway Centerline Runway Center Line Markings Remote Communications Outlet Reference Runway End Identifier Lights Reporting Point Runway End Safety Area Reverse Ramp Entrance Point Radius to Fix Runway (edge) Lights Area Navigation Required Navigation Performance Required Navigation Performance Authorization Required Required Navigation Performance Capability Rate of Climb Remain Overnight Regular Public Transport Runway Safety Area Route Radiotelephony Return to Service Runway Visual Range Reduced Vertical Separation Minimum Runway Visibility Values Runway Runway Status Lights Runway South or Southern Special Aircraft and Aircrew Authorization Required Short Approach Light System Short Approach Light System with Sequenced Flashing Lights Stabilized Approach Search and Rescue Satellite voice air-ground calling Supplementary Aviation Weather Reporting Station Satellite-Based Augmentation System Southern Control Area Scattered Clouds or Better DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS ABBREVIATIONS USED IN AIRWAY MANUAL SDF SE SEC SELCAL SFC SFL SFL-V SID SIWL SKD SLP SM SMA SMGCS SMSA SOC SODALS SPAR SRA SRA SRE SR-SS SSALF SSALR SSALS SSB SSR STAR STD Std ST-IN STOL SUPP SW SW SYS °T T T T-VASI TA TAA TAA TACAN TAR TAS TCA TCAS TCH TCTA 85 Simplified Directional Facility Southeast Seconds Selective Call System Surface of the earth (either land or water) Sequenced Flashing Lights Sequenced Flashing Lights - Variable Light Intensity Standard Instrument Departure Single Isolated Wheel Load Scheduled Speed Limiting Point Statute Miles Segment Minimum Altitude Surface Movement Guidance and Control System Segment Minimum Safe Altitude Start of Climb Simplified Omnidirectional Approach Lighting System French Light Precision Approach Radar Special Rules Area Surveillance Radar Approach Surveillance Radar Element Sunrise-Sunset Simplified Short Approach Light System with Sequenced Flashing Lights Simplified Short Approach Light System with Runway Alignment Indicator Lights Simplified Short Approach Light System Single Sideband Secondary Surveillance Radar (in U.S.A. ATCRBS) Standard Terminal Arrival Route (USA) Standard Instrument Arrival (ICAO) Indication of an altimeter set to 29.92" Hg or 1013.2 hPa (Mb) without temperature correction Standard Straight-in Short Take-off and Landing Supplemental/Supplementary Single Wheel Landing Gear Southwest System True (degrees) Terrain clearance altitude (MOCA) Transmits only (radio frequencies) Tee Visual Approach Slope Indicator Transition Altitude Terminal Arrival Area (FAA) Terminal Arrival Altitude (ICAO) Tactical Air Navigation (bearing and distance station) Terminal Area Surveillance Radar True Air Speed Terminal Control Area Traffic Alert and Collision Avoidance System Threshold Crossing Height Transcontinental Control Area 86 TDWR TDZ TDZE TEMP TERPS THR TIBA TIZ TL TMA TML TMN TMZ TNA TODA TORA TP TRA TRACON TRANS TRANS ALT TRANS LEVEL TRCV TSA TVOR TWEB TWIP TWR TWY U U UAS UAV UFN UHF UIR UNCT’L UNICOM UNICOM (A) UNL U/S USAF USB USN UTA UTC VAL VAR VASI VDA VDP VE VFR DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS ABBREVIATIONS USED IN AIRWAY MANUAL Terminal Doppler Weather Radar Touchdown Zone Touchdown Zone Elevation Temporary United States Standard for Terminal Instrument Procedure Threshold Traffic Information Broadcast by Aircraft Traffic Information Zone Transition Level Terminal Control Area Terminal Terminates Transponder Mandatory Zone Transition Area Take-off Distance Available Take-off Run Available Turning Point Temporary Reserved Airspace Terminal Radar Approach Control Transition(s) Transition Altitude Transition Level Tri-Color Visual Approach Slope Indicator Temporary Segregated Area Terminal VOR Transcribed Weather Broadcast Terminal Weather Information for Pilots Tower (Aerodrome Control) Taxiway Unspecified UNICOM Unmanned Aerial System Unmanned Aerial Vehicle Until Further Notice Ultra High Frequency (300-3000 MHz) Upper Flight Information Region Uncontrolled Aeronautical Advisory Service Automated UNICOM Unlimited Unserviceable US Air Force Upper Sideband US Navy Upper Control Area Coordinated Universal Time Vertical Alert Limit Magnetic Variation Visual Approach Slope Indicator Vertical Descent Angle Visual Descent Point Visual Exempted Visual Flight Rules DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS ABBREVIATIONS USED IN AIRWAY MANUAL VGSI VHA VHF VIBAL VIS VMC VNAP VNAV VOLMET VOR VORTAC VOT VPA VV V/V W WAAS WATIR WH W/O WP WSP WX X Z Visual Glide Slope Indicator Volcanic Hazard Area Very High Frequency (30-300 MHz) Visibilité Balise (RVR taken by a human observer) Visibility Visual Meteorological Conditions Vertical Noise Abatement Procedures Vertical Navigation Meteorological Information for Aircraft in Flight VHF Omnidirectional Range VOR and TACAN co-located Radiated Test Signal VOR Vertical Path Angle Vertical Visibility Vertical Velocity or speed West or Western Wide Area Augmentation System Weather and Terminal Information Reciter Western Hemisphere Without Area Navigation (RNAV) Waypoint Weather Systems Processor Weather On Request Zulu Time/Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) 87 Enroute Chart Legend Information ENROUTE CHART LEGEND INFORMATION ENROUTE CHART LEGEND 89 Enroute Chart Legend - General GENERAL Jeppesen Enroute Charts are compiled and constructed using the best available aeronautical and topographical reference charts. Most Jeppesen Enroute Charts use the Lambert Conformal Conic projection. The design is intended primarily for airway instrument navigation to be referenced to cockpit instruments. Charts are identified by code letters for world areas covered by a series, by parenthetical letters for the altitude coverage, and by numbers for the individual chart. For example, P(H/L)2 is a chart of the Pacific series covering both high and low altitude operations and is number 2 of the series. E(HI)3 and E(LO) 10 are charts of the European series covering high and low altitude operations respectively. To use the Low Altitude and High/Low Altitude Enroute Charts, use the small index map on the cover panel to locate the major city closest to your desired area. These names are the major locations shown within each chart panel and are indicated along the “zigdex” at the top of the chart. Open the chart to the panel desired and follow your flight progress by turning the folds like the pages of a book. It is seldom necessary to completely unfold the chart. Although the High Altitude Charts do not have this “zigdex” feature, they may be used in the same way. When the folded chart is opened at one of the zigdex numbers, the exposed portion of the chart is subdivided into four sections by a vertical and a horizontal fold. Each of the sections is labeled at the margin as A, B, C, or D. A combination of the panel number and the lettered section in which it falls is used to simplify finding a location referenced in the Enroute Chart NOTAMS or in the communications tabulation. For example, p5C means you will find the referenced item on panel 5 in section C. Unless otherwise indicated, all bearings and radials are magnetic; enroute distances are in nautical miles; vertical measurements of elevation are in feet above mean sea level; enroute altitudes are either in feet above mean sea level (based on QNH altimeter setting) or clearly expressed as flight levels (FL) (based on standard altimeter setting of 29.92 inches of Mercury or 1013.2 millibars or Hectopascals); and all times are Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) unless labeled local time (LT). Enroute communications are shown on the charts or tabulated on the end folds where they may be referred to with a minimum of paper turning. Terminal communications are also provided in the tabulations except on charts designed solely for high altitude operations. The end panel tabulations refer to the location of the facility on an area chart (if one exists) by a 4-letter identifier, as well as to the location within a panel and section of the Enroute Chart. Due to congestion of airspace information within large metropolitan areas, complete off airway information is not always shown on Enroute Charts. These areas are supplemented by Area Charts at larger chart scales with complete information. They should be used for all flights when arriving or departing an airport within an Area Chart. On the Enroute Charts, the Area Charts are identified by a shaded symbol on the cover panel, and a shaded dashed line, with location name, and Airport identifier on the Enroute Chart. Enroute and Area Charts are supplemented by Enroute Chart NOTAMS when significant changes occur between revision dates. Chart revision dates are always on a Friday (chart completion and/or mailing dates). Following this date a short concise note explains the significant changes made. Chart EFFECTIVE dates other than EFFECTIVE UPON RECEIPT are provided when significant changes have been charted which will become effective on the date indicated. Chart symbols are portrayed on the following pages with an explanation of their use. Reference should be made to the Chart Glossary for a more complete explanation of terms. This legend covers all Enroute and Area Charts. Chart symbols on the following pages may not appear on each chart. JEPPESEN IFR ENROUTE PLOTTER INSTRUCTIONS — ENROUTE AND AREA CHARTS MILEAGES Most Enroute and Area Chart mileages are represented on the plotter. Check the top margin of the chart in use for the correct scale. All chart scales, and all plotter scales, are in nautical miles. BEARINGS AND COURSES The plotter centerline is highlighted by arrows from each compass rose. 1269279210000 Position the plotter centerline over the desired track to be flown. Slide the plotter left or right along the track until one of the compass roses is centered over the desired navaid. If the centerline arrow on the compass rose points in the SAME direction as your flight, read the radial or bearing at the north tick extending from the navaid. 90 ENROUTE CHART LEGEND INFORMATION ENROUTE CHART LEGEND If the centerline arrow on the compass rose points OPPOSITE to the direction of flight, the radial or bearing is the reciprocal of the number read at the navaid’s north magnetic tick. NOTE: If your earlier version plotter does not depict the arrows be sure the plotter is positioned so that the 360° position on the compass rose points in the SAME direction as your flight. The compass rose is read in a counter-clockwise direction. Example: 1 269279210000 ENROUTE CHART LEGEND The following legend pages briefly explain symbology used on Enroute Charts worldwide. Not all items apply in all areas.Refer to Chart Glossary for more complete definitions of items. NAVAID SYMBOLS VOR (VHF Omnidirectional Range) 1269279210000 TACAN (Tactical Air Navigation) or DME (Distance Measuring Equipment) 1269279210000 Terminal class TACAN 1269279210000 VORTAC/VORDME 1269279210000 NDB (Nondirectional Radio Beacon) 1269279210000 Compass Locator (Charted only when providing an enroute function or TWEB); or a SABH class radio beacon. 1269279210000 ENROUTE CHART LEGEND INFORMATION ENROUTE CHART LEGEND 91 Magnetic north ticks on navigational facilities fit compass roses on IFR Enroute Chart Plotters, making it possible to measure the magnetic bearing of any track. 1269279210000 LOC, LDA, or SDF Front Course 1269279210000 LOC Back Course 1269279210000 MLS Course 1269279210000 FAN MARKERS Elliptical Pattern 1269279210000 Bone Pattern 1269279210000 Fan Marker and NDB 1269279210000 BROADCAST STATION Commercial 1269279210000 Armed Forces Radio Station 1269279210000 NAVAID IDENTIFICATION 1269279210000 1269279210000 Navaid identification is given in shadow box when navaid is airway or route component, with frequency, identifier, and Morse Code. DME capability is indicated by a small “D” preceding the VOR frequency at frequency paired navaids. VOR and VORTAC navaid operational ranges are identified (when known) within the navaid box except on USA and Canada charts. (T) represents Terminal; (L) represents Low Altitude; and (H) represents High Altitude. On High/Low altitude Enroute Charts, geographical coordinates (latitude and longitude) are shown for navaids forming high or all altitude airways and routes. On Area Charts, geographical coordinates are shown when navaid is airway or route component. Some L/MF navaids are combined in the shadow box even though they are not part of the airway/route structure, except on US and CA charts. They are used for course guidance over lengthy route segments when airway/track is designated into a VOR. When VOR and TAC/DME antennas are not co-located, a notation “DME not Co-located” is shown below the navaid box. 1269279210000 1269279210000 1269279210000 Off-airway navaids are unboxed on Low and High/Low charts. TACAN/DME channel is shown when VOR navaid has a frequency paired DME capability. When an L/MF navaid performs an enroute function, the Morse Code of its identification letters are shown. 92 ENROUTE CHART LEGEND INFORMATION ENROUTE CHART LEGEND 1269279210000 When TACAN or DME are not frequency paired with the VOR, the TACAN is identified separately. The “Ghost” VOR frequency, shown in parentheses, enables civilian tuning of DME facility. 1269279210000 1269279210000 1269279210000 The navaid frequency and identification are located below the location name of the airport when the navaid name, location name, and airport name are the same. LOC, SDF, LDA and MLS navaids are identified by a round cornered box when they perform an enroute function. Frequency identification and Morse Code are provided. DME is included when navaid and DME are frequency paired. Fan Marker name and code. 1269279210000 Dial-up Remote Communications Outlet (DRCO) (Canada). Connects pilot with an ATS unit via a commercial telephone line. See Canada Air Traffic Control for details. 1269279210000 COMMUNICATIONS RADIO FREQUENCIES Frequencies for radio communications are included above NAVAID names, when voice is available through the NAVAID. These frequencies are also shown at other remoted locations. River Radio transmits on 114.6 and transmits and receives on 122.2, 122.45 MHz and HF frequency 5680. 1269279210000 River Radio (RIV) guards (receives) on 122.1 and transmits through Canyon VOR on 113.9. 1269279210000 River Radio transmits and receives on 122.6 located at Diamond. Small circle enclosing dot denotes remote communication site. 1269279210000 Tapeats Radio transmits and receives on 122.2 and 122.4. Telephone symbol indicates additional frequencies in communications panel listed under Tapeats. 1269279210000 HIWAS — Hazardous Inflight Weather Advisory Service. Broadcasts SIGMETS, AIRMETS and PIREPS continuously over VOR frequency. 1269279210000 River Radio transmits and receives at Phantom on 122.3. Additionally, Phantom Radio transmits and receives on 122.6. 1269279210000 River Radio transmits through Lava VOR on 115.3, but is not capable of receiving transmissions through the VOR site. 1269279210000 1269279210000 1269279210000 1269279210000 1269279210000 Grand Radio is located at the airport and transmits and receives on 122.2 and 122.6. Additionally, Grand Radio provides LAA (Local Airport Advisory) on 123.6. Terminal Radio frequencies and service may be included over airport or location name. Radio call is included when different than airport or location name. Mandatory Frequencies (MF), Aerodrome Traffic Frequencies (ATF) or UNICOM (U) frequencies include contact distance when other than the standard 5 nm. ENROUTE CHART LEGEND INFORMATION ENROUTE CHART LEGEND 1269279210000 1269279210000 93 US “Enroute Flight Advisory Service”. Ident of controlling station to call, using (name of station) FLIGHT WATCH on 122.0 MHz. Charted above VORs associated with controlling station and remoted outlets. Service is not continuous. The telephone symbol indicates additional communications may be found in the communications tabulation after the associated NAVAID or location name. Telephone symbol does not necessarily mean that voice is available through the NAVAID. 1269279210000 Call and frequencies of Control Service for use within graphically portrayed Radio Frequency Sector Boundaries. Call sign “CONTROL” and / or “RADAR” is omitted in all communication boxes in several regions. 1269279210000 Plain language inflight weather station with name and frequency. 1269279210000 1269279210000 Call and frequencies of control or unit service. For use within geographical defined radio boundaries. 1269279210000 1269279210000 Call and frequency of enroute service or control unit. SINGLE SIDE BAND capabilities are available unless specified otherwise. 1269279210000 1269279210000 Remote air-to-ground antenna for direct communications with control center. Center is named in large type and name of remote site is in parentheses below followed by appropriate VHF frequencies. 1269279210000 NAVAID/COMMUNICATION DATA Operational status at date of publication. Refer to Chart NOTAMS for current status, including substitute routes for VOR and VORTAC shutdowns. 1269279210000 (TWEB) indicates continuous automatic weather broadcast is provided on the facility frequency. 1269279210000 Class SABH radio beacons of limited navigation suitability indicate their primary purpose of continuous automatic weather broadcast by (WX). 1269279210000 1269279210000 Enroute Radar capability. (All domestic U.S. Centers are radar equipped so (R) is omitted from domestic U.S. Center boxes.) 94 ENROUTE CHART LEGEND INFORMATION ENROUTE CHART LEGEND Asterisk indicates navaid operation or service not continuous. 1269279210000 1269279210000 1269279210000 Marine beacon operation times. Transmission begins at 4 minutes past the hour and every 15 minutes thereafter in this illustration; other times will be indicated. Number in parentheses gives duration in minutes of transmission. Facility operates in fog only at times indicated. RESTRICTED AIRSPACE (Not shown on Eastern Hemisphere chart series when vertical limits are below 2000 feet AGL) Restricted airspace. The accompanying label indicates it as prohibited, restricted, danger, etc. 1269279210000 Training, Alert, Caution, and Military Operations Areas. 1269279210000 1269279210000 Dot indicates permanent activation on some chart series. 1269279210000 On USA charts K (indicating USA) and parens around the designating letter are omitted. 1269279210000 When restricted airspace areas overlap, a line is shown on the outer edge of each area through the area of overlap. 1269279210000 RESTRICTED AIRSPACE DESIGNATION A-Alert C-Caution D-Danger P-Prohibited R-Restricted T-Training W-Warning TRA-Temporary Reserved Airspace TSA-Temporary Segregated Area MOA-Military Operations Area Canadian Advisory Area Suffixes (A) Acrobatic (H) Hang Gliding (P) Parachute Dropping (S) Soaring (T) Training ENROUTE CHART LEGEND INFORMATION ENROUTE CHART LEGEND 95 AIRPORTS 1269279210000 Location name - IFR published procedure filed under this name with ICAO/Jeppesen NavData indicator. Airport elevation and longest runway length to nearest 100 feet with 70 feet as the dividing point (add 00). Location name - VFR airport, no procedure published by Jeppesen. “s” indicates soft surface otherwise hard surface. 1269279210000 1269279210000 AIRWAY AND ROUTE COMPONENTS AIRWAY AND ROUTES CENTER LINES Airway/Route Diversionary Route Overlying High Altitude Airway/Route 1269279210000 1269279210000 1269279210000 FIXES Compulsory Reporting Point 1269279210000 Non-Compulsory Reporting Point 1269279210000 1269279210000 Low Altitude Compulsory Reporting Point 1269279210000 Low Altitude Non-Compulsory Reporting Point. X Mileage Break/Turning Point/CNF RNAV Waypoint 1269279210000 1269279210000 Meteorological report required (unless instructed otherwise), giving air temperature, wind, icing, turbulence, clouds and other significant weather. Report to controlling ground station, or station indicated. Holding Pattern. DME figures, when provided, give the DME distance of the fix as the first figure followed by the outbound limit as the second figure. 1269279210000 Length of holding pattern in minutes when other than standard. 1269279210000 [ABROC] 1269281898000 Database identifiers are enclosed in brackets [ABROC]. Database identifiers are officially designated by the controlling authority or they may be derived by Jeppesen. In either case, these identifiers have no ATC function and should not be used in filing flight plans nor should they be used when communicating with ATC. They are shown only to enable the pilot to maintain orientation when using charts in concert with database navigation systems. Fix name with Minimum Crossing Altitude (MCA) showing airway, altitude, and direction, and Minimum Reception Altitude (MRA). 1269279210000 1269279210000 1269279210000 Official fix name (with country assigned identifier in parentheses). Several countries throughout the world assign identifiers for use in flight plans. LF bearings forming a fix are to the navaid. 96 ENROUTE CHART LEGEND INFORMATION ENROUTE CHART LEGEND 1269279210000 VHF radials forming a fix are from the navaid. VHF frequency and identifier included when off chart or remoted. 1269446660000 1269961270000 1269279210000 1269279210000 1269279210000 LF frequency, identifier and Morse Code included when off chart or remoted. Arrow along airway points from the navaid designating the reporting point. Other published radials may be used if they are greater than 30 degrees from the airway being used and are not beyond the COP. Fix formed by 55 DME from MAZ navaid. “D” indicates DME fix and distance from the station that provides the DME mileage. AIRWAY INFORMATION 1269279210000 Airway and route designators. Negative (white letters in black) designators are used for distinction. ATS-Designated route without published identifier 1269279210000 1269279210000 AWY-Airway B-Blue, Bravo BR-Bahama Route, Canada Bravo Route 1269279210000 Direct Route F-(suffix) Advisory service only 1269279210000 1269279210000 1269279210000 DOM-Domestic Route. Use by foreign operators requires special authorization. G-Green, Golf G-(suffix) Flight Information only GR-Gulf Route H or HL-High Level J-Jet L-(suffix) L/MF airway NAT-Route associated with the North Atlantic Organized Track structure. 1269279210000 1269279210000 OTR-Oceanic Transition Route PDR-Predetermined Route R-Red, Romeo 1269279210000 1269279210000 1269279210000 1269279210000 R-(suffix) RNAV route RR-Canada Romeo Route SP-Supersonic RNAV route U-Upper UL-(prefix) RNAV route V-Victor V-(suffix) VOR airway W-White, Whiskey One Way Airway Suffix 1 or 1, 2 or 1, 2, 3 gives the Conditional Route Category. 1269279210000 MEA (Minimum Enroute Altitude), shown as altitude or flight level. 1269292553000 1269279210000 MEA is established with a gap in nav-signal coverage. ENROUTE CHART LEGEND INFORMATION ENROUTE CHART LEGEND 6500 9900 97 Directional MEAs as indicated. 1269282047000 GPS MEA 1269353037000 DME/DME/IRU In the US (not including Q routes in the Gulf of Mexico) GNSS or DME/DME/IRU RNAV required, unless otherwise indicated. Radar monitoring required. 1269358054000 MOCA (Minimum Obstruction Clearance Altitude). 1269353135000 Route MORA (Route Minimum Off-Route Altitude). See glossary. 1269353153000 MAA (Maximum Authorized Altitude), shown as altitude or flight level. 1269358054000 1269279210000 MEA change, limit of MAA applicability or MAA change. Also MOCA or MORA change when MOCA or MORA is charted with no MEA. Symbol is omitted at navaid. 1269279210000 Mileages. Total mileage between navaids is positioned along respective airway centerline. Total mileage may have directional pointers when there are multiple airway designators. The pointers parallel the airway centerlines along which the mileage applies. 1269279210000 1269279210000 VOR radial & route bearings (magnetic) 1269279210000 VOR Radial and route bearings (true) 1269279210000 1269279210000 ADF Bearings (inbound or outbound). Bearings are magnetic unless followed by a “T” indicating True. ADF Bearings include an arrow to indicate the direction of flight or, when used to designate Fixes, direction to the station. In remote or oceanic areas where ground based navigation aids are not available, the arrow indicates the direction of flight. ADF bearings (True at track midpoint). 1269279210000 1269279210000 1269279210000 The navigation frequency COP (changeover point) between two stations is indicated by mileages from the station to the point of change. Omitted when at midpoint or turning point. Means even thousands altitudes/flight levels are used in the direction of the arrow and odd thousands in the opposite direction. For application of this symbol above FL 290, the left half of the cruising level rose is considered even. The symbol is shown where altitude/flight level assignment is opposite that shown in the standard cruising altitude/flight level rose. Means all altitudes, even and odd, are available in the direction indicated. 1269279210000 Means odd thousands altitude/flight level per the above definition. “O” is used only on one way airways to show that odd altitude/flight level assignments apply. 1269279210000 Prior Permission Required from ATC for flight in the direction of the arrow. 1269279210000 1269279210000 Flight Planned route describes any route or portion thereof that is identical to that filed in the flight notification and sufficient routing details are given to definitely establish the aircraft on its route. 98 ENROUTE CHART LEGEND INFORMATION ENROUTE CHART LEGEND 1269279210000 ENROUTE CHART LEGEND INFORMATION ENROUTE CHART LEGEND 99 For further explanation refer also to Introduction 57 1269279210000 100 ENROUTE CHART LEGEND INFORMATION ENROUTE CHART LEGEND W016^ 8^W TERMINAL AREA Class ’’A’’ airspace upper limit FL 300 Magnetic Variation TENERIFE Shadow box when navaid is airway component, with NORTH FL 300 frequency, identifier, Morse code and INS coordinates. D CANARIES TMA (A) Small "D" indicates DME. (L)112.5 TFN Class indicated by: (T)-Terminal, (L) Low, (H) High. N28 32.2 W016 16.1 VOR, VORDME N30^ or VORTAC Grid Lat-Long values ^ 144 164 ^ TENERIFE NORTH LosRodeos GCXO RO Segment mileage GRAN CANARIA GCLP Magnetic VOR radial forming airway Directional MEAs Non-compulsory reporting point "D" indicates DME fix. Segment mileage is DME distance from navaid. 22 3^ 05 RO 7 35 Intersection or fix formation (Bearing, frequency and ident of remote LF navaid) D LOMAS MCA FL 370 SE Grid MORA (Values 14,000 feet and greater are maroon and indicate supplemental oxygen is required) Area chart coverage 42 MEA change Officially named intersection Minimum Crossing Altitude (MCA) for SE-bound flights Grid MORA (Values less than 14,000 feet are green) GM(D)-24 Segment mileage Special use airspace NCRP without coordinates for orientation by using Free Route Airspace (FRA) "D" with distance indicates total DME distance from navaid. ROYAL CWT 115.1 T 082^ 52 37 A MA390 FL 42 2 89 T Named or unnamed T T (HI)2 airspace fix or T A mileage break. T T T T T 32 T T D T T ATAR 326 AR 2^ 32 FIR/UIR Boundary [ABROC] name, identifier and airspace category T DAKAR GOOD UIR (G) T RVSM AIRSPACE CANARIES GCCC UIR (G) Centerline of ATS route T RVSM airspace boundary with designator T +1 = UTCT UTC T T Changeover Point T Flight planning relevant restrictions for ATS routes on several chart series are published on respective EROUTE pages T Maximum Authorized Altitude (MAA) RNAV ATS route (outside Europe) Conditional Route Category (See Enroute Listing) Total mileage between navaids 1R 85 0 T UG FL 37 TT 31 X ATS Unnamed, official published ATS route with direction indication T T T Holding pattern Route usability by non B-RNAV equipped aircraft (within Europe only) T Time zone boundary with conversion values to UTC N26 08.3 W014 38.6 Uncontrolled airspace (Class G) 105 Intersection or fix formation (Bearing, frequency and ident of remote VHF navaid; Morse code shown when navaid is outside of chart neatline) T CABOJ N25 00.0 W015 47.2 D47 Arrow from facility designating reporting point Compulsory reporting point with name and INS coordinates 25 MORAS NDB 265^ N20 30.0 W013 04.0 M UG 851 Met report required 264^ Database identifiers are enclosed in brackets [ABROC]. Database identifiers are officially designated by the controlling state authority Change to adjoining or they may be derived by Jeppesen. In either case, these identifiers enroute chart at have no ATC function and should not be used in filing flight plans nor this point. should they be used when communicating with ATC. They are shown Direct Route only to enable the pilot to maintain orientation when using charts in (Requires ATC approval, will conjunction with database navigation systems. not be accepted in Flight Plan) 1269279210000 ENROUTE CHART LEGEND INFORMATION ENROUTE CHART LEGEND 101 q$i The symbology explained on these pages pertain specifically to Australia Enroute and Area charts. Control zone limits (CTR) 78 Z560T 360FPR M 3500 CTR(C) 3500 LSALT 27 9 3^ 23JASPER QLD 18 31 5 H1300T 49 057^ 090^ D2 V 0 (C) FL200 1500 4000 JACKSON 254 CK S27 27.3 E151 50.2 113.7-AWIS 118.8(R)-CTAF (AFRU) MILDURA VIC YMIA 167-60 4500 Class C airspace limits (sectorized) 112.9 CK S27 27.3 E151 44.2 (C) FL200 105 G1 3100T 141 PPR 800T -Intl YBER 73-92 D (C) FL200 D25 (C) FL200 D1 5 64 Flight planning requirement (FPR). Direction indicated by arrow. For requirement, see Enroute Tab. Navaid Information box Fly neighborly area Prior permission required (PPR). Direction indicated by arrow. Directional LSALT/MOCA Elevation and/or runway length unavailable. Bollon QLD YBLL FN-3 Water body YM(R)-351A FL200 GND YM(R)-351B FL200 GND AIR TRAFFIC SERVICE UNITS & SPECIAL ACTIVITY AREAS BOUNDARIES Ultra-light activity above 500' AGL. Hang glider activity above 5000' AGL. FIS Model aircraft activity above 400' AGL. Class G BRISBANE Meteorology balloon ascents. CENTER Uncontrolled M (SPRINGBROOK) Airspace Manned balloon ascents. 120.3 Parachute jumping area. Glider Operations. FIS w Winch or Auto-tow launch cable my extend Class E BRISBANE SOUTHERN to 3000' AGL. Controlled FLIGHTWATCH CENTER Airport within VHF range of responsible 3461 6565 Airspace (MT HEATON) 8822 ATS unit. 128.4 (R) Radio Required Navaid limitation, see Radio Aids page ROUTE DESIGNATORS AU-37 (applicable only for Australia) Conventional Routes: domestic services). REPORTING POINTS (AUSTRALIA) COMPULSORY for all aircraft. All altitude Low altitude ON-REQUEST 300 KT TAS or more COMPULSORY Under 300 KT TAS. All altitude Low altitude A,B,G,R: Regional H (one-way), J (two-way): Domestic V (one-way), W (two-way): Predominantly low-level domestic RNAV Routes: L,M,N: Regional (Tasman) Q: 180^-359^ domestic Y: 360^-179^ domestic T: Two-way domestic Z: Two-way low-level domestic 1269279210000 102 ENROUTE CHART LEGEND INFORMATION ENROUTE CHART LEGEND AIRWAY NAVAID/REPORTING POINT BY-PASS When an airway passes over or turns at a navaid or reporting point, but the navaid is not to be utilized for course guidance and/or no report is required, the airway centerline passes around the symbol. In cases where a by-pass symbol cannot be used, an explanatory note is included. Airway J26 does not utilize the navaid or reporting point. 1269279210000 Airway J14 turns at the navaid or reporting point but does not utilize them. A mileage break “X” is included to further indicate a turn point. 1269279210000 Airway V76 does not utilize the navaid. A note indicating the proper use of the navaid is included. 1269279210000 Airway V76 does not utilize the Int. A note indicating the proper use of the Int is included. 1269279210000 BOUNDARIES 1269279210000 ADIZ, DEWIZ and CADIZ FIR, UIR, ARTCC or OCA boundary. 1269279210000 1269279210000 1269279210000 International boundary. Time zone boundary. QNH/QNE-boundaries. 1269279210000 RVSM boundary 1269279210000 ICAO AIRSPACE CLASSIFICATIONS Airspace classification is designated by the letters (A) thru (G). Classification (A) represents the highest level of control and (G) represents uncontrolled airspace. The definition of each classification is found in the Glossary portion of this section and the Enroute and Air Traffic Control section of this manual. The airspace classification letter is displayed in association with the airspace type and vertical limits. ENROUTE CHART LEGEND INFORMATION ENROUTE CHART LEGEND 103 AIRSPACE CLASS “A” 1269279210000 Lower limits may be used if it results in a clearer presentation (i.e. “stacked” airspace. 1269279210000 Upper limits omitted if at or above plane of division on a low chart. 1269279210000 AIRSPACE CLASS “B” 1269279210000 AIRSPACE CLASS “C” 1269279210000 AIRSPACE CLASS “D & E” 1269279210000 Asterisk indicates hours of operation are not continuous. In such cases, operational hours will be tabulated elsewhere. Without asterisk hours are H24. Controlled airspace shown in white. Uncontrolled airspace shown as a tint. 1269279210000 Controlled airway/route. 1269279210000 Uncontrolled airway or advisory route. 1269279210000 104 ENROUTE CHART LEGEND INFORMATION ENROUTE CHART LEGEND 1269279210000 1269279210000 1269279210000 Radio Frequency Sector Boundary. Radio boundaries of control or service unit. Boundaries within TMAs or CTAs defining different altitude limits and/or sectorizations. ORIENTATION 1269279210000 Grid shown at the intersection of units of latitude and longitude or by complete line. Magnetic variation isogonic lines are indicated at the edge of the chart or are extended fully across the chart in a continuous dashed line. Shorelines and large inland lakes are shown. Grid Minimum Off-Route Altitude (Grid MORA) in hundreds of feet provides reference point clearance within the section outlined by latitude and longitude lines. Grid MORA values followed by a +/- denote doubtful accuracy, but are believed to provide sufficient reference point clearance. BORDER INFORMATION 1269279210000 This area overlapped by charts indicated. 1269279210000 To Notes: Name outside the neatline is the next airway navaid to which the total mileage is given. Navaid identification is shown on all charts series. Reporting point name is shown when it is the airway termination. To Notes: Name inside the neatline is the first reporting point outside the chart coverage to which the mileage and MEA are shown. Airway lead information: The frequency and identifier of an off-chart navaid are shown when the navaid designates an on-chart reporting point, changeover point or course change. ENROUTE CHART LEGEND INFORMATION ENROUTE CHART LEGEND 105 MISCELLANEOUS 1269279210000 Outline indicates coverage of a separate Area Chart. Information within this outline for terminal operation may be skeletonized. The Area Chart should be referred to if departure or destination airport is within this boundary to ensure pertinent information is available. On Enroute Chart coverage diagrams, shaded symbol denotes Area Chart coverage. Area Chart name is included with shaded symbol. 1269279210000 1269279210000 1269279210000 1269279210000 Outline indicates an area covered elsewhere on the same or adjoining chart in enlarged scale. Information within this outline may be skeletonized. Ball Flags: Number or letter symbol used to index information not shown at the point of applicability, but carried in a like-identified note within the same panel, or in one place on a separate panel. Reference number for INS Coordinates. These coordinates are tabulated elsewhere on the chart and identified in a like manner. U.S. GPS MEAs GPS MEAs are supplemental to and lower than the regular MEA. GPS MEAs are not established for every route, or for every route segment. The absence of a GPS MEA means one has not been provided and the regular route MEA applies. A GPS MEA may be higher than, equivalent to, but not lower than a Minimum Obstruction Clearance Altitude (MOCA) associated with a given route segment. 1 269279210000 U.S. SERIES 800 AND 900 DESIGNATED RNAV ROUTES 1 269279210000 106 ENROUTE CHART LEGEND INFORMATION ENROUTE CHART LEGEND AUSTRALIA AND CANADA T RNAV ROUTES 1269279210000 ENROUTE CHART LEGEND INFORMATION ENROUTE CHART LEGEND 107 1269279210000 108 ENROUTE CHART LEGEND INFORMATION ENROUTE CHART LEGEND Enroute Chart Legend – Chart and Terrain HIGH ALTITUDE CHARTS The following legend, applicable to High Altitude Charts only, is in addition to the preceding legend. Many items in the preceding legend are also applicable to the High Altitude Charts. 1173890761000 Geographical coordinates (latitude and longitude) of each facility are shown across the bottom of the facility box. The letter (H) indicates an H-class facility. The letter (L) indicates an L-class facility. The letter (T) indicates a T-class facility. The letter “D” indicates the availability of DME. In areas of congestion, off-route facility geographical coordinates are shown in an alphabetical listing elsewhere on the chart. 1143831006000 1143831006000 US High Altitude Air Route Traffic Control Center communications frequencies in Communications Tabulations on chart end panel. “Flight Watch” (Enroute Flight Advisory Service) at the end of the frequency array. Service is provided between 0600 and 2200 daily. One-way preferred route 24 hours unless hours are indicated. Two-way during other hours. 1143831006000 MEA (Minimum Enroute Altitude) shown only when higher than floor of the high altitude structure. 1173891772000 AREA CHARTS The following legend, applicable to Area Charts only, is in addition to the preceding legends. Many items in the preceding legends are also applicable to the Area Charts. Departure route. 1143831006000 1143831006000 1143831006000 1143831006000 Arrival route. Arrival & Departure on same route. Speed Limit Point-Speed restriction on shaded side of symbol. Airport diagram showing runways of major airports only. 1173892889000 Other airports are shown by green symbols 1173891798000 Man-made structure having a height of 1000 feet or more above ground level. The elevation is above mean sea level. 1143831006000 Communications frequencies for the major airports shown on an Area Chart are given in a block as illustrated below. ENROUTE CHART LEGEND INFORMATION ENROUTE CHART LEGEND 109 COMMUNICATIONS SEATTLE, WASH Seattle-Tacoma Intl. App/Dep (076o-160o Rwy 16, 341o-075o 119.2) (199o300o 120.1) (301o-340o Rwy 34 120.4) (076o160o Rwy 34, 310o-340o Rwy 16 125.9) (161o198o 126.5). Twr 119.9. Gnd 121.7. Boeing Field/King Co Intl. Seattle App(R)/ Dep (R) (076o-160o Rwy 13, 341o-075o 119.2) (199o-300o 120.1) (301o-340o Rwy 31 120.4) (076o-160o Rwy 31, 301o-340o Rwy 13 125.9) (161o-198o 126.5). Boeing *Twr (128o-308o 120.6) (309o-127o 118.3). Gnd 121.9 1173892937000 GENERALIZED TERRAIN CONTOURS Terrain information may be depicted on area charts when terrain within the area chart coverage rises more than 4000 feet above the main airport. Generalized terrain contour lines and contour values are depicted on selected charts. Gradient tints indicate the elevation change between contour intervals. Contour lines, values and tints are printed in brown. Within contour intervals some, but not all, terrain high points may be included along with their elevation above mean sea level for use as additional reference. THE TERRAIN CONTOUR INFORMATION DEPICTED DOES NOT ASSURE CLEARANCE ABOVE OR AROUND TERRAIN OR MAN-MADE STRUCTURES. THERE MAY BE HIGHER UNCHARTED TERRAIN OR MAN-MADE STRUCTURES WITHIN THE SAME VICINITY. TERRAIN CONTOUR INFORMATION IS USEFUL FOR ORIENTATION AND GENERAL VISUALIZATION OF TERRAIN. IT DOES NOT REPLACE THE MINIMUM ALTITUDES DICTATED BY THE AIRWAY AND AIR ROUTE STRUCTURE. Furthermore, the absence of terrain contour information does not ensure the absence of terrain or structures. DME arcs are included for situational awareness. Within each contour interval, terrain may exist up to but not exceeding the level (elevation) of the next higher contour interval. 1173892614000 Airspace Chart Legend Information AIRSPACE CHART LEGEND INFORMATION CLASS B AIRSPACE CHART LEGEND 111 Class B Airspace Chart Legend CLASS B AIRSPACE The following is applicable to Class B Airspace Charts. Refer to chart glossary for more complete details. These charts depict the horizontal and vertical limits of Class B airspace established by the United States Federal Aviation Administration and provide orientation details for flights operating within the area. Class B Airspace VFR Communications are included. For Operating Rules and Pil ot Equipment Requirements see FAR 91.131, 91.117 and 91.215. The Class B Airspace Charts include only general IFR and VFR Flight Procedures appropriate to their particular area. 112 AIRSPACE CHART LEGEND INFORMATION CLASS B AIRSPACE CHART LEGEND 1211565246000 Approach and Departure Chart Legend Information 114 APPROACH AND DEPARTURE CHART LEGEND INFORMATION SID / DP AND STAR LEGEND SID/DP and STAR Legend SID/DP AND STAR LEGEND The following legend is applicable to Standard Instrument Departure (SID), Departure (DP), Standard Terminal Arrival (STAR) and Arrival Charts. Refer to the Chart Glossary for more complete definition of terms. These charts are graphic illustrations of the procedures prescribed by the governing authority. A text description may be provided, in addition to the graphic, when it is furnished by the governing authority. Not all items apply in all areas. All charts meet FAA requirements for aeronautical charts. All altitudes shown on SID/DP and STAR charts are MSL, unless otherwise specified. COMMUNICATIONS AND ALTIMETER SETTING DATA Departure Control frequencies are included with SIDs/DPs. The frequencies are listed in the heading of the chart or when frequency sectors are specified they may be displayed in the plan view of the chart. 1143831989000 The Transition Level and Transition Altitude are listed below the Communications. For a complete explanation of Transition Level and Transition Altitude see INTRODUCTION — Approach Chart Legend. 1143831989000 CHART IDENTIFICATION STARS SIDS/DPs 1143831989000 114383198 9000 1143831989000 1143831989000 1143831989000 11438 1143831989000 31989000 ROUTE IDENTIFICATION TYPICAL EXAMPLES USING COMPUTER LANGUAGE STARS 1143831989000 APPROACH AND DEPARTURE CHART LEGEND INFORMATION SID / DP AND STAR LEGEND PILOT NAV SID/DP 115 VECTOR SID/DP 1143831989000 1143831989000 TYPICAL EXAMPLES NOT USING COMPUTER LANGUAGE STARS SIDS/DPs 1143831989 000 1143831989000 Database identifier is included when different than the name or computer code. The database identifier is enclosed in brackets. 1143831989000 GRAPHIC (Charts are not drawn at a specific scale) RADIO SYMBOLS VORTAC/VOR DME 1143831989000 VOR (VHF Omnidirectional Range) 1143831989000 TACAN (Tactical Air Navigation) or DME (Distance Measuring Equipment) 1143831989000 NDB (Nondirectional Radio Beacon) 1143831989000 LOC, LDA, or SDF Front Course 1143831989000 LOC Back Course 1143831989000 Locater with Outer Marker (LOM) 1143831989000 Outer or Middle Marker (OM) (MM) 1143831989000 116 APPROACH AND DEPARTURE CHART LEGEND INFORMATION SID / DP AND STAR LEGEND RADIO IDENTIFICATION Navaid identification is given in shadow box with frequency, identifier, Morse Code and latitude & longitude coordinates. DME capability is indicated by a small “D” preceding the VOR frequency at frequency paired navaids. VOR and VORTAC facility operational ranges are identified (when known) within the navaid box. (T) represents Terminal; (L) represents Low Altitude; and (H) represents High Altitude. 1143831989000 Localizer navaids are identified by a round cornered box. Frequency identification and Morse Code are provided. DME is included when navaid and DME are frequency paired. Localizer back course facility boxes include front course bearing for HSI setting. 1143831989000 AIRSPACE FIXES - Non-Compulsory Airspace fixes. 1143831989000 - Compulsory Airspace fixes. 1143831989000 - Fly-over Airspace fixes. 1143831989000 VERTICAL NOISE ABATEMENT PROCEDURES Vertical Noise Abatement Procedures (VNAP). For explanation of procedures, see Air Traffic Control section. 1143831989000 RESTRICTED AIRSPACE 1143831989000 PROHIBITED, RESTRICTED, DANGER AREAS Prohibited, Restricted & Danger Areas are charted when referenced in SID/DP or STAR source, plus any Prohibited Area within five (5) nautical miles of route centerline or primary airport. 114 3831989000 ROUTE PORTRAYAL SID/DP and STAR Track 1143831989000 1143831989000 1143831989000 SID/DP or STAR label of a particular route in some coverage areas 1143831989000 APPROACH AND DEPARTURE CHART LEGEND INFORMATION SID / DP AND STAR LEGEND 117 1143831989000 1143831989000 Database identifiers are enclosed in brackets [UDR3Ø]. Database identifiers are officially designated by the controlling state authority or are derived by Jeppesen. In either case, these identifiers have no ATC function and are not to be used in filing flight plans nor are they to be used when communicating with ATC. Database identifiers are shown only to enable the pilot to maintain orientation when using charts in concert with database navigation systems. 118 APPROACH AND DEPARTURE CHART LEGEND INFORMATION SID / DP AND STAR LEGEND 1143831989000 PROCEDURE APPLICABLE TO USA FAA ONLY Instrument Departure Procedures (DPs) Pilots of civil aircraft operating from locations where DPs are effective may expect ATC clearances containing a DP. Use of a DP requires pilot possession of at least the textual description of the approved effective DP. Controllers may omit the departure control frequency if a DP clearance is issued and the departure control frequency is published on the DP. ATC must be immediately advised if the pilot does not possess a charted DP or a preprinted DP description or, for any other reason, does not wish to use a DP. Notification may be accomplished by filing “NO DP” in the remarks sections of the filed flight plan or by the less desirable method of verbally advising ATC. DPs will be depicted in one of two basic forms. Pilot navigation (Pilot NAV) DPs are established where the pilot is primarily responsible for navigation on the DP route. They are established for airports when terrain and safety related factors indicate the necessity for a pilot NAV DP. Some pilot NAV DPs may contain vector instructions which pilots are expected to comply with until instructions are received to resume normal navigation on the filed/assigned route or DP. Vector DPs Are established where ATC will provide radar navigational guidance to a filed/assigned route or to a fix depicted on the DP. APPROACH AND DEPARTURE CHART LEGEND INFORMATION SID / DP AND STAR LEGEND 119 Obstruction Clearance During Departure DPs are either textual or graphically depicted. They may be established for obstacle avoidance or for ATC purposes. Simple DPs required for obstacle avoidance are usually textual. More complex DPs required for obstacle avoidance, all RNAV DPs, and DPs required for ATC purposes are graphically depicted. DPs assist pilots conducting IFR flight in avoiding obstacles during climbout to minimum enroute altitude (MEA). Obstacle clearance is based on the aircraft climbing at least 200 feet per nautical mile, crossing the end of the runway at least 35 feet AGL, and climbing to 400 feet above airport elevation before turning, unless otherwise specified in the procedure. A slope of 152 feet per nautical mile, starting no higher than 35 feet above the departure end of the runway, is assessed for obstacles. A minimum obstacle clearance of 48 feet per nautical mile is provided in the assumed climb gradient. If no obstacles penetrate the 152 feet per nautical mile slope, DPs for obstacle avoidance are not published. If obstacles do penetrate the slope, avoidance procedures are specified. These procedures may be: a ceiling and visibility to allow the obstacles to be seen and avoided; a climb gradient greater than 200 feet per nautical mile; detailed flight maneuvers; or a combination of the above. In extreme cases, IFR take-off may not be authorized for some runways. Climb gradients are specified when required for obstacle clearance. Crossing restrictions in the DPs may be established for traffic separation or obstacle clearance. Some DPs required for obstacle avoidance require a climb in visual conditions to cross the airport (or an on-airport NAVAID) in a specified direction, at or above a specified altitude. When climbing in visual conditions it is the pilot’s responsibility to see and avoid obstacles. Specified ceiling and visibility minimums will allow visual avoidance of obstacles until the pilot enters the standard obstacle protection area. Obstacle avoidance is not guaranteed if the pilot maneuvers farther from the airport than the visibility minimum. Each pilot, prior to departing an airport on an IFR flight should consider the type of terrain and other obstacles on or in the vicinity of the departure airport and: a. Determine whether a DP is available for obstacle avoidance; b. Determine if obstacle avoidance can be maintained visually or that the DP should be followed; and c. Determine what action will be necessary and take such action that will assure a safe departure. Standard Terminal Arrivals (STARs) Pilots of IFR aircraft destined to locations for which STARs have been published may be issued a clearance containing a STAR whenever ATC deems it appropriate. Use of STARs requires pilot possession of at least the approved textual description. As with any ATC clearance or portion thereof, it is the responsibility of each pilot to accept or refuse an issued STAR. Pilots should notify ATC if they do not wish to use a STAR by placing “NO STAR” in the remarks section of the flight plan or by the less desirable method of verbally stating the same to ATC. A STAR is an ATC coded IFR arrival route established for application to arriving IFR aircraft destined for certain airports. FMSPs for arrivals serve the same purpose but are only used by aircraft equipped with FMS. The purpose of both is to simplify clearance delivery procedures and facilitate transition between enroute and instrument approach procedures. STARs/FMSPs may have mandatory speeds and/or crossing altitudes published. Other STARs may have planning information depicted to inform pilots what clearance or restrictions to “expect”. “Expect” altitudes /speeds are not considered STAR/FMSP crossing restrictions until verbally issued by ATC. Pilots shall maintain last assigned altitude until receiving authorization/clearance to change altitude. At that time, pilots are expected to comply with all published/issued restrictions. The authorizations may be via a normal descent clearance or the phraseology “DESCEND VIA.” A “descend via” clearance authorizes pilots to vertically and laterally navigate, in accordance with the depicted procedure, to meet published restrictions. Vertical navigation is at pilot’s discretion, however, adherence to published altitude crossing restrictions and speeds is mandatory unless otherwise cleared. (MEAs are not considered restrictions, however, pilots are expected to remain above MEAs) Filing IFR Flight Plans with DPs and STARs When filing an IFR flight plan, the use of the associated codified FAA DP or STAR and transition identifiers will greatly facilitate the acceptance of the flight plan in the ARTCC computer. These identifier codes are found on the respective DP and STAR charts. The following explanation and examples are the proper methods in filing DPs and STARs DPs: When a DP is filed without using a transition the filed identifier (code) will read as “ROCKI1.ROCKI” When a transition is used the last coded characters of the DP are replaced by the transition code and will read as “ROCKI1.MILIS” 1143831989000 STARs: When a STAR is filed without using a transition the filed identifier (code) will read as “FIM.MOOR4”. When a transition is used the first coded characters of the STAR are replaced by the transition code and will read as “FAT.MOOR4”. 120 APPROACH AND DEPARTURE CHART LEGEND INFORMATION SID / DP AND STAR LEGEND 1143831989000 APPROACH AND DEPARTURE CHART LEGEND INFORMATION APPROACH CHART LEGEND Approach Chart Legend - Lighting Sy stems LIGHTING SYSTEMS SHOWN IN AIRPORT PLAN VIEW Approach lights are symbolized in recognizable form, and at the same scale as the airport chart. Typical examples: 121 122 APPROACH AND DEPARTURE CHART LEGEND INFORMATION APPROACH CHART LEGEND 1 143831168000 APPROACH AND DEPARTURE CHART LEGEND INFORMATION APPROACH CHART LEGEND 123 1143831168000 PRECISION APPROACH PATH INDICATOR (PAPI) PAPI is normally installed on the LEFT side of the runway. 124 APPROACH AND DEPARTURE CHART LEGEND INFORMATION APPROACH CHART LEGEND 1143831168000 For a 3.00° glide slope the nominal eye height over the runway threshold is 49" (15m). If an increase in eye height over the runway threshold is required to provide adequate wheel clearance, then the approach may be flown with one or more fly down lights visible. PULSATING VISUAL APPROACH SLOPE INDICATOR (PLASI) PLASI is normally a single light unit located on the LEFT side of the runway. APPROACH AND DEPARTURE CHART LEGEND INFORMATION APPROACH CHART LEGEND 125 1 143831168000 CAUTION: When viewing the pulsating visual approach slope indicators in the pulsating white or pulsating red sectors, it is possible to mistake this lighting aid for another aircraft or a ground vehicle. Pilots should exercise caution when using this type of system. TRI-COLOR VISUAL APPROACH SLOPE INDICATOR (TRCV) TRCV is normally a single light unit located on the LEFT side of the runway. 1 143831168000 CAUTION: When the aircraft descends from green to red, the pilot may see a dark amber color during the transition from green to red. TAKE-OFF AND ALTERNATE MINIMUMS Publication of minimums does not constitute authority for their use by all operators. Each individual operator must obtain appropriate approval for their use. On all formats, when the take-off minimums are specified in terms of ceiling and visibility, BOTH must be reported by the responsible ground unit. TAKE-OFF MINIMUMS, USA CHARTS Standard Take-off Minimums in the USA: The standard take-off minimums is RVR 50 or 1 for 1 & 2 Eng. aircraft and RVR 24 or 1/2 for 3 & 4 Eng. aircraft. Runway Visual Range (RVR) is to be used instead of reported visibility for operating on any runway for which RVR is reported. At some airports, obstructions or other factors require the establishment of higher than standard take-off minimums and/or obstacle departure procedures to assist pilots during the IFR climbout to the minimum enroute altitude or cruising altitude. Take-off restrictions, including ceiling and visibility requirements, and obstacle departure procedures, apply to FAR 121, 129 and 135 operators. FAR 129 prescribes rules governing the operations of foreign air carriers within the USA. a. Lower-than-Standard Take-off Minimums: On runways where standard minimums are authorized, and lower-than-standard minimums are not denied, the following minimums are also authorized for operators under FAR Part 121, and 129. Such minimums may be authorized for those FAR 135 operators, having specific authorization in their Operations Specifications. The Lower-than-Standard Minimums are: 126 APPROACH AND DEPARTURE CHART LEGEND INFORMATION APPROACH CHART LEGEND Visibility or RVV 1/4 statute mile or Touchdown Zone RVR 16, provided at least one of the following visual aids is available. The Touchdown Zone RVR report, if available, is controlling. The Mid RVR report may be substituted for the Touchdown Zone RVR report if the Touchdown Zone RVR report is not available. 1. Operative high intensity runway lights (HIRL) 2. Operative runway centerline lights (CL). 3. Runway centerline marking (RCLM). 4. In circumstances when none of the above visual aids are available, visibility or RVV 1/4 statute mile may still be used, provided other runway markings or runway lighting provide pilots with adequate visual reference to continuously identify the take-off surface and maintain directional control throughout the take-off run. b. Touchdown Zone RVR 10 (beginning of take-off run) and Rollout RVR 10, provided all of the following visual aids and RVR equipment are available. The Mid RVR may be substituted for the Touchdown Zone RVR report if the Touchdown Zone RVR report is not available. 1. Operative runway centerline lights (CL). 2. Two operative RVR reporting systems serving the runway to be used, both of which are required and controlling. A Mid RVR report may be substituted for either a Touchdown Zone RVR report if a Touchdown Zone report is not available or a Rollout RVR report if a Rollout RVR report is not available. c. Touchdown Zone RVR 5 (beginning of take-off run), Mid RVR 5 and Rollout RVR 5, provided all of the following visual aids and RVR equipment are available. 1. Operative runway centerline lights (CL). 2. Runway centerline markings (RCLM). 3. Operative Touchdown Zone and Rollout RVR reporting systems serving the runway to be used, both of which are controlling, or three RVR reporting systems serving the runway to be used, all of which are controlling. However, if one of the three RVR reporting systems has failed, a take-off is authorized, provided the remaining two RVR values are at or above the appropriate take-off minimums. d. Take-off Guidance System, if applicable. Touchdown Zone RVR 3 (beginning of take-off run), Mid RVR 3 and Rollout RVR 3, provided all the following aids are available. Operative Touchdown Zone RVR and Rollout RVR reporting systems serving the runway to be used, both of which are controlling, or three RVR reporting systems serving the runway to be used, all of which are controlling. However if one of the three RVR reporting systems has failed, a take-off is authorized, provided the remaining two RVR values are at or above the appropriate take-off minimums. 1. Operative high intensity runway lights (HIRL). 2. Operative runway centerline lights (CL). 3. Serviceable runway centerline markings (RCLM). 4. Front course guidance from the localizer must be available and used (if applicable to guidance system used). 5. The reported crosswind component shall not exceed 10 knots. 6. The pilot in command and the second in command have completed the certificate holders approved training program for these operations. 7. All operations using these minimums shall be conducted to runways which provide direct access to taxiway routing which are equipped with operative taxiway centerline lighting which meets U.S. or ICAO criteria for CAT III operations; or other taxiway guidance systems approved for these operations. USA FORMAT The title TAKE-OFF & OBSTACLE DEPARTURE PROCEDURE is used to indicate that both take-off minimums and obstacle departure procedures are specified. In such cases, refer to the note OBSTACLE DP to the left and immediately below the minimum columns for the procedure. APPROACH AND DEPARTURE CHART LEGEND INFORMATION APPROACH CHART LEGEND 127 1 143831168000 Figures shown with RVR (runway visual range) represent readings in hundreds of feet. The figures without the RVR prefix represent visibility in statute miles or fractions thereof. For example: RVR 50 or 1 means 5000 feet RVR or one statute mile visibility; RVR 24 or 1/2 means 2400 feet RVR or one-half statute mile visibility. Individiual runway columns are shown whenever minimums are not the same for all runways. The best opportunity runway is shown at the far left. Within each runway column, all conditions are specified, and minimums are positioned in ascending order, left or right. Columns are not established solely to identify runways with and without RVR when all other conditions are the same. Altitudes listed in climb gradient requirements or for obstacle departure procedures are above Mean Sea Level (MSL). Ceiling specified for Take-off minimums or Alternate minimums are heights Above Airport Level (AAL). TAKE-OFF MINIMUMS, WORLDWIDE CHARTS Publication of minimums does not constitute authority for their use by all operators. Each individual operator must obtain appropriate approval for their use. 128 APPROACH AND DEPARTURE CHART LEGEND INFORMATION APPROACH CHART LEGEND On all formats, when the take-off minimums are specified in terms of ceiling and visibility, both values must be reported by the responsible ground unit. The take-off minimums published under the title AIR CARRIER are based on Joint Aviation Regulation Operations Subpart E. On charts dated prior to 12 Nov 99, the take-off minimums are published based on ICAO/ECAC guidance material supported by adopted practice. Take-off minimums published under the title AIR CARRIER (FAR 121) are based on U.S. Operations Specifications. The application of these take-off minimums may be limited by the obstacle environment in the take-off and departure area. The RVR/VIS minimums are determined to ensure the visual guidance of the aircraft during the take-off run phase. The subsequent clearance of obstacles is the responsibility of the operator. RVR and visibility values are shown in measuring units as reported by the governing agency. The title TAKE-OFF & DEPARTURE PROCEDURE is used to indicate that both take-off minimums and departure procedures are specified. In such cases, refer to the note DEPARTURE PROCEDURE to the left and immediately below the minimum columns for the procedure. WORLDWIDE FORMAT FOR NON-FAA OR JAA MEMBER STATES ON CHARTS DATED ON OR AFTER 11 MAY 01 1 143831168000 These minimums are provided for operators not applying take-off minimums as specified under Air Carrier (FAR 121). RVR/VIS in parentheses apply only if TDZ RVR is supplemented by RVR reports at mid runway and/or roll-out end. The TDZ RVR can be determined by the pilot from the take-off position and is considered for the application of these minimums. Therefore, RVR/VIS minimums appropriate to TDZ RVR may be charted, even though the RVR may not be installed. Take-off minimums without specific runway centerline markings (day only) should be at least 500m. A Low Visibility Take-off with RVR/VIS below 400m requires the verification that Low Visibility Procedures (LVPs) have been established and are in force (all CAT II/III approved aerodromes). The following guidance has been established for aerodromes not approved for CAT II/III operations. Until such time that the concept for LVPs is also established for such aerodromes, the commander must satisfy himself with Air Traffic Services, or the Aerodrome Operator, that for a Low Visibility Take-off only one aircraft at a time is on the maneuvering area, and that vehicle traffic on the maneuvering area is controlled and restricted to the absolute minimum. Authorized lower-than-standard take-off minimums of RVR 500m VIS 400m must be increased to the standard RVR 1500m or VIS 1600m for 1 & 2 eng. aircraft and to RVR 720m or VIS 800m for 3 & 4 eng. aircraft, unless one of the following visual aids is available. “Adequate Vis Ref” is shown as a reminder that at least one of the following visual aids must be available. The Touchdown Zone RVR report, if available, is controlling. The Mid RVR report may be substituted for the Touchdown Zone RVR report if the Touchdown Zone RVR report is not available. a. Operative high intensity runway lights (HIRL). b. Operative runway centerline lights (CL). c. Runway centerline marking (RCLM). d. In circumstances when none of the above visual aids are available, 400m visibility [RVR 500m Vis 400m (RVR 16 or 1/4)] may still be used, provided other runway markings or runway lighting provide pilots with adequate visual reference to continuously identify the take-off surface and maintain directional control throughout the take-off run. ALTERNATE MINIMUMS ALTERNATE minimums will be charted for individual airports when specified by the country. Charted minimums are those specified by the country. The USA Operations Specifications require the operator to calculate alternate minimums. The following is a condensed version of the applicable Operations Specifications. APPROACH AND DEPARTURE CHART LEGEND INFORMATION APPROACH CHART LEGEND 129 MINIMUMS FOR FILING AS ALTERNATE When USA Operations Specifications are binding, the certificate holder is authorized to derive alternate airport weather minimums from the following table. In no case shall the certificate holder use an alternate airport weather minimum lower than any applicable minimum derived from this table. In determining alternate airport weather minimums, the certificate holder shall not use any airport which is not authorized for use as an Alternate Airport. APPROACH FACILITY CONFIGURATION For airports with at least one operational navigational facility providing a straight-in non-precision approach procedure, or Category 1 precision approach, or, when applicable, a circling maneuver from an instrument approach procedure. For airports with at least two operational navigational facilities, each providing a straight-in approach procedure to different, *suitable runways. For an ER-OPS Enroute Alternate Airport these operations specifications apply for separate *suitable runways. Alternate Airport IFR Weather Minimums Visibility Ceiling Add 400 ft to the MDH Add 1 SM or 1600m to or DH as applicable. the landing minimum. Add 200 ft to the higher Add 1/2 SM or 800m DH or MDH of the two to the higher authorized approaches used. landing minimum of the two approaches used. *In this context, a “different” runway is any runway with a different runway number, whereas “separate” runways cannot be opposite ends of the same runway. 130 APPROACH AND DEPARTURE CHART LEGEND INFORMATION Approach Chart Legend Take-Off and Alternate Minimums (continued) U.S. FAR PART 121 AND 135 OPERATIONS SPECIFICATIONS ALTERNATE AIRPORT MINIMUMS TABLES USE OF TABLES To determine your alternate minimums, review the landing minimums on the available approaches at the selected alternate. Determine which navaid table applies. Enter the applicable table on the following page with the landing HAT/HAA, and extract your alternate ceiling and visibility: “ONE – NAVAID TABLE” should be used for the following approach facility configuration: – For airports with at least one operational navigational facility providing a straight-in non-precision approach procedure, or a straight-in precision approach procedure, of, when applicable, a circling maneuver from an instrument approach procedure. “TWO – NAVAID TABLE” should be used for the following approach facility configuration: – For airports with at least two operational navigational facilities, each providing a straight-in non-precision approach procedure, or a straight-in precision approach procedure to different, suitable runways. (However, when an airport is designated as an ER-OPS Enroute Alternate Airport in your Operations Specifications, the approach procedures used must be to separate, suitable runways.) Comply with Operations Specifications. For foreign procedures, if Operations Specifications permit alternate minimums lower than specified by the host government, obtain host government approval prior to their use. U.S. FAR PART 121 AND 135 OPERATIONS SPECIFICATIONS ALTERNATE MINIMUMS TABLES ONE-NAVAID TABLE CHARTED HAT/HAA 200 201-300 301-400 401-500 501-600 601-700 701-800 801-900 901-1000 ALTERNATE CEILING 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 1200 1300 1400 CHARTED VIS 1/2 3/4 1 1 1/4 1 1/2 1 3/4 2 2 1/4 2 1/2 2 3/4 3 ALTERNATE VIS 1 1/2 1 3/4 2 2 1/4 2 1/2 2 3/4 3 3 1/4 3 1/2 3 3/4 4 METRIC CHARTED ALTERNATE VIS VIS 2.4 Km 800 M 2.8 Km 1200 M, 1.2 Km 3.2 Km 1600 M, 1.6 Km 3.6 Km 2000 M, 2.0 Km 4.0 Km 2.4 Km 4.4 Km 2.8 Km 4.8 Km 3.2 Km 5.2 Km 3.6 Km 5.6 Km 4.0 Km 6.0 Km 4.4 Km 6.4 Km 4.8 Km TWO-NAVAID TABLE CHARTED HAT/HAA 200 201-300 301-400 401-500 501-600 601-700 701-800 801-900 901-1000 ALTERNATE CEILING 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 1200 CHARTED VIS 1/2 3/4 1 1 1/4 1 1/2 1 3/4 2 2 1/4 2 1/2 2 3/4 3 ALTERNATE VIS 1 1 1/4 1 1/2 1 3/4 2 2 1/4 2 1/2 2 3/4 3 3 1/4 3 1/2 METRIC CHARTED ALTERNATE VIS VIS 1.6 Km 800 M 2.0 Km 1200 M, 1.2 Km 2.4 Km 1600 M, 1.6 Km 2.8 Km 2000 M, 2.0 Km 3.2 Km 2.4 Km 3.6 Km 2.8 Km 4.0 Km 3.2 Km 4.4 Km 3.6 Km 4.8 Km 4.0 Km 5.2 Km 4.4 Km 5.6 Km 4.8 Km APPROACH AND DEPARTURE CHART LEGEND INFORMATION APPROACH CHART LEGEND 131 Approach Chart Legend - VOR DME RNAV VOR DME RNAV APPROACH CHART LEGEND This legend applies to instrument approach procedures based on airborne area navigation (RNAV) systems dependent upon VOR DME or VORTAC facilities and supplement the approach chart legend. See below for LORAN RNAV approach procedures. HEADING 1143831798000 PLAN VIEW Primary VRTAC or VOR DME facility used to form waypoints. MSL elevation or DME transmitter, station declination, and coordinates are included in the facility box. 1143831798000 Waypoint. The label includes the waypoint name; the identifier of the forming navaid; and the bearing (Theta) and distance (Rho) from the forming navaid. 1143831798000 A waypoint may be located at a VORTAC or VOR DME. 1143831798000 Alongtrack Distance (ATD) fix. This ATD fix is an alongtrack position defined as a distance in NM, with reference to the next waypoint. 1143831798000 132 APPROACH AND DEPARTURE CHART LEGEND INFORMATION APPROACH CHART LEGEND PROFILE VIEW 1 143831798000 CONVERSION TABLE 1143831798000 APPROACH AND DEPARTURE CHART LEGEND INFORMATION CHARTED VISUAL FLIGHT PROCEDURES (CVFP) 133 Charted Visual Flight Procedures (CVFP) VISUAL NOISE ABATEMENT PROCEDURES (USA ONLY) Charted Visual Flight Procedures (CVFP's) are established at locations with jet operations for noise abatement purposes. These procedures require radar monitoring and an operational air traffic control tower. CVFPs originate at or near prominent landmarks. When landmarks are not visible at night, the approach will be noted as “Not Authorized at Night”. CVFPs usually originate not more than 15 flying miles from the airport. Charted course information between landmarks along the flight track is provided for general orientation only. Navaids are provided for supplementary information only. Recommended altitudes are charted as “RECOMMENDED” and are for noise abatement purposes. Pilots are not prohibited from flying other than recommended altitudes if operational requirements dictate. Air Traffic ControL (ATC) will not issue a clearance for a CVFP when weather is less than published minimums. Published minimums on CVFPs are based on minimum vectoring altitudes. ATC will clear aircraft for a CVFP after the pilot reports sighting charted landmarks or a preceding aircraft. When instructed to follow a preceding aircraft, pilots are responsible for maintaining a safe approach interval and wake turbulence separation. Advise ATC if unable to continue the approach. Since CVFPs are visual procedures, a missed approach is a normal go-around. CVFPs are designed for visual operations. They depict only those visual check points deemed significant by the originating authority. They do not depict all obstacles that may be encountered below reasonable and safe altitudes. The plan view is a graphic picture of the approach presented to scale. Symbols common to CVFPs are shown below. 1239915401000 1239915401000 Visual flight track Recommended altitudes are labeled “RECOMMENDED”. All altitudes are “MINIMUM” altitudes unless specifically labeled otherwise. Altitudes are above mean sea level. 1239915401000 1239915401000 1239915401000 Railroads Highway 1239915401000 1239915401000 Rivers Altitude designated to indicate the floor of the Terminal Control Area when applicable. Lakes or large water area. 1239915401000 1239915401000 Landmarks used as visual aids during the approach. Each symbol is tailored to represent the specific landmark used in the procedure. Mandatory altitudes are labeled “MANDATORY” and apply at the fix or point. 1239915401000 1239915401000 Maximum altitudes are labeled “MAXIMUM”. Power and Pole line. 1239915401000 1239915401000 Airport to which the approach is designated. Other nearby airports. 1239915401000 City or heavily built up area. 1239915401000 134 APPROACH AND DEPARTURE CHART LEGEND INFORMATION APPROACH CHART LEGEND Approach Chart Legend - GPS GPS APPROACH CHARTS This GPS Approach Chart Legend supplements the standard approach chart legend beginning on INTRODUCTION — Approach Chart Legend. Equipment requirements, database requirements, and requirement or non-requirement for monitoring conventional navaids are not addressed in this legend-Refer to Jeppesen Air Traffic Control (ATC) for this information. [For the United States, refer to the Jeppesen Radio Aids — Navigation Aids.] 1185999925000 Jeppesen database identifiers are always shown in italic type. They are enclosed within square brackets, as [D255G], or prior to October 1994 within parentheses, as (D255G). 1185999925000 APPROACH AND DEPARTURE CHART LEGEND INFORMATION APPROACH CHART LEGEND 135 1185999925000 136 APPROACH AND DEPARTURE CHART LEGEND INFORMATION NEW FORMAT SID/DP AND STAR CHART LEGEND Approach Chart Legend – Briefing Strip Concept Effective 19 September 1997 APPROACH CHART LEGEND NEW FORMAT (BRIEFING STRIP CONCEPT) Approach charts are graphic representations of instrument approach procedures prescribed by the governing authority. The following pages briefly explain the symbols used on these charts. Not all items apply to all charts. GENERAL FORMAT 1143831890000 APPROACH AND DEPARTURE CHART LEGEND INFORMATION NEW FORMAT SID/DP AND STAR CHART LEGEND 137 APPROACH CHART HEADING 1143831890000 COMMUNICATIONS 1 143831890000 PRE-APPROACH BRIEFING INFORMATION 1143831890000 138 APPROACH AND DEPARTURE CHART LEGEND INFORMATION NEW FORMAT SID/DP AND STAR CHART LEGEND APPROACH CHART PLAN VIEW NAVAIDS ILS, LOC, LDA, SDF, or MLS 1143831890000 LOC Back Course 1143831890000 Offset Localizer 1143831890000 Marker 1143831890000 Marker with Locator or NDB 1143831890000 Marker with co-located intersection or DME fix 1143831890000 NAVAID INFORMATION BOXES Navaid information boxes containing the navaid name, identifier, frequency and Morse code. Shadowed box indicates the primary navaid or the approach. 1143831890000 “D” indicates the DME capability. 1143831890000 BEARINGS Magnetic course 1143831890000 True course 1143831890000 VOR Radials forming a position or fix. VOR Radials are bearing from the navaid. NDB bearings are to the navaid. 1143831890000 APPROACH AND DEPARTURE CHART LEGEND INFORMATION NEW FORMAT SID/DP AND STAR CHART LEGEND AIRPORTS Civil or Joint use Airport 1143831890000 Airport with rotating beacon 1143831890000 Military Airport 1143831890000 Heliport 1143831890000 Seaplane Base 1143831890000 Closed Airport 1143831890000 SPECIAL USE AIRSPACE Restricted Area 1143831890000 Prohibited Area 1143831890000 139 140 APPROACH AND DEPARTURE CHART LEGEND INFORMATION NEW FORMAT SID/DP AND STAR CHART LEGEND PROFILE VIEW PROFILE SYMBOLS VOR, NDB, or Waypoint. 1143831890000 Fan Marker with name/code. 1143831890000 Fan Marker and NDB co-located. 1143831890000 Fix with name or DME distance. 1143831890000 PROFILE ALTITUDES All altitudes in the profile view are minimum altitudes above mean sea level, unless otherwise specified. Minimum Altitude (MIM). 1143831890000 Mandatory altitude at specified position or fix. 1143831890000 Maximum altitude (MAX) at specified position or fix. 1143831890000 Recommended altitude. 1143831890000 Height above airport, runway end, or touchdown zone. 1143831890000 Altitudes in the profile will be in BOLD type when the altitude is at the: - FAF on non-precision approaches - ILS Glide Slope Intercept altitude - ILS Glide Slope altitude at the outer marker APPROACH AND DEPARTURE CHART LEGEND INFORMATION NEW FORMAT SID/DP AND STAR CHART LEGEND 141 CONVERSION TABLES LIGHTING BOX AND MISSED APPROACH ICONS CONVERSION TABLE Conversion tables, Lighting Box and Missed Approach Icons are located below the profile view. 1 143831890000 LIGHTING BOX The lighting box displays the approach lights (ALS), visual approach slope lighting (VASI or PAPI), and runway end lights (REIL) for the straight-in landing runway. The lighting box is omitted when ALS, VASI, PAPI or REIL not installed. 1143831890000 Approach lights and VASI. (VASI and PAPI are depicted in their relative position; Left, Right or Both sides of centerline.) 1143831890000 1143831890000 Approach lights. Approach lights. (Configuration unknown) 1143831890000 REIL and VASI. MISSED APPROACH ICONS Missed Approach Icons include a wide variety of initial action instructions. A representative sample of Icons are shown below: 1 143831890000 1 143831890000 Right Turn Left Turn (greater (greater than 45°) than 45°) 1 143831890000 1 143831890000 Left Turn (less than 45 °) 1 143831890000 1 143831890000 Climb 1 143831890000 1 143831890000 Direct Climb to altitude 1 143831890000 1 143831890000 1 143831890000 1 143831890000 142 Fly Heading APPROACH AND DEPARTURE CHART LEGEND INFORMATION NEW FORMAT SID/DP AND STAR CHART LEGEND Track Radial To specified Fix To specified navaid Turn to specified Course Turn to specified Altitude 1143831890000 1143831890000 Airspeed limit Right turn with Limit NOTE: Missed Approach Icons provide for initial actions only. Always refer to the Missed Approach instructions in the PRE-APPROACH BRIEFING section and the plan view for complete instructions. VERTICAL NAVIGATION (VNAV) Vertical Navigation (VNAV) descent information will appear in the profile view of selected non-precision approaches beginning with charts dated 3 Dec 1999. The VNAV information appearing in the profile illustrates the geometric descent path with a descent angle from the Final Approach Fix (FAF) to the Threshold Crossing Height (TCH) at the approach end of the runway. The VNAV descent path, depicted with a screened line, is based on the same descent angle coded into the Jeppesen NavData database. Use of this descent angle by certified VNAV-capable avionics equipment will ensure a stable, constant rate of descent that will clear all intervening altitude restrictions. Some approach procedures may require a delay of the start of descent beyond the FAF, until the VNAV descent path is intercepted. The profile view will depict this level segment of flight as required. The VNAV descent angle appears in brackets along the VNAV descent path and is repeated in the conversion table. Additionally, the conversion table provides a recommended rate of descent relative to the VNAV angle and groundspeed. The inclusion of the VNAV descent angle does not change or modify existing non-precision approach requirements. Usage of the Minimum Descent Altitude (MDA), as well as the Missed Approach Point (MAP), remains unchanged. In accordance with Federal Aviation Regulations (FARs) and ICAO PANS OPS criteria, do not descend below the MDA until attaining the required visual reference. Additionally, do not initiate the prescribed missed approach procedure prior to reaching the published missed approach point. NOTE: Operators may obtain permission from their controlling authority to use Decision Altitude (DA) operational techniques when making a VNAV descent. This approval is specific to the operator and to the approach. VNAV descent is optional. Use of any VNAV approach technique is dependent on operator approval, certified VNAV-capable equipment availability, and crew training. 1 143831890000 VNAV descent information from FAF to runway with TCH of 50". APPROACH AND DEPARTURE CHART LEGEND INFORMATION NEW FORMAT SID/DP AND STAR CHART LEGEND 143 1143831890000 VNAV descent information from FAF to runway with TCH of 45". Note that the VNAV path requires maintenance of level flight after the FAF, prior to intercepting the VNAV descent path of 3.50°, in order to cross the 2.0 NM to RW29 stepdown fix or above 1390". For approved operators, use of DA(H) operational technique on this approach is indicated by the ballflag note as well as by the dashed VNAV descent track in the profile view. AIRPORT CHART FORMAT The airport chart is normally printed on the back of the first approach chart. At larger airports the airport chart will preceed the first approach chart and contain an enlarged diagram. Airport charts contain information pertaining to the airport including communications, take-off and alternate minimums, and IFR departure procedures. Separate airport charts may be included to display detailed ramp and parking positions or low visibility taxiway routes. HEADING Airport, Ramp and Taxiway Charts The Airport chart contains the location name, the airport name, airport elevation, latitude and longitude, Jeppesen NavData (ICAO) identifier, and date. 1 143831890000 COMMUNICATIONS Communications for departure are listed in order of normal use. 1 143831890000 144 APPROACH AND DEPARTURE CHART LEGEND INFORMATION NEW FORMAT SID/DP AND STAR CHART LEGEND AIRPORT DIAGRAM SYMBOLS 1143831890000 Low Visibility Taxiway Charts Low Visibility Taxiway Charts and Surface Movement Guidance and Control System (SMGCS) charts have special labels in the heading to indicate specific usage. 1 143831890000 APPROACH AND DEPARTURE CHART LEGEND INFORMATION NEW FORMAT APPROACH CHART LEGEND 145 SID / DP & STAR Chart Legend - New Format 2002 Effective 16 August 2002 SID/DP & STAR CHART LEGEND NEW FORMAT NOTE: Legend pages titled “NEW FORMAT SID/DP/STAR” contain information specific to charts formatted in the new SID/DP/STAR chart concept. This legend includes only those items that are unique to the NEW SID/DP/STAR FORMAT. For information not covered in the NEW FORMAT SID/DP/STAR chart legend, refer to the regular SID/DP/STAR chart legend in the Airway Manual. SID/DP& STAR charts are graphic illustrations of the procedures prescribed by the governing authority. A text description may be provided, in addition to the graphic, when it is furnished by the governing authority. Not all items apply to all charts. SID/DP/STAR CHART HEADING 1 143832096000 SID/DP/STAR chart heading consists of the following: City/Location and State/Country names. Chart type identifier. 1 1 143832096000 143832096000 Airport name. 1 1 Jeppesen NavData/ICAO/IATA airport identifier. 143832096000 143832096000 Communication frequency. 1 1 Revision date, index number and effective date. 143832096000 143832096000 Airport elevation. 1 1 143832096000 143832096000 Common placement of notes applicable to the procedure. SID/DP/STAR CHART PLAN VIEW PROCEDURE TITLE Navaids, intersections or waypoints identified in the procedure title (e.g., starting point of a STAR or end point of a SID/DP) are shown prominently for better identification. navaid boxes will include a shadowed outline, intersection or waypoint names will be shown in larger text size. Navaid Intersection DINKELSBUL SKEBR ONE Departure Arrival 1143832096000 114383 2096000 146 APPROACH AND DEPARTURE CHART LEGEND INFORMATION NEW FORMAT APPROACH CHART LEGEND SPEED RESTRICTIONS Speed restrictions that apply to the entire procedure are shown below the procedure title. 1143832096000 SYMBOLS RADIALS AIRPORTS Civil or Joint use Airport 1 143832096000 VOR Radials forming a position or fix. VOR Radials are bearings from the navaid. NDB bearings are to the navaid. 1143832096000 Alirport with rotating beacon 1143832096000 1 Military Airport 143832096000 1143832096000 INFORMATION BOXES Information boxes are placed along the procedure tracks. Their content is associated with the graphical depiction of the SID/DP/STAR chart. Information boxes include a wide variety of action, instructions or restrictions such as: pilot actions, ATC instructions, directional and altitude instructions, climb restrictions, etc. Representative samples of information boxes are shown below. 1143832096000 1143832096000 1143832096000 1143832096000 114383 1143832096000 1 2096000 143832096000 1 143832096000 1 1 143832096000 143832096000 1 1143832096000 1143832096000 143832096000 LOST COMMUNICATIONS PROCEDURE The symbol below identifies the LOST COMMUNICATIONS PROCEDURE to be flown when communications are lost with ATC after take-off. 1143832096000 On recognition of communication failure Squawk 7600. TEXT SECTION A text description may be provided, in addition to the graphic, when it is furnished by the governing authority. STAR 1143832096000 APPROACH AND DEPARTURE CHART LEGEND INFORMATION NEW FORMAT APPROACH CHART LEGEND 147 SID/DP 1 143832096000 148 APPROACH AND DEPARTURE CHART LEGEND INFORMATION APPROACH CHART LEGEND EU-OPS 1 AERODROME OPERATING MINIMUMS (AOM) Approach Chart Legend — EU-OPS 1 Aerodrome Operating Minimums (AOM) Publication of minimums does not constitute authority for their use by all operators. Each individual operator must obtain appropriate approval for their use. GENERAL Beginning in November 2008 Jeppesen will replace the current JAR-OPS 1 minimums with the new minimums introduced by the 2nd amendment to EU-OPS 1. The “Standard” label in the upper left corner of the minimums box indicates that the minimums are based on EU-OPS 1 (Subpart E - Appendix 1 new to OPS 1.430). The “JAR-OPS” label in the upper left corner of the minimums box indicates that the minimums are based on JAR-OPS 1 or EU-OPS 1 (Subpart E - Appendix 1 old to OPS 1.430). For a detailed excerpt of EU-OPS 1 minimums refer to Air Traffic Control (ATC) Series 600 pages. Jeppesen charted minimums are not below any State-provided minimums. Higher existing minimums for FAR 121 operators and those applying U.S. Operations Specifications are footnoted. RVR/CMV/VIS values are shown in measuring units as reported by the governing agency. AOM for take-off and landing are either shown on Jeppesen instrument approach or aerodrome charts or on a separate minimums listing. Landing minimums will be shown as RVR, but values above 2000m will be designated as Converted Meteorological Visibility, prefixed “CMV”. Take-off minimums are shown without prefix because they are either RVR or VIS. Circling minimums are always visibilities which is indicated in the circling minimums box. For the separate minimums listings RVR, CMV and VIS are abbreviated as R, C and V. The following table is used to convert a reported VIS into RVR/CMV. CONVERSION OF REPORTED MET VIS TO RVR/CMV RVR/CMV = Reported MET VIS x Day Night 1.5 2.0 1.0 1.5 1.0 Not Applicable Lighting elements in operation HIALS and HIRL Any type of lighting installation other than above No lighting NOTE: Most of the samples focus only on the relevant information of the related paragraph. Other sections within the samples are intentionally left blank. TAKE-OFF MINIMUMS The application of these minimums may be limited by the obstacle environment in the take-off and departure area. The RVR/VIS minimums are determined to ensure the visual guidance of the take-off run phase. The subsequent clearance of obstacles is the responsibility of the operator. Low visibility take-off with RVR/VIS below 400m requires the verification that Low Visibility Procedures (LVP) have been established and are in force. RVR/VIS for the initial part of take-off run can be replaced by pilot assessment. The multiple RVR requirement means, that the required RVR value must be achieved for all of the relevant RVR reporting points, except for the initial part, which can be determined by pilot assessment. Approved operators may reduce their take-off minimums to 125m (aircraft categories A, B, C), 150m (category D) or to 75m (all categories) with an approved lateral guidance system. Sample of Take-off Minimums 1 224524875000 APPROACH AND DEPARTURE CHART 149 LEGEND INFORMATION APPROACH CHART LEGEND EU-OPS 1 AERODROME OPERATING MINIMUMS (AOM) CIRCLING MINIMUMS Circling minimums will only be charted if a circling OCA(H) or MDA(H) is provided by the procedure source. Otherwise, the circling box will be removed. If circling is not authorized by the procedure source, it will be noted in the notes box of the Briefing Strip header. Where straight-in minimums are higher than circling minimums (DH/MDH or RVR/VIS), the circling MDH or visibility will be raised to match the straight-in minimums. NON-PRECISION APPROACH MINIMUMS AND CHART PROFILE VIEW According to the EU-OPS requirements, all non-precision approaches shall be flown using the continuous descent final approach (CDFA) technique with decision altitude (height), and the missed approach shall be executed when reaching the DA(H) or the missed approach point (MAP), whichever occurs first. The lateral part of the missed approach procedure must be flown via the MAP unless stated otherwise in the procedure. Normally only CDFA minimums are shown. These are identified by the use of a DA(H). Jeppesen does not include an add-on when publishing a DA(H) for a CDFA non-precision approach. Non-CDFA minimums are shown in exceptional cases and identified by an MDA(H). Sample of Non-precision Minimums (CDFA) 1 224524875000 Sample of Non-precision Minimums (CDFA + non-CDFA) 1 224524875000 The profile depiction will be modified to show the continuous descent on final approach. Source-published minimum altitudes will be shown as segment minimum altitudes in the profile (grey shaded box). These minimum altitudes are typically provided for obstacle clearance and must not be violated to remain clear of obstacles or terrain. If not published by the procedure source, a table depicting DME vs altitude, distance vs altitude, or timing vs altitude will be calculated by Jeppesen and shown above the profile view. The timing table includes the descent angle, the FAF and the altitude at the FAF. Altitudes are calculated for 20, 40, 60, 80 and 100s from FAF and are based on speeds of 90, 120, 140, 160 and 180kt. Only altitudes above the decision altitude are provided. 150 APPROACH AND DEPARTURE CHART LEGEND INFORMATION APPROACH CHART LEGEND EU-OPS 1 AERODROME OPERATING MINIMUMS (AOM) Sample of timing vs altitude table 1 224524875000 Where CDFA minimums are shown, the profile will be modified to depict the continuous descent. The missed approach pull-up arrow is shown at the point where the decision height is reached. There is no level segment depicted prior to the MAP, and the MAP is shown as published by the procedure source. 1 224524875000 In exceptional cases it may be necessary to include CDFA and non-CDFA minimums. Where this occurs, a level segment is shown prior to the missed approach point and the pull-up arrow is shown at the MAP. 1 224524875000 APPROACH AND DEPARTURE CHART 151 LEGEND INFORMATION APPROACH CHART LEGEND EU-OPS 1 AERODROME OPERATING MINIMUMS (AOM) CAT I PRECISION AND APV APPROACH MINIMUMS An RVR of less than 750m may be used under the conditions a. to d. shown below (Full column). Otherwise the RVR is limited to 750m or above (Limited column). a. CAT I operations to runways with FALS and TDZ and CL and with decision height of 200ft or b. CAT I operations to runways with FALS but without TDZ and/or CL when using an approved HUDLS or an equivalent approved system or c. CAT I operations to runways with FALS but without TDZ and/or CL when conducting a coupled or flightdirector-flown approach to a decision height not less than 200ft or d. APV to runways with FALS and TDZ and CL when using an approved HUD, but not below RVR 600m. Sample of CAT I Minimums (FALS + CL) 1 224524875000 Sample of CAT I Minimums (IALS) 1 224524875000 Sample of APV Minimums (FALS + TDZ + CL) 1 224524875000 LOWER THAN STANDARD CAT I MINIMUMS Operators must be approved by their authority to conduct lower than standard CAT I operations. For approved operators, tailored charts will be created on customer request. 152 APPROACH AND DEPARTURE CHART LEGEND INFORMATION APPROACH CHART LEGEND EU-OPS 1 AERODROME OPERATING MINIMUMS (AOM) CAT II PRECISION APPROACH MINIMUMS Minimums are applicable to EU-OPS approved operators as well as to FAR 121 operators and those applying U.S. Operations Specifications (OpsSpecs). Higher existing minimums in accordance with U.S. OpsSpecs are footnoted. The minimum RVR is 300m. But for category D it is required to conduct an autoland. Otherwise, the minimum RVR is 350m; however, this value is not charted on standard Jeppesen charts. Sample of CAT II Minimums 1 224524875000 OTHER THAN STANDARD CAT II PRECISION APPROACH MINIMUMS These minimums will only be published if the procedure is approved for their use by the aerodrome’s Civil Aviation Authority. Charting is similar to standard CAT II minimums but includes columns for conditions with and without lights. An RVR of 400m or below can only be used if CL are available. Where the higher value of 450m is shown in the box, the lower value, which requires CL, is added as footnote. Sample of Other Than Standard CAT II Minimums (FALS + CL) 1 224524875000 Sample of Other Than Standard CAT II Minimums (IALS) 1 224524875000 CAT III PRECISION APPROACH MINIMUMS CAT III minimums are only charted on tailored charts or on the Airline Chart series (CAO). The depiction depends on the customer’s approved minimums (aircraft category or aircraft type). APPROACH AND DEPARTURE CHART 153 LEGEND INFORMATION APPROACH CHART LEGEND EU-OPS 1 AERODROME OPERATING MINIMUMS (AOM) 1 224524875000 AERODROME MINIMUMS LISTING On customer request, the minimums may be made available on a minimums listing page. The listings are indexed as 10-9S, 20-9S, etc. This listing is an interim solution until all affected approach and airport charts are converted to the new minimums. 1224524875000 154 APPROACH AND DEPARTURE CHART LEGEND INFORMATION APPROACH CHART LEGEND EU-OPS 1 AERODROME OPERATING MINIMUMS (AOM) DEPICTION OF EU-OPS AOM IN CASE OF EXISTING STATE MINIMUMS If State minimums are officially published, the depiction of AOM may differ from the standard depiction where all values are expressed as RVR or CMV. a. If RVR/CMV and VIS are charted together, the RVR value is compulsory. If no RVR is reported, the VIS has to be used without conversion. b. No prefix is charted if RVR/CMV and VIS is identical. The reported RVR is compulsory. If no RVR is reported, the VIS has to be used without conversion. c. If only VIS is charted, the VIS has to be used without conversion. Chart Format Description Information 156 CHART FORMAT DESCRIPTION INFORMATION APPROACH CHART LEGEND Approach Chart Legend GENERAL INFORMATION Approach charts are graphic illustrations of the instrument approach procedures prescribed by the governing authority. All charts meet FAA requirements for aeronautical charts. The following legend pages briefly explain symbology used on approach charts throughout the world. Not all items apply to all locations. The approach chart is divided into specific areas of information as illustrated below. FORMATS The first approach procedure published for an airport has the procedure chart published on the front side with the airport chart on the back side. On major airports, the airport chart may precede the first approach procedure. These locations will have expanded airport information that may occupy more than one side. When an airport has more than one published approach procedure, they are shown front and back on additional sheets. Blank pages will indicate “INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK”. APPROACH PROCEDURE CHART FORMAT AIRPORT CHART FORMAT 11 1 43831505000 143831505000 On charts dated on and after 10 MAR 95, key information is displayed in bold type. Key information includes Communication frequencies, Primary navaid frequency and identifier, Procedure bearings and Altitudes, Airport and runway end elevation, Decision Altitude and Minimum Descent Altitude, and Missed Approach turn limit and direction, course and altitude. CHART FORMAT DESCRIPTION INFORMATION APPROACH CHART LEGEND 157 HEADING 1 143831505000 The geographical name used is generally the major city served by the civil airport or installation name if a military airport. A hyphen before the airport name is used when the location name is part of the airport name. The charts are arranged alphabetically by the geographical location served. NOTE: U.S. Airway Manual: The civil Approach Charts covering the United States are arranged alphabetically by state. Within each state, the charts are arranged alphabetically by the name of the city served. For each location, the charts are sequenced by the chart index number. This index number will appear as shown below: First Digit: Second Digit: 0 1 2 3 4 5 represents the airport number and is an arbitrary assignment. represents the chart type as shown below: – area, SID, etc. – ILS, MLS, LOC, LDA, SDF, KRM – GPS (Sole use) – VOR – TACAN – RESERVED Third Digit: 6 – NDB 7 – DF 8 – PAR, ASR, SRA, SRE 9 – RNAV, Vicinity Chart, Visual Arrival or Visual Departure Chart, LORAN represents the filing order of charts of the same type. Oval outlines of chart index numbers represent: Standard chart issued to Airway Manual subscribers. 1185998656000 Special chart issued to special coverages only. Contains modified information for your company. 1185998656000 Standard chart that uses only metric system units of measure. 1185998656000 In this numerical system – both procedure and airport – there will be gaps in the filing sequence because of deletions, expected expansion, selected distribution and tailoring for specific subscribers. Two procedures may be combined. Numbering, in this case, will be for the lowest number of the pair. ILS and NDB is a typical combination indexed as 11-1, 21-1, etc. All chart dates are Friday dates. This chart date is not to be confused with the effective date. The effective date is charted when a chart is issued prior to the changes being effective. Charts under USA jurisdiction with an effective date are effective at 0901Z of that date. 158 CHART FORMAT DESCRIPTION INFORMATION APPROACH CHART LEGEND Procedure identification is given below the airport name. This identification is per the applicable authoritative source (e.g. VOR-1, NDB (ADF) Rwy 16, NDB Rwy 16, etc.). The use of an alphabetical suffix indicates a procedure does not meet criteria for straight-in landing minimums (e.g. VOR-A, VOR-B, LOC (BACK CRS)-A, etc.). MSA provides 1000 feet of obstruction clearance within the circle (or sector) within 25 nautical miles of the facility / fix identified just to the lower right of the circle. If the protected distance is other than 25 nautical miles, the effective radius is stated beside the identifier of the central facility. The MSA value is supplied by the controlling authority. COMMUNICATIONS AND ALTIMETER SETTING DATA Communications for “arrivals” are given in normal sequence of use as shown below. See Airport Chart Legend, for other communications. 1143831505000 Transition level and transition altitude are listed on the bottom line of the communications and altimeter setting data box. Transition level and transition altitude are provided for all areas outside the 48 conterminous United States, Alaska and Canada. Trans level: FL60 The transition level (QNE) is the lowest level of flight using standard altimeter setting (29.92 inches of mercury or 760 millimeters of mercury or 1013.2 millibars or 1013.2 hectopascals.) Trans alt: 5000' (4987') The transition altitude (QNH) is the altitude at and below which local pressure setting must be used. Altimeter setting units are listed on the bottom line of communications data box. Barometric Pressure Equivalent in millibars or hectopascals enables aircraft operators who use QFE altimeter setting for landing to establish the QFE altimeter setting by subtracting the hectopascal or millibar equivalent from the reported QNH altimeter setting. The value shown is the barometric pressure equivalent for the height reference datum for straight-in landing. The height reference datum will be the runway threshold elevation (Rwy), airport elevation (Apt) or the runway touchdown zone elevation (TDZE), as applicable. Letter designations behind a frequency indicate operation as follows: G – guards only T – transmits only X – on request Bearings defining frequency sectors are clockwise outbound (e.g., 270° to 090° would be north of the airport.) APPROACH PLAN VIEW The plan view is a graphic picture of the approach, usually presented at a scale of 1 in = 5 NM. Plan views at scales other than 1 in = 5 NM are noted. Latitude and longitude are shown in 10 minute increments on the plan view neatline. Symbols used in the plan view are shown below. CHART FORMAT DESCRIPTION INFORMATION APPROACH CHART LEGEND 159 NAVAIDS NDB (Non-Directional Radio Beacon) 1143831505000 1143831505000 VOR (VHF Omni-Directional Range) 1143831505000 1143831505000 TACAN (Tactical Air Navigation facility) or DME (Distance Measuring Equipment) 1143831505000 1143831505000 VORTAC or VORDME 1143831505000 1143831505000 ILS, LOC, LDA, SDF, MLS or KRM Front Course 1143831505000 LOC Back Course 1143831505000 Offset Localizer 1143831505000 1143831505000 1143831505000 1173277231000 Markers with or without locator, NDB or Intersection. The triangle or circle in a marker or NDB symbol represents co-located intersection 1143831505000 1143831505000 1143831505000 1143831505000 1143831505000 1173277231000 1143831505000 1143831505000 Navaid facility boxes include facility name, identifier, Morse code and frequency. The shadow indicates the primary facility upon which the approach is predicated. In VORTAC and VORDME facility boxes the letter “D” indicates DME capability. 1185998656000 VOR, VORTAC and VORDME class is indicated by a letter “T” (Terminal), “L” (Low Altitude) or “H” (High Altitude) when available. 1185998656000 Underline shown below navaid identifier, indicates Beat Frequency Oscillator (BFO) required to hear Morse Code identifier. 1185998656000 Indicates part-time operation. 1143831505000 TACAN facility box with “Ghost” VOR frequency for civil tuning of TACAN – only facilities to receive DME information. 1185998656000 160 CHART FORMAT DESCRIPTION INFORMATION APPROACH CHART LEGEND Australia Domestic DME. Operates on 200 MHz and requires airborne receiver specific to this system. 1185998656000 1143831505000 ILS, LOC, LDA, or SDF facility box. It includes inbound magnetic course, frequency, identifier, and Morse code. 1143831505000 Localizer Back Course facility box. Front course included for HSI setting. 1143831505000 MLS facility box including inbound magnetic final approach course, MLS channel, identifier with Morse code and VHF “Ghost” frequency for manually turning DME. BEARINGS Magnetic Course True Course 1143831505000 VOR cross radials and NDB bearings forming a position fix are “from” a VOR and “to” an NDB. Morse code ident is charted on VOR radial/NDB bearing when forming facility is outside of plan view. 1143831505000 On charts dated on or after 10 MAR 95, General procedure NOTES are contained within a single box in the planview. NOTES specific to a single item on the chart are associated with that item. RADAR required. Use ITRP ILS DME when on LOC course. Pilot controlled lighting. AIRSPACE FIXES Non-Compulsory Airspace Fixes 1143831505000 Compulsory Airspace Fixes 1143831505000 Fly-over Airspace Fixes 1143831505000 CHART FORMAT DESCRIPTION INFORMATION APPROACH CHART LEGEND 161 DME value will be portrayed as D10.0. When fix and co-located navaid names are the same, only the navaid name is displayed. 1143831505000 Allowable substitutions for identifying a fix are noted in the planview. At the pilot’s request, where ATC can provide the service, ASR may be substituted for the OM. In addition, PAR may be substituted for OM and MM. APPROACH TRANSITIONS 1143831505000 Route without minimum altitude. Altitude to be assigned by ATC. 1185998656000 Initial Approach Fix 1143831505000 Intermediate Approach Fix 1143831505000 No procedure turn, Race Track Pattern or any other type of course reversal procedure required or authorized without ATC clearance. 1143831505000 Ball Flag notes – see applicable reference notes elsewhere on the plan view. 1143831505000 1143831505000 1143831505000 Approach transition inset. (Dog leg route, with off-chart turn). Also provided when route originates at an off-chart intersection designated only for approach use – such fixes are not charted on Enroute and Area Charts. 162 CHART FORMAT DESCRIPTION INFORMATION APPROACH CHART LEGEND 1143831505000 NoPT arrival sectors depict an area of approach transition routing to an approach fix. No procedure turn, Race Track Pattern or any type course reversal is required nor authorized without ATC clearance when an arrival course is within the charted sector and on an established airway radial to the fix. Approach transition track, distance, and altitude from a defined fix is illustrated below. 1143831505000 Note that the routes from STO to Plant to Tower are approach transitions, whereas the STO R-275° is not an approach transition. The STO R-275° has a small arrowhead and is a cross radial forming Tower. The STO R-300° has a large and small arrowhead indicating both an approach transition and a cross radial forming Plant. Plant and Tower are also formed by the IPEN localizer course. 1143831505000 An approach transition coincidental with the approach procedure flight track is charted offset from the flight track for clarity. 1143831505000 Approach transitions via DME arcs are illustrated below with distance from facility, direction of flight, start and termination points of the arc. DME arc altitude is maintained until established on approach course. CHART FORMAT DESCRIPTION INFORMATION APPROACH CHART LEGEND 163 1143831505000 Lead radials may be provided as an advisory point for turning to the approach course. 1143831505000 Approach transitions may be described under the originating navaid with course, distance, altitude, and terminating point. APPROACH PROCEDURE FLIGHT TRACK 1173277231000 The approach procedure flight track is portrayed by a bold line. This track begins in the plan view at the same location where the profile begins. 1143831505000 1173277231000 High level approach track 1173277231000 Visual flight track 164 CHART FORMAT DESCRIPTION INFORMATION APPROACH CHART LEGEND PROCEDURE TURNS – COURSE REVERSALS Schematic portrayal of procedure turn 1143831505000 1143831505000 1143831505000 When a procedure turn, Racetrack pattern, Teardrop or Base turn is not portrayed, they are not authorized. ALTITUDES All altitudes in the plan view are “MINIMUM” altitudes unless specifically labeled otherwise. Altitudes are above mean sea level in feet. May be abbreviated “MIM”. 1143831505000 Mandatory altitudes are labeled “MANDATORY” and mean at the fix or glide slope intercept. 1185998656000 Maximum altitudes are labeled “MAXIMUM”. May be abbreviated “MAX”. 1185998656000 Recommended altitudes are labeled “RECOMMENDED”. 1185998656000 MISSED APPROACH 1185998656000 Initial maneuvering course for missed approach. Details of the missed approach are specified below the profile diagram. 1143831505000 CHART FORMAT DESCRIPTION INFORMATION APPROACH CHART LEGEND 165 HOLDING PATTERN Holding pattern not part of the approach procedure. DME figures, when provided, give the DME distance of the fix as the first figure followed by the outbound limit as the second figure. 3000 indicates the minimum holding altitude (MHA). 1143831505000 Length of holding pattern in minutes when other than standard. 1143831505000 Holding patterns are generally not charted to scale. Indicates procedure for leaving the holding pattern. 1143831505000 AIRPORTS IFR airports in the area and VFR airports underlying the final approach are depicted. Airport to which the approach is designed. 1143831505000 Nearby Military airport 1143831505000 Nearby Civil or joint use Military airport 1143831505000 Heliport 1185998656000 Civil Seaplane Base 1143831505000 Military Seaplane Base 1143831505000 Airport with light beacon 1143831505000 Abandoned or closed airport 1143831505000 An airport reference circle, 5 statute miles in radius, centered on the airport. Omitted after 1 OCT 93. 1143831505000 AIRSPACE Restricted airspace (Refer to the Enroute Chart for limitations.) 1185998656000 PROHIBITED AREA SC(P) – 23 1185998656000 166 CHART FORMAT DESCRIPTION INFORMATION APPROACH CHART LEGEND ORIENTATION DETAILS 1143831505000 TERRAIN HIGH POINTS AND MAN-MADE STRUCTURES a. Some, but not all, terrain high points and man-made structures are depicted, along with their elevation above mean sea level. THIS INFORMATION DOES NOT ASSURE CLEARANCE ABOVE OR AROUND THE TERRAIN OR MAN-MADE STRUCTURES AND MUST NOT BE RELIED ON FOR DESCENT BELOW THE MINIMUM ALTITUDES DICTATED BY THE APPROACH PROCEDURE. Generally, terrain high points and man-made structures less than 400 feet above the airport elevation are not depicted. b. Symbols for terrain high points and man-made structures: Natural terrain (peak, knoll, hill, etc.) Used prior to August 12, 1988. 1143831505000 Unidentified natural terrain or man-made. Used prior to August 12, 1988. 1143831505000 Natural terrain (peak, knoll, hill, etc.) Used after August 12, 1988. 1143831505000 Man-made (tower, stack, tank, building, church) 1185998656000 Unidentified man-made structure 1143831505000 1143831505000 Mean Sea Level elevation at top of TERRAIN HIGH POINT/MAN-MADE STRUCTURE. Denotes unsurveyed accuracy 1143831505000 1143831505000 Arrow indicates only the highest of portrayed TERRAIN HIGH POINTS AND MAN-MADE STRUCTURES in the charted planview. Higher terrain or man-made structures may exist which have not been portrayed. GENERALIZED TERRAIN CONTOURS a. Generalized terrain contour information may be depicted when terrain within the approach chart plan view exceeds 4000 feet above the airport elevation, or when terrain within 6 nautical miles of the Airport Reference Point (ARP) rises to at least 2000 feet above the airport elevation. THIS INFORMATION DOES NOT ASSURE CLEARANCE ABOVE OR AROUND THE TERRAIN AND MUST NOT BE RELIED ON FOR DESCENT BELOW THE MINIMUM ALTITUDES DICTATED BY THE APPROACH PROCEDURE. Furthermore, the absence of terrain contour information does not ensure the absence of terrain or structures. b. Terrain features are depicted using one of the two following methods: 1. Prior to June 24, 1994, terrain information was depicted as screened contour lines with contour values. 1143831505000 2. After June 24, 1994, screened contour lines will gradually be replaced with generalized contour lines, values and gradient tints printed in brown. Gradient tints indicate the elevation change between contour intervals. CHART FORMAT DESCRIPTION INFORMATION APPROACH CHART LEGEND 167 1143831505000 PROFILE VIEW The top of the profile view on certain non-precision approaches contains a table of recommended altitudes/ heights at various DME fixes to allow a constant rate of descent. The altitudes/heights are recommended only; minimum altitudes in the profile view apply. The table is sequenced in the same direction as the profile is portrayed. 1 143831505000 Notes pertaining to conditional use of the procedure are shown at the top of the profile. The note “Pilot controlled lighting” indicates that pilot activation is required as specified on the airport chart under Additional Runway Information. The profile view schematically (not to scale) portrays the approach procedure flight track as a vertical cross section of the plan view. NON-PRECISION APPROACH PROFILE (LOC, VOR, VORTAC, NDB, etc.) symbol representing the non-precision missed approach point (MAP), as shown below, is used on charts dated on or after 5 FEB 93. This symbol is omitted when more than one non-precision approach track is depicted. 1143831505000 1 143831505000 NON-PRECISION APPROACH PROFILE (LOC, VOR, VORTAC, NDB, etc.) with constant rate of descent 1 143831505000 168 CHART FORMAT DESCRIPTION INFORMATION APPROACH CHART LEGEND NON-PRECISION APPROACH PROFILE (VISUAL APPROACH) 1 143831505000 PRECISION APPROACH PROFILE [ILS with LOC (GS out), or with NDB Approach] symbol representing the non-precision missed approach point (MAP), as shown below, is used on charts dated on or after 5 FEB 93. This symbol is omitted when more than one non-precision approach track is depicted. 1143831505000 1143831505000 1143831505000 CHART FORMAT DESCRIPTION INFORMATION APPROACH CHART LEGEND 169 1 143831505000 PRECISION APPROACH PROFILE (ILS CAT II and CAT III combined) 1 143831505000 MISSED APPROACH The Missed Approach text is located immediately below the profile diagram. It may be supplemented by a State specified acceleration altitude/height on charts labeled PANS-OPS / PANS-OPS 3. (Refer to AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL, Flight Procedures). MISSED APPROACH POINT (MAP) Precision approaches: Immediately upon reaching the Decision Altitude (Height) DA(H) while descending on the glide slope and continued descent cannot be controlled by visual reference. Non-precision approaches: Upon reaching the Missed Approach Point (MAP). A table at the lower left corner of the chart will specify the MAP and, if applicable, a time at various speeds from fix to MAP. When times are not shown, a timed approach is Not Authorized. Where a DME Fix is portrayed in addition to a distance, the DME Fix may be used for determining the MAP for DME equipped aircraft. The runway threshold and MAP often coincide. 170 CHART FORMAT DESCRIPTION INFORMATION APPROACH CHART LEGEND SYMBOLS Threshold Crossing Height 1143831505000 Fan marker with name or ILS marker with marker code and, when appropriate, glide slope crossing altitude above mean sea level and above TDZE, runway end or airport elevation. 1143831505000 VOR, DF, NDB, or Waypoint labeled only as to facility depicted. “Z” indicates VHF location markers. 1143831505000 Marker and NDB co-located (LOM, LMM) 1143831505000 VOR not used for course guidance, by-passed during final approach, and used solely to provide DME fixes both before and after its passage. – or – Facility used solely for start of outbound procedure track, with procedure turn or course reversal and final approach inbound to another facility. 1143831505000 Named fix formed by VOR radial or NDB bearing, or DME, or radar All allowable substitutions for identifying a fix are noted in the planview. Only DME values will be displayed in the profile. Note: ILS DME should not be used to determine position over middle marker, runway threshold or runway touchdown point unless specified on the approach chart. 1143831505000 Non-precision Final Approach Fix (FAF) (If specified by State source) 1143831505000 Visual Descent Point (VDP) (if specified by State source) 1185998656000 Begin missed approach procedure. 1185998656000 1185998656000 symbol represents the non-precision missed approach point (MAP), on charts dated on and after 5 FEB 93. 1143831505000 1185998656000 1185998656000 Approach procedure flight track CHART FORMAT DESCRIPTION INFORMATION APPROACH CHART LEGEND 1185998656000 1185998656000 171 Approach procedure flight track of non-precision approach [LOC (GS out), NDB or VOR] when charted in same profile with precision approach. High level approach track Visual flight track (One or more arrows) 1143831505000 See INTRODUCTION Approach Chart Legend New Format (Briefing Strip Concept) for Vertical Navigation (VNAV) explanation. geometric descent path and descent angle 1143831505000 geometric descent path and descent angle to Decision Altitude (DA) for approved operators. 1143831505000 All altitudes in the profile view are “MINIMUM” altitudes unless specifically labeled otherwise. Altitudes are above mean sea level in feet. May be abbreviated “MIM”. 1143831505000 Mandatory altitudes are labeled “MANDATORY” and mean at the fix or glide slope intercept. 1143831505000 Maximum altitudes are labeled “MAXIMUM”. May be abbreviated “MAX”. 1143831505000 Obstruction Clearance Limit 1143831505000 Obstruction Clearance Altitude (Height) 1185998656000 Recommended altitudes are labeled “RECOMMENDED” 1143831505000 Height in feet above airport, runway end, or TDZ elevation. Height is measured from airport elevation unless TDZE or runway end elevation is noted at the airport symbol. Touchdown Zone Elevation. (Runway End or Threshold Elevation when labeled RWY). 1143831505000 Official Airport Elevation 1185998656000 Procedure turn minimum altitude (MSL) Height above TDZE, runway end, runway threshold, or airport. 1185998656000 Procedure turn outbound limit. When the outbound procedure track is depicted in the profile view, the turn limit is from the fix where the outbound track begins. The turn must be carried out within the specified distance. 1143831505000 172 CHART FORMAT DESCRIPTION INFORMATION APPROACH CHART LEGEND 1143831505000 Racetrack used in lieu of procedure turn with holding limit, outbound and inbound bearings, and minimum altitude. For a racetrack and holding in lieu of procedure turn, the outbound track corresponds to the planview depiction beginning at a point abeam the facility/fix. 1143831505000 Procedure based on 120 KT TAS. Radar required. When airspeeds are indicated in profile note, higher airspeeds require shortened times to assure remaining in the protected area. Radar vectoring is required when it is the only approved method for providing a procedure entry and /or for identifying a terminal fix. 1143831505000 LANDING MINIMUMS GENERAL Publication of minimums does not constitute authority for their use by all operators. Each individual operator must obtain appropriate approval for their use. CHART FORMAT DESCRIPTION INFORMATION APPROACH CHART LEGEND 173 DEFINITIONS 1 143831505000 STRAIGHT-IN LANDING All Charts All authorized minimums and applicable conditions for each approach procedure are provided within the chart minimum table. The first column, at the left, shows the lowest authorized minimum. Succeeding columns to the right will show increasing minimums adjusted to the applicable condition. Installed approach lights or landing aids that affect or may affect minimums are listed in the column headings as “ALS out,” “MM out,” etc. When two or more installed landing aids are out, the highest “out” condition minimum applies. On approach charts dated prior to 24 AUG 90, installed approach lights that did not require a minimum adjustment were omitted from the minimum headings. Charts dated 24 AUG 90 and after will provide column heading conditions for installed approach lights even though a minimum adjustment is not required. Altimeter setting requirements or other special conditions may alter the sequence of the minimums. A review of all notes and minimum box titles should always be made. ILS CHARTS When the glide slope of an ILS is “out” the column heading is identified as a localizer approach with glide slope out – “LOC (GS out)”. In the United States, effective 15 October 1992, there is no longer any penalty imposed for an “MM out”. The “MM out” column is being removed from U.S. charts beginning with the 9 October 1992 revision, effective 15 October 1992. The following countries impose higher minimums for the “MM out” condition. Brazil Bulgaria Costa Rica Ecuador Israel Paraguay Saudi Arabia Suriname Taiwan Uruguay Yemen Arab Republic 174 CHART FORMAT DESCRIPTION INFORMATION APPROACH CHART LEGEND USA FORMAT – Prior to 15 October 1992 Effective date 1 143831505000 USA FORMAT – Effective 15 October 1992 and all succeeding revisions 1 143831505000 WORLD-WIDE FORMAT 1 143831505000 SIDESTEP INOPERATIVE COMPONENTS For a runway identified as sidestep, such as SIDESTEP RWY 24L: Inoperative light components shown in Rwy 24L column are those for the lights installed on Rwy 24L, not the lights for Rwy 24R. CIRCLE-TO-LAND Starting with charts dated July 28, 1989, maximum aircraft speeds for circling are shown in lieu of Aircraft Approach Categories. The maximum indicated airspeeds are shown in knots (kilometers per hour on Metric Edition charts). CHART FORMAT DESCRIPTION INFORMATION APPROACH CHART LEGEND U.S. STANDARD FOR TERMINAL INSTRUMENT APPROACH PROCEDURES (TERPS) 175 NEW INTERNATIONAL CIVIL AVIATION ORGANIZATION (ICAO) FLIGHT PROCEDURES 1143831505000 1143831505000 Known deviations to the above speeds are charted. For the few countries that have not published maximum circling speeds, aircraft approach categories A, B, C and D will continue to be shown. Aircraft Approach Categories in the straight-in minimum column can be read across the chart from left to right for referencing the circle-to-land information. The fact that straight-in-minimums are not published does not preclude pilots from landing straight-in, using published circling minimums, if they have the straight-in runway in sight in sufficient time to make a normal approach for landing. Under such conditions, and when Air Traffic Control has cleared them for landing on that runway, they are not expected to circle even though straight-in minimums are not published. If they desire to circle, they should advise ATC. CEILING MINIMUMS In some parts of the world a minimum “ceiling” is required as well as a minimum visibility. Ceiling measurement is reported as height above ground and therefore may not be the same value as the height above touchdown (HAT) or height above airport (HAA). The ceiling minimums shown in the minimums format are in feet or meters according to the way they are reported. The ceiling requirement is highlighted: 1143831505000 VISIBILITY Visibility for any approach condition is shown below the condition in a band for each aircraft category or each maximum circling speed. Visibility is shown alone, or in addition to RVR. When a governing authority specifies visibility minimums in meters or kilometers, an “m” or “Km” is charted after the specified visibility. When statute or nautical miles are specified, no units are charted; e.g., a specified visibility of “1” means “1 mile.” RUNWAY VISUAL RANGE Runway Visual Range (RVR) is to be used instead of reported visibility for operating on any runway for which RVR is given. The figures shown with RVR represent readings in hundreds of feet, as RVR 24 meaning 2400 feet RVR, or readings in metric units as RVR 550m meaning 550 meters RVR. RVR for non-precision and for precision landing minimums (other than Category II or III): a. Touchdown RVR reports, when available for a particular runway, are controlling. b. The Mid RVR and Rollout RVR reports (if available) provide advisory information to pilots. The Mid RVR report may be substituted for the TDZ RVR report if the TDZ RVR report is not available. RVR for Category II operations: a. For authorized landing minimums of RVR 16 or 500m, the Touchdown Zone RVR reporting system is required and must be used. This RVR report is controlling for all operations. b. For authorized landing minimums of RVR 12 or 350m, the Touchdown Zone and the Rollout RVR reporting systems are required and must be used. The Touchdown Zone RVR report is controlling for all operations and the Rollout RVR report provides advisory information to pilots. The Mid RVR report (if available) provides advisory information to pilots and may be substituted for the Rollout RVR report if the Rollout RVR report is not available. METRIC MINIMUMS Where weather conditions are reported in meters, approved metric minimums are shown in lieu of feet and fractional miles. Metric minimums (ceiling, visibility, and RVR) are not abbreviated but are shown as complete values. 176 CHART FORMAT DESCRIPTION INFORMATION APPROACH CHART LEGEND RVR visibility values are charted only when the value is not the same as the prevailing or meteorological visibility value. When a difference occurs, the respective RVR and prevailing or meteorological visibility values are prefixed with “RVR” and “VIS”. When there is no difference, the minimum is shown only once and means either RVR (if RVR is reported for that runway) or visibility if measured otherwise. 1 143831505000 1 143831505000 The left column lists the lowest available CAT II minimum, normally DH 100, visibility RVR 12 (350m). The right column lists the CAT II minimum applicable when certain airborne equipment is out of service or when pilot and operator requirements preclude the use of lower minimum. This minimum is normally DH 150, visibility RVR 16 (500m). CONVERSION TABLE At the bottom of the approach chart page, there is a conversion table as shown below. 1185998 1 656000 143831505000 The speed table relates aircraft approach speeds to the rate of descent for the ILS glide slope (descent in feet per minute). For non-precision approaches it relates speed to the distance shown from the final approach fix (FAF) or other specified fix to the missed approach point (MAP). 1 185998656000 Some missed approach points are calculated on a time/speed basis after completion of the procedure turn inbound on final approach. The absence to a time/speed table means the MAP cannot be determined by time and a timed approach is Not Authorized. Non-precision approaches designed to be flown at a constant rate of descent have a rate of descent provided in the conversion table. The conversion table specifies a rate of descent that allows arrival at minimum altitudes shown in the profile view. The descent rate is a recommended rate only. Minimum altitudes shown in the profile view apply. On PAR charts: Speed table with rates of descent on PAR glide slope is provided. 1185998656000 CHART FORMAT DESCRIPTION INFORMATION APPROACH CHART LEGEND 1 177 When provided by the State, a non-precision descent gradient is provided with a descent table in feet per minute. 185998656000 1185998656 For combined ILS and non-precision approaches, only one descent table is provided when the ILS glide slope angle and the descent gradient are coincidental. 000 1185998656 On MLS charts the Glide path angle authorized for the procedure and rate of descent table is provided. 000 INSTRUMENT APPROACH PROCEDURE DESIGN INDICATOR PANS-OPS OR TERPS The “PANS-OPS” margin notation indicates that the State has specified that the instrument approach procedure complies with the ICAO Procedures for Air Navigation Services – Aircraft Operations (PANS-OPS) Document 8168, Volume II, 1st or 2nd Edition. Aircraft handling speeds for these procedures are in the INTRODUCTION section under “AIRCRAFT APPROACH CATEGORY (ICAO)”. Known deviations to these handling speeds are charted. “PANS-OPS 3” further indicates that holding speeds to be used are those specified in Document 8168, Volume II, Third Edition. “PANS-OPS 4” further indicates that the acceleration segment criteria have been deleted, as formerly published in Document 8168, Volume II, Third Edition. Jeppesen Air Traffic Control provides an extract of the latest PANSOPS Document 8168, Volume I and the earlier version, concerning holding speeds. Holding speed tables for both the earlier edition and the later editions 3 and 4 of PANS-OPS are included in these pages. “TERPS” indicates that the State has specified that the instrument approach procedure complies with the United States Standard for Terminal Instrument Procedures. NOTE: Charts dated prior to 21 NOV 03 do not include a TERPS margin notation. 1143831505000 NOTE: For charts dated on or after 21 NOV 03, the absence of a PANS-OPS or TERPS margin notation means the instrument approach design criteria are unknown. CIRCLE-TO-LAND ICAO PANS-OPS OR TERPS The Instrument Approach Procedure margin also indicates whether PANS-OPS or TERPS criteria have been applied for the construction of the circling area. Maximum aircraft speeds for circling are shown in lieu of aircraft approach categories. The maximum indicated airspeeds (IAS) are shown in knots and any known deviations to the speeds are charted. For the few countries that have not published maximum circling speeds, aircraft approach categories A, B, C and D will continue to be shown. Aircraft approach categories in the straight-in column can be read across the chart from left to right for referencing the circle-to-land information. The fact that straight-in minimums are not published does not preclude the pilot from landing straight-in, using published circling minimums, if the straight-in runway is in sight with sufficient time to make a normal approach for landing. Under such conditions, and when Air Traffic Control has provided clearance to land on that runway, the pilot is not expected to circle even though straight-in minimums are not published. However, if a circling maneuver is desired, the pilot should advise ATC. 178 CHART FORMAT DESCRIPTION INFORMATION APPROACH CHART LEGEND 1143831505000 Different design standards may be applied for the approach procedure than for the circling areas. In those exceptional cases, and additional label in the heading of the circling minimums box will indicate the criteria which have been applied for the construction of the circling area. 1143831505000 In this example, the instrument approach procedure complies with ICAO PANS-OPS criteria, whereas the circling areas are constructed based on TERPS criteria. CIRCLING AREA TERPS VERSUS ICAO PANS-OPS MAXIMUM SPEEDS/DIMENSIONS 1143831505000 TERPS ICAO PANS-OPS Average bank angle 25° Average bank angle 20° MAX IAS – Circling Area Radius (r) from Threshold 90 Kts 1.3 NM 100 Kts 1.68 120 Kts 1.5 NM 135 Kts 2.66 140 Kts 1.7 NM 180 Kts 4.20 165 Kts 2.3 NM 205 Kts 5.28 NM NM NM NM CHART FORMAT DESCRIPTION INFORMATION APPROACH CHART LEGEND 179 AIRPORT CHART FORMAT The airport chart is typically printed on the reverse side of the first approach chart in the series. At many airports, especially large terminals, the airport chart will precede the first approach chart and contain an enlarged diagram. Airport charts depict communications frequencies as well as runway, taxiway and ramp information. Additionally, approach and runway lighting, declared distances, IFR and obstacle departure procedures, and take-off and alternate minimums are shown. In the example of a chart with an enlarged diagram, this information will usually be printed on the reverse side of the airport diagram. Separate charts may be included that depict detailed ramp areas and parking positions as well as low visibility taxi routes. HEADING Airport, Ramp and Taxiway Charts At the top of page are the location and airport names, the airport’s elevation and latitude and longitude, the Jeppesen NavData (ICAO) and IATA identifiers, and the revision date. 1143831505000 COMMUNICATIONS Communications for departure are listed in order of normal use. 1143831505000 AIRPORT PLAN VIEW SYMBOLS Physical feature symbols used on the airport chart are illustrated below. Runway number is magnetic unless followed by T for true in the far north. 1185998656000 Runway number and (when known) magnetic direction, unless followed by T for true in the far north. 1185998656000 Seaplane operating area, or water runway. 1185998656000 1185998656000 1185998656000 1185998656000 Paved runway Unpaved runway Pierced steel planking (PSP) Seaplane operating area or water runway. Dash lines indicate operating area. 1185998656000 1185998656000 Displaced threshold 180 CHART FORMAT DESCRIPTION INFORMATION APPROACH CHART LEGEND Designated stop bar or designated holding position. 1185998656000 Category II/III holding position 1185998656000 Approach lights extending to displaced threshold 1185998656000 Unidirectional Arrester Gear 1185998656000 Bidirectional Arrester Gear 1185998656000 Jet Barrier 1185998656000 Closed runway. Temporary closed runways will retain length and runway numbers. Stopway or overrun Area under construction 1185998656000 1185998656000 1185998656000 Runway shoulder (when readily noticeable) 1185998656000 No differentiation between types of surface for ramps, taxiways, closed runways, closed taxiways, runway shoulders, and areas other than runways. Stopways and overruns are shown regardless of surface, with the length, when known. Stopway and overrun lengths are not included in runway lengths. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Runway end elevations are shown on the airport diagram if source is available. Approach lights and beacons are the only lighting symbolized on the airport diagram. Approach lights are normally shown to scale in a recognizable form. For approach light symbols see Approach Chart Legend Lighting Systems. A representative selection of reference points known to Jeppesen is depicted. The elevation of reference points depicted is above mean sea level (MSL). Latitude and longitude ticks at tenths of a minute interval are charted around most planview neatlines. Taxiway and apron 1185998656000 1143831505000 Permanently closed taxiway Authorized Landing Area 1143831505000 Helicopter landing pad 1172784901000 Airport Reference Point. Off-runway. Center of cross positioned at exact location. 1143831505000 Airport Reference Point. Located on runway centerline. Arrow points to exact location. 1185998656000 RVR measuring site, may have identifying letter or number. 1143831505000 Airport/Aerodrome/Identification beacon. 1143831505000 On-airport navaid – VOR, NDB or LCTR (locators, other than locators associated with ILS). Depicted on charts dated on and after 5 FEB 93. 1143831505000 Railroad 1185998656000 CHART FORMAT DESCRIPTION INFORMATION APPROACH CHART LEGEND 1185998656000 181 Pole line Lighted Pole 1143831505000 1185998656000 Road Bluff 1185998656000 Trees 1146596728000 Cone 1143831505000 Tee 1143831505000 Tetrahedron 1172784842000 Buildings 1143831505000 Large building 1143831505000 1143831505000 ADDITIONAL RUNWAY INFORMATION 1 143831505000 RUNWAY AND APPROACH LIGHTS For abbreviations used see Approach Chart Legend, Runway Lights — Abbreviations. PILOT CONTROLLED AIRPORT LIGHTING SYSTEMS See “Pilot Controlled Lights (PCL)” in the following sections: INTRODUCTION, Chart Glossary for the United States of America, AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL, Rules and Procedures for the applicable State. Non-standard lighting activations are specified on individual charts. See 1143831505000 above for charting sample. 182 CHART FORMAT DESCRIPTION INFORMATION APPROACH CHART LEGEND USABLE LENGTHS The usable lengths have been determined as follows in the additional runway information. When usable runway lengths differ from those depicted in the airport planview, lengths are specified in the “USABLE LENGTHS” columns. Blank columns indicate that the runway length depicted in the airport planview is applicable. Landing Beyond Threshold – When the landing length is restricted, the length shown is the distance beyond the landing threshold to the roll out end of the runway. Glide Slope – The length shown for ILS is the distance from a point abeam the glide slope transmitter to the roll-out end of the runway. For PAR, the length shown is the distance from the theoretical glide slope interception with the runway to the roll-out end of the runway. If both ILS and PAR are available, data provided is for ILS. Take-off When the take-off length is restricted, the length shown is the distance beyond the point for beginning the take-off roll to the end of the surface usable for take-off. Stopways, overruns, or clearways are not included in the above figures. NOTE: An NA charted as Additional Runway Information indicates that take-offs or landings are not authorized for the rwy shown. Land and Hold Short Operations (LAHSO) Air Traffic Controllers may authorize operations which include simultaneous take-offs and landings and/or simultaneous landings when a landing aircraft is able and is instructed by the controller to hold-short of the intersecting runway/taxiway or designated hold-short point. The available landing distance is shown in the LAHSO Distance column. On charts dated before 11 JUL 97 the column is titled Threshold to Intersecting Runway. 1 143831505000 1 143831505000 RUNWAY LIGHTS – ABBREVIATIONS RL — Low Intensity Runway Lights or intensity not specified. HIRL — High Intensity Runway Edge Lights Runway edge lights are white, except on instrument runways amber replaces white on the last 2000' or half of the runway length, whichever is less. MIRL — Medium Intensity Runway Edge Lights TDZ — Touchdown Zone Lights HSTIL — High Speed Taxiway turn-off indicator lights. HST-H — High Speed Taxiway turn-off with green centerline lights. H indicates taxiway identification. CL — Standard Centerline Light configuration white lights then alternating red & white lights between 3000' and 1000' from runway end and red lights for the last 1000'. CHART FORMAT DESCRIPTION INFORMATION APPROACH CHART LEGEND 183 – or – Exact configuration is not known. Known non-standard configurations are stated as listed below CL (white) — all lights are white full length of runway. CL (non-std) — non-standard, configuration unknown CL (50W, 20R & W, 20R) — non-standard, configuration known...first 5000' white lights; next 2000' alternating red & white lights; last 2000' red lights. Spacing for Runway Edge Lights and Centerline lights is included as a parenthetical value, at selected locations. The parenthetical value is the spacing in feet or meters as appropriate. EXAMPLE: HIRL (60m), is High Intensity Runway Edge Lights with a 60 meter spacing. CL (50'), is Centerline Lights with a 50 foot spacing. APPROACH LIGHTS – ABBREVIATIONS ALS — Approach Light System. Color of lights, if known to be other than white, is included. HIALS — High Intensity Approach Light System HIALS II — High Intensity Approach Light System with CAT II Modifications MIALS — Medium Intensity Approach Light System SFL — Sequenced Flashing Lights F — Condenser-Discharge Sequential Flashing Lights/Sequenced Flashing Lights ALSF-I — Approach Light System with Sequenced Flashing Lights ALSF-II — Approach Light System with Sequenced Flashing Lights and Red Side Row Lights the last 1000'. May be operated as SSALR during favorable weather conditions. SSALF — Simplified Short Approach Light System with Sequenced Flashing Lights SALSF — Short Approach Light System with Sequenced Flashing Lights MALSF — Medium Intensity Approach Light System with Sequenced Flashing Lights RAI — Runway Alignment Indicator RAIL — Runway Alignment Indicator Lights (Sequenced Flashing Lights which are installed only in combination with other light systems) REIL — Runway End Identifier Lights (threshold strobe) RLLS — Runway Lead-in Lighting System SSALR — Simplified Short Approach Light System with Runway Alignment Indicator Lights MALSR — Medium Intensity Approach Light System with Runway Alignment Indicator Lights SALS — Short Approach Light System SSALS — Simplified Short Approach Light System MALS — Medium Intensity Approach Light System LDIN — Sequenced Flashing Lead-in Lights ODALS — Omni-Directional Approach Light System VASI — Visual Approach Slope Indicator (L or R indicates left or right side of runway only) AVASI — Abbreviated Visual Approach Slope Indicator (L or R indicates left or right side of runway only) SAVASI — Simplified Abbreviated Visual Approach Slope Indicator VASI (3 bar) — Visual Approach Slope Indicator for high cockpit aircraft (L or R indicates left or right side of runway only). T-VASI — Tee Visual Approach Slope Indicator. AT-VASI — Abbreviated Tee Visual Approach Slope Indicator (L or R indicates left or right side of runway only). VASI (non-std) — Visual Approach Slope Indicator when known to be non-standard. VASI — VASI/AVASI/NON-STD angels are shown when known to be less than 2.5° or more than 3.0°. T-VASI/ AT-VASI angles are shown at all times. VASI (3 bar) descent angles are shown when other than upwind angle 3.25°, downwind angle 3.00°. APAPI — Abbreviated Precision Approach Path Indicator (L or R indicates left or right side of the runway only) PAPI — Precision Approach Path Indicator (L or R indicates left or right side of runway only). PASI — Passive Approach Slope Indicator PLASI — Pulsating Visual Approach Slope Indicator, normally a single light unit projecting two colors. (L or R indicates left or right side of runway only). TRCV — Tri-Color Visual Approach Slope Indicator, normally a single light unit projecting three colors. (L or R indicates left or right side of runway only). TCH — Threshold Crossing Height. Height of the effective visual glide path over the threshold. MEHT — Minimum Eye Height over Threshold. Lowest height over the threshold of the visual on glide path indication. 184 CHART FORMAT DESCRIPTION INFORMATION APPROACH CHART LEGEND MEHT or TCH is shown (when known) when less than 60' for the upwind bar of a VASI (3 bar) system or less than 25' for all other systems including PAPI. CHART FORMAT DESCRIPTION INFORMATION AIRLINE FORMAT APPROACH CHART LEGEND AIRLINE FORMAT 185 Approach Chart Legend Airline Format GENERAL This legend serves as supplementary information to the new format and regular approach chart legend. The following pages briefly explain the differences and symbols used on airline charts. Airline charts refer only to aircraft categories C and D. Blue as an additional color serves for better differentiation between primary and secondary information. APPROACH CHART HEADING 1 146757995000 1146757995000 1146757995000 Airline chart icon. The former reference to CAT II and CAT III suffixes are routinely being omitted by various states according to ICAO recommendations. Whenever possible, CAT I, CAT II, and IIIA ILS procedures will be combined. 1146757995000 1146757995000 The lowest permissible CAT IIIA minimum will always be charted if a runway is CATIIIA approved together with a cross reference note for CAT I and CAT II referring to the minimums. PLAN VIEW DME distance and radial information spaced at intervals of 5 NM 1146757995000 Special use airspace (Prohibited, Restricted, Danger Areas) 1146757995000 Secondary airport 1173890732000 186 CHART FORMAT DESCRIPTION INFORMATION AIRLINE FORMAT APPROACH CHART LEGEND AIRLINE FORMAT PROFILE VIEW Recommended Altitude Descent Table 1 146757995000 When not already state-supplied, a DME ribbon, beginning at the final approach fix (FAF), will be shown for all non-precision approaches when a suitable DME is used in the procedure. Conversion Table 1146757995000 The aircraft approach speeds have been adjusted to better match the aircraft categories C and D. APPROACH AND AIRPORT CHART MINIMUMS Landing Minimums 1 146757995000 Typical depiction of landing minimums for runways approved for ILS CAT IIIA operations. Take-off Minimums 1 146757995000 CAUTION: Legend pages titled “AIRLINE FORMAT” contain information specific to charts created for airlines. These legend pages include only those items that are unique to the airline format. For information not covered in the “AIRLINE FORMAT” legend, refer to the “NEW FORMAT” and regular “APPROACH CHART LEGEND.” SID/DP/STAR OVERVIEW CHART LEGEND AIRLINE FORMAT SID/DP/STAR overview charts are to-scale; however, they are not intended for navigation purpose. They serve mainly to enhance terrain and general situational awareness and to provide basic information useful in flight planning. If ordered by your airline, these optional overview charts serve as supplementary information only in conjunction with the associated SID/DP/STAR charts. The following pages briefly explain the differences and symbols used on the airline overview charts. Blue as an additional color serves to better differentiate between primary and secondary information. CHART FORMAT DESCRIPTION INFORMATION AIRLINE FORMAT APPROACH CHART LEGEND AIRLINE FORMAT Sample Overview Chart 187 188 CHART FORMAT DESCRIPTION INFORMATION AIRLINE FORMAT APPROACH CHART LEGEND AIRLINE FORMAT LEGEND 1146757995000 1146757995000 1146757995000 1146757995000 1146757995000 1146757995000 1146757995000 1146757995000 1146757995000 1146757995000 1146757995000 1146757995000 Airline chart icon. Index number (special chart for airlines). Standard terminal arrival overview. Standard terminal arrival routes to all available runways. Highest of portrayed terrain high point/man-made structures, or terrain contours in the charted plan view. Higher terrain or man-made structures may exist which have not been portrayed. North arrow. Large water area, lake, or river. Special use airspace (prohibited, restricted, danger areas). Secondary airport. DME distance circles preferably based on a VORDME on or in the vicinity of the airport concerned. Where no suitable VORDME is available, DME distance circles may be centered on ILS/LOCDME, stand-alone DME or TACAN locations. For quick identification, the box of the concerned radio aid is printed blue. TMA boundary with name and airspace classification. Brown box indicating the corresponding layer’s top elevation within the plan view. Signs and Markings Information 190 SIGNS AND MARKINGS INFORMATION ICAO RECOMMENDED AIRPORT SIGNS, RUNWAY AND TAXIWAY MARKINGS ICAO Recommended Airport Signs, Runway and Tax iway Markings MANDATORY INSTRUCTION SIGNS APPLICATION A mandatory instruction sign identifies a location beyond which an aircraft taxiing shall not proceed unless authorized by ATC. At uncontrolled airports, use appropriate precautions prior to proceeding. Mandatory instruction signs may include runway designation signs, category I, II or III holding position signs, runway-holding position signs and NO ENTRY signs. Runway-holding position markings are supplemented at a taxiway/runway or a runway/runway intersection with a runway designation sign. A runway designation sign at a taxiway/runway intersection or a runway/runway intersection will be supplemented with a location sign in the outboard (farthest from the taxiway) position, as appropriate. A NO ENTRY sign is provided when entry into an area is prohibited. LOCATION A runway designation sign at a taxiway/runway intersection or a runway/taxiway intersection will be located on each side of the runway-holding position marking facing into the direction of approach to the runway. A category I, II or III holding position sign will be located on each side of the runway-holding position marking facing into the direction of the approach to the critical area. A runway-holding position sign will be located on each side of the runway-holding position facing the approach to the obstacle limitation surface or ILS/MLS critical/sensitive area, as appropriate. CHARACTERISTICS Mandatory instruction signs have a red background, with white inscriptions. The inscriptions on a runway designation sign will consist of the runway designations of the intersecting runway properly oriented to the viewing direction. The inscriptions on a category I, II or III or joint II/III holding position sign will consist of the runway designator followed by CAT I, CAT II or CAT III as appropriate. The inscriptions on a runway-holding position sign will consist of the taxiway designation and a number. 1173890546000 SIGNS AND MARKINGS INFORMATION ICAO RECOMMENDED AIRPORT SIGNS, RUNWAY AND TAXIWAY MARKINGS 191 INFORMATION SIGNS APPLICATION An information sign identifies a specific location or routing. Information signs include: direction, location, destination, runway exit and runway vacated signs. A runway exit sign is provided to identify a runway exit. A runway vacated sign is provided where the exit taxiway has no centerline lights and there is a need to indicate leaving the runway, the ILS/MLS critical/sensitive area. A destination sign indicates the direction to a specific destination, such as cargo, general aviation, etc. A combined location and direction sign indicates routing information prior to a taxiway intersection. A direction sign identifies the designation and direction at a taxiway intersection. A location sign is provided in conjunction with a runway designation sign except at a runway/runway intersection. LOCATION Information signs are located on the left-hand side of the taxiway in line with the taxiway intersection marking. Where there is no taxiway intersection marking the sign is installed at least 40m away from the centerline of the intersecting taxiway. A runway exit sign is located on the same side of the runway as the exit is located (i.e. left or right). A runway vacated sign is located at least on one side of the taxiway. CHARACTERISTICS An information sign other than a location sign consists of an inscription in black on a yellow background. A location sign consist of an inscription in yellow on a black background. A runway exit sign consist of the exit taxiway designator and an arrow indicating the direction to follow. A runway vacated sign depicts the runwayholding position marking as shown in the example in Pattern A in the example under “Runway-Holding Position Markings“. The inscriptions on a destination sign comprise an alpha, alphanumerical or numerical message identifying the destination plus an arrow indicating the direction to proceed. The inscriptions on a direction sign comprise an alpha, alphanumerical message identifying the taxiway(s) plus an arrow or arrows appropriately oriented as shown in the example. The inscription on a location sign comprise the destination of the location taxiway, runway or other pavement the aircraft is on or is entering. NOTE: Generally, signs should be lighted if the runway or taxiway on which they are installed is lighted. 1143831814000 192 SIGNS AND MARKINGS INFORMATION ICAO RECOMMENDED AIRPORT SIGNS, RUNWAY AND TAXIWAY MARKINGS MANDATORY INSTRUCTION MARKINGS APPLICATION Where it is impracticable to install a mandatory instruction sign a mandatory instruction marking is provided on the surface of the pavement. Where operationally required, such as on taxiways exceeding 60m in width, a mandatory instruction sign may be supplemented by a mandatory instruction marking. LOCATION The mandatory instruction marking is located on the left-hand side of the taxiway center line marking on the holding side of the runway-holding position marking. CHARACTERISTICS Mandatory instruction markings consist of an inscription in white on a red background. Except for a NO ENTRY marking, the inscription provides information identical to that of the associated mandatory instruction sign. A NO ENTRY marking consists of an inscription in white reading NO ENTRY on a red background. 1143831814000 RUNWAY-HOLDING POSITION MARKINGS APPLICATION AND LOCATION Runway-holding position markings are located at runway holding positions. CHARACTERISTICS At an intersection of a taxiway and a non-precision, non-instrument or take-off runway or where a single runwayholding position is provided at an intersection of a taxiway and a precision approach category I, II or III runway, the runway-holding position marking will be shown as in pattern A. Where two or three runway-holding positions are provided at such an intersection, the runway-holding position marking closer to the runway will be as shown as in pattern A, and the markings farther from the runway as in pattern B. Where a pattern B runway-holding position marking exceeds 60m in length, the term CAT II or CAT III as appropriate will be marked on the surface at the ends of the runway-holding position marking. The runway-holding position marking displayed at a runway/ runway intersection will be perpendicular to the centerline of the runway forming part of the standard taxiroute. The runway-holding position marking will be shown as in pattern B. SIGNS AND MARKINGS INFORMATION ICAO RECOMMENDED AIRPORT SIGNS, RUNWAY AND TAXIWAY MARKINGS 193 1143831814000 INTERMEDIATE HOLDING POSITION MARKINGS APPLICATION AND LOCATION An intermediate holding position marking is displayed at an intersection of two paved taxiways. It is positioned across the taxiway coincident with a stop bar or intermediate holding position lights, where provided. CHARACTERISTICS An intermediate holding position marking consists of a single broken yellow line. 1143831814000 STOP BARS APPLICATION A stop bar is provided at every runway-holding position when it is intended that the runway will be used in RVR conditions less than 350m or between 350m and 550m. A stop bar will be provided at an intermediate holding position to supplement markings with lights or where normal stop bar lights might be obscured. LOCATION Stop bars are located across the taxiway at the point where it is desired that traffic stop. Additional lights may be provided at the taxiway edge. CHARACTERISTICS Stop bars consist of lights spaced at intervals across the taxiway, showing red in the intended direction of approach to the intersection or runway-holding position. Stop bars installed at a runway-holding position will be unidirectional, showing red in the direction of approach to the runway. 194 SIGNS AND MARKINGS INFORMATION ICAO RECOMMENDED AIRPORT SIGNS, RUNWAY AND TAXIWAY MARKINGS RUNWAY GUARD LIGHTS APPLICATION Runway guard lights, configuration A, are located at each taxiway/runway intersection associated with a runway intended for use in: RVR conditions less than 550m where a stop bar is not installed; and RVR conditions between 550m and 1200m where traffic density is medium or low. Configuration A or B or both will be provided at each taxiway/runway intersection where the configuration of the intersection needs to be enhanced, such as on a wide throat taxiway. LOCATION Runway guard lights, configuration A, are located at each side of a taxiway, whereas in configuration B they are located across the taxiway. CHARACTERISTICS Runway guard lights are unidirectional flashing yellow lights. Configuration A 1173890675000 Configuration B 1173890705000 RUNWAY MARKINGS Runway markings are white. THRESHOLD MARKINGS APPLICATION AND LOCATION Threshold markings are provided at the threshold of a paved instrument and non-instrument runway intended for use by international commercial air transport. CHARACTERISTICS Runway threshold markings consist of a pattern of longitudinal stripes of uniform dimensions disposed symmetrically about the centerline of a runway. The number of stripes shall be in accordance with the runway width as follows: SIGNS AND MARKINGS INFORMATION ICAO RECOMMENDED AIRPORT SIGNS, RUNWAY AND TAXIWAY MARKINGS RUNWAY WIDTH 18m 23m 30m 45m 60m 195 NUMBER OF STRIPES 4 6 8 12 16 Where a runway designator is placed within a threshold marking, there will be a minimum of three stripes on each side of the runway centerline. Stripes are at least 30m long. RUNWAY DESIGNATION MARKINGS APPLICATION AND LOCATION Runway designation markings are located at the thresholds of a paved runway. CHARACTERISTICS Runway designation markings consists of a two-digit number located at the threshold. On parallel runways each runway designation number is supplemented by a letter in the order from left to right when viewed from the direction of approach. RUNWAY CENTERLINE MARKINGS APPLICATION AND LOCATION A runway centerline marking is provided on a paved runway along the centerline. CHARACTERISTICS Runway centerline markings consist of a line of uniformly spaced stripes and gaps. Stripes are normally 30m long, gaps 20m long. HIGH SPEED TAXIWAY TURN-OFF INDICATOR LIGHTS (HSTIL) ICAO term is Rapid Exit Taxiway Indicator Lights (RETIL) APPLICATION HSTIL should be provided on a runway intended for use in RVR conditions less than 350m and/or where traffic density is heavy. LOCATION A set of HSTIL shall be located on the runway on the same side of the runway centerline as the associated high speed turn-off taxiway, in the configuration shown below. CHARACTERISTICS HSTIL are fixed unidirectional yellow lights, aligned so as to be visible to the pilot of a landing airplane in the direction of approach to the runway. Point of tangency (328') 100m (197') 60m RETILs 2m lateral spacing (328') 100m (328') 100m 2m 2m 2m Runway centerline 1173890487000 196 SIGNS AND MARKINGS INFORMATION ICAO RECOMMENDED AIRPORT SIGNS, RUNWAY AND TAXIWAY MARKINGS RUNWAY TOUCHDOWN ZONE MARKINGS APPLICATION A touchdown zone marking is provided in the touchdown zone of a paved precision approach runway and non-precision approach runway or non-instrument runway where additional identification of the touchdown zone is required. LOCATION AND CHARACTERISTICS A touchdown zone marking shall consists of pairs of rectangular markings symmetrically disposed about the runway centerline with the number of pairs are related to the landing distance available (LDA). A touchdown zone marking shall conform to either of the two runway patterns shown below. LDA or DISTANCE BETWEEN THRESHOLDS less than 900m less than 1200m, but not less than 900m less than 1500m, but not less than 1200m less than 2400m, but not less than 1500m 2400m or more PAIR(S) OF MARKINGS 1 2 3 4 6 RUNWAY AIMING POINT MARKINGS APPLICATION An aiming point marking will be provided at each approach end of a paved instrument or non-instrument runway. LOCATION AND CHARACTERISTICS An aiming point marking consists of two conspicuous stripes in conformity with the dimensions shown for the runway patterns in the example shown under “Runway Touchdown Zone and Aiming Point Markings“. SIGNS AND MARKINGS INFORMATION ICAO RECOMMENDED AIRPORT SIGNS, RUNWAY AND TAXIWAY MARKINGS 197 1143831814000 RUNWAY SIDE MARKINGS STRIPE MARKING APPLICATION Runway side stripe markings are provided between the thresholds of a paved runway where there is lack of contrast between the runway edges and the shoulders. Runway side stripe markings are provided on precision approach runways. 198 SIGNS AND MARKINGS INFORMATION ICAO RECOMMENDED AIRPORT SIGNS, RUNWAY AND TAXIWAY MARKINGS LOCATION AND CHARACTERISTICS Runway side stripe markings consist of two stripes, one placed along each edge of the runway no more than 30m from the runway centerline regardless of the runway width. DISPLACED THRESHOLD MARKINGS 1143831814000 CLOSED RUNWAYS AND TAXIWAYS OR PARTS THEREOF APPLICATION AND LOCATION A closed marking will be displayed at each end of a runway or portion thereof, declared permanently closed to the use of all aircraft. Additionally, markings are placed so that the maximum interval between the markings does not exceed 300m. On a taxiway, a closed markings shall marking shall be placed at least at each end of a taxiway or portion thereof that is closed. CHARACTERISTICS The closed marking is shaped like a cross. The marking is white when displayed on a runway and yellow when displayed on a taxiway. NON LOAD-BEARING SURFACES The boundary between load-bearing surfaces and non load-bearing surfaces, such as shoulders for taxiways, holding bays, aprons and other non load-bearing surfaces which, if used, might result in damage to the aircraft are indicated by a taxi side stripe. This marking consists of a pair of solid lines the same color as the taxiway centerline marking. PRE-THRESHOLD AREA MARKING (CHEVRON MARKING) When the paved surface prior to the threshold exceeds 60m in length and is not suitable for use by aircraft, the entire length will be marked with a chevron marking (preferably yellow) pointing in the direction of the runway threshold. 1143831814000 FLIGHT SUPPLEMENT BOOKLET Chart Change Notices NavData Change Data NAVDATA CHANGE DATA AERONAUTICAL INFORMATION COMPATIBILITY 201 Aeronautical Information Compatibility Jeppesen Airway Manual Charts are the same publications which Jeppesen has provided to the aviation community for many years. Jeppesen NavData has not been around for quite as long, but has established and maintained the same reputation for accuracy, reliability, and dependability with those customers who use computerized navigational systems and other computer navigation data bases from Jeppesen. For those who subscribe to both services, slight differences may occasionally be noted between what is seen on the chart and what is generated from the navigation data base. These differences may be caused by any or all of the following: 1. DIFFERENCES IN PUBLICATION CRITERIA Jeppesen computerized NavData is updated and issued every 28 days. This is a relatively quick and simple operation for the user, since all of the changes are included on the updated tape or disk which is loaded into the aircraft navigation system or a main-frame computer system. The charts are quite a different story, as each chart must be individually updated and published. The new charts are then collated and mailed, and once received by the customer, must be filed individually in the Airway Manual. Variations, such as differences in information cut-off dates and lead time requirements, may bring about distribution in one medium before the other. These differences are generally resolved in the Jeppesen NavData Change Notices and the Jeppesen Chart Change Notices. The Change Notices provide a weekly or bi-weekly update to the NavData and Chart services. A review of the Jeppesen Change Notices pages prior to using either service will help to ensure that you have the most current information. 2. DIFFERENCES IN THE METHOD USED TO DETERMINE BEARING AND DISTANCE VALUE ON CHARTS AND IN COMPUTERIZED NAVIGATIONAL SYSTEMS Bearings and distances on airways, approach transitions, and instrument approaches are published in a country's Aeronautical Information Publication (AIP). Almost exclusively, these values are taken from the AIP and published on Jeppesen charts. In contrast, the navigation data base contains exact locations of the navaids used to form tracks of airways, approach transitions, and instrument approaches. System software computes great circle route bearings and distances based on the most current navaid information on the desired route, and presents this data on the system display. Slight differences in bearing and distance may not be changed in the AIP, and therefore, may not change on the Jeppesen charts. But if navaid information has changed even minutely, differences may show up because the bearings and distances displayed are computed by the navigation system or computer flight planning software each time a particular track is called up. 3. DIFFERENCES IN WAYPOINT NAMES AND COORDINATES Waypoint names published on Jeppesen charts are taken directly from official government sources. In some countries, there are no restrictions on the number of characters used in the name. Computerized navigation system software limits waypoint names to a maximum of five characters. Therefore, waypoint names with more than five characters will be abbreviated for entry into the navigation data base. Jeppesen has included an explanation of the method used to abbreviate these names on NavData pages 5 through 10, titled “NavData Name Conventions”. Note that the basic structure of the name is retained, and it should be relatively easy to tie that abbreviation generated by the data base to the complete name of the waypoint on the chart. In addition, there are unnamed turning points and intersections depicted on charts which must be included in the navigation data base. Therefore, certain names may appear in a computerized system which do not appear on a chart. The method used to identify these turning points and intersections is also included in “NavData Name Conventions”. On standard Enroute and Area charts, for unnamed, or named with name other than five characters and no State assigned identifier, fixes/reporting points/ mileage breaks -andFor entry points on STAR charts and exit points on SID charts: – The NavData identifier is published, adjacent to the point involved, within square brackets, and in italic type. EXAMPLE: [ABC73]. Should changes occur to a charted NavData identifier prior to the re-issue of the chart, the change will be announced in a special section of the Jeppesen Chart Change Notices titled “NavData Identifiers”. NavData identifiers are Jeppesen derived only, and should not be used for ATC flight plan filing or used in ATC communications. Coordinates on Jeppesen charts may also differ slightly from those generated by a computer. As stated in paragraph 1 above, the navigation data base is updated completely every 28 days. The charts, on the other hand, may accumulate small changes over a longer period of time. Because of these differences in publication schedules, there may be very slight differences between the charts and the NavData generated information. 202 NAVDATA CHANGE DATA AERONAUTICAL INFORMATION COMPATIBILITY 4. INCOMPATIBILITY OF SOME ROUTES AND INSTRUMENT APPROACHES WITH COMPUTERIZED NAVIGATION SYSTEM SOFTWARE By nature of their design, some routes and instrument approach procedures are not usable by certain computerized navigation systems. For example, consider an approach transition from the enroute structure to an instrument approach. In most cases these are named and defined as STARs, or they are tied into particular instrument approach procedures. To be compatible with computerized navigation system software, one of the above prerequisites must be present, that is, the transitions must be either named STARs, or connected to instrument approach procedures. But occasionally an AIP will define an approach transition which is not a named STAR and which is not connected to an instrument approach procedure. When neither of the conditions is met, approach transitions of this type may not be entered into the navigation data base. Certain approaches are also incompatible with system software, and may not be entered into the navigation data base. In most cases, these restrictions do not apply to publication of Jeppesen charts. All types of routes and approaches may be published on Jeppesen charts, but depending on the capabilities of the computerized navigation system, they may not appear in the system data base, and therefore you may not be able to call them up on your system display. SUMMARY Any or all of the above may cause slight differences between charts and information generated from the navigation data base. The Jeppesen NavData and Chart Change Notices should be reviewed prior to using either Jeppesen service. As a final note, be sure to obtain a preflight briefing to ensure that you have knowledge of any last minute changes affecting your flight. NAVDATA CHANGE DATA NAVDATA IDENTIFIERS ON JEPPESEN CHARTS 203 NavData Identifiers on Jeppes en Charts On standard Enroute and Area Charts, for unnamed, or named with name other than five characters and no State assigned identifier, fixes/reporting points/mileage breaks – and – For entry points on STAR charts and exit points on SID charts: – The NavData identifier is published, adjacent to the point involved, within square brackets, and in italic type. Example: [ABC73]. NavData identifiers are Jeppesen derived only, and should not be used for A TC flight plan filing or used in ATC communications. The identifiers are shown as in the examples below, always in italic type and always enclosed within square brackets. 1 176236832000 AIRSPACE FIX NAMED ONLY “115° W” 1176236832000 AIRWAY/ROUTE TURNING POINT 1 176236832000 STAR Chart - “Tango Hotel” entry point from the enroute structure has more than five characters in its name. 1176236832000 204 NAVDATA CHANGE DATA NAVDATA NAME CONVENTIONS NavData Name Conventions WAYPOINT IDENTIFIERS Waypoint names entered into the navigation data base are limited to a maximum of five characters. Official waypoint names assigned by a country's aviation information authority often have other than five characters. For compatibility with the navigation data base, waypoint identifiers are assigned to all waypoints in accordance with the ground rules set forth as follows: a. VOR, VORDME, VORTAC, TACAN and Non-Directional Beacons (NDB). Waypoints located at any of the above types of facilities will take on the official I-, 2-, 3-, or 4-character identifier of the facility In question. Examples: Los Angeles VORTAC Tyndall TACAN Ft. Nelson NDB Newark NDB LAX PAM YE EWR b. NDB NDB as Waypoint Concept For systems employing the “NDB as Waypoint” concept, waypoints located at NDBs will be identified by the use of the station identifier followed by the alpha characters “NB”. Examples: Ft. Nelson NDB Newark NDB YENB EWRNB c. Named RNAV Waypoints, Intersections and Reporting Points. In many countries, these waypoints are assigned unique 5-character names, with the identifier the same as the name. For waypoints not so named, identifiers are developed using the following rules sequentially until 5 or fewer character groups emerge. 1. One-Word Names (a) Use the full name if five characters or less are involved. Examples: – ACRA, LOGAN, PIKE, DOT (b) Eliminate double letters. Examples: – KIMMEL becomes KIMEL – COTTON becomes KOTON – RABBITT becomes RABIT (c) Keep first letter, first vowel and last letter. Drop other vowels starting from right to left. Examples: – ADOLPH becomes ADLPH – BAILEY becomes BAILY – BURWELL becomes BURWL (d) Drop consonants, starting from right to left. Examples: – ANDREWS becomes ANDRS – BRIDGEPORT becomes BRIDT 2. Multiple Word Names Use the first letter of the first word and abbreviate the last word using the above rules for one-word names to reduce it to four characters. Examples: – CLEAR LAKE becomes CLAKE – ROUGH AND READY becomes RREDY 3. Phonetic Letter Names (a) When an ICAO phonetic alpha character is used as a waypoint name (Alpha, Bravo, Charlie, etc.), use the rules established in paragraph C.1 above. When more than one waypoint in a country has the same phonetic name, obtain uniqueness by applying rule E below. Examples: – Waypoint November becomes NOVMR – Waypoint Charlie becomes CHARE NAVDATA CHANGE DATA NAVDATA NAME CONVENTIONS 205 – Waypoint Alpha remains ALPHA (b) When a double phonetic, such as Tango India, is used as the waypoint name, use the rules established in paragraph C.2 above. (c) When a phonetic alpha character followed by a numeric and/or other alpha characters (A1, A1N, B2, etc.), is used as the waypoint name, it will appear the same in the data base as shown on aeronautical charts. d. Unnamed Waypoints 1. Unnamed Turn Points, Intersections and Bearing/Distance Waypoints (For bearing/distance waypoints on terminal area procedures, see paragraph F.2) (a) If an unnamed turn point, intersection or bearing/distance waypoint is colocated with a named waypoint or NAVAID station on a different route structure (e.g., low level or approach), the name or identifier of the colocated waypoint is used. Example: – Unnamed turn point on J2 between Lake Charles (LCH) and New Orleans (MSY) VORTACs is coincidental with the Lafayette (LFT) low level VORTAC. LFT is used as the identifier code for the turn point. (b) Identifier codes for unnamed turn points, intersections or bearing/distance way-points that are not coincidental with named waypoints should be constructed by taking the identifier code of the reference NAVAID for the turn point/intersection/(bearing/distance waypoint) (expected to be the nearest NAVAID serving the airway structure in which it is located) and the distance from this NAVAID to the turn point/intersection/(bearing/distance waypoint). If the distance is 99 nautical miles or less, the NAVAID identifier is placed first, followed by the distance. If the distance is 100 nautical miles or more, the last two digits only are used and placed ahead of the NAVAID identifier. Examples: TIZ15 NAVAID INW CSN DISTANCE 18 106 CODE INW18 06CSN 2. FIR, UIR and Controlled Airspace Reporting Positions In cases where the government authority does not provide unique 5-letter or less waypoint names, and in cases where the government supplied name cannot be converted to a unique 5-letter identifier using rules C.1, C.2, and C.3, the following rules are applied in developing an identifier for such waypoints. (a) FIR – use the three characters “FIR” plus a numeric from 02 to 99. An identifier so developed is unique within the geographical area code. Example: FIR09 (b) UIR – use the three characters “UIR” plus a numeric from 02 to 99. an identifier so developed is unique within the geographical area code. Example: UIR39 (c) FIR/UIR – Use “FIR” and a numeric as indicated above. Example: FIR69 (d) Controlled Airspace – use the 3-letter characters for the type of controlled airspace plus a numeric from 02 to 99. These are Terminal Waypoints and as such are unique within the Terminal Area. Examples of controlled airspace types are: TMA CTA CTR TIZ ATZ Terminal Control Area Control Area Control Zone Traffic Information Zone Aerodrome Traffic Zone Example: CTR03 3. Reporting Positions Defined by Coordinates Entry/Exit positions to Oceanic Control Areas are often defined by waypoints which are “undesignated”, made available in source documentation as geographical coordinates (Latitude/Longitude) expressed in full degrees. In cases where such positions are to be entered into the data base, the following rules are applied: (a) Positions in the northern hemisphere use the letters “N” and “E”, the southern hemisphere use the letters “S” and “W” and numerics for latitude and longitude as follows: (1) Latitude, use values provided by source. Latitude will always precede longitude. 206 NAVDATA CHANGE DATA NAVDATA NAME CONVENTIONS (2) Longitude, use only the last two values of the three digit longitude value. Placement of the letter designator in the five character set indicates what the first digit is published as. The letter designator will be the last character if the longitude is less than 100 degrees and will be the third character if the longitude is 100 degrees or greater. (3) The letter “N” is used for north latitude and west longitude. The letter “E” is used for north latitude and east longitude. The letter “S” is used for south latitude and east longitude. The letter “W” is used for south latitude and west longitude. (b) Examples: N latitude/W longitude N52 00/W075 00 = 5275N N50 00/W040 00 = 5040N N07 00/W008 00 = 0708N N75 00/W170 00 = 75N70 N07 00/W120 00 = 07N20 N latitude/E longitude N50 00/E020 00 = 5020E N75 00/E050 00 = 7550E N06 00/E008 00 = 0608E N75 00/E150 00 = 75E50 N06 00/E110 00 = 06E10 S latitude/W longitude S52 00/W075 00 = 5275W S50 00/W040 00 = 5040W S07 00/W008 00 = 0708W S75 00/W170 00 = 75W70 S07 00/W120 00 = 07W20 S latitude/E longitude S50 00/E020 00 = 5020S S75 00/E050 00 = 7550S S06 00/E008 00 = 0608S S75 00/E150 00 = 75S50 S06 00/E110 00 = 06S10 e. Duplicate Identifiers 1. Should application of these rules result in more than one waypoint having the same identifier, a new identifier is generated for each waypoint by developing a four (or less) character identifier and adding a suffix number or letter. Examples: SHAWNEE (COLO) SHAE1 SHAWNEE (CAL) SHAE2 2. If the suffix number reaches 10, start over with one and place the suffix in the fourth- character position. The original fourth character is placed in the fifth-character position. Example: SHAWNEE (OKLA) SHA1E f. Terminal Waypoints The following rules are applied in developing identifiers for waypoints used solely in terminal area procedures. Such waypoint identifiers will be unique only for the airport specified. A way-point identifier used in a terminal area cannot be repeated in that terminal area but can be used in an enroute area encompassed by the same geographical area code. Terminal waypoint identifiers can be repeated in areas covered by different geographical codes. These Identifier developing rules are only applied when the waypoints in question have not been assigned official names/identifiers by the government authority. 1. Airport-Related Waypoints (Single Approach Procedure for given runway coded) Single Approach Procedure for given runway coded and Waypoints common to more than one approach: The following two-character codes are to be added to the runway identifier to create an airport-related waypoint identifier when no named waypoint has been established by the government source for the fix type: NAVDATA CHANGE DATA NAVDATA NAME CONVENTIONS FF AF IF CF MA SD = = = = = = 207 Final Approach Fix Initial Approach Fix Intermediate Approach Fix Final Approach Course Fix Missed Approach Point Fix Step-Down Fix NOTE: if multiple step-down fix waypoints need to be created, replace “D” with another character, retain the “S”. RC RW * OM * MM * IM * BM TD * See also rule G = = = = = = = Examples: Runway Centerline Fix Runway Fix Outer Marker Fix Middle Marker Fix Inner Marker Fix Backcourse Marker Fix Touchdown point inboard of runway threshold FF36 MA09L 2. Airport-Related Waypoints (Multiple Approach Procedure for given runway coded.) Multiple approach Procedures for a given runway coded for which common waypoints cannot be established: – The following two-character codes are to be added to the runway identifier to create an airportrelated waypoint identifier when no named waypoint has been established by the government source for the fix type: Fx Ax Ix Cx Mx Sx Rx Tx = = = = = = Final Approach Fix, where “x” equals the Type of procedure in question Initial Approach Fix, where “x” equals the Type of procedure in question Intermediate Approach Fix, where “x” equals the Type of procedure in question Final Approach Course Fix, where “x” equals the Type of procedure in question Missed Approach Point Fix, where “x” equals the Type of procedure in question Step-Down Fix Note: if multiple step-down fix waypoints need to be created, replace “D” with another character, retain the “S”. = Runway Centerline Fix, where “X” equals the Type of procedure in question = Touchdown Fix inboard of runway threshold, where “X” equals the Type of procedure in question These procedure type characters do not appear on the Jeppesen Approach Charts. The convention above for Multiple Approaches/Multiple Waypoints result in the following table: Waypoint Type IAF IF FACF FAF MAP TDP Step-Down FEP Waypoint codes based on the procedure route type. ILS (I) AI II CI FI MI TI SI EI RNAV (R) ILS(L) AL IL CL FF ML TL SL EL TACAN (T) ILS(B) AB IB CB FB MB TB SB EB IGS (G) VOR(V) AV IV CV FV MV TV SV EV LDA (X) NDB (N) AN IN CN FN MN TN SN EN SDF (U) MLS (M) AM IM CM FM MM TM SM EM GPS (P) 208 NAVDATA CHANGE DATA NAVDATA NAME CONVENTIONS Waypoint Type IAF IF FACF FAF MAP TDP Step-Down FEP AR IR CR FR MR TR SR ER AT IT CT FT MT TT ST ET IAF IF FACF FAF MAP TDP Step-Down FEP MLS (W) AW IW CW FW MW TW SW EW MLS (Y) AY IY CY FY MY TY SY EY IAF IF FACF FAF MAP TDP Step-Down FEP VOR (S) AS IS CS FS MS TS SS ES Waypoint codes based on the procedure route type. AG IG CG FG MG TG SG EG NDB+DME(Q) AQ IQ CQ FQ MQ TQ SQ EQ AX IX CX FX MX TX SX EX AU IU CU FU MU TU SU EU AP IP CP FP MP TP SP EP FMS (F) 1F 2F 3F 4F 5F 6F 7F 8F GLS (J) AJ IJ CJ FJ MJ TJ SJ EJ VORDME (D) AD ID CD FD MD TD SD ED NOTE: “C-T-L” is “Circle-To-Land” Approach the prefixes indicated in the table above assume that a unique geographical position (Latitude/Longitude) is required for each Waypoint and the “common waypoint” idea cannot be used. Should a single waypoints’ geographical position be such that it will serve as the same waypoint type for more than one coded approach procedure, a “common waypoint”; the Single Approach/Common Waypoint convention shall be used. Note on prefixes for FMS(F) Approach Waypoints: As the majority of the prefixes generated using the standard convention and the Route Type “F” produced duplicates or two character codes that would be easily confused with other coded, the numerical/alpha/runway identifier concept is used. 3. Bearing/Distance Waypoints Identifiers are developed by the application of the following rules: (a) The first character is “D”. (b) Characters 2 through 4 signify the VHF NAVAID radial on which the waypoint lies. (c) The last character is the DME arc radius defining the position of the waypoint on the radial. This radius is expressed as the equivalent letter of the alphabet, i.e., A = 1NM, G = 7NM, P = 16NM, etc. Examples: NAVDATA CHANGE DATA NAVDATA NAME CONVENTIONS 209 D185J 1176231329000 D250P 1176232150000 (d) If distance is greater than 26NM, use the convention in paragraph D or E. (e) If the arc radius is provided in official government source as nautical miles and tenths of nautical miles, the letter of the alphabet will reflect values rounded to full nautical miles, i.e., 10.5nm = 11nm or K, 10.4nm = 10nm or J. All values between 0.1 and 1.4 will be character “A”. g. Approach Marker Identification Priority Convention 1. If the approach marker is named, use its name. Example: PlKKE OM Runway 26 will be PlKKE 2. If it is unnamed but an NDB, use the NDB ident followed by the letters NB Example: Ft. Nelson LOM will be YENB 3. If it is unnamed and not an NDB, use letters OM followed by the runway number. Example: Outer Marker for Runway 26 becomes OM26 210 NAVDATA CHANGE DATA NAVDATA NOTAM SERVICE NavData Change Notices Service GENERAL Jeppesen NavData Change Notices are provided to operators of airborne navigation systems using a navigation database produced and updated from information supplied by Jeppesen. GEOGRAPHIC AREAS The world is covered by ten Aeronautical Radio Inc. (ARINC) geographic areas, and the NavData Change Notices are issued in ten individual geographic coverages that correspond to the ARINC areas. Refer to NavData Pages 101 through 103 for a complete explanation of the ARINC and NavData coverages. CONTENT NavData Change Notices are issued weekly, and include significant temporary and permanent information changes affecting the flight data stored in your aircraft FMCS. Entries are published until the temporary condition no longer exists, or until the permanent change has been included in your NavData update. All times are local unless otherwise indicated. A vertical bar indicates new or revised information. NAVDATA EFFECTIVE DATES The NavData effective dates are highlighted in a box on the beginning page of each NavData Change Notices revision to ensure there is no confusion as to which 28 day update cycle the information applies to. Every four weeks there are two sets of dates highlighted, the current cycle and the upcoming cycle. Entries still effective at the time of the Friday NavData Change Notices publication date and included in the next Thursday cycle update are followed by “(Until date)”. Entries for changes effective with the new cycle and received too late for inclusion are prefaced with “From date”. COPYRIGHT NOTICE The graphics, pictorials, arrangements and compiled information on Jeppesen NavData Change Notices are protected from unauthorized use and copying by the United States Copyright laws. The protected materials may not be copied, reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, retransmitted in whole or in part, or used for database updating, in any form or by any means, whether electrical, mechanical, by photocopying, recording or otherwise, without the prior written consent of Jeppesen. Jeppesen NavData Change Notices highlight only significant changes affecting Jeppesen navigation data that may be currently stored in your aircraft navigation system database. Check for NOTAMs and other pertinent information prior to flight. NAVDATA CHANGE DATA NAVDATA CHANGE NOTICES 211 NAVDATA CHANGE NOT ICES WORLDWIDE GEOGRAPHIC COVERAGES To ensure you can easily locate NavData Change Notices applicable to your particular areas of operation, each page is identified by a coverage code. NavData Change Notices coverage codes, and the areas covered by each, are shown on the following worldwide chart. These areas are coincidental with the established Aeronautical Radio Incorporated (ARINC) navigation data geographical areas. The associated ARINC navigation data area codes, which may appear in your navigation data base, are also provided. NAVDATA CHANGE NOTICES CODE US CA LA SA P SP E EE A ME NAVDATA CHANGE NOTICES AREA NAME United States Canada/Alaska Latin America South America Pacific South Pacific Europe Eastern Europe/China Africa Middle East/South Asia ARINC AREA CODE USA CAN LAM SAM PAC SPA EUR EEU AFR MES Example: NavData Change Notices United States Page US-1 contains Change Notices applicable to the forty-eight United States, plus the portion of the Gulf of Mexico and the Atlantic Ocean shown on the following chart. 1176237077000 1176237077000 USA is the ARINC area code for the same area. NOTE: NavData Change Notices are provided only for your area of operation. You may or may not receive all of the coverages listed above. 212 NAVDATA CHANGE DATA NAVDATA CHANGE NOTICES 1 279046603000 NAVDATA CHANGE DATA NAVDATA CHANGE NOTICES 213 1 225816570000 FLIGHT SUPPLEMENT BOOKLET Enroute Enroute Data - General 216 ENROUTE DATA - GENERAL ARINC Services and Communic ations AIR/GROUND VOICE SERVICES ARINC-1/2 – DOMESTIC U. S. VHF NETWORK: a. b. c. d. e. f. Airborne coverage throughout the United States (continuous coverage above 20,000 feet). On-the-ground coverage at most major airports within the United States. Phone-patch capabilities for enroute message traffic. Message delivery via ARINC AvinetSM Service or via telephone. Capability to check on enroute, destination, and alternate field weather. Direct Dialing capability for aircraft equipped with DTMF microphones (dual tone multi-frequency) ARINC-3/4 – INTERNATIONAL HF NETWORK: a. Company message relay service and phone-patch capability via Long Distance Operational Control Frequencies (LDOCF). b. Message delivery via Avinet. c. Telephone delivery for non-Avinet subscribers. d. Weather observations and forecasts available. e. SELCAL-equipped aircraft need not monitor HF continuously. ARINC-5/6 – MEXICO VHF NETWORK: Provides services identical to the Domestic U.S. VHF Network where indicated within Mexico ARINC-7/BLK– ASIA AREA HF LDOC COVERAGE: Company message relay service and phone-patch capability via Long Distance Operational Control Frequencies (LDOCF). GROUND COMMUNICATIONS CENTERS NEW YORK (NYC) Address: 613 Johnson Ave. Bohemia, Long Island NY 11716-2696 Tel: (631) 244-2480 Fax: (631) 563-2412 ADNS: NYCXGXA SAN FRANCISCO (SFO) Address: 6011 Industrial Way Livermore CA 94550 Tel: (925) 294-8400 Fax: (925) 294-9597 ADNS: SFOXGXA Direct questions to ARINC Service Desk (800) 633-6882 or (703) 637-6360. ENROUTE DATA - GENERAL ARINC ARINC Serv ic es 217 218 ENROUTE DATA - GENERAL ARINC 1310655777432 ENROUTE DATA - GENERAL ARINC 219 1310655777432 220 ENROUTE DATA - GENERAL ARINC 1 302030694000 ENROUTE DATA - GENERAL ARINC 221 1 302030694000 222 ENROUTE DATA - GENERAL ARINC 1302030694000 ENROUTE DATA - GENERAL ARINC 223 1302030694000 224 ENROUTE DATA - GENERAL ARINC 1 302030694000 ENROUTE DATA - GENERAL STOCKHOLM RADIO 225 Stockholm Radio LONG DISTANCE OPERATIONAL CONTROL Period: FEB 12- APR 12 1326898626018 storadio@aviolinx.com 226 ENROUTE DATA - GENERAL STOCKHOLM RADIO 1326898626018 ENROUTE DATA - GENERAL OCEANIC LONG-RANGE NAVIGATION INFORMATION 227 Oceanic Long-Range Navigation Information BASIC OCEANIC LONG-RANGE NAVIGATION AND COMMUNICATION REQUIREMENTS Any operation which is conducted in international oceanic airspace on an IFR flight plan, a VFR controlled flight plan, or at night, and is continued beyond the published range of normal airways navigation facilities (NDB, VOR/DME), is considered to be a long-range navigation operation. Accurate navigational performance is required to support the separation minima which air traffic control units apply. These separation minima can be found in the International Civil Aviation Organization (ICAO) Regional Supplementary Procedures Document 7030 and the Oceanic Air Traffic Control Handbook (FAA Order 7110.83). Federal Aviation Regulation (FAR) 91.703 requires that civil aircraft must comply with ICAO, Annex 2 when operating over the high seas. In addition, ICAO, Annex 6, Part II stipulates that an airplane operated in international airspace be provided with navigation equipment which will enable it to proceed in accordance with the flight plan and with the requirements of air traffic services. Annex 2 further requires that an aircraft shall adhere to the “current flight plan unless a request for a change has been made and clearance obtained from the appropriate air traffic control facility.” Annex 2 also requires that “unless otherwise authorized or directed by the appropriate air traffic control unit, controlled flights shall, insofar as practicable: (a) when on an established ATS route, operate along the centerline of that route; or (b) when on another route, operate directly between the navigation facilities and/or points defining that route.” In the event that a controlled flight inadvertently deviates from its current flight plan, the following action shall be taken: a. Deviation from track: if the aircraft is off track, action shall be taken forthwith to adjust the heading of the aircraft to regain track as soon as practicable. b. Variation in true airspeed: if the average true airspeed at cruising level between reporting points varies or is expected to vary by plus or minus 5 percent of the true airspeed, from that given in the flight plan, the appropriate air traffic services unit shall be so informed. c. Change in time estimate: if the time estimate for the next applicable report point, flight information region boundary or destination aerodrome, whichever comes first, is found to be in error in excess of three minutes from that notified to air traffic services, or such other period of time as is prescribed by the appropriate ATS authority or on the basis of air navigation regional agreements, a revised estimated time shall be notified as soon as possible to the appropriate air traffic services unit. ICAO, Annex 6, Part II contains standards and recommended practices adopted as the minimum standards for all airplanes engaged in general aviation international air navigation. It requires that those airplanes operated in accordance with Instrument Flight Rules (IFRs), at night, or on a VFR controlled flight have installed and approved radio communication equipment capable of conducting two-way communication at any time during the flight with such aeronautical stations and on such frequencies as may be prescribed by the appropriate authority. All of the aforementioned requirements contained in Annex 2 are incorporated in Section 91.1 of the FARs for those aircraft operating under United States civil certification in international oceanic airspace. USE OF VERY HIGH FREQUENCY (VHF) AND HIGH FREQUENCY (HF) FOR COMMUNICATION Due to the inherent line of sight limitations of VHF radio equipment when used for communications in international oceanic airspace, those aircraft operating on an IFR or controlled VFR flight plan beyond the communications capability of VHF are required , as per ICAO, Annex 2, to maintain a continuous listening watch and communications capability on the assigned HF frequencies . Although these frequencies will be designated by Air Traffic Control, actual communication will be with general purpose communication facilities such as international flight service stations or Aeronautical Radio, Inc. (ARINC). These facilities are responsible for the relay of position reports and other pertinent information between the aircraft and Air Traffic Control. SPECIAL NORTH ATLANTIC, CARIBBEAN AND PACIFIC AREA COMMUNICATIONS VHF air-to-air frequencies enable aircraft engaged on flights over remote and oceanic areas out of range of VHF ground stations to exchange necessary operational information and to facilitate the resolution of operational problems. Air-to-air frequencies are charted on appropriate Jeppesen Enroute charts. GUARD OF VHF EMERGENCY FREQUENCY Pilots should remember that there is a need to continuously guard the VHF emergency frequency 121.5 MHz when on long over-water flights, except when communications on other VHF channels, equipment limitations, or cockpit duties prevent simultaneous guarding of two channels. Guarding of 121.5 MHz is particularly critical when operating in proximity to flight information region (FIR) boundaries. USE OF NON-DIRECTIONAL BEACON (NDB) FOR NAVIGATION The use of an NDB as the primary source of navigation for long-range oceanic flight presents the operator with numerous limitations and restrictions that are inherent in low frequency radio equipment and the low frequency signals they receive. These include: 228 ENROUTE DATA - GENERAL OCEANIC LONG-RANGE NAVIGATION INFORMATION NDB navigation aids of the highest power (2000 or more watts) which are maintained and flight-checked as suitable for air navigation, but are limited in their usable service and/or reception range to no more than 75 nautical miles from the facility, at any altitude . Although the operator may be able to receive standard (AM/amplitude modulation) broadcast stations with NDB equipment, primary dependence on these facilities for air navigation is a questionable operating practice. The following are some of the inherent problems associated with reception of these stations: a. Infrequent identification of the station. b. Identification of foreign language stations may be impossible without some knowledge of the language. c. Transmitter sites are not always collocated with studio facilities. d. Termination of service without notice. e. Weather systems causing erratic and unreliable reception of signal. f. Atmospheric disturbances causing erratic and unreliable reception of signal. g. No flight checks conducted to verify the suitability and reliability of the facility and its signal for use in air navigation. h. Fluctuation (bending) of signal due to shoreline/mountain effect. i. Standard broadcast stations are not dedicated for air navigation purposes. Considering the aforementioned limitations, the operator should be able to navigate the aircraft so as to maintain the track/course and the tolerances specified in the Air Traffic Control Clearance (as per ICAO, Annex 2 and the Regional Supplementary Procedures Document 7030). Realizing that an error of 10 degrees, at a distance of 2000 miles, equates to approximately 350 miles of course deviation, the inadequacies of the non-directional beacon as the sole source of navigation for oceanic flight must be evaluated carefully. SPECIAL EMERGENCY (AIR PIRACY) a. A special emergency is a condition of air piracy, or other hostile act by a person(s) aboard an aircraft, which threatens the safety of the aircraft or its passengers. b. The pilot of an aircraft reporting a special emergency condition should: 1. If circumstances permit applydistress or urgency radio-telephony procedures. Include the details of the special emergency. 2. If circumstances do not permit the use of prescribed distress or urgency procedures, transmit: (a) On the air/ground frequency in use at the time. (b) As many as possible of the following elements spoken distinctly and in the following order: (1) Name of the station addressed (time and circumstances permitting). (2) The identification of the aircraft and present position. (3) The nature of the special emergency condition and pilot intentions (circumstances permitting). (4) If unable to provide this information, use code words and/or transponder as follows: state “TRANSPONDER SEVEN FIVE ZERO ZERO.” Meaning: “I am being hijacked/forced to a new destination;” and/or use Transponder Setting MODE 3/A, Code 7500. NOTE: Code 7500 will never be assigned by ATC without prior notification from the pilot that his aircraft is being subjected to unlawful interference. The pilot should refuse the assignment of Code 7500 in any other situation and inform the controller accordingly. Code 7500 will trigger the special emergency indicator in all radar ATC facilities. c. Air traffic controllers will acknowledge and confirm receipt of transponder Code 7500 by asking the pilot to verify it. If the aircraft is not being subjected to unlawful interference, the pilot should respond to the query by broadcasting in the clear that he is not being subjected to unlawful interference. Upon receipt of this information, the controller will request the pilot to verify the code selection depicted in the code selector windows in the transponder control panel and change the code to the appropriate setting. If the pilot replies in the affirmative or does not reply, the controller will not ask further questions but will flight follow, respond to pilot requests and notify appropriate authorities. d. If it is possible to do so without jeopardizing the safety of the flight, the pilot of a hijacked passenger aircraft, after departing from the cleared routing over which the aircraft was operating, will attempt to do one or more of the following things, insofar as circumstances may permit: 1. Maintain a true airspeed of no more than 400 knots, and preferably an altitude of between 10,000 and 25,000 feet. 2. Fly a course toward the destination which the hijacker has announced. e. If these procedures result in either radio contact or air intercept, the pilot will attempt to comply with any instructions received which may direct him to an appropriate landing field. ENROUTE DATA - GENERAL DESIGNATORS OF ATS ROUTES AND ITS USE IN VOICE COMMUNICATIONS 229 Designators of ATS Routes and Its Use in Voice Communications According to ICAO Annex 11 basic designators for ATS routes shall consist of a maximum of five, in no case exceed six, alpha/numeric characters in order to be usable by both ground and airborne automation systems. The designator shall indicate the type of the route, that means: high/low altitude, specific airborne navigation equipment requirements (RNAV), aircraft type using the route primarily or exclusively. COMPOSITION OF DESIGNATORS a. The basic designator consists of one letter of the alphabet followed by a number from 1 to 999. The letters may be: 1. A, B, G, R — 2. L, M, N, P — 3. H, J, V, W — 4. Q, T, Y, Z — for routes which form part of the regional networks of ATS routes and are not area navigation routes; for area navigation routes which form part of the regional networks of ATS routes; for routes which do not form part of the regional networks of ATS routes and are not area navigation routes; for area navigation routes which do not form part of the regional networks of ATS routes. b. Where applicable, one supplementary letter shall be added as a prefix to the basic designator as follows: 1. 2. K U — — 3. S — to indicate a low level route established for use primarily by helicopters; to indicate that the route or portion thereof is established in the upper airspace; to indicate a route established exclusively for use by supersonic aircraft during acceleration/deceleration and while in supersonic flight. c. Where applicable, a supplementary letter may be added after the basic designator of the ATS route as a suffix as follows: 1. F — 2. G — 3. Y — 4. Z — to indicate that on the route or portion thereof advisory service only is provided; to indicate that on the route or portion thereof flight information service only is provided; for RNP1 routes at and above FL200 to indicate that all turns on the route between 30 and 90 degrees shall be made within the tolerance of a tangential arc between the straight leg segments defined with a radius of 22.5 NM; for RNP1 routes at and below FL190 to indicate that all turns on the route between 30 and 90 degrees shall be made within the tolerance of a tangential arc between the straight leg segments defined with a radius of 15 NM. USE OF DESIGNATORS IN COMMUNICATIONS In voice communications, the basic letter of a designator should be spoken in accordance with the ICAO spelling alphabet. Where the prefixes K, U or S, specified above, are used in voice communications, they should be pronounced as: K = “Kopter” U = “Upper” and S = “Supersonic” as in the English language. Where suffixes “F”, “G”, “Y” or “Z” specified above are used, the flight crew should not be required to use them in voice communications. Example: A11 UR5 KB34 UW456 F will will will will be be be be spoken Alfa 11 spoken Upper Romeo 5 spoken Kopter Bravo 34 spoken Upper Whiskey 456 230 ENROUTE DATA - GENERAL COMPANY OPERATIONAL CONTROL Company Operational Control HF SSB FACILITIES a. ARINC has established HF SSB Long Distance Operational Control Facilities at New York and San Francisco Communication Centers, and remote facilities in Barrow, Alaska, Santa Cruz, Bolivia, Guam and Hat Yai, Thailand. NOTE: ARINC is a paid service. Aircraft operators desiring to make use of these facilities should make prior arrangements with ARINC for the handling of their traffic. b. The purpose of this service is to provide direct voice communications between flight crews and their company control offices via HF SSB communications using “Phone Patch” techniques primarily in the international environment. Aircraft may use the frequencies listed below from any location where VHF coverage is unavailable. The only limiting factor being the actual propagation of the radio signals, which may vary depending upon the frequency, time of day, latitude, local atmospheric noise level and sun spot activity. c. These facilities may be used for “flight regularity” messages. “Flight regularity” messages include those messages that require immediate action on the part of flight crews, aircraft operators, or agencies acting for aircraft operators for the efficient and expeditious utilization of aircraft to avoid serious delays or travel interruptions to passengers and/or cargo, or to avoid situations that could cause the aircraft operator to suffer significant economic penalties. Communications concerning air traffic control and meteorological data for international flights are considered “Flight Safety” messages and are usually handled on the ICAO Major World Air Route Area High Frequency and VHF Enroute Radio Telephone Networks or VHF ATS facilities. d. These operational control communications are available 24 hours per day; generally, the higher frequencies will be used during daylight hours and the lower frequencies during the hours of darkness: HF SSB LDOCF FREQUENCIES GUARDED (kHz) 3494 6640 8933 11342 13348 17925 21964 ARINC STATION LOCATION & CALL SIGN NEW YORK SAN FRANCISCO SANTA CRUZ, BOLIVIA (Remote) PACIFICGUAM (Remote) BARROW, AK (Remote) HAT YAI, THAILAND (Remote) X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X Worldwide Operational Control. (Phone patch service available.) X X X X X X NOTE: ARINC stations transmitting SELCAL signals on these frequencies will utilize SSB full carrier mode. e. The ARINC facilities are equipped to provide through “Phone Patch” direct voice communications between flight crews and operational control offices or the ground radio operator may also accept messages from the aircraft for relay via normal air-ground delivery channels and vice versa. f. Aircraft operators with SATCOM Voice can contact ARINC Aeronautical Stations using the following direct dial telephone numbers: ARINC Center SFO NYC Direct Dial 925-371-3920 631-244-2492 Inmarsat Security Code 436625 436623 RADIOTELEPHONY PROCEDURES a. The air/ground/air radio channel is “one-way” (send or receive) only; break-ins and interruptions are not possible. In the normal “at rest” condition, the ground talker receives the aircraft transmission. When the ground talker speaks, a voice-operated relay switches the radio channel from receive to send and the aircraft receives his transmission. If the ground talker and the aircraft transmit simultaneously, neither will receive the other. Thus each should indicate the end of his transmission with the words “over” or “go ahead.” The ground talker should precede each transmission with an “err” or “uhh” to allow the voice-operated relay time to complete its switching function. If a malfunction of the voice-operated relay should occur during a connection, the ARINC Radio Operator will manually switch the channel between send and receive and the conversation can proceed in exactly the same manner. b. Flight crews placing a call to their operational control office will call on one of the listed frequencies. The following is an example of the typical voice procedure used in a “Phone Patch” request from an aircraft: ENROUTE DATA - GENERAL COMPANY OPERATIONAL CONTROL Aircraft: Aero Sta: Aircraft: Aero Sta: Aircraft: 231 “New York, Trans Jet 468.” “Trans Jet 468, New York, go ahead.” “Trans Jet 468 requests ‘Phone Patch’ with Trans Jet Ops Office at Kennedy.” “Roger Trans Jet 468. Standby for a ‘Phone Patch’. New York.” “Trans Jet 468, standing by.” c. The ARINC radio operator will then set up the “Phone Patch” as explained above and the voice procedure will continue as follows: Aero Sta: Aircraft: Ops Office: Aircraft: Aircraft: Aero Sta: “Trans Jet 468, ‘Phone Patch’ to Trans Jet Ops is ready. Go ahead with your message. New York.” “Trans Jet Ops, this is Trans Jet 468, we are at 40 West. We are having trouble with the number 4 compressor. We have performed corrective procedures listed in the manual but we still have abnormal readings. Do you want us to proceed to Philadelphia or should we divert to Kennedy for maintenance? Go ahead.” “Trans Jet 468, divert to Kennedy. Philadelphia maintenance not equipped to handle compressors. We will alert Kennedy maintenance. Plan to continue to Philadelphia after compressor repaired. Trans Jet Ops. Over.” “Roger, divert to Kennedy. Trans Jet 468.” “New York, Trans Jet 468 ‘Phone Patch’ completed.” “Trans Jet 468, Roger, New York.” The ARINC radio operator will then disconnect the “Phone Patch.” d. Flight crews operating in the European, North Atlantic, South American, Caribbean, and Pacific Areas will be expected to continue to pass their routine air-ground messages on the ICAO Major World Air Route Area (MWARA) Enroute Radiotelephone HF or VHF Networks while operating on international routes. Therefore, aircraft operating on international routes in the areas of the world mentioned above will be expected to maintain a listening watch or SELCAL guard on the appropriate ICAO/MWARA frequencies. e. Aircraft equipped with dual HF transceivers may wish to maintain watch on both ICAO/MWARA and ARINC HF SSB Long Distance Operational Control Facility frequencies. Aircraft equipped with only one HF transceiver, and beyond the range of VHF communications, will be expected to maintain watch on ICAO/MWARA frequencies and to switch to ARINC HF SSB Long Distance Operational Control Facility frequencies only after coordination with the ICAO aeronautical station providing radio guard for the FIR/CTA in which the aircraft is operating. FLIGHT SUPPLEMENT BOOKLET Radio Aids Radio Data - General 234 RADIO DATA - GENERAL General Information The general information contained on the following pages is provided for use as ‘quick reference’. It has been compiled from a variety of sources. Additional information can be found elsewhere in the Radio Aids section. FREQUENCY BANDS Radio frequencies lie within a relatively narrow range of the electro-magnetic spectrum between approximately 10 kHz and 300 GHz. This range is divided into bands, more or less in accordance with the propagation characteristics of the frequencies. These bands are: VLF LF MF HF VHF UHF Very Low Frequency Low Frequency Medium Frequency High Frequency Very High Frequency Ultra High Frequency SHF EHF Super High Frequency Extremely High Frequency 0 - 30 kHz 30 kHz - 300 kHz 300 kHz - 3 MHz 3 MHz - 30 MHz 30 MHz - 300 MHz* 300 MHz - 3 GHz* 3 GHz - 30 GHz 30 GHz - 300 GHz *200 MHz - 3 GHz is considered UHF in Aviation. All VHF markers (FAN TYPE, OUTER, INNER and ZONE) operate on 75 MHz (75,000 KHz), and are tone modulated as follows: FM 3000 Hz Fan Marker (100 Watts) LFM Low-Powered Fan Marker (5 Watts) 3000 Hz MM Middle Marker 1300 Hz 400 Hz OM Outer Marker Z 3000 Hz Station Location Marker FREQUENCY ALLOCATION Frequency allocation is established to provide a clear channeling between the various functions performed by aeronautical navaids and communications facilities. Although a general allocation plan is recognized on a worldwide basis, variations may occur within certain ranges. The listing below is intended to provide that allocation most generally used by civil operators. NAVIGATION AIDS 190 - 535 kHz 190 - 1750 kHz Non-directional Beacon (standard). 108.0 - 117.975 MHz 108.0 - 111.975 MHz 108.0 - 111.975 MHz 111.975 - 117.975 MHz 328.6 - 335.4 MHz 960.0 - 1215.0 MHz 1563.42 - 1587.42 MHz Nondirectional Radio Beacon (low power) and Radio Range (low power). Non-directional Beacon (standard). Marker Beacon. VOR test facility (VOT). ILS localizer (on odd-tenths plus twentieth frequencies, 108.1, 108.3 etc.) VOR (even tenths or even tenths plus a twentieth of MHz). VOR (even and odd tenths of MHz). ILS glide slope. DME and TACAN. GPS RADIO DATA - GENERAL 235 AIRBORNE STATIONS 410 kHz 475 kHz International DF (outside continental USA). Working frequency exclusively for aircraft on sea flights desiring an intermediate frequency. International frequency for aircraft and ships over the seas. Transmission on this frequency (except for urgent and safety messages and signals) must cease twice each hour, for three minute periods beginning at 15 and 45 minutes past each hour. Lighter-than-aircraft. 500 kHz 3281 kHz 117.975 - 137.0 MHz AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL OPERATIONS The minimum separation between assignable frequencies in the aeronautical mobile (R) service shall be 8.33 kHz. It is recognized that in some regions or areas, 100 kHz, 50 kHz or 25 kHz channel spacing provides an adequate number of frequencies suitably related to international and national air services and that equipment designed specifically for 100 kHz, 50 kHz or 25 kHz channel spacing will remain adequate for services operating within such regions or areas. It is further recognized that assignments based on 25 kHz channel spacing as well as 8.33 kHz channel spacing may continue to co-exist within one region or area. 118 - 121.4 MHz inclusive 121.5 MHz 121.6 - 121.9917 MHz inclusive International and National Aeronautical Mobile Services 121.5 MHz International and National Aerodrome Surface Communications National Aeronautical Mobile Services Auxiliary frequency SAR National Aeronautical Mobile Services with the exception of 123.45 MHz. Worldwide air-to-air communications International and National Aeronautical Mobile Services National Aeronautical Mobile Services International and National Aeronautical Mobile Services International and National Aeronautical Mobile Services Reserved for VHF air-ground data link communications. 122 - 123.05 MHz inclusive 123.1 MHz 123.15 - 123.6917 MHz inclusive 123.45 MHz 123.7 - 129.6917 MHz inclusive 129.7 - 130.8917 MHz 130.9 - 136.875 MHz inclusive 136.9 - 136.975 MHz inclusive EFFECTIVE RANGE OF RADIO TRANSMISSION The range of VHF transmissions is normally about 7% more than an actual line of sight, and can be determined by the formula: 1143832334000 Where: D h K = = = = = distance in nautical miles; height of the aircraft station above earth; (corresponding to an effective earth’s radius of 4/3 of the actual radius); 2.22 when h is expressed in metres; and 1.23 when h is expressed in feet. Listed below is the appropriate range for VHF transmissions over flat terrain: AIRCRAFT ALTITUDE 500 ft 1000 ft 1500 ft 2000 ft 3000 ft 5000 ft RANGE (NM) 28 NM 39 NM 48 NM 55 NM 69 NM 87 NM AIRCRAFT ALTITUDE 10,000 ft 15,000 ft 20,000 ft 30,000 ft 40,000 ft RANGE (NM) 122 NM 152 NM 174 NM 213 NM 246 NM 236 RADIO DATA - GENERAL TYPES OF SIGNAL EMISSIONS Designation New Old A0 NON A1A A1 A2A A2 A3A R3E H3E J3E – B7E A3 A3A A3H A3J A3B – B8E – A4 A4 R3C J3C R7B B9W A4A – A7A A9B Type of Transmissions Characteristics Supplementary – – Telegraphy without the use of a modulating audio frequency (by on-off keying). – Telegraphy by the on-off keying of an amplitude-modulating audio frequency or audio frequencies, or by the on-off keying of the modulated emission (special case; an unkeyed emission amplitude modulated). Telephony. Double Sideband. Single sideband, reduced carrier. Single sideband, full carrier. Single sideband, suppressed carrier. Two independent sidebands. Two independent sidebands containing quantized or digital information. Two independent sidebands containing analogueinformation. Facsimile (by a frequency modulated sub-carrier). Single sideband, reduced carrier. Single sideband, suppressed carrier. Multichannel voice-frequency telegraphy. Single sideband, reduced carrier. Two independent sidebands. Cases not covered by the above, e.g., a combination of telephony and telegraphy. With no modulation. RADIO DATA - GENERAL SECTION 1. AIR NAVIGATION AIDS 237 SECTION 1. NAVIGATION AIDS Information about Radio Aids published in this section is extracted from the United States Federal Aviation Administration’s (FAA) Aeronautical Information Manual (AIM). It is provided for reference use only. The information is generally applicable around the world. Regional variations may exist. Within the section itself, additional references may be made to U.S. Federal Aviation Regulations (FARs). Relevant FARs can be obtained separately from Jeppesen, or they are available directly from the U.S. FAA by mail or via the internet. 1-1-1 GENERAL a. Various types of air navigation aids are in use today, each serving a special purpose. These aids have varied owners and operators, namely: the Federal Aviation Administration (FAA), the military services, private organizations, individual states and foreign governments. The FAA has the statutory authority to establish, operate, maintain air navigation facilities and to prescribe standards for the operation of any of these aids which are used for instrument flight in federally controlled airspace. These aids are tabulated in the Airport/ Facility Directory (A/FD). b. Pilots should be aware of the possibility of momentary erroneous indications on cockpit displays when the primary signal generator for a ground-based navigational transmitter (for example, a glideslope, VOR, or nondirectional beacon) is inoperative. Pilots should disregard any navigation indication, regardless of its apparent validity, if the particular transmitter was identified by NOTAM or otherwise as unusable or inoperative. 1-1-2 NONDIRECTIONAL RADIO BEACON (NDB) a. A low or medium frequency radio beacon transmits nondirectional signals whereby the pilot of an aircraft properly equipped can determine bearings and “home” on the station. These facilities normally operate in a frequency band of 190 to 535 kilohertz (kHz), according to ICAO Annex 10 the frequency range for NDBs is between 190 and 1750 kHz, and transmit a continuous carrier with either 400 or 1020 hertz (Hz) modulation. All radio beacons except the compass locators transmit a continuous three-letter identification in code except during voice transmissions. b. When a radio beacon is used in conjunction with the Instrument Landing System markers, it is called a Compass Locator. c. Voice transmissions are made on radio beacons unless the letter “W” (without voice) is included in the class designator (HW). d. Radio beacons are subject to disturbances that may result in erroneous bearing information. Such disturbances result from such factors as lightning, precipitation static, etc. At night, radio beacons are vulnerable to interference from distant stations. Nearly all disturbances which affect the Automatic Direction Finder (ADF) bearing also affect the facility’s identification. Noisy identification usually occurs when the ADF needle is erratic. Voice, music or erroneous identification may be heard when a steady false bearing is being displayed. Since ADF receivers do not have a “flag” to warn the pilot when erroneous bearing information is being displayed, the pilot should continuously monitor the NDB’s identification. 1-1-3 VHF OMNI-DIRECTIONAL RANGE (VOR) a. VORs operate within the 108.0 to 117.95 MHz frequency band and have a power output necessary to provide coverage within their assigned operational service volume. They are subject to line-of-sight restrictions, and the range varies proportionally to the altitude of the receiving equipment. NOTE: Normal service ranges for the various classes of VORs are given in Navigational Aid (NAVAID) Service Volumes, paragraph 1-1-8. b. Most VORs are equipped for voice transmission on the VOR frequency. VORs without voice capability are indicated by the letter “W” (without voice) included in the class designator (VORW). c. The only positive method of identifying a VOR is by its Morse Code identification or by the recorded automatic voice identification which is always indicated by use of the word “VOR” following the range’s name. Reliance on determining the identification of an omnirange should never be placed on listening to voice transmissions by the Flight Service Station (FSS) (or approach control facility) involved. Many FSSs remotely operate several omniranges with different names. In some cases, none of the VORs have the name of the “parent” FSS. During periods of maintenance, the facility may radiate a T-E-S-T code (– • ••• –) or the code may be removed. d. Voice identification has been added to numerous VORs. The transmission consists of a voice announcement, “AIRVILLE VOR” alternating with the usual Morse Code identification. e. The effectiveness of the VOR depends upon proper use and adjustment of both ground and airborne equipment. 1. Accuracy. The accuracy of course alignment of the VOR is excellent, being generally plus or minus 1 degree. 2. Roughness. On some VORs, minor course roughness may be observed, evidenced by course needle or brief flag alarm activity (some receivers are more susceptible to these irregularities than others). At a few stations, usually in mountainous terrain, the pilot may occasionally observe a brief course 238 RADIO DATA - GENERAL SECTION 1. AIR NAVIGATION AIDS needle oscillation, similar to the indication of “approaching station.” Pilots flying over unfamiliar routes are cautioned to be on the alert for these vagaries, and in particular, to use the “to/from” indicator to determine positive station passage. (a) Certain propeller revolutions per minute (RPM) settings or helicopter rotor speeds can cause the VOR Course Deviation Indicator to fluctuate as much as plus or minus six degrees. Slight changes to the RPM setting will normally smooth out this roughness. Pilots are urged to check for this modulation phenomenon prior to reporting a VOR station or aircraft equipment for unsatisfactory operation. 1-1-4 VOR RECEIVER CHECK a. The FAA VOR test facility (VOT) transmits a test signal which provides users a convenient means to determine the operational status and accuracy of a VOR receiver while on the ground where a VOT is located. The airborne use of VOT is permitted; however, its use is strictly limited to those areas/altitudes specifically authorized in the A/FD or appropriate supplement. b. To use the VOT service, tune in the VOT frequency on your VOR receiver. With the Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) centered, the omni-bearing selector should read 0 degrees with the to/from indication showing “from” or the omni-bearing selector should read 180 degrees with the to/from indication showing “to.” Should the VOR receiver operate an RMI (Radio Magnetic Indicator), it will indicate 180 degrees on any omni-bearing selector (OBS) setting. Two means of identification are used. One is a series of dots and the other is a continuous tone. Information concerning an individual test signal can be obtained from the local FSS. c. Periodic VOR receiver calibration is most important. If a receiver’s Automatic Gain Control or modulation circuit deteriorates, it is possible for it to display acceptable accuracy and sensitivity close into the VOR or VOT and display out-of-tolerance readings when located at greater distances where weaker signal areas exist. The likelihood of this deterioration varies between receivers, and is generally considered a function of time. The best assurance of having an accurate receiver is periodic calibration. Yearly intervals are recommended at which time an authorized repair facility should recalibrate the receiver to the manufacturer’s specifications. d. Federal Aviation Regulations (14 CFR Section 91.171) provides for certain VOR equipment accuracy checks prior to flight under instrument flight rules. To comply with this requirement and to ensure satisfactory operation of the airborne system, the FAA has provided pilots with the following means of checking VOR receiver accuracy: 1. VOT or a radiated test signal from an appropriately rated radio repair station. 2. Certified airborne check points. 3. Certified check points on the airport surface. e. A radiated VOT from an appropriately rated radio repair station serves the same purpose as an FAA VOR signal and the check is made in much the same manner as a VOT with the following differences: 1. The frequency normally approved by the Federal Communications Commission is 108.0 MHz. 2. Repair stations are not permitted to radiate the VOR test signal continuously; consequently, the owner or operator must make arrangements with the repair station to have the test signal transmitted. This service is not provided by all radio repair stations. The aircraft owner or operator must determine which repair station in the local area provides this service. A representative of the repair station must make an entry into the aircraft logbook or other permanent record certifying to the radial accuracy and the date of transmission. The owner, operator or representative of the repair station may accomplish the necessary checks in the aircraft and make a logbook entry stating the results. It is necessary to verify which test radial is being transmitted and whether you should get a “to” or “from” indication. f. Airborne and ground check points consist of certified radials that should be received at specific points on the airport surface or over specific landmarks while airborne in the immediate vicinity of the airport. 1. Should an error in excess of plus or minus 4 degrees be indicated through use of a ground check, or plus or minus 6 degrees using the airborne check, Instrument Flight Rules (IFR) flight shall not be attempted without first correcting the source of the error. CAUTION: No correction other than the correction card figures supplied by the manufacturer should be applied in making these VOR receiver checks. 2. Locations of airborne check points, ground check points and VOTs are published in the A/FD. 3. If a dual system VOR (units independent of each other except for the antenna) is installed in the aircraft, one system may be checked against the other. Turn both systems to the same VOR ground facility and note the indicated bearing to that station. The maximum permissible variations between the two indicated bearings is 4 degrees. 1-1-5 TACTICAL AIR NAVIGATION (TACAN) a. For reasons peculiar to military or naval operations (unusual siting conditions, the pitching and rolling of a naval vessel, etc.) the civil VOR/Distance Measuring Equipment (DME) system of air navigation was considered unsuitable for military or naval use. A new navigational system, TACAN, was therefore developed by the military and naval forces to more readily lend itself to military and naval requirements. As a result, RADIO DATA - GENERAL SECTION 1. AIR NAVIGATION AIDS 239 the FAA has integrated TACAN facilities with the civil VOR/DME program. Although the theoretical, or technical principles of operation of TACAN equipment are quite different from those of VOR/DME facilities, the end result, as far as the navigating pilot is concerned, is the same. These integrated facilities are called VORTACs. b. TACAN ground equipment consists of either a fixed or mobile transmitting unit. The airborne unit in conjunction with the ground unit reduces the transmitted signal to a visual presentation of both azimuth and distance information. TACAN is a pulse system and operates in the Ultrahigh Frequency (UHF) band of frequencies. Its use requires TACAN airborne equipment and does not operate through conventional VOR equipment. 1-1-6 VHF OMNI-DIRECTIONAL RANGE/TACTICAL AIR NAVIGATION (VORTAC) a. A VORTAC is a facility consisting of two components, VOR and TACAN, which provides three individual services: VOR azimuth, TACAN azimuth and TACAN distance (DME) at one site. Although consisting of more than one component, incorporating more than one operating frequency, and using more than one antenna system, a VORTAC is considered to be a unified navigational aid. Both components of a VORTAC are envisioned as operating simultaneously and providing the three services at all times. b. Transmitted signals of VOR and TACAN are each identified by three-letter code transmission and are interlocked so that pilots using VOR azimuth with TACAN distance can be assured that both signals being received are definitely from the same ground station. The frequency channels of the VOR and the TACAN at each VORTAC facility are “paired” in accordance with a national plan to simplify airborne operation. 1-1-7 DISTANCE MEASURING EQUIPMENT (DME) a. In the operation of DME, paired pulses at a specific spacing are sent out from the aircraft (this is the interrogation) and are received at the ground station. The ground station (transponder) then transmits paired pulses back to the aircraft at the same pulse spacing but on a different frequency. The time required for the round trip of this signal exchange is measured in the airborne DME unit and is translated into distance (nautical miles) from the aircraft to the ground station. b. Operating on the line-of-sight principle, DME furnishes distance information with a very high degree of accuracy. Reliable signals may be received at distances up to 199 NM at line-of-sight altitude with an accuracy of better than 1 /2 mile or 3 percent of the distance, whichever is greater. Distance information received from DME equipment is SLANT RANGE distance and not actual horizontal distance. c. Operating frequency range of a DME according to ICAO Annex 10 is from 960 MHz to 1215 MHz. Aircraft equipped with TACAN equipment will receive distance information from a VORTAC automatically, while aircraft equipped with VOR must have a separate DME airborne unit. d. VOR/DME, VORTAC, Instrument Landing System (ILS)/DME, and localizer (LOC)/DME navigation facilities established by the FAA provide course and distance information from collocated components under a frequency pairing plan. Aircraft receiving equipment which provides for automatic DME selection assures reception of azimuth and distance information from a common source when designated VOR/DME, VORTAC, ILS/DME, and LOC/DME are selected. e. Due to the limited number of available frequencies, assignment of paired frequencies is required for certain military noncollocated VOR and TACAN facilities which serve the same area but which may be separated by distances up to a few miles. f. VOR/DME, VORTAC, ILS/DME, and LOC/DME facilities are identified by synchronized identifications which are transmitted on a time share basis. The VOR or localizer portion of the facility is identified by a coded tone modulated at 1020 Hz or a combination of code and voice. The TACAN or DME is identified by a coded tone modulated at 1350 Hz. The DME or TACAN coded identification is transmitted one time for each three or four times that the VOR or localizer coded identification is transmitted. When either the VOR or the DME is inoperative, it is important to recognize which identifier is retained for the operative facility. A single coded identification with a repetition interval of approximately 30 seconds indicates that the DME is operative. g. Aircraft equipment which provides for automatic DME selection assures reception of azimuth and distance information from a common source when designated VOR/DME, VORTAC and ILS/DME navigation facilities are selected. Pilots are cautioned to disregard any distance displays from automatically selected DME equipment when VOR or ILS facilities, which do not have the DME feature installed, are being used for position determination. 1-1-8 NAVIGATIONAL AID (NAVAID) SERVICE VOLUMES a. Most air navigation radio aids which provide positive course guidance have a designated standard service volume (SSV). The SSV defines the reception limits of unrestricted NAVAIDs which are usable for random/ unpublished route navigation. b. A NAVAID will be classified as restricted if it does not conform to flight inspection signal strength and course quality standards throughout the published SSV. However, the NAVAID should not be considered usable at altitudes below that which could be flown while operating under random route IFR conditions (14 CFR 240 RADIO DATA - GENERAL SECTION 1. AIR NAVIGATION AIDS Section 91.177), even though these altitudes may lie within the designated SSV. Service volume restrictions are first published in Notices to Airmen (NOTAMs) and then with the alphabetical listing of the NAVAIDs in the A/FD. c. Standard Service Volume limitations do not apply to published IFR routes or procedures. d. VOR/DME/TACAN Standard Service Volumes (SSV). 1. Standard service volumes (SSVs) are graphically shown in FIG 1-1-1, FIG 1-1-2, FIG 1-1-3, FIG 1-1-4, and FIG 1-1-5. The SSV of a station is indicated by using the class designator as a prefix to the station type designation. EXAMPLE: TVOR, LDME, and HVORTAC. FIGURE 1-1-1 Standard High Altitude Service Volume (See FIG 1-1-5 for altitudes below 1,000 feet). 1234995548000 FIGURE 1-1-2 Standard Low Altitude Service Volume (See FIG 1-1-5 for altitudes below 1,000 feet). 1234995548000 RADIO DATA - GENERAL SECTION 1. AIR NAVIGATION AIDS 241 FIGURE 1-1-3 Standard Terminal Service Volume (See FIG 1-1-4 for altitudes below 1,000 feet). 1234995548000 2. Within 25 NM, the bottom of the T service volume is defined by the curve in FIG 1-1-4. Within 40 NM, the bottoms of the L and H service volumes are defined by the curve in FIG 1-1-5. (See TBL 1-1-1.) TABLE 1-1-1 VOR/DME/TACAN Standard Service Volumes SSV Class Designator T (Terminal) L (Low Altitude) H (High Altitude) Altitude and Range Boundaries From 1,000 feet above ground level (AGL) up to and including 12,000 feet AGL at radial distances out to 25 NM. From 1,000 feet AGL up to and including 18,000 feet AGL at radial distances out to 40 NM. From 1,000 feet AGL up to and including 14,500 feet AGL at radial distances out to 40 NM. From 14,500 AGL up to and including 60,000 feet at radial distances out to 100 NM. From 18,000 feet AGL up to and including 45,000 feet AGL at radial distances out to 130 NM. e. Nondirectional Radio Beacon (NDB) 1. NDBs are classified according to their intended use. 2. The ranges of NDB service volumes are shown in TBL 1-1-2. The distances (radius) are the same at all altitudes. TABLE 1 -1-2 NDB Service Volumes Class Distance (Radius) 15 NM Compass Locator MH 25 NM H 50 NM* HH 75 NM * Service ranges of individual facilities may be less than 50 nautical miles (NM). Restrictions to service volumes are first published as a Notice to Airmen and then with the alphabetical listing of the NAVAID in the A/FD. 242 RADIO DATA - GENERAL SECTION 1. AIR NAVIGATION AIDS FIGURE 1-1-4 Service Volume Lower Edge Terminal 1 234995548000 FIGURE 1-1-5 Service Volume Lower Edge Standard High and Low 1 234995548000 1-1-9 INSTRUMENT LANDING SYSTEM (ILS) a. General 1. The ILS is designed to provide an approach path for exact alignment and descent of an aircraft on final approach to a runway. 2. The ground equipment consists of two highly directional transmitting systems and, along the approach, three (or fewer) marker beacons. The directional transmitters are known as the localizer and glide slope transmitters. 3. The system may be divided functionally into three parts: (a) Guidance information: localizer, glide slope; (b) Range information: marker beacon, DME; and (c) Visual information: approach lights, touchdown and centerline lights, runway lights. 4. Precision radar, or compass locators located at the Outer Marker (OM) or Middle Marker (MM), may be substituted for marker beacons. DME, when specified in the procedure, may be substituted for the OM. 5. Where a complete ILS system is installed on each end of a runway; (i.e., the approach end of Runway 4 and the approach end of Runway 22) the ILS systems are not in service simultaneously. b. Localizer 1. The localizer transmitter operates on one of 40 ILS channels within the frequency range of 108.10 to 111.95 MHz. Signals provide the pilot with course guidance to the runway centerline. RADIO DATA - GENERAL SECTION 1. AIR NAVIGATION AIDS 243 2. The approach course of the localizer is called the front course and is used with other functional parts, e.g., glide slope, marker beacons, etc. The localizer signal is transmitted at the far end of the runway. It is adjusted for a course width of (full scale fly-left to a full scale fly-right) of 700 feet at the runway threshold. 3. The course line along the extended centerline of a runway, in the opposite direction to the front course is called the back course. CAUTION: Unless the aircraft’s ILS equipment includes reverse sensing capability, when flying inbound on the back course it is necessary to steer the aircraft in the direction opposite the needle deflection when making corrections from off-course to on-course. This “flying away from the needle” is also required when flying outbound on the front course of the localizer. Do not use back course signals for approach unless a back course approach procedure is published for that particular runway and the approach is authorized by ATC. 4. Identification is in International Morse Code and consists of a three-letter identifier preceded by the letter I (••) transmitted on the localizer frequency. EXAMPLE: I-DIA 5. The localizer provides course guidance throughout the descent path to the runway threshold from a distance of 18 NM from the antenna between an altitude of 1,000 feet above the highest terrain along the course line and 4,500 feet above the elevation of the antenna site. Proper off-course indications are provided throughout the following angular areas of the operational service volume: (a) To 10 degrees either side of the course along a radius of 18 NM from the antenna; and (b) From 10 to 35 degrees either side of the course along a radius of 10 NM. (See FIG 1-1-6.) FIGURE 1-1-6 Limits of Localizer Coverage 1234995548000 6. Unreliable signals may be received outside these areas. c. Localizer Type Directional Aid (LDA) 1. The LDA is of comparable use and accuracy to a localizer but is not part of a complete ILS. The LDA course usually provides a more precise approach course than the similar Simplified Directional Facility (SDF) installation, which may have a course width of 6 or 12 degrees. 2. The LDA is not aligned with the runway. Straight-in minimums may be published where alignment does not exceed 30 degrees between the course and runway. Circling minimums only are published where this alignment exceeds 30 degrees. 3. A very limited number of LDA approaches also incorporate a glideslope. These are annotated in the plan view of the instrument approach chart with a note, “LDA/Glideslope.” These procedures fall under a newly defined category of approaches called Approach with Vertical Guidance (APV) described in paragraph 5-4-5, Instrument Approach Procedure Charts, subparagraph a7(b), Approach with Vertical Guidance (APV). LDA minima for with and without glideslope is provided and annotated on the minima lines of the approach chart as S-LDA/GS and S-LDA. Because the final approach course is not aligned with the runway centerline, additional maneuvering will be required compared to an ILS approach. d. Glide Slope/Glide Path 1. The UHF glide slope transmitter, operating on one of the 40 ILS channels within the frequency range 329.15 MHz, to 335.00 MHz radiates its signals in the direction of the localizer front course. The term “glide path” means that portion of the glide slope that intersects the localizer. 244 RADIO DATA - GENERAL SECTION 1. AIR NAVIGATION AIDS CAUTION: False glide slope signals may exist in the area of the localizer back course approach which can cause the glide slope flag alarm to disappear and present unreliable glide slope information. Disregard all glide slope signal indications when making a localizer back course approach unless a glide slope is specified on the approach and landing chart. 2. The glide slope transmitter is located between 750 feet and 1,250 feet from the approach end of the runway (down the runway) and offset 250 to 650 feet from the runway centerline. It transmits a glide path beam 1.4 degrees wide (vertically). The signal provides descent information for navigation down to the lowest authorized decision height (DH) specified in the approved ILS approach procedure. The glidepath may not be suitable for navigation below the lowest authorized DH and any reference to glidepath indications below that height must be supplemented by visual reference to the runway environment. Glidepaths with no published DH are usable to runway threshold. 3. The glide path projection angle is normally adjusted to 3 degrees above horizontal so that it intersects the MM at about 200 feet and the OM at about 1,400 feet above the runway elevation. The glide slope is normally usable to the distance of 10 NM. However, at some locations, the glide slope has been certified for an extended service volume which exceeds 10 NM. 4. Pilots must be alert when approaching the glidepath interception. False courses and reverse sensing will occur at angles considerably greater than the published path. 5. Make every effort to remain on the indicated glide path. CAUTION: Avoid flying below the glide path to assure obstacle/terrain clearance is maintained. 6. The published glide slope threshold crossing height (TCH) DOES NOT represent the height of the actual glide path on-course indication above the runway threshold. It is used as a reference for planning purposes which represents the height above the runway threshold that an aircraft’s glide slope antenna should be, if that aircraft remains on a trajectory formed by the four-mile-to-middle marker glidepath segment. 7. Pilots must be aware of the vertical height between the aircraft’s glide slope antenna and the main gear in the landing configuration and, at the DH, plan to adjust the descent angle accordingly if the published TCH indicates the wheel crossing height over the runway threshold may not be satisfactory. Tests indicate a comfortable wheel crossing height is approximately 20 to 30 feet, depending on the type of aircraft. NOTE: The TCH for a runway is established based on several factors including the largest aircraft category that normally uses the runway, how airport layout effects the glide slope antenna placement, and terrain. A higher than optimum TCH, with the same glide path angle, may cause the aircraft to touch down further from the threshold if the trajectory of the approach is maintained until the flare. Pilots should consider the effect of a high TCH on the runway available for stopping the aircraft. e. Distance Measuring Equipment (DME) 1. When installed with the ILS and specified in the approach procedure, DME may be used: (a) In lieu of the OM; (b) As a back course (BC) final approach fix (FAF); and (c) To establish other fixes on the localizer course. 2. In some cases, DME from a separate facility may be used within Terminal Instrument Procedures (TERPS) limitations: (a) To provide ARC initial approach segments; (b) As a FAF for BC approaches; and (c) As a substitute for the OM. f. Marker Beacon 1. ILS marker beacons have a rated power output of 3 watts or less and an antenna array designed to produce an elliptical pattern with dimensions, at 1,000 feet above the antenna, of approximately 2,400 feet in width and 4,200 feet in length. Airborne marker beacon receivers with a selective sensitivity feature should always be operated in the “low” sensitivity position for proper reception of ILS marker beacons. 2. Ordinarily, there are two marker beacons associated with an ILS, the OM and MM. Locations with a Category II ILS also have an Inner Marker (IM). When an aircraft passes over a marker, the pilot will receive the indications shown in TBL 1-1-3. (a) The OM normally indicates a position at which an aircraft at the appropriate altitude on the localizer course will intercept the ILS glide path. (b) The MM indicates a position approximately 3,500 feet from the landing threshold. This is also the position where an aircraft on the glide path will be at an altitude of approximately 200 feet above the elevation of the touchdown zone. (c) The IM will indicate a point at which an aircraft is at a designated decision height (DH) on the glide path between the MM and landing threshold. RADIO DATA - GENERAL SECTION 1. AIR NAVIGATION AIDS 245 TABLE 1-1-3 Marker Passage Indications Marker OM MM IM BC Light BLUE AMBER WHITE WHITE Code - - • - • • • • • • • • • 3. A back course marker normally indicates the ILS back course final approach fix where approach descent is commenced. g. Compass Locator 1. Compass locator transmitters are often situated at the MM and OM sites. The transmitters have a power of less than 25 watts, a range of at least 15 miles and operate between 190 and 535 kHz. At some locations, higher powered radio beacons, up to 400 watts, are used as OM compass locators. These generally carry Transcribed Weather Broadcast (TWEB) information. 2. Compass locators transmit two letter identification groups. The outer locator transmits the first two letters of the localizer identification group, and the middle locator transmits the last two letters of the localizer identification group. h. ILS Frequency (See TBL 1-1-4.) TABLE 1-1-4 Frequency Pairs Allocated for ILS Localizer MHz 108.10 108.15 108.3 108.35 108.5 108.55 108.7 108.75 108.9 108.95 109.1 109.15 109.3 109.35 109.50 109.55 109.70 109.75 109.90 109.95 110.1 110.15 110.3 110.35 110.5 110.55 110.70 110.75 110.90 110.95 111.10 111.15 111.30 111.35 111.50 Glide Slope 334.70 334.55 334.10 333.95 329.90 329.75 330.50 330.35 329.30 329.15 331.40 331.25 332.00 331.85 332.60 332.45 333.20 333.05 333.80 333.65 334.40 334.25 335.00 334.85 329.60 329.45 330.20 330.05 330.80 330.65 331.70 331.55 332.30 332.15 332.9 246 RADIO DATA - GENERAL SECTION 1. AIR NAVIGATION AIDS TABLE 1-1-4 Frequency Pairs Allocated for ILS (continued) Localizer MHz 111.55 111.70 111.75 111.90 111.95 Glide Slope 332.75 333.5 333.35 331.1 330.95 i. ILS Minimums 1. The lowest authorized ILS minimums, with all required ground and airborne systems components operative, are: (a) Category I. Decision Height (DH) 200 feet and Runway Visual Range (RVR) 2,400 feet (with touchdown zone and centerline lighting, RVR 1,800 feet), or (with Autopilot or FD or HUD, RVR 1,800 feet); (b) Special Authorization Category I. DH 150 feet and Runway Visual Range (RVR) 1,400 feet, HUD to DH; (c) Category II. DH 100 feet and RVR 1,200 feet (with autoland or HUD to touchdown and noted on authorization, RVR 1,000 feet); (d) Special Authorization Category II with Reduced Lighting. DH 100 feet and RVR 1,200 feet with autoland or HUD to touchdown and noted on authorization (touchdown zone, centerline lighting, and ALSF-2 are not required); (e) Category IIIa. No DH or DH below 100 feet and RVR not less than 700 feet; (f) Category IIIb. No DH or DH below 50 feet and RVR less than 700 feet but not less than 150 feet; and (g) Category IIIc. No DH and no RVR limitation. NOTE: Special authorization and equipment required for Categories II and III. j. Inoperative ILS Components 1. Inoperative localizer. When the localizer fails, an ILS approach is not authorized. 2. Inoperative glide slope. When the glide slope fails, the ILS reverts to a nonprecision localizer approach. REFERENCEJeppesen approach charts include adjustments to minimums due to inoperative airborne or ground system equipment. k. ILS Course Distortion 1. All pilots should be aware that disturbances to ILS localizer and glide slope courses may occur when surface vehicles or aircraft are operated near the localizer or glide slope antennas. Most ILS installations are subject to signal interference by either surface vehicles, aircraft or both. ILS CRITICAL AREAS are established near each localizer and glide slope antenna. 2. ATC issues control instructions to avoid interfering operations within ILS critical areas at controlled airports during the hours the Airport Traffic Control Tower (ATCT) is in operation as follows: (a) Weather Conditions. Less than ceiling 800 feet and/or visibility 2 miles. (1) Localizer Critical Area. Except for aircraft that land, exit a runway, depart or miss approach, vehicles and aircraft are not authorized in or over the critical area when an arriving aircraft is between the ILS final approach fix and the airport. Additionally, when the ceiling is less than 200 feet and/or the visibility is RVR 2,000 or less, vehicle and aircraft operations in or over the area are not authorized when an arriving aircraft is inside the ILS MM. (2) Glide Slope Critical Area. Vehicles and aircraft are not authorized in the area when an arriving aircraft is between the ILS final approach fix and the airport unless the aircraft has reported the airport in sight and is circling or side stepping to land on a runway other than the ILS runway. (b) Weather Conditions. At or above ceiling 800 feet and/or visibility 2 miles. (1) No critical area protective action is provided under these conditions. (2) A flight crew, under these conditions, should advise the tower that it will conduct an AUTOLAND or COUPLED approach to ensure that the ILS critical areas are protected when the aircraft is inside the ILS MM. EXAMPLE: Glide slope signal not protected. 3. Aircraft holding below 5,000 feet between the outer marker and the airport may cause localizer signal variations for aircraft conducting the ILS approach. Accordingly, such holding is not authorized when weather or visibility conditions are less than ceiling 800 feet and/or visibility 2 miles. RADIO DATA - GENERAL SECTION 1. AIR NAVIGATION AIDS 247 4. Pilots are cautioned that vehicular traffic not subject to ATC may cause momentary deviation to ILS course or glide slope signals. Also, critical areas are not protected at uncontrolled airports or at airports with an operating control tower when weather or visibility conditions are above those requiring protective measures. Aircraft conducting coupled or autoland operations should be especially alert in monitoring automatic flight control systems. (See FIG 1-1-7.) NOTE: Unless otherwise coordinated through Flight Standards, ILS signals to Category I runways are not flight inspected below 100 feet AGL. Guidance signal anomalies may be encountered below this altitude. FIGURE 1-1-7 FAA Instrument Landing Systems 1 234995548000 1-1-10 SIMPLIFIED DIRECTIONAL FACILITY (SDF) a. The SDF provides a final approach course similar to that of the ILS localizer. It does not provide glide slope information. A clear understanding of the ILS localizer and the additional factors listed below completely describe the operational characteristics and use of the SDF. b. The SDF transmits signals within the range of 108.10 to 111.95 MHz. c. The approach techniques and procedures used in an SDF instrument approach are essentially the same as those employed in executing a standard localizer approach except the SDF course may not be aligned with the runway and the course may be wider, resulting in less precision. d. Usable off-course indications are limited to 35 degrees either side of the course centerline. Instrument indications received beyond 35 degrees should be disregarded. e. The SDF antenna may be offset from the runway centerline. Because of this, the angle of convergence between the final approach course and the runway bearing should be determined by reference to the instrument approach procedure chart. This angle is generally not more than 3 degrees. However, it should be noted that inasmuch as the approach course originates at the antenna site, an approach which is continued beyond the runway threshold will lead the aircraft to the SDF offset position rather than along the runway centerline. f. The SDF signal is fixed at either 6 degrees or 12 degrees as necessary to provide maximum flyability and optimum course quality. 248 RADIO DATA - GENERAL SECTION 1. AIR NAVIGATION AIDS g. Identification consists of a three-letter identifier transmitted in Morse Code on the SDF frequency. The appropriate instrument approach chart will indicate the identifier used at a particular airport. 1-1-11 MICROWAVE LANDING SYSTEM (MLS) a. General 1. The MLS provides precision navigation guidance for exact alignment and descent of aircraft on approach to a runway. It provides azimuth, elevation, and distance. 2. Both lateral and vertical guidance may be displayed on conventional course deviation indicators or incorporated into multipurpose cockpit displays. Range information can be displayed by conventional DME indicators and also incorporated into multipurpose displays. 3. The MLS supplements the ILS as the standard landing system in the U.S. for civil, military, and international civil aviation. At international airports, ILS service is protected to 2010. 4. The system may be divided into five functions: (a) Approach azimuth; (b) Back azimuth; (c) Approach elevation; (d) Range; and (e) Data communications. 5. The standard configuration of MLS ground equipment includes: (a) An azimuth station to perform functions (a) and (e) above. In addition to providing azimuth navigation guidance, the station transmits basic data which consists of information associated directly with the operation of the landing system, as well as advisory data on the performance of the ground equipment. (b) An elevation station to perform function (c). (c) Distance Measuring Equipment (DME) to perform range guidance, both standard DME (DME/N) and precision DME (DME/P). 6. MLS Expansion Capabilities. The standard configuration can be expanded by adding one or more of the following functions or characteristics. (a) Back azimuth. Provides lateral guidance for missed approach and departure navigation. (b) Auxiliary data transmissions. Provides additional data, including refined airborne positioning, meteorological information, runway status, and other supplementary information. (c) Expanded Service Volume (ESV) proportional guidance to 60 degrees. 7. MLS identification is a four-letter designation starting with the letter M. It is transmitted in International Morse Code at least six times per minute by the approach azimuth (and back azimuth) ground equipment. b. Approach Azimuth Guidance 1. The azimuth station transmits MLS angle and data on one of 200 channels within the frequency range of 5031 to 5091 MHz. 2. The equipment is normally located about 1,000 feet beyond the stop end of the runway, but there is considerable flexibility in selecting sites. For example, for heliport operations the azimuth transmitter can be collocated with the elevation transmitter. 3. The azimuth coverage extends: (See FIG 1-1-8.) (a) Laterally, at least 40 degrees on either side of the runway centerline in a standard configuration, (b) In elevation, up to an angle of 15 degrees and to at least 20,000 feet, and (c) In range, to at least 20 NM. RADIO DATA - GENERAL SECTION 1. AIR NAVIGATION AIDS 249 FIGURE 1-1-8 Coverage Volume Azimuth 1234995548000 c. Elevation Guidance 1. The elevation station transmits signals on the same frequency as the azimuth station. A single frequency is time-shared between angle and data functions. 2. The elevation transmitter is normally located about 400 feet from the side of the runway between runway threshold and the touchdown zone. 3. Elevation coverage is provided in the same airspace as the azimuth guidance signals: (a) In elevation, to at least +15 degrees; (b) Laterally, to fill the Azimuth lateral coverage; and (c) In range, to at least 20 NM. (See FIG 1-1-9.) FIGURE 1-1-9 Coverage Volumes Elevation 1234995548000 d. Range Guidance 1. The MLS Precision Distance Measuring Equipment (DME/P) functions the same as the navigation DME described in paragraph 1-1-7, Distance Measuring Equipment (DME), but there are some technical differences. The beacon transponder operates in the frequency band 962 to 1105 MHz and responds to an aircraft interrogator. The MLS DME/P accuracy is improved to be consistent with the accuracy provided by the MLS azimuth and elevation stations. 2. A DME/P channel is paired with the azimuth and elevation channel. A complete listing of the 200 paired channels of the DME/P with the angle functions is contained in FAA Standard 022 (MLS Interoperability and Performance Requirements). 3. The DME/N or DME/P is an integral part of the MLS and is installed at all MLS facilities unless a waiver is obtained. This occurs infrequently and only at outlying, low density airports where marker beacons or compass locators are already in place. e. Data Communications 1. The data transmission can include both the basic and auxiliary data words. All MLS facilities transmit basic data. Where needed, auxiliary data can be transmitted. 2. Coverage limits. MLS data are transmitted throughout the azimuth (and back azimuth when provided) coverage sectors. 3. Basic data content. Representative data include: 250 RADIO DATA - GENERAL SECTION 1. AIR NAVIGATION AIDS (a) Station identification; (b) Exact locations of azimuth, elevation and DME/P stations (for MLS receiver processing functions); (c) Ground equipment performance level; and (d) DME/P channel and status. 4. Auxiliary data content: Representative data include: (a) 3-D locations of MLS equipment; (b) Waypoint coordinates; (c) Runway conditions; and (d) Weather (e.g., RVR, ceiling, altimeter setting, wind, wake vortex, wind shear). f. Operational Flexibility 1. The MLS has the capability to fulfill a variety of needs in the approach, landing, missed approach and departure phases of flight. For example: (a) Curved and segmented approaches; (b) Selectable glide path angles; (c) Accurate 3-D positioning of the aircraft in space; and (d) The establishment of boundaries to ensure clearance from obstructions in the terminal area. 2. While many of these capabilities are available to any MLS-equipped aircraft, the more sophisticated capabilities (such as curved and segmented approaches) are dependent upon the particular capabilities of the airborne equipment. g. Summary 1. Accuracy. The MLS provides precision three-dimensional navigation guidance accurate enough for all approach and landing maneuvers. 2. Coverage. Accuracy is consistent throughout the coverage volumes. (See FIG 1-1-10.) FIGURE 1-1-10 Coverage Volumes 3-D Representation 1234995548000 3. Environment. The system has low susceptibility to interference from weather conditions and airport ground traffic. 4. Channels. MLS has 200 channels- enough for any foreseeable need. 5. Data. The MLS transmits ground-air data messages associated with the systems operation. 6. Range information. Continuous range information is provided with an accuracy of about 100 feet. RADIO DATA - GENERAL SECTION 1. AIR NAVIGATION AIDS 1-1-12 251 NAVAID IDENTIFIER REMOVAL DURING MAINTENANCE During periods of routine or emergency maintenance, coded identification (or code and voice, where applicable) is removed from certain FAA NAVAIDs. Removal of identification serves as a warning to pilots that the facility is officially off the air for tune-up or repair and may be unreliable even though intermittent or constant signals are received. NOTE: During periods of maintenance VHF ranges may radiate a T-E-S-T code (– • ••• –). NOTE: DO NOT attempt to fly a procedure that is NOTAMed out of service even if the identification is present. In certain cases, the identification may be transmitted for short periods as part of the testing. 1-1-13 NAVAIDS WITH VOICE a. Voice equipped enroute radio navigational aids are under the operational control of either an FAA Automated Flight Service Station (AFSS) or an approach control facility. The voice communication is available on some facilities. Hazardous Inflight Weather Advisory Service (HIWAS) broadcast capability is available on selected VOR sites throughout the conterminous U.S. and does not provide two-way communication. The availability of two-way voice communication and HIWAS is indicated in the A/FD and aeronautical charts. b. Unless otherwise noted on the chart, all radio navigation aids operate continuously except during shutdowns for maintenance. Hours of operation of facilities not operating continuously are annotated on charts and in the A/FD. 1-1-14 USER REPORTS ON NAVAID PERFORMANCE a. Users of the National Airspace System (NAS) can render valuable assistance in the early correction of NAVAID malfunctions by reporting their observations of undesirable NAVAID performance. Although NAVAIDs are monitored by electronic detectors, adverse effects of electronic interference, new obstructions or changes in terrain near the NAVAID can exist without detection by the ground monitors. Some of the characteristics of malfunction or deteriorating performance which should be reported are: erratic course or bearing indications; intermittent, or full, flag alarm; garbled, missing or obviously improper coded identification; poor quality communications reception; or, in the case of frequency interference, an audible hum or tone accompanying radio communications or NAVAID identification. b. Reporters should identify the NAVAID, location of the aircraft, time of the observation, type of aircraft and describe the condition observed; the type of receivers in use is also useful information. Reports can be made in any of the following ways: 1. Immediate report by direct radio communication to the controlling Air Route Traffic Control Center (ARTCC), Control Tower, or FSS. This method provides the quickest result. 2. By telephone to the nearest FAA facility. 3. By FAA Form 8740-5, Safety Improvement Report, a postage-paid card designed for this purpose. These cards may be obtained at FAA FSSs, Flight Standards District Offices, and General Aviation Fixed Base Operations. c. In aircraft that have more than one receiver, there are many combinations of possible interference between units. This can cause either erroneous navigation indications or, complete or partial blanking out of the communications. Pilots should be familiar enough with the radio installation of the particular airplanes they fly to recognize this type of interference. 1-1-15 LORAN NOTE: In accordance with the 2010 DHS Appropriations Act, the U.S. Coast Guard (USCG) terminated the transmission of all U.S. LORAN• C signals on 08 Feb 2010. The USCG also terminated the transmission of the Russian American signals on 01 Aug 2010, and the Canadian LORAN• C signals on 03 Aug 2010. For more information, visit http://www.navcen.uscg.gov. Operators should also note that TSO• C60b, AIRBORNE AREA NAVIGATION EQUIPMENT USING LORAN• C INPUTS, has been canceled by the FAA. a. Introduction 1. The LOng RAnge Navigation-C (LORAN) system is a hyperbolic, terrestrial-based navigation system operating in the 90-110 kHz frequency band. LORAN, operated by the U.S. Coast Guard (USCG), has been in service for over 50 years and is used for navigation by the various transportation modes, as well as, for precise time and frequency applications. The system is configured to provide reliable, all weather navigation for marine users along the U.S. coasts and in the Great Lakes. 2. In the 1980’s, responding to aviation user and industry requests, the USCG and FAA expanded LORAN coverage to include the entire continental U.S. This work was completed in late 1990, but the LORAN system failed to gain significant user acceptance and primarily due to transmitter and user equipment performance limitations, attempts to obtain FAA certification of nonprecision approach capable receivers were unsuccessful. More recently, concern regarding the vulnerability of Global Positioning System (GPS) and the consequences of losing GPS on the critical U.S. infrastructure (e.g., NAS) has renewed and refocused attention on LORAN. 3. LORAN is also supported in the Canadian airspace system. Currently, LORAN receivers are only certified for enroute navigation. 252 RADIO DATA - GENERAL SECTION 1. AIR NAVIGATION AIDS 4. Additional information can be found in the “LORAN-C User Handbook,” COMDT PUB- P16562.6, or the website http://www.navcen.uscg.gov. b. LORAN Chain 1. The locations of the U.S. and Canadian LORAN transmitters and monitor sites are illustrated in FIG 1-1-11. Station operations are organized into subgroups of four to six stations called “chains.” One station in the chain is designated the “Master” and the others are “secondary” stations. The resulting chain based coverage is seen in FIG 1-1-12. FIGURE 1-1-11 U.S. and Canadian LORAN System Architecture 1 234995548000 FIGURE 1-1-12 LORAN Chain Based Coverage 1 234995548000 RADIO DATA - GENERAL SECTION 1. AIR NAVIGATION AIDS 253 2. The LORAN navigation signal is a carefully structured sequence of brief radio frequency pulses centered at 100 kHz. The sequence of signal transmissions consists of a pulse group from the Master (M) station followed at precise time intervals by groups from the secondary stations, which are designated by the U.S. Coast Guard with the letters V, W, X, Y and Z. All secondary stations radiate pulses in groups of eight, but for identification the Master signal has an additional ninth pulse. (See FIG 1-1-13.) The timing of the LORAN system is tightly controlled and synchronized to Coordinated Universal Time (UTC). Like the GPS, this is a Stratum 1 timing standard. 3. The time interval between the reoccurrence of the Master pulse group is called the Group Repetition Interval (GRI). The GRI is the same for all stations in a chain and each LORAN chain has a unique GRI. Since all stations in a particular chain operate on the same radio frequency, the GRI is the key by which a LORAN receiver can identify and isolate signal groups from a specific chain. EXAMPLE: Transmitters in the Northeast U.S. chain (FIG 1-1-14) operate with a GRI of 99,600 microseconds which is shortened to 9960 for convenience. The master station (M) at Seneca, New York, controls secondary stations (W) at Caribou, Maine; (X) at Nantucket, Massachusetts; (Y) at Carolina Beach, North Carolina, and (Z) at Dana, Indiana. In order to keep chain operations precise, monitor receivers are located at Cape Elizabeth, ME; Sandy Hook, NJ; Dunbar Forest, MI, and Plumbrook, OH. Monitor receivers continuously measure various aspects of the quality (e.g., pulse shape) and accuracy (e.g., timing) of LORAN signals and report system status to a control station. 4. The line between the Master and each secondary station is the “baseline” for a pair of stations. Typical baselines are from 600 to 1,000 nautical miles in length. The continuation of the baseline in either direction is a “baseline extension.” 5. At the LORAN transmitter stations there are cesium oscillators, transmitter time and control equipment, a transmitter, primary power (e.g., commercial or generator) and auxiliary power equipment (e.g., uninterruptible power supplies and generators), and a transmitting antenna (configurations may either have 1 or 4 towers) with the tower heights ranging from 700 to 1350 feet tall. Depending on the coverage area requirements a LORAN station transmits from 400 to 1,600 kilowatts of peak signal power. 6. The USCG operates the LORAN transmitter stations under a reduced staffing structure that is made possible by the remote control and monitoring of the critical station and signal parameters. The actual control of the transmitting station is accomplished remotely at Coast Guard Navigation Center (NAVCEN) located in Alexandria, Virginia. East Coast and Midwest stations are controlled by the NAVCEN. Stations on the West Coast and in Alaska are controlled by the NAVCEN Detachment (Det), located in Petaluma, California. In the event of a problem at one of these two 24 hour-a-day staffed sites, monitoring and control of the entire LORAN system can be done at either location. If both NACEN and NAVCEN Det are down or if there is an equipment problem at a specific station, local station personnel are available to operate and perform repairs at each LORAN station. 7. The transmitted signal is also monitored in the service areas (i.e., area of published LORAN coverage) and its status provided to NAVCEN and NAVCEN Det. The System Area Monitor (SAM) is a single site used to observe the transmitted signal (signal strength, time difference, and pulse shape). If an out-oftolerance situation that could affect navigation accuracy is detected, an alert signal called “Blink” is activated. Blink is a distinctive change in the group of eight pulses that can be recognized automatically by a receiver so the user is notified instantly that the LORAN system should not be used for navigation. Out-of-tolerance situations which only the local station can detect are also monitored. These situations when detected cause signal transmissions from a station to be halted. 8. Each individual LORAN chain provides navigation-quality signal coverage over an identified area as shown in FIG 1-1-15 for the West Coast chain, GRI 9940. The chain Master station is at Fallon, Nevada, and secondary stations are at George, Washington; Middletown, California, and Searchlight, Nevada. In a signal coverage area the signal strength relative to the normal ambient radio noise must be adequate to assure successful reception. Similar coverage area charts are available for all chains. 254 RADIO DATA - GENERAL SECTION 1. AIR NAVIGATION AIDS FIGURE 1-1-13 The LORAN Pulse and Pulse Group 1234995548000 RADIO DATA - GENERAL SECTION 1. AIR NAVIGATION AIDS 255 FIGURE 1-1-14 Northeast U.S. LORAN Chain 1 234995548000 256 RADIO DATA - GENERAL SECTION 1. AIR NAVIGATION AIDS FIGURE 1-1-15 West Coast U.S. LORAN Chain 1234995548000 RADIO DATA - GENERAL SECTION 1. AIR NAVIGATION AIDS 257 c. The LORAN Receiver 1. For a currently certified LORAN aviation receiver to provide navigation information for a pilot, it must successfully receive, or “acquire,” signals from three or more stations in a chain. Acquisition involves the time synchronization of the receiver with the chain GRI, identification of the Master station signals from among those checked, identification of secondary station signals, and the proper selection of the tracking point on each signal at which measurements are made. However, a new generation of receivers has been developed that use pulses from all stations that can be received at the pilot’s location. Use of “all-in-view” stations by a receiver is made possible due to the synchronization of LORAN stations signals to UTC. This new generation of receivers, along with improvements at the transmitting stations and changes in system policy and operations doctrine may allow for LORAN’s use in nonprecision approaches. At this time these receivers are available for purchase, but none have been certified for aviation use. 2. The basic measurements made by certified LORAN receivers are the differences in time-of-arrival between the Master signal and the signals from each of the secondary stations of a chain. Each “time difference” (TD) value is measured to a precision of about 0.1 microseconds. As a rule of thumb, 0.1 microsecond is equal to about 100 feet. 3. An aircraft’s LORAN receiver must recognize three signal conditions: (a) Usable signals; (b) Absence of signals, and (c) Signal blink. 4. The most critical phase of flight is during the approach to landing at an airport. During the approach phase the receiver must detect a lost signal, or a signal Blink, within 10 seconds of the occurrence and warn the pilot of the event. At this time there are no receivers that are certified for nonprecision approaches. 5. Most certified receivers have various internal tests for estimating the probable accuracy of the current TD values and consequent navigation solutions. Tests may include verification of the timing alignment of the receiver clock with the LORAN pulse, or a continuous measurement of the signal- to-noise ratio (SNR). SNR is the relative strength of the LORAN signals compared to the local ambient noise level. If any of the tests fail, or if the quantities measured are out of the limits set for reliable navigation, then an alarm will be activated to alert the pilot. 6. LORAN signals operate in the low frequency band (90-110 kHz) that has been reserved for marine navigation signals. Adjacent to the band, however, are numerous low frequency communications transmitters. Nearby signals can distort the LORAN signals and must be eliminated by the receiver to assure proper operation. To eliminate interfering signals, LORAN receivers have selective internal filters. These filters, commonly known as “notch filters,” reduce the effect of interfering signals. 7. Careful installation of antennas, good metal-to-metal electrical bonding, and provisions for precipitation noise discharge on the aircraft are essential for the successful operation of LORAN receivers. A LORAN antenna should be installed on an aircraft in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. Corroded bonding straps should be replaced, and static discharge devices installed at points indicated by the aircraft manufacturer. d. LORAN Navigation 1. An airborne LORAN receiver has four major parts: (a) Signal processor; (b) Navigation computer; (c) Control/display, and (d) Antenna. 2. The signal processor acquires LORAN signals and measures the difference between the time-ofarrival of each secondary station pulse group and the Master station pulse group. The measured TDs depend on the location of the receiver in relation to the three or more transmitters. 258 RADIO DATA - GENERAL SECTION 1. AIR NAVIGATION AIDS FIGURE 1-1-16 First Line-of-Position 1234995548000 (a) The first TD will locate an aircraft somewhere on a line-of-position (LOP) on which the receiver will measure the same TD value. (b) A second LOP is defined by a TD measurement between the Master station signal and the signal from another secondary station. FIGURE 1-1-17 Second Line-of-Position 1234995548000 (c) The intersection of the measured LOPs is the position of the aircraft. RADIO DATA - GENERAL SECTION 1. AIR NAVIGATION AIDS 259 FIGURE 1-1-18 Intersection of Lines-of-Position 1234995548000 3. The navigation computer converts TD values to corresponding latitude and longitude. Once the time and position of the aircraft are established at two points, distance to destination, cross track error, ground speed, estimated time of arrival, etc., can be determined. Cross track error can be displayed as the vertical needle of a course deviation indicator, or digitally, as decimal parts of a mile left or right of course. e. Notices to Airmen (NOTAMs) are issued for LORAN chain or station outages. Domestic NOTAM (D)s are issued under the identifier “LRN.” International NOTAMs are issued under the KNMH series. Pilots may obtain these NOTAMs from FSS briefers upon request. f. LORAN status information. To find out more information on the LORAN system and its operational status you can visit http://www.navcen.uscg.gov/loran/default.htm or contact NAVCEN’s Navigational Information Service (NIS) watchstander, phone (703) 313-5900, fax (703) 313-5920. NOTE: In accordance with the 2010 DHS Appropriations Act, the U.S. Coast Guard (USCG) terminated the transmission of all U.S. LORAN• C signals on 08 Feb 2010. The USCG also terminated the transmission of the Russian American signals on 01 Aug 2010, and the Canadian LORAN• C signals on 03 Aug 2010. For more information, visit http://www.navcen.uscg.gov. Operators should also note that TSO• C60b, AIRBORNE AREA NAVIGATION EQUIPMENT USING LORAN• C INPUTS, has been canceled by the FAA. g. LORAN’s future. The U.S. will continue to operate the LORAN system in the short term. During this time, the FAA LORAN evaluation program, being conducted with the support of a team comprising government, academia, and industry, will identify and assess LORAN’s potential contributions to required navigation services for the National Airspace System (NAS), and support decisions regarding continued operation of the system. If the government concludes LORAN should not be kept as part of the mix of federally provided radio navigation systems, it will give the users of LORAN reasonable notice so that they will have the opportunity to transition to alternative navigation aids. 1-1-16 VHF DIRECTION FINDER a. The VHF Direction Finder (VHF/DF) is one of the common systems that helps pilots without their being aware of its operation. It is a ground-based radio receiver used by the operator of the ground station. FAA facilities that provide VHF/DF service are identified in the A/FD. b. The equipment consists of a directional antenna system and a VHF radio receiver. c. The VHF/DF receiver display indicates the magnetic direction of the aircraft from the ground station each time the aircraft transmits. d. DF equipment is of particular value in locating lost aircraft and in helping to identify aircraft on radar. REFERENCEAIM, Direction Finding Instrument Approach Procedure, Paragraph 6-2-3. 260 1-1-17 RADIO DATA - GENERAL SECTION 1. AIR NAVIGATION AIDS INERTIAL REFERENCE UNIT (IRU), INERTIAL NAVIGATION SYSTEM (INS), AND ATTITUDE HEADING REFERENCE SYSTEM (AHRS) a. IRUs are self-contained systems comprised of gyros and accelerometers that provide aircraft attitude (pitch, roll, and heading), position, and velocity information in response to signals resulting from inertial effects on system components. Once aligned with a known position, IRUs continuously calculate position and velocity. IRU position accuracy decays with time. This degradation is known as “drift.” b. INSs combine the components of an IRU with an internal navigation computer. By programming a series of waypoints, these systems will navigate along a predetermined track. c. AHRSs are electronic devices that provide attitude information to aircraft systems such as weather radar and autopilot, but do not directly compute position information. 1-1-18 DOPPLER RADAR Doppler Radar is a semiautomatic self-contained dead reckoning navigation system (radar sensor plus computer) which is not continuously dependent on information derived from ground based or external aids. The system employs radar signals to detect and measure ground speed and drift angle, using the aircraft compass system as its directional reference. Doppler is less accurate than INS, however, and the use of an external reference is required for periodic updates if acceptable position accuracy is to be achieved on long range flights. 1-1-19 GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM (GPS) a. System Overview 1. System Description. The Global Positioning System is a satellite-based radio navigation system, which broadcasts a signal that is used by receivers to determine precise position anywhere in the world. The receiver tracks multiple satellites and determines a pseudorange measurement that is then used to determine the user location. A minimum of four satellites is necessary to establish an accurate three-dimensional position. The Department of Defense (DOD) is responsible for operating the GPS satellite constellation and monitors the GPS satellites to ensure proper operation. Every satellite's orbital parameters (ephemeris data) are sent to each satellite for broadcast as part of the data message embedded in the GPS signal. The GPS coordinate system is the Cartesian earth-centered earth-fixed coordinates as specified in the World Geodetic System 1984 (WGS-84). 2. System Availability and Reliability (a) The status of GPS satellites is broadcast as part of the data message transmitted by the GPS satellites. GPS status information is also available by means of the U.S. Coast Guard navigation information service: (703) 313-5907, Internet: http://www.navcen.uscg.gov/. Additionally, satellite status is available through the Notice to Airmen (NOTAM) system. (b) The operational status of GNSS operations depends upon the type of equipment being used. For GPS-only equipment TSO-C129(a), the operational status of nonprecision approach capability for flight planning purposes is provided through a prediction program that is embedded in the receiver or provided separately. 3. Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring (RAIM). When GNSS equipment is not using integrity information from WAAS or LAAS, the GPS navigation receiver using RAIM provides GPS signal integrity monitoring. RAIM is necessary since delays of up to two hours can occur before an erroneous satellite transmission can be detected and corrected by the satellite control segment. The RAIM function is also referred to as fault detection. Another capability, fault exclusion, refers to the ability of the receiver to exclude a failed satellite from the position solution and is provided by some GPS receivers and by WAAS receivers. 4. The GPS receiver verifies the integrity (usability) of the signals received from the GPS constellation through receiver autonomous integrity monitoring (RAIM) to determine if a satellite is providing corrupted information. At least one satellite, in addition to those required for navigation, must be in view for the receiver to perform the RAIM function; thus, RAIM needs a minimum of 5 satellites in view, or 4 satellites and a barometric altimeter (baro-aiding) to detect an integrity anomaly. [Baro• aiding satisfies the RAIM requirement in lieu of a fifth satellite.] For receivers capable of doing so, RAIM needs 6 satellites in view (or 5 satellites with baro-aiding) to isolate the corrupt satellite signal and remove it from the navigation solution. Baro-aiding is a method of augmenting the GPS integrity solution by using a nonsatellite input source. GPS derived altitude should not be relied upon to determine aircraft altitude since the vertical error can be quite large and no integrity is provided. To ensure that baro-aiding is available, the current altimeter setting must be entered into the receiver as described in the operating manual. 5. RAIM messages vary somewhat between receivers; however, generally there are two types. One type indicates that there are not enough satellites available to provide RAIM integrity monitoring and another type indicates that the RAIM integrity monitor has detected a potential error that exceeds the limit for the current phase of flight. Without RAIM capability, the pilot has no assurance of the accuracy of the GPS position. RADIO DATA - GENERAL SECTION 1. AIR NAVIGATION AIDS 261 6. Selective Availability. Selective Availability (SA) is a method by which the accuracy of GPS is intentionally degraded. This feature is designed to deny hostile use of precise GPS positioning data. SA was discontinued on May 1, 2000, but many GPS receivers are designed to assume that SA is still active. New receivers may take advantage of the discontinuance of SA based on the performance values in ICAO Annex 10, and do not need to be designed to operate outside of that performance. 7. The GPS constellation of 24 satellites is designed so that a minimum of five are always observable by a user anywhere on earth. The receiver uses data from a minimum of four satellites above the mask angle (the lowest angle above the horizon at which it can use a satellite). 8. The DOD declared initial operational capability (IOC) of the U.S. GPS on December 8, 1993. The FAA has granted approval for U.S. civil operators to use properly certified GPS equipment as a primary means of navigation in oceanic airspace and certain remote areas. Properly certified GPS equipment may be used as a supplemental means of IFR navigation for domestic enroute, terminal operations, and certain instrument approach procedures (IAPs). This approval permits the use of GPS in a manner that is consistent with current navigation requirements as well as approved air carrier operations specifications. b. VFR Use of GPS 1. GPS navigation has become a great asset to VFR pilots, providing increased navigation capability and enhanced situational awareness, while reducing operating costs due to greater ease in flying direct routes. While GPS has many benefits to the VFR pilot, care must be exercised to ensure that system capabilities are not exceeded. 2. Types of receivers used for GPS navigation under VFR are varied, from a full IFR installation being used to support a VFR flight, to a VFR only installation (in either a VFR or IFR capable aircraft) to a hand-held receiver. The limitations of each type of receiver installation or use must be understood by the pilot to avoid misusing navigation information. (See TBL 1-1-6.) In all cases, VFR pilots should never rely solely on one system of navigation. GPS navigation must be integrated with other forms of electronic navigation (when possible), as well as pilotage and dead reckoning. Only through the integration of these techniques can the VFR pilot ensure accuracy in navigation. 3. Some critical concerns in VFR use of GPS include RAIM capability, database currency and antenna location. (a) RAIM Capability. Many VFR GPS receivers and all hand-held units have no RAIM alerting capability. Loss of the required number of satellites in view, or the detection of a position error, cannot be displayed to the pilot by such receivers. In receivers with no RAIM capability, no alert would be provided to the pilot that the navigation solution had deteriorated, and an undetected navigation error could occur. A systematic cross-check with other navigation techniques would identify this failure, and prevent a serious deviation. See subparagraphs a4 and a5 for more information on RAIM. (b) Database Currency (1) In many receivers, an up-datable database is used for navigation fixes, airports, and instrument procedures. These databases must be maintained to the current update for IFR operation, but no such requirement exists for VFR use. (2) However, in many cases, the database drives a moving map display which indicates Special Use Airspace and the various classes of airspace, in addition to other operational information. Without a current database the moving map display may be outdated and offer erroneous information to VFR pilots wishing to fly around critical airspace areas, such as a Restricted Area or a Class B airspace segment. Numerous pilots have ventured into airspace they were trying to avoid by using an outdated database. If you don’t have a current database in the receiver, disregard the moving map display for critical navigation decisions. (3) In addition, waypoints are added, removed, relocated, or re-named as required to meet operational needs. When using GPS to navigate relative to a named fix, a current database must be used to properly locate a named waypoint. Without the update, it is the pilot’s responsibility to verify the waypoint location referencing to an official current source, such as the Airport/Facility Directory, Sectional Chart, or Enroute Chart. (c) Antenna Location (1) In many VFR installations of GPS receivers, antenna location is more a matter of convenience than performance. In IFR installations, care is exercised to ensure that an adequate clear view is provided for the antenna to see satellites. If an alternate location is used, some portion of the aircraft may block the view of the antenna, causing a greater opportunity to lose navigation signal. (2) This is especially true in the case of hand-helds. The use of hand-held receivers for VFR operations is a growing trend, especially among rental pilots. Typically, suction cups are used to place the GPS antennas on the inside of cockpit windows. While this method has great utility, the antenna location is limited to the cockpit or cabin only and is rarely optimized to provide a clear view of available satellites. Consequently, signal losses may 262 RADIO DATA - GENERAL SECTION 1. AIR NAVIGATION AIDS occur in certain situations of aircraft-satellite geometry, causing a loss of navigation signal. These losses, coupled with a lack of RAIM capability, could present erroneous position and navigation information with no warning to the pilot. (3) While the use of a hand-held GPS for VFR operations is not limited by regulation, modification of the aircraft, such as installing a panel- or yoke-mounted holder, is governed by 14 CFR Part 43. Consult with your mechanic to ensure compliance with the regulation, and a safe installation. 4. As a result of these and other concerns, here are some tips for using GPS for VFR operations: (a) Always check to see if your unit has RAIM capability. If no RAIM capability exists, be suspicious of your GPS position when any disagreement exists with the position derived from other radio navigation systems, pilotage, or dead reckoning. (b) Check the currency of the database, if any. If expired, update the database using the current revision. If an update of an expired database is not possible, disregard any moving map display of airspace for critical navigation decisions. Be aware that named waypoints may no longer exist or may have been relocated since the database expired. At a minimum, the waypoints planned to be used should be checked against a current official source, such as the Airport/Facility Directory, or a Sectional Aeronautical Chart. (c) While hand-helds can provide excellent navigation capability to VFR pilots, be prepared for intermittent loss of navigation signal, possibly with no RAIM warning to the pilot. If mounting the receiver in the aircraft, be sure to comply with 14 CFR Part 43. (d) Plan flights carefully before taking off. If you wish to navigate to user-defined waypoints, enter them before flight, not on-the-fly. Verify your planned flight against a current source, such as a current sectional chart. There have been cases in which one pilot used waypoints created by another pilot that were not where the pilot flying was expecting. This generally resulted in a navigation error. Minimize head-down time in the aircraft and keep a sharp lookout for traffic, terrain, and obstacles. Just a few minutes of preparation and planning on the ground will make a great difference in the air. (e) Another way to minimize head-down time is to become very familiar with your receiver’s operation. Most receivers are not intuitive. The pilot must take the time to learn the various keystrokes, knob functions, and displays that are used in the operation of the receiver. Some manufacturers provide computer-based tutorials or simulations of their receivers. Take the time to learn about your particular unit before you try to use it in flight. 5. In summary, be careful not to rely on GPS to solve all your VFR navigational problems. Unless an IFR receiver is installed in accordance with IFR requirements, no standard of accuracy or integrity has been assured. While the practicality of GPS is compelling, the fact remains that only the pilot can navigate the aircraft, and GPS is just one of the pilot’s tools to do the job. c. VFR Waypoints 1. VFR waypoints provide VFR pilots with a supplementary tool to assist with position awareness while navigating visually in aircraft equipped with area navigation receivers. VFR waypoints should be used as a tool to supplement current navigation procedures. The uses of VFR waypoints include providing navigational aids for pilots unfamiliar with an area, waypoint definition of existing reporting points, enhanced navigation in and around Class B and Class C airspace, and enhanced navigation around Special Use Airspace. VFR pilots should rely on appropriate and current aeronautical charts published specifically for visual navigation. If operating in a terminal area, pilots should take advantage of the Terminal Area Chart available for that area, if published. The use of VFR waypoints does not relieve the pilot of any responsibility to comply with the operational requirements of 14 CFR Part 91. 2. VFR waypoint names (for computer-entry and flight plans) consist of five letters beginning with the letters “VP” and are retrievable from navigation databases. The VFR waypoint names are not intended to be pronounceable, and they are not for use in ATC communications. On VFR charts, stand-alone VFR waypoints will be portrayed using the same four-point star symbol used for IFR waypoints. VFR waypoints collocated with visual check points on the chart will be identified by small magenta flag symbols. VFR waypoints collocated with visual check points will be pronounceable based on the name of the visual check point and may be used for ATC communications. Each VFR waypoint name will appear in parentheses adjacent to the geographic location on the chart. Latitude/longitude data for all established VFR waypoints may be found in the appropriate regional Airport/Facility Directory (A/FD). 3. VFR waypoints shall not be used to plan flights under IFR. VFR waypoints will not be recognized by the IFR system and will be rejected for IFR routing purposes. 4. When filing VFR flight plans, pilots may use the five letter identifier as a waypoint in the route of flight section if there is an intended course change at that point or if used to describe the planned route of flight. This VFR filing would be similar to how a VOR would be used in a route of flight. Pilots must use the VFR waypoints only when operating under VFR conditions. 5. Any VFR waypoints intended for use during a flight should be loaded into the receiver while on the ground and prior to departure. Once airborne, pilots should avoid programming routes or VFR waypoint chains into their receivers. RADIO DATA - GENERAL SECTION 1. AIR NAVIGATION AIDS 263 6. Pilots should be especially vigilant for other traffic while operating near VFR waypoints. The same effort to see and avoid other aircraft near VFR waypoints will be necessary, as was the case with VORs and NDBs in the past. In fact, the increased accuracy of navigation through the use of GPS will demand even greater vigilance, as off-course deviations among different pilots and receivers will be less. When operating near a VFR waypoint, use whatever ATC services are available, even if outside a class of airspace where communications are required. Regardless of the class of airspace, monitor the available ATC frequency closely for information on other aircraft operating in the vicinity. It is also a good idea to turn on your landing light(s) when operating near a VFR waypoint to make your aircraft more conspicuous to other pilots, especially when visibility is reduced. See paragraph 7-5-2, VFR in Congested Areas, for more information. d. General Requirements 1. Authorization to conduct any GPS operation under IFR requires that: (a) GPS navigation equipment used must be approved in accordance with the requirements specified in Technical Standard Order (TSO) TSO-C129, or equivalent, and the installation must be done in accordance with Advisory Circular AC 20-138, Airworthiness Approval of Global Positioning System (GPS) Navigation Equipment for Use as a VFR and IFR Supplemental Navigation System, or Advisory Circular AC 20-130A, Airworthiness Approval of Navigation or Flight Management Systems Integrating Multiple Navigation Sensors, or equivalent. Equipment approved in accordance with TSO-C115a does not meet the requirements of TSO-C129. Visual flight rules (VFR) and hand-held GPS systems are not authorized for IFR navigation, instrument approaches, or as a principal instrument flight reference. During IFR operations they may be considered only an aid to situational awareness. (b) Aircraft using GPS navigation equipment under IFR must be equipped with an approved and operational alternate means of navigation appropriate to the flight. Active monitoring of alternative navigation equipment is not required if the GPS receiver uses RAIM for integrity monitoring. Active monitoring of an alternate means of navigation is required when the RAIM capability of the GPS equipment is lost. (c) Procedures must be established for use in the event that the loss of RAIM capability is predicted to occur. In situations where this is encountered, the flight must rely on other approved equipment, delay departure, or cancel the flight. (d) The GPS operation must be conducted in accordance with the FAA-approved aircraft flight manual (AFM) or flight manual supplement. Flight crew members must be thoroughly familiar with the particular GPS equipment installed in the aircraft, the receiver operation manual, and the AFM or flight manual supplement. Unlike ILS and VOR, the basic operation, receiver presentation to the pilot, and some capabilities of the equipment can vary greatly. Due to these differences, operation of different brands, or even models of the same brand, of GPS receiver under IFR should not be attempted without thorough study of the operation of that particular receiver and installation. Most receivers have a built-in simulator mode which will allow the pilot to become familiar with operation prior to attempting operation in the aircraft. Using the equipment in flight under VFR conditions prior to attempting IFR operation will allow further familiarization. (e) Aircraft navigating by IFR approved GPS are considered to be area navigation (RNAV) aircraft and have special equipment suffixes. File the appropriate equipment suffix in accordance with TBL 5-1-2, on the ATC flight plan. If GPS avionics become inoperative, the pilot should advise ATC and amend the equipment suffix. (f) Prior to any GPS IFR operation, the pilot must review appropriate NOTAMs and aeronautical information. (See GPS NOTAMs/Aeronautical Information.) (g) Air carrier and commercial operators must meet the appropriate provisions of their approved operations specifications. e. Use of GPS for IFR Oceanic, Domestic Enroute, and Terminal Area Operations 1. GPS IFR operations in oceanic areas can be conducted as soon as the proper avionics systems are installed, provided all general requirements are met. A GPS installation with TSO-C129 authorization in class A1, A2, B1, B2, C1, or C2 may be used to replace one of the other approved means of longrange navigation, such as dual INS. (See TBL 1-1-5 and TBL 1-1-6.) A single GPS installation with these classes of equipment which provide RAIM for integrity monitoring may also be used on short oceanic routes which have only required one means of long-range navigation. 2. GPS domestic enroute and terminal IFR operations can be conducted as soon as proper avionics systems are installed, provided all general requirements are met. The avionics necessary to receive all of the ground-based facilities appropriate for the route to the destination airport and any required alternate airport must be installed and operational. Ground-based facilities necessary for these routes must also be operational. (a) GPS enroute IFR RNAV operations may be conducted in Alaska outside the operational service volume of ground-based navigation aids when a TSO-C145a or TSO-C146a GPS/WAAS system is installed and operating. Ground-based navigation equipment is not required to be 264 RADIO DATA - GENERAL SECTION 1. AIR NAVIGATION AIDS installed and operating for enroute IFR RNAV operations when using GPS WAAS navigation systems. All operators should ensure that an alternate means of navigation is available in the unlikely event the GPS WAAS navigation system becomes inoperative. TABLE 1-1-5 GPS IFR Equipment Classes/Categories TSO-C129 Equipment Class Int. Nav Sys. to Prov. RAIM Equiv. RAIM Enroute Oceanic Nonprecision Approach Capable Terminal Class A - GPS sensor and navigation capability. yes yes yes yes yes A1 yes yes yes yes no A2 Class B - GPS sensor data to an integrated navigation system (i.e. FMS, multi-sensor navigation system, etc.). yes yes yes yes yes B1 yes yes yes yes no B2 yes yes yes yes yes B3 yes yes yes yes no B4 Class C - GPS sensor data to an integrated navigation system (as in Class B) which provides enhanced guidance to an autopilot, or flight director, to reduce flight tech. errors. Limited to 14 CFR Part 121 or equivalent criteria. yes yes yes yes yes C1 yes yes yes yes no C2 yes yes yes yes yes C3 yes yes yes yes no C4 TABLE 1-1-6 GPS Approval Required/Authorized Use Equipment Type1 Hand held4 VFR Panel Mount4 IFR Enroute and Terminal IFR Oceanic/ Remote IFR Enroute, Terminal, and Approach Installation Approval Required Operational Approval Required IFR Enroute2 IFR Terminal2 X X X X X X X X X X X X IFR Approach3 Oceanic Remote In Lieu of ADF and/or DME3 X5 X X X X X X 1 To determine equipment approvals and limitations, refer to the AFM, AFM supplements, or pilot guides. 2 Requires verification of data for correctness if database is expired. 3 Requires current database or verification that the procedure has not been amended since the expiration of the database. 4 VFR and hand-held GPS systems are not authorized for IFR navigation, instrument approaches, or as a primary instrument flight reference. During IFR operations they may be considered only an aid to situational awareness. 5 Hand-held receivers require no approval. However, any aircraft modification to support the hand-held receiver; i.e., installation of an external antenna or a permanent mounting bracket, does require approval. 3. The GPS Approach Overlay Program is an authorization for pilots to use GPS avionics under IFR for flying designated nonprecision instrument approach procedures, except LOC, LDA, and simplified directional facility (SDF) procedures. These procedures are now identified by the name of the procedure and “or GPS” (e.g., VOR/DME or GPS RWY 15). Other previous types of overlays have either been converted to this format or replaced with stand-alone procedures. Only approaches contained in the current onboard navigation database are authorized. The navigation database may contain information about nonoverlay approach procedures that is intended to be used to enhance position orientation, generally by providing a map, while flying these approaches using conventional NAVAIDs. RADIO DATA - GENERAL SECTION 1. AIR NAVIGATION AIDS 265 This approach information should not be confused with a GPS overlay approach (see the receiver operating manual, AFM, or AFM Supplement for details on how to identify these approaches in the navigation database). NOTE: Overlay approaches are predicated upon the design criteria of the ground-based NAVAID used as the basis of the approach. As such, they do not adhere to the design criteria described in paragraph 5-4-5k, Area Navigation (RNAV) Instrument Approach Charts, for stand-alone GPS approaches. 4. GPS IFR approach operations can be conducted as soon as proper avionics systems are installed and the following requirements are met: (a) The authorization to use GPS to fly instrument approaches is limited to U.S. airspace. (b) The use of GPS in any other airspace must be expressly authorized by the FAA Administrator. (c) GPS instrument approach operations outside the U.S. must be authorized by the appropriate sovereign authority. f. Equipment and Database Requirements 1. Authorization to fly approaches under IFR using GPS avionics systems requires that: (a) A pilot use GPS avionics with TSO-C129, or equivalent, authorization in class A1, B1, B3, C1, or C3; and (b) All approach procedures to be flown must be retrievable from the current airborne navigation database supplied by the TSO-C129 equipment manufacturer or other FAA approved source. The system must be able to retrieve the procedure by name from the aircraft navigation database, not just as a manually entered series of waypoints. (c) Prior to using a procedure or waypoint retrieved from the airborne navigation database, the pilot should verify the validity of the database. This verification should include the following preflight and in-flight steps: (1) Preflight: [a] Determine the date of database issuance, and verify that the date/time of proposed use is before the expiration date/time. [b] Verify that the database provider has not published a notice limiting the use of the specific waypoint or procedure. (2) Inflight: [a] Determine that the waypoints and transition names coincide with names found on the procedure chart. Do not use waypoints, which do not exactly match the spelling shown on published procedure charts. [b] Determine that the waypoints are generally logical in location, in the correct order, and that their orientation to each other is as found on the procedure chart, both laterally and vertically. NOTE: There is no specific requirement to check each waypoint latitude and longitude, type of waypoint and/or altitude constraint, only the general relationship of waypoints in the procedure, or the logic of an individual waypoint’s location. [c] If the cursory check of procedure logic or individual waypoint location, specified in [b] above, indicates a potential error, do not use the retrieved procedure or waypoint until a verification of latitude and longitude, waypoint type, and altitude constraints indicate full conformity with the published data. g. GPS Approach Procedures As the production of stand-alone GPS approaches has progressed, many of the original overlay approaches have been replaced with stand-alone procedures specifically designed for use by GPS systems. The title of the remaining GPS overlay procedures has been revised on the approach chart to “or GPS” (e.g., VOR or GPS RWY 24). Therefore, all the approaches that can be used by GPS now contain “GPS” in the title (e.g., “VOR or GPS RWY 24,” “GPS RWY 24,” or “RNAV (GPS) RWY 24”). During these GPS approaches, underlying ground-based NAVAIDs are not required to be operational and associated aircraft avionics need not be installed, operational, turned on or monitored (monitoring of the underlying approach is suggested when equipment is available and functional). Existing overlay approaches may be requested using the GPS title, such as “GPS RWY 24” for the VOR or GPS RWY 24. NOTE: Any required alternate airport must have an approved instrument approach procedure other than GPS that is anticipated to be operational and available at the estimated time of arrival, and which the aircraft is equipped to fly. h. GPS NOTAMs/Aeronautical Information 1. GPS satellite outages are issued as GPS NOTAMs both domestically and internationally. However, the effect of an outage on the intended operation cannot be determined unless the pilot has a RAIM availability prediction program which allows excluding a satellite which is predicted to be out of service based on the NOTAM information. 266 RADIO DATA - GENERAL SECTION 1. AIR NAVIGATION AIDS 2. The term UNRELIABLE is used in conjunction with GPS NOTAMs. The term UNRELIABLE is an advisory to pilots indicating the expected level of service may not be available. GPS operation may be NOTAMed UNRELIABLE due to testing or anomalies. Air Traffic Control will advise pilots requesting a GPS or RNAV (GPS) approach of GPS UNRELIABLE for: (a) NOTAMs not contained in the ATIS broadcast. (b) Pilot reports of GPS anomalies received within the preceding 15 minutes. 3. Civilian pilots may obtain GPS RAIM availability information for nonprecision approach procedures by specifically requesting GPS aeronautical information from an Automated Flight Service Station during preflight briefings. GPS RAIM aeronautical information can be obtained for a period of 3 hours (for example, if you are scheduled to arrive at 1215 hours, then the GPS RAIM information is available from 1100 to 1400 hours) or a 24 hour time frame at a particular airport. FAA briefers will provide RAIM information for a period of 1 hour before to 1 hour after the ETA hour, unless a specific time frame is requested by the pilot. If flying a published GPS departure, a RAIM prediction should also be requested for the departure airport. 4. The military provides airfield specific GPS RAIM NOTAMs for nonprecision approach procedures at military airfields. The RAIM outages are issued as M-series NOTAMs and may be obtained for up to 24 hours from the time of request. 5. Receiver manufacturers and/or database suppliers may supply “NOTAM” type information concerning database errors. Pilots should check these sources, when available, to ensure that they have the most current information concerning their electronic database. i. Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring (RAIM) 1. RAIM outages may occur due to an insufficient number of satellites or due to unsuitable satellite geometry which causes the error in the position solution to become too large. Loss of satellite reception and RAIM warnings may occur due to aircraft dynamics (changes in pitch or bank angle). Antenna location on the aircraft, satellite position relative to the horizon, and aircraft attitude may affect reception of one or more satellites. Since the relative positions of the satellites are constantly changing, prior experience with the airport does not guarantee reception at all times, and RAIM availability should always be checked. 2. If RAIM is not available, another type of navigation and approach system must be used, another destination selected, or the trip delayed until RAIM is predicted to be available on arrival. On longer flights, pilots should consider rechecking the RAIM prediction for the destination during the flight. This may provide early indications that an unscheduled satellite outage has occurred since takeoff. 3. If a RAIM failure/status annunciation occurs prior to the final approach waypoint (FAWP), the approach should not be completed since GPS may no longer provide the required accuracy. The receiver performs a RAIM prediction by 2 NM prior to the FAWP to ensure that RAIM is available at the FAWP as a condition for entering the approach mode. The pilot should ensure that the receiver has sequenced from “Armed” to “Approach” prior to the FAWP (normally occurs 2 NM prior). Failure to sequence may be an indication of the detection of a satellite anomaly, failure to arm the receiver (if required), or other problems which preclude completing the approach. 4. If the receiver does not sequence into the approach mode or a RAIM failure/status annunciation occurs prior to the FAWP, the pilot should not descend to Minimum Descent Altitude (MDA), but should proceed to the missed approach waypoint (MAWP) via the FAWP, perform a missed approach, and contact ATC as soon as practical. Refer to the receiver operating manual for specific indications and instructions associated with loss of RAIM prior to the FAF. 5. If a RAIM failure occurs after the FAWP, the receiver is allowed to continue operating without an annunciation for up to 5 minutes to allow completion of the approach (see receiver operating manual). If the RAIM flag/status annunciation appears after the FAWP, the missed approach should be executed immediately. j. Waypoints 1. GPS approaches make use of both fly-over and fly-by waypoints. Fly-by waypoints are used when an aircraft should begin a turn to the next course prior to reaching the waypoint separating the two route segments. This is known as turn anticipation and is compensated for in the airspace and terrain clearances. Approach waypoints, except for the MAWP and the missed approach holding waypoint (MAHWP), are normally fly-by waypoints. Fly-over waypoints are used when the aircraft must fly over the point prior to starting a turn. New approach charts depict fly-over waypoints as a circled waypoint symbol. Overlay approach charts and some early stand alone GPS approach charts may not reflect this convention. 2. Since GPS receivers are basically “To-To” navigators, they must always be navigating to a defined point. On overlay approaches, if no pronounceable five-character name is published for an approach waypoint or fix, it was given a database identifier consisting of letters and numbers. These points will appear in the list of waypoints in the approach procedure database, but may not appear on the approach chart. A point used for the purpose of defining the navigation track for an airborne computer system (i.e., GPS or FMS) is called a Computer Navigation Fix (CNF). CNFs include unnamed DME RADIO DATA - GENERAL SECTION 1. AIR NAVIGATION AIDS k. l. m. n. 267 fixes, beginning and ending points of DME arcs and sensor final approach fixes (FAFs) on some GPS overlay approaches. To aid in the approach chart/database correlation process, the FAA has begun a program to assign five-letter names to CNFs and to chart CNFs on various National Oceanic Service aeronautical products. These CNFs are not to be used for any air traffic control (ATC) application, such as holding for which the fix has not already been assessed. CNFs will be charted to distinguish them from conventional reporting points, fixes, intersections, and waypoints. The CNF name will be enclosed in parenthesis, e.g., (MABEE), and the name will be placed next to the CNF it defines. If the CNF is not at an existing point defined by means such as crossing radials or radial/DME, the point will be indicated by an “X.” The CNF name will not be used in filing a flight plan or in aircraft/ATC communications. Use current phraseology, e.g., facility name, radial, distance, to describe these fixes. 3. Unnamed waypoints in the database will be uniquely identified for each airport but may be repeated for another airport (e.g., RW36 will be used at each airport with a runway 36 but will be at the same location for all approaches at a given airport). 4. The runway threshold waypoint, which is normally the MAWP, may have a five letter identifier (e.g., SNEEZ) or be coded as RW## (e.g., RW36, RW36L). Those thresholds which are coded as five letter identifiers are being changed to the RW## designation. This may cause the approach chart and database to differ until all changes are complete. The runway threshold waypoint is also used as the center of the Minimum Safe Altitude (MSA) on most GPS approaches. MAWPs not located at the threshold will have a five letter identifier. Position Orientation As with most RNAV systems, pilots should pay particular attention to position orientation while using GPS. Distance and track information are provided to the next active waypoint, not to a fixed navigation aid. Receivers may sequence when the pilot is not flying along an active route, such as when being vectored or deviating for weather, due to the proximity to another waypoint in the route. This can be prevented by placing the receiver in the nonsequencing mode. When the receiver is in the nonsequencing mode, bearing and distance are provided to the selected waypoint and the receiver will not sequence to the next waypoint in the route until placed back in the auto sequence mode or the pilot selects a different waypoint. On overlay approaches, the pilot may have to compute the along-track distance to stepdown fixes and other points due to the receiver showing along track distance to the next waypoint rather than DME to the VOR or ILS ground station. Conventional Versus GPS Navigation Data There may be slight differences between the course information portrayed on navigational charts and a GPS navigation display when flying authorized GPS instrument procedures or along an airway. All magnetic tracks defined by any conventional navigation aids are determined by the application of the station magnetic variation. In contrast, GPS RNAV systems may use an algorithm, which applies the local magnetic variation and may produce small differences in the displayed course. However, both methods of navigation should produce the same desired ground track when using approved, IFR navigation system. Should significant differences between the approach chart and the GPS avionics' application of the navigation database arise, the published approach chart, supplemented by NOTAMs, holds precedence. Due to the GPS avionics' computation of great circle courses, and the variations in magnetic variation, the bearing to the next waypoint and the course from the last waypoint (if available) may not be exactly 180° apart when long distances are involved. Variations in distances will occur since GPS distance-to-waypoint values are along-track distances (ATD) computed to the next waypoint and the DME values published on underlying procedures are slant-range distances measured to the station. This difference increases with aircraft altitude and proximity to the NAVAID. Departures and Instrument Departure Procedures (DPs) The GPS receiver must be set to terminal (+/-1 NM) CDI sensitivity and the navigation routes contained in the database in order to fly published IFR charted departures and DPs. Terminal RAIM should be automatically provided by the receiver. (Terminal RAIM for departure may not be available unless the waypoints are part of the active flight plan rather than proceeding direct to the first destination.) Certain segments of a DP may require some manual intervention by the pilot, especially when radar vectored to a course or required to intercept a specific course to a waypoint. The database may not contain all of the transitions or departures from all runways and some GPS receivers do not contain DPs in the database. It is necessary that helicopter procedures be flown at 70 knots or less since helicopter departure procedures and missed approaches use a 20:1 obstacle clearance surface (OCS), which is double the fixed-wing OCS, and turning areas are based on this speed as well. Flying GPS Approaches 1. Determining which area of the TAA the aircraft will enter when flying a “T” with a TAA must be accomplished using the bearing and distance to the IF(IAF). This is most critical when entering the TAA in the vicinity of the extended runway centerline and determining whether you will be entering the right or left base area. Once inside the TAA, all sectors and stepdowns are based on the bearing and distance to the IAF for that area, which the aircraft should be proceeding direct to at that time, unless on vectors. (See FIG 5-4-3 and FIG 5-4-4.) 268 RADIO DATA - GENERAL SECTION 1. AIR NAVIGATION AIDS 2. Pilots should fly the full approach from an Initial Approach Waypoint (IAWP) or feeder fix unless specifically cleared otherwise. Randomly joining an approach at an intermediate fix does not assure terrain clearance. 3. When an approach has been loaded in the flight plan, GPS receivers will give an “arm” annunciation 30 NM straight line distance from the airport/heliport reference point. Pilots should arm the approach mode at this time, if it has not already been armed (some receivers arm automatically). Without arming, the receiver will not change from enroute CDI and RAIM sensitivity of +/-5 NM either side of centerline to +/-1 NM terminal sensitivity. Where the IAWP is inside this 30 mile point, a CDI sensitivity change will occur once the approach mode is armed and the aircraft is inside 30 NM. Where the IAWP is beyond 30 NM from the airport/heliport reference point, CDI sensitivity will not change until the aircraft is within 30 miles of the airport/heliport reference point even if the approach is armed earlier. Feeder route obstacle clearance is predicated on the receiver being in terminal (+/-1 NM) CDI sensitivity and RAIM within 30 NM of the airport/heliport reference point, therefore, the receiver should always be armed (if required) not later than the 30 NM annunciation. 4. The pilot must be aware of what bank angle/turn rate the particular receiver uses to compute turn anticipation, and whether wind and airspeed are included in the receiver’s calculations. This information should be in the receiver operating manual. Over or under banking the turn onto the final approach course may significantly delay getting on course and may result in high descent rates to achieve the next segment altitude. 5. When within 2 NM of the FAWP with the approach mode armed, the approach mode will switch to active, which results in RAIM changing to approach sensitivity and a change in CDI sensitivity. Beginning 2 NM prior to the FAWP, the full scale CDI sensitivity will smoothly change from +/-1 NM to +/-0.3 NM at the FAWP. As sensitivity changes from +/-1 NM to +/-0.3 NM approaching the FAWP, with the CDI not centered, the corresponding increase in CDI displacement may give the impression that the aircraft is moving further away from the intended course even though it is on an acceptable intercept heading. Referencing the digital track displacement information (cross track error), if it is available in the approach mode, may help the pilot remain position oriented in this situation. Being established on the final approach course prior to the beginning of the sensitivity change at 2 NM will help prevent problems in interpreting the CDI display during ramp down. Therefore, requesting or accepting vectors which will cause the aircraft to intercept the final approach course within 2 NM of the FAWP is not recommended. 6. When receiving vectors to final, most receiver operating manuals suggest placing the receiver in the nonsequencing mode on the FAWP and manually setting the course. This provides an extended final approach course in cases where the aircraft is vectored onto the final approach course outside of any existing segment which is aligned with the runway. Assigned altitudes must be maintained until established on a published segment of the approach. Required altitudes at waypoints outside the FAWP or stepdown fixes must be considered. Calculating the distance to the FAWP may be required in order to descend at the proper location. 7. Overriding an automatically selected sensitivity during an approach will cancel the approach mode annunciation. If the approach mode is not armed by 2 NM prior to the FAWP, the approach mode will not become active at 2 NM prior to the FAWP, and the equipment will flag. In these conditions, the RAIM and CDI sensitivity will not ramp down, and the pilot should not descend to MDA, but fly to the MAWP and execute a missed approach. The approach active annunciator and/or the receiver should be checked to ensure the approach mode is active prior to the FAWP. 8. Do not attempt to fly an approach unless the procedure in the on-board database is current and identified as “GPS” on the approach chart. The navigation database may contain information about nonoverlay approach procedures that is intended to be used to enhance position orientation, generally by providing a map, while flying these approaches using conventional NAVAIDs. This approach information should not be confused with a GPS overlay approach (see the receiver operating manual, AFM, or AFM Supplement for details on how to identify these procedures in the navigation database). Flying point to point on the approach does not assure compliance with the published approach procedure. The proper RAIM sensitivity will not be available and the CDI sensitivity will not automatically change to +/-0.3 NM. Manually setting CDI sensitivity does not automatically change the RAIM sensitivity on some receivers. Some existing nonprecision approach procedures cannot be coded for use with GPS and will not be available as overlays. 9. Pilots should pay particular attention to the exact operation of their GPS receivers for performing holding patterns and in the case of overlay approaches, operations such as procedure turns. These procedures may require manual intervention by the pilot to stop the sequencing of waypoints by the receiver and to resume automatic GPS navigation sequencing once the maneuver is complete. The same waypoint may appear in the route of flight more than once consecutively (e.g., IAWP, FAWP, MAHWP on a procedure turn). Care must be exercised to ensure that the receiver is sequenced to the appropriate waypoint for the segment of the procedure being flown, especially if one or more fly-overs are skipped (e.g., FAWP rather than IAWP if the procedure turn is not flown). The pilot may have to sequence past one or more fly-overs of the same waypoint in order to start GPS automatic sequencing at the proper place in the sequence of waypoints. RADIO DATA - GENERAL SECTION 1. AIR NAVIGATION AIDS 269 10. Incorrect inputs into the GPS receiver are especially critical during approaches. In some cases, an incorrect entry can cause the receiver to leave the approach mode. 11. A fix on an overlay approach identified by a DME fix will not be in the waypoint sequence on the GPS receiver unless there is a published name assigned to it. When a name is assigned, the along track to the waypoint may be zero rather than the DME stated on the approach chart. The pilot should be alert for this on any overlay procedure where the original approach used DME. 12. If a visual descent point (VDP) is published, it will not be included in the sequence of waypoints. Pilots are expected to use normal piloting techniques for beginning the visual descent, such as ATD. 13. Unnamed stepdown fixes in the final approach segment will not be coded in the waypoint sequence of the aircraft’s navigation database and must be identified using ATD. Stepdown fixes in the final approach segment of RNAV (GPS) approaches are being named, in addition to being identified by ATD. However, since most GPS avionics do not accommodate waypoints between the FAF and MAP, even when the waypoint is named, the waypoints for these stepdown fixes may not appear in the sequence of waypoints in the navigation database. Pilots must continue to identify these stepdown fixes using ATD. o. Missed Approach 1. A GPS missed approach requires pilot action to sequence the receiver past the MAWP to the missed approach portion of the procedure. The pilot must be thoroughly familiar with the activation procedure for the particular GPS receiver installed in the aircraft and must initiate appropriate action after the MAWP. Activating the missed approach prior to the MAWP will cause CDI sensitivity to immediately change to terminal (+/-1NM) sensitivity and the receiver will continue to navigate to the MAWP. The receiver will not sequence past the MAWP. Turns should not begin prior to the MAWP. If the missed approach is not activated, the GPS receiver will display an extension of the inbound final approach course and the ATD will increase from the MAWP until it is manually sequenced after crossing the MAWP. 2. Missed approach routings in which the first track is via a course rather than direct to the next waypoint require additional action by the pilot to set the course. Being familiar with all of the inputs required is especially critical during this phase of flight. p. GPS Familiarization Pilots should practice GPS approaches under visual meteorological conditions (VMC) until thoroughly proficient with all aspects of their equipment (receiver and installation) prior to attempting flight by IFR in instrument meteorological conditions (IMC). Some of the areas which the pilot should practice are: 1. Utilizing the receiver autonomous integrity monitoring (RAIM) prediction function; 2. Inserting a DP into the flight plan, including setting terminal CDI sensitivity, if required, and the conditions under which terminal RAIM is available for departure (some receivers are not DP or STAR capable); 3. Programming the destination airport; 4. Programming and flying the overlay approaches (especially procedure turns and arcs); 5. Changing to another approach after selecting an approach; 6. Programming and flying “direct” missed approaches; 7. Programming and flying “routed” missed approaches; 8. Entering, flying, and exiting holding patterns, particularly on overlay approaches with a second waypoint in the holding pattern; 9. Programming and flying a “route” from a holding pattern; 10. Programming and flying an approach with radar vectors to the intermediate segment; 11. Indication of the actions required for RAIM failure both before and after the FAWP; and 12. Programming a radial and distance from a VOR (often used in departure instructions). 1-1-20 WIDE AREA AUGMENTATION SYSTEM (WAAS) a. General 1. The FAA developed the Wide Area Augmentation System (WAAS) to improve the accuracy, integrity and availability of GPS signals. WAAS will allow GPS to be used, as the aviation navigation system, from takeoff through Category I precision approach when it is complete. WAAS is a critical component of the FAA’s strategic objective for a seamless satellite navigation system for civil aviation, improving capacity and safety. 2. The International Civil Aviation Organization (ICAO) has defined Standards and Recommended Practices (SARPs) for satellite-based augmentation systems (SBAS) such as WAAS. Japan and Europe are building similar systems that are planned to be interoperable with WAAS: EGNOS, the European Geostationary Navigation Overlay System, and MSAS, the Japan Multifunctional Transport Satellite (MTSAT) Satellite-based Augmentation System. The merging of these systems will create a worldwide seamless navigation capability similar to GPS but with greater accuracy, availability and integrity. 270 RADIO DATA - GENERAL SECTION 1. AIR NAVIGATION AIDS 3. Unlike traditional ground-based navigation aids, WAAS will cover a more extensive service area. Precisely surveyed wide-area ground reference stations (WRS) are linked to form the U.S. WAAS network. Signals from the GPS satellites are monitored by these WRSs to determine satellite clock and ephemeris corrections and to model the propagation effects of the ionosphere. Each station in the network relays the data to a wide-area master station (WMS) where the correction information is computed. A correction message is prepared and uplinked to a geostationary satellite (GEO) via a ground uplink station (GUS). The message is then broadcast on the same frequency as GPS (L1, 1575.42 MHz) to WAAS receivers within the broadcast coverage area of the WAAS GEO. 4. In addition to providing the correction signal, the WAAS GEO provides an additional pseudorange measurement to the aircraft receiver, improving the availability of GPS by providing, in effect, an additional GPS satellite in view. The integrity of GPS is improved through real-time monitoring, and the accuracy is improved by providing differential corrections to reduce errors. The performance improvement is sufficient to enable approach procedures with GPS/WAAS glide paths (vertical guidance). 5. The FAA has completed installation of 25 WRSs, 2 WMSs, 4 GUSs, and the required terrestrial communications to support the WAAS network. Prior to the commissioning of the WAAS for public use, the FAA has been conducting a series of test and validation activities. Enhancements to the initial phase of WAAS will include additional master and reference stations, communication satellites, and transmission frequencies as needed. 6. GNSS navigation, including GPS and WAAS, is referenced to the WGS-84 coordinate system. It should only be used where the Aeronautical Information Publications (including electronic data and aeronautical charts) conform to WGS-84 or equivalent. Other countries civil aviation authorities may impose additional limitations on the use of their SBAS systems. b. Instrument Approach Capabilities 1. A new class of approach procedures which provide vertical guidance, but which do not meet the ICAO Annex 10 requirements for precision approaches has been developed to support satellite navigation use for aviation applications worldwide. These new procedures called Approach with Vertical Guidance (APV), are defined in ICAO Annex 6, and include approaches such as the LNAV/VNAV procedures presently being flown with barometric vertical navigation (Baro-VNAV). These approaches provide vertical guidance, but do not meet the more stringent standards of a precision approach. Properly certified WAAS receivers will be able to fly these LNAV/VNAV procedures using a WAAS electronic glide path, which eliminates the errors that can be introduced by using Barometric altimetry. 2. A new type of APV approach procedure, in addition to LNAV/VNAV, is being implemented to take advantage of the high accuracy guidance and increased integrity provided by WAAS. This WAAS generated angular guidance allows the use of the same TERPS approach criteria used for ILS approaches. The resulting approach procedure minima, titled LPV (localizer performance with vertical guidance), may have decision altitudes as low as 200 feet height above touchdown with visibility minimums as low as 1 /2 mile, when the terrain and airport infrastructure support the lowest minima. LPV minima is published on the RNAV (GPS) approach charts (see paragraph 5-4-5, Instrument Approach Procedure Charts). 3. A new nonprecision WAAS approach, called Localizer Performance (LP) is being added in locations where the terrain or obstructions do not allow publication of vertically guided LPV procedures. This new approach takes advantage of the angular lateral guidance and smaller position errors provided by WAAS to provide a lateral only procedure similar to an ILS Localizer. LP procedures may provide lower minima than a LNAV procedure due to the narrower obstacle clearance surface. NOTE: WAAS receivers certified prior to TSO C-145b and TSO C-146b, even if they have LPV capability, do not contain LP capability unless the receiver has been upgraded. Receivers capable of flying LP procedures must contain a statement in the Flight Manual Supplement or Approved Supplemental Flight Manual stating that the receiver has LP capability, as well as the capability for the other WAAS and GPS approach procedure types. 4. WAAS provides a level of service that supports all phases of flight, including RNAV (GPS) approaches to LNAV, LP, LNAV/VNAV and LPV lines of minima, within system coverage. Some locations close to the edge of the coverage may have a lower availability of vertical guidance. c. General Requirements 1. WAAS avionics must be certified in accordance with Technical Standard Order (TSO) TSO-C145A, Airborne Navigation Sensors Using the (GPS) Augmented by the Wide Area Augmentation System (WAAS); or TSO-146A, Stand-Alone Airborne Navigation Equipment Using the Global Positioning System (GPS) Augmented by the Wide Area Augmentation System (WAAS), and installed in accordance with Advisory Circular (AC) 20-130A, Airworthiness Approval of Navigation or Flight Management Systems Integrating Multiple Navigation Sensors, or AC 20-138A, Airworthiness Approval of Global Positioning System (GPS) Navigation Equipment for Use as a VFR and IFR Navigation System. RADIO DATA - GENERAL SECTION 1. AIR NAVIGATION AIDS 271 2. GPS/WAAS operation must be conducted in accordance with the FAA-approved aircraft flight manual (AFM) and flight manual supplements. Flight manual supplements will state the level of approach procedure that the receiver supports. IFR approved WAAS receivers support all GPS only operations as long as lateral capability at the appropriate level is functional. WAAS monitors both GPS and WAAS satellites and provides integrity. 3. GPS/WAAS equipment is inherently capable of supporting oceanic and remote operations if the operator obtains a fault detection and exclusion (FDE) prediction program. 4. Air carrier and commercial operators must meet the appropriate provisions of their approved operations specifications. 5. Prior to GPS/WAAS IFR operation, the pilot must review appropriate Notices to Airmen (NOTAMs) and aeronautical information. This information is available on request from an Automated Flight Service Station. The FAA will provide NOTAMs to advise pilots of the status of the WAAS and level of service available. (a) The term UNRELIABLE is used in conjunction with GPS and WAAS NOTAMs. The term UNRELIABLE is an advisory to pilots indicating the expected level of WAAS service (LNAV/VNAV, LPV) may not be available; e.g., !BOS BOS WAAS LPV AND LNAV/VNAV MNM UNREL WEF 0305231700 - 0305231815. WAAS UNRELIABLE NOTAMs are predictive in nature and published for flight planning purposes. Upon commencing an approach at locations NOTAMed WAAS UNRELIABLE, if the WAAS avionics indicate LNAV/VNAV or LPV service is available, then vertical guidance may be used to complete the approach using the displayed level of service. Should an outage occur during the approach, reversion to LNAV minima may be required. (1) Area-wide WAAS UNAVAILABLE NOTAMs indicate loss or malfunction of the WAAS system. In flight, Air Traffic Control will advise pilots requesting a GPS or RNAV (GPS) approach of WAAS UNAVAILABLE NOTAMs if not contained in the ATIS broadcast. (2) Site-specific WAAS UNRELIABLE NOTAMs indicate an expected level of service, e.g., LNAV/VNAV or LPV may not be available. Pilots must request site-specific WAAS NOTAMs during flight planning. In flight, Air Traffic Control will not advise pilots of WAAS UNRELIABLE NOTAMs. (3) When the approach chart includes the notes “WAAS outages may occur daily. WAAS VNAV NOTAM service not provided,” site-specific WAAS UNRELIABLE NOTAMs or Air Traffic advisories are not provided for outages in WAAS LNAV/VNAV and LPV vertical service. Vertical outages may occur daily at these locations due to being close to the edge of WAAS system coverage. Use LNAV minima for flight planning at these locations, whether as a destination or alternate. For flight operations at these locations, when the WAAS avionics indicate that LNAV/VNAV or LPV service is available, then the vertical guidance may be used to complete the approach using the displayed level of service. Should an outage occur during the procedure, reversion to LNAV minima may be required. NOTE: Area-wide WAAS UNAVAILABLE NOTAMs apply to all airports in the WAAS UNAVAILABLE area designated in the NOTAM, including approaches at airports where an approach chart is annotated with the notes identified above. 6. GPS/WAAS was developed to be used within SBAS GEO coverage (WAAS or other interoperable system) without the need for other radio navigation equipment appropriate to the route of flight to be flown. Outside the SBAS coverage or in the event of a WAAS failure, GPS/WAAS equipment reverts to GPS-only operation and satisfies the requirements for basic GPS equipment. 7. Unlike TSO-C129 avionics, which were certified as a supplement to other means of navigation, WAAS avionics are evaluated without reliance on other navigation systems. As such, installation of WAAS avionics does not require the aircraft to have other equipment appropriate to the route to be flown. (a) Pilots with WAAS receivers may flight plan to use any instrument approach procedure authorized for use with their WAAS avionics as the planned approach at a required alternate, with the following restrictions. When using WAAS at an alternate airport, flight planning must be based on flying the RNAV (GPS) LNAV minima line, or minima on a GPS approach procedure, or conventional approach procedure with “or GPS” in the title. Code of Federal Regulation (CFR) Part 91 nonprecision weather requirements must be used for planning. Upon arrival at an alternate, when the WAAS navigation system indicates that LNAV/VNAV or LPV service is available, then vertical guidance may be used to complete the approach using the displayed level of service. The FAA has begun to provide alternate minimums for RNAV (GPS) and stand-alone GPS procedures so they may be used by approach-approved WAAS receivers at alternate airports. Some approach procedures will still depict “NA” for other reasons, such as a lack of weather reporting, so this term cannot be removed from all procedures. Since every procedure must be individually evaluated, the addition of alternate minimums for RNAV (GPS) and stand-alone GPS procedures will take some time. d. Flying Procedures with WAAS 272 RADIO DATA - GENERAL SECTION 1. AIR NAVIGATION AIDS 1. WAAS receivers support all basic GPS approach functions and provide additional capabilities. One of the major improvements is the ability to generate glide path guidance, independent of ground equipment or barometric aiding. This eliminates several problems such as hot and cold temperature effects, incorrect altimeter setting or lack of a local altimeter source. It also allows approach procedures to be built without the cost of installing ground stations at each airport or runway. Some approach certified receivers may only generate a glide path with performance similar to Baro-VNAV and are only approved to fly the LNAV/VNAV line of minima on the RNAV (GPS) approach charts. Receivers with additional capability (including faster update rates and smaller integrity limits) are approved to fly the LPV line of minima. The lateral integrity changes dramatically from the 0.3 NM (556 meter) limit for GPS, LNAV, and LNAV/VNAV approach mode, to 40 meters for LPV. It also provides vertical integrity monitoring, which bounds the vertical error to 50 meters for LNAV/VNAV and LPVs with minima of 250' or above, and bounds the vertical error to 35 meters for LPVs with minima below 250'. 2. When an approach procedure is selected and active, the receiver will notify the pilot of the most accurate level of service supported by the combination of the WAAS signal, the receiver, and the selected approach using the naming conventions on the minima lines of the selected approach procedure. For example, if an approach is published with LPV minima and the receiver is only certified for LNAV/VNAV, the equipment would indicate “LNAV/VNAV available,” even though the WAAS signal would support LPV. If flying an existing LNAV/VNAV procedure with no LPV minima, the receiver will notify the pilot “LNAV/VNAV available,” even if the receiver is certified for LPV and the signal supports LPV. If the signal does not support vertical guidance on procedures with LPV and/or LNAV/VNAV minima, the receiver annunciation will read “LNAV available.” On lateral only procedures with LP and LNAV minima the receiver will indicate “LP available” or “LNAV available” based on the level of lateral service available. Once the level of service notification has been given, the receiver will operate in this mode for the duration of the approach procedure, unless that level of service becomes unavailable. The receiver cannot change back to a more accurate level of service until the next time an approach is activated. NOTE: Receivers do not “fail down” to lower levels of service once the approach has been activated. If only the vertical off flag appears, the pilot may elect to use the LNAV minima if the rules under which the flight is operating allow changing the type of approach being flown after commencing the procedure. If the lateral integrity limit is exceeded on an LP approach, a missed approach will be necessary since there is no way to reset the lateral alarm limit while the approach is active. 3. Another additional feature of WAAS receivers is the ability to exclude a bad GPS signal and continue operating normally. This is normally accomplished by the WAAS correction information. Outside WAAS coverage or when WAAS is not available, it is accomplished through a receiver algorithm called FDE. In most cases this operation will be invisible to the pilot since the receiver will continue to operate with other available satellites after excluding the “bad” signal. This capability increases the reliability of navigation. 4. Both lateral and vertical scaling for the LNAV/VNAV and LPV approach procedures are different than the linear scaling of basic GPS. When the complete published procedure is flown, +/-1 NM linear scaling is provided until two (2) NM prior to the FAF, where the sensitivity increases to be similar to the angular scaling of an ILS. There are two differences in the WAAS scaling and ILS: 1) on long final approach segments, the initial scaling will be +/-0.3 NM to achieve equivalent performance to GPS (and better than ILS, which is less sensitive far from the runway); 2) close to the runway threshold, the scaling changes to linear instead of continuing to become more sensitive. The width of the final approach course is tailored so that the total width is usually 700 feet at the runway threshold. Since the origin point of the lateral splay for the angular portion of the final is not fixed due to antenna placement like localizer, the splay angle can remain fixed, making a consistent width of final for aircraft being vectored onto the final approach course on different length runways. When the complete published procedure is not flown, and instead the aircraft needs to capture the extended final approach course similar to ILS, the vector to final (VTF) mode is used. Under VTF the scaling is linear at +/-1 NM until the point where the ILS angular splay reaches a width of +/-1 NM regardless of the distance from the FAWP. 5. The WAAS scaling is also different than GPS TSO-C129 in the initial portion of the missed approach. Two differences occur here. First, the scaling abruptly changes from the approach scaling to the missed approach scaling, at approximately the departure end of the runway or when the pilot requests missed approach guidance rather than ramping as GPS does. Second, when the first leg of the missed approach is a Track to Fix (TF) leg aligned within 3 degrees of the inbound course, the receiver will change to 0.3 NM linear sensitivity until the turn initiation point for the first waypoint in the missed approach procedure, at which time it will abruptly change to terminal (+/-1 NM) sensitivity. This allows the elimination of close in obstacles in the early part of the missed approach that may cause the DA to be raised. 6. A new method has been added for selecting the final approach segment of an instrument approach. Along with the current method used by most receivers using menus where the pilot selects the airport, the runway, the specific approach procedure and finally the IAF, there is also a channel number selection method. The pilot enters a unique 5-digit number provided on the approach chart, and the receiver recalls the matching final approach segment from the aircraft database. A list of information RADIO DATA - GENERAL SECTION 1. AIR NAVIGATION AIDS 273 including the available IAFs is displayed and the pilot selects the appropriate IAF. The pilot should confirm that the correct final approach segment was loaded by cross checking the Approach ID, which is also provided on the approach chart. 7. The Along-Track Distance (ATD) during the final approach segment of an LNAV procedure (with a minimum descent altitude) will be to the MAWP. On LNAV/VNAV and LPV approaches to a decision altitude, there is no missed approach waypoint so the along-track distance is displayed to a point normally located at the runway threshold. In most cases the MAWP for the LNAV approach is located on the runway threshold at the centerline, so these distances will be the same. This distance will always vary slightly from any ILS DME that may be present, since the ILS DME is located further down the runway. Initiation of the missed approach on the LNAV/VNAV and LPV approaches is still based on reaching the decision altitude without any of the items listed in 14 CFR Section 91.175 being visible, and must not be delayed until the ATD reaches zero. The WAAS receiver, unlike a GPS receiver, will automatically sequence past the MAWP if the missed approach procedure has been designed for RNAV. The pilot may also select missed approach prior to the MAWP, however, navigation will continue to the MAWP prior to waypoint sequencing taking place. 1-1-21 GROUND BASED AUGMENTATION SYSTEM (GBAS) LANDING SYSTEM (GLS) a. General 1. The GLS provides precision navigation guidance for exact alignment and descent of aircraft on approach to a runway. It provides differential augmentation to the Global Navigation Satellite System (GNSS). NOTE: GBAS is the ICAO term for Local Area Augmentation System (LAAS). 2. LAAS was developed as an “ILS look• alike” system from the pilot perspective. LAAS is based on GPS signals augmented by ground equipment and has been developed to provide GLS precision approaches similar to ILS at airfields. 3. GLS provides guidance similar to ILS approaches for the final approach segment; portions of the GLS approach prior to and after the final approach segment will be based on Area Navigation (RNAV) or Required Navigation Performance (RNP). 4. The equipment consists of a GBAS Ground Facility (GGF), four reference stations, a VHF Data Broadcast (VDB) uplink antenna, and an aircraft GBAS receiver. b. Procedure 1. Pilots will select the five digit GBAS channel number of the associated approach within the Flight Management System (FMS) menu or manually select the five digits (system dependent). Selection of the GBAS channel number also tunes the VDB. 2. Following procedure selection, confirmation that the correct LAAS procedure is loaded can be accomplished by cross checking the charted Reference Path Indicator (RPI) or approach ID with the cockpit displayed RPI or audio identification of the RPI with Morse Code (for some systems). 3. The pilot will fly the GLS approach using the same techniques as an ILS, once selected and identified. 1-1-22 PRECISION APPROACH SYSTEMS OTHER THAN ILS, GLS, AND MLS a. General Approval and use of precision approach systems other than ILS, GLS and MLS require the issuance of special instrument approach procedures. b. Special Instrument Approach Procedure 1. Special instrument approach procedures must be issued to the aircraft operator if pilot training, aircraft equipment, and/or aircraft performance is different than published procedures. Special instrument approach procedures are not distributed for general public use. These procedures are issued to an aircraft operator when the conditions for operations approval are satisfied. 2. General aviation operators requesting approval for special procedures should contact the local Flight Standards District Office to obtain a letter of authorization. Air carrier operators requesting approval for use of special procedures should contact their Certificate Holding District Office for authorization through their Operations Specification. c. Transponder Landing System (TLS) 1. The TLS is designed to provide approach guidance utilizing existing airborne ILS localizer, glide slope, and transponder equipment. 2. Ground equipment consists of a transponder interrogator, sensor arrays to detect lateral and vertical position, and ILS frequency transmitters. The TLS detects the aircraft’s position by interrogating its transponder. It then broadcasts ILS frequency signals to guide the aircraft along the desired approach path. 274 RADIO DATA - GENERAL SECTION 1. AIR NAVIGATION AIDS 3. TLS instrument approach procedures are designated Special Instrument Approach Procedures. Special aircrew training is required. TLS ground equipment provides approach guidance for only one aircraft at a time. Even though the TLS signal is received using the ILS receiver, no fixed course or glidepath is generated. The concept of operation is very similar to an air traffic controller providing radar vectors, and just as with radar vectors, the guidance is valid only for the intended aircraft. The TLS ground equipment tracks one aircraft, based on its transponder code, and provides correction signals to course and glidepath based on the position of the tracked aircraft. Flying the TLS corrections computed for another aircraft will not provide guidance relative to the approach; therefore, aircrews must not use the TLS signal for navigation unless they have received approach clearance and completed the required coordination with the TLS ground equipment operator. Navigation fixes based on conventional NAVAIDs or GPS are provided in the special instrument approach procedure to allow aircrews to verify the TLS guidance. d. Special Category I Differential GPS (SCAT-I DGPS) 1. The SCAT-I DGPS is designed to provide approach guidance by broadcasting differential correction to GPS. 2. SCAT-I DGPS procedures require aircraft equipment and pilot training. 3. Ground equipment consists of GPS receivers and a VHF digital radio transmitter. The SCAT-I DGPS detects the position of GPS satellites relative to GPS receiver equipment and broadcasts differential corrections over the VHF digital radio. 4. Category I Ground Based Augmentation System (GBAS) will displace SCAT-I DGPS as the public use service. REFERENCEAIM, Para 5-4-7f, Instrument Approach Procedures. RADIO DATA - GENERAL SECTION 2. AREA NAVIGATION (RNAV) AND REQUIRED NAVIGATION PERFORMANCE (RNP) 275 Section 2. Area Navigation (RNAV)/Required Navigation Performance (RNP) 1-2-1 AREA NAVIGATION (RNAV) a. General. RNAV is a method of navigation that permits aircraft operation on any desired flight path within the coverage of ground or space based navigation aids or within the limits of the capability of self-contained aids, or a combination of these. In the future, there will be an increased dependence on the use of RNAV in lieu of routes defined by ground-based navigation aids. RNAV routes and terminal procedures, including departure procedures (DPs) and standard terminal arrivals (STARs), are designed with RNAV systems in mind. There are several potential advantages of RNAV routes and procedures: 1. Time and fuel savings, 2. Reduced dependence on radar vectoring, altitude, and speed assignments allowing a reduction in required ATC radio transmissions, and 3. More efficient use of airspace. In addition to information found in this manual, guidance for domestic RNAV DPs, STARs, and routes may also be found in Advisory Circular 90-100A, U.S. Terminal and En Route Area Navigation (RNAV) Operations. b. RNAV Operations. RNAV procedures, such as DPs and STARs, demand strict pilot awareness and maintenance of the procedure centerline. Pilots should possess a working knowledge of their aircraft navigation system to ensure RNAV procedures are flown in an appropriate manner. In addition, pilots should have an understanding of the various waypoint and leg types used in RNAV procedures; these are discussed in more detail below. 1. Waypoints. A waypoint is a predetermined geographical position that is defined in terms of latitude/ longitude coordinates. Waypoints may be a simple named point in space or associated with existing navaids, intersections, or fixes. A waypoint is most often used to indicate a change in direction, speed, or altitude along the desired path. RNAV procedures make use of both fly-over and fly-by waypoints. (a) Fly-by waypoints. Fly-by waypoints are used when an aircraft should begin a turn to the next course prior to reaching the waypoint separating the two route segments. This is known as turn anticipation. (b) Fly-over waypoints. Fly-over waypoints are used when the aircraft must fly over the point prior to starting a turn. NOTE: FIG 1-2-1 illustrates several differences between a fly-by and a fly-over waypoint. FIGURE 1-2-1 Fly-by and Fly-over Waypoints 1300743358000 2. RNAV Leg Types. A leg type describes the desired path proceeding, following, or between waypoints on an RNAV procedure. Leg types are identified by a two-letter code that describes the path (e.g., heading, course, track, etc.) and the termination point (e.g., the path terminates at an altitude, distance, fix, etc.). Leg types used for procedure design are included in the aircraft navigation database, but not normally provided on the procedure chart. The narrative depiction of the RNAV chart describes how a procedure is flown. The “path and terminator concept” defines that every leg of a procedure has a termination point and some kind of path into that termination point. Some of the available leg types are described below. (a) Track to Fix. A Track to Fix (TF) leg is intercepted and acquired as the flight track to the following waypoint. Track to a Fix legs are sometimes called point-to-point legs for this reason. Narrative: “on track 087 to CHEZZ WP.” See FIG 1-2-2. (b) Direct to Fix. A Direct to Fix (DF) leg is a path described by an aircraft’s track from an initial area direct to the next waypoint. Narrative: “left turn direct BARGN WP.” See FIG 1-2-3. 276 RADIO DATA - GENERAL SECTION 2. AREA NAVIGATION (RNAV) AND REQUIRED NAVIGATION PERFORMANCE (RNP) FIGURE 1-2-2 Track to Fix Leg Type 1300744642000 FIGURE 1-2-3 Direct to Fix Leg Type 1300743297000 (c) Course to Fix. A Course to Fix (CF) leg is a path that terminates at a fix with a specified course at that fix. Narrative: “on course 078 to PRIMY WP.” See FIG 1-2-4. FIGURE 1-2-4 Course to Fix Leg Type 1300743194000 (d) Radius to Fix. A Radius to Fix (RF) leg is defined as a constant radius circular path around a defined turn center that terminates at a fix. See FIG 1-2-5. RADIO DATA - GENERAL SECTION 2. AREA NAVIGATION (RNAV) AND REQUIRED NAVIGATION PERFORMANCE (RNP) 277 FIGURE 1-2-5 Radius to Fix Leg Type 1300740988000 (e) Heading. A Heading leg may be defined as, but not limited to, a Heading to Altitude (VA), Heading to DME range (VD), and Heading to Manual Termination, i.e., Vector (VM). Narrative: “climb heading 350 to 1500”, “heading 265, at 9 DME west of PXR VORTAC, right turn heading 360”, “fly heading 090, expect radar vectors to DRYHT INT.” 3. Navigation Issues. Pilots should be aware of their navigation system inputs, alerts, and annunciations in order to make better-informed decisions. In addition, the availability and suitability of particular sensors/systems should be considered. (a) GPS. Operators using TSO-C129 systems should ensure departure and arrival airports are entered to ensure proper RAIM availability and CDI sensitivity. (b) DME/DME. Operators should be aware that DME/DME position updating is dependent on FMS logic and DME facility proximity, availability, geometry, and signal masking. (c) VOR/DME. Unique VOR characteristics may result in less accurate values from VOR/DME position updating than from GPS or DME/DME position updating. (d) Inertial Navigation. Inertial reference units and inertial navigation systems are often coupled with other types of navigation inputs, e.g., DME/DME or GPS, to improve overall navigation system performance. NOTE: Specific inertial position updating requirements may apply. 4. Flight Management System (FMS). An FMS is an integrated suite of sensors, receivers, and computers, coupled with a navigation database. These systems generally provide performance and RNAV guidance to displays and automatic flight control systems. Inputs can be accepted from multiple sources such as GPS, DME, VOR, LOC and IRU. These inputs may be applied to a navigation solution one at a time or in combination. Some FMSs provide for the detection and isolation of faulty navigation information. When appropriate navigation signals are available, FMSs will normally rely on GPS and/or DME/DME (that is, the use of distance information from two or more DME stations) for position updates. Other inputs may also be incorporated based on FMS system architecture and navigation source geometry. NOTE: DME/DME inputs coupled with one or more IRU(s) are often abbreviated as DME/DME/IRU or D/D/I. 1-2-2 REQUIRED NAVIGATION PERFORMANCE (RNP) a. General. RNP is RNAV with on-board navigation monitoring and alerting, RNP is also a statement of navigation performance necessary for operation within a defined airspace. A critical component of RNP is the ability of the aircraft navigation system to monitor its achieved navigation performance, and to identify for the pilot whether the operational requirement is, or is not being met during an operation. This on-board performance monitoring and alerting capability therefore allows a lessened reliance on air traffic control intervention (via radar monitoring, automatic dependent surveillance (ADS), multilateration, communications), and/or route separation to achieve the overall safety of the operation. RNP capability of the aircraft is a major component in determining the separation criteria to ensure that the overall containment of the operation is met. The RNP capability of an aircraft will vary depending upon the aircraft equipment and the navigation infrastructure. For example, an aircraft may be equipped and certified for RNP 1.0, but may not be capable of RNP 1.0 operations due to limited navaid coverage. b. RNP Operations. 278 RADIO DATA - GENERAL SECTION 2. AREA NAVIGATION (RNAV) AND REQUIRED NAVIGATION PERFORMANCE (RNP) 1. RNP Levels. An RNP “level” or “type” is applicable to a selected airspace, route, or procedure. As defined in the Pilot/Controller Glossary, the RNP Level or Type is a value typically expressed as a distance in nautical miles from the intended centerline of a procedure, route, or path. RNP applications also account for potential errors at some multiple of RNP level (e.g., twice the RNP level). (a) Standard RNP Levels. U.S. standard values supporting typical RNP airspace are as specified in TBL 1-2-1 below. Other RNP levels as identified by ICAO, other states and the FAA may also be used. TABLE 1-2-1 U.S. Standard RNP Levels RNP Level Typical Application Primary Route Width (NM) - Centerline to Boundary 0.1 to 1.0 RNP SAAAR Approach Segments 0.1 to 1.0 0.3 to 1.0 RNP Approach Segments 0.3 to 1.0 1 Terminal and En Route 1.0 2 En Route 2.0 NOTE: 1. The “performance” of navigation in RNP refers not only to the level of accuracy of a particular sensor or aircraft navigation system, but also to the degree of precision with which the aircraft will be flown. 2. Specific required flight procedures may vary for different RNP levels. (b) Application of Standard RNP Levels. U.S. standard levels of RNP typically used for various routes and procedures supporting RNAV operations may be based on use of a specific navigational system or sensor such as GPS, or on multi-sensor RNAV systems having suitable performance. (c) Depiction of Standard RNP Levels. The applicable RNP level will be depicted on affected charts and procedures. c. Other RNP Applications Outside the U.S. The FAA and ICAO member states have led initiatives in implementing the RNP concept to oceanic operations. For example, RNP-10 routes have been established in the northern Pacific (NOPAC) which has increased capacity and efficiency by reducing the distance between tracks to 50 NM. (See TBL 1-2-2). d. Aircraft and Airborne Equipment Eligibility for RNP Operations. Aircraft meeting RNP criteria will have an appropriate entry including special conditions and limitations in its Aircraft Flight Manual (AFM), or supplement. Operators of aircraft not having specific AFM-RNP certification may be issued operational approval including special conditions and limitations for specific RNP levels. NOTE: Some airborne systems use Estimated Position Uncertainty (EPU) as a measure of the current estimated navigational performance. EPU may also be referred to as Actual Navigation Performance (ANP) or Estimated Position Error (EPE). TABLE 1-2-2 RNP Levels Supported for International Operations RNP Level 1-2-3 Typical Application 4 Projected for oceanic/remote areas where 30 NM horizontal separation is applied 10 Oceanic/remote areas where 50 NM lateral separation is applied USE OF SUITABLE AREA NAVIGATION (RNAV) SYSTEMS ON CONVENTIONAL PROCEDURES AND ROUTES a. Discussion. This paragraph sets forth policy, while providing operational and airworthiness guidance regarding the suitability and use of RNAV systems when operating on, or transitioning to, conventional, non-RNAV routes and procedures within the U.S. National Airspace System (NAS): 1. Use of a suitable RNAV system as a Substitute Means of Navigation when a Very-High Frequency (VHF) Omni-directional Range (VOR), Distance Measuring Equipment (DME), Tactical Air Navigation (TACAN), VOR/TACAN (VORTAC), VOR/DME, Non-directional Beacon (NDB), or compass locator facility including locator outer marker and locator middle marker is out-of-service (that is, the navigation aid (NAVAID) information is not available); an aircraft is not equipped with an Automatic Direction Finder (ADF) or DME; or the installed ADF or DME on an aircraft is not operational. For example, if equipped with a suitable RNAV system, a pilot may hold over an out-of-service NDB. 2. Use of a suitable RNAV system as an Alternate Means of Navigation when a VOR, DME, VORTAC, VOR/DME, TACAN, NDB, or compass locator facility including locator outer marker and locator middle marker is operational and the respective aircraft is equipped with operational navigation equipment that is compatible with conventional navaids. For example, if equipped with a suitable RNAV system, a pilot may fly a procedure or route based on operational VOR system without monitoring the VOR. NOTE: 1. Additional information and associated requirements are available in Advisory Circular 90-108 titled “Use of Suitable RNAV Systems on Conventional Routes and Procedures.” RADIO DATA - GENERAL SECTION 2. AREA NAVIGATION (RNAV) AND REQUIRED NAVIGATION PERFORMANCE (RNP) 279 2. Good planning and knowledge of your RNAV system are critical for safe and successful operations. 3. Pilots planning to use their RNAV system as a substitute means of navigation guidance in lieu of an out-of-service NAVAID may need to advise ATC of this intent and capability. 4. The navigation database should be current for the duration of the flight. If the AIRAC cycle will change during flight, operators and pilots should establish procedures to ensure the accuracy of navigation data, including suitability of navigation facilities used to define the routes and procedures for flight. To facilitate validating database currency, the FAA has developed procedures for publishing the amendment date that instrument approach procedures were last revised. The amendment date follows the amendment number, e.g., Amdt 4 14Jan10. Currency of graphic departure procedures and STARs may be ascertained by the numerical designation in the procedure title. If an amended chart is published for the procedure, or the procedure amendment date shown on the chart is on or after the expiration date of the database, the operator must not use the database to conduct the operation. b. Types of RNAV Systems that Qualify as a Suitable RNAV System. When installed in accordance with appropriate airworthiness installation requirements and operated in accordance with applicable operational guidance (e.g., aircraft flight manual and Advisory Circular material), the following systems qualify as a suitable RNAV system: 1. An RNAV system with TSO-C129/-C145/-C146 equipment, installed in accordance with AC 20-138, Airworthiness Approval of Global Positioning System (GPS) Navigation Equipment for Use as a VFR and IFR Supplemental Navigation System, or AC 20-130A, Airworthiness Approval of Navigation or Flight Management Systems Integrating Multiple Navigation Sensors, and authorized for instrument flight rules (IFR) en route and terminal operations (including those systems previously qualified for “GPS in lieu of ADF or DME” operations), or 2. An RNAV system with DME/DME/IRU inputs that is compliant with the equipment provisions of AC 90-100A, U.S. Terminal and En Route Area Navigation (RNAV) Operations, for RNAV routes. A table of compliant equipment is available at the following website: http://www.faa.gov/about/office_org/headquarters_offices/avs/offices/afs/afs400/afs470/policy_guidance/ NOTE: Approved RNAV systems using DME/DME/IRU, without GPS/WAAS position input, may only be used as a substitute means of navigation when specifically authorized by a Notice to Airmen (NOTAM) or other FAA guidance for a specific procedure. The NOTAM or other FAA guidance authorizing the use of DME/DME/IRU systems will also identify any required DME facilities based on an FAA assessment of the DME navigation infrastructure. c. Uses of Suitable RNAV Systems. Subject to the operating requirements, operators may use a suitable RNAV system in the following ways. 1. Determine aircraft position relative to, or distance from a VOR (see NOTE 5 below), TACAN, NDB, compass locator, DME fix; or a named fix defined by a VOR radial, TACAN course, NDB bearing, or compass locator bearing intersecting a VOR or localizer course. 2. Navigate to or from a VOR, TACAN, NDB, or compass locator. 3. Hold over a VOR, TACAN, NDB, compass locator, or DME fix. 4. Fly an arc based upon DME. NOTE: 1. The allowances described in this section apply even when a facility is explicitly identified as required on a procedure (for example, “Note ADF required”). 2. These operations do not include lateral navigation on localizer-based courses (including localizer back-course guidance) without reference to raw localizer data. 3. Unless otherwise specified, a suitable RNAV system cannot be used for navigation on procedures that are identified as not authorized (“NA”) without exception by a NOTAM. For example, an operator may not use a RNAV system to navigate on a procedure affected by an expired or unsatisfactory flight inspection, or a procedure that is based upon a recently decommissioned NAVAID. 4. Pilots may not substitute for the NAVAID (for example, a VOR or NDB) providing lateral guidance for the final approach segment. This restriction does not refer to instrument approach procedures with “or GPS” in the title when using GPS or WAAS. These allowances do not apply to procedures that are identified as not authorized (NA) without exception by a NOTAM, as other conditions may still exist and result in a procedure not being available. For example, these allowances do not apply to a procedure associated with an expired or unsatisfactory flight inspection, or is based upon a recently decommissioned NAVAID. 5. For the purpose of paragraph c, “VOR” includes VOR, VOR/DME, and VORTAC facilities and “compass locator” includes locator outer marker and locator middle marker. d. Alternate Airport Considerations. For the purposes of flight planning, any required alternate airport must have an available instrument approach procedure that does not require the use of GPS. This restriction includes conducting a conventional approach at the alternate airport using a substitute means of navigation that is based upon the use of GPS. For example, these restrictions would apply when planning to use GPS 280 RADIO DATA - GENERAL SECTION 2. AREA NAVIGATION (RNAV) AND REQUIRED NAVIGATION PERFORMANCE (RNP) equipment as a substitute means of navigation for an out-of-service VOR that supports an ILS missed approach procedure at an alternate airport. In this case, some other approach not reliant upon the use of GPS must be available. This restriction does not apply to RNAV systems using TSO-C145/-C146 WAAS equipment. For further WAAS guidance see AIM 1-1-20. RADIO DATA - GENERAL SECTION 5. SURVEILLANCE SYSTEMS 281 Section 5. Surveillance Systems 4-5-1 RADAR a. Capabilities 1. Radar is a method whereby radio waves are transmitted into the air and are then received when they have been reflected by an object in the path of the beam. Range is determined by measuring the time it takes (at the speed of light) for the radio wave to go out to the object and then return to the receiving antenna. The direction of a detected object from a radar site is determined by the position of the rotating antenna when the reflected portion of the radio wave is received. 2. More reliable maintenance and improved equipment have reduced radar system failures to a negligible factor. Most facilities actually have some components duplicated, one operating and another which immediately takes over when a malfunction occurs to the primary component. b. Limitations 1. It is very important for the aviation community to recognize the fact that there are limitations to radar service and that ATC controllers may not always be able to issue traffic advisories concerning aircraft which are not under ATC control and cannot be seen on radar. (See FIG 4-5-1.) FIGURE 4-5-1 Limitations to Radar Service 1234990062000 (a) The characteristics of radio waves are such that they normally travel in a continuous straight line unless they are: (1) “Bent” by abnormal atmospheric phenomena such as temperature inversions; (2) Reflected or attenuated by dense objects such as heavy clouds, precipitation, ground obstacles, mountains, etc.; or (3) Screened by high terrain features. (b) The bending of radar pulses, often called anomalous propagation or ducting, may cause many extraneous blips to appear on the radar operator's display if the beam has been bent toward the ground or may decrease the detection range if the wave is bent upward. It is difficult to solve the effects of anomalous propagation, but using beacon radar and electronically eliminating stationary and slow moving targets by a method called moving target indicator (MTI) usually negate the problem. (c) Radar energy that strikes dense objects will be reflected and displayed on the operator's scope thereby blocking out aircraft at the same range and greatly weakening or completely eliminating the display of targets at a greater range. Again, radar beacon and MTI are very effectively used to combat ground clutter and weather phenomena, and a method of circularly polarizing the radar beam will eliminate some weather returns. A negative characteristic of MTI is that an aircraft flying a speed that coincides with the canceling signal of the MTI (tangential or “blind” speed) may not be displayed to the radar controller. (d) Relatively low altitude aircraft will not be seen if they are screened by mountains or are below the radar beam due to earth curvature. The only solution to screening is the installation of strategically placed multiple radars which has been done in some areas. (e) There are several other factors which affect radar control. The amount of reflective surface of an aircraft will determine the size of the radar return. Therefore, a small light airplane or a sleek jet fighter will be more difficult to see on radar than a large commercial jet or military bomber. Here again, the use of radar beacon is invaluable if the aircraft is equipped with an airborne 282 RADIO DATA - GENERAL SECTION 5. SURVEILLANCE SYSTEMS transponder. All ARTCCs' radars in the conterminous U.S. and many airport surveillance radars have the capability to interrogate Mode C and display altitude information to the controller from appropriately equipped aircraft. However, there are a number of airport surveillance radars that don't have Mode C display capability and; therefore, altitude information must be obtained from the pilot. (f) At some locations within the ATC en route environment, secondary-radar-only (no primary radar) gap filler radar systems are used to give lower altitude radar coverage between two larger radar systems, each of which provides both primary and secondary radar coverage. In those geographical areas served by secondary-radar only, aircraft without transponders cannot be provided with radar service. Additionally, transponder equipped aircraft cannot be provided with radar advisories concerning primary targets and weather. REFERENCE-Pilot/Controller Glossary Term- Radar. (g) The controller's ability to advise a pilot flying on instruments or in visual conditions of the aircraft's proximity to another aircraft will be limited if the unknown aircraft is not observed on radar, if no flight plan information is available, or if the volume of traffic and workload prevent issuing traffic information. The controller's first priority is given to establishing vertical, lateral, or longitudinal separation between aircraft flying IFR under the control of ATC. c. FAA radar units operate continuously at the locations shown in the Airport/Facility Directory, and their services are available to all pilots, both civil and military. Contact the associated FAA control tower or ARTCC on any frequency guarded for initial instructions, or in an emergency, any FAA facility for information on the nearest radar service. 4-5-2 AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL RADAR BEACON SYSTEM (ATCRBS) a. The ATCRBS, sometimes referred to as secondary surveillance radar, consists of three main components: 1. Interrogator. Primary radar relies on a signal being transmitted from the radar antenna site and for this signal to be reflected or “bounced back” from an object (such as an aircraft). This reflected signal is then displayed as a “target” on the controller's radarscope. In the ATCRBS, the Interrogator, a ground based radar beacon transmitter-receiver, scans in synchronism with the primary radar and transmits discrete radio signals which repetitiously request all transponders, on the mode being used, to reply. The replies received are then mixed with the primary returns and both are displayed on the same radarscope. 2. Transponder. This airborne radar beacon transmitter-receiver automatically receives the signals from the interrogator and selectively replies with a specific pulse group (code) only to those interrogations being received on the mode to which it is set. These replies are independent of, and much stronger than a primary radar return. 3. Radarscope. The radarscope used by the controller displays returns from both the primary radar system and the ATCRBS. These returns, called targets, are what the controller refers to in the control and separation of traffic. b. The job of identifying and maintaining identification of primary radar targets is a long and tedious task for the controller. Some of the advantages of ATCRBS over primary radar are: 1. Reinforcement of radar targets. 2. Rapid target identification. 3. Unique display of selected codes. c. A part of the ATCRBS ground equipment is the decoder. This equipment enables a controller to assign discrete transponder codes to each aircraft under his/her control. Normally only one code will be assigned for the entire flight. Assignments are made by the ARTCC computer on the basis of the National Beacon Code Allocation Plan. The equipment is also designed to receive Mode C altitude information from the aircraft. NOTE: Refer to figures with explanatory legends for an illustration of the target symbology depicted on radar scopes in the NAS Stage A (en route), the ARTS III (terminal) Systems, and other nonautomated (broadband) radar systems. (See FIG 4-5-2 and FIG 4-5-3.) d. It should be emphasized that aircraft transponders greatly improve the effectiveness of radar systems. REFERENCE-AIM, Transponder Operation, Paragraph 4-1-19. RADIO DATA - GENERAL SECTION 5. SURVEILLANCE SYSTEMS 283 FIGURE 4-5-2 ARTS III Radar Scope With Alphanumeric Data 1 234990062000 NOTE: A number of radar terminals do not have ARTS equipment. Those facilities and certain ARTCCs outside the contiguous U.S. would have radar displays similar to the lower right hand subset. ARTS facilities and NAS Stage A ARTCCs, when operating in the nonautomation mode, would also have similar displays and certain services based on automation may not be available. EXAMPLE: 1. Areas of precipitation (can be reduced by CP) 2. Arrival/departure tabular list 3. Trackball (control) position symbol (A) 4. Airway (lines are sometimes deleted in part) 5. Radar limit line for control 6. Obstruction (video map) 284 RADIO DATA - GENERAL SECTION 5. SURVEILLANCE SYSTEMS 7. Primary radar returns of obstacles or terrain (can be removed by MTI) 8. Satellite airports 9. Runway centerlines (marks and spaces indicate miles) 10. Primary airport with parallel runways 11. Approach gates 12. Tracked target (primary and beacon target) 13. Control position symbol 14. Untracked target select code (monitored) with Mode C readout of 5,000' 15. Untracked target without Mode C 16. Primary target 17. Beacon target only (secondary radar) (transponder) 18. Primary and beacon target 19. Leader line 20. Altitude Mode C readout is 6,000' NOTE: Readouts may not be displayed because of nonreceipt of beacon information, garbled beacon signals, and flight plan data which is displayed alternately with the altitude readout. 21. Ground speed readout is 240 knots NOTE: Readouts may not be displayed because of a loss of beacon signal, a controller alert that a pilot was squawking emergency, radio failure, etc. 22. Aircraft ID 23. Asterisk indicates a controller entry in Mode C block. In this case 5,000' is entered and “05” would alternate with Mode C readout. 24. Indicates heavy 25. “Low ALT” flashes to indicate when an aircraft's predicted descent places the aircraft in an unsafe proximity to terrain. NOTE: This feature does not function if the aircraft is not squawking Mode C. When a helicopter or aircraft is known to be operating below the lower safe limit, the “low ALT” can be changed to “inhibit” and flashing ceases. 26. NAVAIDs 27. Airways 28. Primary target only 29. Nonmonitored. No Mode C (an asterisk would indicate nonmonitored with Mode C) 30. Beacon target only (secondary radar based on aircraft transponder) 31. Tracked target (primary and beacon target) control position A 32. Aircraft is squawking emergency Code 7700 and is nonmonitored, untracked, Mode C 33. Controller assigned runway 36 right alternates with Mode C readout NOTE: A three letter identifier could also indicate the arrival is at specific airport. 34. Ident flashes 35. Identing target blossoms 36. Untracked target identing on a selected code 37. Range marks (10 and 15 miles) (can be changed/offset) 38. Aircraft controlled by center 39. Targets in suspend status 40. Coast/suspend list (aircraft holding, temporary loss of beacon/target, etc.) 41. Radio failure (emergency information) 42. Select beacon codes (being monitored) 43. General information (ATIS, runway, approach in use) 44. Altimeter setting 45. Time 46. System data area RADIO DATA - GENERAL SECTION 5. SURVEILLANCE SYSTEMS 285 FIGURE 4-5-3 NAS Stage A Controllers View Plan Display This figure illustrates the controller’s radar scope (PVD) when operating in the full automation (RDP) mode, which is normally 20 hours per day. (When not in automation mode, the display is similar to the broadband mode shown in the ARTS III radar scope figure. Certain ARTCCs outside the contiguous U.S. also operate in “broadband” mode.) 1 234990062000 EXAMPLE: Target symbols: 1. Uncorrelated primary radar target [o] [+] 2. Correlated primary radar target See note below. 3. Uncorrelated beacon target [ / ] 4. Correlated beacon target [ \ ] 1234990062000 5. Indenting beacon target NOTE: In Number 2 correlated means the association of radar data with the computer projected track of an identified aircraft. 1234990062000 286 RADIO DATA - GENERAL SECTION 5. SURVEILLANCE SYSTEMS Position symbols: 6. Free track (no flight plan tracking) 7. Flat track (flight plan tracking) 8. Coast (beacon target lost) [#] 9. Present position hold Data block information: 10. Aircraft ident See note below. 1234990062000 1234990062000 1234990062000 11. Assigned altitude FL280, Mode C altitude same or within 200' of assigned altitude. See note below. 12. Computer ID #191, handoff is to sector 33 (0-33 would mean handoff accepted) See note below. 13. Assigned altitude 17,000', aircraft is climbing, Mode C readout was 14,300 when last beacon interrogation was received. 14. Leader line connecting target symbol and data block 15. Track velocity and direction vector line (projected ahead of target) 16. Assigned altitude 7,000, aircraft is descending, last Mode C readout (or last reported altitude) was 100' above FL230 17. Transponder code shows in full data block only when different than assigned code 18. Aircraft is 300' above assigned altitude 19. Reported altitude (no Mode C readout) same as assigned. (An “n” would indicate no reported altitude.) 20. Transponder set on emergency Code 7700 (EMRG flashes to attract attention) 21. Transponder Code 1200 (VFR) with no Mode C 22. Code 1200 (VFR) with Mode C and last altitude readout 23. Transponder set on radio failure Code 7600 (RDOF flashes) 24. Computer ID #228, CST indicates target is in coast status 25. Assigned altitude FL290, transponder code (these two items constitute a “limited data block”) NOTE: Numbers 10, 11, and 12 constitute a “full data block” Other symbols: 26. Navigational aid 27. Airway or jet route 28. Outline of weather returns based on primary radar. “H” represents areas of high density precipitation which might be thunderstorms. Radial lines indicated lower density precipitation. 29. Obstruction 30. Airports 1234990062000 1234990062000 4-5-3 SURVEILLANCE RADAR a. Surveillance radars are divided into two general categories: Airport Surveillance Radar (ASR) and Air Route Surveillance Radar (ARSR). 1. ASR is designed to provide relatively short-range coverage in the general vicinity of an airport and to serve as an expeditious means of handling terminal area traffic through observation of precise aircraft locations on a radarscope. The ASR can also be used as an instrument approach aid. 2. ARSR is a long-range radar system designed primarily to provide a display of aircraft locations over large areas. 3. Center Radar Automated Radar Terminal Systems (ARTS) Processing (CENRAP) was developed to provide an alternative to a nonradar environment at terminal facilities should an ASR fail or malfunction. CENRAP sends aircraft radar beacon target information to the ASR terminal facility equipped with ARTS. Procedures used for the separation of aircraft may increase under certain conditions when a facility is utilizing CENRAP because radar target information updates at a slower rate than the normal ASR radar. Radar services for VFR aircraft are also limited during CENRAP operations because of the additional workload required to provide services to IFR aircraft. RADIO DATA - GENERAL SECTION 5. SURVEILLANCE SYSTEMS 287 b. Surveillance radars scan through 360 degrees of azimuth and present target information on a radar display located in a tower or center. This information is used independently or in conjunction with other navigational aids in the control of air traffic. 4-5-4 PRECISION APPROACH RADAR (PAR) a. PAR is designed for use as a landing aid rather than an aid for sequencing and spacing aircraft. PAR equipment may be used as a primary landing aid (See Chapter 5, Air Traffic Procedures, for additional information), or it may be used to monitor other types of approaches. It is designed to display range, azimuth, and elevation information. b. Two antennas are used in the PAR array, one scanning a vertical plane, and the other scanning horizontally. Since the range is limited to 10 miles, azimuth to 20 degrees, and elevation to 7 degrees, only the final approach area is covered. Each scope is divided into two parts. The upper half presents altitude and distance information, and the lower half presents azimuth and distance. 4-5-5 AIRPORT SURFACE DETECTION EQUIPMENT - MODEL X (ASDE-X) a. The Airport Surface Detection Equipment - Model X (ASDE-X) is a multi-sensor surface surveillance system the FAA is acquiring for airports in the United States. This system will provide high resolution, short-range, clutter free surveillance information about aircraft and vehicles, both moving and fixed, located on or near the surface of the airport's runways and taxiways under all weather and visibility conditions. The system consists of: 1. A Primary Radar System. ASDE-X system coverage includes the airport surface and the airspace up to 200 feet above the surface. Typically located on the control tower or other strategic location on the airport, the Primary Radar antenna is able to detect and display aircraft that are not equipped with or have malfunctioning transponders. 2. Interfaces. ASDE-X contains an automation interface for flight identification via all automation platforms and interfaces with the terminal radar for position information. 3. ASDE-X Automation. A Multi-sensor Data Processor (MSDP) combines all sensor reports into a single target which is displayed to the air traffic controller. 4. Air Traffic Control Tower Display. A high resolution, color monitor in the control tower cab provides controllers with a seamless picture of airport operations on the airport surface. b. The combination of data collected from the multiple sensors ensures that the most accurate information about aircraft location is received in the tower, thereby increasing surface safety and efficiency. c. The following facilities have been projected to receive ASDE-X: Table 4-5-1 STL CLT SDF DFW ORD LAX ATL IAD SEA MKE MCO PVD PHX MEM RDU HOU BDL SJC SAT SMF FLL HNL OAK IND Lambert-St. Louis International Charlotte Douglas International Louisville International Standiford Dallas/Ft. Worth International Chicago O'Hare International Los Angeles International Hartsfield Atlanta International Washington Dulles International Seattle-Tacoma International General Mitchell International Orlando International Theodore Francis Green State Phoenix Sky Harbor International Memphis International Raleigh-Durham International William P. Hobby (Houston, TX) Bradley International San Jose International San Antonio International Sacramento International Ft. Lauderdale/Hollywood Honolulu International - Hickam AFB Metropolitan Oakland International Indianapolis International 288 RADIO DATA - GENERAL SECTION 5. SURVEILLANCE SYSTEMS Table 4-5-1 (continued) TPA BUR CMH MDW COS SNA ONT AUS RNO ABQ SJU 4-5-6 Tampa International Burbank-Glendale-Pasadena Port Columbus International Chicago Midway Colorado Springs Municipal John Wayne - Orange County Ontario International Austin-Bergstrom International Reno/Tahoe International Albuquerque International Sunport San Juan International TRAFFIC INFORMATION SERVICE (TIS) a. Introduction The Traffic Information Service (TIS) provides information to the cockpit via data link, that is similar to VFR radar traffic advisories normally received over voice radio. Among the first FAA-provided data services, TIS is intended to improve the safety and efficiency of “see and avoid” flight through an automatic display that informs the pilot of nearby traffic and potential conflict situations. This traffic display is intended to assist the pilot in visual acquisition of these aircraft. TIS employs an enhanced capability of the terminal Mode S radar system, which contains the surveillance data, as well as the data link required to “uplink” this information to suitably-equipped aircraft (known as a TIS “client”). TIS provides estimated position, altitude, altitude trend, and ground track information for up to 8 intruder aircraft within 7 NM horizontally, +3,500 and -3,000 feet vertically of the client aircraft (see FIG 4-5-4, TIS Proximity Coverage Volume). The range of a target reported at a distance greater than 7 NM only indicates that this target will be a threat within 34 seconds and does not display an precise distance. TIS will alert the pilot to aircraft (under surveillance of the Mode S radar) that are estimated to be within 34 seconds of potential collision, regardless of distance of altitude. TIS surveillance data is derived from the same radar used by ATC; this data is uplinked to the client aircraft on each radar scan (nominally every 5 seconds). b. Requirements 1. In order to use TIS, the client and any intruder aircraft must be equipped with the appropriate cockpit equipment and fly within the radar coverage of a Mode S radar capable of providing TIS. Typically, this will be within 55 NM of the sites depicted in FIG 4-5-5, Terminal Mode S Radar Sites. ATC communication is not a requirement to receive TIS, although it may be required by the particular airspace or flight operations in which TIS is being used. FIGURE 4-5-4 TIS Proximity Coverage Volume 1234990062000 RADIO DATA - GENERAL SECTION 5. SURVEILLANCE SYSTEMS 289 FIGURE 4-5-5 Terminal Mode S Radar Sites 1 234990062000 290 RADIO DATA - GENERAL SECTION 5. SURVEILLANCE SYSTEMS FIGURE 4-5-6 Traffic Information Service (TIS) Avionics Block Diagram 1 234990062000 2. The cockpit equipment functionality required by a TIS client aircraft to receive the service consists of the following (refer to FIG 4-5-6): (a) Mode S data link transponder with altitude encoder. (b) Data link applications processor with TIS software installed. (c) Control-display unit. (d) Optional equipment includes a digital heading source to correct display errors caused by “crab angle” and turning maneuvers. NOTE: Some of the above functions will likely be combined into single pieces of avionics, such as (a) and (b). RADIO DATA - GENERAL SECTION 5. SURVEILLANCE SYSTEMS 291 3. To be visible to the TIS client, the intruder aircraft must, at a minimum, have an operating transponder (Mode A, C or S). All altitude information provided by TIS from intruder aircraft is derived from Mode C reports, if appropriately equipped. 4. TIS will initially be provided by the terminal Mode S systems that are paired with ASR-9 digital primary radars. These systems are in locations with the greatest traffic densities, thus will provide the greatest initial benefit. The remaining terminal Mode S sensors, which are paired with ASR-7 or ASR-8 analog primary radars, will provide TIS pending modification or relocation of these sites. See FIG 4-5-5, Terminal Mode S Radar Sites, for site locations. There is no mechanism in place, such as NOTAMs, to provide status update on individual radar sites since TIS is a nonessential, supplemental information service. The FAA also operates en route Mode S radars (not illustrated) that rotate once every 12 seconds. These sites will require additional development of TIS before any possible implementation. There are no plans to implement TIS in the en route Mode S radars at the present time. c. Capabilities 1. TIS provides ground-based surveillance information over the Mode S data link to properly equipped client aircraft to aid in visual acquisition of proximate air traffic. The actual avionics capability of each installation will vary and the supplemental handbook material must be consulted prior to using TIS. A maximum of eight (8) intruder aircraft may be displayed; if more than eight aircraft match intruder parameters, the eight “most significant” intruders are uplinked. These “most significant” intruders are usually the ones in closest proximity and/or the greatest threat to the TIS client. 2. TIS, through the Mode S ground sensor, provides the following data on each intruder aircraft: (a) Relative bearing information in 6-degree increments. (b) Relative range information in 1/8 NM to 1 NM increments (depending on range). (c) Relative altitude in 100-foot increments (within 1,000 feet) or 500-foot increments (from 1,0003,500 feet) if the intruder aircraft has operating altitude reporting capability. (d) Estimated intruder ground track in 45-degree increments. (e) Altitude trend data (level within 500 fpm or climbing/descending >500 fpm) if the intruder aircraft has operating altitude reporting capability. (f) Intruder priority as either an “traffic advisory” or “proximate” intruder. 3. When flying from surveillance coverage of one Mode S sensor to another, the transfer of TIS is an automatic function of the avionics system and requires no action from the pilot. 4. There are a variety of status messages that are provided by either the airborne system or ground equipment to alert the pilot of high priority intruders and data link system status. These messages include the following: (a) Alert. Identifies a potential collision hazard within 34 seconds. This alert may be visual and/or audible, such as a flashing display symbol or a headset tone. A target is a threat if the time to the closest approach in vertical and horizontal coordinates is less than 30 seconds and the closest approach is expected to be within 500 feet vertically and 0.5 nautical miles laterally. (b) TIS Traffic. TIS traffic data is displayed. (c) Coasting. The TIS display is more than 6 seconds old. This indicates a missing uplink from the ground system. When the TIS display information is more than 12 seconds old, the “No Traffic” status will be indicated. (d) No Traffic. No intruders meet proximate or alert criteria. This condition may exist when the TIS system is fully functional or may indicate “coasting” between 12 and 59 seconds old (see (c) above). (e) TIS Unavailable. The pilot has requested TIS, but no ground system is available. This condition will also be displayed when TIS uplinks are missing for 60 seconds or more. (f) TIS Disabled. The pilot has not requested TIS or has disconnected from TIS. (g) Good-bye. The client aircraft has flown outside of TIS coverage. NOTE: Depending on the avionics manufacturer implementation, it is possible that some of these messages will not be directly available to the pilot. 5. Depending on avionics system design, TIS may be presented to the pilot in a variety of different displays, including text and/or graphics. Voice annunciation may also be used, either alone or in combination with a visual display. FIG 4-5-6, Traffic Information Service (TIS), Avionics Block Diagram, shows an example of a TIS display using symbology similar to the Traffic Alert and Collision Avoidance System (TCAS) installed on most passenger air carrier/commuter aircraft in the U.S. The small symbol in the center represents the client aircraft and the display is oriented “track up,” with the 12 o'clock position at the top. The range rings indicate 2 and 5 NM. Each intruder is depicted by a symbol positioned at the approximate relative bearing and range from the client aircraft. The circular symbol near the center indicates an “alert” intruder and the diamond symbols indicate “proximate” intruders. 292 RADIO DATA - GENERAL SECTION 5. SURVEILLANCE SYSTEMS 6. The inset in the lower right corner of FIG 4-5-6, Traffic Information Service (TIS), Avionics Block Diagram, shows a possible TIS data block display. The following information is contained in this data block: (a) The intruder, located approximately four o'clock, three miles, is a “proximate” aircraft and currently not a collision threat to the client aircraft. This is indicated by the diamond symbol used in this example. (b) The intruder ground track diverges to the right of the client aircraft, indicated by the small arrow. (c) The intruder altitude is 700 feet less than or below the client aircraft, indicated by the “-07” located under the symbol. (d) The intruder is descending >500 fpm, indicated by the downward arrow next to the “-07” relative altitude information. The absence of this arrow when an altitude tag is present indicates level flight or a climb/descent rate less than 500 fpm. NOTE: If the intruder did not have an operating altitude encoder (Mode C), the altitude and altitude trend “tags” would have been omitted. d. Limitations 1. TIS is NOT intended to be used as a collision avoidance system and does not relieve the pilot responsibility to “see and avoid” other aircraft (see paragraph 5-5-8, See and Avoid). TIS shall not be for avoidance maneuvers during IMC or other times when there is no visual contact with the intruder aircraft. TIS is intended only to assist in visual acquisition of other aircraft in VMC. No recommended avoidance maneuvers are provided for, nor authorized, as a direct result of a TIS intruder display or TIS alert. 2. While TIS is a useful aid to visual traffic avoidance, it has some system limitations that must be fully understood to ensure proper use. Many of these limitations are inherent in secondary radar surveillance. In other words, the information provided by TIS will be no better than that provided to ATC. Other limitations and anomalies are associated with the TIS predictive algorithm. (a) Intruder Display Limitations. TIS will only display aircraft with operating transponders installed. TIS relies on surveillance of the Mode S radar, which is a “secondary surveillance” radar similar to the ATCRBS described in paragraph 4-5-2. (b) TIS Client Altitude Reporting Requirement. Altitude reporting is required by the TIS client aircraft in order to receive TIS. If the altitude encoder is inoperative or disabled, TIS will be unavailable, as TIS requests will not be honored by the ground system. As such, TIS requires altitude reporting to determine the Proximity Coverage Volume as indicated in FIG 4-5-4. TIS users must be alert to altitude encoder malfunctions, as TIS has no mechanism to determine if client altitude reporting is correct. A failure of this nature will cause erroneous and possibly unpredictable TIS operation. If this malfunction is suspected, confirmation of altitude reporting with ATC is suggested. (c) Intruder Altitude Reporting. Intruders without altitude reporting capability will be displayed without the accompanying altitude tag. Additionally, nonaltitude reporting intruders are assumed to be at the same altitude as the TIS client for alert computations. This helps to ensure that the pilot will be alerted to all traffic under radar coverage, but the actual altitude difference may be substantial. Therefore, visual acquisition may be difficult in this instance. (d) Coverage Limitations. Since TIS is provided by ground-based, secondary surveillance radar, it is subject to all limitations of that radar. If an aircraft is not detected by the radar, it cannot be displayed on TIS. Examples of these limitations are as follows: (1) TIS will typically be provided within 55 NM of the radars depicted in FIG 4-5-5, Terminal Mode S Radar Sites. This maximum range can vary by radar site and is always subject to “line of sight” limitations; the radar and data link signals will be blocked by obstructions, terrain, and curvature of the earth. (2) TIS will be unavailable at low altitudes in many areas of the country, particularly in mountainous regions. Also, when flying near the “floor” of radar coverage in a particular area, intruders below the client aircraft may not be detected by TIS. (3) TIS will be temporarily disrupted when flying directly over the radar site providing coverage if no adjacent site assumes the service. A ground-based radar, like a VOR or NDB, has a zenith cone, sometimes referred to as the cone of confusion or cone of silence. This is the area of ambiguity directly above the station where bearing information is unreliable. The zenith cone setting for TIS is 34 degrees: Any aircraft above that angle with respect to the radar horizon will lose TIS coverage from that radar until it is below this 34 degree angle. The aircraft may not actually lose service in areas of multiple radar coverage since an adjacent radar will provide TIS. If no other TIS-capable radar is available, the “Good-bye” message will be received and TIS terminated until coverage is resumed. (e) Intermittent Operations. TIS operation may be intermittent during turns or other maneuvering, particularly if the transponder system does not include antenna diversity (antenna mounted on the top and bottom of the aircraft). As in (d) above, TIS is dependent on two-way, “line of sight” RADIO DATA - GENERAL SECTION 5. SURVEILLANCE SYSTEMS 293 communications between the aircraft and the Mode S radar. Whenever the structure of the client aircraft comes between the transponder antenna (usually located on the underside of the aircraft) and the ground-based radar antenna, the signal may be temporarily interrupted. (f) TIS Predictive Algorithm. TIS information is collected one radar scan prior to the scan during which the uplink occurs. Therefore, the surveillance information is approximately 5 seconds old. In order to present the intruders in a “real time” position, TIS uses a “predictive algorithm” in its tracking software. This algorithm uses track history data to extrapolate intruders to their expected positions consistent with the time of display in the cockpit. Occasionally, aircraft maneuvering will cause this algorithm to induce errors in the TIS display. These errors primarily affect relative bearing information; intruder distance and altitude will remain relatively accurate and may be used to assist in “see and avoid.” Some of the more common examples of these errors are as follows: (1) When client or intruder aircraft maneuver excessively or abruptly, the tracking algorithm will report incorrect horizontal position until the maneuvering aircraft stabilizes. (2) When a rapidly closing intruder is on a course that crosses the client at a shallow angle (either overtaking or head on) and either aircraft abruptly changes course within 1 /4 NM, TIS will display the intruder on the opposite side of the client than it actually is. These are relatively rare occurrences and will be corrected in a few radar scans once the course has stabilized. (g) Heading/Course Reference. Not all TIS aircraft installations will have onboard heading reference information. In these installations, aircraft course reference to the TIS display is provided by the Mode S radar. The radar only determines ground track information and has no indication of the client aircraft heading. In these installations, all intruder bearing information is referenced to ground track and does not account for wind correction. Additionally, since ground-based radar will require several scans to determine aircraft course following a course change, a lag in TIS display orientation (intruder aircraft bearing) will occur. As in (f) above, intruder distance and altitude are still usable. (h) Closely-Spaced Intruder Errors. When operating more than 30 NM from the Mode S sensor, TIS forces any intruder within 3/8 NM of the TIS client to appear at the same horizontal position as the client aircraft. Without this feature, TIS could display intruders in a manner confusing to the pilot in critical situations (e.g. a closely-spaced intruder that is actually to the right of the client may appear on the TIS display to the left). At longer distances from the radar, TIS cannot accurately determine relative bearing/distance information on intruder aircraft that are in close proximity to the client. Because TIS uses a ground-based, rotating radar for surveillance information, the accuracy of TIS data is dependent on the distance from the sensor (radar) providing the service. This is much the same phenomenon as experienced with ground-based navigational aids, such as VOR or NDB. As distance from the radar increases, the accuracy of surveillance decreases. Since TIS does not inform the pilot of distance from the Mode S radar, the pilot must assume that any intruder appearing at the same position as the client aircraft may actually be up to 3/8 NM away in any direction. Consistent with the operation of TIS, an alert on the display (regardless of distance from the radar) should stimulate an outside visual scan, intruder acquisition, and traffic avoidance based on outside reference. e. Reports of TIS Malfunctions 1. Users of TIS can render valuable assistance in the early correction of malfunctions by reporting their observations of undesirable performance. Reporters should identify the time of observation, location, type and identity of aircraft, and describe the condition observed; the type of transponder processor, and software in use can also be useful information. Since TIS performance is monitored by maintenance personnel rather than ATC, it is suggested that malfunctions be reported in the following ways: (a) By radio or telephone to the nearest Flight Service Station (FSS) facility. (b) By FAA Form 8740-5, Safety Improvement Report, a postage-paid card designed for this purpose. These cards may be obtained at FAA FSSs, General Aviation District Offices, Flight Standards District Offices, and General Aviation Fixed Based Operations. 4-5-7 AUTOMATIC DEPENDANT SURVEILLANCE-BROADCAST (ADS–B) SERVICES a. Introduction 1. Automatic Dependent Surveillance• Broadcast (ADS• B) is a surveillance technology being deployed throughout the NAS (see FIG 4• 5• 7). The ADS• B system is composed of aircraft avionics and a ground infrastructure. Onboard avionics determine the position of the aircraft by using the GNSS and transmit its position along with additional information about the aircraft to ground stations for use by ATC and other ADS• B services. This information is transmitted at a rate of approximately once per second. 294 RADIO DATA - GENERAL SECTION 5. SURVEILLANCE SYSTEMS 2. In the United States, ADS• B equipped aircraft exchange information is on one of two frequencies: 978 or 1090 MHz. The 1090 MHz frequency is associated with Mode A, C, and S transponder operations. 1090 MHz transponders with integrated ADS• B functionality extend the transponder message sets with additional ADS• B information. This additional information is known as an “extended squitter” message and referred to as 1090ES. ADS• B equipment operating on 978 MHz is known as the Universal Access Transceiver (UAT). 3. ADS B avionics can have the ability to both transmit and receive information. The transmission of ADS• B information from an aircraft is known as ADS• B Out. The receipt of ADS• B information by an aircraft is known as ADS• B In. On January 1, 2020, all aircraft operating within the airspace defined in 14 CFR part 91, §91.225 will be required to transmit the information defined in §91.227 using ADS• B Out avionics. 4. In general, operators flying at 18,000 feet and above will require equipment which uses 1090 ES. Those that do not fly above 18,000 may use either UAT or 1090ES equipment. (Refer to 14 CFR 91.225 and 91.227.) While the regulation will not require it, operators equipped with ADS• B In will realize additional benefits from ADS• B broadcast services: Traffic Information Service – Broadcast (TIS• B) (paragraph 4• 5• 8) and Flight Information Service • Broadcast (FIS• B) (paragraph 4• 5• 9). FIG 4-5-7 ADS-B, TIS-B, AND FIS-B: Broadcast Services Architecture 1 300227205000 b. ADS-B Certification and Performance Requirements ADS• B equipment may be certified as a surveillance source for air traffic separation services using ADS• B Out. ADS• B equipment may also be certified for use with ADS• B In advisory services that enable appropriately equipped aircraft to display traffic and flight information. Refer to the aircraft’s flight manual supplement or Pilot Operating Handbook for the capabilities of a specific aircraft installation. c. ADS-B Capabilities 1. ADS-B enables improved surveillance services, both air• to• air and air• to• ground, especially in areas where radar is ineffective due to terrain or where it is impractical or cost prohibitive. Initial NAS applications of air• to• air ADS• B are for “advisory” use only, enhancing a pilot’s visual acquisition of other nearby equipped aircraft either when airborne or on the airport surface. Additionally, ADS• B will enable ATC and fleet operators to monitor aircraft throughout the available ground station coverage area. 2. ADS• B avionics typically allow pilots to enter the aircraft’s call sign and Air Traffic Control (ATC)• assigned transponder code, which will be transmitted to other aircraft and ground receivers. Pilots are cautioned to use care when selecting and entering the aircraft’s identification and transponder codes. Some installations may require separate entries of this information into both RADIO DATA - GENERAL SECTION 5. SURVEILLANCE SYSTEMS 295 the ADS• B system and the transponder. Therefore, it is extremely important to ensure that the transponder and ADS• B codes being transmitted are identical to avoid false conflict alerts within the ATC system. 3. ADS B systems integrated with the transponder will automatically set the applicable emergency status when 7500, 7600, or 7700 are entered into the transponder. ADS B systems not integrated with the transponder, or systems with optional emergency codes, will require that the appropriate emergency code is entered through a pilot interface. ADS• B is intended for in• flight and airport surface use. ADS• B systems should be turned “on” — and remain “on” — whenever operating in the air and moving on the airport surface. Civil and military Mode A/C transponders and ADS• B systems should be adjusted to the “on” or normal operating position as soon as practical, unless the change to “standby” has been accomplished previously at the request of ATC. Mode S transponders should be left on whenever power is applied to the aircraft. d. ATC Surveillance Services using ADS-B — Procedures and Recommended Phraseology — For Use In Alaska Only Radar procedures, with the exceptions found in this paragraph, are identical to those procedures prescribed for radar in AIM Chapter 4 and Chapter 5. 1. Preflight: If a request for ATC services is predicated on ADS-B and such services are anticipated when either a VFR or IFR flight plan is filed, the aircraft's “N” number or call-sign as filed in “Block 2” of the Flight Plan shall be entered in the ADS-B avionics as the aircraft's flight ID. 2. Inflight: When requesting ADS-B services while airborne, pilots should ensure that their ADS-B equipment is transmitting their aircraft's “N” number or call sign prior to contacting ATC. To accomplish this, the pilot must select the ADS-B “broadcast flight ID” function. NOTE: The broadcast “VFR” or Standby” mode built into some ADS-B systems will not provide ATC with the appropriate aircraft identification information. This function should first be disabled before contacting ATC. 3. Aircraft with an Inoperative/Malfunctioning ADS-B Transmitter or in the Event of an Inoperative Ground Broadcast Transceiver (GBT). (a) ATC will inform the flight crew when the aircraft's ADS-B transmitter appears to be inoperative or malfunctioning: PHRASEOLOGY: YOUR ADS-B TRANSMITTER APPEARS TO BE INOPERATIVE/MALFUNCTIONING. STOP ADS-B TRANSMISSIONS. (b) ATC will inform the flight crew when the GBT transceiver becomes inoperative or malfunctioning, as follows: PHRASEOLOGY: (Name of facility) GROUND BASED TRANSCEIVER INOPERATIVE/MALFUNCTIONING. (And if appropriate) RADAR CONTACT LOST. NOTE: An inoperative or malfunctioning GBT may also cause a loss of ATC surveillance services. (c) ATC will inform the flight crew if it becomes necessary to turn off the aircraft's ADS-B transmitter. PHRASEOLOGY: STOP ADS-B TRANSMISSIONS. (d) Other malfunctions and considerations: Loss of automatic altitude reporting capabilities (encoder failure) will result in loss of ATC altitude advisory services. e. ADS-B Limitations 1. The ADS-B cockpit display of traffic is NOT intended to be used as a collision avoidance system and does not relieve the pilot's responsibility to “see and avoid” other aircraft. (See paragraph 5-5-8, See and Avoid). ADS-B shall not be used for avoidance maneuvers during IMC or other times when there is no visual contact with the intruder aircraft. ADS-B is intended only to assist in visual acquisition of other aircraft. No avoidance maneuvers are provided nor authorized, as a direct result of an ADS-B target being displayed in the cockpit. 2. Use of ADS-B radar services is limited to the service volume of the GBT. NOTE: The coverage volume of GBTs are limited to line-of-sight. f. Reports of ADS-B Malfunctions 296 RADIO DATA - GENERAL SECTION 5. SURVEILLANCE SYSTEMS Users of ADS-B can provide valuable assistance in the correction of malfunctions by reporting instances of undesirable system performance. Reports should identify the time of observation, location, type and identity of aircraft, and describe the condition observed; the type of avionics system and its software version in use should also be included. Since ADS-B performance is monitored by maintenance personnel rather than ATC, it is suggested that malfunctions be reported in any one of the following ways: 1. By radio or telephone to the nearest Flight Service Station (FSS) facility. 2. By FAA Form 8740-5, Safety Improvement Report, a postage-paid card is designed for this purpose. These cards may be obtained from FAA FSSs, Flight Standards District Offices, and general aviation fixed-based operators. 3. By reporting the failure directly to the FAA Safe Flight 21 program at 1-877-FLYADSB or http://www. adsb.gov. 4-5-8 TRAFFIC INFORMATION SERVICE-BROADCAST (TIS-B) TIS• B is the broadcast of ATC derived traffic information to ADS• B equipped (1090ES or UAT) aircraft from ground radio stations. The source of this traffic information is derived from ground• based air traffic surveillance radar sensors. TIS• B service will be available throughout the NAS where there are both adequate surveillance coverage (radar) from ground sensors and adequate broadcast coverage from ADS• B ground radio stations. The quality level of traffic information provided by TIS• B is dependent upon the number and type of ground sensors available as TIS• B sources and the timeliness of the reported data. a. TIS-B Requirements. In order to receive TIS-B service, the following conditions must exist: 1. Aircraft must be equipped with an ADS-B transmitter/receiver or transceiver, and a cockpit display of traffic information (CDTI). 2. Aircraft must fly within the coverage volume of a compatible ground radio station that is configured for TIS• B uplinks. (Not all ground radio stations provide TIS• B due to a lack of radar coverage or because a radar feed is not available). 3. Aircraft must be within the coverage of and detected by at least one ATC radar serving the ground radio station in use. b. TIS-B Capabilities. 1. TIS• B is intended to provide ADS• B equipped aircraft with a more complete traffic picture in situations where not all nearby aircraft are equipped with ADS• B Out. This advisory• only application is intended to enhance a pilot’s visual acquisition of other traffic. 2. Only transponder• equipped targets (i.e., Mode A/C or Mode S transponders) are transmitted through the ATC ground system architecture. Current radar siting may result in limited radar surveillance coverage at lower altitudes near some airports, with subsequently limited TIS• B service volume coverage. If there is no radar coverage in a given area, then there will be no TIS• B coverage in that area. c. TIS-B Limitations. 1. TIS-B is NOT intended to be used as a collision avoidance system and does not relieve the pilot's responsibility to “see and avoid” other aircraft, in accordance with 14CFR §91.113b. TIS-B must not be used for avoidance maneuvers during times when there is no visual contact with the intruder aircraft. TIS-B is intended only to assist in the visual acquisition of other aircraft. NOTE: No aircraft avoidance maneuvers are authorized as a direct result of a TIS-B target being displayed in the cockpit. 2. While TIS-B is a useful aid to visual traffic avoidance, its inherent system limitations must be understood to ensure proper use. (a) A pilot may receive an intermittent TIS-B target of themselves, typically when maneuvering (e.g., climbing turns) due to the radar not tracking the aircraft as quickly as ADS-B. (b) The ADS• B• to• radar association process within the ground system may at times have difficulty correlating an ADS• B report with corresponding radar returns from the same aircraft. When this happens the pilot may see duplicate traffic symbols (i.e., “TIS• B shadows”) on the cockpit display. (c) Updates of TIS• B traffic reports will occur less often than ADS• B traffic updates. TIS• B position updates will occur approximately once every 3• 13 seconds depending on the type of radar system in use within the coverage area. In comparison, the update rate for ADS• B is nominally once per second. (d) The TIS• B system only uplinks data pertaining to transponder• equipped aircraft. Aircraft without a transponder will not be displayed as TIS• B traffic. (e) There is no indication provided when any aircraft is operating inside or outside the TIS-B service volume, therefore it is difficult to know if one is receiving uplinked TIS-B traffic information. 3. Pilots and operators are reminded that the airborne equipment that displays TIS-B targets is for pilot situational awareness only and is not approved as a collision avoidance tool. Unless there is an imminent emergency requiring immediate action, any deviation from an air traffic control clearance in response RADIO DATA - GENERAL SECTION 5. SURVEILLANCE SYSTEMS 297 to perceived converging traffic appearing on a TIS-B display must be approved by the controlling ATC facility before commencing the maneuver, except as permitted under certain conditions in 14CFR §91.123. Uncoordinated deviations may place an aircraft in close proximity to other aircraft under ATC control not seen on the airborne equipment and may result in a pilot deviation or other incident. d. Reports of TIS-B Malfunctions Users of TIS-B can provide valuable assistance in the correction of malfunctions by reporting instances of undesirable system performance. Reporters should identify the time of observation, location, type and identity of the aircraft, and describe the condition observed; the type of avionics system and its software version used. Since TIS-B performance is monitored by maintenance personnel rather than ATC, it is suggested that malfunctions be reported in anyone of the following ways: 1. By radio or telephone to the nearest Flight Service Station (FSS) facility. 2. By FAA Form 8740-5, Safety Improvement Report, a postage-paid card is designed for this purpose. These cards may be obtained from FAA FSSs, Flight Standards District Offices, and general aviation fixed-based operators. 3. By reporting the failure directly to the FAA Surveillance and Broadcast Services Program Office at 1• 877• FLYADSB or http://www.adsb.gov. 4-5-9 FLIGHT INFORMATION SERVICE-BROADCAST (FIS-B) a. FIS• B is a ground broadcast service provided through the ADS• B Services network over the 978 MHz UAT data link. The FAA FIS• B system provides pilots and flight crews of properly equipped aircraft with a cockpit display of certain aviation weather and aeronautical information. FIS• B service availability is expected across the NAS in 2013 and is currently available within certain regions. b. The weather products provided by FIS-B are for information only. Therefore, these products do not meet the safety and regulatory requirements of official weather products. The weather products displayed on FIS-B should not be used as primary weather products, i.e., aviation weather to meet operational and safety requirements. Official weather products (primary products) can be obtained from a variety of sources including ATC, AFSSs, and, if applicable, AOCC VHF/HF voice, which can transmit aviation weather, NOTAMS, and other operational aeronautical information to aircraft in flight. FIS-B augments the traditional ATC/FSS/ AOCC services by providing additional information and, for some products, offers the advantage of being displayed graphically. By using FIS-B for orientation and information, the usefulness of information received from official sources may be enhanced, but the user should be alert and understand any limitations associated with individual products. FIS-B provides the initial basic products listed below at no-charge to the user. Additional products are envisioned, but may incur subscription charges to the user. FIS-B reception is line-of-sight within the service volume of the ground infrastructure. 1. Airmen's Meteorological Conditions (AIRMET) – Text/graphical report – A concise description of expected occurrence of specified en route weather phenomena. REFERENCE – Advisory Circular AC-00-45, “Aviation Weather Services.” 2. Convective Significant Meteorological Conditions (SIGMET) – Text report/graphical – Convective SIGMETs (also known internationally as SIGMET for Convection) are issued for the contiguous U.S. Each bulletin includes one or more Convective SIGMETs for a specific region of the CONUS. Convective SIGMETs issued for thunderstorms and related phenomena do not include references to all weather associated with thunderstorms such as turbulence, icing, low-level wind shear and IFR conditions. REFERENCE – Advisory Circular AC-00-45, “Aviation Weather Services.” 3. Aviation Routine Weather Reports (METAR) – Text reports – Surface meteorological data. The body of the report includes airport identifier, time of observation, wind, visibility, runway visual range, present weather phenomena, sky conditions, temperature, dew point, and altimeter setting. Remarks may be appended to the end. REFERENCE – Advisory Circular AC-00-45, “Aviation Weather Services.” 4. Special Aviation Reports (SPECI) – Text reports – Non-routine, unscheduled report when any of SPECI criteria have been met. Contains all data elements found in METAR plus additional information which elaborates on data. REFERENCE – Reference Advisory Circular AC-00-45, “Aviation Weather Services.” 5. Next Generation Radar (NEXRAD) (CONUS and Regional) – Derived from Next Generation Weather Radar (WSR-88D). Radar mosaic consists of multiple single site radar images combined to produce a graphical image on a regional or national scale. Regional and national radar mosaics can be found at the National Weather Service (NWS) Doppler Radar Images web site: http://radar.weather.gov/ridge/. REFERENCE – Advisory Circular AC-00-45, “Aviation Weather Services.” 6. Notice to Airmen (NOTAM) Distant and Flight Data Center (D/FDC) – Text/graphical reports – includes Temporary Flight Restrictions (TFRs) – TFR text and graphic reports, prescribes procedures used to obtain, format, and disseminate information on unanticipated or temporary changes to components of or hazards in the NAS until the associated aeronautical charts and related publications have been amended. REFERENCE – FAA Order JO 7930.2, Notices to Airmen (NOTAM). 298 RADIO DATA - GENERAL SECTION 5. SURVEILLANCE SYSTEMS 7. Pilot Weather Reports (PIREP) – Text report – Pilots report observations to assist other pilots with flight planning and preparation, help NWS verify forecast products, and create more accurate products for aviation community. REFERENCE – Advisory Circular AC-00-45, “Aviation Weather Services.” 8. Significant Meteorological Information (SIGMET) – Text/graphical report – Potentially hazardous en route phenomena such as thunderstorms and hail, turbulence, icing, sand and dust storms, tropical cyclones, and volcanic ash in an area affecting 3,000 square miles or an area deemed to have a significant effect on safety of aircraft operations. REFERENCE – Advisory Circular AC-00-45, “Aviation Weather Services.” 9. Special Use Airspace (SUA) Status – Text/graphical report – Establishes/designates airspace in the interest of National Defense, security and/or welfare. Charted SUA identifies to other airspace users where these activities occur. SUA is airspace of defined dimensions wherein activities must be confined because of their nature, or wherein limitations may be imposed upon aircraft operations that are not a part of those activities. REFERENCE – FAA Order JO 7400.2G, Procedures for Handling Airspace Matters. 10. Terminal Aerodrome Forecast (TAF) and their amendments (AMEND) – Text report – Routine forecast that gives a concise statement of expected meteorological conditions for a specified time period within five statute miles (SM) of the center of the airport's runway complex (terminal). TAFs are amended whenever they become, in the forecaster's judgment, unrepresentative of existing or expected conditions, particularly regarding those elements and events significant to aircraft and airports. An amended forecast is identified by TAF AMD (in place of TAF) on the first line of the forecast text. REFERENCE – Advisory Circular AC-00-45, “Aviation Weather Services.” 11. Temperature Aloft - Text report - Computer prepared forecasts, based on North American Mesoscale (NAM) forecast model run, of temperature at specified times, altitudes, and locations. REFERENCE – Advisory Circular AC-00-45, “Aviation Weather Services.” 12. Winds Aloft – Text report – Computer prepared forecasts, based on North American Mesoscale (NAM) forecast model run, of wind direction and wind speed at specified times, altitudes, and locations. REFERENCE – Advisory Circular AC-00-45, “Aviation Weather Services.” Table 4-5-2 — FIS-B Basic Product Update and Transmission Intervals Product AIRMET Convective SIGMET METAR/SPECI NEXRAD Reflectivity (CONUS) NEXRAD Reflectivity (Regional) NOTAM-D/FDC PIREP SIGMET SUA Status TAF/AMEND Temperature Aloft Winds Aloft FIS-B Service Update Interval1 As available As available Hourly/as available 5 Minutes 5 Minutes As available As available As available As available 8 hours/as available 6 hours 6 hours FIS-B Service Transmission Interval2 5 minutes 5 minutes 5 minutes 15 minutes 2.5 minutes 10 minutes 10 minutes 5 minutes 10 minutes 10 minutes 10 minutes 10 minutes 1 The Update Interval is the rate at which the product data is available from the source. 2 The Transmission Interval is the amount of time within which a new or updated product transmission must be completed and the rate or repetition interval at which the product is rebroadcast. NOTE: Details concerning the content, format, and symbols of the various data link products provided should be obtained from the specific avionics manufacturer. 4-5-10 AUTOMATIC DEPENDENT SURVEILLANCE-REBROADCAST (ADS• R) ADS• R is a datalink translation function of the ADS• B ground system required to accommodate the two separate operating frequencies (978 MHz and 1090 ES). The ADS• B system receives the ADS• B messages transmitted on one frequency and ADS• R translates and reformats the information for rebroadcast and use on the other frequency. This allows ADS• B In equipped aircraft to see nearby ADS• B Out traffic regardless of the operating link of the other aircraft. Aircraft operating on the same ADS• B frequency exchange information directly and do not require the ADS• R translation function. RADIO DATA - GENERAL 299 Direction Finding Procedures Information about Direction Finding Procedures published in this section is extracted from ICAO Annex 10. It is provided for reference use only. The information is generally applicable around the world. Regional variations may exist. ICAO AERONAUTICAL TELECOMMUNICATION STANDARDS — ANNEX 10 6.2 DIRECTION FINDING INTRODUCTORY NOTES 1. Direction-finding stations work either singly or in groups of two or more stations under the direction of a main direction-finding station. 2. A direction-finding station working alone can only determine the direction of an aircraft in relation to itself. 6.2.1 Recommendation — A direction-finding station working alone should give the following, as requested: 1. true bearing of the aircraft, using the appropriate phrase; 2. true heading to be steered by the aircraft, with no wind, to head for the direction-finding station using the appropriate phrase; 3. magnetic bearing of the aircraft, using the appropriate phrase; 4. magnetic heading to be steered by the aircraft, with no wind, to make for the station using appropriate phrase. 6.2.2 Recommendation — When direction-finding stations work as a network to determine the position of an aircraft, the bearing taken by each station should be sent immediately to the station controlling the directionfinding network to enable the position of the aircraft to be determined. 6.2.2.1 Recommendation — The station controlling the network should, on request, give the aircraft its position in one of the following ways: 1. position in relation to a point of reference or in latitude and longitude, using the appropriate phrase; 2. true bearing of the aircraft in relation to the direction-finding station or other specified point using the appropriate phrase, and its distance from the direction-finding station or point, using the appropriate phrase; 3. magnetic heading to steer with no wind, to make for the direction-finding station or other specified point using the appropriate phrase, and its distance from the direction-finding station or point, using the appropriate phrase. 6.2.3 Aircraft stations shall normally make request for bearings, courses or positions, to the aeronautical station responsible, or to the station controlling the direction-finding network. 6.2.4 To request a bearing, heading or position, the aircraft station shall call the aeronautical station or the direction-finding control station on the listening frequency. The aircraft shall then specify the type of service that is desired by the use of the appropriate phrase. 6.2.5 In radiotelephony, an aircraft station which requests a bearing shall end the transmission by repeating its call sign. If the transmission has been too short for the direction-finding station to obtain a bearing, the aircraft shall give a longer transmission for two periods of the approximately ten seconds, or alternatively provide such other signals as may be requested by the direction-finding station. 6.2.5.1 In radiotelephony, an aircraft station which requests a bearing shall end the transmission by repeating its call sign. If the transmission has been too short for the direction-finding station to obtain a bearing, the aircraft shall give a longer transmission for two periods of the approximately ten seconds, or alternatively provide such other signals as may be requested by the direction-finding station. NOTE: Certain types of VHF/DF stations require the provision of a modulated signal (voice transmission) in order to take a bearing. 6.2.6 When a direction-finding station is not satisfied with its observation, it shall request the aircraft station to repeat the transmission. 6.2.7 When a heading or bearing has been requested, the direction-finding station shall advise the aircraft station in the following form: 1. the appropriate phrase; 2. bearing or heading in degrees in relation to the direction-finding station, sent as three figures; 3. class of bearing; 4. time of observation, if necessary. 6.2.8 When a position has been requested, the direction-finding control station, after plotting all simultaneous observations, shall determine the observed position of the aircraft and shall advise the aircraft station in the following form: 1. the appropriate phrase; 2. the position; 3. class of position; 4. time of observation. 300 RADIO DATA - GENERAL 6.2.9 As soon as the aircraft station has received the bearing, heading or position it shall repeat back the message for confirmation, or correction. 6.2.10 When positions are given by bearing or heading and distance from a known point other than the station making the report, the reference point shall an aerodrome, prominent town or geographic feature. An aerodrome shall be given in preference to other places. When a large city or town is used as a reference place, the bearing or heading, and the distance given shall be measured from its center. 6.2.11 When the position is expressed in latitude and longitude, groups of figures for degrees and minutes shall be used followed by the letter N or S for latitude and the letter E or W for longitude, respectively. In radiotelephony the words NORTH, SOUTH, EAST or WEST shall be used. 6.2.12 According to the estimate by the direction-finding station of the accuracy of the observation, bearings and positions shall be classified as follows: Bearings Class Class Class Class “A” “B” “C” “D” — — — — Accurate within plus or minus 2 degrees; Accurate within plus or minus 5 degrees; Accurate within plus or minus 10 degrees; Accuracy less than Class C. Class Class Class Class “A” “B” “C” “D” — — — — Accurate within 9.3 km (5 NM); Accurate within 37 km (20 NM); Accurate within 92 km (50 NM); Accuracy less than Class C. Positions 6.2.13 Direction-finding stations shall have authority to refuse to give bearings, headings or positions when conditions are unsatisfactory or when bearings do not fall within the calibrated limits of the station, stating the reason at the time of refusal. RADIO DATA - GENERAL NAVIGATION AIDS LEGEND 301 Navigation Aids Legend LEGEND The listings are in alphabetical sequence by country. The following information is provided: Name Ident Freq. Class Official name (followed by location name, when different than navaid name). Identifier. Frequency. VOR ghost frequency for TACAN or DME. The following codes are used: VOR TACAN (channels 17-59 and 70-126) TACAN (channels 1-16 and 60-69) DME Terminal Class High Altitude Class Low Altitude Class Class Unrestricted Not co-located VOR and TACAN or DME1 V NDB (2000 watts or more) NDB (50 - 1999 watts) NDB (Less than 50 watts) Used as LOM Used as ILS back course locator Locator (no class specified) Marine Beacon H H H H H H M T M D T H L U N H M O C L Voice capability: Scheduled Weather Broadcast No Voice on navaid frequency (omitted on TACAN and DME facilities) Automatic Transcribed Weather Broadcast EXAMPLE: (H) VORDME (H) VORTAC (H) TACAN (T) VOR (HH) NDB (2000 watts or more) 1 B W A V V V H D T T H H H T H W N1 W The letter “N” indicates that the VOR and TACAN or DME facility are separated by at least 6 seconds (one tenth of a minute) of either longitude or latitude. The TACAN (T) or DME (D) facility class code is included with the VOR listing and the INS coordinates shown are for the VOR facility. On the line immediately below this listing the TACAN or DME facility information is listed with the TACAN or DME coordinates. To further highlight the difference in coordinates TACAN or DME identifier is offset below the VOR identifier. INS Coordinates VAR/Stn Decl Elev. In avionics keyboarding format, latitude and longitude in degrees, minutes and tenths of minutes. Magnetic variation/station declination. Station elevation, shown only for those navaids with DME capability and if this information is officially published by State authority. ILS COMPONENTS An ILS listing is provided at the end of each country listing. It is in alphabetical sequency by location name, and includes both localizer and outer marker/locator information. 302 RADIO DATA - GENERAL NAVIGATION AIDS LEGEND LOCALIZER AND OUTER MARKER/LOCATOR 1 147269534000 LOCALIZER CLASS Localizer LOC MLS SDF LDA Microwave Landing System Simplified Directional Aid Localizer Directional Aid LOCATOR/MARKER CLASS Locator Outer Marker Outer Marker LOM OM PHONETIC ALPHABET AND MORSE CODE LETTER A B C D E F G H I NUMERAL 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 WORD Alfa Bravo Charlie Delta Echo Foxtrot Golf Hotel India CODE •— —••• —•—• —•• • ••—• ——• •••• •• LETTER J K L M N O P Q R WORD Juliett Kilo Lima Mike November Oscar Papa Quebec Romeo CODE •——— —•— •—•• —— —• ——— •——• ——•— •—• CODE •———— ••——— •••—— ••••— ••••• —•••• ——••• ———•• ————• ————— LETTER S T U V W X Y Z WORD Sierra Tango Uniform Victor Whiskey X-ray Yankee Zulu CODE ••• — ••— •••— •—— —••— —•—— ——•• FLIGHT SUPPLEMENT BOOKLET Meteorology Meteorology Service for International Air Navigation METEOROLOGY SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL 305 AIR NAVIGATION METEOROLOGICAL SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION - ANNEX 3 Meteorological Service for International Air Navigation - Annex 3 In this part of the METEOROLOGY section, selected Chapters and paragraphs have been extracted from ICAO Annex 3 – Meteorological Service for International Air Navigation. Chapter and paragraph numbers reflect those contained in the Annex. CHAPTER 1 – DEFINITIONS 1.1 DEFINITIONS When the following terms are used in the Standards and Recommended Practices for Meteorological Service for International Air Navigation, they have the following meanings: AERODROME CLIMATOLOGICAL SUMMARY — Concise summary of specified meteorological elements at an aerodrome, based on statistical data. AERODROME CLIMATOLOGICAL TABLE — Table providing statistical data on the observed occurrence of one or more meteorological elements at an aerodrome. AERODROME METEOROLOGICAL OFFICE — An office, located at an aerodrome, designated to provide meteorological service for international air navigation. AERONAUTICAL FIXED TELECOMMUNICATION NETWORK (AFTN) — A world-wide system of aeronautical fixed circuits provided, as part of the aeronautical fixed service, for the exchange of messages and/or digital data between aeronautical fixed stations having the same or compatible communications characteristics. AERONAUTICAL METEOROLOGICAL STATION — A station designated to make observations and meteorological reports for use in international air navigation. AIRCRAFT OBSERVATION — The evaluation of one or more meteorological elements made from an aircraft in flight. AIRMET INFORMATION — Information issued by a meteorological watch office concerning the occurrence or expected occurrence of specified en route weather phenomena which may affect the safety of low-level aircraft operations and which was not already included in the forecast issued for low-level flights in the flight information region concerned or sub-area thereof. AIR-REPORT — A report from an aircraft in flight prepared in conformity with requirements for position, and operational and/or meteorological reporting. NOTE: Details of the AIREP form are given in PANS-ATM (Doc 4444). AUTOMATIC DEPENDENT SURVEILLANCE (ADS) — A surveillance technique in which aircraft automatically provide, via a data link, data derived from on-board navigation and position-fixing systems, including aircraft identification, four-dimensional position and additional data as appropriate. BRIEFING — Oral commentary on existing and/or expected meteorological conditions. CLOUD OF OPERATIONAL SIGNIFICANCE — A cloud with the height of cloud base below 1500m (5000ft) or below the highest minimum sector altitude, whichever is greater, or a cumulonimbus cloud or a towering cumulus cloud at any height. CONSULTATION — Discussion with a meteorologist or another qualified person of existing and/or expected meteorological conditions relating to flight operations; a discussion includes answers to questions. EXTENDED RANGE OPERATION — Any flight by an aeroplane with two turbine engines where the flight time at the one engine inoperative cruise speed (in ISA and still air conditions), from a point on the route to an adequate alternate aerodrome, is greater than the threshold time approved by the State of the Operator. FLIGHT DOCUMENTATION — Written or printed documents, including charts or forms, containing meteorological information for a flight. FORECAST — A statement of expected meteorological conditions for a specified time or period, and for a specified area or portion of airspace. GAMET AREA FORECAST — An area forecast in abbreviated plain language for low-level flights for a flight information region or sub-area thereof, prepared by the meteorological office designated by the meteorological authority concerned and exchanged with meteorological offices in adjacent flight information regions, as agreed between the meteorological authorities concerned. GRID POINT DATA IN DIGITAL FORM — Computer processed meteorological data for a set of regularly spaced points on a chart, for transmission from a meteorological computer to another computer in a code form suitable for automated use. NOTE: In most cases such data are transmitted on medium or high speed telecommunications channels. HUMAN FACTORS PRINCIPLES — Principles which apply to aeronautical design, certification, training, operations and maintenance and which seek safe interface between the human and other system components by proper consideration to human performance. INTERNATIONAL AIRWAYS VOLCANO WATCH (IAVW) — International arrangements for monitoring and providing warnings to aircraft of volcanic ash in the atmosphere. NOTE: The IAVW is based on the co-operation of aviation and non-aviation operational units using information derived from observing sources and networks that are provided by States. The watch is coordinated by ICAO with the co-operation of other concerned international organizations. 306 METEOROLOGY SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION METEOROLOGICAL SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION - ANNEX 3 METEOROLOGICAL AUTHORITY — The authority providing or arranging for the provision of meteorological service for international air navigation on behalf of a Contracting State. METEOROLOGICAL BULLETIN — A text comprising meteorological information preceded by an appropriate heading. METEOROLOGICAL INFORMATION — Meteorological report, analysis, forecast and any other statement relating to existing or expected meteorological conditions. METEOROLOGICAL OFFICE — An office designated to provide meteorological service for international air navigation. METEOROLOGICAL REPORT — A statement of observed meteorological conditions related to a specified time and location. METEOROLOGICAL SATELLITE — An artificial Earth satellite making meteorological observations and transmitting these observations to Earth. OBSERVATION (Meteorological) — The evaluation of one or more meteorological elements. PREVAILING VISIBILITY — The greatest visibility value, observed in accordance with the definition “visibility”, which is reached within at least half the horizon circle or within at least half of the surface of the aerodrome. These areas could comprise contiguous or non-contiguous sectors. NOTE: This value may be assessed by human observation and/or instrumented systems. When instruments are installed, they are used to obtain the best estimate of the prevailing visibility. PROGNOSTIC CHART — A forecast of a specified meteorological element(s) for a specified time or period and a specified surface or portion of airspace, depicted graphically on a chart. REGIONAL AIR NAVIGATION AGREEMENT — Agreement approved by the Council of ICAO normally on the advice of a regional air navigation meeting. RUNWAY VISUAL RANGE — The range over which the pilot of an aircraft on the centre line of a runway can see the runway surface markings or the lights delineating the runway or identifying its centre line. SIGMET INFORMATION — Information issued by a meteorological watch office concerning the occurrence or expected occurrence of specified en route weather phenomena which may affect the safety of aircraft operations. STANDARD ISOBARIC SURFACE — An isobaric surface used on a world-wide basis for representing and analyzing the conditions in the atmosphere. TROPICAL CYCLONE — Generic term for a non-frontal synoptic-scale cyclone originating over tropical or sub-tropical waters with organized convection and definite cyclonic surface wind circulation. TROPICAL CYCLONE ADVISORY CENTRE (TCAC) — A meteorological centre designated by regional air navigation agreement to provide advisory information to meteorological watch offices, world area forecast centres and international OPMET databanks regarding the position, forecast direction and speed of movement, central pressure and maximum surface wind of tropical cyclones. UPPER-AIR CHART — A meteorological chart relating to a specified upper-air surface or layer of the atmosphere. VISIBILITY — Visibility for aeronautical purposes is the greater of: a. the greatest distance at which a black object of suitable dimensions, situated near the ground, can be seen and recognized when observed against a bright background; b. the greatest distance at which lights in the vicinity of 1,000 candelas can be seen and identified against an unlit background. NOTE: The two distances have different values in air of a given extinction coefficient, and the latter b. varies with the background illumination. The former a. is represented by the meteorological optical range (MOR). VOLCANIC ASH ADVISORY CENTRE (VAAC) — A meteorological centre designated by regional air navigation agreement to provide advisory information to meteorological watch offices, area control centres, flight information centres, world area forecast centres, relevant regional area forecast centres and international OPMET data banks regarding the lateral and vertical extent and forecast movement of volcanic ash in the atmosphere following volcanic eruptions. VOLMET BROADCAST — Provision of current aerodrome meteorological reports (METAR) and special meteorological reports (SPECI), aerodrome forecasts (TAF), SIGMET by means of continuous and repetitive voice broadcasts for aircraft in flight. VOLMET DATA LINK SERVICE (D-VOLMET) — Provision of current METAR, SPECI, TAF, SIGMET, special air-reports not covered by SIGMET and, where available, AIRMET via data link. WORLD AREA FORECAST CENTRE (WAFC) — A meteorological centre designated to prepare and issue significant weather forecasts and upper-air forecasts in digital and/or pictorial form on a global basis direct States by appropriate means as part of the aeronautical fixed service. WORLD AREA FORECAST SYSTEM (WAFS) — A world-wide system by which world area forecast centres provide aeronautical meteorological en-route forecasts in uniform standardized formats. 1.2 TERMS USED WITH A LIMITED MEANING For the purpose of Annex 3, the following terms are used with a limited meaning as indicated below: METEOROLOGY SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL 307 AIR NAVIGATION METEOROLOGICAL SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION - ANNEX 3 a. to avoid confusion in respect of the term “service” between the meteorological service considered as an administrative entity and the service which is provided, “meteorological authority” is used for the former and “service” for the latter; b. “provide” is used solely in connection with the provision of service; c. “issue” is used solely in connection with cases where the obligation specifically extends to sending out the information to a user; d. “make available” is used solely in connection with cases where the obligation ends with making the information accessible to a user; and e. “supply” is used solely in connection with cases where either c. or d. applies. CHAPTER 2 – GENERAL PROVISIONS 2.1 OBJECTIVE, DETERMINATION AND PROVISION OF METEOROLOGICAL SERVICE 2.1.1 The objective of meteorological service for international air navigation shall be to contribute towards the safety, regularity and efficiency of international air navigation. 2.1.2 This objective shall be achieved by supplying the following users: operators, flight crew members, air traffic services units, search and rescue services units, airport managements and others concerned with the conduct or development of international air navigation, with the meteorological information necessary for the performance of their respective functions. 2.1.3 Each Contracting State shall determine the meteorological service which it will provide to meet the needs of international air navigation. This determination shall be made in accordance with the provisions of this Annex and with due regard to regional air navigation agreements; it shall include the determination of the meteorological service to be provided for international air navigation over international waters and other areas which lie outside the territory of the State concerned. 2.1.4 Each Contracting State shall designate the authority, hereinafter referred to as the meteorological authority, to provide or to arrange for the provision of meteorological service for international air navigation on its behalf. Details of the meteorological authority so designated shall be included in the State aeronautical information publication, in accordance with Annex 15, Appendix 1, GEN 1.1 (not published herein). 2.1.5 Each Contracting State shall ensure that the designated meteorological authority complies with the requirements of the World Meteorological Organization in respect of qualifications and training of meteorological personnel providing services for international air navigation. 2.2 SUPPLY, QUALITY ASSURANCE AND USE OF METEOROLOGICAL INFORMATION 2.2.1 Close liaison shall be maintained between those concerned with the supply and those concerned with the use of meteorological information on matters which affect the provision of meteorological service for international air navigation. 2.2.2 Recommendation – Until 14 November 2012, in order to meet the objective of meteorological service for international air navigation, the Contracting State should ensure that the designated meteorological authority referred to in 2.1.4 establishes and implements a properly organized quality system comprising procedures, processes and resources necessary to provide for the quality management of the meteorological information to be supplied to users listed in 2.1.2. 2.2.3 From 15 November 2012, each Contracting State shall ensure that the designated meteorological authority referred to in 2.1.4 establishes and implements a properly organized quality system comprising procedures, processes and resources necessary to provide for the quality management of the meteorological information to be supplied to users listed in 2.1.2. 2.2.4 Recommendation – The quality system established in accordance with 2.2.2 should be in conformity with the International Organization for Standardization (ISO) 9000 series of quality assurance standards, and certified by an approved organization. NOTE: International Organization for Standardization (ISO) 9000 series of quality assurance standards provide a basic framework for the development of a quality assurance programme. The details of a successful programme are to be formulated by each State and in most cases are unique to the State organization. Guidance on the establishment and implementation of a quality system is given in the Manual on the Quality Management System for the provision of Meteorological Service to International Air Navigation (Doc 9873). 2.2.5 Recommendation – The quality system should provide the users with assurance that the meteorological information supplied complies with the stated requirements in terms of the geographical and spatial coverage, format and content, time and frequency of issuance and period of validity, as well as the accuracy of measurements, observations and forecasts. Where the quality system indicates that the meteorological information to be supplied to the users does not comply with the stated requirements, and automatic error correction procedures are not appropriate, such information should not be supplied to the users unless it is validated with the originator. 308 METEOROLOGY SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION METEOROLOGICAL SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION - ANNEX 3 NOTE 1: Requirements concerning the geographical and spatial coverage, format and content, time and frequency of issuance and period of validity of meteorological information to be supplied to aeronautical users are given in Chapters 3, 4, 6 to 10 and Appendices 2, 3, 5 to 9 of Annex 3 and the relevant regional air navigation plans. Guidance concerning the accuracy of measurement and observation, and accuracy of forecasts is given in Attachments A and B respectively to Annex 3. 2.2.6 Recommendation – In regard to the exchange of meteorological information for operational purposes, the quality system should include verification and validation procedures and resources for monitoring adherence to the prescribed transmission schedules for individual messages and/or bulletins required to be exchanged, and at the times of their filing for transmission. The quality system should be capable of detecting excessive transit times of messages and bulletins received. NOTE: Requirements concerning the exchange of operational meteorological information are given in Chapter 11 and Appendix 10 of Annex 3. 2.2.7 Recommendation – Demonstration of compliance of the quality system applied should be by audit. If non-conformity of the system is identified, action should be initiated to determine and correct the cause. All audit observations should be evidenced and properly documented. 2.2.8 The meteorological information supplied to the users listed in 2.1.2 shall be consistent with Human Factors principles and shall be in forms which require a minimum of interpretation by users, as specified in the following chapters. NOTE: Guidance material on the application of Human Factors principles can be found in the Human Factors Training Manual (DOC 9683). 2.3 NOTIFICATIONS REQUIRED FROM OPERATORS 2.3.1 An operator requiring meteorological service or changes in existing meteorological service shall notify, sufficiently in advance, the meteorological authority or the meteorological office(s) concerned. The minimum amount of advance notice required shall be as agreed between the meteorological authority or meteorological office(s) and the operator. 2.3.2 The meteorological authority shall be notified by the operator requiring service when: a. new routes or new types of operations are planned; b. changes of a lasting character are to be made in scheduled operations; and c. other changes, affecting the provision of meteorological service, are planned. Such information shall contain all details necessary for the planning of appropriate arrangements by the meteorological authority. 2.3.3 The aerodrome meteorological office, or the meteorological office concerned, shall be notified by the operator or a flight crew member: a. of flight schedules; b. when non-scheduled flights are to be operated; c. when flights are delayed, advanced or cancelled. 2.3.4 Recommendation – The notification to the aerodrome meteorological office, or the meteorological office concerned, of individual flights should contain the following information except that, in the case of scheduled flights, the requirement for some or all of this information may be waived by agreement between the meteorological office and the operator: a. aerodrome of departure and estimated time of departure; b. destination and estimated time of arrival; c. route to be flown and estimated times of arrival at, and departure from, any intermediate aerodrome(s); d. alternate aerodromes needed to complete the operational flight plan and taken from the relevant list contained in the regional air navigation plan; e. cruising level; f. type of flight, whether under visual or instrument flight rules; g. type of meteorological information requested for a flight crew member, whether flight documentation and/or briefing or consultation; h. time(s) at which briefing, consultation and/or flight documentation are required. CHAPTER 3 – WORLD AREA FORECAST SYSTEM AND METEOROLOGICAL OFFICES NOTE: Technical specifications and detailed criteria related to this chapter are given in Appendix 2. 3.1 OBJECTIVE OF THE WORLD AREA FORECAST SYSTEM The objective of the world area forecast system shall be to supply meteorological authorities and other users with global aeronautical meteorological en-route forecasts in digital form. This objective shall be achieved through a comprehensive, integrated, worldwide and, as far as practicable, uniform system, and in a cost-effective manner, taking full advantage of evolving technologies. METEOROLOGY SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL 309 AIR NAVIGATION METEOROLOGICAL SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION - ANNEX 3 3.2 WORLD AREA FORECAST CENTRES 3.2.1 A Contracting State, having accepted the responsibility for providing a WAFC within the framework of the world area forecast system, shall arrange for that centre: a. to prepare for grid points for all required levels global forecasts of: 1. upper wind; 2. upper-air temperature and humidity; 3. geopotential altitude of flight levels; 4. flight level and temperature of tropopause; 5. direction, speed and flight level of maximum wind; 6. cumulonimbus clouds; 7. icing; and 8. turbulence; NOTE: Gridded global forecasts of cumulonimbus clouds, icing and turbulence are currently of an experimental nature, labelled as “trial forecast” and distributed only through the Internet-based file transfer protocol (FTP) services. b. to prepare global forecasts of significant weather (SIGWX) phenomena; c. to issue the forecasts referred to in a. and b. in digital form to meteorological authorities and other users, as approved by the Contracting State on advice from the meteorological authority; d. to receive information concerning the accidental release of radioactive materials into the atmosphere, from its associated WMO regional specialized meteorological centre (RSMC) for the provision of transport model products for radiological environmental emergency response, in order to include the information in SIGWX forecasts; and e. to establish and maintain contact with VAACs for the exchange of information on volcanic activity in order to coordinate the inclusion of information on volcanic eruptions in SIGWX forecasts. 3.2.2 In case of interruption of the operation of a WAFC, its functions should be carried out by the other WAFC. NOTE: Back-up procedures to be used in case of interruption of the operation of a WAFC are updated by the World Area Forecast System Operations Group (WAFSOPSG) as necessary; the latest revision can be found at the WAFSOPSG website at: www.icao.int/anb/wafsopsg. 3.3 METEOROLOGICAL OFFICES 3.3.1 Each Contracting State shall establish one or more aerodrome and/or meteorological office which shall be adequate for the provision of meteorological service required to satisfy the needs of international air navigation. 3.3.2 An aerodrome meteorological office shall carry out all or some of the following functions as necessary to meet the needs of flight operations at the aerodrome: a. prepare and/or obtain forecasts and other relevant information for flights with which it is concerned; the extent of its responsibilities to prepare forecasts shall be related to the local availability and use of en-route and aerodrome forecast material received from other offices; b. prepare and/or forecasts of local meteorological conditions; c. maintain a continuos survey of meteorological conditions over the aerodromes for which it is designated to prepare forecasts; d. provide briefing, consultation and flight documentation to flight crew members and/or flight operations personnel; e. supply other meteorological information to aeronautical users; f. display the available meteorological information; g. exchange meteorological information with other meteorological offices; and h. supply information received on pre-eruption volcanic activity, a volcanic eruption or volcanic ash cloud, to its associated air traffic services unit, aeronautical information service unit and meteorically watch office as agreed between the meteorological, aeronautical information service and ATS authorities concerned. 3.3.3 The aerodromes for which landing forecasts are required shall be determined by regional air navigation agreement. 3.3.4 For aerodromes without meteorological offices a. the meteorological authority concerned shall designate one or more meteorological offices to supply meteorological information as required; and b. the competent authorities shall establish means by which such information can be supplied to the aerodromes concerned. 310 3.4 METEOROLOGY SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION METEOROLOGICAL SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION - ANNEX 3 METEOROLOGICAL WATCH OFFICES 3.4.1 A Contracting State, having accepted the responsibility for providing air traffic services within a flight information region or control area, shall establish one or more meteorological watch offices. or arrange for another Contracting State to do so. 3.4.2 A meteorological watch office shall: a. maintain continuous watch over meteorological conditions affecting flight operations within its area of responsibility; b. prepare SIGMET and other information relating to its area of responsibility; c. supply SIGMET information and, as required, other meteorological information to associated air traffic services units; d. disseminate SIGMET information; e. when required by regional air navigation agreement, in accordance with 7.2.1; 1. prepare AIRMET information related to its area of responsibility; 2. supply AIRMET information to associated air traffic services units; and 3. disseminate AIRMET information; f. supply information received on pre-eruption volcanic activity, a volcanic eruption and volcanic ash cloud for which a SIGMET has not already been issued, to its associated ACC/FIC, as agreed between the meteorological and ATS authorities concerned, and to its associated VAAC as determined by regional air navigation agreement; and g. supply information received concerning accidental release of radioactive materials into the atmosphere, in the area for which it maintains watch or adjacent areas, to its associated ACC/FIC, as agreed between the meteorological and ATS authorities concerned, and to aeronautical information service units, as agreed between the meteorological and appropriate civil aviation authorities concerned. The information shall comprise location, date and time of the accident, and forecast trajectories of the radioactive materials. NOTE: The information is provided by WMO regional specialized meteorological centres (RSMC) for the provision of transport model products for radiological environmental emergency response, at the request of the delegated authority of the State in which the radioactive material was released into the atmosphere, or the International Atomic Energy Agency (IAEA). The information is sent by the RSMC to a single contact point of the national meteorological service in each State. This contact point has the responsibility of redistributing the RSMC products within the State concerned. Furthermore, the information is provided by IAEA to RSMC co-located with VAAC London (designated as the focal point) which in turn notifies the ACCs concerned about the release. 3.4.3 Recommendation – The boundaries of the area over which meteorological watch is to be maintained by a meteorological watch office should be coincident with the boundaries of a flight information region or a control area or a combination of flight information regions and/or control areas. 3.5 VOLCANIC ASH ADVISORY CENTERS 3.5.1 A Contracting State, having accepted, by regional air navigation agreement, the responsibility for providing VAAC within the framework of the international airways volcano watch, shall arrange for that center to respond to a notification that a volcano has erupted, or is expected to erupt or volcanic ash is reported in its area of responsibility, by arranging for that center to: a. monitor relevant geostationary and polar-orbiting satellite data to detect existence and extent of volcanic ash in the atmosphere in the are concerned; b. activate the volcanic ash numerical trajectory/dispersion model in order to forecast the movement of any ash ‘cloud’ which has been detected or reported; NOTE: The numerical model may be its own or, by agreement, that of another VAAC. c. issue advisory information regarding the extent and forecast movement of the volcanic ash ‘cloud’ to: 1. meteorological watch offices, area control centers and flight information centers serving flight information regions in its area of responsibility which may be affected; 2. other VAACs whose areas of responsibility may be affected; 3. world area forecast centers, international OPMET data banks, international NOTAM offices, and centers designated by regional air navigation agreement for the operation of aeronautical fixed service satellite distribution systems; and 4. airlines requiring the advisory information through the AFTN address provided specifically for this purpose; and NOTE: The AFTN address to be used by the VAACs is given in the Handbook on the International Airways Volcano Watch (IAVW) (Doc 9766) and at: http://www.icao.int/icao/en/anb/met/index.html d. issue updated advisory information to the meteorological watch offices, area control centers, flight information centers and VAACs referred to in c. as necessary, but at least six hours until such time as the volcanic ash ‘cloud’ is no longer identifiable from satellite data, no further reports of volcanic ash are received from the area, and no further eruptions of the volcano are reported. 3.5.2 Volcanic ash advisory centers shall maintain a 24-hour watch. METEOROLOGY SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL 311 AIR NAVIGATION METEOROLOGICAL SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION - ANNEX 3 3.5.3 In case of interruption of the operation of a VAAC, its functions shall be carried out by another VAAC or another meteorological center, as designated by the VAAC Provider State concerned. NOTE: Back-up procedures to be used in case of interruption of the operation of a VAAC are included in the Handbook on the International Airways Volcano Watch (IAVW) (Doc 9766). 3.6 STATE VOLCANO OBSERVATORIES Contracting States that maintain volcano observatories monitoring active volcanoes shall arrange that selected State volcano observatories, as designated by regional air navigation agreement, observing: a. significant pre-eruption volcanic activity, or a cessation thereof; b. a volcanic eruption, or a cessation thereof; and/or c. volcanic ash in the atmosphere shall send this information as quickly as practicable to its associated ACC, MWO and VAAC. NOTE: Pre-eruption volcanic activity in this context means unusual and/or increasing volcanic activity which could presage a volcanic eruption. 3.7 TROPICAL CYCLONE ADVISORY CENTERS A contracting State having accepted, by regional air navigation agreement, the responsibility for providing a TCAC shall arrange for that center to: a. monitor the development of tropical cyclones in its area of responsibility, using geostationary and polarorbiting satellite data, radar data and other meteorological information; b. issue advisory information concerning the position of the cyclone center, its direction and speed of movement, central pressure and maximum surface wind near the center, in abbreviated plain language to: 1. meteorological watch offices in its area of responsibility; 2. other TCACs whose area of responsibility may be affected; and 3. world area forecast centers, international OPMET databanks, and centers designated by regional air navigation agreement for the operation of aeronautical fixed service satellite distribution systems; and c. issue updated advisory information to meteorological watch offices for each tropical cyclone, as necessary, but at least every six hours. CHAPTER 4 – METEOROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS AND REPORTS NOTE: Technical specifications and detailed criteria related to this chapter are given in Appendix 3. 4.1 AERONAUTICAL METEOROLOGICAL STATIONS AND OBSERVATIONS 4.1.1 Each Contracting State shall establish, at aerodromes in its territory; such aeronautical meteorological stations as it determines to be necessary. An aeronautical meteorological station may be a separate station or may be combined with a synoptic station. NOTE: Aeronautical meteorological stations may include sensors installed outside the aerodrome, where considered justified, by the meteorological authority to ensure the compliance of meteorological service for international air navigation with the provisions of Annex 3. 4.1.2 Recommendation – Each Contracting State should establish, or arrange for the establishment of, aeronautical meteorological stations on off-shore structures or at other points of significance in support of helicopter operations to off-shore structures, if required by regional air navigation agreement. 4.1.3 Aeronautical meteorological stations shall make routine observations at fixed intervals. At aerodromes, the routine observations shall be supplemented by special observations whenever specified changes occur in respect of surface wind, visibility, runway visual range, present weather, clouds and/or air temperature. 4.1.4 Each Contracting State should arrange for its aeronautical meteorological stations to be inspected at sufficiently frequent intervals to ensure that a high standard of observations is maintained, that instruments and all their indicators are functioning correctly, and that the exposure of the instruments has not changed significantly. NOTE: Guidance on the inspection of aeronautical meteorological stations including the frequency of inspections is given in the Manual on Automatic Meteorological Observing Systems at Aerodromes (Doc 9837). 4.1.5 At aerodromes, with runways intended for Category II and III instrument approach and landing operations, automated equipment for measuring or assessing, as appropriate, and for monitoring and remote indicating of surface wind, visibility, runway visual range, height of cloud base, air and dew-point temperatures and atmospheric pressure shall be installed to support approach and landing and take-off operations. These devices shall be integrated automatic systems for acquisition, processing, dissemination and display in real time of the meteorological parameters affecting landing and take-off operations. The design of integrated automatic systems shall observe Human Factors principles and include back-up procedures. NOTE 1: Categories of precision approach and landing operations are defined in Annex 6, Part I. NOTE 2: Guidance material on the application of Human Factors principles can be found in the Human Factors Training Manual (Doc 9683). 312 METEOROLOGY SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION METEOROLOGICAL SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION - ANNEX 3 4.1.6 Recommendation – At aerodromes, with runways intended for Category I instrument approach and landing operations, automated equipment for measuring or assessing, as appropriate, and for monitoring and remote indicating of surface wind, visibility, runway visual range, height of cloud base, air and dew-point temperatures and atmospheric pressure should be installed to support approach and landing and take-off operations. These devices should be integrated automatic systems for acquisition, processing, dissemination and display in real time of the meteorological parameters affecting landing and take-off operations. The design of integrated automatic systems should observe Human Factors principles and include back-up procedures. 4.1.7 Recommendation – Where an integrated semi-automatic system is used for the dissemination/display of meteorological information, it should be capable of accepting the manual insertion of data covering those meteorological elements which cannot be observed by automatic means. 4.1.8 The observations shall form basis for the preparation of reports to be disseminated at the aerodrome of origin and for reports to be disseminated beyond the aerodrome of origin. 4.1.9 Owing to the variability of meteorological elements in space and time, to limitations of observing techniques and to limitations caused by definitions of some of the elements, the specific value of any of the elements given in a report shall be understood by the recipient to be best approximation to actual conditions at the time of observation. NOTE: Guidance on the operationally desirable accuracy of measurement or observation is given in Attachment A. 4.2 AGREEMENT BETWEEN AIR TRAFFIC SERVICES AUTHORITIES AND METEOROLOGICAL AUTHORITIES Recommendation – An agreement between the meteorological authority and the appropriate ATS authority should be established to cover, amongst other things: a. the provision in air traffic services units of displays related to integrated automatic systems; b. the calibration and maintenance of these displays/instruments; c. the use to be made of the displays/instruments by air traffic services personnel; d. as and where necessary, supplementary visual observations (e.g. of meteorological phenomena of operational significance in the climb-out and approach areas) if and when made by air traffic services personnel to update or supplement the information supplied by the meteorological station; e. meteorological information obtained from aircraft taking off or landing (e.g. on wind shear); and f. if available, meteorological information obtained from ground weather radar. NOTE: Guidance on the subject of coordination between ATS and meteorological services is contained in the Manual on Coordination between Air Traffic services, Aeronautical Information Service and Aeronautical Meteorological Services (DOC 9377). 4.3 ROUTINE OBSERVATIONS AND REPORTS 4.3.1 At Aerodromes, routine observations shall be made throughout the 24 hours each day, except as otherwise agreed between the meteorological authority, the appropriate ATS authority and the operator concerned. Such observations shall be made at intervals of one hour or, if so determined by regional air navigation agreement, at intervals of one half-hour. At other aeronautical meteorological stations, such observations shall be made as determined by the meteorological authority taking into account the requirements of air traffic services units and aircraft operations. 4.3.2 Reports of routine observations shall be issued as: a. local routine reports only for dissemination at the aerodrome of origin (intended for arriving and departing aircraft); and b. METAR for dissemination beyond the aerodrome of origin (mainly intended for flight planning, VOLMET broadcasts and D-VOLMET). NOTE: Meteorological information used in ATIS (voice-ATIS and D-ATIS) is to be extracted from the local routine report, in accordance with Annex 11, 4.3.6.1g). 4.3.3 At aerodromes that are not operational throughout 24 hours in accordance with 4.3.1, METAR shall be issued prior to the aerodrome resuming operations in accordance with regional air navigation agreement. 4.4 SPECIAL OBSERVATIONS AND REPORTS 4.4.1 A list of criteria for special observations shall be established by the meteorological authority, in consultation with the appropriate ATS authority, operators and others concerned. 4.4.2 Reports of special observations shall be issued as: a. local special reports, only for dissemination at the aerodrome of origin (intended for arriving and departing aircraft); and b. SPECI for dissemination beyond the aerodrome of origin (mainly intended for flight planning, VOLMET broadcasts and D-VOLMET) unless METAR are issued at half-hourly intervals. METEOROLOGY SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL 313 AIR NAVIGATION METEOROLOGICAL SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION - ANNEX 3 NOTE: Meteorological information used in ATIS (voice-ATIS and D-ATIS) is to be extracted from the local special report, in accordance with Annex 11, 4.3.6.1g). 4.4.3 At aerodromes that are operational throughout 24 hours in accordance with 4.3.1, following the resumption of the issuance of METAR, SPECI shall be issued, as necessary. 4.5 CONTENTS OF REPORTS 4.5.1 Local routine and special reports and METAR and SPECI shall contain the following elements in order indicated a. identification of the type of report; b. location indicator; c. time of observation; d. identification of an automated or missing report, when applicable; e. surface wind direction and speed; f. visibility; g. runway visual range, when applicable; h. present weather; i. cloud amount, cloud type (only for cumulonimbus and towering cumulus clouds) and height of cloud base or, where measured, vertical visibility; j. air temperature and dew-point temperature; and k. QNH and, when applicable, QFE (QFE included only in local routine and special reports). NOTE: The location indicators referred to under b. and their significations are published in Location Indicators DOC 7910). 4.5.2 Recommendation – In addition to elements listed under 4.5.1 a. to k. local routine and special reports and METAR and SPECI should contain supplementary information to be placed after element k. 4.5.3 Optional elements included under supplementary information shall be included in METAR and SPECI in accordance with regional air navigation agreement. 4.6 OBSERVING AND REPORTING METEOROLOGICAL ELEMENTS 4.6.1 Surface Wind 4.6.1.1 The mean direction and the mean speed of the surface wind shall be measured, as well as significant variations of wind direction and speed, and reported in degrees true and meters per second (or knots), respectively. 4.6.1.2 Recommendation – When local routine and special reports are used for departing aircraft, the surface wind observations for these reports should be representative of conditions along the runway; when local routine and special reports are used for arriving aircraft, the surface wind observations for these reports should be representative of the touchdown zone. 4.6.1.3 Recommendation – For METAR and SPECI, the surface wind observations should be representative of conditions above the whole runway where the is only one run way and the whole runway complex where there is more than one runway. 4.6.2 Visibility 4.6.2.1 The visibility as defined in Chapter 1 shall be measured or observed, and reported in meters or kilometers. 4.6.2.2 Recommendation – When local routine and special reports are used for departing aircraft, the visibility observations for these reports should be representative of conditions along the runway; when local routine and special reports are used for arriving aircraft, the visibility observations for these reports should be representative of the touchdown zone of the runway. 4.6.2.3 Recommendation – For METAR and SPECI the visibility observations should be representative of the aerodrome. 4.6.3 Runway Visual Range NOTE: Guidance on the subject of runway visual range is contained in the Manual of Runway Visual Range Observing and reporting Practices (DOC 9328). 4.6.3.1 Runway visual range as defined in Chapter 1 shall be assessed on all runways intended for Category II and III instrument approach and landing operations. 4.6.3.2 Recommendation – Runway visual range as defined in Chapter 1 should be assessed on all runways intended for use during periods of reduced visibility, including: a. precision approach runways intended for Category I instrument approach and landing operations; and b. runways used for take-off and having high-intensity edge lights and/or center line lights. NOTE: Precision approach runways are defined in Annex 14, Volume I, Chapter 1, under ‘Instrument runway’. 314 METEOROLOGY SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION METEOROLOGICAL SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION - ANNEX 3 4.6.3.3 The runway visual range, assessed in accordance with 4.6.3.1 and 4.6.3.2, shall be reported in meters throughout periods when either the visibility or the runway visual range is less than 1500m. 4.6.3.4 Runway visual range assessments shall be representative of: a. the touchdown zone of the runway intended for non-precision or Category I instrument approach and landings operations; b. the touchdown zone and the mid-point of the runway intended for Category II instrument approach and landing operations; and c. the touchdown zone, the mid-point and stop-end of the runway intended for Category III instrument approach and landing operations. 4.6.3.5 The units providing air traffic service and aeronautical information service for an aerodrome shall be kept informed without delay of changes in the serviceability status of the automated equipment used for assessing runway visual range. 4.6.4 Present Weather 4.6.4.1 The present weather occurring at the aerodrome and/or its vicinity shall be observed and reported as necessary. The following present weather phenomena shall be identified, as a minimum: precipitation and freezing precipitation (including intensity thereof), fog, freezing fog and thunderstorms (including thunderstorms in the vicinity). 4.6.4.2 Recommendation – For local routine and special reports, the present weather information should be representative of conditions at the aerodrome. 4.6.4.3 Recommendation – For METAR and SPECI, the present weather information should be representative of conditions at the aerodrome and, for certain specified weather phenomena, in its vicinity, 4.6.4.4 Recommendation – Where observations are made using automatic observing systems, provisions should be made for manual insertion of those present weather elements which cannot be determined adequately by that equipment. 4.6.5 Clouds 4.6.5.1 Cloud amount, cloud type and height of cloud base shall be observed, and reported as necessary to describe the clouds of operational significance. When the sky is obscured, vertical visibility shall be observed and reported, where measured, in lieu of cloud amount, cloud type and height of cloud base. The height of cloud base and vertical visibility shall be reported in meters (or feet). 4.6.5.2 Recommendation – Cloud observations for local routine and special reports should be representative of the approach area. 4.6.5.3 Recommendation – Cloud observations for METAR and SPECI should be representative of the aerodrome and its vicinity. 4.6.6 4.6.6.1 sius. Air Temperature and dew-point temperature The air temperature and the dew-point temperature shall be measured and reported in degrees Cel- 4.6.6.2 Recommendation – Observation of air temperature and dew-point temperature for local routine and special reports and METAR and SPECI should be representative for the whole runway complex. 4.6.7 Atmospheric Pressure The atmospheric pressure shall be measured, and QNH and QFE values shall be computed and reported in hectopascals. 4.6.8 Supplementary information Recommendation – Observations made at aerodromes should include the available supplementary information concerning significant meteorological conditions, particularly those in the approach and climb-out areas. Where practicable, the information should identify the location of the meteorological condition. 4.7 REPORTING OF INFORMATION FROM AUTOMATIC OBSERVING SYSTEMS 4.7.1 Recommendation – METAR and SPECI from automatic observing systems should be used by States in a position to do so during non-operational hours of the aerodrome, and during operational hours of the aerodrome as determined by the meteorological authority in consultation with users based on the availability and efficient use of personnel. NOTE: Guidance on the use of automatic meteorological observing systems is given in the Manual on Automatic Meteorological Observing Systems at Aerodromes (Doc 9837). 4.7.2 Recommendation – Local routine and special reports from automatic systems should be used by States in a position to do so during operational hours of the aerodrome as determined by the meteorological authority in consultation with users based on the availability and efficient use of personnel. 4.7.3 Local routine and special reports and METAR and SPECI from automatic observing systems shall be identified with the word "AUTO". METEOROLOGY SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL 315 AIR NAVIGATION METEOROLOGICAL SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION - ANNEX 3 4.8 OBSERVATION AND REPORTS OF VOLCANIC ACTIVITY Recommendation – The occurrence of pre-eruption volcanic activity, volcanic eruptions and volcanic ash cloud should be reported without delay to the associated air traffic services unit, aeronautical information services unit and meteorological watch office. The report should be made in the form of a volcanic activity report comprising the following information in the order indicated: a. message type, VOLCANIC ACTIVITY REPORT; b. station identifier, location indicator or name of station; c. date/time of message; d. location of volcano and name, if known; and e. concise description of event including, as appropriate, level of intensity of volcanic activity, occurrence of an eruption and its date and time and the existence of a volcanic ash cloud in the area together with direction of ash cloud movement and height. NOTE: Pre-eruption volcanic activity in this context means unusual and/or increasing volcanic activity which could presage a volcanic eruption. CHAPTER 5 – AIRCRAFT OBSERVATIONS AND REPORTS NOTE: Technical specifications and detailed criteria related to this chapter are given in Annex 4. 5.1 OBLIGATIONS OF STATES Each Contracting State shall arrange, according to the provisions of this chapter, for observations to be made by aircraft of its registry operating on international air routes and for the recording and reporting of these observations. 5.2 TYPES OF AIRCRAFT OBSERVATIONS The following aircraft observations shall be made: a. routine aircraft observations during en-route and climb-out phases of the flight; and b. special and other non-routine aircraft observations during any phase of the flight. 5.3 ROUTINE AIRCRAFT OBSERVATIONS - DESIGNATION 5.3.1 Recommendation – When air-ground data link is used and automatic dependent surveillance (ADS) or secondary surveillance radar (SSR) Mode S is being applied, automated routine observations should be made every 15 minutes during the en-route phase and every 30 seconds during climb-out phase for the first 10 minutes of the flight. 5.3.2 Recommendation – For helicopter operations to and from aerodromes on offshore structures, routine observations should be made from helicopters at points and times as agreed between the meteorological authorities and the helicopter operators concerned. 5.3.3 In the case of air routes with high density traffic (e.g. organized tracks), an aircraft from among the aircraft operating at each flight level shall be designated, at approximately hourly intervals, to make routine observations in accordance with 5.3.1. The designation procedures shall be subject to regional air navigation agreement. 5.3.4 In the case of the requirement to report during the climb-out phase, an aircraft shall be designated, at approximately hourly intervals, at each aerodrome to make routine observations in accordance with 5.3.1. 5.4 ROUTINE AIRCRAFT OBSERVATIONS - EXEMPTIONS Aircraft not equipped with air-ground data link shall be exempted from making routine aircraft observations. 5.5 SPECIAL AIRCRAFT OBSERVATIONS Special observations shall be made by all aircraft whenever the following conditions are encountered or observed: a. moderate or severe turbulence; or b. moderate or severe icing; or c. severe mountain wave; or d. thunderstorms, without hail, that are obscured, embedded, widespread or in squall lines; or e. thunderstorms, with hail, that are obscured, embedded, widespread or in squall lines; or f. heavy duststorm or heavy sandstorm; or g. volcanic ash cloud; or h. pre-eruption volcanic activity or a volcanic eruption. NOTE: Pre-eruption volcanic activity in this context means unusual and/or increasing volcanic activity which could presage a volcanic eruption. 316 5.6 METEOROLOGY SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION METEOROLOGICAL SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION - ANNEX 3 OTHER NON-ROUTINE AIRCRAFT OBSERVATIONS When other meteorological conditions not listed under 5.5; e.g., wind shear, are encountered and which, in the opinion of the pilot-in-command, may affect the safety or markedly affect the efficiency of other aircraft operations, the pilot-in-command shall advise the appropriate air traffic services unit as soon as practicable. NOTE: Icing, turbulence and, to a large extent, wind shear, are elements which, for the time being, cannot be satisfactorily observed from the ground and for which in most cases aircraft observations represent the only available evidence. 5.7 REPORTING OF AIRCRAFT OBSERVATIONS DURING FLIGHT 5.7.1 Aircraft observations shall be reported by air-ground data link. Where air-ground data link is not available or appropriate, aircraft observations during flight shall be reported by voice communications. 5.7.2 Aircraft observations shall be reported during flight at the time the observation is made or as soon thereafter as is practicable. 5.7.3 Aircraft observations shall be reported as air-reports. 5.8 RELAY OF AIR-REPORTS BY ATS UNITS The meteorological authority concerned shall make arrangements with the appropriate ATS authority to ensure that, on receipt by the ATS units: a. special air-reports by voice communications, the ATS units relay them without delay to their associated meteorological watch office; and b. routine and special air-reports by data link communications, the ATS units relay them without delay to their associated meteorological watch office and WAFCs. 5.9 RECORDING AND POST-FLIGHT REPORTING OF AIRCRAFT OBSERVATIONS OF VOLCANIC ACTIVITY Special aircraft observations of pre-eruption volcanic activity, a volcanic eruption or volcanic ash cloud shall be recorded on the special air-report of volcanic activity form. A copy of the form shall be included with the flight documentation provided to flights operating on routes which, in the opinion of the meteorological authority concerned, could be affected by volcanic ash clouds. CHAPTER 6 – FORECASTS NOTE: Technical specifications and detailed criteria related to this chapter are given in Appendix 5. 6.1 INTERPRETATION AND USE OF FORECASTS 6.1.1 Owing to the variability of meteorological elements in space and time, to limitations of forecasting techniques and to limitations caused by the definitions of some of the elements, the specific value of any of the elements given in a forecast shall be understood by the recipient to be the most probable value which the element is likely to assume during the period of the forecast. Similarly, when the time of occurrence or change of an element is given in a forecast, this time shall be understood to be the most probable time. 6.1.2 The issue of a new forecast by a meteorological office, such as a routine aerodrome forecast, shall be understood to cancel automatically any forecast of the same type previously issued for the same place and for the same period of validity or part thereof. 6.2 AERODROME FORECASTS 6.2.1 An aerodrome forecast shall be prepared, on the basis of regional air navigation agreement, by the meteorological office designated by the meteorological authority concerned. NOTE: The aerodromes for which aerodrome forecasts are to be prepared and the period of validity of these forecasts are listed in the relevant facilities and services implementation document (FASID). 6.2.2 An aerodrome forecast shall be issued at a specified time and consist of a concise statement of the expected meteorological conditions at an aerodrome for a specified period. 6.2.3 Aerodrome forecasts and amendments thereto shall be issued as TAF and include the following information in the order indicated: a. identification of the type of forecast; b. location indicator; c. time and issue of forecast; d. identification of a missing forecast, when applicable; e. date and period of validity of forecast; f. identification of a cancelled forecast, when applicable; g. surface wind; h. visibility; i. weather; j. cloud; and METEOROLOGY SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL 317 AIR NAVIGATION METEOROLOGICAL SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION - ANNEX 3 k. expect significant changes to one or more of these elements during the period of validity. Optional elements shall be included in TAF in accordance with regional air navigation agreement. NOTE: The visibility included in TAF refers to the forecast prevailing visibility. 6.2.4 Meteorological offices preparing TAF shall keep the forecasts under continuous review and, when necessary, shall issue amendments promptly. The length of the forecast messages and the number of changes indicated in the forecast shall be kept to a minimum. 6.2.5 TAF that cannot be kept under continuos review shall be cancelled. 6.2.6 Recommendation – The period of validity of routine TAF should be not less than 6 hours nor more than 30 hours; this period of validity should be determined by regional air navigation agreement. Routine TAF valid for less than 12 hours should be issued every 3 hours and those valid for 12 to 30 hours should be issued every 6 hours. 6.2.7 When issuing TAF, meteorological offices shall ensure that not more than one TAF is valid at an aerodrome at any given time. 6.3 LANDING FORECASTS 6.3.1 A landing forecast shall be prepared by the meteorological office designated by the meteorological authority concerned as determined by regional air navigation agreement; such forecasts are intended to meet requirements of local users and of aircraft within about one hour’s flying time from the aerodrome. 6.3.2 Landing forecasts shall be prepared in the form of a trend forecast. 6.3.3 A trend forecast shall consist of a concise statement of expected significant changes in the meteorological conditions at that aerodrome to be appended to a local routine or local special report, or a METAR or SPECI. The period of validity of a trend forecast shall be 2 hours from the time of the report which forms part of the landing forecast 6.4 FORECASTS FOR TAKE-OFF 6.4.1 A forecast for take-off shall be prepared by the meteorological office designated by the meteorological authority concerned. 6.4.2 Recommendation – A forecast for take-off should refer to a specified period of time and should contain information on expected conditions over the runway complex in regard to surface wind direction and speed and any variations thereof, temperature, pressure (QNH), and any other elements as agreed locally. 6.4.3 Recommendation – A forecast for take-off should be supplied to operators and flight crew members on request within the 3 hours before the expected time of departure. 6.4.4 Recommendation – Meteorological offices preparing forecasts for take-off should keep the forecasts under continuos review and, when necessary, should issue amendments promptly. 6.5 AREA FORECASTS FOR LOW LEVEL FLIGHTS 6.5.1 Recommendation – When the density of traffic operating below flight level 100 (or up to flight level 150 in mountainous areas, or higher, where necessary) warrants the routine issue and dissemination of area forecasts for such operations, the frequency of issue, the form and the fixed time or period of validity of those forecasts and the criteria of amendments thereto shall be determined by the meteorological authority in consultation with the users. 6.5.2 When the density of traffic operating below flight level 100 warrants the issuance of AIRMET information in accordance with 7.2.1, area forecasts for such operations shall be prepared in a format agreed upon between the meteorological authorities concerned. When abbreviated plain language is used, the forecast shall be prepared as a GAMET area forecast, employing approved ICAO abbreviations and numerical values; when chart form is used, the forecast shall be prepared as a combination of forecasts of upper wind and upper-air temperature, and of SIGWX phenomena. The area forecasts shall be issued to cover the layer between ground and flight level 100 (or up to flight level 150 in mountainous areas, or higher, where necessary) and shall contain information on en-route weather phenomena hazardous to low-level flights, in support of the issuance of AIRMET information, and additional information required by low-level flights. 6.5.3 Area forecasts for low-level flights prepared in support of the issuance of AIRMET information shall be issued every 6 hours and transmitted to meteorological offices concerned not later than one hour prior to the beginning of their validity period. CHAPTER 7 – SIGMET AND AIRMET INFORMATION, AERODROME WARNINGS AND WIND SHEAR WARNINGS AND ALERTS NOTE: Technical specifications and detailed criteria related to this chapter are given in Appendix 6. 318 7.1 METEOROLOGY SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION METEOROLOGICAL SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION - ANNEX 3 SIGMET INFORMATION 7.1.1 SIGMET information shall be issued by a meteorological watch office and shall give a concise description in abbreviated plain language concerning the occurrence and/or expected occurrence of specified en route weather phenomena, which may affect the safety of aircraft operations, and of the development of those phenomena in time and space. 7.1.2 SIGMET information shall be cancelled when the phenomena are no longer occurring or are no longer expected to occur in the area. 7.1.3 The period of validity of a SIGMET message shall be not more than 4 hours. In the special case of SIGMET messages for volcanic ash cloud and tropical cyclones, the period of validity shall be extended up to 6 hours. 7.1.4 Recommendation – SIGMET messages concerning volcanic ash cloud and tropical cyclones should be based on advisory information provided by VAACs and TCACs, respectively, designated by regional air navigation agreement. 7.1.5 Close coordination shall be maintained between the meteorological watch office and the associated area control center/flight information centre to ensure that information on volcanic ash included in SIGMET and NOTAM messages is consistent. 7.1.6 SIGMET messages shall be issued not more than 4 hours before the commencement of the period of validity. In the special case of SIGMET messages for volcanic ash cloud and tropical cyclones, these messages shall be issued as soon as practicable but not more than 12 hours before the commencement of the period of validity. SIGMET messages for volcanic ash and tropical cyclones shall be updated at least every 6 hours. 7.2 AIRMET INFORMATION 7.2.1 AIRMET information shall be issued by a meteorological watch office in accordance with regional air navigation agreement, taking into account the density of the air traffic operating below flight level 100. AIRMET information shall give a concise description in abbreviated plain language concerning the occurrence and/or expected occurrence of specified en-route weather phenomena, which have not been included in Section I of the area forecast for low-level flights issued in accordance with Chapter 6, section 6.5 and which may affect the safety of low-level flights, and of the development of those phenomena in time and space. 7.2.2 AIRMET information shall be cancelled when the phenomena are no longer occurring or are no longer expected to occur in the area. 7.2.3 The period of validity of an AIRMET message shall be not more than 4 hours. 7.3 AERODROME WARNINGS 7.3.1 Aerodrome warnings shall be issued by the meteorological office designated by the meteorological authority concerned and shall give concise information of meteorological conditions which could adversely affect aircraft on the ground, including parked aircraft, and the aerodrome facilities and services. 7.3.2 Recommendation – Aerodrome warnings should be cancelled when the conditions are no longer occurring and/or no longer expected to occur at the aerodrome. 7.4 WIND SHEAR WARNINGS AND ALERTS NOTE: Guidance on the subject is contained in the Manual on Low-level Wind Shear (Doc 9817). Wind shear alerts are expected to complement wind shear warnings and together are intended to enhance situational awareness of wind shear. 7.4.1 Wind shear warnings shall be prepared by the meteorological office designated by the meteorological authority concerned for aerodromes where wind shear is considered a factor, in accordance with local arrangements with the appropriate ATS unit and operators concerned. Wind shear warnings shall give concise information on the observed or expected existence of wind shear which could adversely affect aircraft on the approach path or take-off path or during circling approach between runway level and 500m (1600ft) above that level and aircraft on the runway during the landing roll or take-off run. Where local topography has been shown to produce significant wind shears at heights in excess of 500m (1600ft) above runway level, then 500m (1600ft) shall not be considered restrictive. 7.4.2 Recommendation – Wind shear warnings for arriving aircraft and/or departing aircraft should be cancelled when aircraft reports indicate that wind shear no longer exists or, alternatively, after an agreed elapsed time. The criteria for the cancellation of a wind shear warning should be defined locally for each aerodrome, as agreed between the meteorological authority, the appropriate ATS authority and the operators concerned. 7.4.3 At aerodromes where wind shear is detected by automated, ground-based, wind shear remote-sensing or detection equipment, wind shear alerts generated by these systems shall be issued. Wind shear alerts shall give concise, up-to-date information related to the observed existence of wind shear involving a headwind/tailwind change of 7.5m/s (15kt) or more which could adversely affect aircraft on the final approach path or initial take-off path and aircraft on the runway during the landing roll or take-off run. 7.4.4 Recommendation – Wind shear alerts should be updated at least every minute. The wind shear alert should be cancelled as soon as the headwind/tailwind change falls below 7.5m/s (15kt). METEOROLOGY SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL 319 AIR NAVIGATION METEOROLOGICAL SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION - ANNEX 3 CHAPTER 8 - AERONAUTICAL CLIMATOLOGICAL INFORMATION NOTE: Technical specifications and detailed criteria related to this chapter are given in Appendix 7 8.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS NOTE: In cases where it is impracticable to meet the requirements for aeronautical climatological information on a national basis, the collection, processing and storage of observational data may be affected through computer facilities available for international use, and the responsibility for the preparation of required aeronautical climatological information may be delegated by agreement between the meteorological authorities concerned. 8.1.1 Aeronautical climatological information required for the planning of flight operations shall be prepared in the form of aerodrome climatological tables and aerodrome climatological summaries. Such information shall be supplied to aeronautical users agreed between the meteorological authority and those users. NOTE: Climatological data required for aerodrome planning purposes are set out in Annex 14, Volume I, 3.1.4. 8.1.2 Recommendation – Aeronautical climatological information should normally be based on observations made over a period of at least 5 years and the period should be indicated in the information supplied. 8.1.3 Recommendation – Climatological data related to sites for new aerodromes and to additional runways at existing aerodromes should be collected starting as early as possible before commissioning of those aerodromes or runways. 8.2 AERODROME CLIMATOLOGICAL TABLES Recommendation – Each Contracting State should made arrangements for collecting and retaining the necessary observational data and have the capability: a. to prepare aerodrome climatological tables for each regular and alternate international aerodrome within its territory; and b. to make available such climatological tables to an aeronautical user within a time period as agreed between the meteorological authority and that user. 8.3 AERODROME CLIMATOLOGICAL SUMMARIES Recommendation – Aerodrome climatological summaries should follow the procedures prescribed by the World Meteorological Organization. Where computer facilities are available to store, process and retrieve the information, the summaries should be published, or otherwise made available to aeronautical users on request. Where such computer facilities are not available, the summaries should be prepared using the models specified by the World Meteorological Organization, and should be published and kept up to date as necessary. 8.4 COPIES OF METEOROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONAL DATA Each meteorological authority, on request and to the extent practicable, shall make available to any other meteorological authority, to operators and to others concerned with the application of meteorology to international air navigation, meteorological observational data required for research, investigation or operational analysis. CHAPTER 9 - SERVICE FOR OPERATORS AND FLIGHT CREW MEMBERS 9.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS 9.1.1 Meteorological information shall be supplied to operators and flight crew members for: a. pre-flight planning by operators; b. in-flight re-planning by operators using centralized operational control of flight operations; c. use by flight crew members before departure; and d. aircraft in flight. 9.1.2 Meteorological information supplied to operators and flight crew members shall cover the flight in respect of time, altitude and geographical extent. Accordingly, the information shall relate to appropriate fixed times, or periods of time, and shall extent to the aerodrome of intended landing, also covering the meteorological conditions expected between the aerodrome of intended landing and alternate aerodromes designated by the operator. 9.1.3 Meteorological information supplied to operators and flight crew members shall be up to date and include the following information, as established by meteorological authority in consultation with operators concerned: a. forecast of 1. upper wind and upper-air temperature; 2. upper-air humidity; 3. geopotential altitude of flight levels; 4. flight level and temperature of tropopause; 5. direction, speed and flight level of maximum wind; and 6. SIGWX phenomena; NOTE: Forecasts of upper-air humidity and geopotential altitude of flight levels are used only in automatic flight planning and need not be displayed. 320 METEOROLOGY SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION METEOROLOGICAL SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION - ANNEX 3 b. METAR or SPECI (including trend forecasts as issued in accordance with regional air navigation agreement) for the aerodromes of departure and intended landing, and for take-off, en-route and destination alternate aerodromes; c. TAF or amended TAF for the aerodromes of departure and intended landing, and for take-off, en-route and destination alternate aerodromes; d. forecasts for take-off; e. SIGMET information and appropriate special air-reports relevant to the whole route; NOTE: Appropriate special air-reports will be those not already used in the preparation of SIGMET. f. volcanic ash and tropical cyclone advisory information relevant to the whole route; g. subject to regional air navigation agreement, GAMET area forecast and/or area forecasts for low-level flights in chart form prepared in support of the issuance of AIRMET information, and AIRMET information for low-level flights relevant to the whole route; h. aerodrome warnings for the local aerodrome; i. meteorological satellite images; and j. ground-based weather radar information. 9.1.4 Forecasts listed under 9.1.3 a) shall be generated from the digital forecasts provided by the WAFCs whenever these forecasts cover the intended flight path in respect of time, altitude and geographical extent, unless otherwise agreed between the meteorological authority and the operator concerned. 9.1.5 When forecasts are identified as being originated by the WAFCs, no modifications shall be made to their meteorological content. 9.1.6 Charts generated from the digital forecasts provided by the WAFCs shall be made available, as required by operators, for fixed areas of coverage as shown in Appendix 8, Figures A8-1, A8-2 and A8-3. 9.1.7 When forecasts of upper wind and uppercair temperature listed under 9.1.3 a) 1) are supplied in chart form, they shall be fixed time prognostic charts for flight levels as specified in Appendix 2, 1.2.2 a). When forecasts of SIGWX phenomena listed under 9.1.3 a) 6) are supplied in chart form, they shall be fixed time prognostic charts for an atmospheric layer limited by flight levels as specified in Appendix 2, 1.3.2 and Appendix 5, 4.3.2. 9.1.8 The forecasts of upper wind and upper-air temperature and of SIGWX phenomena above flight level 100 requested for pre-flight planning and in-flight re-planning by the operator shall be supplied as soon as they become available, but not later than 3 hours before departure. Other meteorological information requested for pre-flight planning and in-flight re-planning by the operator shall be supplied as soon as is practicable. 9.1.9 Where necessary, the meteorological authority of the State providing service for operators and flight crew members shall initiate coordinating action with the meteorological authorities of other States with a view to obtaining from them reports and/or forecasts required. 9.1.10 Meteorological information shall be supplied to operators and flight crew members at the location to be determined by the meteorological authority, after consultation with the operators and at the time to be agreed upon between the meteorological office and the operator concerned. The service for pre-flight planning shall be confined to flights originating within the territory of the State concerned. At an aerodrome without a meteorological office, arrangements for the supply of meteorological information shall be as agreed upon between the meteorological authority and the operator concerned. 9.2 BRIEFING, CONSULTATION AND DISPLAY NOTE: The requirements for the use of automated pre-flight information systems in providing briefing, consultation and display are given in 9.4. 9.2.1 Briefing and/or consultation shall be provided, on request, to flight crew members and/or other flight operations personnel. Its purpose shall be to supply the latest available information on existing and expected meteorological conditions along the route to be flown, at the aerodrome of intended landing, alternate aerodromes and other aerodromes as relevant, either to explain and amplify the information contained in the flight documentation or, if so agreed between the meteorological authority and the operator, in lieu of flight documentation. 9.2.2 Meteorological information used for briefing and consultation shall include any or all of the information listed in 9.1.3. 9.2.3 If the meteorological office expresses an opinion on the development of the meteorological conditions at an aerodrome which differs appreciably from the aerodrome forecast included in the flight documentation, the attention of flight crew members shall be drawn to the divergence. The portion of the briefing dealing with the divergence shall be recorded at the time of briefing and this record shall be made available to the operator. METEOROLOGY SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL 321 AIR NAVIGATION METEOROLOGICAL SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION - ANNEX 3 9.2.4 The required briefing, consultation, display and/or flight documentation shall normally be provided by the meteorological office associated with the aerodrome of departure. At an aerodrome where these services are not available, arrangements to meet the requirements of flight crew members shall be as agreed upon between the meteorological authority and the operator concerned. In exceptional circumstances, such as an undue delay, the meteorological office associated with the aerodrome shall provide or, if that is not practicable, arrange for the provision of a new briefing, consultation and/or flight documentation as necessary. 9.2.5 Recommendation – The flight crew member or other flight operations personnel for whom briefing, consultation and/or flight documentation has been requested should visit the meteorological office at the time agreed upon between the meteorological office and the operator concerned. Where local circumstances at an aerodrome make personal briefing or consultation impracticable, the meteorological office should provide those services by telephone or other suitable telecommunication facilities. 9.3 FLIGHT DOCUMENTATION NOTE: The requirements for the use of automated pre-flight information systems in providing flight documentation are given in 9.4. 9.3.1 Flight documentation to be made available shall comprise information listed under 9.1.3 a) 1) and 6), b), c), e), f) and, if appropriate, g). However, when agreed between the meteorological authority and operator concerned, flight documentation for flights of two hours' duration or less, after a short stop or turnaround, shall be limited to the information operationally needed, but in all cases the flight documentation shall at least comprise information on 9.1.3 b), c), e), f) and, if appropriate, g). 9.3.2 Whenever it becomes apparent that the meteorological information to be included in the flight documentation will differ materially from that made available for pre-flight planning and in-flight re-planning, the operator shall be advised immediately and, if practicable, be supplied with the revised information as agreed between the operator and the meteorological office concerned. 9.3.3 Recommendation – In cases where a need for amendment arises after the flight documentation has been supplied. and before take-off of the aircraft, the meteorological office should, as agreed locally, issue the necessary amendment or updated information to the operator or to the local air traffic services unit, for transmission to the aircraft. 9.3.4 The meteorological authority shall retain information supplied to flight crew members, either as printed copies or in computer files, for a period of at least 30 days from the date of issue. This information shall be made available, on request, for inquiries or investigations and, for these purposes, shall be retained until the inquiry or investigation is completed. 9.4 AUTOMATED PRE-FLIGHT INFORMATION SYSTEMS FOR BRIEFING, CONSULTATION, FLIGHT PLANNING AND FLIGHT DOCUMENTATION 9.4.1 Where the meteorological authority uses automated pre-flight information systems to supply and display meteorological information to operators and flight crew members for self-briefing, flight planning and flight documentation purposes, the information supplied and displayed shall comply with the relevant provisions in 9.1 to 9.3 inclusive. 9.4.2 Recommendation – Automated pre-flight information systems providing for a harmonized, common point of access to meteorological information and aeronautical information services information by operators, flight crew members and other aeronautical personnel concerned should be established by an agreement between the meteorological authority and the relevant civil aviation authority or the agency to which the authority to provide service has been delegated in accordance with Annex 15, 3.1.1 c. NOTE: The meteorological and aeronautical information services information concerned is specified in 9.1 to 9.3 and Appendix 8 and in Annex 15, 8.1 and 8.2 respectively. 9.4.3 Where automated pre-flight information systems are used to provide a harmonized, common point of access to meteorological information and aeronautical information services information by operators, flight crew members and other aeronautical personnel concerned, the meteorological authority concerned shall remain responsible for the quality control and quality management if meteorological information by means of such systems in accordance with Chapter 2, 2.2.2. NOTE: The responsibilities relating to aeronautical information services information and the quality assurance of the information is given in Annex 15, Chapter 3. 9.5 INFORMATION FOR AIRCRAFT IN FLIGHT 9.5.1 Meteorological information for use by aircraft in flight shall be supplied by a meteorological office to its associated air traffic services unit and through D-VOLMET or VOLMET broadcasts as determined by regional air navigation agreement. Meteorological information for planning by the operator for aircraft in flight shall be supplied on request, as agreed between the meteorological authority or authorities and the operator concerned. 9.5.2 Meteorological information for use by aircraft in flight shall be supplied to air traffic services units in accordance with specifications of Chapter 10. 9.5.3 Meteorological information shall be supplied through D-VOLMET or VOLMET broadcast in accordance with the specifications of Chapter 11. 322 METEOROLOGY SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION METEOROLOGICAL SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION - ANNEX 3 CHAPTER 10 - INFORMATION FOR AIR TRAFFIC SERVICES, SEARCH AND RESCUE SERVICES AND AERONAUTICAL INFORMATION SERVICES NOTE: Technical specifications and detailed criteria related to this chapter are given in Appendix 9. 10.1 INFORMATION FOR AIR TRAFFIC SERVICES UNITS 10.1.1 The meteorological authority shall designate a meteorological office to be associated with each air traffic services unit. The associated meteorological office shall, after coordination with air traffic services unit, supply, or arrange for the supply of, up-to-date meteorological information to the unit necessary for the conduct of its functions. 10.1.2 Recommendation – The associated meteorological office for an aerodrome control tower or approach control unit should be an aerodrome meteorological office. 10.1.3 The associated meteorological office for a flight information center or area control center shall be a meteorological watch office. 10.1.4 Recommendation – Where, owing to local circumstances, it is convenient for the duties of an associated meteorological office to be shared between two or more meteorological offices, the division of responsibility should be determined by the meteorological authority in consultation with the appropriate ATS authority. 10.1.5 Any meteorological information requested by an air traffic services unit in connection with an aircraft emergency shall be supplied as rapidly as possible. 10.2 INFORMATION FOR SEARCH AND RESCUE SERVICES UNITS Meteorological offices designated by the meteorological authority in accordance with regional air navigation agreement shall supply search and rescue services units with the meteorological information they require in a form established by mutual agreement. For that purpose, the designated meteorological office shall maintain liaison with the search and rescue services unit throughout a search and rescue operation. 10.3 INFORMATION FOR AERONAUTICAL INFORMATION SERVICES UNITS The meteorological authority, in coordination with the appropriate civil aviation authority, shall arrange for the supply of up-to-date meteorological information to relevant aeronautical information services units, as necessary, for the conduct of their functions. CHAPTER 11- REQUIREMENTS FOR AND USE OF COMMUNICATIONS NOTE 1: Technical specification and detailed criteria related to this chapter are given in Appendix10. NOTE 2: It is recognized that it is for each Contracting State to decide upon it own internal organization and responsibility for implementing the telecommunication facilities referred to this chapter. 11.1 REQUIREMENTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS 11.1.1 Suitable telecommunications facilities shall be made available to permit aerodrome meteorological offices and, as necessary, aeronautical meteorological stations to supply the required meteorological information to air traffic services units on the aerodromes for which those offices and stations are responsible, and in particular to aerodrome control towers, approach control offices and the aeronautical telecommunications stations serving these aerodromes. 11.1.2 Suitable telecommunications facilities shall be made available to permit meteorological watch offices to supply the required meteorological information to air traffic services and search and rescue services units in respect of the flight information regions, control areas and search and rescue regions for which those offices are responsible, and in particular to flight information centers, area control centers and rescue coordination centers and the associated aeronautical telecommunications stations. 11.1.3 Suitable telecommunication facilities shall be made available to permit world area forecast centers to supply the required world area forecast system products to meteorological offices, meteorological authorities and other users. 11.1.4 Telecommunication facilities between meteorological offices and, as necessary, aeronautical meteorological stations and aerodrome control towers or approach control offices shall permit communications by direct speech, the speed with which the communications can be established being such that required points may normally be contacted within approximately 15 seconds. 11.1.5 Recommendation – Telecommunication facilities between meteorological offices and flight information centers, area control centers, rescue coordination centers and aeronautical telecommunication stations should permit: a. communications by direct speech, the speed with which the communications can be established being such that the required points may normally be contacted within approximately 15 seconds; and b. printed communications, when a record is required by the recipient; the message transmit time should not exceed 5 minutes. NOTE: In 11.1.4 and 11.1.5 ‘approximately 15 seconds’ refers to telephony communications involving switchboard operation and ‘5 minutes’ refer to printed communications involving transmission. METEOROLOGY SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL 323 AIR NAVIGATION METEOROLOGICAL SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION - ANNEX 3 11.1.6 Recommendation – The telecommunication facilities required in accordance with 11.1.4 and 11.1.5 should be supplemented, as and where necessary, by other forms of visual or audio communications, for example, closed-circuit television or separate information processing systems. 11.1.7 Recommendation – As agreed between the meteorological authority and operators, provision should be made to enable operators to establish suitable telecommunications facilities for obtaining meteorological information from aerodrome meteorological offices or other appropriate sources. 11.1.8 Suitable telecommunications facilities shall be made available to permit meteorological offices to exchange operational meteorological information with other meteorological offices. 11.1.9 Recommendation – The telecommunications facilities used for the exchange of operational meteorological information should be the aeronautical fixed service or, for the exchange of non-time critical operational meteorological information, the public Internet, subject to availability, satisfactory operation and bilateral/multilateral and/or regional air navigation agreements. NOTE 1: Three aeronautical fixed service satellite distribution systems providing for global coverage are used to support the global exchanges of operational meteorological information. Provisions relating to the satellite distribution systems are given in Annex 10, Volume III, Part 1, 10.1 and 10.2. NOTE 2: Guidance material on non-time-critical operational meteorological information and relevant aspects of the public Internet is provided in the Guidelines on the Use of the Public Internet for Aeronautical Applications (Doc 9855). 11.2 USE OF AERONAUTICAL FIXED SERVICE COMMUNICATIONS AND THE PUBLIC INTERNET - METEOROLOGICAL BULLETINS Meteorological bulletins containing operational meteorological information to be transmitted via aeronautical fixed service or the public Internet shall be originated by the appropriate meteorological office or aeronautical meteorological station. NOTE: Meteorological bulletins containing operational meteorological information authorized for transmission via aeronautical fixed service are listed in Annex 10, Volume II, Chapter 4, together with the relevant priorities and priority indicators. 11.3 USE OF AERONAUTICAL FIXED SERVICE COMMUNICATIONS - WORLD AREA FORECAST SYSTEM PRODUCTS Recommendation – World area forecast system products in digital form should be transmitted using binary data communication techniques. The method and channels used for dissemination of the products should be as determined by regional air navigation agreement. 11.4 USE OF AERONAUTICAL MOBILE SERVICE COMMUNICATION The content and format of meteorological information transmitted to aircraft and by aircraft shall be consistent with the provisions of this Annex. 11.5 USE OF AERONAUTICAL DATA LINK SERVICE - CONTENTS OF D-VOLMET D-VOLMET shall contain current METAR and SPECI together with trend forecasts where available, TAF and SIGMET, special air-reports not covered by SIGMET and, where available, AIRMET. NOTE: The requirement to provide METAR and SPECI may be met by the data-link information service (D-FIS) application entitled ‘Data link-aerodrome routine meteorological report (D-METAR) service’; the requirement to provide TAF may be met by the D-FIS application entitled ‘Data link-aerodrome forecast (D-TAF) service’; and the requirement to provide SIGMET and AIRMET messages may be met by the D-FIS application entitled ‘Data link-SIGMET (D-SIGMET) service’. The details of these data link services are specified in the Manual of Air Traffic Services Data Link Applications (Doc 9694). 11.6 USE OF AERONAUTICAL BROADCAST SERVICE - CONTENTS OF VOLMET BROADCASTS 11.6.1 Continuous VOLMET broadcasts, normally on very high frequencies (VHF) shall contain current METAR and SPECI, together with trend forecasts where available. 11.6.2 Scheduled VOLMET broadcasts, normally on high frequencies (HF), shall contain current METAR and SPECI, together with trend forecasts where available and, where so determined by regional air navigation agreement, TAF and SIGMET. 324 METEOROLOGY SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION METEOROLOGICAL SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION - ANNEX 3 Meteorological Serv ic e for International Air Navigation / Model Charts and Forms - Annex 3 APPENDIX 1 FLIGHT DOCUMENTATION - MODEL CHARTS AND FORMS MODEL A MODEL IS MODEL SWH MODEL SWM MODEL SWL MODEL MODEL MODEL MODEL MODEL MODEL TCG VAG STC SVA SGE SN OPMET information Upper wind and temperature chart for standard isobaric surface Example 1 - Arrows, feathers and pennants (Mercartor projection) Example 2 - Arrows, feathers and pennants (Polar stereographic projection) Significant weather chart (high level) Example - Polar stereographic projection (showing the jet stream vertical extent) Significant weather chart (medium level) Significant weather chart (low level) Example 1 Example 2 Tropical cyclone advisory information in graphical format Volcanic ash advisory information in graphical format SIGMET for tropical cyclone in graphical format SIGMET for volcanic ash in graphical format SIGMET for phenomena other than tropical cyclone and volcanic ash in graphical format Sheet of notations used in flight documentation METEOROLOGY SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL 325 AIR NAVIGATION METEOROLOGICAL SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION - ANNEX 3 APPENDIX 1 - MODEL A - OPMET INFORMATION 1290422803000 326 METEOROLOGY SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION METEOROLOGICAL SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION - ANNEX 3 Meteorological Serv ice for International Air Navigation / Model Charts - Annex 3 APPENDIX 1 - MODEL IS - UPPER WIND AND TEMPERATURE CHART FOR ISOBARIC SURFACE EXAMPLE 1: ARROWS, FEATHERS AND PENNANTS (MERCATOR PROJECTION) 1290413647000 APPENDIX 1 - MODEL IS - UPPER WIND AND TEMPERATURE CHART FOR STANDARD ISOBARIC SURFACE EXAMPLE 2: ARROWS, FEATHERS AND PENNANTS (POLAR STEREOGRAPHIC PROJECTION) METEOROLOGY SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL 327 AIR NAVIGATION METEOROLOGICAL SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION - ANNEX 3 1290414327000 APPENDIX 1 - MODEL SWH - SIGNIFICANT WEATHER CHART (HIGH LEVEL) EXAMPLE: POLAR STEREOGRAPHIC PROJECTION (SHOWING THE JET STREAM VERTICAL EXTEND) 328 METEOROLOGY SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION METEOROLOGICAL SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION - ANNEX 3 1290414861000 METEOROLOGY SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL 329 AIR NAVIGATION METEOROLOGICAL SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION - ANNEX 3 APPENDIX 1 - MODEL SWM - SIGNIFICANT WEATHER CHART (MEDIUM LEVEL) 1290415446000 APPENDIX 1 - MODEL SWL - SIGNIFICANT WEATHER CHART (LOW LEVEL) EXAMPLE 1 330 METEOROLOGY SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION METEOROLOGICAL SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION - ANNEX 3 1 313402822922 APPENDIX 1 - MODEL SWL - SIGNIFICANT WEATHER CHART (LOW LEVEL) EXAMPLE 2 METEOROLOGY SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL 331 AIR NAVIGATION METEOROLOGICAL SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION - ANNEX 3 1313402822922 332 METEOROLOGY SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION METEOROLOGICAL SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION - ANNEX 3 APPENDIX 1 - MODEL TCG - CYCLONE ADVISORY INFORMATION IN GRAPHICAL FORMAT 1290674883000 METEOROLOGY SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL 333 AIR NAVIGATION METEOROLOGICAL SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION - ANNEX 3 APPENDIX 1 - MODEL VAG - VOLCANIC ASH ADVISORY INFORMATION IN GRAPHICAL FORMAT 1290420286000 334 METEOROLOGY SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION METEOROLOGICAL SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION - ANNEX 3 APPENDIX 1 - MODEL STC - SIGMET FOR TROPICAL CYCLONE IN GRAPHICAL FORMAT 1290674883000 METEOROLOGY SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL 335 AIR NAVIGATION METEOROLOGICAL SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION - ANNEX 3 APPENDIX 1 - MODEL SVA - SIGMET FOR VOLCANIC ASH IN GRAPHICAL FORMAT 1290418759000 336 METEOROLOGY SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION METEOROLOGICAL SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION - ANNEX 3 APPENDIX 1 - MODEL SGE - SIGMET FOR PHENOMENA OTHER THAN TROPICAL CYCLONE AND VOLCANIC ASH IN GRAPHICAL FORMAT 1227193233000 METEOROLOGY SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL 337 AIR NAVIGATION METEOROLOGICAL SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION -- ANNEX 3 Meteorological Service for International Air Navigation / SIGMET N otations - Annex 3 APPENDIX 1. MODEL SN – SHEET OF NOTATIONS USED IN FLIGHT DOCUMENTATION 1 SYMBOLS FOR SIGNIFICANT WEATHER Tropical cyclone Drizzle 1145640356000 1145640356000 Severe squall line1 Rain 1 1145640356000 145640356000 1 Moderate turbulence Snow 145640356000 1145640356000 1 Severe turbulence Shower Hail 145640356000 1145640356000 1145640356000 Mountain waves Widespread blowing snow 1 1145640356000 145640356000 Moderate aircraft icing Severe sand or dust haze 1145640356000 1145640356000 Widespread sandstorm or duststorm Severe aircraft icing 1145640356000 1145640356000 1 Widespread fog 1 145640356000 Widespread haze 207059668000 1 Radioactive materials in the atmosphere2 Widespread mist 207059692000 1145640356000 Volcanic eruption3 Widespread smoke 1 1145640356000 207059732000 Mountain obscuration 1 Freezing precipitation4 207059780000 1145640356000 1 In flight documentation for flights operating up to FL 100, this symbol refers to “squall line”. 2 The following information should be included at the side of the chart: radioactive materials symbol; Latitude/longitude of accident site; Date and time of accident; check NOTAM for further information. 3 The following information should be included at the side of the chart: Volcanic eruption symbol; Name and international number of volcano (if known); Latitude/longitude; Date and time of the first eruption (if known); check SIGMETS and NOTAM or ASHTAM for volcanic ash. 4 This symbol does not refer to icing due to precipitation coming into contact with an aircraft which is at a very low temperature. NOTE: Height indications between which phenomena are expected, top above base as per chart legend. 338 METEOROLOGY SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION METEOROLOGICAL SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION -- ANNEX 3 2 FRONTS AND CONVERGENCE ZONES AND OTHER SYMBOLS USED 1313484373455 Cold front at the surface 12 Position, speed and level of max. wind 28309653000 1313484373455 Warm front at the surface Convergence line 12 07060097000 1313484373455 Freezing level Occluded front at the surface 1145640356000 1313484373455 Quasi-stationary front at the surface Intertropical convergence zone 1145640356000 Tropopause high State of the sea 1145640356000 1313484373455 Sea surface temperature Tropopause low 1313484373455 1145640356000 Widespread strong surface wind1 Tropopause level 1313484373455 1145640356000 1 313484373455 Wind arrows indicate the maximum wind in jet and the flight level at which it occurs. If the maximum wind speed is 60 m/s (120 kt) or more, the flight levels between which winds are greater than 40 m/s (80 kt) is placed below the maximum wind level. In the example, winds are greater than 40 m/s (80 kt) between FL 220 and FL 400. The heavy line delineating the jet axis begins/ends at the points where a wind speed of 40 m/s (80 kt) is forecast. Symbol used whenever the height of the jet axis changes by +/- 3000 ft or the speed changes by +/- 20 kt. 1313 484373455 1 This symbol refers to widespread surface wind speeds exceeding 15 m/s (30 kt). 3 3.1 ABBREVIATIONS USED TO DESCRIBE CLOUDS TYPE CI = Cirrus CC = Cirrocumulus CS = Cirrostratus AC = Altocumulus AS = Altostratus NS = Nimbostratus SC = Stratocumulus ST = Stratus CU = Cumulus CB = Cumulonimbus METEOROLOGY SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL 339 AIR NAVIGATION METEOROLOGICAL SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION -- ANNEX 3 3.2 AMOUNT Clouds except CB: FEW = few (1/8th to 2/8ths) SCT = scattered (3/8th to 4/8ths) BKN = broken (5/8ths to 7/8ths) OVC = overcast (8/8ths) CB only: ISOL = individual CBs (isolated) OCNL = well separated CBs (occasional) FRQ = CBs with little or no separation (frequent) EMBD = CBs embedded in layers of other clouds or concealed by haze (embedded) 3.3 HEIGHTS Heights are indicated on SWH and SWM charts in flight levels (FL), top over base. When XXX is used, tops or bases are outside the layer of the atmosphere to which the chart applies. In SWL charts: a. Heights are indicated as altitudes above mean sea level; b. The abbreviation SFC is used to indicate ground level. 4 4.1 DEPICTING OF LINES AND SYSTEMS ON SPECIFIC CHARTS SWH AND SWM — SIGNIFICANT WEATHER CHARTS (HIGH AND MEDIUM) Scalloped line Heavy broken line Heavy solid line interrupted by wind arrow and flight level Flight levels inside small rectangles 4.2 = demarcation of areas of significant weather = delineation of area of CAT = position of jet stream axis with indication of wind direction, speed in kt or km/h and height in flight levels. The vertical extent of the jet stream is indicated (in flight levels), e.g. FL270 accompanied by 240/290 indicates that the jet extends from FL240 to FL290. = height in flight levels of tropopause at spot locations; e.g., . Low and High points of the tropopause topography are indicated by the letters L or H respectively inside a pentagon with the height in flight levels. Display explicit FL for JET dephts and tropopause height even if outside forecast bounds. 1276588679000 SWL — SIGNIFICANT WEATHER CHART (LOW LEVEL) X L H Scalloped lines Dashed lines = = = = = position of pressure centres given in hectopascals; centre of low pressure; centre of high pressure; demarcation of area of significant weather altitude of 0°C isotherm in feet (hectofeet) or metres i.e., 0°C level is at an NOTE: 0°C level may also be indicated by; altitude of 6,000 ft. = speed in kt or km/h of movement of frontal systems, depressions or anticyclones Figures on arrows Figure inside the state = total wave height in feet or metres of the sea symbol Figure inside the sea = sea surface temperature in °C surface temperature symbol = wind in kt or km/h Figures inside the strong surface wind symbol 1276588679000 4.3 ARROWS, FEATHERS AND PENNANTS Arrows indicate direction. Number of pennants and/or feathers correspond to speed. 340 METEOROLOGY SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION METEOROLOGICAL SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION -- ANNEX 3 EXAMPLE: 1 145640356000 270° / 115 kt (equivalent to 57.5 m/s) Pennants correspond to 50 kt or 25 m/s; Feather correspond to 10 kt or 5 m/s; Half-feather correspond to 5 kt or 2.5 m/s. A conversion factor of 1 to 2 is used. METEOROLOGY SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL 341 AIR NAVIGATION METEOROLOGICAL SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION - ANNEX 3 Meteorological Service for International Air Navigation / World Area Forec ast - Annex 3 Appendix 2 - Technical Specifications Related To World Area Forecast System And Meteorological Offices Table A2-1. Template for advisory message for volcanic ash Key: M O = = = = inclusion mandatory, part of every message ; inclusion optional ; a double line indicates that the text following it should be placed on the subsequent line NOTE 1: The ranges and resolutions for the numerical elements included in advisory messages for volcanic ash are shown in Appendix 6, Table A6-4. NOTE 2: The explanations for the abbreviations can be found in the Procedures for Air Navigation Services ICAO Abbreviations and Codes (PANS-ABC, Doc 8400). NOTE 3: Inclusion of a "colon " after each element heading is mandatory. NOTE 4: The numbers 1 to 18 are included only for clarity and they are not part of the advisory message, as shown in the example. Table A2-1 - Template for advisory message for volcanic ash Element Template(s) Detailed Content Identification 1 of the type of Type of message VA ADVISORY message (M) 2 Time of origin (M) Year, month, day, time in DTG: nnnnnnnn/nnnnZ UTC nnnnnnnnnnnn 3 Name of VAAC Name of VAAC VAAC: (M) 4 Name of volcano Name and IAVCEI1 VOLCANO: nnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnnnnnnn (M) number of volcano [nnnnnn] or UNKNOWN or UNNAMED 5 Location of Location of volcano in PSN: Nnnnn or Snnnn volcano (M) degrees and minutes or UNKNOWN or UNNAMED nnnnnnnnnnnnnn 6 State or region State, or region if ash is AREA: nnnnnn (M) not reported over a State Examples VA ADVISORY DTG: VAAC: VOLCANO: KARYMSKY 1000-13 VOLCANO: UNNAMED PSN: N5403 E15927 PSN: UNKNOWN AREA: RUSSIA SUMMIT ELEV: ADVISORY NR: 1536M 7 Summit elevation Summit elevation in m (or ft) 8 Advisory number Advisory number: year in (M) full and message number (separate sequence for each volcano) 9 Information Information source using source (M) free text nnnM (or SUMMIT ELEV: nnnnnFT) ADVISORY nnnn/nnnn NR: INFO SOURCE: Free text up to 32 INFO characters SOURCE: 1 Colour code (O) 0 Aviation colour code AVIATION COLOUR CODE: AVIATION COLOUR CODE: 1 Eruption details 1 (M) Eruption details (including date/time of eruption(s)) 1 Time of 2 observation of ash (M) Day and time (in UTC) of OBS VA observation of volcanic DTG: ash RED or ORANGE or YELLOW or GREEN or UNKNOWN or NOT GIVEN or NIL ERUPTION Free text up to 64 DETAILS: characters or UNKNOWN nn/nnnnZ 20080923/ 0130Z TOKYO 2008/4 MTSAT-1R KVERT KEMSD RED ERUPTION DETAILS: ERUPTION AT 20080923/ 0000Z FL300 REPORTED OBS VA DTG: 23/0100Z 342 METEOROLOGY SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION METEOROLOGICAL SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION - ANNEX 3 Table A2-1 - Template for advisory message for volcanic ash (continued) Element 1 Observed or 3 estimated ash cloud (M) Detailed Content Horizontal (in degrees and minutes) and vertical extent at the time of observation of the observed or estimated ash cloud or, if the base is unknown, the top of the observed or estimated ash cloud; movement of the observed or estimated ash cloud OBS VA CLD or EST VA CLD: Examples Template(s) TOP FLnnn or OBS VA FL250/300 SFC/FLnnn or CLD: N5400 FLnnn/nnn E15930 2 [nnKM WID LINE N5400 BTN [nnNM WID E16100 LINE BTN)] N5300 Nnn[nn] or E15945 Snn[nn] Wnnn[nn] MOV SE or Ennn[nn] 20KT Nnn[nn] or SFC/FL200 Snn[nn] Wnnn[nn] N5130 or Ennn[nn] E16130 Nnn[nn] or N5130 Snn[nn] Wnnn[nn] E16230 or Ennn[nn] N5230 Nnn[nn] or E16230 Snn[nn] Wnnn[nn] N5230 or Ennn[nn] E16130 Nnn[nn] or MOV SE Snn[nn] Wnnn[nn] 15KT or Ennn[nn]]3 - or TOP FL240 TOP FLnnn or MOV W SFC/FLnnn or 40KMH FLnnn/nnn VA NOT MOV N nnKMH IDENTIFI(or KT) or ABLE FM MOV NE nnKMH SATELLITE (or KT) or DATA WIND MOV E nnKMH FL050/070 (or KT) or 180/12MPS MOV SE nnKMH (or KT) or MOV S nnKMH (or KT) or MOV SW nnKMH (or KT) or MOV W nnKMH (or KT) or MOV NW nnKMH (or KT)4 VA NOT IDENTIFIABLE FM SATELLITE DATA WIND FLnnn/nnn nnn/nn[n]MPS (or KT)4 or WIND FLnnn/nnn VRBnnMPS (or KT) or WIND SFC/FLnnn nnn/nn(n)MPS (or KT) or WIND SFC/FLnnn VRBnnMPS (or KT) METEOROLOGY SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL 343 AIR NAVIGATION METEOROLOGICAL SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION - ANNEX 3 Table A2-1 - Template for advisory message for volcanic ash (continued) Element 1 Forecast height 4 and position of the ash clouds (+6 HR) (M) 1 Forecast height 5 and position of the ash clouds (+12 HR) (M) Detailed Content Template(s) nn/nnnnZ Day and time (in UTC) (6 FCST VA hours from the Time of CLD +6HR: SFC or FLnnn/ observation of ash given [FL]nnn in Item 12) [nnKM WID LINE2 Forecast height and BTN (nnNM WID position in degrees and LINE BTN)] minutes) for each cloud Nnn[nn] or mass for that fixed valid Snn[nn] Wnnn[nn] time or Ennn[nn] Nnn[nn] or Snn[nn] Wnnn[nn] or Ennn[nn] Nnn[nn] or Snn[nn] Wnnn[nn] or Ennn[nn] Nnn[nn] or Snn[nn] Wnnn[nn] or Ennn[nn] Nnn[nn] or Snn[nn] Wnnn[nn] or Ennn[nn]] 3 or NO VA EXP or NOT AVBL or NOT PROVIDED nn/nnnnZ Day and Time (in UTC) FCST VA (12 hours from the “Time CLD +12 SFC or FLnnn/ HR: of observation of ash” [FL]nnn given in Item 12); [nnKM WID LINE2 Forecast height and BTN (nnNM WID position (in degrees and LINE BTN)] minutes) for each cloud Nnn[nn] or mass for that fixed valid Snn[nn] Wnnn[nn] time or Ennn[nn] Nnn[nn] or Snn[nn] Wnnn[nn] or Ennn[nn] Nnn[nn] or Snn[nn] Wnnn[nn] or Ennn[nn] Nnn[nn] or Snn[nn] Wnnn[nn] or Ennn[nn] Nnn[nn] or Snn[nn] Wnnn[nn] or Ennn[nn]] 3 or NO VA EXP or NOT AVBL or NOT PROVIDED Examples FCST VA 23/0700Z CLD +6 HR: FL250/350 N5130 E16030N5130 E16230 N5330 E16230 N5330 E16030 SFC/FL180 N4830 E16330 N4830 E16630 N5130 E16630 N5130 E16330 NO VA EXP NOT AVBL NOT PROVIDED FCST VA 23/1300Z CLD +12 HR SFC/FL270 N4830 E16130 N4830 E16600 N5300 E16600 N5300 E16130 NO VA EXP NOT AVBL NOT PROVIDED 344 METEOROLOGY SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION METEOROLOGICAL SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION - ANNEX 3 Table A2-1 - Template for advisory message for volcanic ash (continued) Element 1 Forecast height 6 and position of the ash clouds (+18 HR) (M) 1 7 1 8 Examples Detailed Content Template(s) nn/nnnnZ FCST VA 23/1900Z Day and Time (in UTC) FCST VA CLD +18 HR NO VA EXP (18 hours from the “Time CLD +18 SFC or FLnnn/ HR: of observation of ash” [FL]nnn NOT AVBL given in Item 12); [nnKM WID LINE2 NOT Forecast height and BTN (nnNM WID PROVIDED position (in degrees and LINE BTN)] minutes) for each cloud Nnn[nn] or mass for that fixed valid Snn[nn] Wnnn[nn] time or Ennn[nn] Nnn[nn] or Snn[nn] Wnnn[nn] or Ennn[nn] Nnn[nn] or Snn[nn] Wnnn[nn] or Ennn[nn] Nnn[nn] or Snn[nn] Wnnn[nn] or Ennn[nn] Nnn[nn] or Snn[nn] Wnnn[nn] or Ennn[nn] 3 or NO VA EXP or NOT AVBL or NOT PROVIDED Remarks, as necessary RMK: Free text up to 256 RMK: Remarks (M) LATEST REP characters FM KVERT (0120Z) or INDICATES NIL ERUPTION HAS CEASED. TWO DISPERSING VA CLD ARE EVIDENT ON SATELLITE IMAGERY NIL Next advisory (M) Year, month, day and NXT ADVI- nnnnnnnn/nnnnZ NXT 20080923/ ADVISORY: 0730Z time in UTC SORY: or NO LATER NO LATER THAN THAN nnnnnnnn/nnnnZ nnnnnnnn/ or nnnnZ NO FURTHER NO ADVISORIES FURTHER or ADVISORIES WILL BE ISSUED WILL BE BY ISSUED BY nnnnnnnn/nnnnZ nnnnnnnn/ nnnnZ 1 International Association of Volcanology and Chemistry of the Earth's Interior (IAVCEI). 2 A straight line between two points drawn on a map in the Mercator projection or a straight line between two points which crosses lines of longitude at a constant angle. 3 Up to 4 selected layers. 4 If ash reported (e.g. AIREP) but not identifiable from satellite data. METEOROLOGY SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL 345 AIR NAVIGATION METEOROLOGICAL SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION - ANNEX 3 Example A2-1. Advisory message for volcanic ash FVFE01 RJTD 230130 VA ADVISORY DTG: VAAC: VOLCANO: PSN: AREA: 20080923/0130Z TOKYO KARYMSKY 1000-13 N5403 E15927 SUMMIT ELEV: ADVISORY NR: INFO SOURCE: AVIATION COLOUR CODE: ERUPTION DETAILS: OBS VA DTG: OBS VA CLD: FCST VA CLD + 6 HR: FCST VA CLD + 12 HR: FCST VA CLD + 18 HR: RMK: NXT ADVISORY: RUSSIA 1536M 2008/4 MTSAT-1R KVERT KEMSD RED ERUPTION AT 20080923/0000Z FL300 REPORTED 23/0100Z FL250/300 N5400 E15930 - N5400 E16100 - N5300 E15945 MOV SE 20KT SFC/FL200 N5130 E16130 - N5130 E16230 - N5230 E16230 - N5230 E16130 MOV SE 15KT 23/0700Z FL250/350 N5130 E16030 - N5130 E16230 - N5330 E16230 - N5330 E16030 SFC/FL180 N4830 E16330 - N4830 E1660 - N5130 E16630 - N5130 E16330 23/1300Z SFC/FL270 N4830 E16130 - N4830 E16600 - N5300 E16600 - N5300 E1630 23/1900Z NO VA EXP LATEST REP FM KVERT (0120Z) INDICATES ERUPTION HAS CEASED. TWO DISPERSING VA CLD ARE EVIDENT ON SATELLITE IMAGERY 20080923/0730Z Table A2-2. Template for advisory message for tropical cyclones Key: = = a double line indicates that the text following it should be placed on the subsequent line NOTE 1: The ranges and resolutions for the numerical elements included in advisory messages for tropical cyclones are shown in Appendix 6, Table A 6-4. NOTE 2: The explanations for the abbreviations can be found in the Procedures for Air Navigation Services ICAO Abbreviations and Codes (PANS-ABC, Doc 8400). NOTE 3: All the elements are mandatory. NOTE 4: Inclusion of a "colon " after each element heading is mandatory. NOTE 5: The numbers 1 to 19 are included only for clarity and they are not part of the advisory message, as shown in the example. Table A2-2 - Template for advisory message for tropical cyclones Element Template(s) Detailed Content Identification 1 of the type of Type of message TC ADVISORY message (M) 2 Time of origin (M) Year, month, day, time in DTG: nnnnnnnn/nnnnZ UTC of issue 3 Name of TCAC Name of TCAC (location TCAC: nnnn or nnnnnnnnnn indicator or full name) 4 Name of tropical Name of tropical cyclone TC: cyclone or “NIL” for unnamed tropical cyclone 5 Advisory number Advisory number NR: (starting with “01” for each cyclone) nnnnnnnnnnnn or NIL nn Examples TC ADVISORY DTG: 20040925/1600Z TCAC: TCAC: TC: YUFO1 MIAMI GLORIA NR: 01 346 METEOROLOGY SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION METEOROLOGICAL SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION - ANNEX 3 Table A2-2 - Template for advisory message for tropical cyclones (continued) Element 6 Position of the centre Detailed Content Position of the centre of the tropical cyclone (in degrees and minutes) Direction and speed of movement given in sixteen compass points and km/h (or kt), respectively, or moving slowly (< 6 km/h (3kt)) or stationary (< 2km/h (1kt)) Template(s) Nnn[nn] or Snn[nn] PSN: Wnnn[nn] or Ennn[nn] 7 Direction and MOV: N nnKMH (or KT) or MOV: speed of NNE nnKMH (or KT) movement or NE nnKMH (or KT) or ENE nnKMH (or KT) or E nnKMH (or KT) or ESE nnKMH (or KT) or SE nnKMH (or KT) or SSE nnKMH (or KT) or S nnKMH (or KT) or SSW nnKMH (or KT) or SW nnKMH (or KT) or WSW nnKMH (or KT) or W nnKMH (or KT) or WNW nnKMH (or KT) or NW nnKMH (or KT) or NNW nnKMH (or KT) or SLW or STNR 8 Central pressure Central pressure (in hPa) C: nnnHPA C: 9 Maximum MAX nn[n]MPS Maximum surface wind MAX WIND: (or nn[n]KT) WIND: surface wind near the centre (mean over 10 minutes, in km/h (or kt)) 1 Forecast of FCST FCST nn/nnnnZ Day and time (in UTC) 0 centre postion (6 hours from the “DTG” PSN Nnn[nn] or Snn[nn] PSN +6 (+6 HR) HR +6 HR: Wnnn(nn) or given in item 2): Ennn[nn] Forecast position (in degrees and minutes) of the centre of the tropical cyclone 1 Forecast of FCST Forecast of maximum FCST nn[n]MPS 1 maximum surface wind (6 hours MAX MAX (or nn[n]KT) WIND surface wind (+ 6 after the “DTG” given in WIND +6 HR: HR) item 2) +6 HR: 1 Forecast of FCST FCST nn/nnnnZ Day and time (in UTC) 2 centre postion (12 hours from the “DTG” PSN Nnn[nn] or Snn[nn] PSN +12 HR +12 (+12 HR) given in item 2): Wnnn(nn) or HR: Ennn[nn] Forecast position (in degrees and minutes) of the centre of the tropical cyclone PSN: Examples N2706 W07306 NW 20 KMH 965HPA 22MPS 25/2200Z N2748 W07350 22MPS 26/0400Z N2830 W07430 METEOROLOGY SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL 347 AIR NAVIGATION METEOROLOGICAL SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION - ANNEX 3 Table A2-2 - Template for advisory message for tropical cyclones (continued) Element 1 Forecast of 3 maximum surface wind (+ 12 HR) 1 Forecast of 4 centre postion (+18 HR) 1 Forecast of 5 maximum surface wind (+ 18 HR) 1 Forecast of 6 centre postion (+24 HR) 1 Forecast of 7 maximum surface wind (+ 24HR) Detailed Content Forecast of maximum surface wind (12 hours after the “DTG” given in item 2) FCST MAX WIND +12 HR: FCST Day and time (in UTC) (18 hours from the “DTG” PSN +18 given in item 2): HR: Forecast position (in degrees and minutes) of the centre of the tropical cyclone Forecast of maximum FCST surface wind (18 hours MAX after the “DTG” given in WIND item 2) +18 HR: FCST Day and time (in UTC) (24 hours from the “DTG” PSN +24 given in item 2): HR: Forecast position (in degrees and minutes) of the centre of the tropical cyclone Forecast of maximum FCST surface wind (24 hours MAX after the “DTG” given in WIND item 2) +24 HR: Remarks, as necessary RMK: 1 Remarks 8 1 Expected time of Expected year, month, NXT 9 issuance of next day and time (in UTC) of MSG: issuance of next advisory advisory 1 Template(s) nn[n]MPS (or nn[n]KT) nn/nnnnZ Nnn[nn] or Snn[nn] Wnnn(nn) or Ennn[nn] nn[n]MPS (or nn[n]KT) nn/nnnnZ Nnn[nn] or Snn[nn] Wnnn(nn) or Ennn[nn] nn[n]MPS (or nn[n]KT) Free text up to 256 characters or NIL [BFR] nnnnnnnn/ nnnnZ or NO MSG EXP Examples 22MPS FCST MAX WIND +12 HR: 26/1000Z FCST PSN N2852 W07500 +18 HR 21MPS FCST MAX WIND +18 HR: 26/1600Z FCST PSN N2912 W07530 +24 HR FCST MAX WIND +24 HR: RMK: 20MPS NXT MSG: 20040925/2000Z Fictitious location. Example A2-2. Advisory message for tropical cyclones DTG: TCAC: TC: NR: PSN: MOV: C: MAX WIND: FCST PSN + 6 HR FCST MAX WIND + 6 HR FCST PSN + 12 HR: FCST MAX WIND + 12 HR: FCST PSN + 18 HR: FCST MAX WIND + 18 HR: FCST PSN + 24 HR: FCST MAX WIND + 24 HR: RMK NXT MSG: TC ADVISORY 19970925/1600Z YUFO GLORIA 01 N2706 W07306 NW 20KMH 965HPA 22MPS 25/2200Z N2748 W07350 22MPS 26/0400Z N2830 W07430 22MPS 26/1000Z N2852 W07500 21MPS 26/1600Z N2912 W07530 20MPS NIL 19970925/2000Z NIL 348 METEOROLOGY SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION METEOROLOGICAL SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION - ANNEX 3 Meteorological Serv ic e for International Air Navigation / METAR and SPECI - Annex 3 Appendix 3 - Technical Specifications Related To Meteorological Observations And Reports Key: Table A3-1 - Template for the local routine (MET REPORT) and local (SPECIAL) reports = M inclusion mandatory, part of every message = inclusion conditional, dependent on meteorological conditions C = inclusion optional O NOTE 1: The ranges and resolutions for the numerical elements included in the local routine and special reports are shown in Table A3-4 of this appendix. NOTE 2: The explanations for the abbreviations used can be found in the Procedures for Air Navigation Services - ICAO Abbreviations and Codes (PANS-ABC, Doc 8400). Element as specified in Chapter 4 Identification of the type of report (M) Location indicator (M) Time of the observation (M) Identification of an automated report (C) Surface wind (M) Detailed content Examples Template(s) Type of report MET REPORT or SPECIAL MET REPORT SPECIAL ICAO location nnnn indiactor (M) nnnnnnZ Day and actual time of the observation in UTC Automated AUTO report identifier (C) YUDO1 Name of the element (M) WIND Runway (O)2 RWY nn[L] or RWY nn[C] or RWY nn[R} Runway TDZ section (O)3 Wind direction nnn/ (M) Wind speed (M) VRB BTN nnn/ AND nnn/ or CALM VRB [ABV] n[n][n]MPS (or [ABV] n[n]KT) MAX [ABV] nn [n] MNM n [n] Significant speed variations (C)4 — VRB Significant BTN directional variations (C)5 nnn/ AND nnn/ Runway MID sections (O)3 221630Z AUTO WIND 240/4MPS (WIND 240/8KT) WIND RWY 18 TDZ 190/6MPS (WIND RWY 18 TDZ 190/12KT) WIND VRB1MPS WIND CALM (WIND VRB2KT) WIND VRB BTN 350/AND 050/1MPS (WIND VRB BTN 350/AND 050/2KT) WIND 270/ABV49MPS (WIND 270/ABV99KT) WIND 120/3MPS MAX9 MNM2 (WIND 120/6KT MAX18 MNM4) WIND 020/5MPS VRB BTN 350/ AND 070/ (WIND 020/10KT VRB BTN 350/ AND 070/) WIND RWY 14R MID 140/6MPS (WIND RWY 14R MID 140/12KT) METEOROLOGY SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL 349 AIR NAVIGATION METEOROLOGICAL SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION - ANNEX 3 Element as specified in Chapter 4 Detailed content Examples Template(s) Wind direction nnn/ (O)3 Wind speed (O)3 Significant speed variations (C)4 Significant directional variations (C)5 Runway section (O)3 VRB BTN nnn/ AND nnn/ or CALM VRB [ABV] n[n][n]MPS (or [ABV] n[n]KT) MAX [ABV] nn [n] MNM n [n] VRB BTN nnn/ AND nnn/ END — WIND RWY 27 TDZ 240/8MPS MAX14 MNM5 END 250/7MPS (WIND RWY 27 TDZ 240/16KT MAX28 MNM10 END 250/14KT) Wind direction nnn/ (O)3 Wind speed (O)3 Significant speed variations (C)4 Significant directional variations (C)5 Visibility (M) Name ot the element (M) Runway (O)2 RVR(C)6 Runway section (O)3 Visibilty (M) Runway section (O)3 Visibility (O)3 Runway section (O)3 Visibility (O)3 Name of the element (M) Runway (C)7 Runway section (C)8 RVR (M) Runway section (C)8 RVR (C)8 VRB BTN nnn/ AND nnn/ or CALM VRB [ABV] n[n][n]MPS (or [ABV] n[n]KT MAX [ABV] nn [n] MNM n [n] VRB BTN nnn/ AND nnn/ VIS — RWY nn[L] or RWY nn[C] or RWY nn[R] TDZ CAVOK CAVOK VIS 350M VIS 7KM VIS 10KM VIS RWY 09 TDZ 800M END 1200M nn[n][n]M or n[n]KM MID nn[n][n]M or n[n]KM END nn[n][n]M or n[n]KM RVR VIS RWY 18C TDZ 6KM RWY 27 TDZ 4000M RVR RWY 32 400M RVR RWY 20 1600M RWY nn[L] or RWY nn[C] or RWY nn[R] TDZ [ABV or BLW] nn[n][n]M MID [ABV or BLW] nn[n][n]M RVR RWY 10L BLW 50M RVR RWY 14 ABV 2000M RVR RWY 10 BLW 150M RVR RWY 12 ABV 1200M RVR RWY12 TDZ 1100M MID ABV 1400M 350 METEOROLOGY SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION METEOROLOGICAL SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION - ANNEX 3 Element as specified in Chapter 4 Present weather (C)9 '10 Detailed content Runway section (C)8 END RVR (C)8 Intensity of present weather (C)9 Characteristics and type of present weather (C)9, [ABV or BLW] nn[n][n]M FBL or — MOD or HVY DZ or RA or IC or FG or BR or SN or SG or SA or DU or HZ or PL or DS or FU or VA or SQ or SS or FZDZ PO or FC or TS or or FZUP12 BCFG or BLDU or or FC13 or BLSA or BLSN or FZRA or SHGR DRDU or DRSA or or SHGS or DRSN or FZFG or SHRA or SHSN MIFG or PRFG or SHUP12 or TSGR or TSGS or TSRA or TSSN or TSUP12 or UP12 11 Cloud (M)14 Name of the element (M) Runway (O)2 RVR RWY 16 TDZ 600M MID 500M END 400M RVR RWY 26 500M RWY 20 800M Air Name of the temperature element (M) (M) Air temperature (M) Dew-point Name of the temperature element (M) (M) Dew-point temperature (M) Pressure Name of the values (M) element (M) QNH (M) MOD RA HVY TSRA HVY DA FBL SN HVY TSRASN FBL SNRA FBL DZ FG HVY SHSN BLSN HVY TSUP HZ FG VA MIFG CLD RWY nn[L] or RWY nn[C] or RWY nn[R] Cloud amount FEW OBSC NSC or (M) or vertical or NCD12 visibility (O)9 SCT or BKN or OVCor ///12 Cloud type CB or — (C)9 TCU Height of cloud base or the value of vertical visibility (C)9 Examples Template(s) nn[n][ n] M (or nnn[n] FT) [VER VIS nn[n]M (or VER VIS nnn[n] FT) T CLD NSC CLD SCT 300M OVC 600M (CLD SCT 1000FT OVC 2000FT) CLD OBSC VER VIS 150M (CLD OBSC VER VIS 500FT) CLD BKN TCU 270M (CLD BKN TCU 900FT) CLD RWY 08R BKN 60M, RWY 26 BKN 90M) (CLD RWY 08R BKN 200FT RWY 26 BKN 300FT) CLD /// CB 400M (CLD /// CB 1200FT) CLD NCD T17 TMS08 [MS]nn DP DP15 DPMS18 [MS]nn QNH nnnnHPA QNH 0995HPA QNH 1009HPA METEOROLOGY SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL 351 AIR NAVIGATION METEOROLOGICAL SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION - ANNEX 3 Element as specified in Chapter 4 Detailed content Name of the element (O) QFE (O) Template(s) QFE Examples QNH 1022HPA QFE 1001HPA QNH 0987HPA QFE RWY 18 0956HPA RWY 24 0955HPA [RWY nn[L] or RWY nn[C] or RWY nn[R]] nnnHPA [RWY nn[L] or RWY nn[C] or RWY nn[R] nnnHPA] Supplemen- Significant CB or TS or MOD TURB or SEV TURB or WS FC IN APCH tary informeteorologi- or GR or SEV SQL or MOD ICE or SEV ICE WS IN APCH 60M-WIND: mation (C)9 cal phenom- or FZDZ or FZRA or SEV MTW or SS or DS 360/13MPS ena (C)9 or BLSN or FC15 WS RWY 12 Location of the IN APCH [nnnnM-WIND nnn/nnMPS] or IN phenomenon CLIMB-OUT [nnnnM-WIND nnn/nnMPS] (C)9 (IN APCH [nnnnFT-WIND nnn/nnKT] or IN CLIMB-OUT [nnnnFT-WIND nnn/nnKT] or RWY nn[n] Recent REFZDZ or REFZRA or REDZ or RE[SH]RA or REFZRA weather (C)9, RERASN or RE[SH]SN or RESG or RESHGR CB IN CLIMB-OUT RETSRA 10 or RESHGS or REBLSN or RESS or REDS or RETSRA or RETSSN or RETSGR or RETSGS or REFC or REPL or or REUP12 or REFZUP12 or RETSUP12 or RESHUP12 or REVA or RETS Trend Name of the TREND forecast16 element (M) TREND TREND BECMG Change NOSIG BECMG or TEMPO NOSIG FEW 600M indicator (M)17 (TREND BECMG FEW 2000FT) Period of FMnnnn and/or TLnnnn or change (C)9 ATnnnn TREND TEMPO 250/18MPS Wind (C)9 nnn/[ABV]n[n][n]MPS [MAX[ABV]nn[n]] (or nnn/[ABV]n[n]KT MAX25 [MAX[ABV]nn]) TREND TEMPO 250/36KT MAX50 Visibility (C)9 VIS nn[n][n]M or CAVOK TREND BECMG AT1800 VIS 10KM NSW VIS n[n]KM TREND BECMG TL1700 VIS 800M FG TREND BECMG FM1030 TL1130 CAVOK Weather FBLor — NSW TREND TEMPO TL1200 VIS phenomenon MOD 600M BECMG AT1230 VIS 9 intensity (C) or HVY 8KM NSW CLD NSC 352 METEOROLOGY SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION METEOROLOGICAL SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION - ANNEX 3 Element as specified in Chapter 4 Detailed content Weather phenomenon: characteristics and type (C)9,10,11 Name of the element (C)9 Cloud amount and vertical visibility (C)9 Cloud type (C)9 Height of cloud base or the value of vertical visibility (C)9 Template(s) DZ or RA or SN or SG or PL or DS or SS or FZDZ or FZRA or SHGR or SHGS or SHRA or SHSN or TSGR or TSGS or TSRA or TSSN CLD IC or FG or BR or SA or DU or HZ or FU or VA or SQ or PO or FC or TS or BCFG or BLDU or BLSA or BLSN or DRDU or DRSA or DRSN or FZFG or MIFG or PRFG FEW or SCT or BKN or OVC CB or TCU nn[n][n] M (or nnn[n] FT) OBSC Fictitous location. Optional values for one or more runways. 3 Optinal values for one or more sections of the runway 4 To be included in accordance with 4.1.5.2 c) 5 To be included in accordance with 4.1.5.2 b)1) 6 To be included if visibility or RVR < 1500m 7 To be included in accordance with 4.3.6.4 d) 8 To be included in accordance with 4.3.6.4 c) 9 To be included whenever applicable. 11 NSC [VER VIS nn[n]M (or VER VIS nnn[n] FT)] 2 10 TREND TEMPO FM0300 TL0430 MOD FZRA TREND BECMG FM1900 VIS 500M HVY SNRA TREND BECMG FM1100 MOD SN TEMPO FM1130 BLSN — 1 Examples TREND BECMG AT 1130 CLD OVC 300M (TREND BECMG AT 1130 CLD OVC 1000FT) TREND TEMPO TL1530 HVY SHRA CLD BKN CB 360M (TREND TEMPO TL1530 HVY SHRA CLD BKN CB 1200FT) One or more, up to a maximum of three groups, in accordance with 4.4.2.8 a), 4.8.1.1 and Appendix 5, 2.2.4.3 Precipitation types listed under 4.4.2.3 a) may be combined in accordance with 4.4.2.8 c) and Appendix 5, 2.2.4.1. Only moderate or heavy precipitation to be indicated in trend forecast in accordance with Appendix 5, 2.2.4.1. 12 For automated reports only 13 Heavy used to indicate tornado or waterspout; moderate used to indicate funnel cloud not reaching the ground 14 Up to four cloud layers in accordance with 4.5.4.2 e) 15 Abbreviation plain language may be used in accordance with 4.8.1.2. 16 To be included in accordance with Chapter 6, 6.3.2. 17 Number of change indicators to be kept to a minimum in accordance with Appendix 5, 2.2.1, normally not exceeding three groups. METEOROLOGY SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL 353 AIR NAVIGATION METEOROLOGICAL SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION - ANNEX 3 Table A3-2 - Template for METAR and SPECI Key: M C O = = = inclusion mandatory, part of every message inclusion conditional, dependent on meteorological conditions or method of observation inclusion optional NOTE 1: The ranges and resolutions for the numerical elements included in METAR and SPECI are shown in Table A3-5 of this appendix. NOTE 2: The explanations for the abbreviations used can be found in the Procedures for Air Navigation Services - ICAO Abbreviations and Codes (PANS-ABC, Doc 8400). Element as Detailed specified in Template(s) content Chapter 4 Identification Type of report METAR, METAR COR, SPECI or SPECI COR of the type of (M) report (M) Location indicator (M) Time of the observation (M) ICAO location nnnn indicator (M) Day and actual nnnnnnZ time of the observation in UTC (M) Automated or AUTO or NIL missing report identifier (C) Indentification of an automated or missing report (C)2 END OF METAR IF THE REPORT IS MISSING. Surface wind Wind direction nnn (M) (M) Wind speed [P]nn[n] (M) Visibility (M) Significant speed variations (C)3 Units of measurement (M) Significant directional variations (C)4 Prevailing or minimum visibility (M)5 AUTO NIL 24004 MPS (24008 KT) 19006 MPS (19012 KT) 00000 MPS (00000 KT) 140P149 MPS (140P99 KT) 12003G09MPS (12006G18KT) 24008G14MPS (24016G28KT) VRB MPS (or KT) nnnn METAR METAR COR SPECI YUDO1 221630Z G[P]nn[n] nnnVnnn Examples – VRB01 MPS (VRB02 KT) 02005MPS 350V070) 02010KT 350V070) C A V O K 0350 7000 9999 0800 CAVOK 354 METEOROLOGY SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION METEOROLOGICAL SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION - ANNEX 3 Element as specified in Chapter 4 RVR(C)7 Detailed content Examples Template(s) Minimum visibility and direction of the minimum visibility (C)6 nnnn[N] or nnnn[NE] or nnnn[E] or nnnn[SE] or nnnn[S] or nnnn[SW] or nnnn[W] or nnnn[NW] Name of the element (M) Runway (M) R RVR (M) [P or M]nnnn nn[L]/or nn[C)]/ or nn[R]/ RVR V[P or M]nnnn variations (C)8 RVR past U, D or N tendency (C) 9 Present weather (C) 2, 10 Intensity or proximity of present weather (C) – or + – 2000 1200NW 6000 2800E 6000 2800 R32/0400 R12R/1700 R10/M0050 R14L/P2000 R16L/0650 R16C/0500 R16R/0450 R17L/0450 R20/0700V1200 R19/0350VP1200 R12/1100U R26/0550N R20/0800D R09/0375V0600U R10/M0150V0500D VC 11 Characteristics and type of present weather (M) 12 DZ or RA or SN or SG or PL or DS or SS or FZDZ or FZRA or FZUP13 or FC14 or SHGR or SHGS or SHRA or SHSN or SHUP or TSGR or TSGS or TSRA or TSSN or TSUP or UP13 IC or FG or BR or SA or DU or HZ or FU or VA or SQ or PO or TS or FC or TS or BCFG or BLDU or BLSA or BLSN or DRDU or DRSA or DRSN or FZFG or MIFG or PRFG FG or PO or FC or DS or SS or TS or SH or BLSN or BLSA or BLDU or VA RA +TSRA +DZ -SN +TSRASN -SNRA DZ FG +SHSN BLSN UP FZUP TSUP FZUP HZ FG VA MIFG VCFG VCSH VCTS VCBLSA METEOROLOGY SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL 355 AIR NAVIGATION METEOROLOGICAL SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION - ANNEX 3 Element as Detailed specified in content Chapter 4 Cloud (M)15 Cloud amount and height of cloud base or vertical visibility (M) Cloud Type (C) 2 Air and dew-point temperature (M) Pressure values (M) Air and dew-point temperatures (M) Name of the element (M) QNH (M) Supplemen- Recent tary informa- weather (C) 2, 10 tion (C) Wind shear (C)2 Trend forecast (O)18 Sea-surface temperature and state of the sea (C) 16 Sta- Runway te of designathe tor (M) run- Runway way deposits (C) (M) 17 Extent of runway contamination (M) Depth of deposit (M) Friction coefficient or braking action (M) Change indicator (M)19 Period of change (C)2 Wind (C)2 Examples Template(s) FEWn- VVnnn or VV/// nn or SCTnnn or BKNnnn or OVCnnn or ////// 13 CB or – TCU or /// 13 FEW015 VV005 OVC030 VV/// NSC SCT010 BKN025/// OVC020 NSC or NCD 13 BKN009 TCU SCT008 BKN025CB //////CB 17/10 02/M08 M01/M10 [M]nn/[M]nn NCD Q Q0995 Q1009 nnnn Q1022 Q0987 REFZDZ or REFZRA or REDZ or RE[SH]RA or REFZRA RERASN or RE[SH]SN or RESG or RESHGR RETSRA or RESHGS or REBLSN or RESS or REDS or RETSRA or RETSSN or RETSGR or RETSGS or RETS or REFC or REVA or REPL or REUP 13 or REFZUP 13 or RETSUP 13 or RESHUP13 WS Rnn[L] or WS Rnn[C] or WS Rnn[R] or WS WS R03 ALL RWY WS ALL RWY WSR18C W[M]nn/Sn W15/S2 R/SN OCLO R nn [L]/ or Rnn[C]/ or Rnn[R]/ CLRD// n or / R99/421594 R/SNOCLO R14L/CLRD// n or / nn or // nn or // NOSIG BECMG or TEMPO FMnnnn and/or TLnnnn or ATnnnn nnn[P]nn[n]]MPS (or nnn[P[nn[G[P] nn]KT) NOSIG BECMG FEW020 TEMPO 25018G25MPS (TEMPO 25035G50KT) 356 METEOROLOGY SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION METEOROLOGICAL SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION - ANNEX 3 Element as specified in Chapter 4 Detailed content Prevailing visibility (C)2 nnnn Weather phenomenon: intensity (C)11 Weather phenomenon: characteristics and type (C)2, –or + — DZ or RA or SN or SG or PL or DS or SS or FZDZ or FZRA or SHGR or SHGS or SHRA or SHSN or TSGR or TSGS or TSRA or TSSN FEW nnn or SCT nnn or BKN nnn or OVC nnn CB or TCU IC or FG or BR or SA or DU or HZ or FU or VA or SQ or PO or FC or TS or BCFG or BLDU or BLSA or BLSN or DRDU or DRSA or DRSN or FZFG or MIFG or PRFG 10, 12 Cloud amount and height of cloud base or vertical visibility (C) 2 Cloud type (C)2 Examples Template(s) C A V O K VVnnn or SCTnnn or BKNnnn or OVC nnn — BECMG FM1030 TL1130 CAVOK BECMG TL1700 0800 FG BECMG AT1800 9000 NSW BECMG FM1900 0500 +SNRA BECMG FM1100 SN TEMPO FM1130 BLSN TEMPO FM0330 TL0430 FZRA NSW NSC TEMPO TL1200 0600 BECMG AT1200 8000 NSW NSC BECMG AT1130 OVC010 TEMPO TL1530 +SHRA BKN012CB 1 Fictitous location. 2 To be included whenever applicable. 3 To be included in accordance with 4.1.5.2c). 4 To be included in accordance with 4.1.5.2 b) 1). 5 To be included in accordance with 4.2.4.4 b). 6 To be included in accordance with 4.2.4.4 a). 7 To be included if visibility or RVR <1500m; for up to a maximum of four runways in accordance with 4.3.6.5 b). 8 To be included in accordance with 4.3.6.6 b). 9 To be included in accordance with 4.3.6.6 a). 10 One or more, up to a maximum of three groups, in accordance with 4.4.2.8 a), 4.8.1.1 and Appendix 5, 2.2.4.1. 11 To be included whenever applicable; no qualifier for moderate intensity in accordance with 4.4.2.7. METEOROLOGY SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL 357 AIR NAVIGATION METEOROLOGICAL SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION - ANNEX 3 12 Precipitation types listed under 4.4.2.3 a) may be combined in accordance with 4.4.2.8 c) and Appendix 5, 2.2.4.1. Only moderate or heavy precipitation to be indicated in trend forecast in accordance with Appendix 5, 2.2.4.1. 13 For automated reports only. 14 Heavy used to indicate tornado or waterspout; moderate (no qualifier) to indicate funnel cloud not reaching the ground. 15 Up to four cloud layers in accordance with 4.5.4.3 e). 16 To be included in accordance with 4.8.1.5 a). 17 To be included in accordance with 4.8.1.5 b). 18 To be included in accordance with Chapter 6, 6.3.2. 19 Number of change indicators to be kept to a minimum in accordance with Appendix 5, 2.2.1, normally not exceeding three groups. Table A3-3 - Use of change indicators in trend forecast Change Indicator NOSIG BECMG TEMPO Time Indicator and Period Meaning — No significant changes are forecast FMn1 n1 n1 n1 TLn2 n2 n2 n2 the change is commence at n1 n1 n1 n1 UTC and forecast to be completed by n2 n2 n2 n2 UTC TLnnnn commence at the beginning of the trend forecast period and be completed by nnnn UTC FMnnnn commence at nnnn UTC and be completed by the end of the trend forecast period ATnnnn occur at nnnn UTC (specified time) — a. commence at the beginning of the trend forecast period and be completed by the end of the trend forecast period; or b. the time is uncertain FMn1 n1 n1 n1 TLn2 n2 n2 n2 temporary commence at n1 n1 n1 n1 UTC and fluctuations are cease by n2 n2 n2 n2 UTC forecast to TLnnnn commence at the beginning of the trend forecast period and cease by nnnn UTC FMnnnn commence at nnnn UTC and cease by the end of the trend forecast period — commence at the beginning of the trend forecast period and cease by the end of the trend forecast period Tables A3-4. Ranges and resolutions for the numerical elements included in local reports Elements as specified in Chapter 4 Runway Wind direction Wind speed Visibility RVR Vertical Visibility °true MPS KT M M KM KM M M M M M FT FT Range 01 - 36 010 - 360 1 - 991 1 - 1991 0 - 750 800 - 4900 5 - 9 10 0 - 375 400 - 750 800 - 2000 0 - 752 90 - 600 0 - 2502 300 - 2000 Resolution 1 10 1 1 50 100 1 0 (fixed value: 10 KM 25 50 100 15 30 50 100 358 METEOROLOGY SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION METEOROLOGICAL SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION - ANNEX 3 Tables A3-4. Ranges and resolutions for the numerical elements included in local reports (continued) Elements as specified in Chapter 4 Clouds: height of cloud base Air temperature Dew-point temperature QNH; QFE M M FT FT °C Range 0 - 752 90 - 3000 0 - 2502 300 - 10000 - 80 - + 60 Resolution 15 30 50 100 1 hPa 0500 - 1100 1 1 There is no aeronautical requirement to report surface wind speeds of 50 m/s (100 kt) or more; however, provision has been made for reporting wind speeds up to 99 m/s (199 kt) for non-aeronautical purposes, as necessary. 2 Under circumstances as specified in 4.5.4.3; otherwise a resolution of 30m (100ft) is to be used. Table A3-5. Ranges and resolutions for the numerial elements included in METAR and SPECI Element as specified in Chapter 4 Runway Wind direction Wind speed Visibility RVR Vertical visibility Clouds: height of cloud base Air temperature; Dew-point temperature QNH Sea-surface temperature State of the sea State of the runway: Runway designator Runway deposits Extent of runway contamination Depth of deposit Friction coefficient/ braking action 1 (no units) (no units) (no units) Range 01 - 36 000 - 360 00 - 991 00 - 1991 0000 - 0750 0800 - 4900 5000 - 9000 10000 0000 - 0375 0400 - 0750 0800 - 2000 000 - 020 000 - 100 -80 - +60 0850 - 1100 -10 - +40 0 - 9 01 - 36; 88; 99 0 - 9 1; 2; 5; 9 Resolution 1 10 1 1 50 100 1000 0 (fixed value: 9999) 25 50 100 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 – (no units) (no units) 00 - 90; 92 - 99 00 - 95; 99 1 1 no units °true MPS KT M M M M M M M 30's M (100's FT) 30's M (100's FT) °C hPa °C (no units) There is no aeronautical requirement to report surface wind speeds of 50 m/s (100 kt) or more; however, provision has been made for reporting wind speeds up to 99 m/s (199 kt) for non-aeronautical purposes, as necessary. METEOROLOGY SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL 359 AIR NAVIGATION METEOROLOGICAL SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION - ANNEX 3 Example A3-1 Routine report a. Local routine report (same location and weather conditions as METAR): MET REPORT YUDO 221630Z WIND 240/4MPS VIS 600M RVR RWY 12 TDZ 1I000M MOD DZ FG CLD SCT 300M OVC 600M T17 DP16 QNH 1018 HPA TREND BECMG TL1700 VIS 800M FG BECMG AT1800 VIS 10KM NSW b. METAR for YUDO (Donlon/International): 1 METAR YUDO 221630Z 24004MPS 0600 R12/1000U DZ FG SCT010 OVC020 17/16 Q1018 BECMG TL1700 0800 FG BECMG AT 1800 9999 NSW Meaning of both reports: Routine report for Donlon/International 1 issued on the 22nd of the month at 1630 UTC; surface wind direction 240 degrees; wind speed 4 meters per second; visibility (along the runway(s) in the local routine report; prevailing visibility in METAR) 600 meters; runway visual range representative of the touchdown zone for runway 12 is 1000 meters and the runway visual range values have shown an upward tendency during previous 10 minutes (RVR tendency to be included in METAR only); and moderate drizzle and fog; scattered cloud at 300 meters; overcast at 600 meters; air temperature 17 degrees Celsius; dew-point temperature 16 degrees Celsius; QNH 1018 hectopascals; trend during next 2 hours, visibility (along the runway(s) in the local routine report; prevailing visibility in METAR) becoming 800 meters in fog by 1700 UTC; at 1800 UTC visibility (along the runway(s) in the local routine report; prevailing visibility in METAR) becoming 10 kilometers or more and nil significant weather. NOTE: In this example, the primary units "meter per second" and "meter" were used for wind speed and height of cloud base, respectively. However, in accordance with Annex 5, the corresponding non-SI alternative units "knot" and "foot" may be used instead. 1 Fictitious location Example A3-2 Special report a. Local special report (same location and weather conditions as SPECI): SPECIAL YUDO 151115Z WIND 050/25KT MAX37 MNM10 VIS 1200M RVR RWY 05 ABV 1800M HVY TSRA CLD BKN CB 500FT T25 DP22 QNH 1008 HPA TREND TEMPO TL1200 VIS 600M BECMG AT1200 VIS 8KM NSW NSC'. b. SPECI for YUDO (Donlon/International1 ): SPECI YUDO 151115Z 05025G37KT 3000 1200NE+TSRA BKNO05CB 25/22 Q1008 TEMPO TL1200 0600 BECMG AT1200 8000 NSW NSC Meaning of both reports: Selected special report for Donlon/International 1 issued on the 15th of the month at 1115 UTC; surface wind direction 050 degrees; wind speed 25 knots gusting between 10 and 37 knots (minimum wind speed not to be included in SPECI) visibility 1200 meters (along the runway(s) in the local special report); prevailing visibility 3000 meters (in SPECI) with minimum visibility 1200 meters to north east (directional variations to be included in SPECI only); RVR above 1800 meters on runway 05 (RVR not required in SPECI with prevailing visibility of 3000 meters); thunderstorm with heavy rain; broken cumulonimbus cloud at 500 feet; air temperature 25 degrees Celsius; dew-point temperature 22 degrees Celsius; QNH 1008 hectopascals; trend during next 2 hours, visibility (along the runway(s) in the local special report; prevailing visibility in SPECI) temporarily 600 meters from 1115 to 1200, becoming at 1200 UTC visibility (along the runway(s) in the local special report; prevailing visibility in SPECI) 8 kilometers, thunderstorm ceases and nil significant weather and nil significant cloud. NOTE: In this example, the non-SI alternative units "knot" and 'foot" were used for wind speed and height of cloud base, respectively However, in accordance with Annex 5, the corresponding primary units "meter per second" and "meter" may be used instead. 1 Fictitious location Example A3-3 Volcanic activity report VOLCANIC ACTIVITY REPORT YUSB 1 231500 MT TROJEEN1 VOLCANO N5605 W12652 ERUPTED 231445 LARGE ASH CLOUD EXTENDING TO APPROX 30000 FEET MOVING SW Meaning: Volcanic activity report issued by Siby/Bistock meteorological station at 1500 UTC on the 23rd of the month. Mt. Trojeen volcano 56 degrees 5 minutes north 126 degrees 52 minutes west erupted at 1445 UTC on the 23rd; a large ash cloud was observed extending to approximately 30 000 feet and moving in a south-westerly direction. 1 Fictitious location 360 METEOROLOGY SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION METEOROLOGICAL SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION - ANNEX 3 Meteorological Serv ic e for International Air Navigation / Aircraft Observations - Annex 3 Appendix 4. Technical Specifications related to Aircraft Observations and Reports (See Chapter 5 of this Annex) 1. CONTENTS OF AIR-REPORTS 1.1 ROUTINE AIR-REPORTS BY AIR-GROUND DATA LINK 1.1.1 When air-ground data link is used and automatic dependent surveillance (ADS) or SSR Mode S is being applied, the elements contained in routine air-reports shall be Message type designator Aircraft identification Data block 1 Latitude Longitude Level Time Data block 2 Wind direction Wind speed Wind quality flag Temperature Turbulence (if available) Humidity (if available) NOTE: When ADS or SSR Mode S is being applied, the requirements of routine air-reports may be met by the combination of the basic ADS/SSR Mode S data block (data block 1) and the meteorological information data block (data block 2), available from ADS or SSR Mode S reports. The ADS message format is specified in the PANS-ATM (Doc 4444), 4.11.4 and Chapter 13 and the SSR Mode S message format is specified in Annex 10, Volume III, Part I - Digital Data Communication Systems, Chapter 5. 1.1.2 When air-ground data link is used while ADS and SSR Mode S are not being applied, the elements contained in routine reports shall be: Message type designator Section 1 (Position information) Aircraft identification Position or latitude and longitude Time Flight level or altitude Next position and time over Ensuing significant point Section 2 (Operational information) Estimated time of arrival Endurance Section 3 (Meteorological information) Air temperature Wind direction Wind speed Turbulence Aircraft icing Humidity (if available) NOTE: When air-ground data link is used while ADS and SSR Mode S are not being applied, the requirements of routine air-reports may be met by the controller pilot data link communication (CPDLC) application entitled "Position report". The details of this data link application are specified in the Manual of Air Traffic Services Data Link Applications (Doc 9694) and in Annex 10, Volume III, Part I. 1.2 SPECIAL AIR-REPORTS BY AIR-GROUND DATA LINK When air-ground data link is used, the elements contained in special air-reports shall be: Message type designator METEOROLOGY SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL 361 AIR NAVIGATION METEOROLOGICAL SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION - ANNEX 3 Aircraft identification Data block 1 Latitude Longitude Level Time Data block 2 Wind direction Wind speed Wind quality flag Temperature Turbulence (if available) Humidity (if available) Data block 3 Condition prompting the issuance of a special air-report (one condition to be selected from the list presented in Table A4-1). NOTE 1: The requirements of special air-reports may be met by the data link fight information service (D-FIS) application entitled "Special air-report service". The details of this data link application are specified in Doc 9694. NOTE 2: In the case of a special air-report of pre-eruption volcanic activity, volcanic eruption or volcanic ash cloud, additional requirements are indicated in 4.2. 1.3 SPECIAL AIR-REPORTS BY VOICE COMMUNICATIONS When voice communications are used, the elements contained in routine air-reports shall be: Message type designator Section 1 (Position information): Aircraft identification Position or latitude and longitude Time Level or range of levels Section 3 (Meteorological information): Conditions prompting the issuance of a special air-report, to be selected from the list presented in Table A4-1. NOTE 1: Air-reports are considered routine by default. The message type designator for special air-reports is specified in the PANS-ATM (Doc 4444), Appendix 1. NOTE 2: In the case of a special air-report of pre-eruption volcanic activity, volcanic eruption or volcanic ash cloud, additional requirements are indicated in 4.2. 2. CRITERIA FOR REPORTING 2.1 GENERAL When air-ground data link is used, the wind direction, wind speed, wind quality flag, temperature, turbulence and humidity included in air-reports shall be reported in accordance with the following criteria. 2.2 WIND DIRECTION The wind direction shall be reported in terms of degrees true, rounded to the nearest whole degree. 2.3 WIND SPEED The wind speed shall be reported in meters per second or knots, rounded to the nearest 1 m/s (1 knot). The units of measurement used for the wind speed shall be indicated. 2.4 WIND QUALITY FLAG The wind quality flag shall be reported as 0 when the roll angle is less than 5 degrees and as 1 when the roll angle is 5 degrees or more. 2.5 AIR TEMPERATURE The temperature shall be reported to the nearest tenth of a degree Celsius. 2.6 TURBULENCE The turbulence shall be reported in terms of the cube root of the eddy dissipation rate (EDR). 362 METEOROLOGY SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION METEOROLOGICAL SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION - ANNEX 3 2.6.1 Routine air-reports The turbulence shall be reported during the en-route phase of the flight and shall refer to the 15-minute period immediately preceding the observation. Both the average and peak value of turbulence, together with the time of occurrence of the peak value to the nearest minute, shall be observed. The average and peak values shall be reported in terms of the cube root of EDR. The time of occurrence of the peak value shall be reported as indicated in Table A4-2. The turbulence shall be reported during the climb-out phase for the first 10 minutes of the flight and shall refer to the 30-second period immediately preceding the observation. The peak value of turbulence shall be observed. 2.6.2 Interpretation of the turbulence report Turbulence shall be considered: a. severe when the peak value of the cube root of EDR exceeds 0.7; b. moderate when the peak value of the cube root of EDR is above 0.4 and below or equal to 0.7; c. light when the peak value of the cube root of EDR is above 0.1 and below or equal 0.4; d. nil when the peak value of the cube root of EDR is below or equal to 0.1. NOTE: The EDR is an aircraft-independent measure of turbulence. However, the relationship between the EDR value and the perception of turbulence is a function of aircraft type, and the mass, altitude, configuration and airspeed of the aircraft. The EDR values given above describe the severity levels for a medium-sized transport aircraft under typical en-route conditions (i.e. altitude, airspeed and weight). 2.6.3 Special air-reports Special air-reports on turbulence shall be made during any phase of the flight whenever the peak value of the cube root of EDR exceeds 0.7. The special air-report on turbulence shall be made with reference to the 1 minute period immediately preceding the observation. Both the average and peak value of turbulence shall be observed. The average and peak values shall be reported in terms of the cube root of EDR. Special air-reports shall be issued every minute until such time as the peak values of the cube root of EDR fall below 0.4. 2.7 HUMIDITY The humidity shall be reported as the relative humidity, rounded to the nearest whole per cent. NOTE: The ranges and resolutions for the meteorological elements included in air-reports are shown in Table A4-3. Table A4-1. Template for the special air-report (downlink) Key: M C = = inclusion mandatory, part of every message inclusion conditional; included whenever available NOTE: Message to be prompted by the pilot-in-command. Currently only the condition "SEV TURB" can be automated (see 2.6.3). Element as specified in Chapter 5 Detailed content Message type designator (M) Type of the air-report (M) Aircraft identification (M) Aircraft radiotelephony call sign (M) DATA BLOCK 1 Latitude (M) Latitude in degrees and minutes (M) Longitude (M) Longitude in degrees and minutes (M) Level (M) Flight level (M) Time (M) DATA BLOCK 2 Wind direction (M) Wind speed (M) Wind quality flag (M) Temperature (M) Template(s) ARS nnnnnn Examples ARS VA812 Nnnnn or Snnnn S4506 Wnnnnn or Ennnnn E01056 FLnnn or FLnnn to FLnnn FL330 FL280 to FL310 OBS AT 1216Z Time of occurrence in hours and minutes (M) OBS AT nnnnZ Wind direction in degrees (M) Wind speed in kilometres per hour (or knots) (M) nnn/ nnnKMH (or nnnKT) Wind quality flag (M) Air temperature in tenths of degrees C (M) n T[M]nnn 262/ 40MPS (080KT) 1 T127 TM455 METEOROLOGY SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL 363 AIR NAVIGATION METEOROLOGICAL SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION - ANNEX 3 Element as specified in Chapter 5 Turbulence (C) Humidity (C) Detailed content Turbulence in hundredths of m2/3 s-1 and the time of occurrence of the peak value (C)1 Relative humidity in per cent (C) DATA BLOCK 3 Condition prompting the issuance of a special air-report (M) 1 Template(s) EDRnnn/nn Examples EDR064/08 RHnnn RH054 SEV TURB [EDRnnn]2 SEV TURB EDR076 or VA CLD FL050/100 SEV ICE or SEV MTW or TS GR3 or TS3 or HVY SS4 or VA CLD [FL nnn/nnn] or VA5 [MT nnnnnnnnnn nnnnnnnnnn] or MOD TURB [EDRnnn]2 or MOD ICE The time of occurrence to be reported in accordance with Tables A4-2. 2 The turbulence index to be reported in accordance with 2.6.3. 3 Obscured, embedded or widespread thunderstorms or thunderstorms in squall lines. 4 Duststorm or sandstorm. 5 Pre-eruption volcanic activity or a volcanic eruption. Table A4-2. Time of occurrence of the peak value to be reported Peak value of turbulence occurring during the one-minute period ....... minutes prior to the observation 0 - 1 1 - 2 2 - 3 ... 13 - 14 14 - 15 No timing information available Value to be reported 0 1 2 ... 13 14 15 Table A4-3. Ranges and resolutions for the meteorological elements included in air-reports Element as specified in Chapter 5 °true Wind direction: Wind speed: MPS KT Wind quality flag: (index)1 Temperature: °C m2/3 s-1 Turbulence: routine air-report: (time of occurrence)1 m2/3 s-1 Turbulence: special air-report: Humidity: 1 Non-dimensional % Range 000 - 360 00 - 125 00 - 250 0 - 1 -80 - +60 0 - 2 0 - 15 Resolution 1 2 1 1 0.1 0.01 1 0 - 2 0 - 100 0.01 1 364 METEOROLOGY SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION METEOROLOGICAL SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR TRAFFIC - ANNEX 3 Meteorological Serv ice for International Air Traffic / Forec ast - Annex 3 Appendix 5. Technical Specifications related to forecasts (See Chapter 6 of this Annex.) 1. CRITERIA RELATED TO TAF 1.1 TAF FORMAT 1.1.1 TAF shall be issued in accordance with the template shown in Table A5-1 and disseminated in the TAF code form prescribed by the World Meteorological Organization. NOTE: The TAF code form is contained in WMO Publication No. 306, Manual on Codes, Volume I.1, Part A Alphanumeric Codes. 1.1.2 Recommendation - TAF should be disseminated, under bilateral agreements between States in a position to do so, in the WMO BUFR code form, in addition to the dissemination of the TAF in accordance with 1.1.1. NOTE: The BUFR code form is contained in WMO Publication No. 306, Manual on Codes, Volume I.2, Part B Binary Codes. 1.2 INCLUSION OF METEOROLOGICAL ELEMENTS IN TAF NOTE: Guidance on operationally desirable accuracy of forecasts is given in Attachment B. 1.2.1 Surface wind In forecasting surface wind, the expected prevailing direction shall be given. When it is not possible to forecast a prevailing surface wind direction due to its expected variability, for example, during light wind conditions [less than 1.5 m/s (3 kt)] or thunderstorms, the forecast wind direction shall be indicated as variable using “VRB”. When the wind is forecast to be less than 0.5 m/s (1 kt) the forecast wind speed shall be indicated as calm. When the forecast maximum speed (gust) exceeds the forecast mean wind speed by 5 m/s (10 kt) or more, the forecast maximum wind speed shall be indicated. When a wind speed of 50 m/s (100 kt) or more is forecast, it shall be indicated to be more than 49 m/s (99 kt). 1.2.2 Visibility Recommendation. - When the visibility is forecast to be less than 800 m it should be expressed in steps of 50 m; when it is forecast to be 800 m or more but less than 5 km, in steps of 100 m; 5 km or more but less than 10 km in kilometer steps and when it is forecast to be 10 km, or more it should be expressed as 10 km, except when conditions of CAVOK are forecast to apply. The prevailing visibility should be forecast. When visibility is forecast to vary in different directions and the prevailing visibility cannot be forecast, the lowest forecast visibility should be given. 1.2.3 Weather phenomena One or more, up to a maximum of three, of the following weather phenomena or combinations thereof together with their characteristics and, where appropriate, intensity should be forecast if they are expected to occur at the aerodrome: – freezing precipitation – freezing fog – moderate or heavy precipitation (including showers thereof) – low drifting dust, sand or snow – blowing dust, sand or snow – duststorm – sandstorm – thunderstorm (with or without precipitation) – squall – funnel cloud (tornado or waterspout) – other weather phenomena given in Appendix 3, 4.4.2.3, as agreed by the meteorological authority with the ATS authority and operators concerned. The expected end of occurrence of those phenomena should be indicated by the abbreviation “NSW”. 1.2.4 Cloud Recommendation. - Cloud amount should be forecast using the abbreviations “FEW”, “SCT“, “BKN” or “OVC” as necessary. When it is expected that the sky will remain or become obscured and clouds cannot be forecast and information on vertical visibility is available at the aerodrome, the vertical visibility should be forecast in the form “VV” followed by the forecast value of the vertical visibility. When several layers or masses of cloud are forecast, their amount and height of base should be included in the following order: a) the lowest layer or mass regardless of amount, to be forecast as FEW, SCT, BKN or OVC as appropriate; b) the next layer or mass covering more than 2/8, to be forecast as SCT, BKN or OVC as appropriate; c) the next higher layer or mass covering more than 4/8, to be forecast as BKN or OVC as appropriate; and METEOROLOGY SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION METEOROLOGICAL SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR TRAFFIC - ANNEX 3 365 d) cumulonimbus clouds, whenever forecast and not already included under a) to c). Cloud information should be limited to cloud of operational significance, when no cloud of operational significance is forecast, and "CAVOK" is not appropriate, the abbreviation "NSC" should be used. 1.2.5 Temperature Recommendation. - When forecast temperatures are included in accordance with regional air navigation agreement, the maximum and minimum temperatures expected to occur during the period of validity of the TAF should be given, together with their corresponding times of occurrence. 1.3 USE OF CHANGE GROUPS 1.3.1 The criteria used for the inclusion of change groups in TAF or for the amendments of TAF shall be based on any of the following weather phenomena or combinations thereof being forecast to begin or end or change in intensity: – freezing precipitation – moderate or heavy precipitation (including showers thereof) – thunderstorm (with precipitation) – duststorm – sandstorm. 1.3.2 Recommendation. - The criteria used for the inclusion of change groups in TAF or for the amendment of TAF should be based on the following: a. when the mean surface wind direction is forecast to change by 60° or more, the mean speed before and/or after the change being 5 m/s (10 kt) or more; b. when the mean surface wind speed is forecast to change by 5 m/s (10 kt) or more; c. when the variation from the mean surface wind speed (gusts) is forecast to increase by 5 m/s (10 kt) or more, the mean speed before and/or after the change being 7.5 m/s (15 kt) or more; d. when the surface wind is forecast to change through values of operational significance. The threshold values should be established by the meteorological authority in consultation with the appropriate ATS authority and operators concerned, taking into account changes in the wind which would: 1. require a change in runway(s) in use; and 2. indicate that the runway tailwind and crosswind components will change through values representing the main operating limits for typical aircraft operating at the aerodrome; e. when the visibility is forecast to improve and change to or pass through one or more of the following values, or when the visibility is forecast to deteriorate and pass through one or more of the following values: 1. 150, 350, 600, 800, 1500 or 3000 m; or 2. 5000 m in cases where significant numbers of flights are operated in accordance with the visual flight rules; f. when any of the following weather phenomena or combinations thereof are forecast to begin or end: – ice crystals – freezing fog – low drifting dust, sand or snow – blowing dust, sand or snow – thunderstorm (without precipitation) – squall – funnel cloud (tornado or waterspout); g. when the height of base of the lowest layer or mass of cloud of BKN or OVC extent is forecast to lift and change to or pass through one or more of the following values, or when the height of the lowest layer or mass of cloud of BKN or OVC extent is forecast to lower and pass through one or more of the following values: 1. 30, 60, 150 or 300 m (100, 200, 500 or 1000 ft); or 2. 450 m (1500 ft), in cases where significant numbers of flights are operated in accordance with the visual flight rules; h. when the amount of a layer or mass of cloud below 450 m (1500 ft) is forecast to change: 1. from NSC, FEW or SCT to BKN or OVC; or 2. from BKN or OVC to NSC, FEW or SCT; i. when the vertical visibility is forecast to improve and change to or pass through one or more of the following values, or when the vertical visibility is forecast to deteriorate and pass through one or more of the following values: 30, 60, 150 or 300 m (100, 200, 500 or 1000 ft); and j. any other criteria based on local aerodrome operating minima, as agreed between the meteorological authority and the operators. 366 METEOROLOGY SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION METEOROLOGICAL SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR TRAFFIC - ANNEX 3 NOTE: Other criteria based on local aerodrome operating minima are to be considered in parallel with similar criteria for issuance of SPECI developed in response to Appendix 3, 2.3.3 h. 1.3.3 Recommendation. - When a change in any of the elements given in Chapter 6, 6.2.3 is required to be indicated in accordance with the criteria given in 1.3.2, the change indicators “BECMG” or “TEMPO” should be used followed by the time period during which the change is expected to occur. The time period should be indicated as the beginning and end of the period in whole hours UTC. Only those elements for which a significant change is expected should be included following a change indicator. However, in the case of significant changes in respect of cloud, all cloud groups, including layers or masses not expected to change, should be indicated. 1.3.4 Recommendation. - The change indicator “BECMG” and the associated time group should be used to describe changes where the meteorological conditions are expected to reach or pass through specified threshold values at a regular or irregular rate and at an unspecified time during the time period. The time period should normally not exceed 2 hours but in any case should not exceed 4 hours. 1.3.5 Recommendation. - The change indicator “TEMPO” and the associated time group should be used to describe expected frequent or infrequent temporary fluctuations in the meteorological conditions which reach or pass specified threshold values and last for a period of less than one hour in each instance and, in the aggregate, cover less than one-half of the forecast period during which the fluctuations are expected to occur. If the temporary fluctuation is expected to last one hour or longer, the change group “BECMG” should be used in accordance with 1.3.4 or the validity period should be subdivided in accordance with 1.3.6. 1.3.6 Recommendation. - Where one set of prevailing weather conditions is expected to change significantly and more or less completely to a different set of conditions, the period of validity should be subdivided into self-contained periods using the abbreviation “FM” followed immediately by a four-figure time group in whole hours and minutes UTC indicating the time the change is expected to occur. The subdivided period following the abbreviation “FM” should be self-contained and all forecast conditions given before the abbreviation should be superseded by those following the abbreviation. 1.4 USE OF PROBABILITY GROUPS Recommendation. - The probability of occurrence of an alternative value of a forecast element or elements should be indicated, as necessary, by use of the abbreviation “PROB” followed by the probability in tens of per cent and the time period during which the alternative value(s) is (are) expected to apply. The probability information should be placed after the element or elements forecast and be followed by the alternative value of the element or elements. The probability of a forecast of temporary fluctuations in meteorological conditions should be indicated, as necessary, by use of the abbreviation “PROB” followed by the probability in tens of per cent, placed before the change indicator “TEMPO” and associated time group. A probability of an alternative value or change of less than 30 per cent should not be considered sufficiently significant to be indicated. A probability of an alternative value or change of 50 per cent or more, for aviation purposes, should not be considered a probability but instead should be indicated, as necessary, by use of the change indicators “BECMG” or “TEMPO” or by subdivision of the validity period using the abbreviation “FM”. The probability group should not be used to qualify the change indicator “BECMG” nor the time indicator “FM”. 1.5 NUMBERS OF CHANGE AND PROBABILITY GROUPS Recommendation. - The number of change and probability groups should be kept to a minimum and should not normally exceed five groups. 1.6 DISSEMINATION OF TAF TAF and amendments thereto shall be disseminated to international OPMET data banks and the centres designated by regional air navigation agreement for the operation of aeronautical fixed service satellite distribution systems, in accordance with regional air navigation agreement. 2. CRITERIA RELATED TO TREND FORECASTS 2.1 FORMAT OF TREND FORECASTS Trend forecasts shall be issued in accordance with the templates shown in Appendix 3, Tables A3-1 and A3-2. The units and scales used in the trend forecast shall be the same as those used in the report to which it is appended. NOTE: Examples of trend forecasts are given in Appendix 3. 2.2 INCLUSION OF METEOROLOGICAL ELEMENTS IN TREND FORECASTS 2.2.1 General provisions The trend forecast shall indicate significant changes in respect of one or more of the elements: surface wind, visibility, weather and clouds. Only those elements shall be included for which a significant change is expected. However, in the case of significant changes in respect of cloud, all cloud groups, including layers or masses not expected to change, shall be indicated. In the case of a significant change in visibility, the phenomenon causing the reduction of visibility shall also be indicated. When no change is expected to occur, this shall be indicated by the term “NOSIG”. METEOROLOGY SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION METEOROLOGICAL SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR TRAFFIC - ANNEX 3 367 2.2.2 Surface wind The trend forecast shall indicate changes in the surface wind which involve: a. a change in the mean wind direction of 60° or more, the mean speed before and/or after the change being 5 m/s (10 kt) or more; b. a change in mean wind speed of 5 m/s (10 kt) or more; and c. changes in the wind through values of operational significance. The threshold values shall be established by the meteorological authority in consultation with the appropriate ATS authority and operators concerned, taking into account changes in the wind which would: 1. require a change in runway(s) in use; and 2. indicate that the runway tailwind and crosswind components will change through values representing the main operating limits for typical aircraft operating at the aerodrome. 2.2.3 Visibility When the visibility is expected to improve and change to or pass through one or more of the following values, or when the visibility is expected to deteriorate and pass through one or more of the following values: 150, 350, 600, 800, 1500 or 3000 m, the trend forecast shall indicate the change. When significant numbers of flights are conducted in accordance with the visual flight rules, the forecast shall additionally indicate changes to or passing through 5000 m. NOTE: In trend forecasts appended to local routine and special reports, visibility refers to the forecast visibility along the runway(s); in trend forecasts appended to METAR and SPECI, visibility refers to the forecast prevailing visibility. 2.2.4 Weather phenomena 2.2.4.1 The trend forecast shall indicate the expected onset, cessation or change in intensity of one or more of the following weather phenomena or combinations thereof: – freezing precipitation – moderate or heavy precipitation (including showers thereof) – thunderstorm (with precipitation) – duststorm – sandstorm – other weather phenomena given in Appendix 3, 4.4.2.3, only if they are expected to cause a significant change in visibility. 2.2.4.2 The trend forecast shall indicate the expected onset or cessation of one or more, up to a maximum of three, of the following weather phenomena or combinations thereof: – ice crystals – freezing fog – low drifting dust, sand or snow – blowing dust, sand or snow – thunderstorm (with or without precipitation) – squall – funnel cloud (tornado or waterspout). 2.2.4.3 The total number of phenomena reported in 2.2.4.1 and 2.2.4.2 shall not exceed three. 2.2.4.4 The expected end of occurrence of the weather phenomena shall be indicated by the abbreviation “NSW”. 2.2.5 Clouds When the height of the base of a cloud layer of BKN or OVC extent is expected to lift and change to or pass through one or more of the following values, or when the height of the base of a cloud layer of BKN or OVC extent is expected to lower and pass through one or more of the following values: 30, 60, 150, 300 and 450 m (100, 200, 500, 1000 and 1500 ft), the trend forecast shall indicate the change. When the height of the base of a cloud layer is below or is expected to fall below or rise above 450 m (1500 ft), the trend forecast shall also indicate changes in cloud amount from FEW, or SCT increasing to BKN or OVC, or changes from BKN or OVC decreasing to FEW or SCT. When no clouds of operational significance are forecast and “CAVOK” is not appropriate, the abbreviation “NSC” shall be used. 2.2.6 Vertical visibility When the sky is expected to remain or become obscured and vertical visibility observations are available at the aerodrome, and the vertical visibility is forecast to improve and change to or pass through one or more of the following values, or when the vertical visibility is forecast to deteriorate and pass through one or more of the following values: 30, 60, 150 or 300 m (100, 200, 500 or 1000 ft), the trend forecast shall indicate the change. 368 METEOROLOGY SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION METEOROLOGICAL SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR TRAFFIC - ANNEX 3 2.2.7 Additional criteria Criteria for the indication of changes based on local aerodrome operating minima, additional to those specified in 2.2.2 to 2.2.6, shall be used as agreed between the meteorological authority and the operator(s) concerned. 2.3 USE OF CHANGE GROUPS 2.3.1 When a change is expected to occur, the trend forecast shall begin with one of the change indicators “BECMG” or “TEMPO”. 2.3.2 The change indicator “BECMG” shall be used to describe forecast changes where the meteorological conditions arc expected to reach or pass through specified values at a regular or irregular rate. The period during which, or the time at which, the change is forecast to occur shall be indicated, using the abbreviations “FM”, “TL”, or “AT”, as appropriate, each followed by a time group in hours and minutes. When the change is forecast to begin and end wholly within the trend forecast period, the beginning and end of the change shall be indicated by using the abbreviations “FM” and “TL”, respectively, with their associated time groups. When the change is forecast to commence at the beginning of the trend forecast period but be completed before the end of that period, the abbreviation “FM” and its associated time group shall be omitted and only “TL” and its associated time group shall be used. When the change is forecast to begin during the trend forecast period and be completed at the end of that period, the abbreviation ”TL” and its associated time group shall be omitted and only “FM” and its associated time group shall be used. When the change is forecast to occur at a specified time during the trend forecast period, the abbreviation “AT” followed by its associated time group shall be used. When the change is forecast to commence at the beginning of the trend forecast period and be completed by the end of that period or when the change is forecast to occur within the trend forecast period but the time is uncertain, the abbreviations “FM”, “TL” or “AT” and their associated time groups shall be omitted and the change indicator “BECMG” shall be used alone. 2.3.3 The change indicator “TEMPO” shall be used to describe forecast temporary fluctuations in the meteorological conditions which reach or pass specified values and last for a period of less than one hour in each instance and, in the aggregate, cover less than one-half of the period during which the fluctuations are forecast to occur. The period during which the temporary fluctuations are forecast to occur shall be indicated, using the abbreviations “FM” and/or “TL”, as appropriate, each followed by a time group in hours and minutes. When the period of temporary fluctuations in the meteorological conditions is forecast to begin and end wholly within the trend forecast period, the beginning and end of the period of temporary fluctuations shall be indicated by using the abbreviations “FM” and “TL”, respectively, with their associated time groups. When the period of temporary fluctuations is forecast to commence at the beginning of the trend forecast period but cease before the end of that period, the abbreviation “FM” and its associated time group shall be omitted and only “TL” and its associated time group shall be used. When the period of temporary fluctuations is forecast to begin during the trend forecast period and cease by the end of that period, the abbreviation “TL” and its associated time group shall be omitted and only “FM” and its associated time group shall be used. When the period of temporary fluctuations is forecast to commence at the beginning of the trend forecast period and cease by the end of that period, both abbreviations “FM” and “TL” and their associated time groups shall be omitted and the change indicator “TEMPO” shall be used alone. 2.4 USE OF THE PROBABILITY INDICATOR The indicator “PROB” shall not be used in trend forecasts. 3. CRITERIA RELATED TO FORECASTS FOR TAKE-OFF 3.1 FORMAT OF FORECASTS FOR TAKE-OFF Recommendation. - The format of the forecast should be as agreed between the meteorological authority and the operator concerned. The order of the elements and the terminology, units and scales used in forecasts for take-off should be the same as those used in reports for the same aerodrome. 3.2 AMENDMENTS TO FORECASTS FOR TAKE-OFF Recommendation. - The criteria for the issuance of amendments for forecasts for take-off for surface wind direction and speed, temperature and pressure and any other elements agreed locally should be agreed between the meteorological authority and the operators concerned. The criteria should be consistent with the corresponding criteria for special reports established for the aerodrome in accordance with Appendix 3, 2.3.1. 4. CRITERIA RELATED TO AREA FORECASTS FOR LOW-LEVEL FLIGHTS 4.1 FORMAT AND CONTENT OF GAMET AREA FORECASTS When prepared in GAMET format, area forecasts shall contain two sections: Section I related to information on en-route weather phenomena hazardous to low-level flights, prepared in support of the issuance of AIRMET information, and Section II related to additional information required by low-level flights. The content and order of elements in a GAMET area forecast, when prepared, shall be in accordance with the template shown in Table A5-3. Additional elements in Section II shall be included in accordance with regional air navigation agreement. Elements which are already covered by a SIGMET message shall be omitted from GAMET area forecasts. METEOROLOGY SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION METEOROLOGICAL SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR TRAFFIC - ANNEX 3 4.2 369 AMENDMENTS TO GAMET AREA FORECASTS When a weather phenomenon hazardous to low-level flights has been included in the GAMET area forecast and the phenomenon forecast does not occur, or is no longer forecast, a GAMET AMD shall be issued, amending only the weather element concerned. NOTE: Specifications regarding the issuance of AIRMET information amending the area forecast in respect of weather phenomena hazardous for low-level flights are given in Appendix 6. 4.3 CONTENT OF AREA FORECASTS FOR LOW-LEVEL FLIGHTS IN CHART FORM 4.3.1 When chart form is used for area forecasts for low-level flights, the forecast of upper wind and upper-air temperature shall be issued for points separated by no more than 500km (300NM) and for at least the following altitudes: 600, 1500 and 3000m (2000, 5000 and 10000ft), and 4500m (15000ft) in mountainous areas. 4.3.2 When chart form is used for area forecasts for low-level flights, the forecast of SIGWX phenomena shall be issued as low-level SIGWX forecast for flight levels up to 100 (or up to flight level 150 in mountainous areas, or higher, where necessary). Low-level SIGWX forecasts shall include the following items: a. the phenomena warranting the issuance of a SIGMET as given in Appendix 6 and which are expected to affect low-level flights; and b. the elements in area forecasts for low-level flights as given in Table A5-3 except elements concerning: 1. upper winds and temperatures; and 2. forecast QNH. NOTE: Guidance on the use of terms "ISOL", "OCNL" and "FRQ" referring to cumulonimbus and towering cumulus clouds, and thunderstorms is given in Appendix 6. 4.4 EXCHANGE OF AREA FORECASTS FOR LOW-LEVEL FLIGHTS Area forecasts for low-level flights prepared in support of the issuance of AIRMET information shall be exchanged between meteorological offices responsible for the issuance of flight documentation for low-level flights in the flight information regions concerned. Table A5-1. Template for TAF Key: M C O = = = inclusion mandatory, part of every message inclusion conditional, dependent on meteorological condition or method of Observation inclusion optional NOTE 1: The ranges and resolutions for the numerical elements included in TAF are shown in Table A5-4 of this appendix. NOTE 2: The explanations for the abbreviations used can be found in the Procedures for Air Navigation Services - ICAO Abbreviations and Codes (PANS-ABC, Doc 8400). Element as specified in Chapter 6 Identification of the type of forecast (M) Location indicator (M) Time of issue of forecast (M) Identification of a missing forecast (C) END OF TAF IF Day and period of validity of forecast (M) Identification of a cancelled forecast (C) END OF TAF IF Detailed content Type of forecast (M) Template(s) TAF or TAF AMD or TAF COR ICAO location indicator nnnn (M) Day and time of issue nnnnnnZ of the forecast in UTC (M) Missing forecast NIL identifier (C) THE FORECAST IS MISSING Day and period of the nnnn/nnnn validity of the forecast in UTC (M) Cancelled forecast CNL identifier (C) THE FORECAST IS CANCELLED. Examples TAF TAF AMD YUDO1 160000Z NIL 1606/1624 0812/0918 CNL 370 METEOROLOGY SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION METEOROLOGICAL SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR TRAFFIC - ANNEX 3 Element as specified in Chapter 6 Surface wind (M) Detailed content Wind direction (M) Template(s) nnn or VRB2 Wind speed (M) [P]nn[n] Significant speed G[P]nn[n] variations (C)3 Units of measurement MPS (or KT) (M) Visibility (M) Prevailing visibility (M) nnnn Weather (C)4 5 Intensity of weather phenomena (C)6 Characteristics and type of weather phenomena (C)7 Cloud (M)8 Cloud amount and height of base or vertical visibility (M) Cloud type (C)4 - or + DZ or RA or SN or SG or PL or DS or SS or FZDZ or FZRA or SHGR or SHGS or SHRA or SHSN or TSGR or TSGS or TSRA or TSSN C A V O K Examples 24004MPS; VRB01MPS (24008KT); (VRB02KT) 19005MPS (19010KT) 00000MPS (00000KT) 140P49MPS (140P99KT) 12003G09MPS (12006G18KT) 24008G14MPS (24016G28KT) 0350 CAVOK 7000 9000 9999 — IC or FG or BR or SA or DU or HZ or FU or VA or SQ or PO or FC or TS or BCFG or BLDU or BLSA or BLSN or DRDU or DRSA or DRSN or FZFG or MIFG or PRFG FEWnnn or VVnnn NSC SCTnnn or or BKNnnn or VV/// OVCnnn CB or TCU — RA +TSRA -FZDZ PRFG HZ FG +TSRASN SNRA FG FEW010 VV005 OVC020 VV/// SCT005 BKN012 SCT008 BKN025CB NSC METEOROLOGY SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION METEOROLOGICAL SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR TRAFFIC - ANNEX 3 Element as specified in Chapter 6 Temperature (O)9 Detailed content Name of the element (M) Maximum temperature (M) Time of occurrence of the maximum temperature (M) Name of the element (M) Minimum temperature (M) Time of occurrence of the minimum temperature (M) Change or probability indicator (M) Expected significant changes to one or more Period of occurrence of the above or change (M) elements during Wind (C)4 the period of validity (C)4, 10 Template(s) 371 Examples TX25/1013Z TN09/1005Z TX05/2112Z TNM02/2103Z TX [M]nn/ nnnnZ TN [M]nn/ nnnnZ PROB30 [TEMPO] or PROB40 [TEMPO] or BECMG or TEMPO or FM nnnn/nnnn nnn[P]nn[n][G[P]nn[n]]MPS or VRBnnMPS (or nnn[P]nn[G[P]nn]KT or VRBnnKT) Prevailing visibility (C)4 nnnn C A V O K Weather phenomenon: - or + intensity (C)6 — Weather phenomenon: DZ or RA or characteristics and SN or SG type (C) 4, 7 or PL or DS or IC or FG or BR or SA or DU or HZ or NSW TEMPO 0815/0818 25017G25MPS (TEMPO 0815/0818 25034G50KT) TEMPO 2212/2214 17006G13MPS 1000 TSRA SCT010CB BKN020 (TEMPO 2212/2214 17012G26KT 1000 TSRA SCT010CB BKN020) BECMG 3010/3011 00000MPS 2400 OVC010 (BECMG 3010/3011 00000KT 2400 OVC010) PROB30 1412/1414 0800 FG BECMG 1412/1414 RA TEMPO 2503/2504 FZRA TEMPO 0612/0615 BLSN PROB40 TEMPO 2923/3001 0500 FG 372 METEOROLOGY SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION METEOROLOGICAL SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR TRAFFIC - ANNEX 3 Element as specified in Chapter 6 Detailed content Template(s) FU or VA or SQ or PO or FC or TS or BCFG or BLDU or BLSA or BLSN or DRDU or DRSA or DRSN or FZFG or MIFG or PRFG FEWnnn or VVnnn NSC SCTnnn or or VV/// BKNnnn or OVCnnn CB Examples SS or FZDZ or FZRA or SHGR or SHGS or SHRA or SHSN or TSGR or TSGS or TSRA or TSSN Cloud amount and height of base or vertical visibility (C)4 Cloud type (C)4 FM051230 15015KMH 9999 BKN020 (FM051230 15008KT 9999 BKN020) BECMG 1618/1620 8000 NSW NSC BECMG 2306/2308 SCT015CB BKN020 1 Fictitious location. 2 To be used in accordance with 1.2.1. 3 To be included in accordance with 1.2.1. 4 To be included whenever applicable. 5 One or more, up to a maximum of three, groups in accordance with 1.2.3. 6 To be included whenever applicable in accordance with 1.2.3. No qualifier for moderate intensity. 7 Weather phenomena to be included in accordance with 1.2.3. 8 Up to four cloud layers in accordance with 1.2.4. 9 To be included in accordance with 1.2.5, consisting of up to a maximum of four temperatures (two maximum temperatures and two minimum temperatures). 10 To be included in accordance with 1.3, 1.4 and 1.5. METEOROLOGY SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION METEOROLOGICAL SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR TRAFFIC - ANNEX 3 373 Table A5-2. Use of change and time indicators in TAF Change or time indicator FM BECMG TEMPO PROBnn — TEMPO Time period Meaning nd nd nh nh nm used to indicate a significant change in most weather elements nm occurring at nd nd day, nh nh hours and nm nm minutes (UTC); all the elements given before "FM" are to be included following “FM” (i.e. they are all superseded by those following the abbreviation) nd1 nd1 nh1 nh1 the change is forecast to commence at nd1 nd1 day and nh1 nh1 hours nd2 nd2 nh2 nh2 (UTC) and be completed by nd2 nd2 day and nh2 nh2 hours (UTC); only those elements for which a change is forecast are to be given following “BECMG”; the time period nd1 nd1 nh1 nh1 /nd2 nd2 nh2 nh2 nh2 should normally be less than 2 hours and in any case should not exceed 4 hours nd1 nd1 nh1 nh1 temporary fluctuations are forecast to commence at nd1 nd1 day and nd2 nd2 nh2 nh2 nh1 nh1 hours (UTC) and cease by nd2 nd2 day and nh2 nh2 hours (UTC); only those elements for which fluctuations are forecast are to be given following “TEMPO”; temporary fluctuations should not last more than one hour in each instance, and in the aggregate, cover less than half of the period nd1 nd1 nh1 nh1 /nd2 nd2 nh2 nh2 nd1 nd1 nh1 nh1 probability of occurrence (in%) of — nd2 nd2 nh2 nh2 an alternative value of a forecast nd1 nd1 nh1 nh1 element or elements; nn = 30 or probability of occurrence of nd2 nd2 nh2 nh2 nn = 40 only; to be placed after the temporary fluctuations element(s) concerned Table A5-3. Template for GAMET Key: M C O = = = = = Element Location indicator of FIR/CTA (M) inclusion mandatory, part of every message inclusion conditional, dependent on meteorological conditions inclusion optional double line indicates that the text following it should be placed on the subsequent line Detailed content ICAO location indicator of the ATS unit serving the FIR or CTA to which the GAMET refers (M) Identification Message identification (M) (M) Validity period Day-time groups (M) indicating the period of validity in UTC (M) Location indicator of Location indicator of meteorological office meteorological originating the message with a separating office (M) hyphen (M) Location indicator and Name of the FIR/CTA or part name of the FIR/CTA, or part thereof for which thereof (M) the GAMET is issued (M) 1 Fictitious location Template Examples nnnn YUCC1 GAMET GAMET VALID nnnnnn/nnnnnn VALID 220600/221200 nnnn- YUDO-1 nnnn nnnnnnnnnn FIR[/n] [BLW FLnnn] or nnnn nnnnnnnnnn CTA[/n] [BLW FLnnn] YUCC AMSWELL FIR/2 BLW FL120 YUCC AMSWELL FIR 374 METEOROLOGY SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION METEOROLOGICAL SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR TRAFFIC - ANNEX 3 Template Element Indicator for the beginning of Section I (M) Surface wind (C) Detailed content Identifier and time Indicator to identify the beginning of Section I (M) Widespread surface SFC wind exeeding 15m/s WSPD: (30kt) [nn/nn] Content SECN I [n]nn MPS (or [n]nn KT) Examples Location SECN I [N of Nnn SFC WSPD: 10/12 16 MPS or Snn] or SFC WSPD: 40 KT E OF [S of Nnn W110 or Snn] or [W of Wnnn or Ennn] or [E of Wnnn or Ennn] or [nnnnnnnn nn]1 Widespread surface SFC VIS: 06/08 3000 M BR SFC VIS: nnnn M FG Surface N of N51 or BR visibility (C) visibility below 5 000m [nn/nn] including the weather or SA or phenomena causing DU the reduction in visibility or HZ or FU or VA or PO or DS or SS or DZ or RA or SN or SG or IC or FC GR or GS or PL or SQ SIGWX: 11/12 ISOL TS SIGWX: ISOL TS Significant Significant [nn/nn] weather (C) weather conditions SIGWX: 12/14 SS S OF N35 or OCNL encompassing TS thunderstorms and or FRQ TS heavy sandstorm and or OBSC duststorm TS or EMBD TS or HVY DS or HVY SS or SQL TS or ISOL TSGR or OCNL TSGR or FRQ TSGR or OBSC TSGR or EMBD TSGR or SQL TSGR or VA Mountain Mountain obscuration MT OBSC: nnnnnnnn MT OBSC: MT PASSES S nn1 obscuration (C) [nn/nn] OF N48 METEOROLOGY SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION METEOROLOGICAL SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR TRAFFIC - ANNEX 3 Element Detailed content Cloud (C) Widespread areas of broken or overcast cloud with height of base less than 300m (1000ft) above ground level (AGL) or above mean sea level (AMSL) and/or any or occurrence of cumulonimbus (CB) or towering cumulus (TCU) clouds Icing (C) Icing (except for that occurring in convective clouds and for severe icing for which a SIGMET message has already been issued) Turbulence (C) Turbulence (except for that occurring in convective clouds and for severe turbulence for which a SIGMET message has already been issued) Mountain wave Mountain wave (except (C) for severe mountain wave for which a SIGMET message has already been issued) SIGMET (C) SIGMET messages applicable to the FIR/CTA concerned or a sub-area thereof, for which the area forecast is valid or HAZARDOUS WX NIL (C)3 Indicator for the Indicator to identify the beginning of Section II beginning of (M) Section II (M) Template Identifier Content and time SIG CLD: BKN or OVC [nn/nn] nnn[n]/ nnn[n] M (or nnn[n]/ nnn[n] FT) AGL or AMSL ISOL or OCNL or FRQ or OBSC or EMBD CB2 or TCU2 nnn[n]/ nnn[n] M (or nnn[n]/ nnn[n] FT) AGL or AMSL ICE: MOD [nn/nn] FLnnn/nnn or MOD ABV FLnnn or SEV FLnnn/nnn or SEV ABV FLnnn TURB: MOD [nn/nn] FLnnn/nnn or MOD ABV FLnnn or SEV FLnnn/nnn or SEV ABV FLnnn MTW: MOD [nn/nn] FLnnn/nnn or MOD ABV FLnnn or SEV FLnnn/nnn or SEV ABV FLnnn n[,n] [,n] SIGMET APPLICABLE: 375 Examples Location SIG CLD: 06/09 OVC 800/1100 FT AGL N OF N51 10/12 ISOL TCU 1200/8000 FT AGL ICE: MOD FL050/080 TURB: MOD ABV FL090 MTW: MOD ABV FL080 N OF N63 SIGMET APPLICABLE: 3,5 HAZARDOUS WX NIL SECN II 376 METEOROLOGY SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION METEOROLOGICAL SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR TRAFFIC - ANNEX 3 Template Identifier Content and time Pressure Pressure centres PSYS: [nn] L [n]nnn centres and and fronts and their HPA fronts (M) expected movements or H [n]nnn and developments HPA or FRONT or NIL MOV N or NE or E or SE or S or SW or W or NW nnKMH (nnKT) WKN or NC or INTSF [n]nnn Upper winds and Upper WIND/T: M (or upper-air temperatures winds and [n]nnn FT) for at least the following temperatures nnn/[n]nn altitudes: 600, 1500 (M) MPS (or and 3000m (2000, nnn/[n]nn 5000 and 10000 ft) KT) PSnn or MSnn FEW or Cloud (M) Cloud information not CLD: SCT or [nn/nn] included in Section I BKN or giving type, height of OVC base and top above ground level (AGL) or ST or SC above mean sea level or CU or (AMSL) AS or AC or NS [n]nnn/ [n]nnn M (or [n]nnn/ [n]nnn FT) AGL or AMSL or NIL FZLVL: [ABV] nnnn Freezing level Height indication of FT AGL or (M) 0°C level(s) above AMSL ground level (AGL) or above mean sea level (AMSL), if lower than the top of the airspace for which the forecast is supplied [n]nnn HPA Forecast QNH Forecast lowest ONH MNM QNH: (M) during the period of validity SEA: Tnn HGT Sea-surface Sea-surface [n]n M temperature and state temperature and state of sea of the sea if required by regional air navigation (O) agreement nnnnnn Volcanic VA: Name of volcano nnnn or NIL eruptions (M) Element Detailed content Examples Location Nnnnn or PSYS: 06 L 1004 HPA N5130 Snnnn E01000 MOV NE 25KT WKN Wnnnnn or Ennnnn or Nnnnn or Snnnn Wnnnnn or Ennnnn TO Nnnnn or Snnnn Wnnnnn or Ennnnn Nnnnn or Snnnn Wnnnnn or Ennnnn or [N of Nnn or Snn] or [S of Nnn or Snn] or [W of Wnnn or Ennn] or [E of Wnnn or Ennn] or [nnnnnnnn nn]1 WIND/T: 2000 FT 270/18 MPS PS03 5000 FT 250/20 MPS MS02 10000 FT 240/22 MPS MS11 CLD: BKN SC 2500/8000 FT AGL FZLVL: 3000 FT AGL MNM QNH: 1004 HPA SEA: T15 HGT 5 M VA: ETNA 1 Free text describing well-known geographical locations should be kept to a minimum. 2 The location of the CB and/or TCU should be specified in addition to any widespread areas of broken or overcast cloud as given in the example. 3 When no elements are included in Section I. METEOROLOGY SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION METEOROLOGICAL SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR TRAFFIC - ANNEX 3 377 Table A5-4. Ranges and resolutions for the numerical elements included in TAF Element as specified in Chapter 6 ° true Wind direction: Wind speed: MPS KT Visibility: M M M M Vertical visibility: 30's M (100's FT) 30's M (100's Cloud: height of base: FT) Air temperature (maximum and minimum): °C 1 Range 000 - 360 00 - 991 00 - 1991 0000 - 0750 0800 - 4900 5 000 - 9000 10000 – 000 - 020 Resolution 10 1 1 50 100 1 000 0 (fixed value: 9999 1 000 - 100 1 -80 - +60 1 There is no aeronautical requirement to report surface wind speeds of 50m/s (100kt) or more; however, provision has been made for reporting wind speeds up to 99m/s (199kt) for non-aeronautical purposes, as necessary. EXAMPLE: A5-1. TAF TAF for YUDO (Donlon/International)1 TAF YUDO 160000Z 1606/1624 13005MPS 9000 BKN020 BECMG 1606/1608 SCT015CB BKN020 TEMPO 1608/1612 17006G12MPS 1000 TSRA SCT010CB BKN020 FM161230 15004MPS 9999 BKN020 Meaning of the forecast: TAF for Donlon/International1 issued on the 16th of the month at 0000 UTC valid from 0600 UTC to 2400 UTC on the 16th of the month; surface wind direction 130 degrees; wind speed 5 meters per second; visibility 9 kilometers, broken cloud at 600 meters; becoming between 0600 UTC and 0800 UTC on the 16th of the month, scattered cumulonimbus cloud at 450 meters and broken cloud at 600 meters; temporarily between 0800 UTC and 1200 UTC on the 16th of the month surface wind direction 170 degrees; wind speed 6 meters per second gusting to 12 meters per second; visibility 1000 meters in a thunderstorm with moderate rain, scattered cumulonimbus cloud at 300 meters and broken cloud at 600 meters; from 1230 UTC on the 16th of the month surface wind direction 150 degrees; wind speed 4 meters per second; visibility 10 kilometers or more; and broken cloud at 600 meters. 1 Fictitious location NOTE: In this example, the primary units "meter per second" and "meter" were used for wind speed and height of cloud base, respectively. However, in accordance with Annex 5, the corresponding non-SI alternative units "knot" and 'foot" may be used instead. EXAMPLE: A5-2. Cancellation of TAF Cancellation of TAF for YUDO (Donlon/International)1 TAF AMD YUDO 161500Z 1606/1624 CNL Meaning of the forecast: Amended TAF for Donlon/International1 issued on the 16th of the month at 1500 UTC cancelling the previously issued TAF valid from 0600 UTC to 2400 UTC on the 16th of the month. 1 Fictitious location EXAMPLE: A5-3. GAMET area forecast YUCC GAMET VALID 220600/221200 YUDO AMSWELL FIR/2 BLW FL120 SECN I SFC WSPD: 10/12 16 MPS SFC VIS: 06/08 3000 M BR N OF N51 SIGWX: 11/12 ISOL TS SIG CLD: 06/09 OVC 800/11 00 FT AGL N OF N51 10/12 ISOL TCU 1200/8000 FT AGL ICE: MOD FL050/080 TURB: MOD ABV FL090 3, 5 SIGMETS APPLICABLE: 378 METEOROLOGY SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION METEOROLOGICAL SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR TRAFFIC - ANNEX 3 A5-3. GAMET area forecast (continued) SECN II PSYS: WIND/T: CLD: FZLVL: MNM QNH: SEA: VA: Meaning: Section I: surface wind speeds: surface visibility: significant weather phenomena: significant clouds: icing: turbulence: SIGMET messages: Section II: pressure systems: winds and temperatures: clouds: freezing level: minimum QNH: sea: volcanic ash: 1 Fictitious locations 06 L 1004 HPA N5130 E01000 MOV NE 25 KT WKN 2000 FT 270/18 MPS PS03 5000 FT 250/20 MPS MS02 10000 FT 240/22 MPS MS11 BKN SC 2500/8000 FT AGL 3000 FT AGL 1004 HPA T15 HGT 5M NIL An area forecast for low-level flights (GAMET) issued for sub-area two of the Amswell1 flight information region (identified by YUCC Amswell area control centre) for below flight level 120 by the Donlon/International1 meteorological office (YUDO); the message is valid from 0600 UTC to 1200 UTC on the 22nd of the month. between 1000 UTC and 1200 UTC 16 meters per second; between 0600 UTC and 0800 UTC 3000 meters north of 51 degrees north (due to mist); between 1100 UTC and 1200 UTC isolated thunderstorms without hail; between 0600 UTC and 0900 UTC overcast base 800, top 1100 feet above ground level north of 51 degrees north; between 1000 UTC and 1200 UTC isolated towering cumulus base 1200, top 8000 feet above ground level; moderate between flight level 050 and 080; moderate above flight level 090 (at least up to flight level 120); 3 and 5 applicable to the validity period and sub-area concerned. at 0600 UTC low pressure of 1 004 hectopascals at 51.5 degrees north 10.0 degrees east, expected to move north-eastwards at 25 knots and to weaken; at 2 000 feet above ground level wind direction 270 degrees; wind speed 18 meters per second, temperature plus 3 degrees Celsius; at 5 000 feet above ground level wind direction 250 degrees; wind speed 20 meters per second, temperature minus 2 degrees Celsius; at 10 000 feet above ground level wind direction 240 degrees; wind speed 22 meters per second, temperature minus 11 degrees Celsius; broken stratocumulus, base 2500 feet, top 8 000 feet above ground level; 3000 feet above ground level; 1004 hectopascals; surface temperature 15 degrees Celsius; and state of sea 5 meters; nil. METEOROLOGY SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION METEOROLOGICAL SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR TRAFFIC - ANNEX 3 379 Meteorological Service for International Air Traffic / SIGMET, AIRMET, WSW - Annex 3 Appendix 6. Technical Specifications related to Sigmet and Airmet Information, Aerodrome Warnings and Wind Shear Warnings and Alerts (See Chapter 7 of this Annex.) NOTE: Data type designators to be used in abbreviated headings for SIGMET, AIRMET tropical cyclone and volcanic ash advisory messages are given in WMO Publication No. 386, Manual on the Global Telecommunication System. 1. SPECIFICATIONS RELATED TO SIGMET INFORMATION 1.1 FORMAT OF SIGMET MESSAGES 1.1.1 The content and order of elements in a SIGMET message shall be in accordance with the template shown in Table A6-1. 1.1.2 Messages containing SIGMET information for subsonic aircraft shall be identified as "SIGMET". 1.1.3 The sequence number referred to in the template in Table A6-1 shall correspond with the number of SIGMET messages issued for the flight information region since 0001 UTC on the day concerned. The meteorological watch offices whose area of responsibility encompasses more than one FIR and/or CTA shall issue separate SIGMET messages for each FIR and/or CTA within its area of responsibility. 1.1.4 In accordance with the template in Table A6-1, only one of the following phenomena shall be included in a SIGMET message, using the abbreviations as indicated below: At cruising levels (irrespective of altitude): Thunderstorm obscured embedded frequent squall line obscured with hail embedded with hail frequent, with hail squall line with hail Tropical Cyclone tropical cyclone with 10-minute surface wind speed of 17 m/s (34 kt) or more Turbulence severe turbulence Icing severe icing icing due to freezing rain Mountain Wave severe mountain wave Duststorm heavy duststorm Sandstorm heavy sandstorm Volcanic Ash volcanic ash Radioactive Cloud OBSC TS EMBD TS FRQ TS SQL TS OBSC TSGR EMBD TSGR FRQ TSGR SQL TSGR TC (+ cyclone name) SEV TURB SEV ICE SEV ICE (FZRA) SEV MTW HVY DS HVY SS VA (+ volcano name, if known) RDOACT CLD 1.1.5 SIGMET information shall not contain unnecessary descriptive material. In describing the weather phenomena for which the SIGMET is issued, no descriptive material additional to that given in 1.1.4 shall be included. SIGMET information concerning thunderstorms or a tropical cyclone shall not include references to associated turbulence and icing. 1.1.6 Recommendation. - Meteorological watch offices in a position to do so should issue SIGMET information in graphical format using the WMO BUFR code form, in addition to the issuance of this SIGMET information in abbreviated plain language in accordance with 1.1.1. NOTE: The BUFR code form is contained in WMO Publication No. 306, Manual on Codes, Volume 1.2, Part B Binary Codes. 380 METEOROLOGY SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION METEOROLOGICAL SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR TRAFFIC - ANNEX 3 1.2 DISSEMINATION OF SIGMET MESSAGES 1.2.1 SIGMET messages shall be disseminated to meteorological watch offices, WAFCs and to other meteorological offices in accordance with regional air navigation agreement. SIGMET messages for volcanic ash shall also be disseminated to VAACs. 1.2.2 SIGMET messages shall be disseminated to international OPMET data banks and the centres designated by regional air navigation agreement for the operation of aeronautical fixed service satellite distribution systems, in accordance with regional air navigation agreement. 2. SPECIFICATIONS RELATED TO AIRMET INFORMATION 2.1 FORMAT OF AIRMET MESSAGES 2.1.1 The content and order of elements in an AIRMET message shall be in accordance with the template shown in Table A6-1. 2.1.2 The sequence number referred to in the template in Table A6-1 shall correspond with the number of AIRMET messages issued for the flight information region since 0001 UTC on the day concerned. The meteorological watch offices whose area of responsibility encompasses more than one FIR and/or CTA shall issue separate AIRMET messages for each FIR and/or CTA within its area of responsibility. 2.1.3 The flight information region shall be divided in sub-areas, as necessary. 2.1.4 In accordance with the template in Table A6-1, only one of the following phenomena shall be included in an AIRMET message, using the abbreviations as indicated below: At cruising levels below flight level 100 (or below flight level 150 in mountainous areas, or higher, where necessary): - Surface Wind Speed - widespread mean surface wind speed above 15 m/s (30 kt) - Surface Visibility - widespread areas affected by reduction of - - - SFC WSPD (+ wind speed and units) SFC VIS visibility to less than 5000 m, including the (+ visibility) weather phenomenon causing the reduction of (+ one of the following weather phenomena or visibility combination thereof: BR, DS, DU, DZ, FC, FG, FU. GR, GS, HZ, IC, PL, PO, RA, SA, SG, SN, SQ, SS or VA) Thunderstorms - isolated thunderstorms without hail ISOL TS - occasional thunderstorms without hail OCNL TS - isolated thunderstorms with hail ISOL TSGR - occasional thunderstormes with hail OCNL TSGR Mountain Obscuration - mountains obscured MT OBSC Cloud - widespread areas of broken or overcast cloud with height of base less than 300 m (1000 ft) above ground level: - broken BKN CLD (+ height of the base and top and units) - overcast OVC CLD (+ height of the base and top and units) - cumulonimbus clouds which are: - isolated ISOL CB - occasional OCNL CB - frequent FRQ CB - towering cumulus clouds which are: - isolated ISOL TCU - occasional OCNL TCU - frequent FRQ TCU Icing METEOROLOGY SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION METEOROLOGICAL SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR TRAFFIC - ANNEX 3 - moderate icing (except for icing in convective clouds) - Turbulence - moderate turbulence (except for turbulence in convective clouds) - Mountain Wave - moderate mountain wave 381 MOD ICE MOD TURB MOD MTW 2.1.5 AIRMET information shall not contain unnecessary descriptive material. In describing the weather phenomena for which the AIRMET is issued, no descriptive material additional to that given in 2.1.4 shall be included. AIRMET information concerning thunderstorms or cumulonimbus clouds shall not include references to associated turbulence and icing. NOTE: The specifications for SIGMET information which is also applicable to low-level flights are given in 1.1.4. 2.2 DISSEMINATION OF AIRMET MESSAGES 2.2.1 Recommendation. - AIRMET messages should be disseminated to meteorological watch offices in adjacent flight information regions and to other meteorological offices, as agreed by the meteorological authorities concerned. 2.2.2 Recommendation. - AIRMET messages should be transmitted to international operational meteorological data banks and the centres designated by regional air navigation agreement for the operation of aeronautical fixed service satellite distribution systems, in accordance with regional air navigation agreement. 3. SPECIFICATIONS RELATED TO SPECIAL AIR-REPORTS NOTE: This appendix deals with the uplink of special air-reports. The general specifications related to special air-reports are in Appendix 4. 3.1 Recommendation. - Special air-reports should be uplinked for 60 minutes after their issuance. 3.2 Recommendation. - Information on wind and temperature included in automated special air-reports should not be uplinked to other aircraft in flight. 4. DETAILED CRITERIA RELATED TO SIGMET AND AIRMET MESSAGES AND SPECIAL AIR-REPORTS (UPLINK) 4.1 IDENTIFICATION OF THE FLIGHT INFORMATION REGION Recommendation. - In cases where the airspace is divided into a flight information region (FIR) and an upper flight information region (UIR), the SIGMET should be identified by the location indicator of the air traffic services unit serving the FIR. NOTE: The SIGMET message applies to the whole airspace within the lateral limits of the FIR, i.e. to the FIR and to the UIR. The particular areas and/or flight levels affected by the meteorological phenomena causing the issuance of the SIGMET are given in the text of the message. 4.2 CRITERIA RELATED TO PHENOMENA INCLUDED IN SIGMET AND AIRMET MESSAGES AND SPECIAL AIR-REPORTS (UPLINK) 4.2.1 Recommendation. - An area of thunderstorms and cumulonimbus clouds should be considered: a) obscured (OBSC) if it is obscured by haze or smoke or cannot be readily seen due to darkness; b) embedded (EMBD) if it is embedded within cloud layers and cannot be readily recognized; c) isolated (ISOL) if it consists of individual features which affect, or are forecast to affect, an area with a maximum spatial coverage less than 50 per cent of the area concerned (at a fixed time or during the period of validity); and d) occasional (OCNL) if it consists of well-separated features which affect, or are forecast to affect, an area with a maximum spatial coverage between 50 and 75 per cent of the area concerned (at a fixed time or during the period of validity). 4.2.2 Recommendation. - An area of thunderstorms should be considered frequent (FRQ) if within that area there is little or no separation between adjacent thunderstorms with a maximum spatial coverage greater than 75 per cent of the area affected, or forecast to be affected, by the phenomenon (at a fixed time or during the period of validity). 4.2.3 Recommendation. - Squall line (SQL) should indicate a thunderstorm along a line with little or no space between individual clouds. 4.2.4 sary. Recommendation. - Hail (GR) should be used as a further description of the thunderstorm, as neces- 4.2.5 Recommendation. - Severe and moderate turbulence (TURB) should refer only to: low-level turbulence associated with strong surface winds; rotor streaming; or turbulence whether in cloud or not in cloud (CAT). Turbulence should not be used in connection with convective clouds. 382 METEOROLOGY SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION METEOROLOGICAL SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR TRAFFIC - ANNEX 3 4.2.6 Turbulence shall be considered: a) severe whenever the peak value of the cube root of EDR exceeds 0.7; and b) moderate whenever the peak value of the cube root of EDR is above 0.4 and below or equal to 0.7. 4.2.7 Recommendation. - Severe and moderate icing (ICE) should refer to icing in other than convective clouds. Freezing rain (FZRA) should refer to severe icing conditions caused by freezing rain. 4.2.8 Recommendation. - A mountain wave (MTW) should be considered: a) severe whenever an accompanying downdraft of 3.0 m/s (600 ft/min) or more and/or severe turbulence is observed or forecast; and b) moderate whenever an accompanying downdraft of 1.75-3.0 m/s (350-600 ft/min) and/or moderate turbulence is observed or forecast. 5. SPECIFICATIONS RELATED TO AERODROME WARNINGS 5.1 FORMAT AND DISSEMINATION OF AERODROME WARNINGS 5.1.1 The aerodrome warnings shall be issued in accordance with the template in Table A6-2 where required by operators or aerodrome services, and shall be disseminated in accordance with local arrangements to those concerned. 5.1.2 The sequence number referred to in the template in Table A6-2 shall correspond with the number of aerodrome warnings issued for the aerodrome since 0001 UTC on the day concerned. 5.1.3 Recommendation. - In accordance with the template in Table A6-2, aerodrome warnings should relate to the occurrence or expected occurrence of one or more of the following phenomena: – tropical cyclone (to be included if the 10-minute mean surface wind speed at the aerodrome is expected to be 17 m/s (34 kt) or more) – thunderstorm – hail – snow (including the expected or observed snow accumulation) – freezing precipitation – hoar frost or rime – sandstorm – duststorm – rising sand or dust – strong surface wind and gusts – squall – frost – volcanic ash – tsunami – volcanic ash deposition – toxic chemicals – other phenomena as agreed locally. 5.1.4 Recommendation. - The use of text additional to the abbreviations listed in the template in Table A6-2 should be kept to a minimum. The additional text should be prepared in abbreviated plain language using approved ICAO abbreviations and numerical values. If no ICAO approved abbreviations are available, English plain language text should be used. 5.2 QUANTITATIVE CRITERIA FOR AERODROME WARNINGS Recommendation. - When quantitative criteria are necessary for the issue of aerodrome warnings covering, for example, the expected maximum wind speed or the expected total snowfall, the criteria should be established by agreement between the meteorological office and the users of the warnings. 6. SPECIFICATIONS RELATED TO WIND SHEAR WARNINGS 6.1 DETECTION OF WIND SHEAR Recommendation - Evidence of the existence of wind shear should be derived from: a) ground-based wind shear remote-sensing equipment, for example, Doppler radar; b) ground-based wind shear detection equipment, for example, a system of surface wind and/or pressure sensors located in an array monitoring a specific runway or runways and associated approach and departure paths; c) aircraft observations during the climb-out or approach phases of flight to be made in accordance with Chapter 5; or METEOROLOGY SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION METEOROLOGICAL SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR TRAFFIC - ANNEX 3 383 d) other meteorological information, for example, from appropriate sensors located on existing masts or towers in the vicinity of the aerodrome or nearby areas of high ground. NOTE: Wind shear conditions are normally associated with the following phenomena: – thunderstorms, microbursts, funnel cloud (tornado or waterspout), and gust fronts – frontal surfaces – strong surface winds coupled with local topography – sea breeze fronts – mountain waves (including low-level rotors in the terminal area) – low-level temperature inversions. 6.2 FORMAT AND DISSEMINATION OF WIND SHEAR WARNINGS AND ALERTS NOTE: Information on wind shear is also to be included as supplementary information in local routine and special reports and METAR and SPECI in accordance with the templates in Appendix 3, Tables A3-1 and A3-2. 6.2.1 The wind shear warnings shall be issued in accordance with the template in Table A6-3 and shall be disseminated in accordance with local arrangements to those concerned. 6.2.2 The sequence number referred to in the template in Table A6-3 shall correspond with the number of wind shear warnings issued for the aerodrome since 0001 UTC on the day concerned. 6.2.3 Recommendation. - The use of text additional to the abbreviations listed in the template in Table A6-3 should be kept to a minimum. The additional text should be prepared in abbreviated plain language using approved ICAO abbreviations and numerical values. If no ICAO approved abbreviations are available, English plain language text should be used. 6.2.4 Recommendation. - When an aircraft report is used to prepare a wind shear warning, or to confirm a warning previously issued, the corresponding aircraft report, including the aircraft type, should be disseminated unchanged in accordance with local arrangements to those concerned. NOTE 1: Following reported encounters by both arriving and departing aircraft two different wind shear warnings may exist, one for arriving aircraft and one for departing aircraft. NOTE 2: Specifications for reporting the intensity of wind shear are still undergoing development. It is recognized, however, that pilots, when reporting wind shear, may use the qualifying terms "moderate", "strong" or "severe", based to a large extent on their subjective assessment of the intensity of the wind shear encountered. 6.2.5 The wind shear alerts shall be disseminated from automated, ground-based, wind shear remote-sensing or detection equipment in accordance with local arrangements to those concerned. 6.2.6 Recommendation. - Where microbursts are observed, reported by pilots or detected by ground-based, wind shear detection or remote-sensing equipment, the wind shear warning and wind shear alert should include a specific reference to microburst. 6.2.7 Where information from ground-based wind shear detection or remote-sensing equipment is used to prepare a wind shear warning, the warning should, if practicable, relate to specific sections of the runway and distances along the approach path or take-off path as agreed between the meteorological authority, the appropriate ATS authority and the operators concerned. Key: Table A6-1. Template for SIGMET and AIRMET messages and special air-reports (uplink) – M inclusion mandatory, part of every message – inclusion conditional, included whenever applicable C – = a double line indicates that the text following it should be placed on the subsequent line NOTE: The ranges and resolutions for the numerical elements included in SIGMET/AIRMET messages and in special air-reports are shown in Table A6-4 of this appendix. 384 METEOROLOGY SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION METEOROLOGICAL SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR TRAFFIC - ANNEX 3 Element as specified in Chapter 5 and Detailed Appendix 6 content SIGMET Location ICAO location nnnn indicator of indicator of FIR/CTA (M)2 the ATS unit serving the FIR or CTA to which the SIGMET/ AIRMET refers (M) Message Identification SIGMET [nn]n (M) identification and sequence number4 (M) Template(s) AIRMET AIRMET [nn]n Validity period (M) Date-time groups indicating the period of validity in UTC (M) VALID nnnnnn/nnnnnn Location indicator of MWO (M) Location indicator of MWO originating the message with a separating hyphen (M) Location indicator and name of the FIR/CTA6 for which the SIGMET/ AIRMET is issued or aircraft radiotelephony call sign (M) nnnn— nnnn nnnnnnnnnn FIR[/UIR] or nnnn nnnnnnnnnn CTA nnnn nnnnnnnnnn FIR[/n] SPECIAL AIR-REPORT1 — ARS _5 nnnnnn Examples YUCC3 YUDD3 SIGMET 5 SIGMET A3 AIRMET 2 ARS VALID 221215/ 221600 VALID 101520/ 101800 VALID 251600/ 252200 YUDO— 3 YUSO—3 YUCC AMSWELL FIR3 YUDD SHANLON FIR/UIR3 YUCC AMSWELL FIR/23 YUDD SHANLON FIR3 VA812 IF THE SIGMET IS TO BE CANCELLED, SEE DETAILS AT THE END OF THE TEMPLATE. Phenomenon TS SEV TURB Description of OBSC8 TS [GR9 SFC WSPD (M)7 phenomenon ] EMBD 10 FRQ11 nn[n]MPS TSGR FRQ TS causing the TS [GR] SQL12 (or SFC WSPD OBSC TSGR issuance of TS [GR] nn[n]KT) EMBD TSGR SIGMET / AIRMET (C) TC GLORIA TC NN Name of the FIR/ CTA or aircraft identification (M) METEOROLOGY SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION METEOROLOGICAL SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR TRAFFIC - ANNEX 3 Element as specified in Chapter 5 and Appendix 6 Template(s) Detailed content SIGMET TC nnnnnnnnnn or NN13 SEV TURB14 SEV ICE15 SEV ICE (FZRA)15 SEV MTW16 HVY DS HVY SS VA[ERUPTION] [MT nnnnnnnnnn] [LOC Nnn[nn] or Snn[nn] Ennn[nn] or Wnnn[nn] VA CLD RDOACT CLD Observed or forecast phenomenon (M) 385 Indication whether the information is observed and expected to continue, or forecast (M) OBS [AT nnnnZ] FCST [AT nnnnZ] AIRMET SFC VIS nnnnM (nn)17 SPECIAL AIR-REPORT1 SEV TURB SEV ICE ISOL18 TS[GR]9 OCNL19 TS[GR] MT OBSC BKN CLD nnn/[ABV] nnnnM (or BKN CLD nnn/[ABV] nnnnFT) SEV MTW HVY SS VA CLD [FL nnn/nnn] VA [MT nnnnnnnnnn] MOD TURB MOD ICE Examples VA ERUPTION MT ASHVAL LOC S15 E073 VA CLD MOD TURB MOD MTW ISOL CB BKN CLD 120/900M (BKN CLD 400/3000FT) OVC CLD270/ ABV3000M (OVC CLD 900/ABV 10000FT) SEV ICE OVC CLD nnn/[ABV] nnnnM (or OVC CLD nn/[ABV] nnnnFT) ISOL18 CB20 OCNL19 CB FRQ11 CB ISOL18 TCU 20 OCNL19 TCU20 FRQ11 TCU MOD TURB14 MOD ICE15 MOD MTW16 RDOACT CLD OBS AT nnnnZ OBS AT 1210Z OBS FCST AT 1815Z 386 METEOROLOGY SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION METEOROLOGICAL SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR TRAFFIC - ANNEX 3 Element as specified in Chapter 5 and Detailed Appendix 6 content Location (C)21 Location (referring to latitude and longitude (in degrees and minutes) or locations or geographic features well known internationally) Template(s) SIGMET AIRMET Nnn[nn] Wnnn[nn] or Nnn[nn] Ennn[nn] or Snn[nn] Wnnn[nn] or Snn[nn] Ennn[nn] or N OF Nnn[nn] or S OF Nnn[nn] or N OF Snn[nn] or S OF Snn[nn] or (AND] W OF Wnnn[nn] or E OF Wnnn[nn] or W OF Ennn[nn] or E OF Ennn[nn] or [N OF, NE OF, E OF, SE OF, S OF, SW OF, W OF, NW OF] [LINE] Nnn[nn] or Snn[nn] Wnnn[nn] or Ennn[nn] - Nnn[nn] or Snn[nn] Wnnn[nn] or Ennn[nn] or [N OF, NE OF, E OF, SE OF, S OF, SW OF, W OF, NW OF AT nnnnnnnnnnnn or WI Nnn[nn] or Snn[nn] Wnnn[nn] or Ennn[nn] Nnn[nn] or Snn[nn] Wnnn[nn] or Ennn[nn] Nnn[nn] or Snn[nn] Wnnn[nn] or Ennn[nn] [Nnn[nn] or Snn[nn] Wnnn[nn] or Ennn[nn] Nnn[nn] or Snn[nn] Wnnn[nn] or Ennn[nn]] SPECIAL AIR-REPORT1 Nnnnn Wnnnnn or Nnnnn Wnnnnn or Snnnn Wnnnnn or Snnnn Ennnnn Examples S OF N54 N OF N50 N2020 W07005 YUSB3 N2706 W07306 N48 E010 N OF N1515 AND W OF E13530 W OF E1554 N OF LINE S2520 W11510 - S2520 W12010 WI N6030 E02550 N6055 E02500 N6050 E02630 METEOROLOGY SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION METEOROLOGICAL SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR TRAFFIC - ANNEX 3 Element as Template(s) specified in Chapter 5 and Detailed SPECIAL Appendix 6 content SIGMET AIRMET AIR-REPORT1 FLnnn or nnnnM Flight level and [SFC/]FLnnn or [SFC/]nnnnM (or Level (C)21 (or nnnnFT) extent22 (C) [SFC/]nnnnFT) or FLnnn/nnn or TOP FLnnn or [TOP] ABV FLnnn or23 CB TOP [ABV] FLnnn WI nnnKM OF CENTRE (or CB TOP [ABV] FLnnn WI nnnNM OF CENTRE) or CB TOP [BLW] FLnnn WI nnnKM OF CENTRE (or CB TOP [BLW] FLnnn WI nnnNM OF CENTRE) or24 FLnnn/nnn [APRX nnnKM BY nnnKM] [nnKM WID LINE25 BTN (nnNM WID LINE BTN)] [Nnn[nn] or Snn[nn] Wnnn[nn] or Ennn[nn] - Nnn[nn] or Snn[nn] Wnnn[nn] or Ennn[nn] [- Nnn[nn] or Snn[nn] Wnnn[nn] or Ennn[nn]] [ - Nnn[nn] or Snn[nn] Wnnn[nn] or Ennn[nn]] (or FLnnn/nnn [APRX nnnNM BY nnnNM] [Nnn[nn] or Snn(nn] Wnnn[nn] or Ennn[nn] - Nnn[nn] or Snn[nn] Wnnn[nn] or Ennn[nn] [ - Nnn[nn] or Snn[nn] Wnnn[nn] or Ennn[nn]] [ - Nnn[nn] or Snn[nn] Wnnn(nn] or Ennn[nn]]) Movements Movement MOV N [nnKMH] or MOV NNE or expected or expected [nnKMH] or MOV NE [nnKMH] movement movement or MOV ENE [nnKMH] or MOV E (C)21 (direction and [nnKMH] or MOV ESE [nnKMH] or speed) with MOV SE [nnKMH] or MOV SSE reference to [nnKMH] or MOV S [nnKMH] or one of the MOV SSW [nnKMH] or MOV SW eight points [nnKMH] or MOV WSW [nnKMH] of compass or or MOV W [nnKMH] or MOV WNW stationary (C) [nnKMH] or MOV NW [nnKMH] or MOV NNW [nnKMH] (or MOV N [nnKT] or MOV NNE [nnKT] or MOV NE [nnKT] or MOV ENE [nnKT or MOV E [nnKT] or MOV ESE [nnKT] or MOV SE [nnKT] or MOV SSE [nnKT] or MOV S [nnKT] or MOV SSW [nnKT] or MOV SW [nnKT] or MOV WSW [nnKT] or MOV W [nnKT] or MOV WNW [nnKT] or MOV NW [nnKT] or MOV NNW [nnKT]) or STNR 387 Examples FL180 FL050/080 TOP FL390 SFC/FL070 TOP ABV FL100 FL310/450 CB TOP FL500 WI 270KM OF CENTRE (CB TOP FL500 WI 150NM OF CENTRE) FL310/350 APRX 220KM BY 35KM FL390 MOV E 40KMH (MOV E 20KT) MOV SE STNR 388 METEOROLOGY SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION METEOROLOGICAL SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR TRAFFIC - ANNEX 3 Element as specified in Chapter 5 and Detailed Appendix 6 content Expected Changes in intensity (C)21 changes in intensity (C) Forecast Forecast position (C)21 position of 22 volcanic ash cloud or the centre of the TC at the end of the validity period of the SIGMET message (C) Template(s) SIGMET AIRMET INTSF or WKN or NC SPECIAL AIR-REPORT1 - Examples WKN FCST nnnnZ TC CENTRE Nnn[nn] or Snn[nn] Wnnn[nn] or Ennn[nn] or FCST nnnnZ VA CLD APRX [nnKM WID LINE25 BTN (nnNM WID LINE BTN)] Nnn[nn] or Snn[nn] Wnnn[nn] or Ennn[nn] - Nnn[nn] or Snn[nn] Wnnn[nn] or Ennn[nn] - Nnn[nn] or Snn[nn] Wnnn[nn] or Ennn[nn] [ - Nnn[nn] or Snn[nn] Wnnn[nn] or Ennn[nn]] [ - Nnn[nn] or Snn[nn] Wnnn[nn] or Ennn[nn]] [AND]26 - FCST 2200Z TC CENTRE N2740 W07345 FCST 1700 VA CLD APRX S15 E075 S15 E081 S17 E083 S18 E079 S15 E075 CNL SIGMET [nn]nnnnnnn /nnnnnn or CNL SIGMET [nn]nnnnnnn /nnnnnn [VA MOV TO nnnn FIR]24 - CNL SIGMET 2 101200/10160027 CNL SIGMET 3 251030/251430 VA MOV TO YUDO FIR27 CNL AIRMET 151520/15180027 OR Cancellation of SIGMET/ AIRMET27 (C) Cancellation of SIGMET/ AIRMET referring to its identification CNL AIRMET (nn)nnnnnnn/ nnnnnn 1 No wind and temperature to be uplinked to other aircraft in flight in accordance with 3.2. 2 See 4.1. 3 Fictitious location. 4 In accordance with 1.1.3 and 2.1.2. 5 See 3.1. 6 See 2.1.3. 7 In accordance with 1.1.4 and 2.1.4. 8 In accordance with 4.2.1 a). 9 In accordance with 4.2.4. 10 In accordance with 4.2.1 b). METEOROLOGY SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION METEOROLOGICAL SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR TRAFFIC - ANNEX 3 389 11 In accordance with 4.2.2. 12 In accordance with 4.2.3. 13 Used for unnamed tropical cyclones. 14 In accordance with 4.2.5 and 4.2.6. 15 In accordance with 4.2.7. 16 In accordance with 4.2.8. 17 In accordance with 2.1.4. 18 In accordance with 4.2.1 c). 19 In accordance with 4.2.1 d). 20 The use of cumulonimbus, CB and towering cumulus, TCU, is restricted to AIRMETs in accordance with 2.1.4. 21 In the case of the same phenomenon covering more than one area within the FIR, these elements can be repeated, as necessary. 22 Only for SIGMET messages for volcanic ash cloud and tropical cyclones. 23 Only for SIGMET messages for tropical cyclones. 24 Only for SIGMET messages for volcanic ash. 25 26 27 A straight line between two points drawn on a map in the Mercator projection or a straight line between two points which crosses lines of longitude at a constant angle. To be used for two volcanic ash clouds or two centres of tropical cyclones simultaneously affecting the FIR concerned. End of the message (as the SIGMET/AIRMET message is being cancelled). NOTE: In accordance with 1.1.5 and 2.1.5, severe or moderate icing and severe or moderate turbulence (SEV ICE, MOD ICE, SEV TURB, MOD TURB) associated with thunderstorms, cumulonimbus clouds or tropical cyclones should not be included. Key: M C - inclusion mandatory, part of every message inclusion conditional, included whenever applicable NOTE 1: The ranges and resolutions for the numerical elements included in wind shear warnings are shown in Table A 6-4 of this appendix. NOTE 2: The explanations for the abbreviations can be found in the Procedures for Air Navigation Services ICAO Abbreviations and Codes (PANS-ABC, Doc 8400). Table A6-2. Template for aerodrome warnings Element Location indicator of the aerodrome (M) Identification of the type of message (M) Validity period (M) Detailed content Template Example Location indicator of the nnnn YUCC1 aerodrome Type of message and AD WRNG [n]n AD WRNG 2 sequence number Day and time of validity VALID nnnnnn/nnnnnn VALID 211230/211530 period in UTC IF THE AERODROME WARNING IS TO BE CANCELLED, SEE DETAILS AT THE END OF THE TEMPLATE. 390 METEOROLOGY SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION METEOROLOGICAL SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR TRAFFIC - ANNEX 3 Table A6-2. Template for aerodrome warnings (continued) Element Phenomenon (M)2 Detailed content Description of phenomenon causing the issuance of the aerodrome warning Template TC3 nnnnnnnnnn or [HVY] TS or GR or [HVY] SN [nnCM]3 or [HVY] FZRA or [HVY] FZDZ or RIME4 or [HVY] SS or [HVY] DS or SA or DU or SFC WSPD nn[n]MPS MAX nn[n] (SFC WSPD nn[n]KT MAX nn[n]) or SFC WIND nnn/nn[n]MPS MAXnn[n] (SFC WIND nnn/nn[n]KT MAX nn[n]) or SQ or FROST or TSUNAMI or VA[DEPO] or TOX CHEM or free text up to 32 characters5 OBS [AT nnnnZ] or FCST Indication whether the information is observed and expected to continue, or forecast Changes in intensity (C) Expected changes in INTSF or intensity WKN or NC OR CNL AD WRNG [n]n Cancellation of Cancellation of nnnnnn/nnnnnn aerodrome warning6 aerodrome warning referring to its identification Observed or forecast phenomenon (M) 1 Fictitious location. 2 One phenomenon or a combination thereof, in accordance with 5.1.3. 3 In accordance with 5.1.3. 4 Hoar frost or rime in accordance with 5.1.3. 5 In accordance with 5.1.4. 6 End of the message (as the aerodrome warning is being cancelled). Key: M C = = Example TC ANDREW HVY SN 25CM SFC WSPD 20MPS MAX 30 VA TSUNAMI OBS AT 1200Z OBS WKN CNL AD WRNG 2 211230/2115306 inclusion mandatory, part of every message inclusion conditional, included whenever applicable NOTE 1: The ranges and resolutions for the numerical elements included in wind shear warnings are shown in Table A 6-4 of this appendix. NOTE 2: The explanations for the abbreviations can be found in the Procedures for Air Navigation Services ICAO Abbreviations and Codes (PANS-ABC, Doc 8400). METEOROLOGY SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION METEOROLOGICAL SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR TRAFFIC - ANNEX 3 391 Table A6-3. Template for wind shear warnings Element Location indicator of the aerodrome (M) Identification of the type of message (M) Time of origin and validity period (M) Detailed content Location indicator of the aerodrome Type of message and sequence number Day and time of issue and, where applicable, validity period in UTC Template Example nnnn YUCC1 WS WRNG [n]n WS WRNG 1 nnnnnn [VALID TL nnnnnn] or [VALID nnnnnn/nnnnnn] 211230 VALID TL 211330 221200 VALID 221215/221315 IF THE WIND SHEAR WARNING IS TO BE CANCELLED, SEE DETAILS AT THE END OF THE TEMPLATE. Phenomenon (M) Identification of the [MOD] or [SEV] WS IN APCH or WS APCH RWY12 phenomenon and its MOD WS RWY34 [MOD] or [SEV] WS [APCH] location RWYnnn or WS IN CLIMB-OUT [MOD] or [SEV] WS IN CLIMB-OUT or [MOD] or [SEV] WS CLIMB-OUT MBST APCH RWY26 RWYnnn or MBST IN APCH or MBST [APCH] RWYnnn or MBST IN CLIMB-OUT or MBST IN CLIMB-OUT MBST CLIMB-OUT RWYnnn REP AT nnnn nnnnnnnn or REP AT 1510 B747 Observed, reported or Identification whether the phenomenon is forecast phenomenon OBS [AT nnnn] or OBS AT 1205 observed or reported (M) FCST FCST and expected to continue or forecast SFC WIND: 320/5MPS SFC WIND: nnn/nnMPS (or Details of the Description of nnn/nnKT) nnnM (nnnFT)-WIND: 60M-WIND: 360/13MPS phenomenon (C)2 phenomenon causing the issuance of the wind nnn/nnMPS (or nnn/nnKT) (SFC WIND: 320/10KT shear warning or 200FT-WIND: nnKMH (or nnKT) ASPEEDL 360/26KT) nnKM (or nnNM) 60KMH LOSS 4KM FNA RWYnn FNA RWY13 (30KT LOSS 2NM FNA or RWY13) nnKMH (or nnKT) ASPEEDG nnKM (or nnNM) FNA RWYnn OR Cancellation of wind Cancellation of wind CNL WS WRNG [n]n CNL WS WRNG shear warning3 shear warning referring nnnnnn/nnnnnn 1211230/21133033 to its identification 1 Fictitious location. 2 Additional provisions in 6.2.3. 3 End of the message (as the wind shear warning is being cancelled). Table A6-4. Ranges and resolutions for the numerical elements included in volcanic ash and tropical cyclone advisory messages, SIGMET/AIRMET messages and aerodrome and wind shear warnings Element as specified in Appendices 2 and 6 M Summit elevation: FT Advisory number: for VA (index)1 for TC (index)1 Maximum surface wind: MPS KT Range 000 - 8100 000 - 27000 000 - 2000 00 - 99 00 - 99 00 - 199 Resolution 1 1 1 1 1 1 392 METEOROLOGY SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION METEOROLOGICAL SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR TRAFFIC - ANNEX 3 Table A6-4. Ranges and resolutions for the numerical elements included in volcanic ash and tropical cyclone advisory messages, SIGMET/AIRMET messages and aerodrome and wind shear warnings (continued) Element as specified in Appendices 2 and 6 hPa Central pressure: Surface wind speed: MPS KT M Surface visibility: M M Cloud: height of base: FT M Cloud: height of top: M FT FT Latitudes: °(degrees) '(minutes) Longitudes: ° (degrees) '(minutes) Flight levels: Movement: KMH KT 1 Range 850 - 1050 15 - 49 30 - 99 0000 - 0750 0800 - 5000 000 - 300 000 - 1000 000 - 2970 3000 - 20000 000 - 9900 10000 - 60000 00 - 90 00 - 60 000 -180 00 - 60 000 - 650 0 - 300 0 - 150 Resolution 1 1 1 50 100 30 100 30 300 100 1000 1 1 1 1 10 10 5 Non-dimensional EXAMPLE: A6-1. SIGMET and AIRMET message and the corresponding cancellations SIGMET YUDD SIGMET 2 VALID 101200/101600 YUSO YUDD SHANLON FIR/UIR OBSC TS FCST S OF N54 TOP FL390 MOV E WKN AIRMET YUDD AIRMET 1 VALID 151520/151800 YUSO YUDD SHANLON FIR ISOL TS OBS N OF S50 TOP ABV FL 100 STNR WKN Cancellation of SIGMET YUDD SIGMET 3 VALID 101345/101600 YUSO - YUDD SHANLON FIR/UIR CNL SIGMET 2 101200/101600 Cancellation of AIRMET YUDD AIRMET 2 VALID 151650/151800 YUSO - YUDD SHANLON FIR CNL AIRMET 1 151520/151800 EXAMPLE: A6-2. SIGMET message for tropical cyclone YUCC SIGMET 3 VALID 251600/252200 YUDO YUCC AMSWELL FIR TC GLORIA OBS AT 1600Z N2706 W07306 CB TOP FL500 WI 150NM OF CENTRE MOV NW 10KT NC FCST 2200Z TC CENTRE N2740 W07345 Meaning: The third SIGMET message issued for the AMSWELL1 flight information region (identified by YUCC Amswell area control centre) by the Donlon/International1 meteorological watch office (YUDO) since 0001 UTC; the message is valid from 1600 UTC to 2200 UTC on the 25th of the month; tropical cyclone Gloria was observed at 1600 UTC at 27 degrees 06 minutes north and 73 degrees 6 minutes west with cumulonimbus top at flight level 500 within 150 nautical miles of the centre; the tropical cyclone is expected to move northwestwards at 10 knots and not to undergo any changes in intensity; the forecast position of the centre of the tropical cyclone at 2200 UTC is expected to be at 27 degrees 40 minutes north and 73 degrees 45 minutes west. 1 Fictitious locations EXAMPLE: Example A6-3. SIGMET message for volcanic ash YUDD SIGMET 2 VALID 211100/211700 YUSO YUDD SHANLON FIR/UIR VA ERUPTION MT ASHVAL LOC S1500 E07348 VA CLD OBS AT 1100Z FL310/450 APRX 220KM BY 35KM S1500 E07348 - S1530 E07642 MOV SE 65KMH FCST 1700Z VA CLD APRX S1506 E07500 - S1518 E08112 - 51712 E08330 - S1824 E07836 Meaning: METEOROLOGY SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION METEOROLOGICAL SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR TRAFFIC - ANNEX 3 393 The second SIGMET message issued for the SHANLON1 flight information region (identified by YUDD Shanlon area control centre/upper flight information region) by the Shanlon/International1 meteorological watch office (YUSO) since 0001 UTC; the message is valid from 1100 UTC to 1700 UTC on the 21st of the month; volcanic ash eruption of Mount Ashval1 located at 15 degrees south and 73 degrees 48 minutes east; volcanic ash cloud observed at 1100 UTC between flight levels 310 and 450 in an approximate area of 220 km by 35 km between 15 degrees south and 73 degrees 48 minutes east, and 15 degrees 30 minutes south and 76 degrees 42 minutes east; the volcanic ash cloud is expected to move east-southeastwards at 65 kilometres per hour; at 1700 UTC the volcanic ash cloud is forecast to be located approximately in an area bounded by the following points: 15 degrees 6 minutes south and 75 degrees east, 15 degrees 18 minutes south and 81 degrees 12 minutes south, 17 degrees 12 minutes south and 83 degrees 30 minutes east, and 18 degrees 24 minutes south and 78 degrees 36 minutes east. 1 Fictitious locations EXAMPLE: A6-4. SIGMET message severe turbulence YUCC SIGMET 5 VALID 221215/221600 YUDO YUCC AMSWELL FIR SEV TURB OBS AT 1210Z YUSB FL250 MOV E 40KMH WKN Meaning: The fifth SIGMET message issued for the AMSWELL1 flight information region (identified by YUCC Amswell area control centre) by the Donlon/International1 meteorological watch office (YUDO) since 0001 UTC; the message is valid from 1215 UTC to 1600 UTC on the 22nd of the month; severe turbulence was observed at 1210 UTC over Siby/Bistock* aerodrome (YUSB) at flight level 250; the turbulence is expected to move eastwards at 40 kilometres per hour and to weaken in intensity. 1 Fictitious locations EXAMPLE: A6-5. AIRMET message for moderate mountain wave YUCC AIRMET 2 VALID 221215/221600 YUDO YUCC AMSWELL FIR MOD MTW OBS AT 1205Z AND FCST N48 El0 FL080 STNR NC Meaning: The second AIRMET message issued for the AMSWELL1 flight information region (identified by YUCC Amswell area control centre) by the Donlon/Intemational1 meteorological watch office (YUDO) since 0001 UTC; the message is valid from 1215 UTC to 1600 UTC on the 22nd of the month; moderate mountain wave was observed at 1205 UTC at 48 degrees north and 10 degrees east at flight level 080; the mountain wave is expected to remain stationary and not to undergo any changes in intensity. 1 Fictitious locations 394 METEOROLOGY SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION AERODROME WEATHER REPORT Aerodrome Weather Report AERODROME WEATHER REPORT – METAR AND SPECI DECODE METAR or SPECI COR CCCC YYGGgg Z NIL AUTO ddd ff G fm fm IDENTIFICATION GROUPS METAR – Aviation routine weather report code name SPECI – Aviation special weather report code name COR – Code word used as appropriate ICAO four-letter location indicator In individual messages, day of the month and time of observation in hours and minutes UTC Indicator of UTC NIL – Code word used as appropriate Fully automated observation indicator SURFACE WIND Mean wind direction in degrees true rounded off to nearest 10 degrees (VRB = VARIABLE when ff < 3kt) Mean wind speed (10-minute 00000 = calm mean or since discontinuity) Indicator of Gust - if necessary Maximum wind speed (gust) - if necessary Wind speed units used P199KMH (P99KT, P49 MPS) mean ff or fm fm = 200 KMH (100 KT, 50 MPS) or more KMH or KT or MPS Followed when there is a variation in wind direction of 60° or more but less than 180° and wind speed > 3 KT by group below: dn d n dn Extreme direction of wind V Indicator of Variability dx d x dx Other extreme direction of wind (measured clockwise) PREVAILING VISIBILITY Prevailing visibility in metres or lowest visibility if visibility is not the same and fluctuating and the prevailing visibility less than 5000m. 9999 = 10 km or more Followed when visibility is not the same and minimum visibility is not prevailing and visibility < 1 500 m or visibility < 50% of prevailing and less than 5000m by the group below: Vn Vn Vn Vn Lowest visibility NDV Abbreviation for no directional variations. Followed by Vn Vn Vn Vn Lowest visibility Dv General direction of lowest visibility or most operationally significant if minimum visibility observed in more than one direction. VVVV RUNWAY VISUAL RANGE (RVR) WHERE REQUIRED, UP TO FOUR ACTIVE RUNWAYS Indicator of RVR Runway designator – for parallel runways may have LL, L, C, R or RR appended (L = left; C = centre; R = right) VR VR VR VR RVR (10-minute mean) at the touchdown zone P2000 = more than 2 000 m, M0050 = less than 50 m i RVR tendency indicator over past 10 minutes. U = upward; D = downward; N = no distinct change. Omitted if possible to determine Replaced when there are significant variations in RVR by the group below: R Indicator of RVR DR DR Runway designator – for parallel runways may have LL, L C, R or RR VR VR VR VR RVR in metres (one-minute mean minimum value during last 10 minutes) R DR DR METEOROLOGY SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION AERODROME WEATHER REPORT 395 RUNWAY VISUAL RANGE (RVR) WHERE REQUIRED, UP TO FOUR ACTIVE RUNWAYS V Indicator of significant Variation VR VR VR VR RVR in metres (one-minute mean maximum value during last 10 minutes) i RVR tendency indicator Note: 25 m STEP if RVR < 400 m 50 m STEP if 400 < RVR < 800 m 100 m STEP if RVR > 800 m w’w’ PRESENT WEATHER Present weather (see table w’w’ at the end of this sequence) CLOUDS* Cloud amount: FEW – FEW (1 – 2 oktas) SCT – SCaTtered (3 – 4 oktas) BKN – BroKeN (5 – 7 oktas) OVC – OVerCast (8 oktas) h s h s hs Height of base of clouds in units of 30 m (100 ft) (CC) Cloud type – only CB (cumulonimubs) or TCU (towering cumulus) indicated or /// if it cannot be observed by automatic system Replaced when sky is obscured and information on vertical visibility is available by the group below: VV Indicator of Vertical Visibility h s h s hs Vertical visibility in units of 30 m (100 ft) /// = vertical visibility unavailable Replaced when there are no such clouds, no restriction on vertical visibility and CAVOK is not appropriate by: NSC Nil Significant Cloud Replaced when automatic system is used and no cloud detected by: NCD No Cloud Detected * Clouds of operational significance (i.e. below 1 500 m (5000 ft) or below the highest minimum sector altitude, whichever is greater, and CB or TCU) Ns Ns Ns CAVOK Ceiling And Visibility OK. Replaces visibility RVR, present weather and cloud if: Visibility is 10 km or more (1) (2) No cumulonimbus, towering cumulus and no other cloud below 1 500 m (5 000 ft) or below the highest minimum sector altitude, whichever is greater, and (3) No significant present weather (see table w’w’ at the end of this sequence) T’T’ T’d T’d Q PH PH PH PH TEMP AND DEW POINT Temperature in whole degrees Celsius (if below 0°C preceded by M) Dew-point temperature in whole degrees Celsius (if below 0°C preceded by M) PRESSURE Indicator of QNH in hectopascals. If Q = A then QNH is in inches QNH rounded down to the whole nearest hectopascal or to tenths and hundreths of an inch , depending on indicator SUPPLEMENTARY INFORMATION RECENT WEATHER RE w’w’ Indicator of REcent weather REcent weather since previous report (intensity NOT to be reported) WIND SHEAR WS R Wind Shear RUNWAY 396 METEOROLOGY SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION AERODROME WEATHER REPORT SUPPLEMENTARY INFORMATION Runway designator – for parallel runways, may have LL, L, C, R or RR appended (L = left; C = centre; R = right) Replaced when all runways are affected by wind shear by: WS ALL RWY STATE OF THE SEA / SURFACE TEMP W Group indicator letter T s Ts Temperature in whole degrees Celsius Indicator of state of the sea S S’ State of water surface S’ STATE OF THE SEA Descriptive terms Code figure Calm (glassy) 0 Calm (rippled) 1 Smooth (wavelets) 2 Slight 3 Moderate 4 Rough 5 Very rough 6 High 7 Very high 8 Phenomenal 9 DR DR STATE OF THE RUNWAY ** RDR DR Indicator of runway ER Runway deposits Extent of runway contamination CR eR e R Depth of deposit BR BR Friction coefficient/breaking action ** State of the runway to be provided by appropriate airport authority TREND FORECAST TWO HOURS FROM TIME OF OBSERVATION CHANGE INDICATORS TTTTT or NOSIG BECMG TEMPO NOSIG CHANGE AND TIME TT GGgg FORECAST WIND ddd BECoMinG, used where changes are expected to reach or pass through specified values at a regular or irregular rate TEMPOrary fluctuations of less than one hour and in aggregate less than half the period indicated by GGG e Ge NO SIGNIFICANT CHANGE Can be AT or FM = FROM or TL = TILL Associated time group in hours and minutes UTC Forecast mean wind direction in degrees true, rounded to nearest 10 degrees (VRB = VARIABLE) Forecast mean wind speed Indicator of Gust Forecast maximum wind speed (gust) Wind speed units ff 00000 = calm G fm fm KMH or KT or MPS FORECAST VISIBILITY VVVV Forecast prevailing visibility in metres 9999 = 10 km or more FORECAST WEATHER w’w’ Forecast significant weather (see table w’w’ at the edn of this sequence) Replaced when significant weather ends by: NSW Nil Significant Weather FORECAST CLOUDS OF OPERATIONAL SIGNIFICANCE OR VERTICAL VISIBILITY METEOROLOGY SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION AERODROME WEATHER REPORT 397 TREND FORECAST TWO HOURS FROM TIME OF OBSERVATION Ns Ns Ns Forecast cloud amount h s h s hs Forecast height of base of cloud (CC) Cloud type - only CB Replaced when sky expected to be obscured and vertical visibility forecasts are undertaken by: VV Indicator of Vertical Visibility h s h s hs Vertical visibility in units of 30 m (100 ft) Replaced when no cumulonimbus, towering cumulus and no other cloud below 1 500 m (5 000 ft) or highest minimum sector altitude, whichever is greater, are forecast and CAVOK is not appropriate by: NSC Nil Significant Cloud RMK Information included by national decision but not disseminated internationally w’w’ SIGNIFICANT PRESENT, FORECAST AND RECENT WEATHER QUALIFIER WEATHER PHENOMENA Intensity of Proximity Descriptor Precipitation Obscuration Other 1 2 3 4 5 – MI DZ Drizzle BR Mist Light Shallow PO Dust/sand Moderate whirls (dust BC RA Rain FG Fog Patches (no devils) qualifier) + PR FU Heavy Partial (covering SN Snow Smoke SQ Squalls part of the or wellSG Snow grains VA Volcanic ash FC Funnel developed aerodrome) cloud(s) DU Widespread in the case (tornado or dust of PO and waterspout) FC In the DR Ice crystals VC Low drifting IC SA Sand SS Sandstorm vicinity (diamond BL Blowing HZ Haze DS Duststorm dust) PL Ice pellets SH Shower(s) Thunderstorm TS GR Hail FZ Freezing GS Small hail (supercooled) and/or snow pellets UP Unknown Precipitation 1. The w’w’ groups are constructed by considering columns 1 to 5 in the table above in NOTES: sequence, that is intensity, followed by description, followed by weather phenomena. An example could be: + SHRA (heavy shower(s) of rain). 2. First precipitation type listed is the predominate precipitation type. Any second or third precipitation type has no intensity qualifier and is of equal or of less intensity than the first precipitation type. 3. DR (low drifting) less than two metres above ground, BL (blowing) two metres or more above ground. 4. GR is used when hailstone diameter is 5 mm or more. When less than 5 mm, GS is used. 5. BR – visibility at least 1 000 m but not more than 5 000 m. FG – visibility less than 1 000 m. 6. VC – between approximately 8 km and 16 km from the aerodrome reference point. 398 METEOROLOGY SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION AERODROME WEATHER FORECAST Aerodrome Weather Forec ast AERODROME WEATHER FORECAST - TAF DECODE TAF or TAF AMD or TAF COR CCCC YYGGgg Z NIL Y1 Y1 G1 G1 /Y2 Y2 G2 G2 CNL ddd ff G fm fm KMH or KT or MPS VVVV IDENTIFICATION GROUPS Code names for Aerodrome Forecast, Amended Aerodrome Forecast and Corrected Aerodrome Forecast, respectively ICAO four-letter location indicator Date and time of issue of forecast in UTC Indicator of UTC Indicator of missing forecast Y1 Y1 day of month, period of validity beginning G1 G1 in hours UTC and Y2 Y2 day of month, period of validity ending G2 G2 in hours UTC Indicator of cancelled forecast FORECAST SURFACE WIND Mean wind direction in 00000 = calm degrees true rounded to nearest 10 degrees (VRB=VARIABLE when ff < 3kt) Mean wind speed Indicator of Gust Maximum wind speed (gust) Wind speed units used P199 KMH (P99 KT, P49 MPS) mean fm fm = 200 KMH (100 KT, 50 MPS) or more FORECAST PREVAILING VISIBILITY Prevailing visibility in metres 9999 = 10 km or more w’w’ FORECAST SIGNIFICANT WEATHER QUALIFIER WEATHER PHENOMENA Intensity of Proximity Descriptor Precipitation Obscuration 1 2 3 4 – MI DZ Drizzle BR Mist Light Shallow PO Moderate BC RA Rain FG Fog Patches (no qualifier) + FU PR Partial Heavy Smoke SQ SN Snow (covering or wellVA Volcanic ash FC SG Snow grains part of the developed DU Widespread IC Ice crystals aerodrome) in the case dust (diamond dust) of PO and FC In the DR Low drifting PL Ice pellets VC SA Sand SS vicinity BL GR Hail HZ Haze DS Blowing SH Shower(s) GS Small hail and/or snow TS Thunderstorm pellets Other 5 Dust/sand whirls (dust devils) Squalls Funnel cloud(s) (tornado or waterspout) Sandstorm Duststorm METEOROLOGY SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION AERODROME WEATHER FORECAST 399 w’w’ FORECAST SIGNIFICANT WEATHER QUALIFIER WEATHER PHENOMENA Intensity of Proximity Descriptor Precipitation Obscuration Other 1 2 3 4 5 FZ Freezing UP Unknown (supercooled) Precipitation Replaced when significant weather phenomenon forecast to end by: NSW Nil Significant Weather 1. The w’w’ groups are constructed by considering columns 1 to 5 in the table above in NOTES: sequence, that is intensity, followed by description, followed by weather phenomena. An example could be: + SHRA (heavy shower(s) of rain). 2. A precipitation combination has dominant type first. 3. DR (low drifting) less than two metres above ground, BL (blowing) two metres or more above ground. 4. GR is used when hailstone diameter is 5 mm or more. When less than 5 mm, GS is used. 5. BR – visibility at least 1 000 m but not more than 5 000 m. FG – visibility less than 1 000 m. 6. VC – between approximately 8 km and 16 km from the aerodrome reference point. FORECAST CLOUD AMOUNT AND HEIGHT* Cloud amount: FEW - FEW (1-2 oktas) SCT - SCaTtered (3-4 oktas) BKN - BroKeN (5-7 oktas) OVC - OVerCast (8 oktas) h s h s hs Height of base of cloud in units of 30 m (100 ft) (cc) Cloud type - only CB (cumulonimbus) is indicated Replaced when sky is expected to be obscured and information on vertical visibility is available by: VV Indicator of Vertical Visibility h s h s hs Vertical visibility in units of 30 m (100 ft) Replaced when no cumulonimbus , towering cumulus and no other cloud below 1500 m (5000 ft) or below the highest minimum sector altitude, whichever is greater, are forecast and CAVOK and SKC are not appropriate by: NSC Nil Significant Cloud * Clouds of operational significance (i.e. below 1 500 m (5 000 ft) or below highest minimum sector altitude, whichever is greater, and CB or TCU) Ns Ns Ns CAVOK Ceiling And Visibility OK. Replaces visibility, weather and cloud if: (1) Visibility is forecast to be 10 km or more (2) No cumulonimbus cloud and no other cloud forecast below 1 500 m (5 000 ft) or below the highest minimum sector altitude, whichever is greater, and (3) No significant weather forecast (see table w’w’ above) SIGNIFICANT CHANGES IN FORECAST CONDITIONS INDICATED BY: PROBABILITY PROB PROBability C2 C 2 Only 30 or 40 used, indicating 30% or 40% TIME YYGG/Ye Ye Ge Ge Beginning YYGG and end Ye Ye Ge Ge of forecast period in day of month and hours UTC Probability is used to indicate the probability of occurence of: (a) an alternative element or elements temporary fluctuations (b) CHANGE 400 TTTTT METEOROLOGY SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION AERODROME WEATHER FORECAST SIGNIFICANT CHANGES IN FORECAST CONDITIONS INDICATED BY: Type of significant change: BECMG BECoMinG, used where changes are expected to reach or pass through specified values at a regular or irregular rate TEMPO TEMPOrary fluctuations of less than one hour and in aggregate less than half the period indicated by YYGG/Ye Ye Ge Ge TIME YYGG/Ye Ye Ge Ge Beginning YYGG and end Ye Ye Ge Ge of forecast period in day on month and hours UTC OR If one set of weather conditions is expected to change more or less completely to a different set of conditions, thus indicating the beginning of another self-contained part of the forecast, by: TTYYGGgg This takes the form FMYYGGgg where FM is the abbreviation for FroM and YYGGgg is the day of month and time in hours and minutes UTC. All forecast conditions before this group are superseded by conditions indicated after the group. BY REGIONAL AGREEMENT FORECAST TEMPERATURE TX, TN TX, TN Indicators of maximum and minimum forecast temperatures, respectively TF TF TF TF Forecast temperature at YF YF GF GF Temperatures below 0°C preceded by M Y F Y F G F GF YF YF GF GF Valid day, time UTC to which forecast temperature refers Z Z Indicator of UTC FORECAST TURBULENCE CONDITIONS (OPTIONAL) Six digits for all turbulence groups, first digit always 5 Second digit Turbulence type 0 None 1 Light turbulence 2 Moderate turbulence in clear air, occasional 3 Moderate turbulence in clear air, frequent 4 Moderate turbulence in cloud, occasional 5 Moderate turbulence in cloud, frequent 6 Severe turbulence in clear air, occasional 7 Severe turbulence in clear air, frequent 8 Severe turbulence in cloud, occasional 9 Severe turbulence in cloud, frequent Third to fifth digit: height of lowest turbulence layer in units of 30m (100ft) above the aerodrome Sixth digit Thickness of layer 0 Up to top of cloud 1 300m/1000ft 2 600m/2000ft 3 900m/3000ft 4 1200m/4000ft 5 1500m/5000ft 6 1800m/6000ft 7 2100m/7000ft 8 2400m/8000ft 9 2700m/9000ft FORECAST ICING CONDITIONS (OPTIONAL) Six digits for all icing groups, first digit always 6 Second digit Icing type 0 No icing 1 Light icing 2 Light icing in cloud 3 Light icing in precipitation METEOROLOGY SERVICE FOR INTERNATIONAL AIR NAVIGATION AERODROME WEATHER FORECAST 4 5 6 7 8 9 Moderate icing Moderate icing in cloud Moderate icing in precipitation Severe icing Severe icing in cloud Severe icing in precipitation Third to fifth digit: height of lowest turbulence layer in units of 30m (100ft) above the aerodrome Thickness of layer Sixth digit 0 Up to top of cloud 1 300m/1000ft 2 600m/2000ft 3 900m/3000ft 4 1200m/4000ft 5 1500m/5000ft 6 1800m/6000ft 7 2100m/7000ft 8 2400m/8000ft 9 2700m/9000ft 401 Meteorological Operational Telecommunications Network - Europe (MOTNE) Broadcast Information METEOROLOGICAL OPERATIONAL TELECOM403 MUNICATIONS NETWORK - EUROPE (MOTNE) BROADCAST INFORMATION DECODE OF EIGHT FIGURE GROUP APPENDED TO MOTNE/OPMET BROADCASTS Decode of Eight Figure Group appended to MOTNE/OPMET Broadcas ts DECODE OF EIGHT FIGURE GROUP APPENDED TO MOTNE/ OPMET BROADCASTS The first two digits indicate the Runway Designator. The third digit indicates the Runway Deposits. The fourth digit indicates the extent of runway contamination. The fifth and sixth digits indicate the depth of deposit. The seventh and eighth digits indicate the friction co-efficient or Braking Action. RUNWAY DESIGNATOR (FIRST AND SECOND DIGITS) The two digits correspond to the runway designator (e.g. 09, 27 etc.). In the case of parallel runways, the ‘Left” runway is indicated by the designator only (e.g. 09L as 09) while the “Right” runway has 50 added so that 09R becomes 59 and 27R becomes 77. Whenever all runways are affected the figure group 88 will be used. NOTE: 99 may sometimes appear as the first two digits. This does not purport to be a runway indicator but means that the information is a repetition of the last message because no new message has been received in time for transmission. RUNWAY DEPOSITS (THIRD DIGIT) The runway deposit expressed as a single figure as follows: 0 — Clear and dry 1 — Damp 2 — Wet or water patches 3 — Rime of frost covered (Depth normally less than 1mm) 4 — Dry snow 5 — Wet snow 6 — Slush 7 — Ice 8 — Compacted or rolled snow 9 — Frozen ruts or ridges / — Type of deposit not reported (e.g., due to runway clearance in progress). EXTENT OF RUNWAY CONTAMINATION (FOURTH DIGIT) The extent of runway contamination is expressed as a single digit in accordance with the following scale: 1 — Less than 10% of runway contaminated (covered) 2 — 11% to 25% of runway contaminated (covered) 5 — 26% to 50% of runway contaminated (covered) 9 — 51% to 100% of runway contaminated (covered) / — not reported (e.g., due to runway clearance in progress). DEPTH OF DEPOSIT (FIFTH AND SIXTH DIGITS) The depth of deposit is indicated by two digits in accordance with the following scale: 00 less than 1mm 01 = 1 mm 02 = 2 mm etc. 10 = 10 mm etc. 15 = 15 mm etc. 20 = 20 mm etc. up to 90 = 90 mm NOTE: Code 91 is not used. Thereafter, the depth is indicated by: 92 = 10 cm 93 = 15 cm 404 METEOROLOGICAL OPERATIONAL TELECOMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - EUROPE (MOTNE) BROADCAST INFORMATION DECODE OF EIGHT FIGURE GROUP APPENDED TO MOTNE/OPMET BROADCASTS 94 = 20 cm 95 = 25 cm 96 = 30 cm 97 = 35 cm 98 = 40 cm or more 99 = runway or runways non-operational due to snow, slush, ice, large drifts or runway clearance, but depth not reported. // = Depth of deposit operationally not significant or not measurable. The quoted depth is the mean of a number of readings or, if operationally significant, the greatest depth measured. FRICTION CO-EFFICIENT OR BRAKING ACTION (SEVENTH AND EIGHTH DIGITS) The friction co-efficient is denoted by two digits or, if the co-efficient is not available, the braking action is denoted by two digits. a. Friction co-efficient EXAMPLE: 28 - friction co-eficient 0.28 35 - friction co-efficien 0.35 etc. b. Braking action 95 = Good 94 = Medium / Good 93 = Medium 92 = Medium / Poor 91 = Poor 99 = Unreliable // = Braking action not reported; Runway not operational, Aerodrome closed; etc. NOTE 1: Where Braking Action is assessed at a number of points along a runway, the mean value will be transmitted or, if operationally significant, the lowest value. NOTE 2: If measuring equipment does not allow measurement of friction with satisfactory reliability, which may be the case when a runway is contaminated by wet snow, slush, or loose snow, the figures 99 will be used. EXAMPLES NOTE: The occasion may arise when a new report or a valid report is not available in time for dissemination with the appropriate METAR message. In this case, the previous runway state report will be repeated, as indicated by the figures 99 in place of the runway designator. 99421594 — Dry snow covering 11% to 25 % ot the runway: depth 15 mm; braking action medium to good. 14//99// — Runway 14 non-operational due to runway clearance in progress. 14////// — Runway 14 contaminated but reports are not available or are not updated due to aerodrome closure or curfew, etc. 88////// — All runways are contaminated but reports are not available or are not updated due to aerodrome closure or curfew, etc. 14CLRD// — Runway 14 contamination has ceased to exist. (No further reports will be sent unless recontamination occurs). METEOROLOGICAL OPERATIONAL TELECOM405 MUNICATIONS NETWORK - EUROPE (MOTNE) BROADCAST INFORMATION AERODROME PAVEMENT CONDITION REPORTS (THROUGH SNOWTAM/MOTNE) Aerodrome Pavement Condition Reports (through SNOWTAM/MOTNE) AERODROME PAVEMENT CONDITION REPORTS (THROUGH SNOWTAM/MOTNE) During winter period information on runway condition for the listed European airports is published via SNOWTAM or is included at the end of METAR (MOTNE) messages. Following European countries do not specify the airports providing this information: Bosnia-Herzegovina, Greece, Italy, Malta, Norway, Portugal and Russia. Aalborg Aarhus Aberdeen (Dyce) Ajaccio (Campo dell’Oro) Amsterdam (Schiphol) Ankara (Esenboga) Antwerpen (Deurne) Arad Asturias Barcelona Basle-Muhlhouse Bastia (Poretta) Beauvais (Tille) Belfast (Aldergrove) Belfast (Belfast City) Belgrade (Nikola Tesla) Berlin (Schonefeld) Berlin (Tegel) Berlin (Tempelhof) Biarritz (Bayonne-Anglet) Biggin Hill Bilbao Billund Birmingham Blackpool Bordeaux (Merignac) Bornholm (Ronne) Bournemouth Bratislava (M.R.Stefanik) Bremen Brest (Bretagne) Bristol Brussels (National) Bucharest (Baneasa-Aurel Vlaicu) Bucharest (Henri Coanda) Budapest (Ferihegy) Burgas Cambridge Cardiff Carlisle Chalons (Vatry) Charleroi (Brussels-South) Cherbourg (Maupertus) Clermont-Ferrand/Auvergne Cologne-Bonn Connaugh Constanta (Mihail Kogalniceanu-Constanta) Copenhagen (Kastrup) Copenhagen (Roskilde) Cork 406 METEOROLOGICAL OPERATIONAL TELECOMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - EUROPE (MOTNE) BROADCAST INFORMATION AERODROME PAVEMENT CONDITION REPORTS (THROUGH SNOWTAM/MOTNE) Coventry Dijon (Longvic) Dinard (Pleurtuit Saint-Malo) Donegal Dresden Dublin Dusseldorf East Midlands Edinburgh Erfurt Esbjerg Exeter Frankfurt/Main Galway Gdansk (Lecha Walesy) Geneva Girona Glasgow Goma Oryahovitsa Goteborg (Landvetter) Graz Grenoble (Saint-Geoirs) Groningen (Eelde) Guernsey Hamburg Hannover Hawarden Helsinki (Vantaa) Humberside Innsbruck Inverness Isle of Man Istanbul (Ataturk) Jersey Jonkoping Jyvaskyla Kardla Karup Kaunas (Gamykla) Kerry Kirkwall Klagenfurt Kosice Krakow (Balice) Kuopio Kuressaare Leeds Bradford Leipzig-Halle Le Touquet (Paris Plage) Liege (Bierset) Liepaja Lille (Lesquin) Linz Liverpool Ljubljana London (City) London (Gatwick) London (Heathrow) London (Luton) METEOROLOGICAL OPERATIONAL TELECOM407 MUNICATIONS NETWORK - EUROPE (MOTNE) BROADCAST INFORMATION AERODROME PAVEMENT CONDITION REPORTS (THROUGH SNOWTAM/MOTNE) London (Stansted) Lulea (Kallax) Luxembourg Lydd Lyon (Bron) Lyon (Saint Exupery) Maastricht (Maastricht-Aachen) Madrid (Barajas) Malmo (Sturup) Manchester Maribor Marseille-Provence Menorca Metz-Nancy-Lorraine Montpellier/Mediterranee Munich Munster-Osnabruck Nancy (Essey) Nantes-Atlantique Newcastle Nice/Cote d’Azur Norwich Norrkopping (Kungsangen) Nurnberg Odense Ohrid Oostend-Brugge (Oostende) Oulu Palanga Palma de Mallorca Pamplona Paris (Charles-De-Gaulle) Paris (Le Bourget) Paris (Orly) Parnu Pau-Pyrenees Perpignan (Rivesaltes) Piestany Plovdiv Poprad (Tatry) Poznan (Lawica) Prague Prestwick Quimper (Pluguffan) Reims (Champagne) Rennes (Saint Jaques) Riga Rotterdam Rovaniemi Saarbrucken Saint-Etienne (Boutheon) Salzburg San Sebastian Santander Santiago Shannon Siauliai Intl Sibiu Skopje 408 METEOROLOGICAL OPERATIONAL TELECOMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - EUROPE (MOTNE) BROADCAST INFORMATION AERODROME PAVEMENT CONDITION REPORTS (THROUGH SNOWTAM/MOTNE) Sliac Sligo Sofia Sonderborg Southampton Southend Stauning Stockholm (Arlanda) Stockholm (Bromma) Stockholm (Vaesteraas) Stornoway Strasbourg (Entzheim) Stuttgart Sumburgh Sundsvall-Harnosand Tallinn Tampere (Pirkkala) Tarbes (Lourdes-Pyrenees) Targu Mures (Transilvania) Tartu (Ulenurme) Teeside Thisted Timisoara (Traian Vuia) Tirana Toulouse (Blagnac) Toussus-Le-Noble Trenain Turku Umea Varna Vienna (Schwechat) Vigo Vilnius Visby Vitoria (Forondo) Vojens/Skrydstrup Warsaw (Okecie) Waterford Weston Wick Zagreb Zilina Zurich FLIGHT SUPPLEMENT BOOKLET Tables and Codes Tables and Codes - Reference Information TABLES AND CODES - REFERENCE INFORMATION REFERENCE TABLES 411 Reference Tables ALTIMETER SETTING SETTING QNE (Standard) 29.92 in. Hg. — 1013.25 hPa — 1013.25 mb QNH (Sea Level) QFE (Station) AT AIRPORT Variable elevation reading above or below actual elevation Actual elevation reading when aircraft on ground Zero elevation reading when aircraft on ground IN THE AIR Positive separation by pressure level but at varying actual altitudes Altitude indicated (without consideraton of temperature) Height above ground indicated (without consideration of temperature) 1145373526000 412 TABLES AND CODES - REFERENCE INFORMATION REFERENCE TABLES PHONETIC ALPHABET AND MORSE CODE 1 145373526000 METRIC MULTIPLES AND SUB-MULTIPLES Multiplying Factor 1 000 000 000 000 = 1012 1 000 000 000 = 109 1 000 000 = 106 1 000 =103 100=102 10=101 1 Prefix terra giga mega kilo hecto deka Symbol T G M k h da Examples megahertz, etc. kilogram, kilometer, etc. meter, gram, liter, etc. TABLES AND CODES - REFERENCE INFORMATION REFERENCE TABLES Multiplying Factor Prefix deci centi milli micro nano 0.1=10-1 0.01=10-2 0.001=10-3 0.000 001=10-6 0.000 000 001=10-9 0.000 000 000 001=10-12 Symbol d c m µ n p pico 413 Examples milligram, millimeter, etc. WIND COMPONENT TABLES ANGLE BETWEEN WIND DIRECTION AND HEADING (LEFT OR RIGHT) WIND SPEED KNOTS 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 HEADWIND COMPONENT 5 -5 -5 -4 -4 -3 -3 -2 -1 10 -10 -9 -9 -8 -6 -5 -3 -2 15 -15 -14 -13 -11 -10 -8 -5 -3 20 -20 -19 -17 -15 -13 -10 -7 -3 25 -25 -23 -22 -19 -16 -13 -9 -4 30 -29 -28 -26 -23 -19 -15 -10 -5 35 -34 -33 -30 -27 -22 -18 -12 -6 40 -39 -38 -35 -31 -26 -20 -14 -7 45 -44 -42 -39 -34 -29 -23 -15 -8 50 -49 -47 -43 -38 -32 -25 -17 -9 55 -54 -52 -48 -42 -35 -28 -19 -9 60 -59 -56 -52 -46 -39 -30 -21 -10 65 -64 -61 -56 -50 -42 -33 -22 -11 70 -69 -66 -61 -54 -45 -35 -24 -12 ANGLE BETWEEN WIND DIRECTION AND HEADING (LEFT OR RIGHT) WIND SPEED KNOTS 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 CROSSWIND COMPONENT 5 1 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 10 2 3 5 6 8 9 9 10 15 3 5 8 10 11 13 14 15 20 3 7 10 13 15 17 19 20 25 4 9 13 16 19 22 23 25 30 5 10 15 19 23 26 28 29 35 6 12 18 22 27 30 33 34 40 7 14 20 26 31 35 38 39 45 8 15 23 29 34 39 42 44 50 9 17 25 32 38 43 47 49 55 9 19 28 35 42 48 52 54 60 10 21 30 39 46 52 56 59 65 11 22 33 42 50 56 61 64 70 12 24 35 45 54 61 66 69 ANGLE BETWEEN WIND DIRECTION AND HEADING (LEFT OR RIGHT) WIND SPEED KNOTS 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 TAILWIND COMPONENT 5 +1 +2 +3 +3 +4 +4 +5 +5 10 +2 +3 +5 +6 +8 +9 +9 +10 15 +3 +5 +8 +10 +11 +13 +14 +15 20 +3 +7 +10 +13 +15 +17 +19 +20 25 +4 +9 +13 +16 +19 +22 +23 +25 30 +5 +10 +15 +19 +23 +26 +28 +29 35 +6 +12 +18 +22 +27 +30 +33 +34 40 +7 +14 +20 +26 +31 +35 +38 +39 45 +8 +15 +23 +29 +34 +39 +42 +44 414 TABLES AND CODES - REFERENCE INFORMATION REFERENCE TABLES ANGLE BETWEEN WIND DIRECTION AND HEADING (LEFT OR RIGHT) WIND SPEED KNOTS 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 TAILWIND COMPONENT 50 +9 +17 +25 +32 +38 +43 +47 +49 55 +9 +19 +28 +35 +42 +48 +52 +54 60 +10 +21 +30 +39 +46 +52 +56 +59 65 +11 +22 +33 +42 +50 +56 +61 +64 70 +12 +24 +35 +45 +54 +61 +66 +69 PRESSURE ALTITUDE Inches of Mercury .00 .01 .02 .03 .04 .05 .06 .07 .08 .09 21.00 9475 9462 9450 9438 9425 9413 9401 9388 9376 9364 21.10 9352 9339 9327 9315 9303 9290 9278 9266 9254 9241 21.20 9229 9217 9205 9192 9180 9168 9156 9144 9131 9119 21.30 9107 9095 9083 9071 9058 9046 9034 9022 9010 8998 21.40 8986 8973 8961 8949 8937 8925 8913 8901 8889 8877 21.50 8864 8852 8840 8828 8816 8804 8792 8780 8768 8756 21.60 8744 8732 8720 8708 8696 8684 8672 8660 8648 8636 21.70 8624 8612 8600 8588 8576 8564 8552 8540 8528 8516 21.80 8504 8492 8480 8468 8456 8444 8432 8420 8408 8397 21.90 8385 8373 8361 8349 8337 8325 8313 8301 8290 8278 22.00 8266 8254 8242 8230 8218 8207 8195 8183 8171 8159 22.10 8147 8136 8124 8112 8100 8088 8077 8065 8053 8041 22.20 8029 8018 8006 7994 7982 7971 7959 7947 7935 7924 22.30 7912 7900 7888 7877 7865 7853 7841 7830 7918 7806 22.40 7795 7783 7771 7760 7748 7736 7725 7713 7701 7690 22.50 7678 7666 7655 7643 7631 7620 7608 7597 7585 7573 22.60 7562 7550 7538 7527 7515 7504 7492 7481 7469 7457 22.70 7446 7434 7423 7411 7400 7388 7377 7365 7353 7342 22.80 7330 7319 7307 7296 7284 7273 7261 7250 7238 7227 22.90 7215 7204 7192 7181 7169 7158 7146 7135 7124 7112 23.00 7101 7089 7078 7066 7055 7044 7032 7021 7009 6998 23.10 6986 6975 6964 6952 6941 6929 6918 6907 6895 6884 23.20 6873 6861 6850 6839 6827 6816 6804 6793 6782 6770 23.30 6759 6748 6737 6725 6714 6703 6691 6680 6669 6657 23.40 6646 6635 6624 6612 6601 6590 6578 6567 6556 6545 23.50 6533 6522 6511 6500 6488 6477 6466 6455 6444 6432 23.60 6421 6410 6399 6388 6376 6365 6354 6343 6332 6320 23.70 6309 6298 6287 6276 6265 6253 6242 6231 6220 6209 23.80 6198 6187 6176 6164 6153 6142 6131 6120 6109 6098 23.90 6087 6076 6064 6053 6042 6031 6020 6009 5998 5987 24.00 5976 5965 5954 5943 5932 5921 5910 5899 5888 5877 24.10 5866 5855 5844 5832 5821 5810 5799 5788 5777 5767 24.20 5756 5745 5734 5723 5712 5701 5690 5679 5668 5657 24.30 5646 5635 5624 5613 5602 5591 5580 5569 5558 5548 24.40 5537 5526 5515 5504 5493 5482 5471 5460 5449 5439 24.50 5428 5417 5406 5395 5384 5373 5363 5352 5341 5330 24.60 5319 5308 5297 5287 5276 5265 5254 5243 5233 5222 24.70 5211 5200 5189 5179 5168 5157 5146 5135 5125 5114 24.80 5103 5092 5082 5071 5060 5049 5039 5028 5017 5006 24.90 4996 4985 4974 4963 4953 4942 4931 4921 4910 4899 25.00 4888 4878 4867 4856 4846 4835 4824 4814 4803 4792 25.10 4782 4771 4760 4750 4739 4728 4718 4707 4696 4686 25.20 4675 4665 4654 4643 4633 4622 4612 4601 4590 4580 25.30 4569 4559 4548 4537 4527 4516 4506 4495 4484 4474 25.40 4463 4453 4442 4432 4421 4411 4400 4390 4379 4368 25.50 4358 4347 4337 4326 4316 4305 4295 4284 4274 4263 TABLES AND CODES - REFERENCE INFORMATION REFERENCE TABLES 415 Inches of Mercury .00 .01 .02 .03 .04 .05 .06 .07 .08 .09 25.60 4253 4242 4232 4221 4211 4200 4190 4179 4169 4159 25.70 4148 4138 4127 4117 4106 4096 4085 4075 4064 4054 25.80 4044 4033 4023 4012 4002 3992 3981 3971 3960 3950 25.90 3939 3929 3919 3908 3898 3888 3877 3867 3856 3846 26.00 3836 3825 3815 3805 3794 3784 3774 3763 3753 3743 26.10 3732 3722 3712 3701 3691 3681 3670 3660 3650 3639 26.20 3629 3619 3609 3598 3588 3578 3567 3557 3547 3537 26.30 3526 3516 3506 3495 3485 3475 3465 3454 3444 3434 26.40 3424 3414 3403 3393 3383 3373 3362 3352 3342 3332 26.50 3322 3311 3301 3291 3281 3271 3260 3250 3240 3230 26.60 3220 3210 3199 3189 3179 3169 3159 3149 3138 3128 26.70 3118 3108 3098 3088 3078 3067 3057 3047 3037 3027 26.80 3017 3007 2997 2987 2976 2966 2956 2946 2936 2926 26.90 2916 2906 2896 2886 2876 2866 2855 2845 2835 2825 27.00 2815 2805 2795 2785 2775 2765 2755 2745 2735 2725 27.10 2715 2705 2695 2685 2675 2665 2655 2645 2635 2625 27.20 2615 2605 2595 2585 2575 2565 2555 2545 2535 2525 27.30 2515 2505 2495 2485 2475 2465 2455 2445 2435 2426 27.40 2416 2406 2396 2386 2376 2366 2356 2346 2336 2326 27.50 2316 2307 2297 2287 2277 2267 2257 2247 2237 2227 27.60 2218 2208 2198 2188 2178 2168 2158 2149 2139 2129 27.70 2119 2109 2099 2089 2080 2070 2060 2050 2040 2030 27.80 2021 2011 2001 1991 1981 1972 1962 1952 1942 1932 27.90 1923 1913 1903 1893 1884 1874 1864 1854 1844 1835 28.00 1825 1815 1805 1796 1786 1776 1766 1757 1747 1737 28.10 1727 1718 1708 1698 1689 1679 1669 1659 1650 1640 28.20 1630 1621 1611 1601 1592 1582 1572 1562 1553 1543 28.30 1533 1524 1514 1504 1495 1485 1475 1466 1456 1446 28.40 1437 1427 1417 1408 1398 1389 1379 1369 1360 1350 28.50 1340 1331 1321 1312 1302 1292 1283 1273 1264 1254 28.60 1244 1235 1225 1216 1206 1196 1187 1177 1168 1158 28.70 1149 1139 1129 1120 1110 1101 1091 1082 1072 1063 28.80 1053 1044 1034 1024 1015 1005 996 986 977 967 28.90 958 948 939 929 920 910 901 891 882 872 29.00 863 853 844 834 825 815 806 796 787 778 29.10 768 759 749 740 730 721 711 702 693 683 29.20 674 664 655 645 636 627 617 608 598 589 29.30 579 570 561 551 542 532 523 514 504 495 29.40 486 476 467 457 448 439 429 420 411 401 29.50 392 382 373 364 354 345 336 326 317 308 29.60 298 289 280 270 261 252 242 233 224 215 29.70 205 196 187 177 168 159 149 140 131 122 29.80 112 103 94 84 75 66 57 47 38 29 29.90 20 10 1 -8 -17 -27 -36 -45 -54 -64 30.00 -73 -82 -91 -100 -110 -119 -128 -137 -147 -156 30.10 -165 -174 -183 -193 -202 -211 -220 -229 -238 -248 30.20 -257 -266 -275 -284 -294 -303 -312 -321 -330 -339 30.30 -348 -358 -367 -376 -385 -394 -403 -413 -422 -431 30.40 -440 -449 -458 -467 -476 -486 -495 -504 -513 -522 30.50 -531 -540 -549 -558 -568 -577 -586 -595 -604 -613 30.60 -622 -631 -640 -649 -658 -667 -676 -686 -695 -704 30.70 -713 -722 -731 -740 -749 -758 -767 -776 -785 -794 30.80 -803 -812 -821 -830 -839 -848 -857 -866 -875 -884 30.90 -893 -902 -911 -920 -929 -938 -947 -956 -965 -974 31.00 -983 -992 -1001 -1010 -1019 -1028 -1037 -1046 -1055 -1064 416 TABLES AND CODES - REFERENCE INFORMATION REFERENCE TABLES INCHES TO HECTOPASCALS (OR MILLIBARS) 1 inch of mercury = 33.863 hectopascals = 33.863 millibars .01 .02 .03 .04 .05 .06 .07 HECTOPASCALS (or MILLIBARS) Inches of Mercury .00 .08 .09 21.0 711.1 711.5 711.8 712.2 712.5 712.8 713.2 21.1 714.5 714.9 715.2 715.5 715.9 716.2 716.6 713.5 713.9 714.2 716.9 717.2 21.2 717.9 718.3 718.6 718.9 719.3 719.6 717.6 719.9 720.3 720.6 21.3 721.3 721.6 722.0 722.3 722.7 721.0 723.0 723.3 723.7 724.0 21.4 724.7 725.0 725.4 725.7 724.3 726.0 726.4 726.7 727.1 727.4 21.5 728.1 728.4 728.8 727.7 729.1 729.4 729.8 730.1 730.4 730.8 21.6 731.5 731.8 731.1 732.1 732.5 732.8 733.2 733.5 733.8 734.2 21.7 734.8 734.5 735.2 735.5 735.9 736.2 736.5 736.9 737.2 737.6 21.8 737.9 738.2 738.6 738.9 739.2 739.6 739.9 740.3 740.6 740.9 741.3 21.9 741.6 742.0 742.3 742.6 743.0 743.3 743.7 744.0 744.3 744.7 22.0 745.0 745.3 745.7 746.0 746.4 746.7 747.0 747.4 747.7 748.1 22.1 748.4 748.7 749.1 749.4 749.7 750.1 750.4 750.8 751.1 751.4 22.2 751.8 752.1 752.5 752.8 753.1 753.5 753.8 754.2 754.5 754.8 22.3 755.2 755.5 755.8 756.2 756.5 756.9 757.2 757.5 757.9 758.2 22.4 758.6 758.9 759.2 759.6 759.9 760.2 760.6 760.9 761.3 761.6 22.5 761.9 762.3 762.6 763.0 763.3 763.6 764.0 764.3 764.6 765.0 22.6 765.3 765.7 766.0 766.3 766.7 767.0 767.4 767.7 768.0 768.4 22.7 768.7 769.1 769.4 769.7 770.1 770.4 770.7 771.1 771.4 771.8 22.8 772.1 772.4 772.8 773.1 773.5 773.8 774.1 774.5 774.8 775.1 22.9 775.5 775.8 776.2 776.5 776.8 777.2 777.5 777.9 778.2 778.5 23.0 778.9 779.2 779.5 779.9 780.2 780.6 780.9 781.2 781.6 781.9 23.1 782.3 782.6 782.9 783.3 783.6 784.0 784.3 784.6 785.0 785.3 23.2 785.6 786.0 786.3 786.7 787.0 787.3 787.7 788.0 788.4 788.7 23.3 789.0 789.4 789.7 790.0 790.4 790.7 791.1 791.4 791.7 792.1 23.4 792.4 792.8 793.1 793.4 793.8 794.1 794.4 794.8 795.1 795.5 23.5 795.8 796.1 796.5 796.8 797.2 797.5 797.8 798.2 798.5 798.9 23.6 799.2 799.5 799.9 800.2 800.5 800.9 801.2 801.6 801.9 802.2 23.7 802.6 802.9 803.3 803.6 803.9 804.3 804.6 804.9 805.3 805.6 23.8 806.0 806.3 806.6 807.0 807.3 807.7 808.0 808.3 808.7 809.0 23.9 809.3 809.7 810.0 810.4 810.7 811.0 811.4 811.7 812.1 812.4 24.0 812.7 813.1 813.4 813.8 814.1 814.4 814.8 815.1 815.4 815.8 24.1 816.1 816.5 816.8 817.1 817.5 817.8 818.2 818.5 818.8 819.2 24.2 819.5 819.8 820.2 820.5 820.9 821.2 821.5 821.9 822.2 822.6 24.3 822.9 823.2 823.6 823.9 824.2 824.6 824.9 825.3 825.6 825.9 24.4 826.3 826.6 827.0 827.3 827.6 828.0 828.3 828.7 829.0 829.3 24.5 829.7 830.0 830.3 830.7 831.0 831.4 831.7 832.0 832.4 832.7 24.6 833.1 833.4 833.7 834.1 834.4 834.7 835.1 835.4 835.8 836.1 24.7 836.4 836.8 837.1 837.5 837.8 838.1 838.5 838.8 839.1 839.5 24.8 839.8 840.2 840.5 840.8 841.2 841.5 841.9 842.2 842.5 842.9 24.9 843.2 843.6 843.9 844.2 844.6 844.9 845.2 845.6 845.9 846.3 25.0 846.6 846.9 847.3 847.6 848.0 848.3 848.6 849.0 849.3 849.6 25.1 850.0 850.3 850.7 851.0 851.3 851.7 852.0 852.4 852.7 853.0 25.2 853.4 853.7 854.0 854.4 854.7 855.1 855.4 855.7 856.1 856.4 25.3 856.8 857.1 857.4 857.8 858.1 858.5 858.8 859.1 859.5 859.8 25.4 860.1 860.5 860.8 861.2 861.5 861.8 862.2 862.5 862.9 863.2 25.5 863.5 863.9 864.2 864.5 864.9 865.2 865.6 865.9 866.2 866.6 25.6 866.9 867.3 867.6 867.9 868.3 868.6 868.9 869.3 869.6 870.0 25.7 870.3 870.6 871.0 871.3 871.7 872.0 872.3 872.7 873.0 873.4 25.8 873.7 874.0 874.4 874.7 875.0 875.4 875.7 876.1 876.4 876.7 25.9 877.1 877.4 877.8 878.1 878.4 878.8 879.1 879.4 879.8 880.1 26.0 880.5 880.8 881.1 881.5 881.8 882.2 882.5 882.8 883.2 883.5 26.1 883.8 884.2 884.5 884.9 885.2 885.5 885.9 886.2 886.6 886.9 26.2 887.2 887.6 887.9 888.3 888.6 888.9 889.3 889.6 889.9 890.3 TABLES AND CODES - REFERENCE INFORMATION REFERENCE TABLES 1 inch of mercury = 33.863 hectopascals = 33.863 millibars .01 .02 .03 .04 .05 .06 .07 HECTOPASCALS (or MILLIBARS) Inches of Mercury .00 26.3 890.6 891.0 891.3 891.6 892.0 892.3 892.7 26.4 894.0 894.3 894.7 895.0 895.4 895.7 896.0 26.5 897.4 897.7 898.1 898.4 898.7 899.1 26.6 900.8 901.1 901.5 901.8 902.1 26.7 904.2 904.5 904.8 905.2 26.8 907.6 907.9 908.2 26.9 910.9 911.3 27.0 914.3 27.1 417 .08 .09 893.0 893.3 893.7 896.4 896.7 897.1 899.4 899.8 900.1 900.4 902.5 902.8 903.2 903.5 903.8 905.5 905.9 906.2 906.5 906.9 907.2 908.6 908.9 909.2 909.6 909.9 910.3 910.6 911.6 912.0 912.3 912.6 913.0 913.3 913.6 914.0 914.7 915.0 915.3 915.7 916.0 916.4 916.7 917.0 917.4 917.7 918.1 918.4 918.7 919.1 919.4 919.7 920.1 920.4 920.8 27.2 921.1 921.4 921.8 922.1 922.5 922.8 923.1 923.5 923.8 924.1 27.3 924.5 924.8 925.2 925.5 925.8 926.2 926.5 926.9 927.2 927.5 27.4 927.9 928.2 928.5 928.9 929.2 929.6 929.9 930.2 930.6 930.9 27.5 931.3 931.6 931.9 932.3 932.6 933.0 933.3 933.6 934.0 934.3 27.6 934.6 935.0 935.3 935.7 936.0 936.3 936.7 937.0 937.4 937.7 27.7 938.0 938.4 938.7 939.0 939.4 939.7 940.1 940.4 940.7 941.1 27.8 941.4 941.8 942.1 942.4 842.8 943.1 943.4 943.8 944.1 944.5 27.9 944.8 945.1 945.5 945.8 946.2 946.5 946.8 947.2 947.5 947.9 28.0 948.2 948.5 948.9 949.2 949.5 949.9 950.2 950.6 950.9 951.2 28.1 951.6 951.9 952.3 952.6 952.9 953.3 953.6 953.9 954.3 954.6 28.2 955.0 955.3 955.6 956.0 956.3 956.7 957.0 957.3 957.7 958.0 28.3 958.3 958.7 959.0 959.4 959.7 960.0 960.4 960.7 961.1 961.4 28.4 961.7 962.1 962.4 962.8 963.1 963.4 963.8 964.1 964.4 964.8 28.5 965.1 965.5 965.8 966.1 966.5 966.8 967.2 967.5 967.8 968.2 28.6 968.5 968.8 969.2 969.5 969.9 970.2 970.5 970.9 971.2 971.6 28.7 971.9 972.2 972.6 972.9 973.2 973.6 973.9 974.3 974.6 974.9 28.8 975.3 975.6 976.0 976.3 976.6 977.0 977.3 977.7 978.0 978.3 28.9 978.7 979.0 979.3 979.7 980.0 980.4 980.7 981.0 981.4 981.7 29.0 982.1 982.4 982.7 983.1 983.4 983.7 984.1 984.4 984.8 985.1 29.1 985.4 985.8 986.1 986.5 986.8 987.1 987.5 987.8 988.2 988.5 29.2 988.8 989.2 989.5 989.8 990.2 990.5 990.9 991.2 991.5 991.9 29.3 992.2 992.6 992.9 993.2 993.6 993.9 994.2 994.6 994.9 995.3 29.4 995.6 995.9 996.3 996.6 997.0 997.3 997.6 998.0 998.3 998.6 29.5 999.0 999.3 999.7 1000.0 1000.4 1000.7 1001.0 1001.4 1001.7 1002.0 29.6 1002.4 1002.7 1003.1 1003.4 1003.7 1004.1 1004.4 1004.7 1005.1 1005.4 29.7 1005.8 1006.1 1006.4 1006.8 1007.1 1007.5 1007.8 1008.1 1008.5 1008.8 29.8 1009.1 1009.5 1009.8 1010.2 1010.5 1010.8 1011.2 1011.5 1011.9 1012.2 29.9 1012.5 1012.9 1013.2 1013.5 1013.9 1014.2 1014.6 1014.9 1015.2 1015.6 30.0 1015.9 1016.3 1016.6 1016.9 1017.3 1017.6 1018.0 1018.3 1018.6 1019.0 30.1 1019.3 1019.6 1020.0 1020.3 1020.7 1021.0 1021.3 1021.7 1022.0 1022.4 30.2 1022.7 1023.0 1023.4 1023.7 1024.0 1024.4 1024.7 1025.1 1025.4 1025.7 30.3 1026.1 1026.4 1026.8 1027.1 1027.4 1027.8 1028.1 1028.4 1028.8 1029.1 30.4 1029.5 1029.8 1030.1 1030.5 1030.8 1031.2 1031.5 1031.8 1032.2 1032.5 30.5 1032.9 1033.2 1033.5 1033.9 1034.2 1034.5 1034.9 1035.2 1035.6 1035.9 30.6 1036.2 1036.6 1036.9 1037.3 1037.6 1037.9 1038.3 1038.6 1038.9 1039.3 30.7 1039.6 1040.0 1040.3 1040.6 1041.0 1041.3 1041.7 1042.0 1042.3 1042.7 30.8 1043.0 1043.3 1043.7 1044.0 1044.4 1044.7 1045.0 1045.4 1045.7 1046.1 30.9 1046.4 1046.7 1047.1 1047.4 1047.8 1048.1 1048.4 1048.8 1049.1 1049.4 8 9 HECTOPASCALS (OR MILLIBARS) TO INCHES (1 hectopascal = 1 millibar = 0.02953 inches of mercury) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 INCHES OF MERCURY hPa or mb 0 710 20.97 21.00 21.03 21.05 21.08 21.11 21.14 21.17 21.20 21.23 720 21.26 21.29 21.32 21.35 21.38 21.41 21.44 21.47 21.50 21.53 730 21.56 21.59 21.62 21.65 21.67 21.70 21.73 21.76 21.79 21.82 418 TABLES AND CODES - REFERENCE INFORMATION REFERENCE TABLES (1 hectopascal = 1 millibar = 0.02953 inches of mercury) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 INCHES OF MERCURY hPa or mb 0 8 9 740 21.85 21.88 21.91 21.94 21.97 22.00 22.03 750 22.15 22.18 22.21 22.24 22.27 22.30 22.32 22.06 22.09 22.12 22.35 22.38 760 22.44 22.47 22.50 22.53 22.56 22.59 22.41 22.62 22.65 22.68 770 22.74 22.77 22.80 22.83 22.86 22.71 22.89 22.92 22.94 22.97 780 23.03 23.06 23.09 23.12 23.00 23.15 23.18 23.21 23.24 23.27 790 23.33 23.36 23.39 23.30 23.42 23.45 23.48 23.51 23.54 23.56 800 23.62 23.65 23.59 23.68 23.71 23.74 23.77 23.80 23.83 23.86 810 23.92 23.89 23.95 23.98 24.01 24.04 24.07 24.10 24.13 24.16 820 24.19 24.21 24.24 24.27 24.30 24.33 24.36 24.39 24.42 24.45 24.48 830 24.51 24.54 24.57 24.60 24.63 24.66 24.69 24.72 24.75 24.78 840 24.81 24.83 24.86 24.89 24.92 24.95 24.98 25.01 25.04 25.07 850 25.10 25.13 25.16 25.19 25.22 25.25 25.28 25.31 25.34 25.37 860 25.40 25.43 25.45 25.48 25.51 25.54 25.57 25.60 25.63 25.66 870 25.69 25.72 25.75 25.78 25.81 25.84 25.87 25.90 25.93 25.96 880 25.99 26.02 26.05 26.07 26.10 26.13 26.16 26.19 26.22 26.25 890 26.28 26.31 26.34 26.37 26.40 26.43 26.46 26.49 26.52 26.55 900 26.58 26.61 26.64 26.67 26.70 26.72 26.75 26.78 26.81 26.84 910 26.87 26.90 26.93 26.96 26.99 27.02 27.05 27.08 27.11 27.14 920 27.17 27.20 27.23 27.26 27.29 27.32 27.34 27.37 27.40 27.43 930 27.46 27.49 27.52 27.55 27.58 27.61 27.64 27.67 27.70 27.73 940 27.76 27.79 27.82 27.85 27.88 27.91 27.94 27.96 27.99 28.02 950 28.05 28.08 28.11 28.14 28.17 28.20 28.23 28.26 28.29 28.32 960 28.35 28.38 28.41 28.44 28.47 28.50 28.53 28.56 28.58 28.61 970 28.64 28.67 28.70 28.73 28.76 28.79 28.82 28.85 28.88 28.91 980 28.94 28.97 29.00 29.03 29.06 29.09 29.12 29.15 29.18 29.21 990 29.23 29.26 29.29 29.32 29.35 29.38 29.41 29.44 29.47 29.50 1000 29.53 29.56 29.59 29.62 29.65 29.68 29.71 29.74 29.77 29.80 1010 29.83 29.85 29.88 29.91 29.94 29.97 30.00 30.03 30.06 30.09 1020 30.12 30.15 30.18 30.21 30.24 30.27 30.30 30.33 30.36 30.39 1030 30.42 30.45 30.47 30.50 30.53 30.56 30.59 30.62 30.65 30.68 1040 30.71 30.74 30.77 30.80 30.83 30.86 30.89 30.92 30.95 30.98 1050 31.01 31.04 31.07 31.10 31.12 31.15 31.18 31.21 31.24 31.27 8 9 MILLIMETERS TO HECTOPASCALS (OR MILLIBARS) (1 millimeter of mercury = 1.3332 hectopascals = 1.3332 millibars) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 HECTOPASCALS (or MILLIBARS) MM of Mercury 0 530 706.6 707.9 709.3 710.6 711.9 713.3 714.6 715.9 717.3 718.6 540 719.9 721.3 722.6 723.9 725.3 726.6 727.9 729.3 730.6 731.9 550 733.3 734.6 735.9 737.3 738.6 739.9 741.3 742.6 743.9 745.3 560 746.6 747.9 749.3 750.6 751.9 753.3 754.6 755.9 757.3 758.6 570 759.9 761.3 762.6 763.9 765.3 766.6 767.9 769.3 770.6 771.9 580 773.3 774.6 775.9 777.3 778.6 779.9 781.3 782.6 783.9 785.3 590 786.6 787.9 789.3 790.6 791.9 793.3 794.6 795.9 797.3 798.6 600 799.9 801.3 802.6 803.9 805.3 806.6 807.9 809.3 810.6 811.9 610 813.3 814.6 815.9 817.3 818.6 819.9 821.3 822.6 823.9 825.3 620 826.6 827.9 829.3 830.6 831.9 833.3 834.6 835.9 837.3 838.6 630 839.9 841.3 842.6 843.9 845.2 846.6 847.9 849.3 850.6 851.9 640 853.3 854.6 855.9 857.3 858.6 859.9 861.3 862.6 863.9 865.3 650 866.6 867.9 869.3 870.6 871.9 873.3 874.6 875.9 877.3 878.6 660 879.9 881.3 882.6 883.9 885.3 886.6 887.9 889.3 890.6 891.9 670 893.3 894.6 895.9 897.3 898.6 899.9 901.3 902.6 903.9 905.3 680 906.6 907.9 909.3 910.6 911.9 913.3 914.6 915.9 917.3 918.6 690 919.9 921.3 922.6 923.9 925.3 926.6 927.9 929.3 930.6 931.9 700 933.3 934.6 935.9 937.3 938.6 939.9 941.3 942.6 943.9 945.3 TABLES AND CODES - REFERENCE INFORMATION REFERENCE TABLES (1 millimeter of mercury = 1.3332 hectopascals = 1.3332 millibars) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 HECTOPASCALS (or MILLIBARS) MM of Mercury 0 710 946.6 947.9 949.3 950.6 951.9 953.3 954.6 720 959.9 961.3 962.6 963.9 965.3 966.6 967.9 730 973.3 974.6 975.9 977.3 978.6 979.9 740 986.6 987.9 989.3 990.6 991.9 750 999.9 1001.3 1002.6 1003.9 760 1013.3 1014.6 1015.9 770 1026.6 1027.9 1029.2 780 1039.9 1041.2 790 1053.2 800 1066.6 419 8 9 955.9 957.3 958.6 969.3 970.6 971.9 981.3 982.6 983.9 985.3 993.3 994.6 995.9 997.3 998.6 1005.3 1006.6 1007.9 1009.3 1010.6 1011.9 1017.2 1018.6 1019.9 1021.2 1022.6 1023.9 1025.2 1030.6 1031.9 1033.2 1034.6 1035.9 1037.2 1038.6 1042.6 1043.9 1045.2 1046.6 1047.9 1049.2 1050.6 1051.9 1054.6 1055.9 1057.2 1058.6 1059.9 1061.2 1062.6 1063.9 1065.2 1067.9 1069.2 1070.6 1071.9 1073.2 1074.6 1075.9 1077.2 1078.6 CONVERSIONS METERS PER SECOND TO FEET PER MINUTE MPS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 FPM 197 394 591 787 984 1181 1378 1575 1772 1969 2165 2362 2559 2756 2953 3150 3346 3543 3740 3937 (mps = 196.85 fpm) MPS 1.5 2.5 3.5 4.5 5.5 6.5 7.5 8.5 9.5 10.5 11.5 12.5 13.5 14.5 15.5 16.5 17.5 18.5 19.5 FPM 295 492 689 885 1082 1279 1476 1673 1870 2067 2263 2460 2657 2854 3051 3248 3444 3641 3838 METERS PER SECOND TO KNOTS Meters p/sec. 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 (1 mps = 1.9438 knots) Knots Meters p/sec. 1 3.9 3 7.8 5 7 11.7 15.6 9 19.4 11 23.3 13 27.2 15 31.1 17 35.0 19 38.9 21 42.8 23 Knots 1.9 5.8 9.7 13.6 17.5 21.4 25.3 29.2 33.0 36.9 40.8 44.7 420 TABLES AND CODES - REFERENCE INFORMATION REFERENCE TABLES Meters p/sec. 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 50 52 54 56 58 60 62 64 66 68 70 72 74 76 78 (1 mps = 1.9438 knots) Knots Meters p/sec. 46.6 25 50.5 27 54.4 29 58.3 31 62.2 33 66.1 35 70 37 73.9 39 77.8 41 81.6 43 85.5 45 89.4 47 93.3 49 97.2 51 101.1 53 105.0 55 57 108.8 112.7 59 116.6 61 120.5 63 124.4 65 128.3 67 132.2 69 136.1 71 140.0 73 143.8 75 77 147.7 151.6 79 Knots 48.6 52.5 56.4 60.3 64.1 68.0 71.9 75.8 79.7 83.6 87.5 91.4 95.2 99.1 103.0 106.9 110.8 114.7 118.6 122.5 126.3 130.2 134.1 138.0 141.9 145.8 149.7 153.6 TEMPERATURES °C -40 -38 -36 -34 -32 -30 -28 -26 -24 -22 -20 -18 -16 -14 -12 -10 -8 -6 -4 -2 °F -40.0 -36.4 -32.8 -29.2 -25.6 -22.0 -18.4 -14.8 -11.2 - 7.6 - 4.0 - 0.4 3.2 6.8 10.4 14.0 17.6 21.2 24.8 28.4 (CELSIUS/FAHRENHEIT) °C -39 -37 -35 -33 -31 -29 -27 -25 -23 -21 -19 -17 -15 -13 -11 - 9 -7 -5 -3 -1 °F -38.2 -34.6 -31.0 -27.4 -23.8 -20.2 -16.6 -13.0 - 9.4 - 5.8 - 2.2 1.4 5.0 8.6 12.2 15.8 19.4 23.0 26.6 30.2 TABLES AND CODES - REFERENCE INFORMATION REFERENCE TABLES °C 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 50 52 54 °F 32.0 35.6 39.2 42.8 46.4 50.0 53.6 57.2 60.8 64.4 68.0 71.6 75.2 78.8 82.4 86.0 89.6 93.2 96.8 100.4 104.0 107.6 111.2 114.8 118.4 122.0 125.6 129.2 (CELSIUS/FAHRENHEIT) °C 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 41 43 45 47 49 51 53 55 421 °F 33.8 37.4 41.0 44.6 48.2 51.8 55.4 59.0 62.6 66.2 69.8 73.4 77.0 80.6 84.2 87.8 91.4 95.0 98.6 102.2 105.8 109.4 113.0 116.6 120.2 123.8 127.4 131.0 WEIGHT Lbs 1145373526000 2.2046 4 7 9 11 13 15 18 20 22 44 66 88 110 132 154 176 198 220 441 661 Kgs Lbs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 200 300 Kgs 1145373526000 .45359 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 4 9 14 18 23 27 32 36 41 45 91 136 422 TABLES AND CODES - REFERENCE INFORMATION REFERENCE TABLES Lbs 1145373526000 882 1102 1323 1543 1764 1984 2205 Kgs Lbs 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 Kgs 1145373526000 181 227 272 318 363 408 454 DISTANCES KILOMETERS to SM 0.62137 1.24 1.86 2.49 3.11 3.73 4.35 4.97 5.59 6.21 12.43 18.64 24.85 31.07 37.28 43.50 49.71 55.92 62.14 124.27 186.41 248.55 310.69 372.82 434.96 497.10 559.23 621.37 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 to NM 0.53996 1.08 1.62 2.16 2.70 3.24 3.78 4.32 4.86 5.40 10.80 16.20 21.60 27.00 32.40 37.80 43.20 48.60 54.00 107.99 161.99 215.98 269.98 323.97 377.97 431.97 485.96 539.96 STATUTE MILES to KM 1.6093 3.22 4.83 6.44 8.05 9.66 11.27 12.87 14.48 16.09 32.19 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 to NM 0.86898 1.74 2.61 3.48 4.34 5.21 6.08 6.95 7.82 8.69 17.38 TABLES AND CODES - REFERENCE INFORMATION REFERENCE TABLES 423 STATUTE MILES to KM 48.28 64.37 80.47 96.56 112.65 128.75 144.84 160.93 321.87 482.30 643.74 804.67 965.61 1126.54 1287.48 1448.41 1609.34 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 to NM 26.07 34.76 43.45 52.14 60.83 69.52 78.20 86.90 173.80 260.69 347.59 434.49 521.39 608.28 695.18 782.01 868.98 NAUTICAL MILES to KM 1.8520 3.70 5.56 7.41 9.26 11.11 12.96 14.82 16.67 18.52 37.04 55.56 74.08 92.60 111.12 129.64 148.16 166.68 185.20 370.40 555.60 740.80 926.00 1111.20 1296.40 1481.60 1666.80 1852.00 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 to SM 1.1508 2.30 3.45 4.60 5.75 6.90 8.06 9.21 10.36 11.51 23.02 34.52 46.03 57.54 69.05 80.56 92.06 103.57 115.08 230.16 345.23 460.31 575.39 690.47 805.55 920.62 1035.70 1150.78 424 TABLES AND CODES - REFERENCE INFORMATION REFERENCE TABLES METERS to FEET Meters 1145373526000 Ft .3048 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 3 3 6 9 12 15 18 21 24 27 30 61 91 122 152 183 213 244 274 305 Meters Ft 1145373526000 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 3.2808 7 10 13 16 20 23 26 30 33 66 98 131 164 197 230 262 295 328 656 984 1312 1640 1968 2296 2625 2953 3281 METERS to YARDS Meters 1145373526000 .9144 2 3 4 5 5 6 7 8 9 18 27 36 46 55 64 73 82 91 183 274 Yds Meters 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 200 300 Yds 1145373526000 1.0936 2 3 4 5 7 8 9 10 11 22 33 44 55 66 77 88 99 110 219 329 TABLES AND CODES - REFERENCE INFORMATION REFERENCE TABLES 425 METERS to YARDS Meters 1145373526000 Yds 366 457 549 640 732 823 914 Meters Yds 1145373526000 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 438 548 658 767 877 987 1096 INCHES to MILLIMETERS (mm) Inches 1145373526000 mm .03937 .07874 .11811 .15748 .19685 .23622 .27559 .31496 .35433 .3937 .7874 1.1811 1.5748 1.9685 2.3622 2.7559 3.1496 3.5433 3.9370 7.8140 11.8110 15.7480 19.6850 23.6220 27.5590 31.4960 35.4330 39.3701 Inches mm 1145373526000 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 25.4 50.8 76.2 101.6 127.0 152.4 177.8 203.2 228.6 254.0 508.0 762.0 1016.0 1270.0 1524.0 1778.0 2032.0 2286.0 2540.0 5080.0 7620.0 10160.0 12700.0 15240.0 17780.0 20320.0 22860.0 25400.0 VOLUME Imp Gal 1145373526000 .83267 2 2 3 4 5 6 7 7 8 17 U.S. Gal Imp Gal 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 U.S. Gal 1145373526000 1.2010 2 4 5 6 7 8 10 11 12 24 426 TABLES AND CODES - REFERENCE INFORMATION REFERENCE TABLES Imp Gal U.S. Gal 1145373526000 25 33 42 50 58 67 75 83 167 250 333 416 500 583 666 750 833 U.S. Gal 1145373526000 Liter .26418 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 3 5 8 11 13 16 18 21 24 26 53 79 106 132 158 185 211 238 264 Imp Gal 36 48 60 72 84 96 108 120 240 360 480 600 721 841 961 1081 1201 U.S. Gal Liter Liter 1145373526000 3.7853 8 11 15 19 23 26 30 34 38 76 114 151 189 227 265 303 341 378 757 1136 1514 1893 2271 2650 3028 3407 3785 Imp Gal 1 2 3 4 5 U.S. Gal 1145373526000 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1145373526000 .21997 .4 .7 .9 1 Imp Gal 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 Liter 1145373526000 4.5460 9 14 18 23 TABLES AND CODES - REFERENCE INFORMATION REFERENCE TABLES Imp Gal 1145373526000 Liter 1 2 2 2 2 4 7 9 11 13 15 18 20 22 44 66 88 110 132 154 176 198 220 Imp Gal 427 Liter 1145373526000 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 27 32 36 41 45 91 136 182 227 273 318 364 409 455 909 1364 1818 2273 2728 3182 3637 4091 4546 OIL VOLUME/WEIGHT (approximate according to Temp) U.S. Gal 1145373526000 .13333 .3 .4 .5 .7 .8 .9 1.1 1.2 1.3 3 4 5 7 8 9 11 12 13 27 40 53 67 80 93 Lbs U.S. Gal 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 Lbs 1145373526000 7.5000 15 22 30 38 45 52 60 68 75 150 225 300 375 450 525 600 675 750 1500 2250 3000 3750 4500 5250 428 TABLES AND CODES - REFERENCE INFORMATION REFERENCE TABLES OIL VOLUME/WEIGHT (approximate according to Temp) U.S. Gal 1145373526000 Lbs 107 120 133 U.S. Gal Lbs 1145373526000 800 900 1000 6000 6750 7500 OIL VOLUME/WEIGHT (approximate according to Temp) Liter 1145373526000 Lbs .50471 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 101 151 202 252 303 353 404 454 505 Liter Lbs 1145373526000 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1.9813 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 40 59 79 99 119 139 158 178 198 396 594 792 991 1189 1387 1585 1783 1981 OIL VOLUME/WEIGHT (approximate according to Temp) Liter 1145373526000 1.1127 2 3 4 6 7 8 9 10 11 22 33 44 Kg Liter 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 Kg 1145373526000 .89871 2 3 4 5 5 6 7 8 9 18 27 36 TABLES AND CODES - REFERENCE INFORMATION REFERENCE TABLES 429 OIL VOLUME/WEIGHT (approximate according to Temp) Liter Kg 1145373526000 56 67 78 89 100 111 222 334 445 556 668 779 890 1001 1113 Liter Kg 1145373526000 50 60 70 80 90 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 45 54 63 72 81 90 180 270 360 449 539 629 719 809 899 TURBINE FUEL VOLUME/WEIGHT (up to 5 pounds variation per 100 gallons due to fuel grade and temperature) Liter 1145373526000 0.57 1.1 1.7 2.3 2.8 3.4 4 4.5 5.1 5.7 11 17 23 28 34 40 45 51 57 110 170 230 280 340 400 450 510 570 Lbs Liter 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 Lbs 1145373526000 1.8 3.6 5.4 7.2 9.0 11 13 14 16 18 36 54 72 90 110 130 140 160 180 360 540 720 900 1100 1300 1400 1600 1800 430 TABLES AND CODES - REFERENCE INFORMATION REFERENCE TABLES TURBINE FUEL VOLUME/WEIGHT (up to 5 pounds variation per 100 gallons due to fuel grade and temperature) U.S. Gal Lbs 1145373526000 U.S. Gal 0.15 .3 .45 .6 .75 .9 1.05 1.2 1.35 1.5 3 4.5 6 7.5 9 10.5 12 13.5 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120 135 150 Lbs 1145373526000 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 6.7 13 20 27 33 40 47 53 60 67 130 200 270 330 400 470 530 600 670 1300 2000 2700 3300 4000 4700 5300 6000 6700 TURBINE FUEL VOLUME/WEIGHT (up to 5 pounds variation per 100 gallons due to fuel grade and temperature) Liter 1145373526000 1.25 2.5 3.8 5.0 6.2 7.5 8.8 10 11 12 25 38 50 62 75 88 100 110 120 250 Kg Liter 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 200 Kg 1145373526000 .8 1.6 2.4 3.2 4.0 4.8 5.6 6.4 7.2 8 16 24 32 40 48 56 64 72 80 160 TABLES AND CODES - REFERENCE INFORMATION REFERENCE TABLES 431 TURBINE FUEL VOLUME/WEIGHT (up to 5 pounds variation per 100 gallons due to fuel grade and temperature) Liter Kg 1145373526000 380 500 620 750 880 1000 1100 1200 Liter Kg 1145373526000 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 240 320 400 480 560 640 720 800 AVIATION GAS VOLUME/WEIGHT (approximate according to temperature) Gal Lbs 1145373526000 .167 .3 .5 .7 .8 1.0 1.2 1.3 1.5 1.7 3 5 7 8 10 12 13 15 17 33 50 67 83 100 117 133 150 167 Gal Lbs 1145373526000 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 6.00 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 120 180 240 300 360 420 480 540 600 1200 1800 2400 3000 3600 4200 4800 5400 6000 AVIATION GAS VOLUME/WEIGHT (approximate according to temperature) Liter 1145373526000 .631 1 2 2 3 4 4 5 Lbs Liter 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Lbs 1145373526000 1.58 3 5 6 8 10 11 13 432 TABLES AND CODES - REFERENCE INFORMATION REFERENCE TABLES AVIATION GAS VOLUME/WEIGHT (approximate according to temperature) Liter 1145373526000 Lbs 6 6 13 19 25 32 38 44 50 57 63 126 189 252 315 378 442 505 568 631 Liter Lbs 1145373526000 9 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 14 16 32 48 63 79 95 111 127 143 158 317 476 634 793 951 1110 1268 1427 1585 AVIATION GAS VOLUME WEIGHT (approximate according to temperature) Liter 1145373526000 1.39 3 4 6 7 8 10 11 12 14 28 42 56 70 83 97 111 125 139 278 417 556 695 834 974 1113 1252 1391 Kg Liter 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 Kg 1145373526000 .719 1 2 3 4 4 5 6 6 7 14 22 29 36 43 50 58 65 72 144 216 288 359 431 503 575 647 719 TABLES AND CODES - REFERENCE INFORMATION REFERENCE TABLES 433 ALTIMETER CORRECTIONS Extracted from ICAO Document 8186; Vol I; Part VI; Chapter 3 – ALTIMETER SETTING PROCEDURES. NOTE: This chapter deals with altimeter corrections for pressure, temperature and, where appropriate, wind and terrain effects. The pilot is responsible for these corrections except when under radar vectoring. In that case, the radar controller shall issue clearances such that the prescribed obstacle clearance will exist at all times, taking the cold temperature correction into account. PRESSURE CORRECTION Flight Levels When flying at levels with the altimeter set to 1013.2 hPa, the minimum safe altitude must be corrected for deviations in pressure when the pressure is lower than the standard atmosphere (1013 hPa). An appropriate correction is 10m (30 ft) per hPa below 1013 hPa. Alternatively, the correction can be obtained from standard correction graphs or tables supplied by the operator. QNH/QFE When using the QNH or QFE altimeter setting (giving altitude or height above QFE datum respectively), a pressure correction is not required. TEMPERATURE CORRECTION Requirement for Temperature Correction The calculated minimum safe altitudes/heights must be adjusted when the ambient temperature on the surface is much lower than that predicted by the standard atmosphere. In such conditions, an approximate correction is 4 per cent height increase for every 10° C below standard temperature as measured at the altimeter setting source. This is safe for all altimeter setting source altitudes for temperatures above -15°. Tabulated Corrections For colder temperatures, a more accurate correction should be obtained from Tables 1 and 2 below. These tables are calculated for a sea level aerodrome. They are therefore conservative when applied at higher aerodromes. NOTE 1: The corrections have been rounded up to the next 5m or 10 ft increment. NOTE 2: Temperature values from the reporting station (normally the aerodrome) nearest to the position of the aircraft should be used. Table 1 – Values to be added by the pilot to minimum promulgated heights/altitudes (m) Height above the elevation of the altimeter setting source (metres) Aerodrome Temperature (°C) 60 90 120 150 180 210 240 270 300 450 600 900 1200 1500 0 -10 -20 -30 -40 -50 5 10 10 15 15 20 5 10 15 20 25 30 10 15 20 25 30 40 10 15 25 30 40 45 10 25 25 35 45 55 15 20 30 40 50 65 15 25 35 45 60 75 15 30 40 55 65 80 20 30 45 60 75 90 25 45 65 85 110 135 35 60 85 115 145 180 50 90 130 170 220 270 70 120 170 230 290 360 85 150 215 285 365 450 Table 2 – Values to be added by the pilot to minimum promulgated heights/altitudes (ft) Aerodrome Temperature (°C) 200 300 400 500 Height above the elevation of the altimeter setting source (feet) 600 700 800 900 1000 1500 2000 3000 4000 5000 0 -10 -20 -30 -40 -50 20 20 30 40 50 60 20 30 50 60 80 90 30 40 60 80 100 120 30 50 70 100 120 150 40 60 90 120 150 180 40 70 100 140 170 210 50 80 120 150 190 240 50 90 130 170 220 270 60 100 140 190 240 300 90 150 210 280 360 450 120 200 280 380 480 590 170 290 420 570 720 890 230 390 570 760 970 1190 280 490 710 950 1210 1500 NOTAM Reference Information NOTAM REFERENCE INFORMATION NOTAMS 435 Notams INTRODUCTION NOTAMs promulgating significant information changes are disseminated from locations all over the world. NOTAMs are intended to supplement Aeronautical Information Publications and provide a fast medium for disseminating information at a short notice. The following format and codes are used in disseminating NOTAMs. TYPICAL NOTAM — IN THE SYSTEM NOTAM FORMAT 1 224010069000 FORMAT EXPLANATION OF SYSTEM NOTAM NOTAMN — New NOTAM NOTAMR — Replaces a previous NOTAM NOTAMC — Cancels a NOTAM NOTAMS — SNOWTAM NOTAM format item Q is divided into eight separate qualifier fields. a. FIR — ICAO location indicator plus “XX” if applicable to more than one FIR. b. NOTAM CODE — If the subject of the NOTAM (second and third letter of NOTAM code) is not in the NOTAM Code , the following letters should be used to reference the subject category. QAGXX = AGA c. TRAFFIC — d. PURPOSE — e. SCOPE — QCOXX = COM QRCXX = RAC I = IFR V = VFR IV = IFR/VFR N = Selected for the immediate attention of aircraft operators. B = Selected for preflight information bulletins. O = Operationally significant for IFR flights. M = Miscellaneous. A = Aerodrome QXXXX = Other 436 f. g. h. NOTAM REFERENCE INFORMATION NOTAMS E = Enroute W = Navigational warning LOWER — Used when applicable to indicate lower limits of the affected area. Default value of 000 is used when limit is not defined. UPPER — Used when applicable to indicate upper limit of the affected area. Default value of 999 is used when limit is not defined. COORDINATES RADIUS — Latitude and longitude present approximate center of a circle whose radius encompasses the whole area of influence. NOTAM format items A thru G provide information on location, times, changes and limits. A) ICAO location indicator of aerodrome or FIR. B) Ten figure date-time group indicating when the NOTAM comes into force. C) Ten figure date-time group or PERM indicating the duration of the NOTAM. If the duration of the NOTAM is uncertain, the approximate duration must be indicated using the date-time group followed by EST. D) Specified periods for changes being reported, otherwise omitted. E) Decoded NOTAM code in plain language. ICAO abbreviations may be used where appropriate. These items are normally applicable to navigational warnings or airspace restrictions clearly F) } indicating reference datum and units of measurement. Item F provides the lower limit and item G) G provides the upper limit. SOME STATES ARE STILL PROMULGATING CLASS I NOTAMS IN THE PREVIOUS FORMAT. PREVIOUS NOTAM FORMAT AND EXPLANATION 1 224010069000 A) B) ICAO location indicator of aerodrome or FIR. Eight figure date-time group, WIE (with immediate effect), or WEF (with effect from) indicating when the NOTAM comes into force. Eight figure date-time group, PERM, or UFN (until further notice) indicating the duration of the NOTAM. If the duration of the NOTAM is UFN, the approximate duration of the information should also be indicated. Specified periods for changes being reported, otherwise omitted. NOTAM code, abbreviated plain language or both. C) D) E) F) G) } These items are normally applicable to navigational warnings or airspace restrictions clearly indicating reference datum and units of measurement. NOTAM CODE SECOND AND THIRD LETTERS SECOND AND THIRD LETTERS (Q__ __) CODE UNIFORM ABBREVIATED PHRASEOLOGY SIGNIFICATION AGA Lighting facilities (L) LA Approach light system (specify runway and type) als NOTAM REFERENCE INFORMATION NOTAMS 437 SECOND AND THIRD LETTERS (Q__ __) CODE LB LC LD LE LF LG LH LI LJ LK LL LM LP LR LS LT LU LV LW LX LY LZ SIGNIFICATION Aerodrome beacon Runway centerline lights (specify runway) Landing direction indicator lights Runway edge lights (specify runway) Sequenced flashing lights (specify runway) Pilot-controlled lighting High intensity runway lights (specify runway) Runway end identifier lights (specify runway) Runway alignment indicator lights (specify runway) Category II components of approach lighting system (specify runway) Low intensity runway lights (specify runway) Medium intensity runway lights (specify runway) Precision approach path indicator (PAPI) (specify runway) All landing area lighting facilities Stopway lights (specify runway) Threshold lights (specify runway) Helicopter approach path indicator Visual approach slope indicator system (specify type and runway) Heliport lighting Taxiway centerline lights (specify taxiway) Taxiway edge lights (specify taxiway) Runway touchdown zone lights (specify runway) AGA Movement and landing area (M) MA Movement area MB Bearing strength (specify part of landing area or movement area) MC Clearway (specify runway) MD Declared distances (specify runway) Taxiing guidance system MG MH Runway arresting gear (specify runway) MK Parking area MM Daylight markings (specify threshold, centerline, etc.) MN Apron MO Stopbar (specify taxiway) MP Aircraft stands (specify) MR Runway (specify runway) MS Stopway (specify runway) MT Threshold (specify runway) MU Runway turning bay (specify runway) MW Strip/shoulder (specify runway) MX Taxiway(s) (specify) MY Rapid exit taxiway (specify) AGA Facilities and services (F) FA Aerodrome FB Friction Measuring Device (specify type) FC Ceiling measurement equipment FD Docking system (specify AGNIS, BOLDS, etc.) UNIFORM ABBREVIATED PHRASEOLOGY abn rcll ldi lgt redl sequenced flg lgt pcl high intst rwy lgt rwy end id lgt rai lgt cat II components als low intst rwy lgt medium intst rwy lgt papi ldg area lgt fac stwl thr lgt hapi vasis heliport lgt twy cl lgt twy edge lgt rtzl mov area bearing strength cwy declared dist tgs rag prkg area day markings apron stopbar acft stand rwy swy thr rwy turning bay strip/shoulder twy rapid exit twy ad friction measuring device ceiling measurement eqpt dckg system 438 NOTAM REFERENCE INFORMATION NOTAMS SECOND AND THIRD LETTERS (Q__ __) CODE FE FF FG FH FI FJ FL FM FO FP FS FT SIGNIFICATION Oxygen (specify type) Fire fighting and rescue Ground movement control Helicopter alighting area/platform Aircraft de-icing(specify) Oils (specify type) Landing direction indicator Meteorological service (specify type) Fog dispersal system Heliport Snow removal equipment Transmissometer (specify runway and, where applicable, designator(s) of transmissometer(s)) Fuel availability Wind direction indicator Customs UNIFORM ABBREVIATED PHRASEOLOGY oxygen fire and rescue gnd mov ctl hel alighting area acft de-ice oil ldi met fg dispersal heliport sn removal eqpt transmissometer FU FW FZ ATM Airspace organization (A) AA Minimum altitude (specify enroute/crossing/safe) AC Control zone (CTR) AD Air defense identification zone (ADIZ) AE Control area (CTA) AF Flight information region AH Upper control area AL Minimum usable flight level AN Area navigation route AO Oceanic control area AP Reporting point (specify name or coded designator) AR ATS route (specify) AT Terminal control area (TMA) AU Upper flight information region (UIR) AV Upper advisory area (UDA) AX Significant point AZ Aerodrome traffic zone ATM Air traffic and VOLMET services (S) SA Automatic terminal information service (ATIS) SB ATS reporting office Area control center SC fuel avbl wdi cust SE Flight information service Aerodrome flight information service SF Flow control center SL SO Oceanic area control center Approach control service SP Flight service station SS Aerodrome control tower ST Upper area control center SU SV VOLMET Broadcast Upper advisory service (specify) SY ATM Air traffic procedures (P) fis afis flow ctl center oac app mnm alt ctr adiz cta fir uta mnm usable fl rnav route oca rep ats rte tma uir uda sig atz atis aro acc fss twr uac volmet upper advisory ser NOTAM REFERENCE INFORMATION NOTAMS 439 SECOND AND THIRD LETTERS (Q__ __) CODE PA PB PC PD PE PF PH PI PK PL PM SIGNIFICATION Standard instrument arrival (specify route designator) Standard VFR arrival Contingency procedure Standard instrument departure (specify route designator) Standard VFR department Flow control procedure Holding procedure Instrument approach procedure (specify type and runway) VFR approach procedure Flight plan processing, filing and related contingency Aerodrome operating minima (specify procedure and amended minimum) Noise operating restrictions Obstacle clearance altitude and height (specify procedure) Radio failure procedure Transition altitude or transition level (specify) Missed approach procedure (specify runway) Minimum holding altitude (specify fix) ADIZ procedure PN PO PR PT PU PX PZ CNS Communication and surveillance facilities (C) CA Air/ground facility (specify service and frequency) CB Automatic dependent surveillance – broadcast (details) Automatic dependent surveillance – contract (details) CC CD CE CG CL CM CP CR Controller-pilot datalink communications (details) Enroute surveillance radar Ground controlled approach system Selective calling system Surface movement radar Precision approach radar (specify runway) IO IS IT IU IW IX IY std vfr arr contingency proc sid std vfr dep flow ctl proc hldg proc inst apch proc vfr apch proc fpl opr minima noise opr restrictions oca och rdo failure proc ta/trl missed apch proc mnm hldg alt adiz proc a/g fac ads-b ads-c cpdlc rsr gca selcal smr par sre Surveillance radar element of precision approach radar system (specify wavelength) Secondary surveillance radar Terminal area surveillance radar tar Glide path (ILS) (specify runway) Inner marker (ILS) (specify runway) Localizer (ILS) (specify runway) Middle marker (ILS)(specify runway) Localizer (not associated with ILS) Outer marker (ILS) (specify runway) ILS Category I (specify runway) ILS Category II (specify runway) ILS Category III (specify runway) Microwave landing system (specify runway) Locator, outer (ILS) (specify runway) Locator, middle (ILS) (specify runway) ils ils dme ils gp ils im ils llz ils mm llz ils om ils cat I ils cat II ils cat III mls ils lo ils lm CS CT CNS Instrument and microwave landing systems (I) Instrument landing system (specify runway) IC ID DME associated with ILS IG II IL IM IN UNIFORM ABBREVIATED PHRASEOLOGY star ssr 440 NOTAM REFERENCE INFORMATION NOTAMS SECOND AND THIRD LETTERS (Q__ __) CODE UNIFORM ABBREVIATED PHRASEOLOGY SIGNIFICATION CNS GNSS services (G) GA GNSS airfield-specific operations (specify operation) GW GNSS area-wide operations (specify operation) CNS Terminal and enroute navigation facilities (N) NA All radio navigation facilities (except. . .) NB Non-directional radio beacon NC DECCA ND Distance measuring equipment NF Fan marker NL Locator (specify identification) NM VOR/DME NN TACAN NO OMEGA NT VORTAC NV VOR NX Direction finding station (specify type and frequency) Navigation warnings Airspace restrictions (R) RA Airspace reservation (specify) RD Danger area (specify) RM Military operating area RO Overflying of . . . (specify) RP Prohibited area (specify) RR Restricted area RT Temporary restricted area (specify area) Navigation warnings Warnings (W) WA Air display WB Aerobatics WC Captive balloon or kite WD Demolition of explosives WE Exercises (specify) WF Air refuelling WG Glider flying WH Blasting WJ Banner/target towing WL Ascent of free balloon WM Missile, gun or rocket firing WP Parachute jumping exercise, paragliding or hang gliding WR Radioactive materials or toxic chemicals (specify) Burning or blowing gas WS WT Mass movement of aircraft WU Unmanned aircraft WV Formation flight WW Significant volcanic activity WY Aerial survey WZ Model flying Other information (O) gnss airfield gnss area all rdo nav fac ndb decca dme fan mkr l vor/dme tacan omega vortac vor df airspace reservation ..d.. moa overflying ..p.. ..r.. tempo restricted area air display aerobatics captive balloon/kite demolition of explosives exer air refuelling gld fly blasting banner/target towing ascent of free balloon missile/gun/rocket frng pje/paragliding/hang gliding radioactive materials/toxic chemicals burning/blowing gas mass mov of acft ua formation flt significant volcanic act aerial survey model fly NOTAM REFERENCE INFORMATION NOTAMS 441 SECOND AND THIRD LETTERS (Q__ __) CODE OA OB OE OL OR UNIFORM ABBREVIATED PHRASEOLOGY SIGNIFICATION ais obst acft entry rqmnts obst lgt rcc Aeronautical information service Obstacle (specify details) Aircraft entry requirements Obstacle lights on . . . (specify) Rescue co-ordination center FOURTH AND FIFTH LETTERS FOURTH AND FIFTH LETTERS CODE UNIFORM ABBREVIATED PHRASEOLOGY SIGNIFICATION Availability (A) Withdrawn for maintenance AC AD Available for daylight operation AF Flight checked and found reliable AG Operating but ground checked only, awaiting flight check AH Hours of service are now . . . (specify) AK Resumed normal operation AL Operative (or reoperative) subject to previously published limitations/conditions AM Military operations only AN Available for night operation AO Operational AP Available, prior permission required AR Available on request Unserviceable AS AU Not available (specify reason if appropriate) AW Completely withdrawn AX Previously promulgated shutdown has been cancelled Changes (C) Activated CA CC Completed Deactivated CD Erected CE CF Operating frequency(ies) changed to Downgraded to CG CH Changed Identification or radio call sign changed to CI Realigned CL Displaced CM CN Cancelled CO Operating CP Operating on reduced power Temporarily replaced by CR Installed CS CT On test, do not use Hazard conditions (H) withdrawn maint avbl day ops fltck okay opr but gnd ck only, awaiting flt ck hr ser okay opr subj previous cond mil ops only avbl ngt ops opr avbl ppr avbl o/r u/s not avbl withdrawn promulgated shutdown cnl act cmpl deactivated erected opr freq changed to downgraded to changed ident/rdo call sign changed to realigned displaced cnl opr opr reduced pwr tempo rplcd by instl on test, do not use 442 NOTAM REFERENCE INFORMATION NOTAMS FOURTH AND FIFTH LETTERS CODE SIGNIFICATION Braking action is. . . a. Poor b. Medium/Poor c. Poor d. Medium/Good e. Good HB Friction coefficient is. . . (specify friction measuring device used) HC Covered by compacted snow to a depth of HD Covered by dry snow to a depth of HE Covered by water to a depth of HF Totally free of snow and ice HG Grass cutting in progress HH Hazard due to (specify) HI Covered by ice HJ Launch planned. . .(specify balloon flight identification or project code name, launch site, planned period of launch(es) - date/time, expected climb direction, estimated time to pass 18,000m (60,000 ft), or reaching cruise level if at or below 18,000m (60,000 ft), together with estimated location) HK Bird migration in progress (specify direction) HL Snow clearance completed HM Marked by HN Covered by wet snow or slush to a depth of HO Obscured by snow HP Snow clearance in progress HQ Operation cancelled. . .(specify balloon flight identification or project code name) HR Standing water HS Sanding in progress HT Approach according to signal area only HU Launch in progress. . .(specify balloon flight identification or project code name, launch site, date/time of launch(es), estimated time passing 18,000m (60,000 ft), or reaching cruising level if at or below 18,000m (60,000 ft), together with estimated location, estimated date/time of termination of the flight and planned location of ground contact, when applicable) HV Work completed HW Work in progress HX Concentration of birds HY Snow banks exist (specify height) HZ Covered by frozen ruts and ridges Limitations (L) LA Operating on auxiliary power supply LB Reserved for aircraft based therein LC Closed LD Unsafe LE Operating without auxiliary power supply LF Interference from LG Operating without identification LH Unserviceable for aircraft heavier than UNIFORM ABBREVIATED PHRASEOLOGY HA ba is . . . friction coefficient is cov compacted sn depth cov dry sn depth cov water depth free of sn and ice grass cutting inpr hazard due cov ice launch plan bird migration inpr snow clr cmpl marked by cov wet sn/slush depth obscured by sn snow clr inpr opr cnl standing water sanding inpr apch according signal area only launch inpr work cmpl wip bird concentration sn banks hgt cov frozen ruts and ridges opr aux pwr reserved for acft based therein clsd unsafe opr aux wo pwr interference fm opr wo ident u/s acft heavier than NOTAM REFERENCE INFORMATION NOTAMS 443 FOURTH AND FIFTH LETTERS CODE LI LK LL LN LP LR LS LT LV LW LX Other XX SIGNIFICATION Closed to IFR operations Operating a a fixed light Usable for length of. .and width of. . UNIFORM ABBREVIATED PHRASEOLOGY clsd ifr ops opr as f lgt. . . usable len/wid. . . clsed to all ngt ops prohibited to acft restricted to rwy and twy subj intrp ltd to clsd vfr ops will take place opr but caution advised due to Closed to all night operations Prohibited to Aircraft restricted to runways and taxiways Subject to interruption Limited to Closed to VFR operations Will take place Operating but caution advised due to (XX) Where 4th and 5th letter code does not cover the situation (plain language following the NOTAM use XX and supplement by plain language Code) SNOWTAM Reference Information SNOWTAM REFERENCE INFORMATION SNOWTAM 445 Snowtam Extracted from ICAO Annex 15 — AERONAUTICAL INFORMATION SERVICES ORIGINATION AND DISTRIBUTION Notification of the presence or removal or significant changes in hazardous conditions due to snow, slush, ice or water on the movement area is to be made preferably by use of the SNOWTAM format, or the NOTAM Code and plain language. Information concerning snow, ice and standing water on aerodrome pavements shall, when reported by means of a SNOWTAM, contain information in the order shown in the following SNOWTAM Format. SNOWTAM FORMAT 1 143831523000 446 SNOWTAM REFERENCE INFORMATION SNOWTAM GUIDANCE FOR THE COMPLETION OF THE SNOWTAM FORMAT GENERAL a. b. c. d. When reporting on two or three runways, repeat Items C to P inclusive. Items together with their indicator must be dropped completely, where no information is to be included. Metric units must be used and the unit of measurement not reported. The maximum validity of SNOWTAM is 24 hours. New SNOWTAM must be issued whenever there is a significant change in conditions. The following changes relating to runway conditions are considered as significant: 1. a change in the coefficient of friction of about 0.05; 2. changes in depth of deposit greater than the following: – 20mm for dry snow; – 10mm for wet snow; – 3mm for slush; 3. a change in the available length or width of a runway of 10 per cent or more; 4. any change in the type of deposit or extent of coverage which requires reclassification in Items F or T of the SNOWTAM; 5. when critical snow banks exist on one or both sides of the runway, any change in the height or distance from centerline; 6. any change in the conspicuity of runway lighting caused by obscuring of the lights; 7. any other conditions known to be significant according to experience or local circumstances. e. The abbreviated heading “TTAAiiii CCCC MMYYGGgg (BBB)” is included to facilitate the automatic processing of SNOWTAM messages in computer data banks. The explanation of these symbols is: TT = AA = iiii = CCCC = MMYGGgg = data designator for SNOWTAM = SW; geographical designator for States; e.g., LF = France, EG = United Kingdom; SNOWTAM serial number in a four-figure group; four-letter location indicator of the aerodrome to which the SNOWTAM refers; date/time of observation/measurement, whereby: – MM = month; e.g., January = 01, December = 12 – YY = day of the month – GGgg = time in hours (GG) and minutes (gg) UTC; (BBB) = optional group for: correction to SNOWTAM message previously disseminated with the same serial number = COR. NOTE: Brackets in (BBB) are used to indicate that this group is optional. EXAMPLE: Abbreviated heading of SNOWTAM No. 149 from Zurich, measurement/observation of 7 November at 0620 UTC: SWLS0149 LSZH 1107 0620 – Item A Aerodrome location indicator (four-letter location indicator). – Item B Eight-figure date/time group – giving time of observation as month, day, hour and minutes in UTC; this item must always be completed. – Item C Lower runway designator number. – Item D Cleared runway length in metres, if less than published length (see Item T on reporting on part of runway not cleared). – Item E Cleared runway width in meters, if less than published width; if offset left or right of center line add “L” or “R” as viewed from the threshold having the lower runway designation number. SNOWTAM REFERENCE INFORMATION SNOWTAM 447 – Item F Deposit over total runway length as explained in SNOWTAM Format. Suitable combinations of these numbers may be used to indicate varying conditions over runway segments. If more than one deposit is present on the same portion of the runway, they should be reported in sequence from the top to the bottom. Drifts, depths of deposit appreciably greater than the average values or other significant characteristics of the deposits may be reported under ITEM T in plain language. – Item G Mean depth in millimeters deposit for each third of total runway length, or “XX” if not measurable or operationally not significant; the assessment to be made to an accuracy of 20mm for dry snow, 10mm for wet snow and 3mm for slush. – Item H Friction measurements on each third of the runway and friction measuring device. Measured or calculated coefficient (two digits) or, if not available, estimated surface friction (single digit) in the order from the threshold having the lower runway designation number. Insert a code 9 when surface conditions or available friction measuring device do not permit a reliable surface friction measurement to be made. Use the following abbreviations to indicate the type of friction measuring device used: BRD — Brakemeter-Dynometer GRT — Grip Tester MUM — Mu-meter RFT — Runway friction tester SFH — Surface friction tester (high pressure tire) SFL — Surface friction tester (low pressure tire) SKH — Skiddometer (high pressure tire) SKL — Skiddometer (low pressure tire) TAP — Tapley meter If other equipment used specify in plain language. – Item J Critical Snowbanks: If present insert height in centimeters and distance from edge of runway in metres, followed by left (“L”) or right (“R”) side or both sides (“LR”), as viewed from the threshold having the lower runway designation number. – Item K If runway lights are obscured insert “YES” followed by “L”, “R” or both “LR” as viewed from the threshold having the lower runway designation number. – Item L When further clearance will be undertaken, enter length and width of runway or “TOTAL” if runway will be cleared to full dimensions. – Item M Enter the anticipated time of completion in UTC. – Item N The code for Item F may be used to describe taxiway conditions; enter “NO” if no taxiways serving the associated runway are available. – Item P If applicable, enter “YES” followed by the lateral distance in metres. – Item R The code for Item F may be used to describe apron conditions; enter “NO” if apron unusable. – Item S Enter the anticipated time of next observation/measurement in UTC. – Item T Describe in plain language any operationally significant information but always report on length of uncleared runway (Item D) and extent of runway contamination (Item F) for each third of the runway (if appropriate) in accordance with the following scale: 10% — if less than 10% of runway contaminated 25% — if 11-25% of runway contaminated 50% — if 26-50% of runway contaminated 100% — if 51-100% of runway contaminated. 448 SNOWTAM REFERENCE INFORMATION SNOWTAM EXAMPLE OF COMPLETED SNOWTAM FORMAT GG EHAMZQZX EDDFZQZX EKCHZQZX 070645 LSZHYNYX SWLS0149 LSZH 11070620 SNOWTAM 0149 A) LSZH B) 11070620 C) 02 D) . . . P) C) 09 D) . . . P) C) 12 D) . . . P) R) NO S) 11070920 T) DEICING. DEFINITIONS OF THE VARIOUS TYPES OF SNOW SLUSH — Water-saturated snow which with a heel-and-toe slap-down motion against the ground will be displaced with a splatter; specific gravity: 0.5 up to 0.8. NOTE: Combinations of ice, snow and/or standing water may, especially when rain, rain and snow, or snow is falling, produce substances with specific gravities in excess of 0.8. These substances, due to their high water/ice content, will have a transparent rather than a cloudy appearance and, at the higher specific gravities, will be readily distinguishable from slush. SNOW (on the ground) — a. Dry Snow: Snow which can be blown if loose or, if compacted by hand, will fall apart again upon release; specific gravity: up to but not including 0.35. b. Wet Snow: Snow which, if compacted by hand, will stick together and tend to or form a snowball; specific gravity: 0.35 up to but not including 0.5. c. Compacted Snow: Snow which has been compressed into a solid mass that resists further compression and will hold together or break up into lumps if picked up; specific gravity: 0.5 and over. Radio Frequency and Time Information 450 RADIO FREQUENCY AND TIME INFORMATION STANDARD TIME SIGNALS Standard Time Signals General In airspaces such as North Atlantic (NAT) minimum navigation performance specifications (MNPS) airspace, the time reference system(s) to be used during the flight for calculation of waypoint estimated times of arrival (ETAs) and waypoint actual times of arrival (ATAs) shall be synchronized to universal coordinated time (UTC). All ETAs and ATAs passed to air traffic control shall be based on a time reference that has been synchronized to UTC or equivalent. Acceptable sources of UTC include: WWV – National Institute of Standards and Technology (Fort Collins, Colorado). WWV operates 24 hours a day on 2500, 5000, 10000, 15000, 20000 kHz (AM/single sideband (SSB)) and provides UTC voice every minute. GPS (corrected to UTC) – Available 24 hours a day to those pilots who can access the time signal over their shipboard GPS equipment. CHU – National Research Council (NRC) – Available 24 hours a day on 3330, 7850, and 14670 kHz (SSB). In the final 10-second period of each minute, a bilingual station identification and time announcement is made. BBC – British Broadcasting Corporation (United Kingdom). The BBC transmits on a number of domestic and worldwide frequencies and transmits the Greenwich time signal (referenced to UTC) once every hour on most frequencies, although there are some exceptions. Any other source shown to the State of Registry or State of Operator (as appropriate) to be an equivalent source of UTC. RADIO FREQUENCY AND TIME INFORMATION STANDARD TIME SIGNALS 451 1 281992739000 452 RADIO FREQUENCY AND TIME INFORMATION WORLDWIDE LOCAL TIMES Worldwide Local Times DIFFERENCES BETWEEN UTC (Z) & LOCAL TIME Add one hour to derived local time in countries currently observing Daylight Saving Time (Summer Time). COUNTRY Afghanistan Albania Algeria American Samoa Andorra Angola Anguilla Antigua and Barbuda Argentina Armenia Aruba Australia LOCAL TIME UTC + 4.5 UTC + 1 UTC + 1 UTC - 11 UTC + 1 UTC + 1 UTC - 4 UTC - 4 UTC - 3 UTC + 4 UTC - 4 DAYLIGHT SAVING TIME — 27 MAR 11 0100Z - 30 OCT 11 0100Z — — 27 MAR 11 0100Z - 30 OCT 11 0100Z — — — 26 MAR 11 2300Z - 29 OCT 11 2300Z — – Norfolk I UTC + 11.5 — – Lord Howe I UTC + 10.5 – Queensland UTC + 10 (+.5) 02 OCT 10 1530Z - 02 APR 11 1500Z — – ACT, New South Wales, Tasmania, Victoria UTC + 10 02 OCT 10 1600Z - 02 APR 11 1600Z – Northern Territory UTC + 9.5 — – South Australia UTC + 9.5 02 OCT 10 1630Z - 02 APR 11 1630Z — – Western Australia UTC + 8 – Christmas I UTC + 7 — UTC + 6.5 — – Cocos (Keeling) I Austria Azerbaijan Azores Bahamas Bahrain Bangladesh Barbados Belarus Belgium Belize Benin Bermuda Bhutan Bolivia Bosnia-Herzegovina Botswana Brazil UTC UTC UTC UTC UTC UTC UTC UTC UTC UTC UTC UTC UTC UTC UTC UTC + + + + + + + + + + 1 4 1 5 3 6 4 2 1 6 1 4 6 4 1 2 27 26 27 13 — — — MAR MAR MAR MAR 11 11 11 11 – Fernando de Noronha Archipelago UTC - 2 — – coast of Brazil, the Federal District, and the interior (except Mato Grosso and Amazonas) UTC - 3 See Note – Mato Grosso, Mato Grosso do Sul, Amazonas, Rondonia, Roraima and Acre UTC - 4 See Note 0100Z 2300Z 0100Z 0700Z - 30 29 30 06 OCT OCT OCT NOV 11 11 11 11 0100Z 2200Z 0100Z 0600Z 27 MAR 11 0000Z - Does not end this year 27 MAR 11 0100Z - 30 OCT 11 0100Z — — 13 MAR 11 0600Z - 06 NOV 11 0500Z — — 27 MAR 11 0100Z - 30 OCT 11 0100Z — RADIO FREQUENCY AND TIME INFORMATION WORLDWIDE LOCAL TIMES COUNTRY LOCAL TIME 453 DAYLIGHT SAVING TIME NOTE: Daylight saving time will be observed at 00:00 on the third Sunday of October, until 00:00 on the third Sunday of February. Areas affected include the states of Rio Grande do Sul, Santa Catarina, Parana, Sao Paulo, Rio de Janeiro, Espirito Santo, Minas Gerais, Goias, Mato Grosso, Mato Grosso do Sul and the Distrito Federal (Federal District). — British Virgin Is UTC - 4 — Brunei UTC + 8 Bulgaria UTC + 2 27 MAR 11 0100Z - 30 OCT 11 0100Z — Burkina Faso UTC — Burundi UTC + 2 — Cambodia UTC + 7 — Cameroon UTC + 1 Canary Is. Canada UTC 27 MAR 11 0100Z - 30 OCT 11 0100Z UTC - 3.5 13 MAR 11 0331Z - 06 NOV 11 0231Z – Atlantic UTC - 4 13 MAR 11 0600Z - 06 NOV 11 0500Z – Eastern UTC - 5 13 MAR 11 0700Z - 06 NOV 11 0600Z – Central UTC - 6 – Mountain UTC - 7 13 MAR 11 0800Z - 06 NOV 11 0700Z (except Saskatchewan) 13 MAR 11 0900Z - 06 NOV 11 0800Z – Pacific Cape Verde Cayman Is. Central African Republic Chad Chile UTC - 8 – Newfoundland – Easter I. China, PR of Colombia Comoros Congo, DR of UTC UTC UTC UTC UTC UTC + + - 1 5 1 1 4 6 13 MAR 11 1000Z - 06 NOV 11 0900Z — — — — — — UTC + 8 UTC - 5 UTC + 3 — — — – East UTC + 2 — – West Congo, Republic of Cook Is Costa Rica Cote d'Ivoire Croatia Cuba Cyprus Czech Republic Denmark Djibouti Dominica Dominican Republic Ecuador UTC + 1 — UTC + 1 UTC - 10 UTC - 6 UTC UTC + 1 UTC - 5 UTC + 2 UTC + 1 UTC + 1 UTC + 3 UTC - 4 UTC - 4 UTC - 5 UTC - 6 — — — — – Galapagos Is. Egypt El Salvador Equatorial Guinea Eritrea Estonia UTC UTC UTC UTC UTC + + + + 2 6 1 3 2 27 13 27 27 27 — — — — — MAR MAR MAR MAR MAR 11 11 11 11 11 0100Z 0500Z 0100Z 0100Z 0100Z - 30 30 30 30 30 OCT OCT OCT OCT OCT 11 11 11 11 11 0100Z 0500Z 0100Z 0100Z 0100Z 28 APR 11 2200Z - 29 SEP 11 2100Z — — — 27 MAR 11 0100Z - 30 OCT 11 0100Z 454 RADIO FREQUENCY AND TIME INFORMATION WORLDWIDE LOCAL TIMES COUNTRY Ethiopia Faroe Is. Fiji Is. Finland France French Guiana French Polynesia(Tahiti) – Marquesas Is – Gambier Is Gabon Gambia Georgia Germany Ghana Gibraltar Great Britain (UK) Greece Greenland LOCAL TIME UTC + 3 UTC UTC + 12 UTC + 2 UTC + 1 UTC - 3 UTC - 10 UTC - 9.5 DAYLIGHT SAVING TIME — 27 MAR 11 0100Z - 30 OCT 11 0100Z — 27 MAR 11 0100Z - 30 OCT 11 0100Z 27 MAR 11 0100Z - 30 OCT 11 0100Z — — — UTC - 9 — UTC + UTC UTC + UTC + UTC UTC + UTC UTC + — — — 1 4 1 1 2 27 MAR 11 0100Z - 30 OCT 11 0100Z — 27 MAR 11 0100Z - 30 OCT 11 0100Z 27 MAR 11 0100Z - 30 OCT 11 0100Z 27 MAR 11 0100Z - 30 OCT 11 0100Z – East (Ittoqqortoormiit) UTC - 1 27 MAR 11 0100Z - 30 OCT 11 0100Z – Central (Nuuk) UTC - 3 27 MAR 11 0100Z - 30 OCT 11 0100Z – West (Qaanaaq) Grenada Guadeloupe Guam Guatemala Guinea Guinea-Bissau Guyana Haiti Honduras UTC - 4 03 APR 11 0600Z - 30 OCT 11 0500Z — — — — — — — — — — Hong Kong, PR of China Hungary Iceland India Indonesia UTC - 4 UTC - 4 UTC + 10 UTC - 6 UTC UTC UTC - 4 UTC - 5 UTC - 6 UTC + 8 UTC + 1 UTC UTC + 5.5 27 MAR 11 0100Z - 30 OCT 11 0100Z — — – East UTC + 9 — – Central UTC + 8 — – West Iran Iraq Ireland Israel Italy UTC + 7 — Jamaica Japan Jordan Kazakhstan UTC + 3.5 UTC + 3 UTC UTC + 2 UTC + 1 UTC - 5 UTC + 9 UTC + 2 21 MAR 11 2030Z - 21 SEP 11 1930Z — 27 MAR 11 0100Z - 30 OCT 11 0100Z 01 APR 11 0000Z - 01 OCT 11 2300Z 27 MAR 11 0100Z - 30 OCT 11 0100Z — — 31 MAR 11 2200Z - 27 OCT 11 2200Z – West UTC + 5 — – East Kenya UTC + 6 — UTC + 3 — RADIO FREQUENCY AND TIME INFORMATION WORLDWIDE LOCAL TIMES COUNTRY LOCAL TIME DAYLIGHT SAVING TIME Kiribati – Line Is UTC + 14 — – Phoenix Is UTC + 13 — – Gilbert Is Korea, D.P.R of Korea, Republic of Kosovo Kuwait Kyrgyzstan Laos UTC + 12 — UTC + 9 UTC + 9 UTC + 1 UTC + 3 UTC + 6 UTC + 7 UTC + 2 UTC + 2 UTC + 2 UTC UTC + 2 UTC + 1 UTC + 2 UTC + 1 UTC + 8 UTC + 1 UTC + 3 UTC UTC + 2 UTC + 8 UTC + 5 UTC UTC + 1 UTC + 12 UTC - 4 UTC UTC + 4 — — Latvia Lebanon Lesotho Liberia Libya Liechtenstein Lithuania Luxembourg Macau, PR of China Macedonia, FYR of Madagascar Madeira Malawi Malaysia Maldives Mali Malta Marshall Is Martinique Mauritania Mauritius Mexico 27 MAR 11 0100Z - 30 OCT 11 0100Z — — — 27 MAR 11 0100Z - 30 OCT 11 0100Z 27 MAR 11 0100Z - 30 OCT 11 0100Z — — — 27 MAR 11 0100Z - 30 OCT 11 0100Z 27 MAR 11 0100Z - 30 OCT 11 0100Z 27 MAR 11 0100Z - 30 OCT 11 0100Z — 27 MAR 11 0100Z - 30 OCT 11 0100Z — 27 MAR 11 0100Z - 30 OCT 11 0100Z — — — — 27 MAR 11 0100Z - 30 OCT 11 0100Z — — — — – South, Central and Eastern UTC - 6 03 APR 11 0800Z - 30 OCT 11 0700Z – Baja California South, Chihuahua, Nayarit, Sinaloa, Sonora UTC - 7 03 APR 11 0900Z - 30 OCT 11 0800Z – Baja California North Micronesia, Federated States of UTC - 8 13 MAR 11 1000Z - 06 NOV 11 0900Z – Kosrae, Pohnpei UTC + 11 — – Yap, Chuuk Miquelon I (France) Moldova Mongolia Montenegro Morocco Mozambique Myanmar UTC + 10 — Namibia Nauru I Nepal Netherlands UTC - 3 UTC + 2 UTC + 8 UTC + 1 UTC UTC + 2 UTC + 6.5 UTC + 1 UTC + 12 UTC + 5.75 UTC + 1 13 MAR 11 0500Z - 06 NOV 11 0400Z 27 MAR 11 0100Z - 30 OCT 11 0100Z — 27 MAR 11 0100Z - 30 OCT 11 0100Z — — — 04 SEP 11 0100Z - 01 APR 12 0100Z — — 27 MAR 11 0100Z - 30 OCT 11 0100Z 455 456 RADIO FREQUENCY AND TIME INFORMATION WORLDWIDE LOCAL TIMES COUNTRY Netherlands Antilles New Caledonia New Zealand – Chatham Is Nicaragua Niger Nigeria Niue Northern Mariana Is Norway Oman Pakistan Palau Panama Papua New Guinea Paraguay Peru Philippines Poland Portugal Puerto Rico Qatar Reunion Romania Russia LOCAL TIME UTC - 4 UTC + 11 UTC + 12 UTC + 12.75 UTC - 6 UTC + 1 UTC + 1 UTC - 11 UTC + 10 UTC + 1 UTC + 4 UTC + 5 UTC + 9 UTC - 5 UTC + 10 UTC - 4 UTC - 5 UTC + 8 UTC + 1 UTC UTC - 4 UTC + 3 UTC + 4 UTC + 2 DAYLIGHT SAVING TIME — — 25 SEP 10 1400Z - 02 APR 11 1400Z 25 SEP 10 1400Z - 02 APR 11 1400Z — — — — — 27 MAR 11 0100Z - 30 OCT 11 0100Z — — — — — 03 OCT 10 0400Z - 10 APR 11 0300Z — — 27 MAR 11 0100Z - 30 OCT 11 0100Z 27 MAR 11 0100Z - 30 OCT 11 0100Z — — — 27 MAR 11 0100Z - 30 OCT 11 0100Z – Kaliningrad UTC + 2 27 MAR 11 0000Z - Does not end this year – European part UTC + 3 26 MAR 11 2300Z - Does not end this year – Ural region and parts of west Siberia UTC + 5 26 MAR 11 2100Z - Does not end this year – West / and parts of Central Siberia UTC + 6 26 MAR 11 2000Z - Does not end this year – Parts of Central Siberia UTC + 7 26 MAR 11 1900Z - Does not end this year – Parts of East Siberia UTC + 8 26 MAR 11 1800Z - Does not end this year – Parts of East Siberia and parts of the Far East UTC + 9 26 MAR 11 1700Z - Does not end this year – Parts of the Far East UTC + 10 26 MAR 11 1600Z - Does not end this year – Parts of the Far East Rwanda UTC + 11 26 MAR 11 1500Z - Does not end this year — — — St Kitts and Nevis St Lucia St Pierre I (France) St Vincent Samoa Sao Tome and Principe Saudi Arabia Senegal Serbia Seychelles Sierra Leone Singapore Slovakia UTC + 2 UTC - 4 UTC - 4 UTC - 3 UTC - 4 UTC - 11 UTC UTC + 3 UTC UTC + 1 UTC + 4 UTC UTC + 8 UTC + 1 13 MAR 11 0500Z - 06 NOV 11 0400Z — 26 SEP 10 1100Z - 02 APR 11 1300Z — — — 27 MAR 11 0100Z - 30 OCT 11 0100Z — — — 27 MAR 11 0100Z - 30 OCT 11 0100Z RADIO FREQUENCY AND TIME INFORMATION WORLDWIDE LOCAL TIMES COUNTRY Slovenia Solomon Is. Somalia South Africa Spain Sri Lanka Sudan Suriname Swaziland Sweden Switzerland Syria Taiwan Tajikistan Tanzania Thailand Togo Tonga Trinidad and Tobago Tunisia Turkey Turkmenistan Turks & Caicos Is. Tuvalu Uganda Ukraine United Arab Emirates United States of America LOCAL TIME UTC + 1 UTC + 11 UTC + 3 UTC + 2 UTC + 1 UTC + 5.5 UTC + 3 UTC - 3 UTC + 2 UTC + 1 UTC + 1 UTC + 2 UTC + 8 UTC + 5 UTC + 3 UTC + 7 UTC UTC + 13 UTC - 4 UTC + 1 UTC + 2 UTC + 5 UTC - 5 UTC + 12 UTC + 3 UTC + 2 UTC + 4 DAYLIGHT SAVING TIME 27 MAR 11 0100Z - 30 OCT 11 0100Z — — — 27 MAR 11 0100Z - 30 OCT 11 0100Z — — — — 27 MAR 11 0100Z - 30 OCT 11 0100Z 27 MAR 11 0100Z - 30 OCT 11 0100Z 31 MAR 11 2200Z - 27 OCT 11 2100Z — — — — — — — — 27 MAR 11 0100Z - 30 OCT 11 0100Z — 13 MAR 11 0700Z - 06 NOV 11 0600Z — — 27 MAR 11 0100Z - 30 OCT 11 0100Z — – Eastern UTC - 5 13 MAR 11 0700Z - 06 NOV 11 0600Z – Central UTC - 6 13 MAR 11 0800Z - 06 NOV 11 0700Z – Mountain UTC - 7 – Pacific UTC - 8 13 MAR 11 0900Z - 06 NOV 11 0800Z (except Arizona) 13 MAR 11 1000Z - 06 NOV 11 0900Z – Alaska UTC - 9 13 MAR 11 1100Z - 06 NOV 11 1000Z – Alaska (Aleutian Is) UTC - 10 – Hawaii United States Virgin Is Uruguay UTC - 10 13 MAR 11 1200Z - 06 NOV 11 1100Z — UTC - 4 UTC - 3 UTC + 5 UTC + 11 UTC - 4.5 UTC + 7 UTC + 12 UTC + 12 UTC + 3 UTC + 2 UTC + 2 03 OCT 10 0500Z - 13 MAR 11 0400Z — — — — — — — — — Uzbekistan Vanuatu Venezuela Vietnam Wake I Wallis & Futuna Is Yemen Zambia Zimbabwe — 457 Sunrise and Sunset Tables SUNRISE AND SUNSET TABLES SUNRISE AND SUNSET TABLES 459 Sunrise and Sunset Tables INTRODUCTION The tables supplied on the following pages provide an easy means to determine the sunrise and sunset for most any position on the globe. To obtain the Universal Coordinated Time (UTC) of the sunrise or sunset at a particular place, the longitude must be converted to time (by means of the Longitude to Time Table) and applied (east longitude subtract, west add) to the Local Mean Time (LMT) at 0° longitude from the Sunrise and Sunset Tables. Listings beginning towards the end of the Sunrise and Sunset Tables contain the Local to UTC Conversion Factors, preselected for your convenience, for many cities throughout the world. UTC = LMT East (or + West) Longitude to Time Factor – Find the UTC for the sunrise at Denver, Colorado, USA on 1 October. Denver is located at 40N and 105W (rounded to nearest degree). From the Sunrise and Sunset Tables, find the LMT for the sunrise at 0° longitude, 40° N, on 2 October (nearest day). It is 05:56. From the Longitude To Time Table, find the Longitude to Time Factor for 105° longitude. It is 07:00. Since the longitude for Denver is west, add 07:00 hours to 05:56 hours to obtain the UTC for the sunrise: 05:56 + 07:00 = 12:56 UTC. – Find the UTC for the sunset at Frankfurt, Germany on 1 October. Frankfurt is located at 50N and 009E (rounded to nearest degree). From the Sunrise and Sunset Tables, find the LMT for the sunset at 0° longitude, 50° N, on 2 October (nearest day). It is 17:38. From the Longitude To Time Table, find the Longitude to Time Factor for 009° longitude. It is 00:36. Since the longitude for Frankfurt is east, subtract 00:36 hours from 17:38 hours to obtain the UTC for the sunset: 17:38 00:36 = 17:02 UTC. Local time is determined by adding or subtracting the LT conversion factor for the state. These factors are listed in the Jeppesen Airport Directory. Many states adopt “summer” or “daylight” time for several months of the year. Consult the Chart NOTAMs section of the Jeppesen Airway Manual for dates and conversion factors for any particular state. LONGITUDE TO TIME Degree (°) to Hours (h) and Minutes (m) ° 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 h m 0 00 0 04 0 08 0 12 0 16 0 20 0 24 0 28 0 32 0 36 0 40 0 44 0 48 0 52 0 56 1 00 1 04 ° 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 h m 2 00 2 04 2 08 2 12 2 16 2 20 2 24 2 28 2 32 2 36 2 40 2 44 2 48 2 52 2 56 3 00 3 04 ° 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 h m 4 00 4 04 4 08 4 12 4 16 4 20 4 24 4 28 4 32 4 36 4 40 4 44 4 48 4 52 4 56 5 00 5 04 ° 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 h m 6 00 6 04 6 08 6 12 6 16 6 20 6 24 6 28 6 32 6 36 6 40 6 44 6 48 6 52 6 56 7 00 7 04 ° 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 h m 8 00 8 04 8 08 8 12 8 16 8 20 8 24 8 28 8 32 8 36 8 40 8 44 8 48 8 52 8 56 9 00 9 04 ° 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 h m 10 00 10 04 10 08 10 12 10 16 10 20 10 24 10 28 10 32 10 36 10 40 10 44 10 48 10 52 10 56 11 00 11 04 460 SUNRISE AND SUNSET TABLES SUNRISE AND SUNSET TABLES Degree (°) to Hours (h) and Minutes (m) (continued) 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 08 12 16 20 24 28 32 36 40 44 48 52 56 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 08 12 16 20 24 28 32 36 40 44 48 52 56 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 ✩ Sun remains continuously above the horizon LAT ° N 72 70 68 66 64 62 N 60 58 56 54 52 N 50 45 40 35 30 N 20 N 10 0 S 10 20 S 30 35 40 45 50 S 52 54 56 58 S 60 2 h m ★ ★ ★ 10 27 09 49 22 09 02 08 45 31 19 08 08 07 58 38 22 07 08 06 56 06 35 17 06 00 05 43 24 05 03 04 50 35 04 18 03 56 03 45 33 19 03 03 02 44 5 h m ★ ★ 11 34 10 21 09 45 20 09 00 08 44 30 18 08 07 07 58 38 22 07 08 06 57 06 36 18 06 02 05 44 26 05 05 04 52 38 04 21 03 59 03 49 37 22 03 08 02 49 8 h m ★ ★ 11 13 10 14 09 41 09 16 08 58 42 28 17 08 06 07 57 38 22 07 08 06 57 06 37 19 06 03 05 46 28 05 07 04 55 41 24 04 03 03 52 41 28 03 13 02 54 11 h m ★ ★ 10 56 10 06 09 35 09 12 08 54 39 26 15 08 05 07 56 37 22 07 08 06 57 06 37 20 06 04 05 48 30 05 10 04 57 44 27 04 07 03 57 46 33 03 18 03 00 08 12 16 20 24 28 32 36 40 44 48 52 56 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 08 12 16 20 24 28 32 36 40 44 48 52 56 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 08 12 16 20 24 28 32 36 40 44 48 52 56 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 12 08 12 16 20 24 28 32 36 40 44 48 52 56 00 ★ Sun remains continuously below the horizon SUNRISE January 14 17 h m h m ★ ★ 12 05 ★ 10 41 10 27 09 58 09 49 29 22 09 07 09 02 08 50 08 46 36 32 23 20 12 09 08 02 08 00 07 54 07 52 36 34 21 20 07 08 07 07 06 57 06 56 06 38 06 38 21 22 06 05 06 06 05 49 05 51 32 34 05 12 05 15 05 00 05 03 04 47 04 50 31 35 11 15 04 01 04 06 03 51 03 56 38 44 24 31 03 07 03 15 20 h m ★ 11 11 10 13 09 39 09 15 08 56 08 40 27 16 08 06 07 57 07 49 32 18 07 06 06 56 06 38 22 06 07 05 52 36 05 17 05 06 04 54 39 20 04 11 04 01 03 50 37 03 22 23 h m ★ 10 46 09 59 29 09 07 08 49 08 35 22 12 08 02 07 54 07 46 30 16 07 05 06 55 06 38 22 06 08 05 54 38 05 20 05 09 04 57 43 25 04 17 04 07 03 57 44 03 30 26 h m 12 04 10 25 09 46 09 19 08 59 43 08 29 17 08 07 07 58 50 07 42 27 14 07 03 06 54 06 37 23 06 09 05 55 40 05 23 13 05 01 04 47 30 04 22 13 04 03 03 52 03 38 29 h m 11 03 10 06 09 33 09 09 08 50 35 08 22 11 08 02 07 53 46 07 39 24 12 07 01 06 52 06 37 23 06 10 05 56 42 05 25 16 05 04 04 51 35 04 28 19 04 10 03 59 03 46 SUNRISE AND SUNSET TABLES SUNRISE AND SUNSET TABLES ✩ Sun remains continuously above the horizon LAT ° N 72 70 68 66 64 62 N 60 58 56 54 52 N 50 45 40 35 30 N 20 N 10 0 S 10 20 S 30 35 40 45 50 S 52 54 56 58 S 60 2 h m ★ ★ ★ 13 41 14 19 14 45 15 06 22 37 15 49 16 00 16 09 29 16 46 17 00 12 17 32 17 50 18 07 25 18 43 19 05 17 32 19 50 20 12 20 22 34 20 48 21 04 21 23 5 h m ★ ★ 12 36 13 49 14 25 14 50 15 10 27 41 15 53 16 03 16 13 32 16 48 17 02 14 17 34 17 52 18 09 26 18 44 19 05 18 32 19 49 20 11 20 21 33 20 46 21 02 21 21 8 h m ★ ★ 13 00 13 59 14 32 14 57 15 16 32 45 15 57 16 07 16 16 35 16 51 17 04 16 17 36 17 54 18 10 27 18 45 19 06 18 32 19 49 20 10 20 20 31 44 20 59 21 18 11 h m ★ ★ 13 20 14 09 14 40 15 03 15 22 37 15 50 16 01 11 16 20 39 16 54 17 07 19 17 38 17 55 18 11 28 18 45 19 06 18 31 19 48 20 08 20 18 29 41 20 56 21 14 ✩ Sun remains continuously above the horizon LAT ° N 72 70 68 66 64 62 N 60 58 56 54 52 N 50 1 h m 10 33 09 49 09 20 08 59 42 27 08 15 08 05 07 56 48 41 07 35 4 h m 10 09 09 33 09 08 08 48 32 19 08 08 07 59 50 43 36 07 30 7 h m 09 48 09 17 08 55 37 23 11 08 01 07 52 44 37 31 07 25 10 h m 09 28 09 02 08 42 26 14 08 03 07 53 45 38 32 26 07 21 461 ★ Sun remains continuously below the horizon SUNSET January 14 17 h m h m ★ ★ 12 21 ★ 13 37 13 54 14 20 14 32 14 49 14 58 15 10 15 18 15 28 15 35 43 15 49 15 55 16 01 16 06 11 16 20 16 24 16 29 42 16 46 16 57 17 01 17 10 13 21 24 17 40 17 42 17 57 17 58 18 12 18 14 29 29 18 46 18 46 19 05 19 05 17 16 30 29 19 46 19 45 20 06 20 04 20 16 20 13 26 23 38 35 20 52 20 48 21 09 21 04 20 h m ★ 13 11 14 09 14 43 15 07 26 15 42 15 55 16 06 16 25 16 33 16 50 17 04 16 26 17 44 18 00 14 29 18 46 19 04 15 28 19 42 20 01 20 09 19 30 43 20 58 23 h m ★ 13 39 14 25 14 55 15 17 35 15 49 16 02 12 22 30 16 38 16 54 17 08 19 29 17 46 18 01 15 30 18 45 19 03 14 26 40 19 58 20 06 15 26 38 20 52 26 h m 12 25 14 01 14 39 15 06 27 43 15 57 16 09 19 28 36 16 43 16 58 17 11 22 32 17 48 18 02 16 30 18 45 19 02 12 24 37 19 54 20 02 11 21 32 20 45 29 h m 13 24 14 21 14 54 15 18 36 15 52 16 05 15 25 34 41 16 48 17 03 15 25 34 17 50 18 04 17 30 18 44 19 00 10 21 34 50 19 57 20 06 15 26 20 38 ★ Sun remains continuously below the horizon SUNRISE February 13 16 h m h m 09 10 08 52 08 47 32 30 17 16 08 05 08 04 07 54 07 54 45 07 45 07 37 38 31 32 25 26 19 20 15 07 15 07 10 19 h m 08 35 18 08 04 07 53 44 36 07 29 23 18 13 09 07 05 22 h m 08 18 08 04 07 52 42 34 27 07 21 15 11 06 07 02 06 59 25 h m 08 02 07 49 39 31 24 18 07 12 08 03 07 00 06 56 06 53 28 h m 07 46 35 27 20 14 08 07 03 07 00 06 56 53 50 06 47 462 SUNRISE AND SUNSET TABLES SUNRISE AND SUNSET TABLES ✩ Sun remains continuously above the horizon 45 40 35 30 N 20 N 10 0 S 10 20 S 30 35 40 45 50 S 52 54 56 58 S 60 21 07 09 06 59 51 06 36 23 06 10 05 57 44 05 28 19 05 08 04 56 40 04 33 25 16 04 06 03 54 17 07 06 06 57 49 06 35 22 06 10 05 58 45 05 31 22 12 05 00 04 46 04 39 31 23 14 04 03 13 07 03 06 55 47 06 33 22 06 11 05 59 47 05 33 25 16 05 05 04 51 04 45 38 30 21 04 11 09 07 00 06 52 45 06 32 21 11 06 00 05 49 05 36 28 19 05 09 04 56 04 50 44 37 29 04 19 ✩ Sun remains continuously above the horizon LAT ° N 72 70 68 66 64 62 N 60 58 56 54 52 N 50 45 40 35 30 N 20 N 10 0 S 10 20 S 30 35 40 45 50 S 52 1 h m 13 55 14 39 15 08 29 15 46 16 00 16 12 23 32 40 47 16 53 17 07 18 28 37 17 52 18 05 17 30 43 18 59 19 08 18 31 46 19 53 4 h m 14 20 14 56 15 21 41 15 56 16 09 16 20 30 38 46 52 16 58 17 11 22 31 39 17 53 18 06 17 29 42 18 57 19 05 15 27 41 19 48 7 h m 14 42 15 12 35 15 52 16 18 16 28 37 45 52 16 58 17 03 16 25 34 42 17 55 18 07 18 29 41 18 55 19 03 12 23 36 19 42 10 h m 15 02 28 15 48 16 03 16 27 16 36 44 51 16 58 17 03 17 09 20 29 37 44 17 57 18 07 18 28 39 18 52 19 00 09 19 31 19 37 ★ Sun remains continuously below the horizon SUNRISE 07 05 07 06 56 06 49 42 06 31 06 21 11 06 01 06 05 50 05 05 38 05 31 23 13 05 02 04 56 05 50 04 44 36 04 28 04 01 53 46 40 29 20 11 02 52 41 34 26 18 07 02 57 50 43 36 06 56 49 43 37 06 27 19 11 06 02 05 53 05 43 37 30 22 12 05 08 05 03 04 57 51 04 44 06 06 05 05 05 05 04 04 51 45 39 34 25 18 10 03 55 45 40 34 26 17 13 09 04 58 52 06 06 05 05 05 05 46 40 35 31 23 16 10 03 56 47 43 37 30 23 19 15 10 05 00 06 06 05 05 05 05 41 36 32 28 21 15 09 03 57 50 45 40 35 28 25 21 17 13 08 ★ Sun remains continuously below the horizon SUNSET February 13 16 h m h m 15 20 15 38 15 43 15 58 16 00 16 13 14 25 26 35 36 44 16 44 16 52 51 16 59 16 58 17 04 17 04 10 09 15 17 14 17 19 24 28 33 36 40 43 47 49 17 58 17 59 18 08 18 09 18 18 27 27 38 36 18 50 18 47 18 57 18 54 19 05 19 01 14 10 26 20 19 31 19 25 19 h m 15 55 16 12 25 36 45 16 53 17 00 06 11 16 20 17 24 32 40 46 17 51 18 01 09 17 25 34 18 44 50 18 57 19 05 15 19 19 22 h m 16 11 25 37 47 16 55 17 02 17 08 13 18 22 26 17 29 37 43 49 17 54 18 02 10 17 24 32 18 42 47 18 53 19 00 09 19 13 25 h m 16 26 39 49 16 57 17 04 10 17 15 20 24 28 31 17 34 41 47 51 17 56 18 03 10 17 23 30 18 38 43 49 18 55 19 03 19 06 28 h m 16 41 16 52 17 00 07 13 18 17 23 27 30 34 37 17 39 45 50 54 17 58 18 05 10 16 22 28 18 35 39 44 50 18 57 19 00 SUNRISE AND SUNSET TABLES SUNRISE AND SUNSET TABLES ✩ Sun remains continuously above the horizon 54 56 58 S 60 20 01 09 19 20 31 19 55 20 03 13 20 23 49 19 57 20 06 20 15 43 50 19 58 20 07 ✩ Sun remains continuously above the horizon LAT ° N 72 70 68 66 64 62 N 60 58 56 54 52 N 50 45 40 35 30 N 20 N 10 0 S 10 20 S 30 35 40 45 50 S 52 54 56 58 S 60 3 h m 07 30 21 14 08 07 03 06 59 06 55 52 48 46 43 06 41 36 32 28 25 06 19 14 09 06 04 05 58 05 52 48 44 39 33 05 30 27 24 20 05 16 6 h m 07 14 08 07 02 06 57 53 49 06 46 43 41 39 36 06 35 30 27 24 21 06 17 12 08 06 04 05 59 05 54 51 47 43 38 05 36 33 30 27 05 23 9 h m 06 59 54 49 46 42 40 06 37 35 33 31 30 06 28 25 22 20 18 06 14 11 07 04 06 00 05 56 53 50 47 43 05 41 39 36 34 05 31 12 h m 06 44 40 37 34 32 30 06 28 27 25 24 23 06 22 20 18 16 14 06 12 09 07 04 06 01 05 58 56 54 51 48 05 46 45 43 41 05 38 ✩ Sun remains continuously above the horizon LAT ° N 72 70 68 66 64 3 h m 16 56 17 05 12 18 23 6 h m 17 11 18 23 28 32 9 h m 17 25 30 34 38 41 12 h m 17 39 42 45 48 50 463 ★ Sun remains continuously below the horizon SUNSET 37 43 51 19 59 19 30 37 43 51 24 29 35 19 42 17 22 27 19 34 10 15 19 19 25 03 07 11 19 16 ★ Sun remains continuously below the horizon SUNRISE March 15 18 h m h m 06 28 06 13 26 12 24 12 23 11 21 11 20 11 06 19 06 10 18 10 17 10 17 09 16 09 06 15 06 09 14 09 13 08 12 08 11 07 06 09 06 07 08 06 06 05 04 04 02 03 06 00 06 02 05 58 01 57 06 00 55 05 59 57 53 05 51 05 57 50 56 55 49 47 54 05 46 05 53 21 h m 05 57 58 05 59 06 00 00 01 06 01 01 02 02 02 06 02 03 03 03 04 06 04 04 04 04 04 06 04 03 03 03 02 06 02 02 01 01 06 01 24 h m 05 42 44 46 48 50 51 05 52 53 54 55 55 05 56 57 58 05 59 06 00 06 01 02 03 04 05 06 05 06 06 06 07 06 07 07 08 08 06 08 27 h m 05 26 30 34 37 39 41 05 43 44 46 47 48 05 49 52 53 55 57 05 59 06 01 02 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 12 06 12 13 14 14 06 15 30 h m 05 11 16 21 25 28 31 05 34 36 38 40 41 05 43 46 49 51 53 05 56 05 59 06 01 04 06 06 09 11 12 14 16 06 17 19 20 21 06 23 ★ Sun remains continuously below the horizon SUNSET March 15 18 h m h m 17 53 18 07 55 07 56 07 58 08 17 59 08 21 h m 18 20 19 18 17 17 24 h m 18 34 31 29 27 25 27 h m 18 48 44 40 37 34 30 h m 19 02 18 56 51 47 43 464 SUNRISE AND SUNSET TABLES SUNRISE AND SUNSET TABLES ✩ Sun remains continuously above the horizon 62 N 60 58 56 54 52 N 50 45 40 35 30 N 20 N 10 0 S 10 20 S 30 35 40 45 50 S 52 54 56 58 S 60 27 17 31 34 37 40 42 17 44 49 53 17 57 18 00 18 06 11 15 20 26 18 32 36 40 45 50 18 53 56 18 59 19 03 19 07 35 17 38 41 43 45 47 17 49 53 56 17 59 18 02 18 07 11 15 19 23 18 29 32 35 39 44 18 46 49 52 55 18 58 43 17 46 48 50 51 53 17 54 17 57 18 00 02 04 18 08 11 14 17 21 18 25 28 30 34 38 18 40 42 44 46 18 49 52 17 53 55 56 57 58 17 59 18 01 03 04 06 18 09 11 13 16 18 18 22 23 26 28 31 18 33 34 36 38 18 40 ✩ Sun remains continuously above the horizon LAT ° N 72 70 68 66 64 62 N 60 58 56 54 52 N 50 45 40 35 30 N 20 N 10 0 S 10 2 h m 04 55 05 02 08 14 18 22 05 25 28 30 32 34 05 36 40 44 47 49 05 53 05 57 06 01 04 5 h m 04 39 48 04 56 05 02 07 12 05 16 19 22 25 28 05 30 35 39 43 46 05 51 05 55 06 00 04 8 h m 04 23 34 43 50 04 57 05 02 05 07 11 14 18 21 05 24 29 34 38 42 05 48 54 05 59 06 04 11 h m 04 06 19 30 39 46 52 04 58 05 02 07 11 14 05 17 24 30 34 39 05 46 52 05 58 06 04 ★ Sun remains continuously below the horizon SUNSET 18 00 18 01 18 01 02 03 03 18 04 18 05 06 07 08 18 10 18 11 12 14 16 18 18 18 19 21 23 25 18 26 18 27 28 29 18 31 18 08 08 08 08 08 09 09 09 09 09 10 10 11 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 19 20 21 22 16 18 15 15 14 14 14 18 14 13 12 12 12 18 11 11 11 11 11 18 11 11 11 11 12 18 12 12 12 13 18 13 24 18 23 21 21 20 19 18 18 17 15 14 13 18 12 11 10 09 08 18 07 07 06 06 05 18 05 05 04 04 18 04 32 18 30 28 27 25 24 18 23 20 18 17 15 18 13 11 09 07 05 18 04 03 02 18 00 17 59 17 58 57 57 56 17 55 40 18 37 35 33 31 29 18 28 24 21 19 17 18 14 11 08 05 03 18 00 17 58 57 55 52 17 51 50 49 47 17 46 ★ Sun remains continuously below the horizon SUNRISE April 14 17 h m h m 03 49 03 32 04 05 03 50 17 04 04 27 15 35 25 43 33 04 49 04 40 54 46 04 59 51 05 03 04 56 07 05 01 05 11 05 05 19 13 25 21 30 27 35 32 05 43 05 41 51 49 05 57 05 56 06 04 06 04 20 h m 03 14 35 03 51 04 04 14 23 04 31 38 44 49 04 54 04 59 05 08 16 23 29 05 39 47 05 56 06 04 23 h m 02 55 03 19 37 03 52 04 04 14 04 22 30 37 43 48 04 53 05 03 12 19 26 05 36 46 05 55 06 04 26 h m 02 35 03 03 24 40 03 53 04 05 04 14 22 29 36 42 04 47 04 58 05 08 16 23 05 34 45 05 55 06 04 29 h m 02 14 02 47 03 10 28 43 03 55 04 05 15 22 29 36 04 41 04 54 05 04 12 20 05 32 44 05 54 06 04 SUNRISE AND SUNSET TABLES SUNRISE AND SUNSET TABLES ✩ Sun remains continuously above the horizon 20 S 30 35 40 45 50 S 52 54 56 58 S 60 07 06 11 13 15 18 21 06 22 24 26 28 06 30 08 06 12 15 18 22 26 06 28 30 32 34 06 37 09 06 14 18 21 25 30 06 33 35 38 41 06 44 09 06 16 20 24 29 35 06 38 41 44 47 06 51 ✩ Sun remains continuously above the horizon LAT ° N 72 70 68 66 64 62 N 60 58 56 54 52 N 50 45 40 35 30 N 20 N 10 0 S 10 20 S 30 35 40 45 50 S 52 54 56 58 S 60 2 h m 19 16 08 19 02 18 56 52 48 18 44 41 39 36 34 18 32 28 24 22 19 18 14 10 07 04 18 00 17 56 54 52 49 46 17 44 43 41 39 17 37 5 h m 19 30 21 13 06 19 01 18 56 18 52 48 45 42 39 18 37 32 28 24 21 18 15 10 06 18 02 17 58 17 53 50 47 43 39 17 37 35 33 30 17 28 8 h m 19 45 33 24 16 10 19 04 18 59 55 51 47 44 18 42 36 31 26 22 18 16 10 05 18 00 17 55 17 49 46 42 38 33 17 31 28 25 22 17 19 11 h m 20 00 19 46 35 26 19 12 19 06 19 01 18 57 53 50 18 46 39 34 29 24 18 17 10 18 04 17 59 53 17 46 42 38 33 27 17 24 21 18 14 17 10 465 ★ Sun remains continuously below the horizon SUNRISE 10 06 18 06 22 27 33 40 06 43 06 46 50 06 54 07 06 58 07 11 20 25 30 37 44 48 51 56 00 06 12 06 22 27 33 40 49 06 53 06 57 07 02 07 07 13 13 06 23 29 36 44 53 06 58 07 02 08 14 07 20 14 06 25 32 39 48 06 58 07 03 08 14 20 07 27 15 06 27 34 42 06 51 07 02 07 08 13 20 26 07 34 ★ Sun remains continuously below the horizon SUNSET April 14 17 h m h m 20 16 20 32 20 00 20 13 19 47 19 59 37 47 28 37 20 29 19 14 19 21 08 15 19 03 09 18 59 04 55 19 00 18 51 18 56 43 47 37 40 31 33 26 28 18 18 18 19 10 11 18 04 18 03 17 57 17 56 50 48 17 43 17 39 38 34 33 29 27 22 20 14 17 17 17 11 14 07 10 17 03 06 16 58 17 01 16 53 20 h m 20 48 27 20 11 19 57 46 37 19 29 22 16 10 05 19 00 18 51 43 36 30 18 20 11 18 02 17 54 46 17 36 31 24 17 09 17 05 17 00 16 56 50 16 44 23 h m 21 06 20 42 23 20 08 19 55 45 19 36 28 22 16 10 19 05 18 55 46 38 32 18 21 11 18 02 17 53 44 17 33 27 20 12 17 03 16 58 54 48 43 16 36 26 h m 21 26 20 57 35 18 20 05 19 53 19 44 35 28 21 15 19 10 18 58 49 41 34 18 22 11 18 01 17 52 42 17 30 23 16 17 07 16 57 16 52 47 41 35 16 28 29 h m 21 47 21 12 20 48 29 14 20 02 19 51 42 34 27 20 19 15 19 02 18 52 43 36 18 23 11 18 01 17 51 40 17 27 20 12 17 03 16 52 16 47 41 35 28 16 19 466 SUNRISE AND SUNSET TABLES SUNRISE AND SUNSET TABLES ✩ Sun remains continuously above the horizon LAT ° N 72 70 68 66 64 62 N 60 58 56 54 52 N 50 45 40 35 30 N 20 N 10 0 S 10 20 S 30 35 40 45 50 S 52 54 56 58 S 60 2 h m 01 50 02 29 02 56 03 17 33 46 03 57 04 07 16 23 30 04 36 04 49 05 00 09 17 05 31 43 05 54 06 04 16 06 29 37 45 06 55 07 07 07 12 19 25 33 07 41 5 h m 01 22 02 11 02 42 03 05 23 37 03 49 04 00 09 17 24 04 31 45 04 56 05 06 14 05 29 42 05 53 06 05 17 06 31 39 48 06 59 07 11 07 17 24 31 39 07 49 8 h m 00 41 01 51 02 28 02 53 03 12 28 03 41 03 53 04 02 11 19 04 26 41 04 53 05 03 12 05 27 41 05 53 06 05 18 06 33 41 06 51 07 02 16 07 22 29 37 46 07 56 ★ Sun remains continuously below the horizon 11 h m 01 02 02 03 03 03 04 04 04 05 05 05 06 06 06 07 07 07 08 ✩ 29 12 41 02 20 34 46 56 06 14 21 37 49 00 10 26 40 53 06 19 35 44 54 06 20 27 34 42 52 03 ✩ Sun remains continuously above the horizon LAT ° N 72 70 68 66 64 62 N 60 58 56 54 52 N 50 2 h m 22 11 21 29 21 01 20 40 24 20 10 19 59 48 40 32 25 19 19 5 h m 22 41 21 47 21 15 20 52 33 18 20 06 19 55 46 38 30 19 24 8 h m 23 35 22 07 21 30 21 03 20 43 27 20 13 20 02 19 52 43 35 19 28 20 20 19 19 20 h m 01 02 02 03 03 04 04 04 05 05 05 06 06 06 07 07 07 08 08 ✩ ✩ 21 05 34 55 13 27 40 50 00 09 27 41 53 04 22 38 53 07 23 40 50 02 16 32 40 49 58 10 22 23 h m 01 01 02 02 03 03 04 04 05 05 05 06 06 06 07 07 07 08 08 ✩ ✩ 00 53 25 48 06 22 35 46 56 05 24 39 52 03 22 38 53 08 24 42 53 05 19 36 44 53 03 15 29 26 h m 00 01 02 02 03 03 04 04 05 05 05 06 06 06 07 07 07 08 08 ✩ ✩ 29 41 16 41 01 17 30 42 52 02 21 37 50 01 21 38 53 09 25 44 55 07 22 40 48 58 08 20 34 29 h m 01 02 02 03 03 04 04 05 05 05 06 06 06 07 07 08 08 ✩ ✩ ✩ 28 07 34 55 12 26 39 49 59 19 35 49 00 20 38 54 10 26 46 57 09 25 43 52 02 12 25 40 ★ Sun remains continuously below the horizon 11 h m 22 21 21 20 SUNRISE May 14 17 h m h m ✩ ✩ 01 02 00 12 01 57 01 40 02 29 02 17 02 53 02 43 03 11 03 03 03 26 03 19 39 33 03 50 45 04 00 03 55 09 04 04 04 17 04 12 33 30 46 44 04 58 04 56 05 08 05 06 05 25 05 23 39 39 05 53 05 53 06 06 06 07 20 21 06 37 06 38 46 48 06 57 06 59 07 09 07 12 24 28 07 31 07 36 39 44 48 07 53 07 58 08 04 08 09 08 16 ✩ 31 45 15 53 35 21 08 58 48 40 33 SUNSET May 14 17 h m h m ✩ ✩ 23 01 ✩ 22 01 22 18 21 27 21 39 21 02 21 12 20 43 20 51 20 28 20 35 15 21 20 03 20 09 19 53 19 58 45 49 19 37 19 41 20 h m 22 21 21 20 20 20 19 19 ✩ ✩ 37 51 22 59 42 27 14 03 54 45 23 h m 23 22 21 21 20 20 19 19 ✩ ✩ 01 04 31 07 48 33 20 08 58 49 26 h m 23 22 21 21 20 20 19 ✩ ✩ 43 17 40 15 55 38 24 13 02 53 29 h m 22 21 21 20 20 19 ✩ ✩ ✩ 30 49 22 01 43 29 17 06 56 SUNRISE AND SUNSET TABLES SUNRISE AND SUNSET TABLES ✩ Sun remains continuously above the horizon 45 40 35 30 N 20 N 10 0 S 10 20 S 30 35 40 45 50 S 52 54 56 58 S 60 19 06 18 55 46 37 18 24 12 18 00 17 50 38 17 25 17 17 09 16 58 47 16 41 35 28 20 16 12 19 09 18 58 48 39 18 25 12 18 00 17 49 36 17 22 14 17 05 16 54 42 16 35 29 22 13 16 04 13 19 01 18 50 41 18 26 13 18 00 17 48 35 17 20 11 17 02 16 50 37 16 30 23 15 16 07 15 56 17